70 U RN AL

Saw ASTA TIC SOCTEHE PY.

No. 79.—July, 1838.

I1.—Fxcursions to the Hastward. No. 1.

Extracts from the Journal af a Political Mission to the Rdja of Ligor

in Siam. By Capt. James Low, M. N. I. and M. A. T. C.

When the Burmese war broke out in 1824 I had the honor of being

deputed by the honorable Mr. Puixuips, then at the head of the go-

vernment of Prince of Wales’ Island as envoy to the raja of Ligor with

the view of obtaining some co-operation of the Siamese with the Ran-

goon expedition, and especially by means of a fleet of boats. It is un-

necessary here to enter into political details ; but it may be briefly

remarked that the Mission returned after a tedious negociation of three

months without being able to effect all the objects contemplated. This

was owing to the suspicious temper of the Siamese court, which could

not for a long while credit that the British arms would finally prevail.

At a subsequent period when aware of the mistake, this haughty and

ambitious, yet politic court discovered that the dilatoriness of its coun-

cils had shut it out from any share in the conquered territories.

The schooner Commerce of 60 tons burden, Capt. CHevers, an

American commander, was taken up for the conveyance of the Mis-

sion. A native officer with a party of sepoys formed the escort, and

camp equipage was provided in case it might be wanted for a march

overland.

We sailed on the 7th May, 1824, and proceeded up the Keddah

coast. On the right, Gunong Jerret the Keddah peak forms a very

prominent feature of the coast. Its height is about 4000 feet*. It is

* By the Trigonometrical Survey made by Mr. Woors of the navy its height

is 3894 feet.

584 Excursions to the Eastward. (Jury,

very steep where it faces the sea ; and here the streams of water which

flow over the smooth dark granite rock, when struck by the sun’s rays,

appear like fleecy clouds wreathing the mountain.

The formation of this mountain is primary. The secondary and

tertiary formations are not easily discoverable until we reach the

small islands called the Buntings, which lie nearly opposite to it.

At its base strata of laterite, and other conglomerates and accumula-

tions of debris prevail. In the deep narrow valleys lying betwixt the

shoulders of the mountain I observed tin ore of an excellent quality

in the form of grains. The Chinese were making what they called a

mine, which was merely a square excavation about thirty feet wide and

from two to three feet deep. The ore was loosely deposited below

quartz and schistose gravel.

Suspended from the ceiling of the smelting house were wooden mo-

dels of all sorts of native arms and implements intended to charm

away evil spirits. ‘

Jerret and Cherret, by both of which appellatives this mountain is

known to the Malays, are corruptions of the term Sraz which was the

ancient name of the Keddah country when entirely peopled by the

Siamese race, about A. D. 1340. A commercial colony from the

westward under a chief named Marrone Manawanasa which set-

tled near the base of the mountain Srai was the cause of the country

becoming a place of greater resort than before that event for traders

from India. The above named chief changed the name of the country

to Keddah, but the Siamese continue to call it Srat or Chrat. I shall

have occasion in a subsequent paper to state some further particulars

respecting the condition of this country in former times.

8th. Anchored off the mouth of the Keddah river. The anchor-

age is good in the north-east monsoon ; but in the south-west monsoon

it is a disagreeable if not an unsafe one, the shore being a lee one and

the swell heavy.

The Yokkabat, one of the Siamese government officers, came off to

say that the governor would give me an audience next day. _I accord-

ingly waited on him at his sala or thamoneeup or hall of audience.

Pura Paak Der Baregrap is a young man of about twenty years of

age. He is an illegitimate son of the raja of Ligor ; he entered the

hall immediately on my arrival. He was preceded by two men carry-

ing dap deng or swords of state. These are about five feet long and

have red velvet scabbards. On the right and left were soldiers bear-

ing dap he which are also swords of state having golden hilts. Princes

in Siam have generally twenty sword-bearers on each side of them

1838. ] Excursions to the Eastward. 585

when sitting in durbar. I bowed in the English fashion to the young

chief and then sat down om a chair which had been placed for me six

paces in front of the raised platform, on which he had seated himself

with his legs crossed and supported by cushions. Behind me the native

officer and havildar with their swords on, stood along with several other

attendants. The Siamese interpreter to the Mission placed himself on

the carpet at my feet. Close on the left squatted both the minister of

the chief and also his interpreter. The object of this interview was to

explain to the Siamese the nature and objects of the Burmese war, and

to obtain permission to cross the Peninsula to Ligov. The chief posi-

tively refused to comply with the latter request until he had the sanc-

tion of his father. °

The Mission therefore would proceed, I told him, up the coast in

order to open a more speedy communication with the Ligoreans. The

young governor smoked segars during the whole audience. The minister

alluded to is a very fat man, and the uneasy, unnatural posture which

etiquette compelled him to keep, gave him the appearance of a huge

baboon, the resemblance being heightened by the manner in which, ac-

cording to the Siamese fashion, his hair was brushed up in front.

The interpreter passed and repassed betwixt the chief and myself on

his knees and elbows, a tedious and disgusting operation, but. charac-

teristic of the procrastinating nature of Siamese diplomacy.

The governor was naked from the waist upwards. His hair was

short and his head uncovered.

The lower half of his person was clothed in a dress of silk and gold.

This is the common dress in lower Siam, and the raja of Ligor and

his sons affect simplicity, partly it may be supposed through policy,

and the fear of exciting the cupidity of the minions about the court of

Bankok.

Many however of the inferior officers wear silk vests or tunics em-

broidered with gold or silver, and also long crape scarfs which they

either use like cloaks, or wind round them as sashes. ‘The favorite

color for these last is black.

The town of Keddah stands on the south bank of the river, and

consists of a single street of mean artap houses*. It is protected by a

brick defence, comprising an area of about eighty yards by fifty. With-

in are the houses of the governor and his officers and soldiers. The

wall of this work varies in height from eight to ten feet. Several large

iron guns are mounted on the wall facing the river. There is no

* This term is given to the eastward to houses constructed of light materials

and thatched with artap or nipah leaves.

4pg2

586 Ezcursions to the Eastward. [ Jury,

ditch on this side and the space betwixt the foot of the wall and the

river's bank is a gentle slope of a dozen yards. This fort, as the na-

tives term it, could not withstand for a quarter ‘of an hour an attack by

a regular force. |

Piles had been driven into the river below the town leaving only a

narrow passage. In descending, the tide carried our boat against these,

and it narrowly escaped being wedged in betwixt two of them.

llth. Set sail in the direction of Szttool, a small town on the

bank of a river of the same name. Finding that it would delay us did

we ascend this river we returned to the vessel. The bason into which

it empties itself and which is formed by islands is very shallow. Pro-

ceeding along the coast the general aspect is monotonous. Here and

there an open spot covered with long grass and interspersed with fine

trees seems to give an earnest of cultivation. But a nearer approach

dissolves the spell. In fact the cultivation on the Keddah coast, with

a very few exceptions, does not begin until a distance of a mile or two

from the sea, |

I have in a former paper* described the Laneavy Islands and others

adjacent to them, and shall therefore here omit that part of the journal

which relates to them.

16th. Having encountered nothing but contrary winds we ran in for

Trang harbour, but were forced to come to an anchor before reaching

it, after having with great difficulty and hazard weathered two high

limestone rocks which lie off the south end of Pulo Tikbong. There

being no endurable cabin, the tents were got up and spread out so as to

shelter us from the torrents of rain which fell during the night.

17th. Finding that no progress could be made, the boat was got out

and I proceeded to the island to examine it. There was a very heavy

swell and a double surf at the shore of the small bay on the south side

of the island where we landed, and we narrowly escaped being swamped.

The island is uninhabited, and had been deserted since the Burmese

descent on Junkceylon in 1808; several droves of wild buffaloes were

seen on a plain in the middle of the island. At these a few shots were

fired without much effect. On returning to the Bay no boat could be

found. At length the Arab who had been left in charge of it was dis-

covered seated in moody silence below a tree. He significantly point-

ed to tlie surf, adding “ she lies there.” As this was our only boat, and

the Commerce was hull down, our case appeared somewhat desperate.

Fortunately the rope attached to the anchor on shore held fast, and by

help of this and the exertions of all hands after two hours hard work

* As, Res. Trans. Phys. class, part I. paper VI,

1838.] Excursions to the Eastward. 587

the boat was got on shore. It was full of sand and two of the planks

were stove in. The jackets of the men were employed to close these

apertures, and then by dint of constant baling our party reached the

vessel in safety.

19th. Anchored in Zrang harbour within bowshot of a small

creck. The channel is narrow, and it deepens towards the anchorage

at this creek which runs up into the east side of the island. This

spot is about three miles distant from the guard house at the mouth

of the Trang river, and about twelve from Khoan Tani the chief village

of the district which also lies on the banks of the river.

Pulo Tilibong was formerly inhabited, but the wars of Salang which

exposed it to Burman ravage scared the people away. On the sandy

beach on the eastern side we found the remains of a stockade which had

been constructed with shinbeans or roughly planed planks, about two or

three inches in thickness, of the wood called by the Siamese mat kheum,

and khayu geam by the Malays. These planks were about ten feet

above the ground in height. This is a very hard and durable wood, and

ofa dark color. Although it had been exposed to the weather in this

stockade for upwards of twelve years, it seemed to have only increased

in hardness by age. ,

In a cave in a high rock which guards the northern entrance to the

harbour, I discovered twelve human sculls placed in a row ; they proba-

bly belonged to some of those men who had fallen in the wars just

alluded to. This cave contains many fine stalactitical masses.

There is a channel betwixt the island of Ti/ibong, and the main shore

which is generally used by the Chinese junks which go up from Penang.

There is no safe channel for vessels from Tilibong harbour to the

river's mouth, The harbour ends in a deep excavation of 9 feet, being

merely the channel which is formed by that portion of the waters of the

river which flow in this direction.

Trang is a thinly peopled district. About three thousand persons of

both sexes may be taken as the utmost extent of the population.

The river and its adjacent shores are chiefly valuable to the Siamese

on account of the facilities which both afford for boat building, and of

some tin mines at the skirts of the hills. | Trang river bears properly

only one embouchure although the maps represent it otherwise. Junks

go up it for ten or twelve miles (by the course of the river). About

six hours’ rowing up it divides into two branches.

Khoan Tani is the chief village. Poultry and some other refresh-

ments can be obtained. The finest kinds of fish swam at the mouth of

the river and in the harbour.

588 Exrcursions to the Eastward. [ Jury,

The Chinese of Penang export from rang tin, a little ivory (which

is contraband,) bird’s nest, hogs, poultry, and rice. A Chuliah or jaur

Pakan* manages the raja’s mercantile transactions. The river is quite

undefended. From Khoan Tani Ligor can be reached in seven stages}.

Tigers abound on the route. Expresses are generally conveyed by

parties of seven men, who make the best of their way without always

keeping together, the strongest carrying the express last and leaving

the weaker behind.

2ist. About midday the Than Palat or superintendent of the dis-

trict with his two colleagues came on board. They appeared under

considerable alarm.

Letters were despatched by their assistance to their master at Ligor,

for it was found that these men had less authority vested in them than

the Governor of.Keddah possessed. The apprehensions of an attack by

the Burmese had not yet subsided here, and the news of the British

having gone to war with that people gave evident satisfaction to these

officers. The Zhan Palat observed, that although the Siamese and

the Burmese had a common origin, and have now one religion in com-

mon, yet their minds never in any manner allied. The English, they

observed, could easily accommodate themselves to Chinese and Siamese

customs, because they eat the same kind of food. These men were

well dressed in white silk crape vests, with short sleeves. The under

dress was composed of checquered silk. They partook freely of wine

and biscuit, and became soon so loquacious that some state secrets escap-

ed them, or which they doubtless considered such, although in reality

as regarded us amounting to nothing.

We left Trang on the 26th, and after encountering rainy and boiste-

rous weather, rendered more annoying from the want of any decent

accommodation on board, we reached Junkceylon on the 29th.

The harbour of this island is too well known to require a description

here. There is neither village or hut on the beach, and at first sight

a stranger might suppose that the island had been deserted. After

searching about for some time in the boat for the Zarda stream or

creek, we observed a boat with natives in it close to the beach. On see-

ing us they took to flight although armed with muskets and other wea-

* The descendant of a Chuliah or Coromandel man and a Malay woman.

+ 1 Tha cheen.

2 Don thamma praang. |

3 Kroong mo-an. > No population.

4 Kassang.

5 Chong khau.

6 Chong, ;

7 aun } Small villages.

. 1838. ] Excursions to the Eustward., 589

pons. They were overtaken, and proved to be a party of Siamese. A

shaven priest of Buppua kept the helm. Recovering from their alarm

they shewed us the creek we were looking for. The opening into it

through the mangrove trees is very narrow, and might be mistaken for

a mere inequality in the general line of jangal. Although we had left

the ship at sunrise, we did not reach The Riia town until about sun-

set. This was owing to the narrowness of the stream which prevented

oars being of any use. The heavy ship’s boat was towed up by fixing

a rope to trees ahead and hauling on it, and by the boatmen drageing

it against the current ; they being at the same time up to the neck in

water.

Loany Bam Prone the Siamese officer in charge of the island re-

ceived-me with much politeness and hospitality in his own house*. His

wife, a stout good-humoured dame, of about thirty, immediately set to

work, in the kitchen to prepare me a supper or rather dinner. The

kitchen was on the same fioor with the apartment allotted to me, and I

could perceive the whole process of cookery, which was certainly by

no means of that description which could injure the appetite of any

traveller of moderate expectations. ‘The dinner, consisting of poultry,

eggs and vegetables, was served up in clean China plates and cups,

with spoons of china-ware; custards, confections and fruits formed

the second course. My host declined partaking of the viands. This

was done out of respect, not prejudice; for after I had dined, the

dishes were removed to the next room, where he and his lady, who

had cooked an additional dinner, dined. By this time the lower

part of the house was full of people. But they behaved with much

decorum. They all smoked cigars. The conversation was kept up

betwixt the chief and me, accompanied by the flare of dammer torches

until past midnight, and during it I could perceive that fealty to the

emperor was a thing which lay very lightly on the heart of my com-

panion. On our arrival the women were but scantily clothed, their

busts being for the most part exposed. Next day, however, they

all appeared, with the addition of the phré, which is a long piece of

cloth, plain or variegated ; one end of it is put partly wound about the

waist, and the remainder is brought over the left shoulder and then car-

ried across the breast: they wore their hair short. The women bring

water from the river in bamboos of ten or twelve feet long closed at

oneend. ‘They carry them slightly inclined on their shoulders and

place them upright against the walls of the houses. This plan is very

* Built in the usual light style of the country and only distinguishable from

the cottages around it by being larger.

590 Excursions to the Eastward. (Jury,

inconvenient, since the bamboo which is heavy must be lowered when

water is required by any of the household. Joints of the bamboo are

in general use for carrying water on a journey, and rice can be suffici-

ently boiled for food in a green one, without the latter splitting. We

returned to the ship on the 31st, after presenting some trifling presents

to the chief and his lady, amongst which was some wine and brandy for

eye-water, as she was pleased to term it.

Salang is the Siamese name for this island. It seems to have been

originally peopled by the Thai or Siamese race, who have not paid that

attention to it which policy should have dictated, seeing that it possesses

valuable tin mines and forms one of the keys to their coast. Its im-

portance as regards British influence has been much exaggerated, and

since the fall of Tenasserim and its occupation by British troops the

island has become of hardly any political importance to us. It could

easily be taken at any time if rendered necessary by war.

Salang or Junkceylon.

The most correct account perhaps extant of this island is that con-

tained in “ Forrest's Voyage to the Mergui Archipelago.” But since

his time (about 1784) many changes have taken place, not by any

means contributing to its prosperity.

Salang is 27%* miles long by 10 at most in breadth, lying about E. S.

E.and N. N. W. It is diversified by hill and dale. The hills are of

moderate elevation, slope gradually, and are clothed with wood to their

tops; while the levels are covered with grass and forest, excepting where

cultivation has been carried on. Both the east and west coasts may

be closely approached by large vessels, but the west being a lee shore

the chief harbour has been chosen on the east side. A dangerous nar-

row passage only navigable by small prows separates the north point

of the island from the main land, while the most southerly point is bold

and rocky and difficult to clear unless the wind be quite favorable+.

The island abounds in streams, the principal of which is that which

leads to Tharooa the residence of the governor.

The harbour is excellent, and it is covered by two islands in front,

while a hill sufficiently high to give it the command of a great part of

the harbour, juts boldly out from the main island.

* 25 miles according to Horsbureu.

+ When returning from Mergui in the latter part of 1825, the vessel I was

in was forced by the wind and currents so close on this point, that had the last

tack she made not weathered it she must have been wrecked : we were within a

cable’s length of the rocks.

. 1888.) Account of Junkceylon. 591

Junkceylon was long the field on which the Siamese and Burmans

decided their claims to supremancy. This circumstance is alone suffi-

cient to account for the desolate condition it has been reduced to.. But

that the Siamese have yet possession of it up to the period of the war

betwixt the British and Burmese is more than might have been expected

from the relative power of the contending parties, for the Burmans had

long before driven the Siamese out of Mergut and Tavoy*.

The last invasion happened about 1808 headed by a Burman

general.

The troops were collected in Mernsatis Tavoy and Mergui and

amounted about 12,000 men. They were successful at first, but when

they endeavoured to retreat with their booty and prisoners they were

pursued by the Siamese and the Keddah Malays who were auxiliaries ;

numbers were slain, others were shipwrecked, and only about one half

are supposed to have returned to Tenasserim.

The population of Salang is only now about 5,000 souls, which is not

half of that rated by Forrest. Zharooa contained in this time eighty

houses ; there were only 18 in it when visited by me in 1824.

The Siamese are anxious to encourage the settlement of their own

race here. But the genius of their government is better suited to

retard than to facilitate the increase of the species. The Siamese

court is too bigoted to that stumbling-block to nations,—custom, to per-

ceive that artificial means which bear no reference to the first natural

and simple maxims of political science can never be effectually ppaploys

ed to increase the population of a country.

The kings of Stam have been taught to look on their subjects as

property which may be managed as they like, and they have made them

slaves, because they can then best administer to their own luxury, avarice,

and ambition. The minds of the Siamese are therefore depressed; no

rank is perfectly hereditary, no private property however arduously ac-

quired is safe, every man in the empire is liable to be forced from his

family to serve in the army for years without pay, and life itself is of-

ten taken away for actions which even under many despotisms, and

certainly under no reasonably free condition of society, would be

termed faults.

* The Siamese affirm that they conquered the island from the Burmese in

1916 of Buppua, A. D. 1373. The saan was commanded by Prince Cuau

Nai Tua of Ligor in person.

They had to retake it from the Burmese in 1786, when four thousand of the

‘Jatter nation were killed and made prisoners. The Siamese were compelled to

cede Tavoy and Mergui to the Burmese in 1793.

oie 8

592 Excursions to the Eastward. ~ (July,

To fill up the vacant spaces in their population the Siamese were con-

stantly in the habits‘of kidnapping their neighbours the Peguers and

Burmans ; frequently translating the population of whole villages at

once. Then having planted them lke exotics on a new soil they vain-

ly supposed that strength was added to the state.

They did not leave off this practice on the Zenasserim frontier

until long subsequent to the occupation of Tavoy and Mergwi by the

British. ‘They have derived one advantage, yet a dubious one, from

this system. It is the organization of a body of mercenary Peguan

troops. Were not the families of these men strictly retained as hos-

tages they could not for a moment be depended upon.

The population of Salang is almost exclusively Siamese; the ex-

ceptions being Chinese.

The men are stout, and well enough proportioned ; andthe women

although not handsome, have fair complexions.

There area few priests on the island anda pagoda. These priests

or chankoo do not seem to be fed so wellas those of their sect general-

ly are in Stam; for several were observed returning from fishing with

nets, an occupation at variance with the rules of the order.

On the east side of the island at Lém phra ehai% point, there are

rocks which the Siamese affirm have been hewn into the figures of a

dog anda crow. Some pieces of rocks perhaps do bear distant resem-

blances to such figures*. However it was not in my power to go to

the place.

Opposite to this point they also imagine that they can distinguish

beneath the wave on arocka Rd-é icen, or impression of the divine

foot of BuppHA. .

The worship of the dog may be traced to remote antiquity. In

Egypt it was prevalent, and in Bruce's Travels we find that the

Kowas or watch dog of the skies is venerated in Abyssinia, not only

was he raised by the antients to a conspicuous station in the heavens,

but he was placed as the deep mouthed guardian of the infernal

regions. In Hindu and Siamese mythology a portion of heil is given

over to his power, i

This singular species of worship was once openly professed by many

Indo-chinese tribes, but now slight remnants of it alone remain. Thus

amongst the Siamese there are many persons who on undertaking a

journey or upon any unusual occasion invoke the great dog to avert

* But on such vague reports I have frequently been induced to walk many

miles in the hope of finding statues, inscriptions, &c. and have generally been

quite disappointed.

1838.) © Sunkceylon—Salang. 593

all evil from them. The people of Salang had statues of this dog, the

last of which was it is said carried off by some Malays. There is little

doubt that the Malays also were once infected by this superstition, and

it is worthy of notice that although so many centuries have elapsed

since they were converted to Muhammadanism, yet it is curious to observe

the large number of their former superstitious observances which they

still retain and cling to, although denounced by Munammap.

The animals in Junkceylon are buffaloes, hogs, and deer. There are

no wild elephants, but leopards are rather numerous in the wilder parts ;

common poultry was procured, but a large supply must not be expected

here.

The situation of Junkceylon is sufficiently far to the northward of the

line to give it all the advantages which the two regular monsoons afford,

without subjecting it to the greatest violence of either.

Its climate is temperate, and the air is refreshed even in the dry season

by copious showers. From June until November may be deemed the

rainy season. ‘The air is then cooled by the dry northeast monsoon.

From February to June the weather is warmest. The soil of the

island is various—clayey within the mangrove belt on the east side,

sandy along the open beach on the west, and where hilly composed of

the debris of the granite rock and vegetable matter. The extensive

flats and gentle slopes are fitted for most tropical production, and

the lower ranges of hills seem peculiarly adapted to the cultivation of

indigo and coffee. ,

The island might not perhaps furnish grain for a crowded population,

but its products would probably ensure a supply to it, under such a

state from other quarters.

Many of the hills near the east shore seem to have been once culti-

vated to their tops. The harbour and creeks swarm with excellent fish

and the shores with oysters.

Salang yields a very scanty revenue to its present possessors, but

under good regulations it might be rendered more valuable. The reve-

nue may perhaps be thus computed.

Yearly duties arising on sales of tin, ...... Drs. 3000

Customs and profits arising from the services 2000

A gy ce wel ap ni she in iat sus Oi ais 9,2 i

Sps. Drs. 5000

Tin is the product which gives to this island its chief value, for how-

ever neglected the mines may now be from deficiency of miners, we

find in Capt. Forrest’s account that they yielded in his time about 500

4E 2

594 Excursions to the Eastward. [JuLy,

tons of tin yearly. It may however, be surmised that several of the best

mines have been pretty well exhausted.

This quantity agreeably to a calculation made by me when visiting

the smelting-house, and which will be noticed presently, must have afford-

ed to the king and the contractor of Siam a clear annual profit of

76,224 Spanish dollars, prices being then from 60 to 65 dollars per

bahar. It is however supposed that the above quantity did not form

the maximum of productiveness, and that with the long island of Pulo

Panjang, containing, (even now) unwrought tin veins and beds of

ore, Salang could have been made and perhaps might still be made to

yield a much larger supply. The tin of Junkceylon is now carried to

Phoonga where it is either sold to Penang traders or despatched across

the peninsula for the Scam market.

The following remarks will be found equally applicable to the tin

mining and smelting operations of Salang and Phoonga.

The Chinese are the only people employed by the Siamese in the

smelting of the ore at their various tin mines, and the former general-

ly enter into a contract for a period of a year, at a stipulated rate.

The charges for mining, smelting, &c. stand thus for one bahar*.

1. Price paid at the smelting house for ore,......... 19e26

2. Charges for furnace and 6 menat 3dr.per day, 1 50

Prime cost,. . 20 70

8.° The king takes-at first; citcs...s00ccsensanvapende eee ee

4.* IDitte ditto ditto ‘on the Sales. ae ae

26-0

Total cost to the smelter+, Drs...... 46 70

The operation of mining is quite speculative, but on this account it

has greater charms for the natives who require excitation of mind to

disturb their indolent habits.

They dig pits from the depth of 10 to 100 feet. The ore is found

either in a gritty form, or imbedded in a quartzose gangue. They

are contented with the produce which the single shaft yields them, and

rarely venture to mine laterally. This ore is then broken and washed.

Although there are few parts of the island which do not contain ore,

* A bahar contains about 466 lbs. avoirdupois, so that 5 tons are equal

to 24 bahars and 16 lbs.

+ Now, 1837, the average price of tin in the Straits is about 48 dollars per

bahar. Consequently unless the duty should be greatly reduced the mines

must be abandoned.

a es

—: 1838.) Phoonja. 595

yet the mines at the places noted below* are most productive as I was

informed.

The furnace used by the Chinese is about three feet high and one

. foot and a half in diameter at top, and nearly the same below.

Alternate layers of ore and charcoal are put into it, and pump bel-

lows are kept incessantly at work during four days /ess one night; after

ten or twelve hours blowing, the tin begins to run off. The coke is

extracted at intervals and is afterwards again subjected to the action of

the furnace.

The produce during the above period is from 54 to 6 bahars. |

They then take a day’s respite.

It has been stated that the government. charges, on tin, an export

duty of about two dollars per bahar. This, however, is only the case

when return is made in specie. If in goods and provided the quantity

purchased exceeds 20 bahars, the duty is 125 dollars, which is not

increased although the transaction should be carried to a much larger

amount. The contractor, or more properly agent receives one per

cent. on the sales when the king does not direct the governor to make

a specific contract, and the inferior officers of government and the

chief himself must be propitiated by presents.

Eight per cent. is charged on the bartering of goods.

The Siamese possess several small ports northward of Junkceylon,

These are now only visited by petty trading native prows+.

Although Junkceylon is under the Phoonga government yet being

a well known island and one where a considerable trade centered before

the British got settlements to the eastward, I have preferred treating

it separately.

Phoonga.

On the Ist June, 1824, our captain at my request weighed and

stood out of Junkceylon harbour.

Many majestic rocks (laid down confusedly in some maps under the

name Tover), were the marks by which we steered, as no one on board

* Pittong Takre-yn, Sappam, Ban ke rim, Ban dawn, Ban na nai, Ban

Saphan, Ban nayang, Ban sako, Ban thoongyang, Kamra, Kitoong, Chaloong,

Pakkla, Tillong near Papra, and Phoklar. The tin ore smelted at Phoonga is

brought from the following places lying on the coast of Tenasserim above

Papra, Takoa pa, Powung, and Kra. The ores from these places are consi-

dered inferior to the Salang ore.

tT These places beginning from Junkceylon and at Papra are Naikeemo, Phok-

lawe, Bandaun, Bangkhree on asmall river, (the Bangir or Baniger of the

maps,) Nashooee, Takoa Kong, Bandala, Bangklok, Pré Koosoom, Krad, Pook-

hak Takoapa, Rendong.

596 Excursions to the Eastward. [Jury,

had ever been in this bay. These rocks from their shapes are called

by the Siamese the Yot Phoonga, or pyramids of Phoonga.

Just as we approached the rugged chain alluded to, we were much

surprised to observe a handsome brig lying at anchor; this harbour

being if not absolutely unknown to European traders is now but very

rarely visited by any. She turned out to be an American merchant-

man, “the Hope of Boston,” with a. small crew of eight or ten men.

The commander was ashore in his whale boat, and had left his crew

under a mate; when we met him afterwards he told us that his crew

had taken us for a pirate (although we had English colors up), and

had nearly given usa salute, when passing within half pistol-shot,

with all their guns and fire-arms. To this speech our captain made a

suitable reply. He too, although an American himself and one too in

heart, coolly said, that it was most lucky for the Hope of Boston that

she had kept quiet, since she must soon have become a legal prize to

his brig, defended as she was by four six pounders anda party of twenty

sepoys, besides lascars and officers. This American trader had many

muskets for sale on board, but the Siamese did not seem pleased with

their quality. Indeed, they were of a most ordinary description, being

hooped round the barrels and stocks, and not resting at the half cock.

It is not easy to impose any spurious article of trade on the Siamese,

especially fire-arms; but they will exchange their tin for good ones,

although luckily not so much to the advantage of the European or

American trader as to render it an object of much importance to him

to bring out large supplies.

Our brig having been anchored about a mile off Phoonga river, I

decided to go up at once to the town, being aware that should the

Siamese governor take alarm he might excuse himself from allowing

me to visit the town.

I therefore immediately left the ship with an escort of ten sepoys

-and rowed up the river. It was found to flow through a level country

covered with mangroves and other jungle from which we were saluted

by the chatterings of tribes of monkeys. |

The tide being partly against us we did not reach the opening to the

cultivated plain until after six hours’ rowing, Here some Chinese

junks were observed at anchor*, and we were hailed from the custom

house and told to stop. On pretence, however, of not understanding

them we pushed up tothe town. The people were apparently under

considerable alarm, and we were afterwards informed that the gover-

nor’s son, who was acting in his father’s absence, had ordered the alarm

* Trom 50 to 60 tons burden.

1838. ] Phoonga. 597

drum to be beat on learning from the American commander, who had

got up before us, that a boat manned by British sepoys was on its

way to the town. Having reached an open place close to the gover-

nor’s house, and supposing from the confusion observable in the crowd

on shore, that our visit might be construed perhaps as a hostile one,

I directed the boat to be moored, and that no one should presume to

quit her without leave.

I then landed and went, accompanied bya native sepoy officer, and

four privates with side-arms only, to pay my respects to the governor's

son.

He received me with much politeness, but under manifest restraint

and uneasiness in a hall, in the midst of which was a raised platform

railed in. On this platform mats, carpets, and cushions were laid.

I accommodated myself there being no chairs as well as might be to

the cross-legged position in which the chief reclined. This young man

entrusted the first part of the conversation to his father’s colleague, and

‘interpreter, who were seated before him. On looking round I was at a

loss to conjecture the cause of the apprehension shewn by him, for there

were about an hundred armed men in the hall, their weapons chiefly

spears and swords. To calm the young chief I explained to him that

my visit was of a friendly kind, and to obtain some supplies of which

we'were in need; and I told him that next day when fewer persons

would be present we might if he chose have a long interview. Confec-

tions were brought in upon brass trays ; and I then returned to the bank

of the river where a house had been prepared by the chief’s people for

my reception.

_ It was in the ordinary style of the country constructed of bamboos

and leaves, and decorated inside with chintz hangings and couches, mats

and carpets.

I had scarcely occupied this apartment when an ample dinner arrived

from the governor’s kitchen. It was served up on high metal trays with

three and four shelves each, and consisted of pork variously prepared,

roasted and stewed ducks and fowls, fish, hard-boiled eggs, plain and

seasoned rice and vegetables. ‘The desert was composed of plain and

preserved fruits, custards, and confections.

The seasonings to their dishes were pepper and spices, balachong or

caviare-oil, salt, and limes. Every part, almost, of an animal is eaten.

When a buffalo is killed the common Siamese will prepare the skin

for food by scorching it, and then beating, washing and boiling it: after

these operations it is cut into thin slices and dressed. Game of all

kinds, both birds and beasts, abound in the country, and all of the

598 Excursions to the Eastward. [Juy,

former, excepting vultures, hawks, and owls, and all of the latter, except

beasts of prey, are used as food,

The Siamese, like the Chinese, are great gourmands when they can

afford to be so, but while the latter prefer pork to every other sort of

food, the Siamese prefer venison and ducks. Some Law (samchoo of

the Chinese), an ardent spirit, formed part of this entertainment.

Crowds came to gaze at us until it became dark, when the sound of

the bugle helped to scare them away.

The governor's interpreter, a native of Coromandel, remained until

late, no doubt to sift my real intention in entering the place. With

the adroitness of his tribe* he proffered whatever his master’s house

could afford, not sparing the inmates of the seraglio! His people im

the interim were busied in discovering what profit he could make out

of the two stranger vessels.

PHra PHaK DEE PHO THAU the young chief received me at his

house next day.

I informed him that I was proceeding on a Siamese mission from

Penang, and that I was happy of the opportunity chance had given me

of informing him that the British had gone to war with the ancient

enemies of Siam, the Burmans. His countenance instantly brightened,

and with animation he proffered his elephants and attendants to convey

me immediately across the peninsula}.

It was with real regret that the terms of my instructions did not au-

thorize my proceeding to the capital, and had even a latitude in this in-

stance been excusable, I was under obligations to enter into conferences

with the raja of Ligor, which might have prevented my availing myself

of it. But the readiness, with which the route across the peninsula was

opened to me contrasted well with the suspicious temper of the wary

chiefs of the more wily Ligorian.

The day after this visit I went to take leave of my hospitable enter-

tainer previous to embarking. Having before expressed a desire to see

a Siamese theatrical exhibition, I was gratified on being told that the

actors and musicians were ready to commence. We proceeded to a

thatched house called the Rong Lakhanor theatre.

The piece under performance was the Ramakean, a free version of

the Hindu heroic poem Ramdyan. This kind of dramatic exhibition

is termed Len khon.

* Called Chulias to the eastward of the Bay.

+ First, Penang where the Ban Don and Chaiya rivers join three stages on

one elephant ; thence down the Chaiya river in boats three stages to the sea.

From Phoonga to Té Thong a dependency of Ligor on a river famous for the

boats built on it, is a journey of four days.

1838] Ehibition of the drama. 599

Phra Ram (or Sri Rama) and his ape general Houlaman (or Hun-

numan) attended by his army of apes appear in their proper shapes on

the stage. On the right was a throne for the king, and on the left an

elevated space for Thotsakan or the “ ten-headed,” who was the Hindu

Ravan or tyrant of Ceylon. The tyrant appears attended by his

queen and encompassed by his attendants.

As masks are worn in this department of the Siamese drama the actors

do not speak, but merely adapt their gesticulation to what is read by

the prompter, or speaker rather, placed behind screens. The dialogue

is frequently lively, but being in verse has teo often a monotonous effect

on the ear. A band of music was ready to supply breaks in the ac-

tion and to accompany certain battle, and other scenes.

- This band consisted of drums, trumpets, flutes, the metallic sticcado,

musical trough, and kettle drums, cymbals and gongs; when the ac-

tresses, or, as they then happened to be, boys in girl’s clothes, danced,

they kept excellent time to the music, and I was particularly struck

with the greater ease and elegance which the Siamese dancers possess

over those of any people in Hindustan. Here sprightly figures rather

prevailed, while in India it requires a dancing girl-to havea very great

share of beauty to prevent the spectator from becoming speedily relieved

by sleep from her display of studied gesture and cramped action.

The dresses of the dramatis persone seemed appropriate, but perhaps

rather gaudy.

Pura Ram had a green mask, and SooxKreer (Soogriva) his

minister a golden one. The tail of the general Houlaman becomes during

a skirmish the prize of the opposite party, to the infinite diversion of the

audience. The policy of the Siamese government leads it to take ad-

vantage of the good nature of its subjects, and in gratuitously admitting

them to such amusements, makes them willing to forget for awhile in

mirth and song the miseries they endure from the unmitigated tension

of its rule*.

We left the theatre much gratified at the novelty of the whole per-

formance, and on my return home I found that a sumptuous dinner had

been sent by the young chief for myself and party. But perhaps he

had not considered that Mussulmans and Hindus would not dare to

touch the viands he had sent. No doubt they were discussed by his

own people afterwards.

The dinner consisted of the following dishes: a half grown pig roasted

whole, several ducks and fowls stewed, hashed and baked, stews of

various kinds, a large tray of preserved fruits, including dorians, &c. cus-

* Under the bead poetry will be found some further notices on the subject.

600 _ Exeursions to the Eastward. [ Juy,

tards and fresh fruits; neither coffee, tea, milk or butter seem to enter

into the common fare of these people. Butter they never make ; milk is

seldom used in its plain state; and tea is a luxury confined to the chiefs

principally. They dress their food with hogs’ lard.

The chief positively refused to receive any present from me for his

attentions, but I sent some suitable ones to his father on a subsequent

occasion.

: Phoonga river.

The east branch is said to be the largest, but the west branch is that

most frequented. I was prevented from surveying the former by our

accidentally missing our direction in returning, and pursuing the branch

by which we had ascended. The windings and creeks of these rivers

are so intricate that it requires a long acquaintance with them to render

them familiar. The sketches of the valley and the pyramids will shew

better than description can the nature of the country. Phoonga lies

in an oblong plain or valley formed by two ranges of rocky hills which

approach each other very closely at the north end, but less so on the

south. The outlet to the north is therefore very narrow.

The river enters through this opening, and then winding prettily

down the valley at length enters a tangled forest of mangroves and

other trees, angongst which it finds its way to the sea.

The influence of the tide extends higher than to Phoonga, but at

low water a ship’s boat cannot well ascend beyond the place where we

landed close on the town.

Its breadth, or rather the breadth of its bed opposite the town, varies

considerably but may be stated on an average at thirty yards.

Its banks on the sides opposed to the force of the current, especially

on that towards the town, are steep, and in some places ten feet high,

but at and below the custom house they are low and covered at high

tide.

The valley is about three miles in its extreme length, but the breadth

is not more than two miles at the widest part, and the average may

be given at three quarters of a mile.

The soil is chiefly a clay mixed with a reddish earth, and seems fer-

tile. The greatest part of the valley is occupied by cottages with

gardens attached, the rest by rice fields and pasture ground for buffaloes

and a few oxen.

Fruits are very plentiful, especially the dorian. They were in season

when we were there, and every house having a supply, the air was

most strongly perfumed.

The scenery is peculiar and picturesque, and were the banks of the

1838. ] Tin mines of Phoonga. - | 601

river dressed and improved would be highly so. The towering rocks,

somewhat fined down and softened in their rude features by the shrubs

which cling to them even where overhanging their bases, produce an

agreeable contrast to the mildness of the landscape below. In one

place on the east side a chalky cliff obtrudes itself; I attribute the

chalky appearance to the agaric mineral, which seems to be abundant

in these rocks, and which oozing from their crevices produces this sin-

gular effect. The river itself washes the base of the limestone preci-

pices lower down which are seen to great advantage while sailing up.

The dip of the strata of the most northerly of this range was to the

south, but behind the town on the west side is a rock the strata of

which are regular and horizontal.

The climate is rather warm during midday, but the mornings and

nights are remarkably cool. The sea-breeze reaches the town some-

times, when it blows strongly.

The town does not consist of more than 70 houses, as the population

is found principally in detached cottages: about 30 of the above number

belong to Chinese settlers. Their houses are large and convenient,

and are regularly built so as to form a street. The house of the chief

is a little larger than the rest, but has scarcely any exterior decoration

and is formed of wood and other light materials. The hall is of wood,

carved in some places. These are inclosed by a palisade of planks and

stakes.

On the south of the chief’s residence is the Chinese tin smelting-

house where one furnace was employed.

From such information as was collected by me there, it would appear

that the population, independent of Malays, of this place may be estimat-

ed at six or seven thousand souls. There are about six hundred active

Chinese in this number. Two thirds of these are Macao men, who are

considered by the natives both here and at Penang as the most trou-

blesome class of Chinese emigrants. Several hundreds of Malays are

interspersed in the creeks about the mouth of the river. The Siamese

do not permit many of them to stay near the town.

A great portion of this population is employed during the dry season,

which is half the year, at the tin mines. They return during the other

months to cultivate rice.

The chief sends as many Siamese to the mines as he pleases, or can

dispense with, and while there they receive provisions only. The ore

which they dig is sold to the Chinese contractor, and the profit of it

goes to the chief. The ore is brought down either on elephants or in

canoes, which can find their way two or three days up beyond Phoonga.

4¥F2

602 Excursions to the Eastward. [ Jury,

The Chinese miners, however, are not taxed. Indeed the Chinese

always enjoy privileges under the Siamese government, which are

denied to the natural subject. They are exempted from the duty imposed

on every Siamese of serving the state when called on, either in the

capacity of soldiers, artizans, or day labourers, and they are left at more

liberty to enjoy what their industry produces than the native is.

The reason is obvious :—the Chinese, independent of their belonging

to the dominant nation to which the Siamese pay tribute, are a more

intelligent, ingenious and laborious race than the Siamese, to whom also

they have the art to render themselves absolutely necessary, and as

the religious institutions of both people are free from the unsocial re-

strictions of caste, they assimilate easily together. We may likewise

suppose that the Siamese would not like to irritate a class of men who

are so numerous in all their towns, and who have come from a country

the supremacy, as just observed, of which over Indo-Chinese nations

they acknowledge.

Although the chief of Phoonga takes advantage of the power given

him and enriches himself at the expense of his subjects, yet his govern-

‘ment is not so oppressive as that of the raja of Zigor. His people also

are more attached to him, than those of Ligor to the latter, or in other

words do not hate him so violently as the Ligorians hate their prince,

The difference shewed itself in one instance. In the rdja’s country every

article supplied for my table was extorted from his subjects, but at

Phsonga, the chief bought out of the bazar all the provisions. &c, he

sent to me.

The females at Phoonga secluded themselves more than those at

Salang did, which I attributed to their own modesty, for jealousy is

not a'characteristic of the men in Siam. Women in this country are

allowed much freedom ; but it may be questioned whether they would

not willingly part with a large portion of it to get rid of the drudgery it

entails. The obligation which the men lie under to serve the state

during a certain number of months in a year according to circumstances,

throws the labor which they ought to perform on the shoulders of the

women. ‘These are therefore driven to the necessity of subsisting

themselves during the absence of their husbands ; they prepare the rice-

fields, plant vegetables, and attend to the loom, or to keeping of small

bazars.

The governor of Phoonga has two associates. His revenue is

derived from the available labor of his own private trade, and perqui-

sites derivable from transactions of foreign traders at his port. He

has three China junks which trade to Penang ; these carry to that island

1888.) Excursions to the Eastward. . 603

tin, rice, and small articles of native exportation, and return with cloth,

chintzes, glass ware and other manufactures.

He pays no regular sum to the emperor, but at the expiration of

every three or four years he sends, or takes a valuable present to him.

The emperor of course receives all the profits that accrue from the

sale of tin, the governor making his on the ove sold to the smelter.

Phoonga swarms with priests. They have four monasteries, but no

temple deserving of notice. I visited the principal Wat or monastery

early one morning. The superior, a man of eighty years of age by his

own account, received me very politely. He seemed to think it requi-

site to account for the mean appearance of their sacred edifices, by ob-

serving that the materials had been collected for the constructing of

others, but that the constant dread they were in of Burman invasion

prevented them from carrying their intentions into execution. He then

complained of a disease to which he was subject and asked me for some

medicines. His complaint however being the irremediable one of old

age, consolation was the only relief which could be offered.

The Siamese are very fond of European medicines, and like several

eastern nations fancy that every white man is a physician. ‘This con-

vent seemed to be a hospital for dogs, which from the smallest to the

largest size overspread the court, scarely leaving room to walk. The

Siamese are forbidden to destroy life, which may account for this pre-

posterous kindness. From what I observed it would appear that in

‘Phoonga there is at least one priest for the cure of every hundred

souls! But the poor people do not benefit much by their advice. If

they assist in daily filling the brass jar or Baat which the Chawkoo

carries about to receive contributions, and make a few periodical offer-

ings at the shrine of Phra Phoot or Buddha, which are afterwards

transferred to the houses of the priests, they fancy they have amply

fulfilled the duties of their religion; and leave the priest to repay them-

selves by prayers offered up either for success, or to avert some expect

ed calamity. The priests here had some Bali books which few of them

comprehended; most of them can read such with about as much advan-

tage to themselves as the generality of Mussulmans in Hindustan do

the Koran.

Refreshments can be had here on reasonable terms, such as poultry,

hogs and fruits. |

They have a few cattle (bovine) but they were unwilling to dispose

of them.

They have many tame elephants. The chief gave me the use of his

while there, and also of a small pony called a horse which he had got

from Penang’.

604 Excursions to the Kasiward. fJumy,

The exports* and imports at Phoonga may be thus stated.

Exports.—Deebook or tin, 600 bahars, and of which an indefinite

number of bahars are sent to Stam.

2. ra tau or tortoiseshell, which is brought from the Lancavies

and other islands in small quantity.

3. Rang nok or edible birds’ nests.

4. Nga chaang, ivory.

5. Khau san, rice.

_ Imports.—Fine English long cloth (white) about 80 cubits long and

2 or 24 broad.

2. ‘Superfine scarlet broad cloth.

3. English chintzes, 7 cubits long, 2 cubits and 8 ate broad.

4. Bengal ditto.

5. Ditto white long cloth 40 cubits long, 2 cubits and 38 inches.

6. Baftas, 24 cubits long, 2 cubits and 14 inches broad.

7. Madras moreis, 18 ditto long, 2 and 8 inches broad.

8. Nagore gaga moreis, 70 cubits long, 2 cubits 24 inches broad.

9. Handkerchiefs 8 to a piece.

10. Carpets.

11. Bengal velvets 24 cubits long, or 40 cubits long, 2 cubits broad

with border.

12. Occasionally a box or two of opium can be sold here; the sale

of this article may be increased by improper means since it is forbidden

to Siamese.

13. Chrystal ware, cutlery, &c.

These exports and imports are applicable to other Siamese ports on

this coast. The common duties on mercantile transactions are here

eight per cent. besides the native agent’s fees which are one per cent.

(although he will try to charge two or more) ; besides if bales of goods

are brought separately on shore the chief claims on their being opened

one piece of the goods contained in each. If many bales are opened at

once then the charge is the same as if only one had been opened. This

regulation is perhaps to induce the merchant to bring his goods quickly

on shore. If elephants are sold the agent receives 25 per cent.

In small transactions not exceeding five or six hundred dollars, duties

are not exacted. ‘The chief since I was at Phoonga has shewn a dis-

position to diminish these duties to encourage trade with Penang.

The chief and his associates together with inferior officers expect

* Deeboak, is properly a generic term for metals, but here tin is hardly

known by any other name. Takoa is the specific appellation.

‘

ee ee

1838. ] Return to Trang. 605

presents after the transactions have closed. But it will be to the trader’s

advantage to make a handsome present in the first instance.

In all Siamese ports the foreign trader must lay his account with ex-

periencing vexatious delays, and trouble arising perhaps more out of

the complicated nature of the forms and charges than from their being

actually burdensome. . 4

Rice is sold here at the rate of twelve gantangs per Spanish dollar,

but both at Salang and at this port it is of an inferior quality to that at

Keddah. ‘Their mode of preparing it for the market is also calculated

to diminish its value. The grains are seldom whole and for the most

part broken into crumbs. They cultivate all along the coast large

quantities of the Khaw Neeaw of the Siamese, or Malayen braspooloot

or Oryza glutinosa of Roxs. which is well adapted for the culinary

purposes of the natives, particularly for confections.

We returned to Trang on the 7th June, and having fired a gun, the

signal agreed on betwixt the Siamese chiefs and me, three envoys who

had just arrived from Ligor came on board. The head envoy KHoon

Axson, I had known at Penang. ‘These men after a conversation

which lasted for four hours set off for Zigor. ‘They said they had

travelled in coming day and night, on their elephants, and had accom-

plished the journey from Ligor in three days and one night. The

Siamese compute journeys by nights. Jtunners can perform it in four

days easily. |

18th June. The mission debarked on a high neck of land lying on

the west bank of the river. The tents were pitched close to the tem-

porary house which had been erected for myself by the raja’s people.

The schooner was now despatched with letters to Penung. Exercise

was enjoined to the escort and people not only to keep them in health,

but on the alert, as the temper of the Siamese had not been perfectly

ascertained. Indeed the secretary to the government at Penang ac-

quainted me by a secret despatch that people from Ligor had informed

him that it had been debated at Ligor whether the mission should be

cut off either by force or by poison. But I put little faith in this re-

port as I discovered that the principal reason why the Ligorian had

neither allowed the mission to proceed to Ligor, or had come down in

person to receive it, was his having just before been placed in commu-

nication with two colleagues who had arrived from Bankok to watch

his acts. The reported-danger appeared to me a fabrication of the

Keddah people; and small as our escort was, the party of one hun-

dred armed men who had been sent to keep a look out on us, would

have been easily disposed of in case of treachery appearing. These

606 Excursions to the Eastward. (Jury,

men had a few muskets and swords. They practised singly occasion=

ally at a mark, using a rest, and that very fairly. When they saw the

sepoys also practising, but firing balls by sections, the novelty of the

exhibition seemed to have a due effect and deterred them from any

future display of theer drill.

24th. Until this date we had boisterous weather, volumes of clouds

rolling in from the sea and partly breaking in showers in their passage

to the hills. About eleven o'clock of this day twenty boats were descried

descending the river. These dropped anchor close to our camp but kept

a perfect silence, and the people in them would not answer our questions,

This proved to be the advance of a fleet escorting the young raja of

Ligor who had been sent to meet me. In about an hour afterwards

the sound of kettle drums announced the young chief’s approach. The

boat of the latter occupied the centre along with eight others, and the

stern was covered by’a canopy like a carriage hood. About twenty

more boats were divided on the right and left wings.

The large kettle drum in the centre one, the privileged instrument of

a governor of the first rank, was now struck louder and louder, and at

every pause the crews of all the boats shouted at the full extent of their

voices. The right centre boats were each manned by twenty sailors or

soldiers (for the Siamese make hardly any distinction betwixt these two

classes) dressed in coarse red cloth jackets, and the boats on the flanks

had similar complements of men, but these wore blue cloth jackets. In

general red is the color used by the near attendants on, or guard of the

king and his great officers; common soldiers, if they do wear any

upper garments, which is not very often the case, have them of dark

colored woollen or cotton cloth. The chief, being a mere child of about

nine years of age, was accompanied by several nursery female atten-

dants to take care of his person and cook his food. This boy was ad-

dressed by his followers by the titles of Boot [putra or king’s son]

and chao nooee, the little lord*. He was carried from the landing-

place to the reception hall in a handsome litter, borne on men’s shoul-

ders by means of four poles like the Zellicherry tonjon of India. The ~

whole of his men who had landed, being 300, then arranged themselves

in three lines, one line within the open verandah of the building and

two without, and in the peculiar attitude of their nation. About one

hundred of these men had muskets without bayonets, the use of this

last weapon being quite disregarded by the Siamese. The rest had

long swords. About one-half of the whole number had triangular

woollen cloth caps, the rest were uncovered. The whole were in fact

* He has since [1837] become a courtier at Bankok the capital of Siam.

1838. Excursions to the Eastward. 607

squatted with their legs tucked under them. The musketeers with

their muskets held up in front the butt resting on the ground; the

others with their swords sloped.

Shortly after the arrival of this youthful diplomatist I proceeded to

visit him. The escort drew up in front of the hail with ordered arms,

and after exchanging my bow with the Bootha I sat down in a chair

which his people had purposely brought. The principal men who had

come with him to negociate for him occupied chairs on my right and

left. Bootha was richly dressed in a fully embroidered satin or silk pha

yok. This article of dress closely resembles the Malayan sarong and

it is worn either with or without trousers underneath it. Upwards

from the waist his body was naked with the exception of several massive

gold chains, which with their pendent jewels, seemed almost to weigh

him down ; he wore handsome golden bracelets and anklets, and he

had many valuable diamond and other kinds of rings on his fingers. The

crown of his shaven head was surmounted by a skull cap of gold fila-

gree of handsome workmanship. This covering is called mongkoot

which is a Bali word signifying a crown, and which is applied in histo-

rical works to denote a diadem.

So impatient was the boy to see the sepoys perform their exercise,

that despite his council of grave men, and before other business

could be begun his curiosity required to be satisfied. The crouching

troops of the Ligorian had thus an opportunity of witnessing, and with

manifest surprise, the precision which discipline bestows. It is doubt-

ful if a Siamese soldier can hold himself erect. A slavish submission

to their rulers has physically affected the whole ofthe male population,

and a slinking, slouching gait is their most prominent outward charac-

teristic.

After the conference I presented the youth with a few articles of

British manufacture and two globes, (celestrial and terrestrial.) He

was very desirous to learn the use of these last, but there was no time

for this operation. The Siamese are pretty expert according to their

own fashion at map-making, although their geographical ideas do not

wander far to the south or west of Siam. Some of their plans may

be reduced to some degree of consistency and precision by adapting a

scale of time to them, as the Siamese carefully note the time occupied

in travelling from place to place.

After the conference Bootha shook me warmly by the hand, and

took his departure in the same order as he had arrived.

Itis needless here to enter into a detail of the conferences which took

place. It was proved that the Ligorian would not adventure on his

own responsibility to side with the British against the Burmese, and as

608 Grammar of the Balochky Language. [Jury,

I saw that the time would be gone by, wherein -co-operation could be

useful before the fiat of the government of Szam could be obtained ;

and not deeming it prudent to act any further lest that haughty court

should consider a compliance with the proposition which had been

made to it as conferring an obligation, I returned with the mission to

Penang. |

Penang, 1824. Revised, 1837.

II.—Epitome of the Grammars of the Brahuiky, the Balochky and the

Panjabi languages, with Vocabularies of the Baraky, the Pashi, the

Laghmani, the Cashgari, the Teerhai, and the Deer Dialects. By

Lieut. R. Lzecu, Bombay Engineers, Assistant on a Mission to Kabul.

2.—GRAMMAR OF THE BAaLocHKy LANGUAGE.:-

This language is spoken throughout all those parts of the country

called Balochisthan, that are either independent or owe such fealty only

to the rulers of the plain, as does not bring them down from their hills

for a long enough time to have their language corrupted into Jathki,

by which name they designate the Sindhi.

Alphabet.

The peculiarity consists in the frequent recurrence of the Arabic thal 4

the English ¢ in the word those, and the Arabic 4; thai the English th in

the word think. The scheme of alphabet adopted is the same as that

employed for the Brahuiky in the last number.

Gender.

There is no gender in Balochky ; for they say,

Thara chiai bachhai astain ?P Have you a son?

Thara jinkai chiai astain ? Have you a daughter ?

A‘ mard akhta. That man has come.

Ai Barochani akhta. This Baroch woman has come.

iVumber.

Neither is there any number in the substantives even in those that end

in a vowel, which are few in comparison with the whole, for they say,

yak kardya, one hilt, do kardya, two hilts.

Case.

Declension of a compound noun.

Singular. Plural.

Vom. Juwin mard a good man

Gen. Juwin mardi of a good man The same.

Dat. & Ace. Juwin mardara to a good man

Abl. Juwin marda thai from a good man

Comparison

is made in the following manner;

Ai sharrind This is good

Ai gui sharrind This is better than that

Ai aj durustan sharrind This is better than all

ae <

1838.]

Vom.

Gen.

Dat. & Ace.

Abi.

Nom.

Gen.

Dat. & Ace.

Abl.

Nom.

Gen.

Dat. & Ace.

Abl.

Nom.

Gen.

Dat. & Ace.

Abi.

Nom.

Gen.

Dat. & Ace.

Abi.

One |

Two

Three

Four

Five

Six

Seven

Eight

Nine

Ten

Eleven

Twelve

Thirteen

Fourteen

Walin

Donwin

Grammar of the Balochky Language. 609

lst Personal Pronoun.

Singular. Plural.

Ma IPE ma we

Mi my mi ours

Mana me mara us

Aj man, iman ) ¢, aj or ach ma, or i

or manthai : i marathai \ from us

2nd Personal Pronoun.

Singular. Plural.

Thau thou shuma you

Thi thy shumi yours

Thara thee shumara you

Ajthau or from thee aj shuma or from you.

tharathai shuma thai

3rd Personal Pronoun.

Remote.

Singular. Plural,

that

A/hin of that The same.

A’hinyér that

AVhinya thai — from that

Proximate.

Singular. Plural.

Ai this

Aishi of this The same.

Aishiyar this

Aishiya thai _— from this

Reciprocal Pronoun.

Singular. Plural.

Wath self

Wathi of self The same.

Wathara to self

Ach wathiy from self

Cardinal numbers.

yak Fifteen phanzdah

do Sixteen shanzdah

shai Seventeen habdah

chyar Eighteen hazhdah

panch Nineteen nozd

shash Twenty gist

hapt Thirty si

hasht Forty chhil

nuh Fifty panjah

dah Sixty si gist

yazdah Seventy sattar

duazdah Kighty chyar gist

sainzdah Ninety navai

chardah Hundred sath

Ordinal Numbers.

first Sainwin third

second Chyarwin fourth

462

610

Uttar

Dakhan

Wom.

Gen.

Dat. & Ace.

Abl,

Grammar of the Balochky Language.

north Roshasan

south Roshaisht

Interrogatives.

Singular.

i who

Ki whose

Kiyara whom

Aj ki or kiya thai from whom

Chi, ai what ?

Verbs.

Points of the Compass.

east

(Jury,

west

‘Plural.

The same.

The verbs will be found dispersed through the early part of the dia.

logues, or in a future Appendix, as it will require considerable time and

labor to collect tenses from men who have never heard of words spoken

except in sentences, and who would be confused if asked how to express

‘thou understandest”’ in their language.

This tense can only be elicited

by asking the expression answering to a whole sentence in which that

tense is contained, as “thou understandest not what I say”’—and as it

would be time lost, after having ascertained the verb to reject the rest of

the sentence, I have left them to be extracted from the dialogues.

Naryan

Mathin

Naghan

Aph

Rosh

Shaf

Laidou

Hushtar

Dachi

Fhashin

Buz

Juwin

Shir

Naiwagh

Moshin

Grandim

Jav

Phindokhy

Laghar

Shutha

Akhta

Whad

horse

mare

bread

water

day

night

a camel

a female

camel

a he-goat

a she-goat

good

bad

abuse

wind

fire

wood

pain

sword

shield

bullet

sleep

milk

butter

ghee

wheat

barley

beggar

poor

gone*

come

galt

Vocabulary of Nouns.

Shakhal — sugar

Barochani a woman

Bhyan a colt Ambra

Kurti a gown Ambal

Galaim aearpet Anishagh

Khard rug Laph

Darman _— powder Khond

Darman wine Sharosh

Kariga a bullock Cham

Gokh a cow Nazik

Raim grass Dir

Loghwara_ wife Khiswa

Ikhwa a maid Safaith

Molid a slave girl Siyan

Pith father Sohar

Math mother Zard

Bachh son Khatola

Jannik daughter Phut

Gwar sister Ksan

Brath brother Draj

Kharch knife Dal

Gul an ornament Jo do

ron the shieldGirokh

Asin iron Srumbai

Pital brass Maizagh

Post leather Riyagh

Nukhraé silver Washi

Thangon gold Pat

Hit thin Kardya

Gwand short Zhukht

Gudh cloth Kupas

Phall turban Phim

Bing dog Mid

Baz much Zahar

\ companion

eyebrow

belly

knee

elbow

eye

near

far

language

white

black

red

yellow

bedstead

hair

small

large

stout

thunder

lightning

hoof

urine

excrement

molasses

silk

hill

scabbard

cotton

wool

goat’s hair

angry

1838.}

Nahigh

Lagh

Daiuv

Daf

Jod

Dathan

Zawan

Shalwar

Baroth

Rish

Phonz

Graénz

Goid

Path

Nakhun

Murda nagh

Rastai

Chappai

Kammai

Zahar

Zaptai

Sand

Garam

Khargushk

Tolagh

Gurk

Giurpat

Rich

Hikh

Mazar

Bhola

Gwar

Sirin

Gut

Adth

Dan

Hash

Drazh

Gwand

Jahal

Mazai aph

Thir

Zaiha

Jogh

Laihaiph

Phat

Maish

Toto

Nakho {

Nakho

Bhan

fish

donkey

face

tongue

trousers

mustaches |

beard

nose

nostril

flesh

foot

nail

finger

right

left

little

salt

sour

ginger

hot

hare

jackal

wolf

gurnal

bear

hog

tiger

monkey

nipple

waist

throat

flour

grain

jaw tooth

long

broad

deep

deep water

arrow

bow-string

bow

blanket

wound

ewe

parrot

father’s bro-

ther

mother’s

brother

cow-bouse

Grammar of the Balochky Language. 61i

Khophagh shoulder Shanain ;

Gate ‘ neck mirch \ black pepper:

Gosh ear Tham leek

Pahnad side Wasal onion

Khash armpit Haldra saffron

Khunnai hip DI > mc:

Ran thigh mes seed

Phad leg Sohraimirch redpepper

Piny calf Bandikh thread

Randh footstep Shishin needle

Darashk tree Kinchi Scissors

Gaz tamarisk Istaragh razor

Khan gaz the male do. Chi article

Mathin gaz female do. Phota cardamum

Digar earth Lawang cloves

Gap mud Wash sweet

Phoph dust Hanwagai raw

Nokh moon Ask a deer

Haux rain Mushk a mouse

Nodh cloud Chhath well

Musht fist Chahas { water-

Chumagh kiss vanes melon

Anas tear Koh mountain

Jathar grindstone Whan plate

Lagath kick Khada saucer

Sinagh breast Roth entrails

Rast true Lhiph a cloth

Drogh false Granch knot

Guragh crow Tubi a dive

Murg bird Gawaish __ buffalo

Raiz rope Hunhan male do.

Sing stone Gindhar naked

Shanha horn Khor blind

Dumb tail Khar deaf

Littar shoes Gunga dumb

Shudh hunger Lang lame

Logh house Cf: pales

; aringinthe Trizatk f so Lae

Bhal 1 nose sep-

tum ‘ mother’s fa»

‘ _ Nano jar

Nath do. in nostril

Mudh wha- Janwath son-in-law

da pearl be

: Masi mother’s sis-

Néwarsh stew ine ter

Kavav roast meat Wad sheep-fold

Phakki roasted $0 x calf

Guragh a crow urand ae

9 >. tc Khimjir partridge

Puppi father’s sis- J

trih ter Dadi father’s mo-

Nakho father’s bro- ther

zakht ther’s son Than stable

{ husband’s mo- Bh y

Wasi \— ther-in-law Amal ie intoxi-

Waehah sir : eating prog

Phrases and Dialogues.

Greetings.

Khush dura jod hir kul hir

Maihar bachha biath chuk

Chidari dairo daima thimidai

Hirain sangta sajohina shal hir ba

Greeting in Return.

Hir lothi thara ditho khush bitho

Thi halk buki

& istiya biya

Airkab biya

Bazai gwakh

Halka rawan

Thi nam chain

Thi sardar kidam ai

Ikhtar sala chikhtar dan pida bitha

Wala juwan athan

612 Grammar of the Balochky Language. [Juxy, |

Vocabulary of Verbs.

Bya come Nindbi sitdown Pat dig

Gwadk kani call Padakhdo stand Byar bring

Bil da,i let go War eat Birau go

Giriordar seize Thingdai drink Phatha bi stand |

Akhisti asleep W haph Whaphs _ recline

Airki place shutha _ he isasleep Giri take

Gir biya __ bring Gir birdy take away Gindh look

Shir gwash sing Jhan beat Drush grind

Phirni fill Rumba gin run Phirai sprinkle

Zindagh live Shodh -wash Kaji cover

Murtosh , Phivni our out Par bur

shutha bendear Bozh unliad Phash boil.

Grai weep Dosh sew Sirbi marry

Chaghal dai throw away Shafshk sell Thudo fear

Khulagh cough Zir gir buy Nangara ba plough

Chishagh sneeze Charr walk about Phaja bya examine

Likhwakh write Thash gallop Kalatha assault the

Khand laugh Juz amble mil fort

Khar scratch Jir gir lift up Bhoraith _—_ flee

Malagh rub Naiwad stoop Dar stop rs

Chad mount Gwanth fall Mill embrace

Irkav dismount Chaka cavie Laitai open

Bast tie shirt Dhak shut

Vocabulary of Adverbs, Conjunctions, &e. &e.

Maroshi to-day Zi yesterday Pangwa to-morrow

Nazik near Dir far Aida here

Burza there Ni now Guda after

Dara out Yama in Inna nadai, no

Bajea faa or nah

aiga ena Nishty ai. in front. Ai and

Di also Demashta formerly Nir mash midday

A pahnada on that side Ai pahnada on this side Jhala below

Burza above Navaida always Buka where

Are you well and happy?

Quite well ! sons and brothers

Children, house, and all

Wiehe friends and acquaintance all

Quite well thank you, I am delighted

to see you

Where is your village ?

Come slowly

Dismount

Is your city far (literally, a long call)

Go to the town

What is your name P

Who is your sirdar

How much grain has been produced

this year? .

I was well formerly

1838. ]

Wala thau juwan athai

Wala a juwan atha

Na salim bith

Ma wala juwan athtin

Ni hino bitha

Wala shuma Hydarawadh athin

Wala Pathan Baloch yar athan

Man Sipaithan

Thau Sepaithai

Mara dafjathosht warthi

A noukar ath

Ma tevga noukar athin

Shuma durust noukar athin

Hame durust noukar athan

-Thou mani sipahi bi

Shuma durust mi noukar biyai

Ai halka juwin guéhai bigain

Mi pitha barya hamaitha jangai bi

thaga

Ais hi ghwara gan

Khiwara bachha

Ma shaid biya

Hydrabad ma ranvgan hi wakhti

Thau buki marawgai

A buki maravgai

Ma durust Hidrawad rarvin

Shuma go ma juzzai

A guikhantharau

A guik thosht

Drath koshutha

Naphtha hakalaksa

Thau kadhin thari kha

Mi biath janga khushtha

Sakhai duz ai

Khalatha bhorni

Thi bachhar chikhta sal bithaga

Maroshi sakhai haur gwadth

Mi jarr mithaga

Ai shiyar sama naihath

Si mirosh patha sinvkhi

Hamai khiswa maka aishydar

jwan na khanath

Sama khani nawan mani baidi

ma digara

Jalbani jangokhi

Jalbani phirai mand kitham ai

Darya khana chikhtarai inam

Mulk inam daihgo digara

Akhisma

Maroshi rosh khamin sadthai

Zi rosh baza

Marosha chikhtar mahal warth

‘Marosha makoha mith baz pida

biyagai

Grammar of the Balochky Language.

613

Thou wert well before

He was well before

He has become unwell

We were well before

He has now become a coward

We were formerly in Hyderabad

Formerly the Pathans and Balochis

were friends

I will become a soldier

Will you become a soldier ?

I am afraid the dog will bite me

He will become a servant

We will all become servants

Will you all be servants?

They will all be servants

Be my sipahy

Be all my sipahis

Good cloth is produced in this village

In my father’s time there was a bat-

tle here

I will visit his sister

Thou son of a slave

I shall become a martyr

TI will go to Hyderabad this moment

Where art thou going?

Where is he going?

Weare all going to Hyderabad

Will you go with me?

He will run away

He has run away

He has gone out

He has fired a musket

When will you come back ?

My brother died in battle

He is a great thief

He destroys forts

How old is your son P

To-day much rain has fallen

My clothes have got wet

He is not conscious

In three days the boundary will reach

(literal) us

Don’t mention such a thing, he will

not be pleased with it

Take care in front the boat will

strike

Who are the Jalbani’s enemies?

Who is the head man of the Jalbanis?

What jagire has Darya khan?

The whole of this city and land is in

fief

Don’t delay

The heat is less to-day, it is cool

Yesterday there was much

How many times do you eat a day?

How much wool is produced in the

mountains in a day ?

614

Mathara indmadhyay thaumana

chikhtar ghodou diyi majanga

Mi path khisgatha ma kapthawa

Ai mardon makoha miri aishi ya

chaitara pardn

A halk nazikhai

Maroshi sakhai pandaikhthon ma-

thaga

Whava kiptha

Rumbazir juz

Darman sakhyai tikhin

Nasha wadthi ni khapthiyain

Ai naryanani baha baz ai

Mi dast masarra dashtish

Katola sarra mi sirandhi i airkain

Baloch go zahama konikha midi

Gandim baha chikhtar chotadwa

rupiya

Manja chotadwa baz sir an adthi

Havaida marda mith khaptiyain

Tani bukhto khapt

Gudhar walath bukhto khapt

Pagar akht

Zaham mana makhto buratha

Ai madi ranga gindh

A rah anjo ain

Ai mulaka hakamani sakhai

zurath

Brathani midag juwan nin

Hanwa marda khiswa aph na da-

tha hawa mard baikar ai

A mard gwasto shutha hawa mar-

da kikar

Rindhan Chandyan moun than sang

na dathatha

Hamai kitha rastar ain

Hamai kitha chi ain

Kathi hawe mulka man akhta hawai

marduna mana phajaha nyadth

Tufaki thir mana manakhta

Mi mard soudagaria shutha

Thau mana sath rupiyai dai i ma-

_ gothau niyan

Mana sikh makhta phaloga

Mathi daihar domb bazan

Ma Balochiya maniyar chai asha

Wali zal zindagai dohami khanag

hukam astai

Phad chai, nai

Grammar of the Balochky Language.

(Jury,

If I give you a fief, what force will

you give me in time of war?

My foot slipped and I fell

How can we bury those who die in

the mountains?

That village is near

I have travelled far to-day, I am

tired

I feel sleepy __

Make haste and run

The spirits are very strong

He is intoxicated with drink and is

lying down

Is the price of this horse high ?

My hand is burnt by the fire

Put the pillow of the bed under my

head

The Balochis fight with swords

How many chotadas of wheat for a

rupee ?

How many seers in a chotada of flour ?

There is a man’s corpse lying here

The surtout string is loose

The plaits of the clothes have come

undone

The perspiration has come

I have got asword-wound

Look what the man is doing

That road is difficult

The oppression of the rulers is great

in this country

It is not right for brothers to quarrel

A man is not worth any thing that

does not (water his words) keep

his promise

The man has started, overtake him

The Rindhs and Chandyas don’t in-

termarry

What animal is that ?

What insect is that?

When I came into this country the

people did not know me

I have been wounded by a musket.

ball

My husband has gone on a mercan.

tile trip

I would not accompany you were you

to give me a hundred rupees

I have become home-sick

Are there many minstrels in your

country ?

What is “many” (bread) called in

Balochky ?

Is it lawful to marry a second wife

when the first is alive ? |

Why not?

1838.]

Balochani chitarai guthan khanath

Sara sari gath gardana phashkma

patha shalwar

Ai handa zifanra sono hinnai

Adai chho biya

Thau go washai aph warai ki na-

horgai aph warai

Manya pa rupiya chikktar phanji

kaphantha

Maunthana midthaga

Nimaz mali rawan

Thau wathi daihma ahriya gindh

Thau chih mandai i

Gutha wathi jan sara phirai

A chhai,ra a sarbara

Sahaib baidi an phalawa maravya

Sahu zora mad i khokho dor bi

-Havai jwain mandai ki wah wah

HawankAtar ki sahaib da hawankh-

tar ma giran

Hamai sanduk giran ai

Giran ai ta zarra thi

Hawenkhtar mana galimiya

Ai bar sawakk ai

Hathin ma thara ditha mana sama

khapht kithau juwain Baloch, aii

Go ma chathara ma kan

Mi bratha go ma radi kitha

Ai mard rav khoha sardar salama

ai madara rah bith

Zi mana whava gipthaga maroshi

nah

Hamai digara drashk zithai ruthi

Ni Shah wahi ma mokalanutn

Ma hamai hitab durusta laitainé

Gwath baz makhtha

Ai halk sunya bitha

Rosh airkaphto navashan ai

Adtha drush naghana zithai pash di

_ Mitha chikhtar zat bitha ma khoha

| hala di

Yakai savaifh, dohmi sohar, simi

shank, charmi, savz

Chhid khaya bastaga

Ambala bastodathagapa zahirathi

khi bandi

Thau phadchai girai i thau ganda-

gai karai kutha thara kushan

_ A mada wathi butar jatha

Thau haivai tharai Applatan

| 4H

Grammar of the Balochky Language.

615

How do the Baloch women dress ?

A sari on the head, a phashk on the

neck, and shalwars on the legs

There is no beauty in the women of

this country

Holla! come here

Do you drink water with sugar or

water alone ?

How many phanjis are there in one

rupee P

They quarrel among themselves

I will go in the morning—lit. time of

prayers

Look at your face in the glass

What man are you?

Put the clothes on

He is below, he is above

The gentleman’s boat is going to the

other shore

Sahu don’t be rough, my ribs ache

Oh, oh, he is such a fine fellow !

I will take as much as the gentleman

will give

The box is heavy

It is heavy, and must have money in it

I don’t require so much

This load is light

When I saw you I conjectured that

you were a good Baloch

Don’t joke with me

My brother practised deception to-

wards me

If aman were to go into the moun-

tain to visit a chief, would a pas.

sage be granted him

Yesterday I felt sleepy, but not to.

day

Trees grow quickly in this soil

God be with you, you have your leave

I have looked over the whole book

The wind has become strong

This town is desolate

The sun has set, it is dark,

Grind some flour and make some

bread quickly

Are there many kinds of wool pro-

duced in the mountains, tell me?

The first kind is white, the 2nd is

red, the 3rd is black, and the fourth

green

Who has tied those cories (shells) on ?

My lover has tied them on in fond.

ness, who else would do so?

Why are you weeping, you have done

something wrong, I will beat you

That man committed suicide

Are you a kind of Plato ?

616

Ai thigo ma gozana di

Zi thau mana kisso gwashthaga

thara hawan kisso gir ain

Hawai mung Kithan boli akha nag

ail

Khutha zath hawai Kisawa

Gada bitha

Aph garam bitha ni garathagi

Mard giraigh jwan nai zal giraigh

kar ain

Zurthani jwin avo anth

Balochani hidthi hidthi doshan

Panjhi ai hawai Khunar baz anth

Raiz maludaga

Balochan aph taragh sama nai

Balochan ma wathi mulaka mahi na

waran

Maroshi ma tamashai ditha Kacho

ain gandagai gojd hadsaina wad-

tha darya bharra mudtho khap-

thaga

Lays in

Isé.

Kidd Gabol Gadhi Pachalo

Talbur Baiwakai mari

Durust ghulam i chakari

Banadi bashka thaga

Dath nazurth Hadhaiya

Grammar of the Balochky Language.

[Jury,

Don’t be so arrogant

Do you remember the story you told

me yesterday ?

What birds are those making that

noise P

God knows such a thing

A boil has appeared

The water is warm and effervesces

It is not proper for a man to weep, it

is the practice of a woman

Juwari is very good roasted .

The Baloch women do fine needle

work

How many “ ber’ berries for a pan-

jhi (pais)?

The rope is shaking

The Balochis don’t know how to swim

The Balochis don’t eat fish in their

own country

I saw a sight to day, three Kachos

lying dead on the river bank who

had eaten rotten flesh.

Balochky

Translation.

Kidds, Gabols, Gadhais, Pachalos Tal-

poors

and lawless maris

all were slaves of Chakar, (Rindh),

And he gave them with (his sister, )

Banadi

as a dowry to Hadheyo, (Rindh his

son-in-law) who refused to take

them.

Qnd.

Notha ki guzith savzaina

Bilaizaryan bazaina

Chamma ni sari gwazaina

Man phathau tajsar

Baid cham chiragh paraiwar

Syama chotho drashkabar

Kison chhobitha

Drashka I’sai akhtaga chhar ana

Mulko Kichahan golana

Bari dithai mabiwana

Chucha zindagai baidana

Askko wari i mana

Baria jawav tharaintha

Isai dandamanai nisht

Rab Kuristhan ditha

Drashk shair digara rusta

Gafshai bangwai sarzurtha

Nair moshai baraibur bitha

Drashk dabaigha lal bitha

Ye clouds that make green,

don’t rain too much ;

or mine eyes won’t close all night ;

I am thine oh crowned head ;

the eye light and preserver of the

world,

with snake locks like a branching

tree. .

The story of the tree is this :

I’sa came as he was travelling

in the quarters of the surrounding

country.

He saw Bari in the desert—

tell how do live without grain,

whence do you eat truly P

Bari answered him :

I’sa sat there for a moment ;

He saw the power of God.

A tree grew out of the ground :

At morning prayers it grew up;

At midday berries grew on it ;

In the afternoon they became red

ripe.

1838. ]

Drashk barkuno dubitha

Juwan ai mardamaiw hadthbitha

Chhoka gonawayan bitha

Hisi chhotwa hamchoba

Barkat Ali juwan marda

Singo koh aphbitha

Railai zahir darbaisha

‘Divanbyari Kalamowa

Yad kana pir nou bahara

Hardamai malak sachara

Shaha mardan kiddagara

Panchtan pak char yara

Pakhar sher potra wara

Bai Masid Rostamara

Saringi dawa garara

Jumlai shair potrawara

Sa Bahram nar mazara

Kaj nishta ba karara

Ghodai vai zudta Mazara

Kada gulathai zwara

Sinjku ¢hant tazi bishara

Rahzani nam thawara

Rauth Kachi digara

Ruthai baggai bai shumara

Adtha shaharan ba karara

Barkutha thir dara

Gul Mammad Brahui sunwara

Akht sathi gwar Mazara

Di manai bagg katara

Gwasht daraihan dawaidara

Phok di sari jamara

Gosh Gul Mammad paithawara

Chandyan honi bishara

Bhorai towartha Mazara

Gwasht Gul Mammada sachari

Gashda Bahram Mazari

Hinbara baggai Guzari

Haisarai burr Mazari

Jath baggada salama

Daha gatha shair kasava

Dairvi khan navava

Manawa palk ghadiya

Tabal waj shathiya

Mir chadéia wathariya

Gothuman brathariya

Zor Sultan Arafiya

4u2

3rd

Grammar of the Balochky Language. 617

On one branch two were produced

fit for men of rank to eat.

As it happened to him,

by my head and locks may it be so

with me.

Ali, you are a hero,

in rocks you get water :

The wanderings of the Darvish are

these.

Gentles my story is finished.

Let me call to mind the Pir of the

new spring

always the true master

the king of men; the producer

Ye five pure-hearted and ye four

friends,

Be behind the lion’s son

Be both ye Marids and Rostamaris

Ye Saringis takers of revenge

Be all behind the lion’s son

The noble Bahram the male lion

In his kingdom sitting at ease

The Muzaris mounted their mares

Kadu with a few horsemen

They all saddled their mares

His fame for theft was great

He went to the Kachi country

And brought away the camels with-

out number

And came harmless to his city

They divided lots by arrows and

straws

The noble Gul Mammad Brahui

Came with many to the Muzara

Saying give me back my strings of

camels

Daraihan the revenger said

I will not give them while I live

In your ears I tell you Gul Mammad

plainly

Many enemies many

We Muzaris have bound and ate

Gul Mammad the true said

Bahram Muzari shall hear

I will either take camels in return

Or the Muzaris shall have my head

By the Jaths he sent a challenge

Who petitioned to the assembled

lions

The Khans and Navavs of cities

Quickly in a moment of an hour

‘The drums beat joyfully

The Mir mounts himself

With all his brothers

By the power of Sultan Arefiga

618 Grammar of the Balochky Language. [Juy,

Bagg nila gonbathiya

Darshanai shir pharaganai

Masara bat hamalani

Sa ha vai Mir mansawanai

Basth hatyar kimatanai

Zin git shihanani

Nazaha bor narahanai

Sanj thasa dorawani

Bithai nal gwank ukahanai

Wanjan dil pijani

Ziu git pahalwani

Laikhai si giz Mazarai

Zudtwai tajai tara

Mir Masaraiba subkara

Jathro kau ra diwara

Adt gondath mazara

Nashk bishair potrawan

Bijalo khan wadhwani

Shair shihi bahazurani

Hajiyan sun sathani

Mohari bith suriyani

Jang mashkul durghyani

Jiwan bor dadhwani

Kadhua wada nai badanai

Zaham al mas tai durani

Bingwa gwasht zawani

Ghodo paishimidanai

Gon zafar khan Jabani

Hakim kinn daihani

Sangti Shair potrawani

Sujala Path Maghsi

Gonath zahma himati

Chandya Gubzar Razi

Zaham wakti li khubazi

Si gist jang i Mazari

Do sath Brahui Jamali

Watti zahma bawali

Trada napta bukhtalari

Dhal dashta buat jadi

Hazhda Pandrani

Mir Brahui ulkukani

Nam nazana ganani

Gadtai shair i turana

Hakul ha gandayana

Nam Durhyana girana

Ishty nashkai majhyanai

Bith samho gothumana

Math bithgo Fauj liya

Drokutha taigha thiya

I will not give the camels to mine

enemies

Start ye citizens and villagers

In front with Hamal

That great man Mir and hero

Bind on your valuable swords

Take hold of your saddle bows

The bays dance and neigh

Saddles, stirrups and worked stirrups

The noise of the shoes of the feet

was great

Our lord with a glad heart

On the saddle of his mare

Sixty Mazaris were counted

They pushed their mares to speed

The Mir is in front, victory will be

theirs

At the stream of the Jathro moun-

tain

The Muzaaris arrive

The fame of the lion’s son is great

Go on ye great Khans

Braver than lions

Haji the pilot of a hundred

Get in front thou hero

Fight Mashkul thou supremely brave

Jiwan on his fine mare

Kadi hammer of thy enemies

Thou sword of the fierce duranis

Bingwa uttered this speech

I will take my mare before all

In company was Jaffer Khan Jal-

bani

Governor of the Kinn district

Were with the lion’s son

Sujalo and Path Maghsi

Were in company brave swordsmen

Gulzar and Razi Chandyas

The players at the battle of swords

The Muzaris force was sixty

‘'wo hundred Brahuis and Jamalis

They turned and fled from the swords

The guns and swords were used

On the faces and jaws of those with

shields

Eighteen Pandranis

The Mir of the Brahui country

His name is unknown that it could

be mentioned

Those of the lion’s locks return

He came calling aloud

He takes the name of Darjan

He quitted this world and kept his

vow

They advanced all together

He had closed with Fauj liya

His sword was false for it broke

1838. ]

Lutbi yaikghadiya

Hajaiyan dawa giriya

Go midoka bashkaliya

Husain khan mardi raliya

Jang mayjo bith sardar

Suraiha Gul shair Dildar

Jan Mahammad Jiwan Khana

Gul Makh Taja Jamali

Aj phatha gwank siyali

Daimai khandati jamali

Kushta Gul Mammad Gist chara

Da fatteha kidd gara

Mishkada sari jamara

Diwan byari kalamova

Grammar of the Balochky Language. 619

They were killed in an hour

Haji entered into a dispute

And quarrelled with Bashkaliya

Husain Khan was among men

In the battle were these sardars

The brave Gul shair Dildar

Jan Mammad Jewan Khan

Gul Makh and Taji Jamali

Called them retreating enemies

Hereafter the Jamalis will laugh

Gul Mammad and 24 were killed

God gave the victory

He became musk in the world

Gentles my lay is finished

A Balochky Love Song.

Sohwan yadkana Sehwana

Bashk lal mana imana

Kahni kahev murgani

Hal mahram dostani

Gaishtar birsari hothani

Lodj zaihmaran akhta

Dast dast nishani adtha

Monj darin dil bothakhta

Kadzi baraigain singartha

Paishi mullawao banga

Phulai sarmaharai shiptha

Yakpati shalana kanyun

Ganja bailo nurwaha

Jathanai binindai jahain

Kulan gorgina gath

Dost amsaro phalchhat

Jaidi amsaro lhiwi

Shasht mardamai papudsai

Rindhi baidagai saghbandan

Kul banzara laitaina

Bhounri wazgir lalinya

Shi mahi zaihir thalambi

Riazi bahmani balatha

> Barkat Aly juwan marda

Railai zaharai darbaisha

Diwan biyari kalamowa

Rindhai kachari ai kutha

Gwasht mirain chakara

Dishi girokhan chumbara

Kasa gwahi na dath

Gala murid daiwangai

Ath

In the morning Sehwan comes before

Endue me O Lal with truth

She’s a pigeon a peahen in walk

The state of my love is a secret

That very modest and _ beautiful

creature

The minstrel has,come with his lyre

And brought a token on his hand

from my love

My heart that was dry as wood be-

came glad

My bay mare was got ready

Before the evening call to prayers

I put ornaments on the head stall

Without halting at speed I will come

To the flourishing Beilo on the Nur-

waha

Where my Jathani is residing

The huts of reeds are crowded

My love is fairest of all

Among her companions and play.

mates the fairest

I sent a man secretly

My Rindh dress arranged

I opened the curtain of the house

As the tree smells the flower

The pain of six months is removed

May you be pleased with no one but

Aly is a great hero

Such are the wanderings of the bard

Gentles my lay is finished

5th.

The Rinds were all assembled

Mir Chakar spoke

* To night how many times has it

lightened”

No one had witnessed it

The fascinated Murid spoke

620 Grammar of the Balochky Language. [Junys

Agai jan mard Koshinabai

Rastai nishana raz dyan

Dushi girokhan sibara

Da dubara shamal kutha

Gal Amirai chakara

Bhalo Mubarak pusaga

Hikhai i zith rawan

Dir banai mulkai kawan

Gali murid daiwangai

O Sharra bawa mani

Sharrai na dithai dost mani

Kitai sarra barai kula

Macharragan garkuthan

Man dan kuran danwatha

Man nailagati yaniyan

Lohar pa basa phadan

Gudakhan gwath dhawan

Pachomanai daiwanaga

Phama byarai thawadan

Mulla bazai khaga dan

Malamai haufainai

Mulla Munshi ai naban

Mak nimaza na padan

Dast bastago sirai bukhtaga

Gud Amir mojga

Kaulai trashan chothwa

Mirai salaihain irkana

Jan kada kokh gudhan

Phadkalav pahaliya

Dast khama pa I’siya

BRilaph Mira Chakara

Bora ila bastga

Kul dhwa a haizaga

Makh malang wagadha

Tahki o ra hijja rawan

Hijja dara zarat khana

Hani markhanai murid

Ma kutwaiya thakatha

Mast murid cho laidhawa

Chhakai janai hanala

Narmaga do rakhanai

Hanai khwanka phaphada

Chakar Amidi banda

Log athi a askhawa

Bara thiya duz bara

Diwan biyari kalamowa

** Formerly lover and mistress were

not killed

Mark well and consider it as true

To night it has lightened thrice

No twice it has become light”

Mir Chakar spoke

“ Very well Mubarak’s son

At this instant begone

Remain in the far Ban country”

The fascinated Murid spoke

‘*Oh my own father

Tis well you did not see my mistress

With bare head in the wide desert

I will wander and make my grave

With only a Qurén with me

Don’t put manacles on me

At work is the cruel ironsmith

With the breeze of the south in his

bellows

They are for me who am mad

Bring for me a potion

The Mulla may give me many charms

He doesn’t know my disease

I am not a Mulla or Manshi

I will not repeat prayers

I will now stoop my back is broken

And to be struck with the Amir’s

shoes

I vow to cut off my locks”

The Mir took off his weapons

Took off his starched clothes

Left his carpet with Aliya

His bow with I’sa

‘¢ Mir Chakar may take all

My mare her picket pegs and ropes

She will stand starving at her stall

I will go begging with beggars

J will certainly go on the pilgrimage

And offer at the door of the temple”

Hani and the noble Murid

Were shut up in a room

Murid like a wild camel

Bites Hani’s cheek

And her soft lips

Hani is called from behind

From Mir Chakar’s house

May his house take fire

And his mare be stolen away

Gentles my lay is finished

1838. ] Native account of washing for gold in Assam. 621

IlI.—WNative account of washing for gold in Assam. By MonEERAM,

Revenue Sheristadar, Bur Bundaree.

{Communicated by Capt. F. JENKi1ns to the Coal and Mineral Committee. ]

There are no old papers of the Assam time relative to the above

subject, but the following is compiled from the hearing of respectable

people and shews the present state of gold washing on this country.

Before the British took possession of this country, the Assam rajas

used to take from the sonwal’s of Upper Assam a yearly tribute of

4000 tolahs of gold, and in the time of the Boora Gohynes 2000

tolahs used to be taken: when the Government had possession of Upper

Assam, a tax was levied on the north bank of the river from 400 son-

wal pykes, and at present there are about 150 or 160 gotes of pykes

in all Upper Assam, from whom the raja collects a tax. Besides

these there are about 250 or 300 of these pykes (old and new) in the

Bur Senaputiee’s country. There are also about 10 or 15 gotes* of

these sonwals in Bishnath, and Sonaree Chopree ; and some in Lithure,

Gorokhia, Kaloneecholee, and Morung, and there are 50 or 60 houses

of them in Sadiya and Sveekhown. In the raja’s country the great-

est number of his sonwal pykes reside on the north bank of the Bur-

rumpootur : there are only about 26 houses of them on the south bank.

During the; Living now; Kunaway

Assamese sonwal pykes during the/present rdja’s|jand on which|sonwal pykes

time of Governmeut. time. bank of river.|where living.

Gotes.

Bur Burooah’s Bhag,...... 1 “# 4 Muttuck

Seering Phookun’s Bhag, .. 29 164 South bank sis

Tupomeea Phokuns Bhag, .. 63 Re ‘i Muttuck

In Seesee Tangonee,...... 26 oa as Ditto

In Lokimpoor, Soolpanee,

Nomel and Charengeed Buroo-

Mite NAR cic deuce 69 44 -1 North bank EM

Datranscotta, ......-22005 122 7 Ditto y

In Narainpoor, ...... 8 3 Ditio-

Cackaree sonwals, in Seesce, ¢ ”

Lokimpoor and Majalee,...... 250 90 Ditto

Cackaree sonwals on the , Muttuck, &c.

BRU LOATIG YS Ci) hc !s lala ose o'sjns 11 4 South bank ay

Near the Dehing river, .... 5, i) Ditto ry

Beheea sonwals,........+- 44 5 North bank |Muttuck

4573| 1842

—

The kheldars object to the 1844 gotes of pykes at present put down

by the raja, but admitting all their objections, there are not less than

150 gotes of these sonwal pykes in the raja’s country.

* A gote of sonwals consists of four pykes or individuals.

622 Native account of washing for gold in Assam. (Jury,

Gold washing is the occupation of the sonwal pykes, but other pykes

sometimes join with them and receive their share. The tax is levied on

the sonwals only at the following rates. At the time of the washing, the

Burahs, and Sykeas with their sonwal pykes go in a body to the place

selected by them, and at the close of the year each pyke gives $a

tolah of gold for his share of tax; but there is an extra cess levied for

melting, &c. according to the quality of the gold ; for the best kind (or

votom) they give 3 rattees more than the 4 tolah, for second best (or

modom) 4 rattees, for third sort (or norrom) 6 rattees or 1 anna; be-

sides this there is a commission of one rupee’s weight in every 20 taken

by the Phookuns and Burrooahs, half tolah in 20 by the Teklahs and

Burrahs, + tolah by the Bhundar Kagotee, and when the tax in gold

is presented to the raja, the Chung Kagotee, the Bhundaree Leekeerah,

the Pachonee, and the Kookoorah chowah Burrah, take altogether 1}

tolahs of silver for each tolah of gold.

In the time of raja RasEswur Sine, the sonwals of Upper Assam

alone used to give 6 or 7000 tolahs of gold in addition to the moheea

or tax that was levied on them, and in raja GOUREENATH SING’s time

the sonwals of Upper Assam used to give 4000 tolahs of gold every

year; besides this there was gold received from the following places of

Lower Assam, Chingah, Sondhonee, Chooteea, and Chatgarree, and

it was also brought from the Bhooteahs by a sunzattee sent by the raja.

The best kind of gold is that found by the jongol sonwals, and the

Kacharee sonwal’s gold is the worst.

The hill streams produce the best gold, and the stronger the current

of the stream the better the gold ; very slow running streams do not pro-

duce good gold. The gold found in the Burrumpootur is not good, it

is washed by the Kacharee sonwals, and this is the reason why the Ka-

charee sonwals have no good gold.

List of rivers in Assam which produce gold.

1 Lohit *1 Kakoee | Sonsiri I Doka Jooree

1 Dihing *] Kuddum *1 Jongloong In the east 2 Jooree, if

1 Tengapanee|*1l Somdiri *i Jajee the gold is washed with the

1 Paroorah {*1 Doosra Deejoo|*1 Desoee consent of the Dufla,

1 Dehong andj 1 Dikrung Under the Dufla |each party can collect % of

Dibong hills in Chardoar|a tolah daily.

1 Deegaree 1 Kharaee

1 Dhol 1 Boorooee 1 Doobeea I Pomahs

*) Seedang 1 Bor Gang 1 Pormaee 1 Garroah

1 Dibooroo | 1 Bor Deekoree | 1 Roydeng Besides the above there

1 Soobun siri}*1 Bhoirobbee 1 Bechumae are several other small

1 Deejoo 1 Mansiri 1 Kallee Jooree |streams.

The names of rivers marked thus * produce the best gold.

1838.) Native account of washing for gold in Assam. 623

There are other rivers falling into these which produce gold, but the

best gold is found in the most winding streams with the strongest

currents.

Not having any old papers on this subject there may be some trifling

errors in the above estimates, but it is a positive fact that 4000 tolahs

of gold at the very least were received annually by the Assam raja.

There are four methods of collecting gold as follows :—

1. The Kacharees wait until the river rises and when it falls again

suddenly they scrape up the sand and wash for gold.

2. All other sonwals collect and wash for gold during the dry sea-

son.

3. The sonwal of the Rydegeea Phookun’s Bhag go up into the

hills and collect the copat, which they burn to produce gold.

_ 4, The gold-washers in the Seedang river get the gold by washing

the moss and slime which they scrape off the recks in the bed of the

river.

These are the four methods by which geld is collected, but the gold-

washers generally collect the gold during the dry season.

Methed of washing and collecting gold from sand.

Wherever the current is strong with a falling bank above it ending

in a sharp turn of the river, the sonwals examine the opposite shore

where the sand from the falling bank is ‘thrown, and if this should

contain gravel mixed with the sand it is accounted a good place to find

gold in.

Each party consists of a patoee and 4 pallees, who wash in one

trough (or dorongee No. 5); when they find a proper place to commence

operations they begin by working about in the sand with a sharp pointed

bamboo (No. 1, or sokalee) to find the depth at which the gravelly sand

is, they then take it up in a piece of split bamboo, (No. 2, bans chola)

and examine whether there is any gold dust in it; if they see 12 or 14

bits they immediately build their houses and comme.ce operations.

They first bund up the deep part of the stream, if it be a small one with

sand, and if large with stakes and grass : the stream then takes a differ-

ent direction over the sand ; they allow it to wash away the upper sur-

face of sand so as to expose the gold sand, when the bund is re-opened

and the stream returns to its original bed. The upper sand is then scrap-

ed off and the good sand collected with a kind of wooden spade (No. 3,

kater dohtal) ; this shovel is 14 cubits long by 1 cubit in breadth, with

a handle 4 cubits long ; the blade is of the form ofa crescent with holes

at each corner through which a string-is passed and two men lay hold

of and pull this string, while a third person keeps pressing the spade

624 Native account of washing for gold in Assam. [Juty,

down in a perpendicular position; the sand is then taken up in small

baskets with handles (No. 4 called cookees) and thrown on a bamboo

lattice work or strainer (No. 6 ban) which is laid over the trough by a

(dorongee No. 5.) This trough is made of wood and 3 cubits long,

1 cubit broad and 1 span high all round, with a slit 3 fingers wide at one

end. Water is now thrown over the sand with a calabash having a large

piece scooped out at the bottom, beside a very small hole on one side (No.

7, lao); the water is thrown on with one hand while the other hand is

employed in moving the sand about and sweeping off the larger particles _

of gravel from the surface of the strainer ; in this way the sand is spread

on and water poured over it ; and as the trough fills the water and dirty

sand run off through the slit init, while the clean sand and gold remain

at the bottom of the trough. I forgot to say that the trough is placed

at a small angle to assist the water and dirt to run off quickly. When

40 or 50 baskets of sand have been thus washed into the trough the

sonwals call it a sheea, and if a ruttee of gold is produced from one

sheea they think themselves very fortunate indeed, for during the long

days they get about 30 sheeas or washings producing one ruttee each,

and during the short days about 25 sheeas, each party thus making on

an average about + of a tolah of gold daily. When they happen to fall

on a good old stream that has not been disturbed for 5 or 6 years they

get 2 ruttees of gold from every sheea or washing, and then each party

makes about 4 a tolah daily. .

The gold and sand of the last washing is collected into pottles (or

chongas) by spreading a leaf of copat or some other plant at. the end

of the trough, and dropping water very gently on the sand through

the small hole in the calabash, which causes a parting of sands and gold

to be thrown on the leaf; when the whole is collected in this way it is

put into the pottle and tied up and the next washing is commenced on.

As soon as they have collected enough in the pottles they give up wash-

ing the common sand, but pour out the gold and sand from pottles into

the trough again, and putting in about an anna’s weight of quicksilver

for each tolah of gold dust, they pour water over the sand to keep it in

motion while the quicksilver remains below with the gold dust and

forms it into a lump ; this lump is then put into a shell and on a fire of

~ nahar wood charcoal ; when the quicksilver evaporates and the shell be-.

comes lime ; it is then carefully taken up in a spoon and thrown into water

when the gold falls to the bottom ; if it be of a brass color it is wrapped

in a paste made of clay from the cooking choolas mixed with a little salt

and burnt in a fire, which gives it a proper color*.

* This process causes an absolute refinement of the surface of the gold :—

it is the same used in gold refining by the natives, but in the latter case the

1888.] Further information on the gold washings of Assam. 625

The gold is washed for in all streams during the months of Maug,

Falgoon, and Choit, and also in a few streams in the month of Assin

and Cartick, but during 4 days in each the sonwals do no work, viz. at

the new and full of the moon, on the first of the month and on a gene-

ral holiday ail natives have once a month called ekadosee, (the 11th.)

The Kacharee sonwals use the same instruments as above.

The Rydengeea Phookun’s sonwals burn the copat leaf and thus

produce gold from the ashes as written above.

The gold-washers in the Seedang dry the moss and slime and then

wash it in the usual manner.

This is the way in which gold is washed, which is so uncertain that

an unfortunate set of men sometimes get only about a tolah after a whole

months labor.

IV.—Further information on the gold washings of Assam, extracted

from Capt. Hannay’s communications to Capt. Jenkins, Agent

to the Governor General in Assam.

It is the general belief of the inhabitants of the surrounding coun-

tries, that the rivers of the valley of ssam abound in gold, and this is in

amanner corroborated by the numbers of the inhabitants of Assam, who

are gold-washers by profession ; and judging from this fact, and the

compacts which existed between the gold-washers, and the state in

regard to revenue payments, the quantity of gold received into the public

treasury must have been considerable.

The gold-washers of Assam are designated sonewahls, but as they

were distributed in different parts of the country and placed under the

authority of Phokans, Boorooahs, and other chiefs, they were generally

known only by the names of the “ Khel” or tribe of chief, under whom

they resided. They were of all the classes and castes found in Assam,

the Beheeahs (a tribe of Ahoms), and the Cassarees, being however the

most numerous. ‘The sonewahl Cassarees, who formerly occupied

Sydiah and its vicinity, were a distinct class from those residing, as

before mentioned, under the orders and authority of different chiefs;

they were entirely under the orders of the raja himself, and they supplied

him with gold when called upon to do so.

The whole of the rivers* in Assam contain (as formerly noticed)

metal has to be reduced in the first instance to very thin leaves to allow the

muriatic acid fumes to penetrate and unite with the alloy.—Eb.

* A list has been given in the foregoing paper; but many names differ:

Capt. HH. states that in fact it comprehends all the rivers and torrent streams

in Assam.—Ep.

At 3

626 Further information on the gold washings of Assam. [JuLy;

more or less gold in their sands, and the soil of which their banks

are composed; the most noted however are the Bor-ol, Subon-

shirt, Desue, and Jogo, the two latter containing the purest and best

gold, and in the Joglo it is said that this precious metal is found in

large grains, about the size of a grain of rice. The color of the

gold also in both the last named rivers is of a deep yellow, and it was

so much prized, that the jewels of the raja’s family of Assam were inva-

riably made up from what was collected in them.

The gold of the Buramputer is considered the worst, and it seems to

be a general opinion, that the gold is best, and in greatest quantities,

when the bed of the rivers is composed of a mixture of sand and small

pebbles. I cannot however speak with confidence on this point, further

than to observe, that the whole of the rivers I have enumerated have

their sources in the mountains, and they have naturally for a consi-

derable portion of their course a pebbly and stony bed.

The Desue is a small river, and has sometimes little or no water in

it ; it has a short course from the mountains south of Jorehaut (where

it rises) to the Buramputer, and a heavy shower of rain near its

source causes it to risesuddenly. The gold-washers carry on their ope-

ration one and a half days’ journey above Jorehaut, where the bed is

stony.

The Joglo rises in a range of small hills, which stretch across from

Jaipore towards Sudiya, and after a very short course of a few miles

falls into the Booree Dihing ; it has throughout a pebbly bed, and towards

its mouth the banks are high, and composed of yellow-colored clay,

similar to the soil of the hills and the tract of country through which

the Joglo passes. At the mouth of the last named river the bed of the

Dihing is conglomerate rock, rich in iron, and the hills in which the

Joglo has its rise, abound in iron and coal.

The sonewahls endeavour to keep their art as secret as possible,

and wish to make people believe that they have particular methods of

washing for gold, and that they alone know the most favorable spots

for carrying on their operations. A few of these peculiarities however

have been pointed out to mé.

The best time to wash for gold is after a rise of the waters in the

rivers, and the most favorable spots are where beds of the rivers are

composed of small rounded pebbles of quartz and sandstone, with a

mixture of sand, and also in spots, where from natural causes, there is

an extensive deposit of this. In the Joglo however the soil is scraped

from the banks, and washed, and I am told that the soil and sand which

has collected about the roots of trees on the banks, is considered rich

1888:] Further information on the gold washings of Assam. 627

in gold, but particularly when it has collected in considerable quantities

round the fibrous roots of the gigantic fern.

Hollows and cavities in the loose ferruginous sandstone (which

abounds in many of the rivers) are likewise cleared of all sand and gra-

vel, the outer coating of the sandstone scraped off, and all is carefully

washed. This last is said to be sometimes a prolific source of the pre-

cious metal. .

I have only twice witnessed the process of gold washing, once in the

Evrawaddie, and once in the Booree Dthing, and although the method

by the gold-washers differed, the soil washed was the same. ‘The resi-

due left, after the sand was washed out, was in both cases, a black

metallic looking sand, which contained the gold, and this blackish sand

is invariably met with, excepting in washing the outer coating of the

ferruginous sandstone above mentioned*,

3rd April, 1838. Hxperiments.—Inthe Buramputer or Lohit which

jt is called above Debong Moukh, and in the vicinity of Tengapannee

Moukh a party of Cassarees 60 in number, washed for five days, and

realized 25 rupees weight of gold. Also twenty men for one month

who collected half a tola, or eight rupees worth of gold each. And

fifteen men for one month, collected each eight rupees worth of gold.

The above operations have been performed within the last few years.

In the Noa Dihing both above and below the present village of

Beesa, a party of twenty Cassarees, washed during three months in the

latter end of 1837, for gold, and realized eight annas weight each, in all

ten tolas, which was sold at Sydiah, for twelve rupees per tola of gold dust.

In the Booree Dihing a party of Cassaree traders in salt, 24 in

number, washed for gold during their stay at Jadpore for one month,

and realized in all twelve annas weight of gold.

In the cases above mentioned there is a considerable difference in

the quantities of gold collected. The last named however, being realized

when the party were on a trading visit to Jatpore for salt, can hardly

be considered as a fair specimen, as the washing for gold was looked

upon more as a pastime and the labour by no means constant. But the

first mentioned instance may be taken as a very fair specimen of what

can be earned by gold washing in the Lohit, when the numbers of the

gold-washers are considerable, and when the object is to procure as

* Capt. H.’s account of the process and implements is omitted, as a tolerable

description has already been given in the preceding paper. Might not the gal-

vanic magnet be advantageously employed in freeing the washed sand of its fer-

ruginous particles? We have frequently employed the common magnet in the

examination of small specimens of these sands with advantage. The use of mer-

cury might thus be avoided.-—Ep.

628 Further information on the gold washings of Assam. [Jurvy,

much gold as they possibly can within a short period, which was the

case in the instance above alluded to. Bes

The only peculiarity I can find worthy of notice, in regard to the

foregoing information is, that in washing the sands of_the Noa Dihing,

a quantity of beautiful and minute crystals of quartz are left after the

dirty portion and larger pieces of gravel have been thrown aside, and this

description of residue is not observed in any other rivers of the upper

portion of Assam. |

I have also to remark that it is the custom with the sonewahl Cassa-

rees of Sudiya to reckon four men to a gote, their method of washing

for gold requiring for each durrunee, or trough, four men to keep the

operation constantly going on, the distribution of them, being, one man

to wash, two to bring the soil, and the fourth to oe ee all relieving

each other at intervals.

5th May.—The formation which is herein given may be depended

upon as correct ; it was taken from the head of a party of sonewahk

Cassarees now residing at Burgohain Pokni, on the south bank of the

Booree Dihing who make ‘a yearly visit to the known sources of the

precious metal. The dates are not specified, but the washing for gold

took place at different periods.

1. In the Lohit or Buramputer above Sudiya, a party of gold-wash-

ers consisting of 12 men washed for 20 days, and realized 7 tolas of

gold.

2. In the Dholjan or A. B. Buramputer, a party of 20 men washed

for 16 days and realized 1 tola.

3. In the Jungi, 15 men washed for 20 days and realized 74 tolas.

4. In the Desue or Jorehaut river, 15 men washed for 12 days and

realized 74 tolas. _

54in the Dhunseree river, IS men washed for 12 or 15 days and

realized 74 tolas. b

With reference to the above I have been told that the quantity of

gold obtained in the three last mentioned rivers or rather hill streams,

may be taken as a good average of what can be procured from them ;

they are considered rich with reference to other streams in this province

~ which are washed for gold, and the quantity which could be obtained

must depend upon the number of people employed. In my inquiries

regarding particular localities, soil, &c. washed, I can obtain nothing

additional to what I have already laid before you, a sudden turn in the .

river where there is a deposit of loam sand and small round stones. or

pebbles, and a situation where the level of the country commences to

ascend towards the hills, seem to be considered the most favorable loca-

lities with reference to the small streams which I have noticed here,

1838. ]} Inscription on the Delhi Iron pillar. 629

V.—Lithographs and translations of Inscriptions taken in ectype by

Captain T. S. Burt, Engineers: and of one, from Ghost taken by

Captain A. CunninauAM, of the same corps.

Delhi [ron pillar.

In last month’s Journal I commenced the agreeable task of laying

before my readers that portion of Captain Burr’s budget of in-

scriptions (gleaned in the short interval since his return to India),

which was couched in the old Pali character. I now take up the second

division, containing those in what has been designated by himself

the ‘ No. 2 character of the Allahabad pillar :’ to which series belongs

three very interesting inscriptions, two entirely new from central India ;

and one, known far and wide certainly, as far as its existence and its sup-

posed illegibility are concerned, but hitherto never placed before the

learned in its true condition, so as to allowa fair trial at its decipher-

ment. I allude to the short inscription on the celebrated iron pillar at

Dethi, of which I. published in 1834, an attempted copy taken by the

late Lieut. WM. ELLIor at the express request of the Rev. Dr. Mixx ;

but it was so ingeniously mismanaged, that not a single word could be

made out! and there can be no wonder at this, if the reader will take

the trouble to compare Lieut. ELLiot’s plate (Pl. XXX. Vol. IV.) with

the accompanying reduced lithograph of Capt. Burt’s facsimile! I

should perhaps remark that I lithographed the present plate before

transcribing it for the pandit, so that there could be no partial bias to-

wards a desired construction of any doubtful letter. Nothing of the

kind however was necessary: the letters are well formed and well

preserved notwithstanding the hard knocks which the iron shaft has

encountered from the ruthless invaders of successive centuries. I have

been promised by Capt. Burr an account of this and the other mo-

numental remains visited in his journey across India; I need not there

fore enter upon the history of the DedAz iron pillar, but shall confine

myself to the restoration and explanation of the record it contains.

The language is Sanskrit; the character is of that form of Nagari

which I have assigned to the third or fourth century after Christ, the

curves of the letters being merely squared off: perhaps on account of.

their having been punched upon the surface of the iron shaft with a

short chent of steel, and a hammer, as the absolute engraving of them

would have been a work of considerable labour ; but this point 1 have

not the means of determining.

The composition is poetical, consisting of six lines, or three slokas, in

the sardula vikridita- measure :—it is observable that the first line is

written in a much smaller hand than the remainder.

The purport of the record is just what we might have calculated to

630 | Translation of Ancient Inscriptions. [ Jury,

find, but by no means what was fondly anticipated, or what will satisfy

the curiosity so long directed to this unusual and curious remnant of

antiquity. It merely tells us that a prince, whom nobody ever heard of

before, of the name of DHAVA, erected it in commemoration of his victo-

rious prowess. He was of the Vaishnavi faith, and he occupied the throne

he had acquired (at Hastinapura ?) for many years; but he seems to

have died before the monument was completed. As there is no men-

tion of royal ancestry we may conclude that he was an usurper.

The only interesting piece of information it contains, is that Daava’s

arms were employed against the Vahlikas of Sindhu, who were com-

bining their forces to invade his territories. |

- The Bahlikas are generally admitted by the learned to be the Bactri-

ans, or people of Bulkh :—but here the expression sindhorjita vah-

likd, the ‘conquered Vahlikas of the Sindhw’ proves, that at the time of

Duava the Bactrian principalities extended into the valley of the

Indus,—and it further proves what we have been led to suspect from

the numerous coins with unknown Greek names in the Panjab, that

instead of being totally annihilated by the Scythians 120 years before

Christ, the descendants of the Greeks continued to rule perhaps for

a century or two after Christ, in the regions south of the Paropamisan

range. If the authority of a graven monument of high antiquity be

received as preferable to the variable readings of books, we should cor-

rect the ata@tat and aera of the Ramayana and of HEMACHANDRA’s

lexicon, to a1f#ar-

As in the Allahabad inscriptions, the pillar is called ‘ his arm of fame,’

and the letters engraved thereon are the typical cuts and wounds inflicted

on his enemies by his sword writing his immortal fame! Raja Doava

has left behind him at any rate, a monument of his skill in forging iron,

for the pillar is a well wrought circular shaft of iron, longer and nearly

as large as the shaft of the Berenice steamer !

Here follows the text as corrected by KAMALAKANTA, ina few

letters, which will be seen on comparing it with the plate ; the trans-

lation I have kept as nearly literal as it can be rendered, which makes

it difficult to follow.

Transcript of the Delhi Iron pillar Inscription.

1 garetaa odt aafa(ara) waa aHataaTAgares

afaat fafafed wea ates | g

9 dtat angurtuia waz feanfsraratieat aorofy

awa wafatudtantaa Sfaa: yd | R

eabtige BERGE RSE ey, = sit Rewe Et « oe ea

(aay £fe Iy 0.c9) Gree ERIWEZSG SB) “yt He YER Ue he eta lp 8 le & -)

tA gp OH?

c oy Ke PY) PPT bv! iPM Pee be MM di Be YE CAS up Woe ® IDLE OLD a

x DOPE de we gM, eS i> 2)g ve DE UY WES be I rie Beare yy Dien pis, rey 2

D Gait Yes WE) US DM Ue ede Peon’ lbp te web yr Bo eapee be wees eh ye, a B nha v.

veglerirty Stel SP Be gio Ue Wile tel igysid. Are: uy Wey Bi abe Ibs Paw ery ease RS >

ugha igxoun iy eoRP i ryatig cen yyng tmp eam

yPor hte is 2ne SOU eed Gauk ‘SjarGi pets avhk 2h

iE ey Re ad ulzye Fys®'a oe se gbRrrabblievsnrekes

PERVE Fy eeu Boy gee PK SR ug y pen tens go Rey

Vol VIL PUXXXDL

: RP YEPE RENAN EP OR F Rad ays Rig ime gg wh heb

; seeraiors oStg sine oa abd elu ype buyers hLByirpee uy ho yFeurc Sige

3 fad. ine @ ae

"“{tHA149gad 4 4Vv St Ne elaleal MOW! 47+ 8° NOILdI SVBOSNI

1838. ] Inscription on the Delhi Iron Pillar. 631

3 fasaa fess at acuatiarfsaarme aa a frat

ufaydaa: wa fa faa | z

4 widad ABaiRaNs By vawATaTaUEatavat

fuafitiaae ae: fata | 2 1 g

5 wha easifrag afecaaficre feat aaa aT

aqaent aafaa frat | : M

6 dard uiwara afaufeet aaa fram afe gestae

fromaaaiaeinia: wrfira: 1 3 4 €

Translation.

“1, By him, who learning the warlike preparations and entrenchments

of his enemies with their good soldiers and allies, a monument (or arm)

of fame engraved by his sword on their limbs,—who, a master of the

seven advantages’, crossing over (the Indus ?) so subdued the Viéhlikds

of Sindhu so that even at this day his disciplined force+ and defences

on the south (of the river) are sacredly respected by them.

~2, Who, as a lion seizes one animal on quitting hold of another,

secured possession of the next world when he abandoned this,—whose

personal existence still remains on the earth through the fame of his

(former) deeds, the might of whose arm, even though (he be) now at

rest (deceased), and some portion too of the energy of him who was

the destroyer of his foes,—still cleave to the earth.

3. By him, who obtained with his own arm an undivided sovereignty

on the earth for a long period, who (united in himself the qualities of) the

sun and moon, who had beauty of countenance like the full moon :—by

this same raja Duava, having bowed his head to the feet of Visunu

and fixed his mind on him, was this very lofty arm of the adored Visu-

Nu (the pillar) caused to be erected.”

Inscription from a temple of Varaha and a Dhwajastambha in the

vicinity of E’run or Airan in Bhopal.

Lieutenat ConoLty and Captain Burr started from Mhow, on an

exploring journey. They continued in company as far as Sehore, where

some copper-plates in Mr. WILKINSON’s possession occupied the atten-

* The Sapta sukhdni are the same as the saptdngani or seven limbs of govern-

ment, explained in the last inscription.

t Janavidhi, the pandit thinks to be ‘ a military post.’—I prefer simply dis-

ciplimed hody of men, or discipline.

632 Inscriptions on an image of [ JuLy,

tion of the former, while the latter hearing of a pillar at Airan hastened

off by dak to visit it, and was rewarded with the two inscriptions which

follow, and a few insulated names in various styles from the Airan pil-

lar and temple. Of the monuments he has kindly promised a full de-

scription ; the history of their origin as derived from the inscriptions

themselves however may be succinctly told :—

The temple was built by Daanya Visunu the confidential minister

of raja Marri Visunu the son of Hari VisHnu, grandson of Varvu’-

NA VISHNU and great grandson of INDRA Visunu; in the first year of _

the reign of raja Tarapdnt of Surdshtra (?): and

The pillar was erected by VaipaLa VisHnu the son of Hasri

VisHnu, also grandson of Varuna Visunu, and at the cost of

Duanya VisHnu on the 14th of Asarh in the year 165, in the reign

of Bupuacurta in Surdshtra, comprehending the country between

a river whose name, though partially erased, may be easily made out as

the Kalinda or Jumna and the Narmada, or Nerbudda.

Here is a new scion of the Gurra race of kings to be added to our

lists, and a well defined date, if we could but determine by what era it

should be interpreted. As yet however we must leave this point un-

settled, until, by comparison with other records, we may be able to

arrive at the solution of the problem.

Transcript of the mscription on the Varaha image.

_ wafta ULUSCH FAATATATAAT WaT Ss: | STAT qtreata

GAAS |

qa wea etudt CUAL AT eueal ALTAR TATE

uta aurefa uraafcra ena kedces quarafea: caw

ya UT GIAU ERR [A TMAH LITT aaatisrarcatarean |

WTI faviaisramrama aafaai ITE foquaraat

fem qeufaain tise fracaaqatay wang faeare feta

weg yananagay faurgqttwar BaICA ALISA

aay tuna aa! eqraaanfadane: Ae Ma ATA YAR

aqacfaent: aeeiaate frei: eatae alaqana acafaataar

THAME A yyfsurat a aaah _ araqeiraa arat

fast: UMIaaaT yaa HAUTaT qureau SHANALIAUY ALT

meartanrare: wana aera area | SATA TATe

Wy aaa (a) fe |

fe orurner- 7? be wpe wv? 44

Val Vil. PU XXX.

Sug QO SL i29OD hy IUOPS Dyp ross “ay

snes oS 3 Yinak Ore’ Gir bh uu he

-no ElUpy, BYEy ree(chavh Bz lviyu eR VR GUS brlvn (Nn sagul eyes teutita

ey Dsgpnnay Gl 23s =rae sea ~erhwenty Ga lp)sorn Bee AY bbh

(aes vyehn Yip ye ga emn wl 2B) Oba 30

As. Soc

ge)

tue

eae)

Jour.

” 7 a /

HOS Ses Be AY Sythe wea NAY A okey VHVWYUVWA 40 2Dew! ney NO NOILd 1YISN I]

1838. ] Vardha and a pillar at Eran near Sagar. 633

Translation.

«“ He is victorious! the boar-shaped god, who at the time of deliver-

ing the earth whirled round the mountains by thej erk of his tushes ;

from the increase of whose body have proceeded the three regions.

When the great raja TARAPANI, the very famous and beautiful, the

king of kings, governed the earth ; in the first year of his reign, on the

tenth day of Phalguna:—before his time the well known Duanya

VisuHNu the doer of many virtuous deeds, follower of the injunctions

of the vedas, obedient to his brother the late great raja MAtTri VisHnNu

(since departed to heaven) and favored by him—who obtained the good

fortune of the regency by public election, and through the grace of God ;—

famous as far as the four oceans, ever respectable, and victorious in many

battles with his enemies, the devoted worshipper of Khagavan,—who

was the son of Harr VisHNu, resembling his father,—the grandson of

Varuna Visunu, possessor of his father’s qualities,—great grandson of

Inpra Visanu of the Mattrdyandyakripabha race, the illustrious and

distinguished, observant of his religious duties and sacrifices with Sukta

(a hymn of the Rigveda)—a regular sacrificer, well read in the vedas,

and ashi among the brahmans.—By him (Duanya VisHNu) was

caused to be erected this new temple of Jagan-Narayana* Narayana,

in the form of VARa’Ha (the boar incarnation) at his own village of

Nerikona, in the reign, year, month, and day aforesaid.

Glory to the mistress of Brdhmanapura and the king to whom all

the people belong! (?)”

Inscription on a pillar near the same.

safe fapsqussqemafayrafaaqay: aaa: faua

fa (aa) FqWtUsHg: | Wa ugayyfanaatat Bal a suAA

See Attewiy weatrieas ward alex} wai

cara Tafa SAITAMA als TEST RATA LFA

aa TBE dawe arafeae vats qamtfatag aaaifaat

ayirerataay AMivaraqanastsae worm fuaat

arqarfiar qeafaa: wa frataaatae eingfagar

* Or Nardrayan who is himself the water of the universe.

+ The word is written corruptly ¢ryordasydn in the original.

t In the original it appears, aqaiarata on whomis the splendour of Yamund-

§ In the original corrupted to Qiwaw.

4K 2

634 Inscription on the Eran pillar. {Juxy,

efefeatt: wiatqada uaagtaat ferafeqat qaqeara

wsseqtaqat vqaqayaafarne Balwaraera

afar vie afanaeqasaa acafreutayaa

[TORt....] dat wafsenfsia aranfiar quifeanrer

VII: WRT Tite wTwvstea | Ta

Wesatatay easy [a] =fa |

Translation.

“ He is victorious ! (VisuNnv) the four-armed, omnipresent, the crea-

tor and preserver of the world, whose bed is the immense water of the

four oceans and whose ratha-ketu (chariot standard) is Garida.

On Thursday the thirteenth lunar day of the month of A’shadha of

the year 165 when the king Buypna Gu’pra who was the moon of good

administration, and resplendent in fortune and fame, governed the beau-

tiful country situated between the Kdlindi (Jumna) and the Narmada,

by his good qualities (derived) from the Lokapdlas*. In the afore-

said year of his dynasty, in the very month and day aforesaid : one

named VAIDALA VisHNu who was famous as far as the four oceans,

ever respectable, who by public election and through the favor of God

obtained the good fortune of the regency, who was devoted to Bhaga-

vin—the son of the father-resembling Hari Visunu; grandson of

the father’s-talent-possessing Varuna VisHNu,—the great grandson of

InpRA VISHNU, of the Mattvayandyakripabha race, a strict observer

of his religious duties, regular in sacrifices, reader of the veda, a very

rishi among brahmans+, By him (VarpaLa Visunv) this banner-

pillar was erected at the expense of DHanya Visunv,—for the pros-

perity of his race, in honor of JaANd<rpANaAt the distresser of the

Pinyajanas (Rakshas ).

Glory! to him who is a patriotic (prince) and to whom belong all

the people !”

Besides the principal inscription on the Hran pillar, there are as usua]

several names scratched in different hands and at different times ; four

of which I have selected as specimens, being the only ones in the more

ancient form of Nagari. They are inserted at the foot of Plate XXXI.

A, the first, wants something at the end: supplying a # conjectural-

ly it will ran—

* Upholders of the universe.

t These several epithets are almost literatim the same in both inscriptions.

~ VisHNU’.

a ae : ny s ¢ preety - SuraurBreiy age 43 ne

-) \)% Au Rhee ice Roe feb Oks bee Mes Fhe Re AS hein

cs Viulergege® hs baby oreo Ronn YG ot ataeo Ry

vip eee AL,

os ? NS

VIN) igs Yo

You. VI, P2_XXKI

SAU GIR F

Ade

sheer npye rel te Rav below heen Phaaatipee fin i

enel are ph Wey Ree cA B oun abeek@e = dl bisa 2

MD HAE

A fis

Sy 4

Dad A

Fay

TFA yan 37

“3NN

J. Prinsep Luh

3, w0d Bul eve K megmal ere Che obts thal bent cobs

‘lynyuS wire de pner 7 Oe aR eg Ben Ie eval! PGs

INI Oz alt AG ob cynviuphy LOR a PF Ub elie

ay!

WEB eGargwhy PGS Gigpes

2 ay

c UAT Yay ay

SMALL INSCRIPTIONS FROM_THE ERUN PILLAR naar

—

1838. ] Inscription from Ghost near Jaunpur. 635

HVAC WTR UAT CHT

«¢ Well executed in sculpture, by Kalabhuja Shambhu the Shanka or

stone-cutter.”’

The second, marked B, is hardly legible in the middle, but I think it

may be read : 1 Ae

Waa aU dag fafad

“ Written by SAMANTA PAUTRA (the grandson of the general) —the

captain,”

The third, C, is very plain and distinct qiaH™7 Stay a4, “ the name

of Samanta Dosha :’ but I should be inclined to think the “gy intended

for aq, and the name Samanta deva, as dosha, (a fault) would hard-

ly be applied as a name.

The fourth, D, is insignificant ; the letters are all plain, but the sense

incomplete Waa Baz (a fafad) ‘ written by Kuara the son of the

unfortunate.’

Inscription from Ghost near Jaunpur.

Captain Cunnineuam has furnished no further particulars of this

fragment than are contained in the heading of the facsimile, a long slip

of paper taken from a detached stone stated to be broken off at either end.

After an invocation to Hari Visunu, it commences the usual eulogy

on the glorious exploits of a raéja named Daaranrt Vardua, and from

the style there must evidently have been a long sequel, which if it could

be recovered might give us some new information on a period not long

anterior to the Muhammadan invasion.

Being in verse, the pandit who assisted me in deciphering it has been

easily able to supply the hiatus in the first line. I have blundered in

copying the facsimile, but by the letter references the order of the lines

may be traced.

aa: | aatadaate fetutefa fae orfad uray wre

Zurn faraaquat aafaxresa | a: EMITENIEA:

yasifasatqeat RUNG Fld qwsast weg usd ea

Saretesr: hh

mata: wane ufedifram deg usazia fraae

are | aaafyanad Saiaeamaatantatad ase

am uu

636 Additions to Bactrian Numismatics [ Jury,

Surat froaal qaeTHIz Sy SST MATa SAT

warafycaaacar ufsaze | Zara etaasrstrtatate

afsaifrarmfanat aria csswatcaacfayswar are

Uw ys I

aare aAtaataat fasat.......... 8S FAT GTI

Keres. Poatl . Taal teraent

Translation.

«“ Adoration ! (May he) who, when on all sides all earthly things were

destroyed (by the deluge) floated under the semblance of a sleeping

yogi to the insulated fig-iree which alone remained for the redress

of the calamity ;—who with ever increasing strength subdueth the

sun-scorched earth at the end of every kalpa ;—may he, girding up his

loins, remove from you the fear of the world,—H art the god of gods !

There was a raja named DHARANA VaR&uHA illuminating the hori-

zon with the fame of his appropriating the prosperity of his enemies ;—

satisfactory in qualities ; without blemish; and renowned for subduing

other kings.

By his army whose elephants, well trained and of moistened temples,

darkened the horizon, as they rushed to the battle-field miry with the

blood, marrow and serum of mangled limbs,—whence the sparks of the

concussing battle-axes (peti) flashed like lightning on all sides—by

this army has he brought back the royal Lakshmi with the respect due

to the wives of his enemies !”’

(The rest mutilated and unintelligible).

VI.—Additions to Bactrian Numismatics, and discovery of the Bac-

trian Alphabet. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. &e.

It is not an easy matter to gratify my numismatological readers with a

plate of entirely new Bactrian coins so frequently as they would wish ;

for, independently of the time and labour requisite for engraving them,

the subject, as to new names at least, may be looked upon now as near-

ly exhausted. Opportunities however still occur of verifying doubtful

readings, of supplying names where they were erased or wanting in

former specimens, and of presenting slight varieties in costume, atti-

tude, and other particulars, which tend to complete the pictorial history

of the Bactrian coinage.

For these several objects I enjoyed a most favorable opportunity

during the visit of General Ventura to Calcutta last winter; his second

1838. ] and correction of Bactrian Alphabet. 637

collection, though possessing few types or names absolutely new, boast-

ed of many very well preserved specimens of the small silver coinage

of Menanper, APoLLovorus, Lysias, ANTIMACHUS, PHILOXENES,

&c. The General most liberally conceded to me, from his abundant

store, several that were wanting to my own cabinet both of silver and

copper, and he placed the rest also at my disposal, to draw, examine and

describe as I might feel inclined. Unfortunately I refused to take

charge of the Indo-Scythic gold series for examination, finding nothing

particularly new among them, the consequence of which was that the

whole were stolen by some sharper at the hotel where the General was

residing, and none have been since recovered! I am now speaking of

last January !—Since then I have received a coin and drawings of seve-

ral others from Genl. Court ;—also two or three from Genl. ALLARD;

and latterly the whole produce of Capt. Burnes’ search in the neigh-

bourhood of Cabul has been entrusted to my care. It is the very latest

arrival from him, (or rather from a valuable member of his expedition,

Dr. Lorp,) consisting of two beautiful coims of EucrarTipgs, that

stimulates me at once to give forth all that have accumulated in my

Bactrian drawer since I last wrote on the subject. I must give Dr.

Lorv’s coins the first place because one of them is perhaps the most

curious and important that has yet fallen into our hands.

Plate XX VII. contains etchings of both of these coins to which I

would thus draw prominent attention :—they are copied from sketches

faithfully executed by M. Masson, aided by sealing-wax impressions

enclosed in Capt. Burnes’ letter tome, which were however partially

injured by their long journey. Dr, Lorn thus describes the place and

circumstances of their discovery.

“ Ido myself the pleasure to forward drawings, of two coins which

(with many others of less value) I have been so fortunate as to find

during my late visit to Zurkistan. ‘The drawings have been made by

Mr. Masson but should they not prove sufficient I shall be happy to

forward you not only these but all my stock for examination. The

double-headed coin I found at Tash Korghan, the other at Kunduz.”

Having been kindly promised a sight of the coins themselves, I have

purposely reserved space in the plate for the insertion of facsimiles to

be hereafter executed by my medal-ruling machine.

Figure 2. I need not particularly describe as, though new to us, it

has been published from other specimens in France. ‘The reverse has

a naked figure of APoLLo in lieu of the Dioscurt.

Fig. 1. Is an unique medallion (that is, a tetradrachma) of Eucra-

TIDES.

638 _ Additions to Bactrian Numismatics [JuLy,

Obverse. A fine youthful head and bust of the king wearing a plain

steel helmet, with the bands of the diadem protruding behind. On the

area above and below—BAZIAEYS MEFAS EYKPATIAHS in the nomina-

tive case. ©

Reverse. Busts ofa man anda woman looking to the right : hair sim-

ple and without diadem ; legend above HAIOKAEOY=, below KANAOAIKHS.

Supplying the word vos, we have here the parentage of EucraTipEs

developed in a most unexpected way : ‘ The great king EucRATIDES, son

of HELiocLes and Kantopice.’ The former is a well known Greek

name, but it is evident from the absence of title and diadem that he was

a private person, and yet that his son having found his own way to the

throne, was not ashamed of his unregal origin. The name of his mother,

K ANLODIKE however, is unknown and is decidedly not Greek. From the

sound I have little hesitation in hazarding that it is the Sanskrit name

aaetfaat Kamaldédhikd,—meaning ‘superior to Kamala, or Venus,

(alias ‘ fairer than the lily.”) This name in the vernacular of the present

day would be pronounced exactly as the Greek legend has it, kKaunla

a lily, Kaunladhikt, and I think, bearing in mind our other evidence of

the state of the vernacular dialects in the date of AsoKA, there can

be little doubt of such being the correct derivation of the anomalous

name thus adopted into the Greek.

EvcraTIpvEs then was the son of a Greek officer married to a lady

of the country, whom we may set down as of Hindu parentage and

language; and we may thence argue that a dialect mainly derived

from the Sanskrit was then used in Bactria, or at least in the Panjgb,

as in the present day, though now diluted to a large extent with Persian

and Arabic introduced along with the Muhammadan religion.

In further proof of this position, we can now also adduce a Pak in-

scription in the old character procured by Captain Burnes from the

northern side of the great chain of mountains, near Badakshin ; (which

will be published in Plate XXXYV. of the next number,) to say nothing

of the Pal reverses of the Agathocles and Pantaleon coins from the

same region.

The natural inference is that we should seek the explanation of the

legends on the reverses of the Bactrian coins rather through the medi-

um of Pali or Zend, as I attempted in 1835, than as has been preferred

by M. Jacquet of Paris, through the medium of Syriac and Chaldaic,

with what success I have not'the means of judging*.

* It will be proper here to notice that in 1836, M. Jacquer, obligingly for-

warded to me a lithographed page of his readings of the Bactrian alphabet and

Nots.—Since the accompanying page was printed off, I have

received a letter from Captain CunnincHam who, having Dr. Lorp’s

coin under his eye, is convinced that the reading Kanlodice is erroneous.

He was first struck with the slanting stroke of the letter n being

placed in a wrong direction. (N.B. This is not the case in Mr.

Masson’s drawing of the coin, whence the engraving was exactly

copied. ‘There was nothing therefore to raise suspicion of its correct-

ness in my mind, as the sealing-wax impression had been flattened by the

journey, over half of this very name.) On minuter examination the first

stroke of the supposed n appeared to Captain CunninGaam to be

detached from the rest. He therefore read it as the 1 of Kai and the

remainder then became very clearly AAOAIKHS the genitive of a genuine

Greek female name.

I have not the smallest doubt that Captain CUNNINGHAM is right,

although in the sealing-wax impression before me, the 14 are actually

joined below, and there is no cross stroke to the A of AAOAIKH2.

My speculations therefore of the Indian origin of EucraripEs’

mother fall to the ground; and the reader is requested to pass over

them. The unregal station of his parents still remains a matter of

probability, on the grounds urged in the text.

f 7 ie?

P + ~

“ .

" ete ~

» .

. ae a@e ba

¥ * °. a r

fe Wat 4% ‘ah

= , ee

PS BOP 2 * .

rg ? - rN i 4

F ee RN. Say Wee ee

kad ¥ ’ “ $ hie

PB mee hee ek Re ee

. xd ¥ 1 eae

; 5 “a » Ks

, PS hi wes \ die ae

t ’ ~

Jour As. Soc.

BACTRIAN COINS.

SU BVIEWY

PALURMES

Vol. VP XXVIT

‘ : F

RAW AAC)

7 . -

4 ** - j 4

f * ‘

a P . “-

. 7 hint i alight

wits OS ig he

, T. ‘

<< - ee ¥

: E : f

: ‘ : ; Poke. otal. rie. " 5 ey } ’

2 ayia ah ane b i oa, sm j saat Sh ee ee Nn Aah,

; _ . ? a Pi a 2 pee ee a 4 ‘ af rer

ve fetes Ah aie ARS ge alk es MON ear ke mg ho ak» bapa onan gerd) = erent Me ei eRe Ae,

, oe, rb), ye Fite, Rare ae hee ie Adee Pek ade.

AP) es AS) Se sama fel SD,

a rf 4 an +s “ j ivf ah ot: pe ¥ Dy

1838. ] Revision of the Baetrian Alphabet. 639

I have long been pledged to my readers (and to the critics of the

Meerut magazine in particular) to give them a new alphabet for these

Bactrian legends, and I think the time has now arrived when I may

venture to do so; or at least to make known the modifications which

have been elicited by the abundance of fresh names and finely preserved

specimens which have passed under my eye since that epoch. It must

be remembered that the only incontestable authority for the determina-

tion of a vowel or consonant is, its constant employment as the equiva-

lent of the same Greek letter in the proper names of the Bactrian kings.

Beyond this we have only analogies and resemblances to other al-

phabets to help us, and the conjectural assumption of such values for

the letters that occur in the titles and epithets of royalty as may furnish

an admissible translate of the Greek in each and every case.

It will be my object presently to shew that this can be done, as far as

the coins are concerned, by means of the Sanskrit or rather the Pala

language ; but in the first place it will be more convenient to bring

forward my revised scheme of the alphabet as far as it is yet matured.

Unfortunately the exceeding looseness of orthography and kalligra-

phy which could not but prevail when one foreign language, (for such

it was to the Greek die-cutters), was attempted to be rendered by the

ear in another character, equally foreign to the language and to the

scribes, that with abundance of examples before me it is impossible to

select the true model of some letters for the type-founder !

_ I begin with the initial vowels :

9,4. This symbol continues to occupy the place of the vowel a in

all the new names, lately added to our list, beginning with the Greek

A, of which we have now no less than seven examples. The other

short initials appear to be formed by modifications of the alif as in the

Arabic : thus.

¥, 1 e, is constantly employed for the = of Greek names.

1 u, is found following it in the word Eucratides, as though put for

the Greek r, but other evidence is wanting.

7,22 though seldom met with on the coins is common in the in-

scriptions, and by analogy may be set down as 7.

.) and 2, d, an, is employed in words beginning with an.

The medials seem to be formed in all cases by a peculiar system of

names. In the modifications I now propose, however, I do not borrow one letter

from his list, because in fact he has followed quite another track. His reading of

PANY is, myrvd, a Syriac word I believe for prince or noble. It was this

which led to the expression of doubt of my own former alphabet, and to the just

satire thereon in the Meerut Magazine.

4 1

640 Revision of the Buetrian Alphabet. [Jury,

diacritical marks; of these the 7 is the best determined, being found

applied to almost all the consonants in the form ofa small stroke cross-

ing the letter, The @ is uncertain; it may be a prolongation below in

the 7,—a foot stroke cr mdira. The e, I judge from the Manikyala

inscription, to be a detached stroke behind and abeve ; in a few cases

only joined. The wmay be the loop so often seen at the foot of the

written letters. Thus we have ‘h ka, -n ké, *h ki, Kke, ko? ku,

&c. I feel it to be a little premature thus to assign sounds without any

positive authority : but it was from a similar assumption of the value of

its vowel marks, that I was led to the discovery of the Indian pillar

alphabet. , |

With regard to the consonants, I ought perhaps to follow the order

of the Hebrew alphabet, but as the Janguage to be expressed is allied

to the Sanskrit, it may be more convenient to analyze them in the order

of the latter. | | ‘

‘n, ka. This letter on’ further scrutiny I find invariably to represent

K; and its place is never taken on the coins by “ as I formerly sup-

posed. It occurs also with the vowel affix ¢ as >) ké ; also, but seldom,

with the u,as J} Au; and with the subjoined x as L kra. In the

compounds, kla, kit, a form is adopted more like the Hebrew Gin

(quere ..) @, &: there are two or three examples in support of it.

S, kh, is limited as such to the name of Antimachou—but I find it |

also representing the g in Abagasou. In the written tablets we have §

and S-and f seemingly identical with it, yet the latter with the vowel z, f,

is used in some places for dhé (intended for the inflected ¢. ?)—There

is no small affinity between [, S, and 4, {Q, the kA of the old Sanskrit

written invertedly.

Tt, v, #, g orgh ?—I place these forms here because they occur se-

veral times in the tablets and they bear some resemblance to the g of

the Pehlevi.

Of the Sanskrit palatials neither the Greek nor the Chaldaic alphabets —

contain any proper examples—the ch and j are modified to z and ts—

which letters we must expect to find substituted for the Sanskrit class

W&M.

_T,, cha; &, chha. The first of these forms is found at the close

of a series of words terminating each in the same vowel inflection, ’, e ;

which makes me suppose it to be the Sanskrit conjunction cha, uniting a

string of epithets in the locative case. As yet I have no stronger argu-

ment for its adoption. ;

SM, or 4, sa (tsa?). The form of the Chaldaic ts x, agrees well with

the first ; indeed in many coins of Azes the Bactrian form is identical with

1838.) Revision of the Bactrian Alphabet. 641

the Chaldaic ; I find that in every case this letter may be eal represented

by the Sanskrit st 7, and indeed in the early coins of APoLLopoTus,

&c. its form 3 seems to be copied from the ancient Sanskrit E, reversed

in conformity with the direction of the writing. The only inflection I

have met with of this letter is J ju. )

I can make no discrimination between cerebrals and dentals ; because

the Greek names translated have of course no such distinctions, but

from the variety of symbols to which the force of d and ¢ must be

ascribed, I incline to think the alphabet is provided with a full comple-

ment, though it is in the first place indeed almost a matter of option

which letter to call d, ¢, r, or ”, they are all se much alike—thus for

t we have 71, ‘1, 4, and “4, and with the vowel z, 4, 4, f. .

As the equivalent of d again we have the same ‘1, “, “, and also

S, €, P: and for dhi %, and %, the former evidently “| with 1 subjoined ;

the latter quasi ¢é¢ or ddi : sometimes it is nearer \ r?.

I do not attribute this ambiguity to the letters themselves so much as

to the carelessness and ignorance of the writers, who might pronounce

the foreign name Apollodotus, indifferently Apaldtada, Apaladata,

and even Apalanata. Being obliged to make a choice, I assume as in

my former paper ;—

7, 1, for ta, whence ‘1 td, “ti, “J or T te, and A tra?

7, tta, tha, % tit, 7, OF 4, the, but in fact these forms are as com-

monly used for dh, and its inflections.

? ‘1, §, for da, nda: 1,4, di; T de, J du; 3 dh, % dht.

1, £,#a. I do not perceive any indications of the other nasals, and

indeed they seem to be omitted when joined to another consonant : but

I find some thing corresponding to the anuswara attached below the

vowel a, and before consonants it seems represented by m, as % mcha ?

% mri, & mba ?

PD pa. The first of the labials is one of the best established letters. It

has been discovered also inflected as Is pi, K pes J’ pu; and united

with either A or s in ‘h pha or spa: also with Ui in *h, pli, and in other

combinations which will be noticed as they are brought forward. I

suspect further that in uh, -F, we have pda, and in 4, pra: but the data

are uncertain.

_ ¥,, pha or fa? Ihave no stronger reasons than before for continuing

this value to ( :—it seems in some few cases to usurp the place of v ;

it is inflected also, as ¥ fe, f fu, € fra.

2 or ao, ba? is still undetermined; in the doubtful name above

quoted Aparazor, it seems to be replaced by ‘1 or. h—the aspirate is

also unknown.

a RE:

642 Revision of the Bactrian Alphabet. [Juby,

vu ma ¥. This letter admits of no doubt whatever ; but in the Menander

form, w, I now recognise the inflection me, corresponding with the Greek

name more closely.—Mz is written Y ; md, Y or 7 ; and ¥ may be mu.

The second or what may be called the printed form of m has a consi-

derable affinity in form with the old Sanskrit § or WY, whence it may be

almost as readily derived as the Burmese form of Pali, ©. |

A ya. This letter is unchanged: it invariably replaces z, and y, and

sometimes 7 where the latter would be expressed by the Sanskrit 4 or

uL- It may perchance have been modified from the letter, for in some

examples it is turned up on the sides thus, w; the inflected form * yz

is of common occurrence: / yu, less common.

m, 4, 5, ra, It is necessary to preserve these three representatives of 7 ;

I incline to think that the prolongation below may be the mdtra or

the long @ inflection, 7d; for the first form is used in Ermaiou where

there is no intervening vowel. It is only distinguishable from d by

the foot-mark of the latter, which seems to be often omitted notwith-

standing: its inflections are 4, 4, 9, 7i, re, ru.

qd, la. Further acquaintance has taught me that this is the only

representative of a in Greek names : the instances wherein the Z before

appeared to be replaced by U have been disproved by duplicate coins.

The inflected form dA, &, has numerous examples among our new ac-

quisitions. 1 de, also occurs in inscriptions.

4 va, and 4 v2, rest on strong but not undisputable authority, as will

be seen below.

cu, 1, ha, has been removed from its former position as 7 on ample

grounds ; and the value now assigned has I think equally strong support

—though as far.as Greek names are concerned it rests solely on the

initial syllable of Heliocles, %, he. There is, again a similarity worthy

of remark between © inverted, and the old Sanskrit ha, [-, (.

Pp, sa. To this letter I gave the sound of o on the former occasion,

because I found it the general termination of nominatives masculine

in Zend and Pali—replacing the Sanskrit visarga, ah or as. Since

then I have found the same letter (affected with the vowel z) in two

Greek names as the equivalent of s¢, P, and I am too happy on other

considerations to adopt this as its constant value; whether the dental s

of the Sanskrit will best represent it remains to be seen, but the nearest

approximation in form occurs in the Hebrew p s.- there are certainly

two other characters, ‘fT, or 7, and 11, having the force of s or sh. The

former I should presume to be the Sanskrit sha w from its likeness

to the old form m. The latter, 1, may be a variation of A for which it is

sometimes used, but rather by change of the Greek z to 3, than as

being the same letter, for elsewhere it takes the place of the Greek 3

1838. ] _ Titles on the Bactrian Coins. 643

as in AZIAIZOY, while A occurs for Z in the same word. In form it

seems to be the Chaldaic nm, or th soft. The inflections of these letters

yet observed are, P st, P se, P su; Ti shi, fF) shu; and their combinations

with consonants are numerous,— sta, § std; DO sma?; 7 sta,B smi?

It will be naturally expected thatthe alterations I have been compelled

to adopt in the value of many of the above letters must produce consi-

derable modifications in my former interpretation of the Bactrian legends.

Indeed when I look back at my attempt of 1835, I must confess that

it was very unsatisfactory even to myself. I was misled by the Nak-

shi-rustam trilingual inscription, wherein the title of king of kings has

been uniformly read as malakdén malaka, though I balanced between

this and the term mahardo, having found pao on the Indo-Scythic

series. But, once perceiving that the final letter might be rendered as

sa, which is the regular Pili termination of the genitive case, I threw

off the fetters of an interpretation through the Semitic languages, and

at once found an easy solution of all the names and the epithets through

the pliant, the wonder-working Pali, which seems really to have held an

universal sway during the prevalence of the Buddhist faith in India.

The best test of the superiority ofa Pali interpretation will be foundin

its application to the several royal titles of the Greek kings, which were

previously quite unintelligible. ‘The first of these is simply Bastarox

which is constantly rendered by PY NW mahardjasa, the Pali form

of aeicisiey. It is true that there is some doubt whether the long

vowel 4, is here applied to the A and 7; but we have long since been

accustomed to the omission of this and even other vowels in the Satrap

coins of Surashtra. The word is often written PY5.tU, whence I

have supposed the dot or dash below to stand for 4.

The next title is BASIAEQE BAZIAEQN, which we find replaced by

PAIL PLU mahardjasa rdjardjasa, a perfectly sound and pro-

per expression according to the idiom of the Sanskrit. But in one class

of coins, that of Azxs, there are some very well preserved specimens

in which the second part of the title is PYOAM which is evidently

vajatirdjasa (or adhi for the letter has a turn at foot and may be meant

for % dhi), the regular tisifactts~ of the paramount sovereigns of

India. The syllable dhi is often written “1 t, \ rt or even f & or gi(?)

but the vowel 7 shews what is meant.

To the title of king of kings is generally added on the Greek side

the epithet merAaOr, for which we have an addition in Bactrian of the

word P1vu mahatasa, one of the forms of the Pali genitive of mahdn

(or mahat) great, which makes only mahatah aeq@ : in Sanskrit. The

full title then is thus found to be mahdérdjasa rdjadhirdjasa mahatasa,

644 Regal titles on the Bactrian Coins. {Jury,

which is far preferable to the clumsy and unsatisfactory malakao kak-

kao maluko of my former paper, now rectified by the rejection of “as ka.

The next title in the list is saTHPOs, for which we have rathera dubious

word of four letters either PPP dadatasa, or P1P.£ nundatasa, the for-

‘mer equivalent to egq: the bestower of dina, a word comprehending

protection as well as charity ;—the latter to @*aq: ‘ of the giver of

pleasure.’

The epithet of next frequency is ANIKHTOY the unconquered, which

is translated by PILHP) apavihatasa (Sans. yufssaw) the unbeaten,

or invincible. It is this word principally which leads me to make F va,

and to distinguish it from “1 ¢and dA i, with the latter of which I

before confounded it.

. Next in order comes the somewhat similar expression NIKH#0POY;

but the correct definition of this epithet is preserved in PYZAM ja-

yadharasa, the bearer of victory. In one instance the dh is written

separately ‘POPVA4; in others (like the dh of adhi) it is POAAY, jaya-

darasa, but there can be little doubt of the sense ; and this word is a

strong confirmation of the value of the letter 4, or Y ja.

There is a second epithet of nearly the same signification which is

common enough on the Seleucidan coins, but comparatively rare in

those of Bactria, NIKATOPOs. ‘This epithet was found on the unique

coin of AmynTas of which Col. Stacy was unfortunately robbed, and

on one or two others. In the Bactrian translation the same wordis used

in every case as for NIKH#OPOr, namely, PUZAS jayadharasa, the pos-

sessor of victory, or the victorious.

_ There remains but one epithet to be accounted for (for e1aonaTOPOz

of the APoLLODOTUS unique coin does not seem to be translated) :—it

occurs on the coins of HELIocLES, SPALURMES, and ARCHELIES; I mean

AIKAIOr ‘the just-—a rare epithet in any but the Arsacidan line

of kings.—This is everywhere rendered by PHYS dhamikasa (Sans.

ufana) the exact expression required, and one constantly applied to

Indian kings. |

I am wrong in saying that the epithets are here exhausted, for on the

unique coin of Agathocleia in Dr. Swiney’s possession, there is a singular

epithet ozorponor ‘heavenly dispositioned,’ yet unaccounted for : of

this the two or three first letters are lost, and the last two P“ ¢asa may

terminate devamatasa or some such simpletranslation. It is a curious

fact that the name of the queen does not appear to be feminine in the

Bactrian legend ; and the title mahardjasa is also in the masculine.

There is another expression on a coin of Spalurmes, viz. “ king’s

brother,” 2MAATMOZ AIKAIOY AAEAGOY TOT BAZIAEQS, the Bactrian

1838.} Bactrian transcript of Greek names. 645

translation of which at first seemed inexplicable, but by means of another

coin I think I have solved the enigma, as will be presently explained.

Another expression for the ‘ great king of kings’ is met with in oné

example only, as far as my information goes ; namely, in the rude square

coin of Spalirises, of which four specimens have passed through my

hands :—here the expression runs PHA PLY maharajasa mahata-

kasa (quasi @eraeae) ; but no great stress can be laid on such rude

specimens. |

Having thus satisfactorily disposed of the regal titles, we may place

once more under review the whole of the Greek names with their Bac-

trian transcripts collated from a multitude of specimens.

Greek name. Bactrian. Bactrian in Roman character.

AZOY PA <Ayasa, (pronounced Ajasa. te

AZIAIZOY¥ PNAAD Aytlishasa.

AMIOAAOAOTOY PUI) -— Apaladatasa.

ATA@OKAEQZ (found only in the old Sanskrit) Y / CO) a E

ATAOOKAEIAS PIL PHY Fakasaglitasa, (or yasa.)

ANTIMAXOT PSsutl ‘Anti-makhasa.

ANTIAAKIAOT PIHAINY Anti-alikidasa.

AMYNTOY — PAY) | Amitasa.

APXEAIOY (unique, Bactrian name erased)

ABATAZOY PSI) Abakhashasa.

EXEFATIAOS . PIALIY Hukratidasa.

EPMAIOY PAUMT = FErmayasa.

HAIOKAEQS PACANY Helayaglayasa.

AIOMHAOY PIWAT Tayamidasa.

AY=l1Or PPA or PHPA Lisiasa, or Lisikasa.

MAYTOY PIS Ma-asa. (or P/ Y mdyusa.)

MENANAPOYT éLw or PeEW Medanasa or Menanasa. |

#IAOZENOY PePdhor Pepdh Pilusinasa or Plijasinasa.

Then follow a class of coins in which the names are either quite dif-

ferent on either side, or the Greek is intended for a transcript or trans-

lation of the native appellation. |

‘ ONONOY (of Vonones) Prtdh Spalahdrasa(or Balahérasa? )

SMAATPIOY (or 2UAAYMO2) PUsYarh Spalafarmasa.

SNAAIPISOY PNAdh Spalirishasa.

Then the group of the Ferres, or Phraates dynasty, if we may so

eall it, of which some new specimens will be introduced presently

TNAOSEPPOT ‘PuLe PAS’ Farahetasa nandatasa.

rONAOQSAPOY Pe PAS? Farahetasa gandadharasa.

HPONAZSSEPPOYT 436 PRAT -Fharateklisanadharasa ?

646 Legends on Bactrian Coins. [Juxy,

but it may be doubted whether all these are not in reality the same

name Pt? Farahetasa coupled with the title corresponding to

SOTHPOS Written in a loose manner.

On the reverse of the coins of the second HermMZvs (or perhaps the

third) having a Hercules for reverse, commences another series of native

names,forming what we have designated theKadphises or Kadaphes group.

After the change from EPpmMAIOr on the obverse, to KAA#IzOr, We have

still precisely the same reverse as before, and it is preserved through a

numerous series ;—the title of mah4rajais not to be found, nor is it easy

to see where to commence either the Greek reading KO20VAD KAA®@I-

ZOV XOPavov or the Bactrian PPHADPTAP PhAY HIS +eus which

may be transcribed dhama + rata Kujulakasa sabashakha (?) Kada-

phasa:—in this reading if we can make out nothing else there are at

least the two names Kosoula (also written Kozulo and Kozola) and

Kadphizes (also written Kadaphse and Kadphises) accounted for. The

distinctions on the small coin of KOPANOY ZA@OY KAA®EC 1 am una-

ble as yet to make out for want of further samples.

Connected with the same family we then come to the long inscription

on the Mokadphises coins which may be read by comparison of a great

many examples :— .

TePN hy J Pavty Put PALP PAIZA PLOY

Mahérajasa rajadhirajasa sabatracha thacha mahiharasa dhi ma-

kadphi8asa nandata.

‘ Of the great sovereign, the king of kings both here and every

where seizing the earth, &, MoKAnppuisss, the saviour ?’ |

I do not insist upon any of these epithets sabatra mahidharasa, for

in fact they vary inevery specimen. The dhi also looks in many coins

more like dha, quasi dhama Kadphisasa. On some the reading is ra-

ther sabalasa saviratasa mahichhitasa (adifaa: sovereign?) Onsome

gold coins again the name more resembles PONE vavahima Kad-

phisasa, agreeing with the Greek 00 HMO KAA®ICHC,

It remains only to apply my theory of the Bactrian alphabet to the

inscriptions on the cylinders and stone slabs extracted from the topes at

Manikydla, &c. but this is a task of much more serious difficulty and

one not to be done off hand as all the rest has been !—I must therefore

postpone the attempt until I am better prepared with my lesson ; and

meantime I will proceed to describe briefly the contents of

Plate XXVIII.

Fig. 1. is a small silver Euthydemus in Captain Burnzs’ collec-

tion : it resembles exactly the medallions already published of the same

prince. Weight, 62 grs. See Pl. XXV. Vol. IV. fig. 1,

1838.] New Bactrian Coins, Plate XXVIII. 647

Fig. 2. is a hemidrachma of Demetrius also belonging to Captain

‘Burnes. See one figured from General VEnTuRA’s collection, Vol.

DV. Fl. XXV.. fig. 2.

fig. 3, a silver coin of Antialcidas, presented to me by Ceaeeah

VenTurA. Execution very good. Weight 104 grains.

Obverse. BAZIAEQS NIKH&OPOT ANTIAAKIAOY. Head of the king

with a flat helmet shaped like a cocked hat :—chlamys on the shoul-

ders, and diadem seen under the hat.

Reverse. Bactrian legend PIHWAIND PIs wt PL. mahé-

rajasajayadharasa Antiahkidasa. Jupiter seated holding a small figure

of victory :—at his feet to the right, the forepart of a small elephant

with trunk elevated. Monogram on the left composed of P and < *,

Fig. 4. a similar drachma of Lysias, belonging to General Ven-

TURA: unique.

Obverse. BAZIAEQS ANIKHTOY ArziOr. Head of the king, with

the Demetrius helmet, shaped like an elephant’s head.

Reverse. Bactrian legend, PIP PAID PLU mahdrajasa

apavihatasa Lisiasa. (The copper square pieces have Lisikasa /.

Hercutss naked standing, with club and lionskin, as on the coins of

DEMETRIUS.

Figs. 5, 6. Two varieties of Mrnanpsr, not yet depicted in the

journal, given to me by General VENTuRA, who has many of a similar

nature. In one the prince wears a handsome helmet, in the other he

has the simple diadem. The reverse of both agrees with the one

engraved in Pl. XXVI. Vol. IV. except that Minerva looks in the

contrary direction.

He iocres, king of Bactvia.

Fig. 7. The first coin of HeLiocieEs which I have yet seen in India,

It belongs to General VenTuRA : a square copper or bronze piece in

excellent preservation.

Obverse. BASIAEQS AIKAIOY HAIOKAEOYS. Diadem’d head of the

‘just king, HutiocLes,’ somewhat similar in features to KuCRATIDES,

Reverse. Bactrian legend, PACAAY PHY 3 Pinu mahdrajasa

dhamikasa Heliyaklayasat: an elephant equipped with howdah and

trappings walking to the right, monogram =.

Fig. 8. A less perfect coin of the same king presented by the Gene-

ral to myself.

* N. B. The etching of this coin is a total failure : the plate was laid by for

several months and the acid would then barely touch it. In retracing it the native

engraver has quite wandered from my original, and I perceive it too late for

alteration on more than half the edition of the plate.

+ The letter 2 might be better read Sra; @ Sri: which would give a San-

skrit version of the name,—hélyasriyasya, ‘having a sun-like prosperity.’

648 Additions to Bactrian [JuLy,

In lieu of the head of Hexiocres, the obverse bears an elephant,

naked, walking to the left, Greek legend as above. The reverse is

irrecoverably lost.

It is perhaps unnecessary here to retract my former doubts of the

existence of a HetiocLEs in the Bactrian dynasty, since they have

long been removed by the account of silver medals in France. We

lave as yet seen none but these two copper specimens in India, but the

probability is that both silver and copper might be found in Bactria

proper, to the north of the Hindu dush or Imaus.

An opinion has been started by Mionwner in opposition to many

European numismatists that HeLriocLes was no other than Eucrati-

pers the second, the parricide. The surname of AIKAIOz so unsuitable

to such a character he supposes given through fear or adulation ; which

I agree with M. R. pe Rocuetre in thinking too great an anomaly to

be allowable: but without seeking to account for this staggering cir-

cumstance, we can now help M. Mrownner to a very powerful argument

in his favor from the unique coin of Dr. Lorp described in a former

part of this paper, which proves that Euvcraripgs’ father was a HeLio-

CLES; and we know that it was common to call an eldest son by his

grandfather's name, as is indeed universally the custom to the present

day both in eastern and western countries.

Fig. 9. I have introduced this duplicate of the inp mutilated

coin depicted in fig. 8. Pl. XXI. Vol. IV. among the then doubtful

group, because General VENTuRA’s present specimen exhibits the

name in the Bactrian, PA), ayasa, and thus proves it to belong to

the abundant series of AZES’ coins.

Fig. 10. is a square copper coin of Lysias kindly added to my cabi-

net by General VENTURA.

It is in better preservation than any before published.

Obverse. BASIAEOS ANIKHTOY Arz!or, Head of Lysras, with dia-

dem. Mronner says of a similar coin ‘ représenté en Hercule, la

massue sur l’epaule gauche’—but I do not perceive these characteristics

very distinctly.

Reverse. Bactrian legend PHhA PAVED PLY mahardjasa

opavihatasa lisikasa, < of the unconquered king Listha.’

I perceive that both Mionnet and M Raovt pe Rocuetre give

to Lysras the square coins of Spatyrizs or Spaturmus; though there

is no resemblance whatever between them. M. Raovur pz Rocuxtre

writes in the Journal des Savants: Mars 1836, p. 186;

“ Cette autre médaille de Lysius différe sous tous les rapports de

celles que nous possédions déja du méme prince: elle est restée incon-

1838. ] Numismatology, Plate XXVIII. 649

nue* a tous les savants et voyageurs Anglais qui, depuis plusieurs

années se sont appliqués avec un zéle si louable a recueillir ces pré-

cieux monuments de la civilization Grecque enfouis dans le sol de

l’'Inde : et l’exemplaire que nous devons @ M. le général ALLARD, et que

je publie, est encore unique. La fabrique, qui ressemble & celle de la

médaille du roi anonyme, gue j'ai fait connaitret, accuse sensible-

ment une époque de décadence, d’accord avec la forme carrée du t et

de lO qui commencent @ paraitre sur la monnaie des Arsacides, a

partir de Phraate III. 4 une époque qui doit s’éloigner bien peu del’ age

de notre Lysias. On pourrait voir un autre rapport entre cette monnaie

Bactrienne et les médailles du méme prince Arsacide, dans le titre de

juste, AIKAIOr, qui se lit habituellement sur les medailles de Phraate

III. ...... mais ce qui constitue ici la particularité la plus remarquable

et la plus newve, e’est la qualification d’ Adelphe, AAFAsOr, affectée par

Lysias, &c.”

When the mistake of attributing this coin to the wrong person is

corrected, it is curious how perfectly the observations of the learned

antiquarian of Paris confirm the conjecture to which I have been led by

the deciphering of the Bactrian legend :—the coin is that of the ‘ son of

a king Spalahara or Balahara ;’ in bearing the effigy of HERCuLEs it

agrees with the corrupted coins of Hermaus II. and others of the

Pherres or Phrahetasa (Phraates?) type, which appear to belong to

one family. M.R.prE R. agrees with our discoverer Masson in locat-

ing them in an Indo-Greek dynasty at Nysa,—or near Jelaldbdd, where

their coins are found in the greatest abundance.

I have purposely introduced an engraving of a very perfect speci-

men of this coin given to me by Mr. TREVELYAN who got it from

Monan LAL, as figure 3 of Plate XXVII. It it ruled by the medal-

ruling machine and is of course perfectly accurate, though indistinct.

It may be remembered that the name of Vonones is not found on the

Bactrian side of his coins, but a totally different word, PAUdh Balaha-

vasa asI read it, or perhaps Laléharasa (qaaTte~M) the patron of

* The drawing of the very coin described by M.R. pz R. was published by

myself in June, 1835, but I did not deem the name legible, nor has it proved

s0 at Paris, by their making Lysiou out of Spalurmou. 1 stated my reason for

not publishing earlier to be, that I might not forestal the As. Soc. of Paris in

describing General VentuRa’s splendid collection.

Itis not obvious in what this great resemblance consists ?—~one coin is

square, the other round :—one has a Greek legend only ; the other a bilingual

one—the equestrian figure is the obverse in one, the reverse in the other. The

anonymous coin was first published in the Asiatic Researches in 1831, and in

the Journal for 1833 and 1834.

4m 2

650 Additions to Bactrian (Juy, .

champions, a term nearly equivalent to ‘ Satrap.’ Now on all the coins

of SpaLyries (or Spalwrmes ) hitherto found, the initial letter has been

unfortunately cut off; but the three next are 1.14 ... /ahdra the same as

above, wanting only the final genitive inflection: the next letters may

be read P“} putasa for (Fam) ‘ of the son. Putting the whole together

we have Pusod’h PHYS PAP. (% Ba) léharaputasa dhamikasa

Balufaramasa ‘of BALAFARAMA (either for Balaparama, or away

whose strength is his armour) the just, the son of Barandra. ‘There-

fore as he was brother of the cotemporary of Vononzs, ‘ the then

king’ must also have been a son of the same person: and we should

expect to find another coin of a somewhat similar type struck by him.

These conditions are satisfactorily combined in the rude square coin of

SPALIRISES, depicted in Plate XXI. vol. [V. and Pl. XXXV. of vol. V.

fig. 7. He has the same flowing mantle from the shoulders, the sceptre

of royalty, and his native name appears to be PU'tdh Bahrishasa -

thus the father’s native name is Balahara ; the eldest son’s Balirisha,

and the second son’s, Balavarma, and the copper money of the whole

triad is distinguished for its exceeding rudeness no less than its confor-

mability of type! The silver money of SPALURMES and SpaLinisss has

not yet been found, or we might probably find that it maintained the

name of VononEs the Parthian king, or his successor, on the obverse.

The style of these three names commencing with Bala,—and the

title in particular of the first, Balahara,—call to mind the Balhdra

dynasty of north-western India, of which the epoch cannot be said to be

yet well defined. One of the earliest foreign authorities the historian

Masoup!, who wrote in 947 A. D. says :—“ The dynasty of Phoor

who was overcome by ALEXANDER (had) lasted 140 years: then came

that of Dasscueuim, which lasted 120: that of YALITH was next and

lasted 80 years, some say 180. ‘The next dynasty was that of Couros,

it lasted 120 years. ‘Then the Indians divided and formed several

kingdoms ; there was a king m the country of Sind; one at Canou;

another in Cashmix ; and afourth in the city of Mankir (Minnagara ?)

called also the great Houza, and the prince who reigned there had the

title of BALHARA*.”

120 + 80 + 120 = 820 years estimated from ALEXANDER’S time

brings us to B. C. 3, or allowing a few more years to Porus say 10 or

20 A.D. Now the reign of Vononzs I. as king of Parthia is dated by

VAILLANT, from A. D. 6 to A. D. 20, so that the accordance of time

is here perfect, and we need seek no other explanation of the paramount

Persian sovereign’s name and effigy on one side, while the other mo-

destly bore that of his tributary, because we have witnessed the same

* Wit¥rorp’s Essay, Asiatic Researches, IX. 181]. :

Sour As. See. , _ Vol VIC PL XXVIM

ie " ih

mi: j }

ft Pie

me PR

y WY ALM AR

N Zi yt

Ay Re

(la HM

y o

if Q

eer

Hunn)

in tue

‘(Vm dt Wn, A Al

ina rai

Nha By) TTT

A ea HRN a

il ‘

AN i uN f

Ay) ri

Di! \

me ae

rE ST HN roi

Mg PN ig ‘p hry A

en HO

ibe pigeon orm Sica Att mi

at,

sibs

hit Mf iin

‘ 1

4 ” ’

alas elanhorae ahs tae oe

x C=

me ee Sen

42 5

dials

piel aa ae

at aw,

1838.] Numismatology, Plute XXVIII. 651 .

in the Satrap coins of Surdshtra. The native kings were apparently

allowed to have the copper coin tothemselves. The religion here how-

ever is polytheistic, the effigy that of Hercules or Baladeva.

Without insisting upon their being the same person, I cannot help

mentioning that the name of Balarishi is found as one of four brothers

by different mothers who cut a conspicuous figure in Indian fable.

Balarishi, Vicramarka, Bal, and Bhartrthari; the second of these is

the celebrated Vicramadditya, whose reign falls 56 years before Christ,

and he was the son of one Gundha-rupa or, as the fable has it, of a

gundharva in the mortal disguise of an ass: WiLForp interprets the -

tale by making Vicramdditya the son of BAuram Gor of Persia by

an Indian princess, and, to account for the anachronism of 400 years,

is forced to imagine there were several kings of the same name,—

which would be likely enough if he admitted (as seems certain from

our coins) that Vicramdditya is a mere title. We shall presently

allude again to this circumstance.

Fig. 11. From General VenTura’s collection. <A more perfect

specimen of a hitherto illegible coin. Itis now seen to belong to Mayes.

Obverse. BASIAEQS BASIAEQN METAAOY MATOY. Front figure

of the king seated on a chair or throne, a shawl (?) on his should-

ers, and a club or knotted sceptre in his right hand like that given

to Mokadphises. |

Reverse. Much worn and indistinct, a female holding some object

like a scarf with both hands, and having a flowing robe behind, like that

of the VononEs group. Bactrian legend PIY PAL PIAA rdjadhi

rajasa mahatasa maasa, and on the field yw used numerically (?).

The discovery of this rare specimen, only the third known of the

prince whose name it bears*, will be highly gratifying to the numisma-

tists of Paris. It will in the first place remove the doubt entertained

by M. Raout De Rocuerre himself whether the un-Greek appellation

Mayes might not be used for Mao, the moon, as a divinity and not

as a king; or whether united to the title BASIAEY= the compound

may not be equivalent to the name of Apollodotus ; “ce n’est-la, du

- reste, qu'une conjecture que je soumets avec beaucoup de défiance aux

lumieres de nos philologues indianistes, desquels seuls il est permis d’es-

pérer la solution de ce curieux probléme.”

The problem is now solved so far that we find him an earthly sove-

reign with similar titles to those of Azms,—and that he is not APOLLO-

potvs! The native name composed of three letters, I should have for-

* I have just received another Mayes of different type from Capt. Burnes, too

Jate for insertion here,—J. P.

652 Additions to Bactrian (Jury,

merly read MAo, but on the new, and I think correct, system now

adopted, it must be read Md-asa, or Mayusa, as near an approach to the

Greek, or by the Greek to it, as the relative alphabets would allow. Of

the name itself, Iam inclined to identify it neither with Mata the mo-

ther of Mercury (though the caduceus favors this idea, and the Indian

May is also the mother of Buddha) nor with Mao as lunus,—though

Chandra isa common name enough ;—but rather with Mayu (ATacist)

the son of Kuvzra, the god of riches, (whose name also is frequently

adopted by princes*) and it may have been borne by a contemporary or

successor of APOLLODoTUS who swayed the sceptre but a short period in

some part of the Panjab, if it isnecessary to suppose them of the same age.

Philoxenes.

Fig. 12. A square copper coin in most respects agreeing with the

former one, also of General Ventura’s collection, but having apparently

a difference in the orthography of the Bactrian name. On comparing

the drawing of the silver Philoxenes in the Journal des Savans

with the rapid sketch I had taken of the same coin while in Calcutta,

I perceive that I read the name and title wrong ; which is my reason

for inserting this better preserved coin :—the legend is clearly PePY*h

PALHAD PAW maharajasa apavihatasa plijasinasa (or Philasi-

nasa). On the silver coin the epithet is apavihasasa (quasi aferew ea)

—not to be laughed at! but I think the s must be a blunder.

M. Raovut vE Rocuerte judges from the military aspect of

Philoxenes that he was a satrap placed with a regal title on the north

frontier of the Bactrian kingdom when threatened by the Scythians,

but the circumstance of none of his coins having been found by Masson

in the upper field, while several have come to light in the Panjab,

would tend to contradict this hypothesis, as much as the ‘ Ceres Carpo-

phore, or Abundance personified, and humped bull of his copper coin.

This learned critic does not allow that the brahmany bull has any

reference to India, because it is seen on the Seleucidan coins; but in

the only specimen I have in my cabinet of a Seleucus with a bull

reverse, the animal is altogether of the European breed.

Coins of the Azes group.

A great deal remains to be done ere we shall be able to clear the

history of this numerous and interesting series of coins. Every day

new types and varieties spring up, generally of tinned copper or bronze.

* See notes on the All/ahabédd inscription November 1837, page 972—Pdlaka

Ugrasena, devardshtraka Kuvera. As the Parthian kings were styled devajanita,

this country of the devas may have been in the north, as was indeed the fabulous

country of Kuvara the god-king.

1838. ] Numismatology, Plate XXVIII. 653

Fig. 13, is a specimen in good relief lately sent down to me by

General ALLARD; there was another in the collection sent home by

General Court under care of M. Merrrepy, of which I was favored

with a sight of the drawing. On this the name on the Greek side was

entire, and thence I am enabled to complete my description.

Obverse. BACIAEWIC BACIAEWN MEPAAOV VNAOSEPPOV,—Taja in a

brahmanical dress, upper part of the body naked—on the head a

turban (?) with flowing fillets. The small figure of victory holding a

chaplet over him forms the peculiarity of the device of which there are

yet but three samples. The monogram which was before so unintelligible

to us, I now recognise as a combination of two letters of the old Sanskrit

alphabet § and | m and n*.

Reverse. Whether the figure in a brahmanical costume holding a

trident in the right hand anda palm branch in the left is Neptune, Siva,

the river Indus, or the king, I am not sufficiently initiated in the art

to determine. No two reverses seem to be exactly alike though formed

of the same materials ; the legend on the present in Bactrian is

| PIVSY PIZAY Pale PAIL PAY

Maharajasa rajarajasa nandatasa jayadharasa (?) Farhetasa.

I do not pretend to be satisfied with the last epithet, nor with the

name, which however I collate with M. Courr’s. I have conceived it —

possible on a former occasion that it referred to Puranatss the

predecessor of Vononzs, or another of the same name: but there are

too many uncertain letters in it to build theories safely upon. At

any rate the same name of five letters here seen below the figure of

Siva, is found on a// the rude coms ascribed formerly to Unad (now

corrected to) Undo-pherres, with exception of the penultimate letter

which is there always formed likeanfi ‘PfI¥, fara-etisa, (?) to

which PSE nandatasa (soteros) is invariably added—on M. Court's

coin this epithet may be preferably read P71u great !

On the area are two Bactrian letters G {, which might be profanely

taken for ‘six shillings’ by an uninitiated handler !

Fig. 14. A variety of the same group, in General Venrura’s recent

collection. In this the horseman looks in the opposite direction, and

the beginning of the name TNAOS%eppo is visible. The monogram is

composed of § and |,,— mya.

On the reverse, a well clad female holding still the trident (though

it looks more like the cross) walks to the left—a Greek and a Bac-

trian monogram on either side, of complex form: legend as before, the

name below, PAVSY.

* T may here note that fig. 14, Pl. XLVI. of vol. V. is also a coin of “¥SY

Farheta, with the letters 4 as a central symbol.

654 Additions to Bactrian ls ULY,

Fig. 15. Another novelty from General Ventura’s store, of which

a duplicate has been sent to France by M. Court.

In all respects but the name the obverse corresponds with the fore-

going. The name in the two coins yet brought to light of this species is

quite distinctly PCNAC#APCY, which is either another member of the

family or a corruption of the last.

The erect front-faced figure on the reverse is dressed in the Hindu

dhoti—and extends his hands over a new symbol of gridiron fashion—

in his left hand is the trident. This figure has been conventionally styl-

ed ¢ Siva’ when he appears with his bull on the Indo-Scythic coins. The

native name is as before PAtS¥Y Farahetasa with the addition of P4345!

netadharasa ‘the bearer’ of something not very intelligible unless we

make the first syllable AY jaya, victory.

Referring to the observations in a preceding page about the brothers

of VicramapiTya, I cannot forbear mentioning that im Gondephares

we might almost recognize the father of Vikramapiry4a himself; for in

the word Gondo-phares we have a signification not very remote from

Gandha-rupa ; >%pos being pallium, vestis exterior,—the compound may

mean ‘ having a cloak made of the skin of the gandha, gonda, gor, or

wild ass.” Whence may have originated the fable of the Parthian king

doomed to assume the guise of an ass during the day.

These are speculations certainly much in the WiLForD strain, but the

curious coincidence in so many names is enough to lead even a matter

of fact man aside from the justifiable deductions of sober reason.

Fig. 16, like the last adds a new name to the Bactrian list. The

coin, a thick copper piece in tolerable preservation was sent down to me

by General ALLARD a short time ago: it is as yet I believe unique.

Obverse. (Bactrews Bactrcwy peyadov) ABATASO] V—‘ of the great king

of kings Abagases :’ there may perhaps be another letter before the A.

The king, known by the flowing fillets of his diadem, seems dressed in a

petticoat, raja fashion—and he sits sideways on a richly caparisoned

horse, looking to the right. Monogram ¥ as before, but with the

Bactrian letter 9 beneath it. a

Reverse. The same royal personage (by the fillets) as if performing

the functions of high priest. The dress is so precisely Indian that I

feel disappointed in not finding a regular Sanskrit name below; nor

can I produce much of accordance between the Bactrian and Greek

names—the letters are PHYSIN or PNYSH) abakhafasa. On the

field are various insulated alphabetic symbols,—Bactrian and Greek,

and under the latter, one which looks like a modern Nagari », #, but

is more probably the Bactrian 4.

1838. ] Bate’s Medal-ruling Machine. 655

The last figure in the plate (from General Venrura’s store) is a

duplicate of the Azgs coin published as fig. 22 of Pl. XXIII. vol. IV.

(1835). Between the two one important fact is established, namely

that at this period of the Azzs dynasty the use of the Greek was entirely

lost, while the native character was written with greater correctness in

the same or rather the inverse ratio. The Greek legend is a mere jumble

of letters, but the Bactrian reads continuously

BAT PLR PRT 7 Pil PAu

Maharajasa mahatasa dhamtkasa rajatirajasa Ayasa.

‘Of the great king, the mighty, the just, the king of kings, Azzs.’

The figure of Abundance with her cornucopia has a compound symbol

on the left which might be read Svi, her Indian name; and on the

right the two letters 3 S kha and dha, used numerically ?

The perfect Greek medals of Bactria proper, however beautiful as

works of art, ought not to turn away our attention from these corrupted

and ‘barbarous’ specimens which mark the decadence of Greek dominion

and Greek skill. These are the most precious to the student of Indian

history:—through their native legend he may yet hope to throw light

on the obscure age of VikraMabiTya,—and the Scythian successors of

the Greeks on the north of India. Hitherto these classes of rude

coins, though very numerous, have been much disregarded, and on that

account I now invite attention to them, and promise to return to the task

myself when I have fresh materials collected and arranged; my text

being ‘these coins on which the native and Greek legends differ, or

record different names.’

P.S. My readers will perceive that two coins in the foregoing

plates are engraved with a ruling machine, and will judge therefrom

that my long cherished expectation of having such an instrument from

England has at length been realized.

Such is indeed the case—the medal ruler promised by Bate and

Co. to be even superior to their own is come after two years’ delay :—

but instead of being their patent instrument, warranted to correct all

distortion in the engraving of the object ruled, it is precisely the origi-

nal defective instrument which has long been discarded as unfit for use.

Itis hardly possible to believe that a respectable optician so high in

his profession as Mr. Bare would wish to impose on the credulity of

an Indian customer, albeit we ‘ Nabobs’ are frequently looked upon as

fair game for inferior articles and extravagant charges* :—yet there

* Of this I have myself had several examples. Some Wotraston’s Baro-

metric Thermometers were sent out by a first-rate house to a Civilian, war-

656 Bate's Medal-ruling Machine. [ JuLy,

are many strong points of internal evidence which would bear me out

in asserting that the instrument now before me has been made a long

time—has been patched up for experimental trials by its maker—has

been thrown aside in favor of his new invention, and has been now

been finally brushed up for exportation to India!

After bringing so serious a charge forward, it becomes my duty to

support it with proof:—and this I can do from Mr. Bate’s own written

instructions, which bid me “ where the coin is in high relief, to lessen -

the angle of axis B. to diminish the effects of distortion;” whereas in

the following description of his patent, he prides himself on his son’s.

having obviated all distortion*. He begins with a description of the

original or American instrument illustrated by a diagram, which I have

introduced as fig. 1. into the accompanying Plate XXIX.

‘¢ a, being the medal; 6, the copper plate covered with an etching-ground;

c, the tracer; and d, the etching-point at right angles to it.

“The arm e d having a ruling motion horizontally across the surfaces of a and

5, and likewise moving freely in the direction ec d. Also vertical motion being

given to a and horizontal to d by the same screw: a series of lines traced over

the medal were described upon the plate in the following manner: so long as

the tracer moved over the plane surface or ground of the medal, the point d de-

scribed equidistant straight lines upon the plate; but so soon as the tracer

touched a part of the raised surface or relief of the medal, it was raised above

its plane a quantity equal to the height of such relief, and the line described

by the etching-point was no longer equidistant, but deviated an equal quantity

upon the horizontal plate: in the succeeding line, the tracer being raised off

still further by the increased height of the relief, the etching-point deviated still

further from the former line described upon the plate: the continuation of this

process produced a succession of deviating lines upon the plate, which opening

as the tracer rose above the plane of the medal, and closing again as it approach-

ed that plane gave the effect of light and shade in the printed impression of the

plate. But however pleasing the effect of these impressions, they were ail

distorted representations of the original, just so much as the lines producing the

representation deviated from the straight line upon the medal—and I found that

this distortion had suspended the use of the process which had been described

14 years before in the Manuel de Tourneur. ‘The most valuable subjects, those

having the highest relief, being most distorted.”

Here let me pause—the defects above condemned, are possessed in

the fullest degree by the ruler sent to me:—the tracer describes

straight lines only across the medal, while the diamond engraving= point

traces curves deviating in proportion to the relief of each part :—so

that if the relief of the central point of the medal be one-tenth of an

inch raised, and the angle of axis b be fixed at 45°+, the same point will be

ranted not to break!—the bulbs were so thick that when heated even to 300°

Farh., there was no chance of the mercury making its appearance in the tube!

It was doubtless calculated by the makers that they would never even be tried,

much less used! :

* See Philosophical Magazine 1833, vol. 2, page 288.

+ Without a drawing of the instrument it is almost impossible to explain

what is meant by awis A and azis B. The first is the axis upon which the rod

holding the tracing point turns in rising over the raised parts of the medal, and

ae ee eee es es Oa ay Se eee

Vol. VI. Pl. XXIX.

Bice eseanceees atta teen awe nwegqeren ened

~ no i

Bates Medal Ruler

Fig2: |

peer oe

ne ubderees «

=e 8

1838.] Bate’s Medal-ruling Machine. 657

misplaced one-tenth of an inch out of the centre of the picture. As an

example I have engraved two ruled images of a medal of Homer, be-

longing to Mr. Lane, C. S. with the deviation or distortion thrown in

opposite directions. Few will believe that they represent the same

object! In running down the relief (as in the cavity of the ear, and

the front of the forehead, ) it will be seen that the engraved lines return

and cover a part of the plate already engraved! ‘There is to be sure

an attempt to diminish the fault by lessening the deviation of the en-

graved lines :—thus, the one-tenth altitude may be made to give a devia-

tion of only one-twentieth or one-thirtieth in the engraving (by lessening

the angle of axis B—but the light and shade will be thus equally dimi-

nished, and the whole effect destroyed.

The mode in which Mr. Bate junior got rid of this difficulty in his

patent instrument is then described—and it was its ingenuity which

alone led me to send for one of the instruments to rule my Bactrian

coins, rather than attempt to make one for myself, which I shall now

be compelled to do.

‘© My son, observing, that the thing to be desired was, a means of bringing

the tracer down upon the medal, a quantity equal to the deviation of the etching-

point from the straight line upon the plate; observing also that the process he

was employing, transferred vertical sections of the medal to the plate,—pro-

posed taking inclined sections of the medal. A little consideration determined

the selection of 45°, as being equidistant from the vertical and horizontal posi-

tions employed and this inclination completely fulfilled the purposes required,

removing the distortion altogether, and so far from impoverishing the effect of

light and shade, improving that effect, inasmuch as without diminishing its

quantity it threw the light upon the representation of the medal at an angle of

45° to its plane, instead of as before in the direction of the plane of the medal*,

The arrangement finally adopted is represented in fig. 2.

‘¢ The tracer c being now attached to the right-angled triangle ef'g and a

friction roller substituted for itat 4, the triangle (the motion of which was strictly

confined to the plane of the diagonal e 7,) moved d a quantity always equal to the

distance of the tracer ¢ from the perpendicular p, so that the etching-point

described precisely the same Jine upon the plate J as the tracer described upon

the surface of the medal a.’’

Nothing could be more simple, efficient and correct than this im-

provement, and though the merit of it has been contested by the French

and by the Americans, I thought Mr. Bare justly entitled to his patent

(of which by the way I have seen no specification yet in the Repertory)

and willingly acceded to the terms he enjoined to my friends in Eng-

land on consenting to make me one,—namely, that I should not make

B is a second axis fixed on A at any convenient angle, carrying the arm which

holds the diamond point or graver.

* This is not so comprehensible—the effect of light and shade depends

merely upon the amount and direction of the deviation: and the smaller the

relief of a medal, the more horizontally the light is required to fall on it in order

to exhibit parallel effects to those of more angular light on a high relief.

658 On traces of a fossil Giraffe (Jury,

use of it in England. It is so far fortunate that I am now driven to

my own resources, and compelled to invent and to make an instru-

ment which, though quite ona different plan from that depicted in

Batx’s diagram, will I hope produce the same correct effects, with the

additional advantage of being adjustable as to angle of the guiding

plane e g, so as to regulate the force of light and shade ad libitum;

while I shall moreover be at liberty to use it wherever I please.

I find that impressions in hard sealing wax answer perfectly for

ruling, in cases where parties are afraid of trusting origimal gems

or coins under the tracing point. But it should be remembered that

the casts must be in relief like the coins, or their image will be revers-

ed in the engraved representation.

VII.—WNote on a fossil Ruminant genus allied to Girafide in the Si-

walk hills. By Captain P. T. Cautuey.

When we look at the number of species of Proboscidan Pachyder-

mata which swarmed in the primeval forests; when we see that in the

present day nature appears to have left but solitary species to attest the

gigantic form of primitive existence, the imagination naturally places

before our eyes forms of corresponding magnitude in other genera; we

picture to ourselves gigantic ruminants and gigantic carnivora only to

be revealed by the remains which nature has placed in its own keeping

to exhibit to inquirmg man the wisdom of design and the systematic

chain of organization established: throughout the whole of the animal

kingdom.

Amongst the Ruminants the discovery of the Sivatherium gigan-

teum has most amply tended to prove the truth of this induction, exhi-

biting a ruminating animal bearing the same proportion to the rest of

its genus, as the Mastodon and Elephant do to that of the Pachydermata.

Amongst the Carnivora we have the Ursus Sivalensis, an animal far ex-

ceeding in dimensions its congener of the present period, or the Ursus

Speleus and bears of the German caves; with a species of hyena at

least one-third larger than that now existing. The reptiles also have

their gigantic representative in an entirely new genus of the tortoise,

for which we propose the generic name of Megalochelys, from the

enormous proportions of its remains as yet discovered, and the size of

its femoral and humeral extremities equalling those of the largest

rhinoceros. The question however does not appear to be whether

the animals of former periods were larger than those now existing, but

1838. ] in the Siwalik hills. 659

whether the genera of larger animals were not more numerous? We

appear to be gradually losing all the larger forms of the creation. The

Elephant and Giraffe of the present period will in all probability share

the same fate as the Mastodon and Sivatherium of former eras, and be

only recognised in the proofs exhibited by the researches of the geolo-

gists.

Having discovered the type of a gigantic Ruminant amongst the fos-

sils of the Siwaliks in company with the remains of the larger Pachy-

dermata, and having at the same time proved the existence of the

Camel, with other numerous species of the Cervine and Caprine families

of Ruminants, it was not by any means improbable that the present

tribe of Giraffide should have its representative, so that the connection

of the chain of existing and fossil ruminants might be still more per-

fect. The discovery of the Sivatherium and Camel in conjunction led

to the probability of the existence of the Giraffe, giving this genus the

first position amongst the family of Cervide. The fossil now to be

described appears to throw some light on the subject, and should further

research tend to corroborate the contents of this paper, it will be inter-

esting to remark on the co-existence of the Sivatherium, Camel and

Giraffe, with Quadrumana, Anoplotheria, Mastodons, and reptiles so

closely resembling those of the present rivers, that it is not possible to

discover in their osteological pictures at least, any remarkable deviation

from the type which has been left to us.

The remain which I wish to describe is the third cervical vertebra :

it was cleared out of a block of sandstone, and as is usual in similar

cases, is very perfect in all its parts and proportions, and sufficiently

armed with processes for the purpose of recognition and comparison.

The dimensions are as follows.

Penge ar the barrel 25.35. Sa. Tneh. 78

PeAGL In Centre \GittOy, oes cae sie rescceens ey

DISDUA.GUEO GULO, cvicdsn meas wh cee vnacdeess Duck

There are marked differences between this fossil and the correspond-

ing vertebra of the existing camel, and in comparing them together the

following appear to be the most worthy of notice.

In the fossil the oblique processes are much shorter, and stouter

than those of the camel, with articulating surfaces at a greater angle:

the barrel of the vertebra is much longer: the hollows or depressions

which appear directly under the anterior oblique processes, and the

ridges radiating from the extremity of the spinous process towards the

expanded surface of the posterior oblique processes so well marked

in the camel, are altogether wanting in the fossil: the upper surface

660 Kittoe’s illustrations of Cuttack sculpture. (Jury,

with the exception of the spinous process being altogether flat and

unmarked.

On the inferior or lower side of the vertebra, there is also a consi-

derable difference, that of the camel being much curved and hollow, unin-

terrupted by ridge excepting in the vicinity of the posterior extremity,

where there is a knob or round process: in the fossil this knob is want-

ing, but in its place there exists a well defined sharp ridge from one

extremity to the other, The transverse processes of the fossil are im-

perfect, but the form and angle of departure from the barrel of the

vertebra differs from those of the camel.

The foramina for the transmission ee the vertebral artery are well

defined in the fossil, the space between the entrance and exit occupy-

ing the central third portion of the whole length ; a prominent well

defined ridge runs obliquely across the plane of the side connecting

the upper anterior oblique process, with the lower and posterior extre-

mity of the transverse process, a very marked peculiarity, which with

the position of the foramina, separates the fossil from the camel.

It would be a great assistance to us were the Curator of the museum

to draw up a monagraph on the Giraffe, including measurements in de-

tail of the skeleton, a specimen of which exists in the room of the Asia-

tic Society. The dimensions given in English and French measure

would enable us, under the impossibility of obtaining the skeleton itself,

of forming accurate conclusions as to the existence or not in the fossil

state of the true Giraffe*.

Northern Doab, July 15th, 1828.

VIII.—Sketch of the sculptured images, on the temple of Grdmeswara,

near Ratrapur : extracted from Lieut. Kirron’s: Journal.

Thursday the 8th December we marched at 4 past 4 4, mM. and reach-

ed our ground a little before eight o’clock, having travelled over 9 miles

of road, though the actual distance from camp to camp at Ratrapur

must be but 6 miles ; the distance measured in tolerably direct lines (as

in yesterday’s march) was 8m. Of. 183y. The road winds a great deal,

partly to avoid nullahs and uneven ‘ground, and most of all, cultivated

lands and villages ; we passed under mango topes for nearly the whole

way, some entire plantations, others the remnants of what had formerly

been such: most of them are choked with underwood and rank vegeta-

* The Society’s museum does not possess the skeleton of a Giraffe,or we should

have readily complied with our correspondent’s request. The remains of the

animal which died some years since at Calcutta came,we believe, into Dr. PEAR-

s0N’s possession, but were not included among the collection presented to our

museum by Hag1 Kerpatat MufamMMAD.—EbD.

1838. ] Kittoe’s illustrations of Cuttack sculpture. 661

tion ; the “bent” or ratan plant is the most conspicuous ; the country in

this respect resembles the terai of the Himalayas. It would appear from

the numerous topes and mounds of earth strewed with pottery, hewn

stones and bricks, which mounds rise above the surrounding low lands,

that the country had been thickly inhabited in former years, as was

likewise the teraiin Upper India. When and why, all these valleys have

been forsaken, is a matter which it would be difficult to attribute a cause

to; there are however less bricks and stones on the mounds or “ Tan-

ghees” (as they are here called) than on those of the Upper Provinces ;

from this I should infer that the huts of former times were just the same

as those now constructed; namely, of a timber framework to support

what is known in Europe by the name of “ wattle and dab,” which, from

_the swarms of white ants that (I may say) infest these regions, cannot

be very durable: some however are more substantial, being built with

mud and unhewn stones.

But to return to our route: for near a mile at the commencement of

the march, the road winds through the narrow lanes of the villages men-

tioned yesterday, beyond the furthermost of which and on the banks of

the river running 100 yards from the road, stand the ruins of a small

and once highly elegant temple dedicated to Mana’peo by name G'ram-

eswar ; it is of white sandstone of a very fine grain ; what remains of the

sculpture is truly elegant, the figures and idols are very graceful ; they

are in the style of the temple of Anrung Vdasudeba and others of the same

era at the famous Bhuvaneswar*. It is said to have been built by raja

Parsuttem Deo who reigned from A. D. 1478 to 1503 A. D., and that

it was destroyed by the apostate and spoiler, Kana Pawar, who invaded

Orissa from Gaur in A. D. 1609. This person waged a war of de-

struction against all the temples that came in his way; the natives believe

him to have been a “rakshas” or demon, that he possessed a magic

kettle drum at the sound of which the noses and arms of all the idols

dropped off, as well as the tops of the temples ; it was in vain I attempt-

ed to persuade the ignorant brahmans of the different temples I visited,

that Kats Pauar was but a man like themselves.

The superstition and timidity of the people of these provinces exceeds

any thing I have ever witnessed in any part of our presidency from

Ludiana downwards.

* * * #* * #4. + % * * * *

* * # & * * * # # * *

A quarter of a mile above the village}, is an island separated from the

rocks on the main land by a broad and exceedingly deep channel of the

river flowing between. On this island (which is well wooded) are the

remains of a very ancient temple dedicated to Maudpzo by the name of

“ Pachameswar,” also “ Manji thdkur”’, or the Steersman Lord.

The style of the temple is that of those in the Carnatic (if I mistake not),

and like a few of the more ancient temples of Bhuvaneswar ; it has

evidently never been completed, the stones are laid without mortar and

are fixed with iron clamps, which have aided in no small degree to destroy

the edifice. It is much to be regretted that the Indian architects of olden

* Vide Pl. XXXII. + The Village of Khandhurpir.

662 Kittoe’s illustrations of Cuttack sculpture. [Juxy,

times had recourse to such an indurable method of fastening their ma-

sonry, many of the most elegant buildings at Agra, Dehli and elsewhere

have been destroyed by this ill judged practice ; the iron after the lapse

of a few years expands from corrosion and splits off large masses of the

masonry.

The 7'dj has suffered greatly from this cause, which was discovered

even before the work was half finished; copper and brass fastenings were

then substituted, these have saved the dome from injury: brass clamps

have however been used in other public works of antiquity in India, for

several have been found in the masonry of the fort of Cuttack during its

demolition for the use of the False Point lighthouse.

It appears that it was formerly the practice to build the temples with

the material rough wrought, and to sculpture them afterwards: this tem-

ple is one of the many instances of such a custom.

Towards the top of the conical tower are several words cut on the

unfinished surfaces of two of the compartments; the character is Gaur

Sanskrit: the letters are clearly cut, and very large*.

The temple has evidently been consecrated in former years to

De'vi’ or Durea, Fig. 1, p. 2, xxxvii. There is a legend connected with

this curious place which was told me by the attendant priest or Sevaka.

The story is as follows. Many years ago when the Hindu deities

performed their miracles and deigned to appear unto a favored few, a

rich merchant was coming from the western provinces in a large

vessel (for in those days the Mahanadi flowed narrow and deep) laden

with goods of great value. ‘The vessel on approaching the rock was about

to be dashed against it, but being drawn into a whirlpool was being

equally threatened with destruction: the merchant who had an only

offspring with him, invoked the goddess Devi’ that if she would save |

their lives and property he would offer up his child as a sacrifice to her

bounty. The boat remained fixed and unhurt, when the merchant

lamenting, fulfilled his vow by throwing the child into the river ; it sunk,

but instantly Devi‘ in the form of a mermaid rose from the water with

the child unhurt (standing on the palms of her hands) which she restored

to its father, demanding as an acknowledgment that he should build and

endow a temple to Siva and present it with a golden bell. This he ac-

cordingly did ; however many years after a thief was tempted to swim

to the sacred island and to steal the golden bell, which he was deprived

of by the deity, who, as he was descending the rock, annihilated the

sacrilegious mortal, and converted the bell into stone. I proceeded in a

boat to see this spot where the credulous Ooriyas fancy they can dis-

cern the bell and clapper ; it is a hollow place in the rock, just above the

watermark of the dry season, with a nodule of quartz (of which there

is a great quantity imbedded in the coarse sandstone) projecting down-

wards from the upper surface of the cavity ; this they call the clapper ;

the whole surface is besmeared with red lead and oil, and offerings are

constantly made there, for which purpose it is necessary to go in a boat.

* The reading in Nagree fs thus, Wt fafqa Wea, T falas YIU: vide

Journal As. Soc. No, 60 of December 1826, ‘‘The divine Lord of beauteous

variety.’’ ‘The variegated ornament.”’

“ Myye) ‘Ses, DT P*LYLO

PIT 2 °922M DC :

jt ¢ f J 4 x3

ESOS ep

CHOI

A ENE,

a TOT

ce ties

PR <3 expe f

4, funy meme

Sa pr 7 /.

role. c* -

PS é ae

a eS ye 7

aoe bs

OCOOe

2 kine eee

var t ;.

ao ,: rut

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 663

IX.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 1st August, 1838.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Mr. Witt1am Epwarps, C. S. and Major Wmuiam Greeory, Bengal

Army, proposed at the last meeting were elected members of the Society.

Sir Graves Haueuron wrote to thank the Society for the Sanskrit

works presented to him.

‘< It was my good fortune, he writes, to be in London at the time the council ap-

pealed to the home authorities against the sweeping and extraordinary decision of

the Bengal Government regarding the publication of native works by the Committee

of Education ; I made a point of collecting all the documents I could, and of laying

them before our President. I have reason to think that my efforts were of some use

in preparing the way for the success of the deputation which afterwards waited on

the President of the Board of Control.”

Read the following report of the special Committee appointed for con-

sidering the expediency of printing the Sarira Vidya. .

Report.

The Committee appointed in your letter of the 20th instant, beg leave to state

that they have duly investigated the several questions you have proposed and that

they consider,

Ist. That the translation of HoopER’s Anatomist’s Vade Mecum having been al-

ready made and paid for, that work should be adopted as the basis of the. proposed

volume for the use of the native medical pandits of India.

2nd. That several additions, alterations and explanations are indispensable to

render the volume accurate or instructive.

3rd. That a few lithographic drawings on the scale of the wood cuts in PAXTON’S

work would materially add to the value of the publication.

4th. The Committee have had the advantage of the advice and opinion of Dr.

GoopEVE on the subject, and Dr. GooDEVE has kindly offered to examine the cor-

rections proposed by MopHUSODUN GOOPTA and to give his general superintend-

ence in the progress of the work. This liberal offer the committee consider should

be at once thankfully accepted.

For the labor of correction and supervision the Committee think MODHUSODUN

GoorTa should receive a moderate remuneration, the amount of which the Commit.~

tee scarcely think it their province to suggest.

Medical College, A he iit W. B. O'SHAUGHNESSY,

3ist July, 1838. Secretury lo Committee. ,

The President thought that the report omitted to touch upon one point of consi-

derable importance, viz. the estimated expense of the publication. The Committee

seemed to concur in recommending the Surira Vidya, because the translation had been

paid for, and because Mr. MurrR’s bonus of 1000 rupees would cover the printing :—

‘ut he perceived from the Secretary’s notice at the last meeting, that 2000 rupees

more might still be required tocomplete it, including the plates and additions it was

proposed to supply. Under these circumstances the aspect of the question was ma-

teriallv changed ; and he would put it to the meeting whether it would be justifiable

for the Society to expend so much upon a Sanskrit translation which but a very

limited class could read, when the money might be so much better employed in im-

parting the same or other knowledge to the great body of the people in their own

vernacular tongue. He therefore moved, seconded by Mr. HaRe,

That a fresh reference be made to the special Committee begging their

opinion, whether it be expedient for the Society to expend any portion

of its funds on publishing a Sanskrit translation of the Vude Mecum, rather

than to devote the amount to the imparting of instruction to the mass of

the people in the Hindustani language, even though in so doing it forfeit the

advantage of Mr. Murm’s bonus, and of the translation already m made.

The Secretary explained that the Sarira Vidya had become the Society’s pro-

perty by transfer from the Committee, on condition of its being printed. He had

_ merely reserved it untilthe more important Sanskrit works should be completed.

He could not have anticipated any objection on the score of inutility. It was in-

tended to convey to the medical pandits throughout India, who are an exclusive

caste of hereditary monopolists in their profession, and all study their art in San-

Skrit, a more correct notion of human Anatomy. Originally the Sarira Vidya had

-been also destined to become a class-book in the medical branch of the Sanskrit

‘College, but that class had since been abolished, and the teaching of the medical

art limited exclusively to English.

664 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Juny,

What stronger argument of the utility of the book could be adduced than the ten-

der of a bonus of 1000 rupees to effect its publication by a gentleman who had for

two years in vain held out the same premium for an essay in English and the ver-

nacular, on the advantages of science! Once placed in a Sanskrit dress, the Euro-

pean system of anatomy would be accessible all over India for subsequent transfer

into the Hindi dialects of every province if requisite, and it was no trivial argument

that the same work had been already printed in Arabic, and thus made available for

the Musalmén practitioners and for translation into Urda when called for. If doubt

existed as to the propriety of publishing in the learned Janguages, he submitted that

the special Committee of medical men consulted ona purely professional point, were

hardly competent judges, and he moved, as an amendment,

That the question of the propriety of publication, be referred to the

Committee of Papers in the ordinary course.

The President objected ta the Committee of Papers because he thought they were

more likely to have a Jeaning in favor of Sanskrit*.

On taking the votes on the question by shew of hands the amendment

was lost and the original motion carried by a majority, the name of Baba

Ram Comvn Sena being added to the committee on the motion of Mr.

Hane.

Read, the following reply from Government to the reference made in

virtue of the resolution of last meeting on the subject of the Oriental

publication grant. . :

No. 844, General Department.

To James Prinsep, Esq.

Sir, Secretary to the Asiatie Society.

I am directed by the Honorable the Deputy Governor of Bengal to ac.

knowledge the receipt of your letter dated the 12th instant with its enclo.

sure, and in reply to state that under the circumstances represented his

honor the Deputy Governor is led to believe that he shall only conform to

the wishes of the honorable the Court of Directors by giving to their or.

ders on the subject of Oriental Publications so much retrospective effect

as shall relieve the Society from the debt it has incurred in completing the

publication of the works made over to it by Government. A Treasury

order will accordingly be issued in favor of the Sub-Treasurer to enable

him to pay to your receipt, on a bill to be drawn in the name of the Asiatic

Society,the sum of 2,500 Company’s rupees, which appears to be the amount

advanced by the Society as stated in Para, 3 of your letter under reply.

2, The completion of the remaining volume of the Mahabharata will

fall within the natural appropriation of the monthly allowance prospective.

ly assigned.

I remain, &c.

H. T. Prinsep,

Secretary to the Government of Bengal.

Fort William, the 18th July, 1838.

The Secretary to Government in reply to the Alif Leila reference, wished

to learn the cost of the translation, and the number of volumes, previous

to determining on the amount of patronage to be bestowed.

Library.

The following books were presented :

The Bulletin de la Société de Geographie, 2nd series, vol. 8—by the Geograph.

Society of Paris.

Result of astronomical observations made at the H. E. J. C. observatory at Ma-

dras, by THOMAS GLANVILLE TaytLor, Esq. H.C. Astronomer, vol. IV, 1836,

1837— by the Government.

Defence of COLEBROOKE’S exposition of the Vedanta philosophy —by Sir GRAVES

C- HAUGHTON.

Recollections of the Deccan—by the Author.

* We must apologize for the imperfection of this report as we kept no note. Mr. E. STIRLING

and others spoke on their experience of the Hindi Vaidyas up the country receiving their instruce

ton in Sanskrit, whatever it might be in Bengal,—(where every one knows Sanskrit is more read

and better understood than elsewhere, because it is more closely dependent on the Sanskrit for

all abstract terms.)—Ep,

1838. ] Proceedings of the Asiutic Society. 665

The Quarterly Journal of the Calcutta Medical and Physical Society, No. VI.—

by the Editors, Prof. GoopEVE and O'SHAUGHNESSY.

Rapport annuel sur les travaux de la Société d’ Historie naturelle de |’ ile Maurice,

1837—by M. JULIEN DEsJaRDINS.

Meteorological observations for Dec. 1837 and 3 months of 1838, at Maurice—by

the same.

Ditto at Calcutta, for June—by the Surveyor General.

Observatious meteorologiques faites a Mattepolliam, et a Kotigherry aux Neilgher-

rtes, en Mars, Avril, May et Juin 1838,—by M. ADOLPHE DELESSERT.

The following purchased at the suggestion of the Museum Committee.

JARDINE and G. VELBy’s Illustrations of Ornithology, Ist fasc. N.S.

Lardner’s Cyclopedia—Russia vol. I. from W. ALLEN and Co.

A letter from Government forwarded for deposit in the Society’s library,

an account book and map belonging to the late travellers Moorcrort and

TreBeox, which were lately recovered with 50 other volumes from the

chief of Kunduz, Meer Moorap Bee by Dr. Lorp.

The following information respecting the fate of these unfortunate tra-

vellers is extracted from Captain Burnes’ report on the subject to the

Governor General, dated 1st May, 1838.

Memorandum regarding books and papers of the lute Mr. Moorcrort,

by Mr. Lorp.

1. I have the honor to present you a list of books and papers belonging to the

late Mr. Moorcrort which | have been so fortunate as to recover during my recent

journey to Toorkistan.

2. For the greater part of them I am indebted to MEER MAHOMED Moorap BEG

who, immediately on my arrival at Koondooz, wrote to the khan of Moozar desir-

ing that all such relics of the European traveller should forthwith be sent. In re-

ply to this, 50 volumes all of printed works were immediately forwarded, the re-

mainder including the maps, Mr. Moorcrort’s passports in English and Persian

from the Marquis of Hastings, and a MS. volume with several loose MS. sheets,

chiefly of accounts, I was enabled to recover when by the Meer’s permission, I my-

self, made a visit to Khooloom and Moozar.

3. I think the evidence | have received proves, as strongly as the nature of ne-

gative evidence will admit, that no MS. papers of any value belonging to that ill-

fated expedition remain to be recovered, I paid every person who brought books,

and always explained that I would give double reward for any thing that was writ-

ten, and though in consequence of this, several sheets of MS. were brought me, they

never appeared on examination to contain any thing beyond accounts and such

routine matters. Now as the natives must be unable to make the distinction, the

chances evidently are that if any papers of importance existed, one or two of them at

least would have found their way to me amongst the numbers presented.

4. Tappend a letter from Mirza HUMEE OOD DEEN, the principal Secretary to

the Khan of Muzarand aman who attended Mr. TrREeBECK in his last moments,

saying that two printed and one MS. volume are in existence at Shuhr Subz, and

that he had sent a man to recover them for me. As I have since been obliged to

leave the country, and all communication is by the present state of affairs at Cabool

cnet impossible, I meation this fact as one worthy the attention of some future

traveller.

5. The map isin itself adocument of much interest as containing Mr. Moor-

CROFT’s route traced, evidently with his own hand, and continued as far as Akcha

within one stage of Audkhoee, where he is known to have fallen a victim, not more,

I believe, to the baneful effects of the climate than to the web of treachery and in-

trigue by which he found himself surrounded and his return cut off. On the back

of the mapis a MS. sketch of the route through Adkhoee to Meinuma and back

through Sireepoor to Bulkh, as though he had planned a tour through these little

independent states, partly perhaps to see the horses for which they are famed, and

partly to wile away the weariness of expectation till a safe conduct should be grant-

ed him through the territories of the ruler of Koondooz.. We can thus almost trace

va object that engaged his mind and in the prosecution of which he laid down

is life.

6. Connected with this I beg to subjoin a slip of paper which I found amongst

a pile of loose accounts and which bears in Mr. TReBECK’s writing, the following

entry.

“' Date September 6th 1825. Arrived at Bulkh August 25th, Mr. M. died August

27th,’’ placing the date of Mr. MoorckortT’s death beyond a doubt, and also I think

affording negative evidence against the supposition of its having been caused by

any unfair means.

402

666 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Juby,

6. But the same paper is further interesting from an accidental coincidence.

The MEERzA I have before mentioned accompanied me from Tash Koorghau to

Muzar, and in the course of conversation, which naturally turned in a great mea-

sure on the melancholy fate of Moorcrort’s party, he said that about a month be-

fore the death of TREBEcK he had one dav gone to him, by desire of the Khan, to

purchase some pearls which he heard he had. TREBECK produced the pearls but

when questioned about the price said in a desponding tone, Take them for what

you please, my heart is broken, what care I for price now? The entry is this: ‘‘ Total

on the strings, 280 grs. Oct. 15th. Taken by MEERZA, 13] grs. or 4 miskals. 16th.

Taken by DEWAN BEGHEE 33 grs. or 1 miskal.’’ It will be observed no price is

affixed ;—probably none was received. A stranger in a foreign land far from the sooth-

ing voice of countrymen or kinsfolk, surrounded by rude hordes who looked on him

as the only obstacle to possessing themselves of the countless treasures which they

believed to be in his charge, his youthful spirit pined and sunk. The bright visions

with which he had commenced his career had long since vanished :—where he had

looked for pleasures he had found toils, where for rest, he had to guard against

dangers: sickness had carried off many of the companions with whom he had set out

-and when at Jast it struck his guide, his own familiar friend to whom he had looked

for support under every adversity, and for rescue from every difficulty, and when

in addition he found that all hopes of return to his native land seemed if not cut off

at least indefinitely deferred, his heart as he too truly said was broken, and in a few

short weeks he sunk into au untimely grave. [ should apologize fora digression

unsuited I confess to the character of an official paper, but it is impossible to hear

the warm terms in which poor TREBECK is still mentioned by the rude natives

amongst whom he died without feeling the deepest sympathy in the fate of one who

fell ‘‘so young and yet so full of promise.”’

7. Itis only necessary I should add one or two more observations. The account

book, which I now forward, is a valuable document in more respects than one. It

contains an accurate list of the stock originally purchased by Mr. MoorcroFrt when

starting for his journey, and will serve to modify considerably the extravagant ideas

that have been entertained of the quantities of goods which he carried. Taken in

connexion with the loose MS. accounts it will serve also to evince that the greater

part of this stock was sold off previous to his leaving Bokhara, and as far as my in-

formation goes I am inclined to believe the proceeds were chiefly expended in the

purchase of horses, of which I understand he had when he died somewhat under a

hundred, including specimens of all the best Uzbek and Turkooman breeds.

8. The account book is further interesting as containing in Mr. MOORCROFT’S

own handwriting a list of the articles which he offered on his presentation to the

king of Bokhara, and a note at the end to the effect that the king had, in return

ordered him a remission of the duties of his merchandize rather more than equalling

the estimated value of the goods. It is further satisfactory to be able to add, on

the authority of several Bokhara merchants who were on terms of intimacy with

him during his stay in that city, that his character was highly appreciated by the

king, who frequently sent for him to enjoy the pleasure of his conversation, and

covferred on him the high privilege, never before granted to a Christian, of riding

through the city and even to the gate of the king’s palace on horseback.

9. In addition to the list of his merchandize this account book contains also a

list of his private property, which it appears Mr. MoorcrRoFtT was obliged by order

of the Koosh Begee to make out on entering Bokhara: from this list we learn

that he possessed 90 volumes of books. The number I have recovered and which

I have now the honor to place at your disposal is 57 ; amongst them are several odd

volumes of which the sets if complete, would give an addition of about 30—

total 87, so that there are probably not more than two or three volumes of which

we may not consider ourselves to have ascertained the fate. As to MSS. I have

already shewn the high improbability that any of consequence have eluded my re-

searches.

10. Scattered through the printed volumes numerous notes and corrections in

Mr. MoOorRcROF?T’s own handwriting will be found. Of these some referring inci-

dentally to the dangers of his journey, or laying down plans as to the route by which

he meant to return, cannot be read without emotion.

11. In conclusion it is but justice to add that the impression every where left by

this enterprizing but ill-fated party has been ina high degree favorable to our

national character.

Peshawur, 26th Moy 1838. (Signed) P. B.Lorp.

Translation of a letter from MirnzA HUMEE OOD DEN éo P. B. Lorn, Esq.

‘* A.C, Two books and one manuscript are in the city of Shuhr Subz. I have

sent a person to bring them and when they reach me! shall send them to you. In

all things I wil] never forget your good offices. Let me always hear of your wel-

ogee Mim what the man saysand that I am your well-wisher. Dated Mohurrum

1254 A, i.

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 667

[The list of books, principally medical, it is unnecessary to insert.—EbD.]

Literary and Antiquities.

The revised copy of the Girnar inscription made with the utmost care

by hand, was received from Lieut. Posrans, who had since been deputed ~

to Buroda on duty.

This copy satisfactorily clears up almost all the passages at all dubious in

Captain LANGe’s original,—it will be necessary to publish a revised translation in

consequence.

_ Captain Burnes forwarded copy of, 1st a short Buddhist Pd/i inscription,

from the country of Shah Kuttore, or Chitral south of Badukhshan, on the

river Kooner (the Kaure of E/phinstone, a principal feeder of the Indus) ;

2, facsimiles and ectypes of a Bactrian inscription from Kupurdigheri, the

same of which a sketch was formerly taken by M. Court ; and 3, a small

inscription, in a modification of the same character, under the other.

(We shall pnblish these immediately, but we fear without interpretation. |

Mr. H. T. Prinsep, Secretary to Government, forwarded copy of a voca-

bulary of the language of the Moghel Aimeks, by Lieut. Leecu, for such

notice as the Society might deem it to merit.

This is the eighth language or dialect of which Lieut. LEkcuH has made himself

master in the course of his present journey.

Captain Burnus also forwarded for inspection 5 gold coins dug out of

the tope of Khaiber.

They were found a few feet below the surface by a party of Afghans who were dig

ging a trench on the mound to protect themselves from the attack of another party.

One coin was of Mokadphises ; the others were varieties of the Kanerkes group.

With reference to the legend of the Mokadphises coin, the Secretary announced

that he had been fortunate enough to discover a scheme of the Bactrian alphabet,

which enabled him to read the whole of the Bactrian legends with much greater

facility, and semblance of truth than he had before been able to obtain. The lan-

guage he now perceived to be Pdli, although somewhat disguised by being written

in an alphabetical system as foreign to its structure as the Persian would be to the

modern Bengali.

[The paper is published in the present number. |

Mr. Mappock proposed that the Society should take steps to procure

some fragments of the richly carved sculpture of the Kandrah temple, now

thrown on the ground and in danger of destruction.

_ It seems that permission having been given by Mr. WILKINSON to the Kurda

raja to supply himself with stones (meaning probably the loose detached stones)

from the black pagoda, the raja had commenced deliberately dismantling the temple

and carrying off all the images to ornament his own house !—in moving one large

figure he had been obliged to take down the beautifully carved door depicted by

STIRLING, and unless stopped there would soon cease to exist this venerable monu-

ment so long the principal landmerk on the coast.

' Resolved, to address Government to suspend if possible the further

demolition of the Kandérak temple, or otherwise at least to secure some of

its sculpture for preservation in the museum.

Mr. J. P. Grant, presented for the museum in the name of Mr. Cuurca

of Penang, two bows and a bundle of arrows from that island.

Col. Sracy presented on the part of Major Yuunr an ornamental Litho-

graph of a gold medal of Suan Jenan, weighing 70 oz, dated 1064 Hej.

Statistical.

Dr. Spry laid on the table various tabular statements which had been

prepared under his predecessor and himself,— but, at the request of the

President, he withdrew them in order to embody them in a formal report

by next Meeting.

PuysrcaL DepaRTMENT.

The following extract of a letter from Lieutenant Hurron, on his return

from deputation to the Spiti valley, was read.

Soongnum, 5th July, 1838.

I am now again at Soongnum in Kunawur, having recrossed the Hungrung Pass

yesterday, on my return from Speetee, and bid adieu to the Tartars. The Passes

to Ludak from Speetee were quite impassable from the great depth of snow which

had fallen full two months later this year than usual, throughout the hills. Every

668 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Juny,

thing is very backward in consequence,—and in the higher parts of the Speetee

valley, there is great distress from the loss of last year’s crops, which were beaten

down and buried beneath an early fall of snow. I experienced the greatest difficulty

in reaching the fossil ground owing tothe want of supplies and the unwillingness

of the Kiladar at Dunkur to allow me to proceed. On my arrival beneath the fort,

he sent me orders to return, as he had received instructions from Ludak to oppose

my advance. In this emergency, finding myself within a few miles of the desired

object, and unwilling that the wishes ofthe Society should be frustrated, particularly

after the fatigues and discomforts 1 had experienced on my way; I bethought me

that it is sometimes expedient when ‘‘at Rome, to do as the Romans do ;’’ conse-

quently finding that I had about as many men, and better arms than my opponent,

I sent him back threat for threat, and told him that it was my intention to proceed

by force if necessary, and that if he offered to oppose me, I would burn his castle

about his ears. The threat had the desired effect, and I received answer that his

highness would pay me a visit, which he did, and having thus dismounted him from

his high horse, I made him furnish me with six days’ provisions for my people, by

which means alove I have been able to visit the fossil ground and determine the

geological formation of those dreary and melancholy looking regions. The fossils

themselves as specimens are certainly not worth one quarter of the trouble they have

occasioned me, and partake of the same decomposing nature as the shales in which

they occur. Such as they are, however, I have collected them, and they will be

interesting when taken in connection with the geological specimens of the whole

country travelled over. In natural History this is the most barren country I have

ever seen; of birds there are scarcely any, and of beasts none but the wild sheep.

If the season be not against me, however, I may yet procure good specimens in the

lower hills. Here there is no covert for living creatures, but lower down in Kuna-

wur where the forests are thick, I shall be able to make up a collection. The geolo-

gy is however, I think very interesting and may perhaps cover the imperfections of

other branches of my work. I have the ‘‘ Bhair or gigantic partridge ;’’ the com-

mon chough, and another of the genus, which I am inclined to think is new;

pigeons and college pheasants also. The tragopan and monal are not found up

here, but occur from Wangtoo downwards. Of the wild sheep I have been able to

procure only one specimen, which the heat has spoiled in spite of lbs. of arsenical

soap; the thermometer at 1100 was almost enough to have spoiled me too. At Nako

in Hungrung at sunrise on the 3rd July 370,—at Leeo at noon, 110° in sun, 100° in

my tent; and sunset 700.—I am worn to the bones with fatigue, and anxiety lest the

Society should feel disappointed with the results of my journey but I feel conscious

of having done my.utmost and must therefore wait patiently the decision of my

judges. I shall halt here for a day or two to rest, as there are some things worth

seeing in the neighbourhood, such as copper mines, &c. Poor GERARD’s ac-

count of ‘‘ excellent limestone in this neighbourhood,’’ was premature ; he failed

in his attempts to burn it, so say the people, and so says the stone, forit isa

secondary limestone containing clay and sand and burns to a slag in consequence.

Three more specimens of Indus jet coal were received, through Govern.

ment, from Captain BurNngEs.

Mr. H. B. Honeson, addressed to the Society’s care through the Honor-

able Col. Morison, a further roll of drawings illustrative of the zoology

of Nipal.

The Secretary noticed as an omission on his part in the steps taken to pro-

mote the success of Mr. HoDGsoON’s undertaking by the Society, that it had not

yet solicited the usual patronage of the Government to his elaborate and costly

publication. Having recommended the Royal Asiatic Society to solicit the patronage

of the Court at home, he had deemed it superfluous to do so here, but as nothing

had apparently been done there he thought it was now incumbent on the Society

to do it at once.

Resolved, that the present roll of zoological drawings be submitted to

the Hon. the President in Council with a solicitation for such degree of

public patronage, as the national character of the publication may seem

to entitle it from the Government of British India.

Lieutenant E. Conouuy, 6th Cavalry, communicated the following parti-

culars of the recent fall of an aerolite in Central India. |

Three aerolites fell during a heavy storm and after a vivid flash of lightning, on the

same day, i. e. about the 23rd June.—One at Burnuggur (aiso called Nolat) the other

two near Oujein. The three are said to weigh two maunds (together) and to be

of three colors, green, yellowish red, and French grey, but on such points native

authority is questionable, There seems no cause to doubt their having really

1828.] _ Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 669

fallen, the fact having been officially reported to the Resident of Indore by the Oujetn

akhbér navis. I also heard of it from private letters.

Mr. Bax has ordered them to be sent to him, and has promised to forward them

on to me when he shall have satisfied his curiosity by the sight of them.

Should they not be required by superstition for gods, which is more than pro-

bable, specimens shall be sent to the Asiatic Society and to yourself.

A note on the geology of the desert and the navigability of the Lon

river was communicated by Captain Burnes, in consequence of a remark

in the Report of the Coal Committee, on the want of such information.

Natural History. .

The following presentations to the museum, were noticed by the Cu~

rator.

Skeleton of the Bengal Bustard, Otis Bengulensis.

Skeleton of the Negro Money, Semnopithecus Maurus.

This monkey preserved in spirits, was on a former occasion presented by Dr.

PEARSON, but falling into a state of decay, it was thought advisable to prepare and

articulate the bones for a skeleton rather than allow the specimen to be lost to

the Society’s museum.

Crania of the Red, or Asiatic Orang Otang. ( Pithecus Satyrus, Grorr.)

one from Borneo, the other from Sumatra*,

These valuable relics of what appear to have been most extraordinary gigantic

monkeys were presented by Major GreGory. ‘hey are those of adult males each

exceeding in size even that of the large one killed on the N. W. coast of Sumatra,

figured and so admirably described by Dr. ABEL in the Society’s Transactions. and

which is stated to have measured 8 feet when suspended for the purpose of being

skinned, parts of the spoils of which are now deposited in the museum. As no very

marked differences are perceptible in the general conformation of the skulls of these

two animals, and they exactly correspond with each other in their dental systems, it

is evident that the individuals to which they belonged must have been of the same

species. The one from Sumatra is the larger of the two and must have been a most

formidable and stupendous animal in the living state. The skulls may be considered

a valuable enrichment to the Society’s collection, for they probably surpass any

thing of the kind yet seen.

Inflated and dried stomach and coecum of the Semnopithecus Entellus, or

Hanuman monkey.

This is intended to show the sacculated and complex form ofthe first named viscus,

in this group of monkeys, which in this particular respect differs most essentially

from the Orangs and most of the other Simiz where the organ is of the usual

simple construction, as may be seen by comparing it with the stomach of the Pithe-

cus Satyrus placed with it in the museum.

Distended and dried stomach of a wild cat, Felis Catus.

Exemplifying the simple form of the organ in this genus of Carnivora.

Specimens of the head, wings and legs of the Flamingo ( Phenicopterus

ruber), Cranium and imperfect skin of the Crested Porcupine (Histrix

cristatus ), and a dried skin of a large Armadillo, Dasypus —_—-? pre-

sented by Mr. Kirror on behalf of Mr. Congunoun.

A Centipede, (Scolopendra morsitans ), of large size, captured at the

mint and presented by the Secretary.

Skull and skin of a Civet Cat, Viverra Zibeta, or Indian variety of that

animal, presented by Colonel Sracy.

A fine and perfect specimen of the Silhet mole (a variety of the Tulpa

Europea), preserved in spirits, presented by Mr. J. Tayror.

The existence in India of this little obscure animal having been doubted by some

and denied by others, it affords pleasure in being able to set the matter beyond the

power of contradiction by the exhibit of a fine specimen, and the mutilated skin of

one of former receipt, one from Silhet, the other from Assam and which may lead

to the belief of their habitat in our move immediate possessions.

From the circumstance of its so completely resembling the European mole in

almost every particular it may reasonably be considered a variety of that animal.

G. E.

* The latter is reserved by Majot GReGory, as the Society possesses one jaw

of the same species, x

*d ‘—'pouretdxa aq 03 Ajeutour ur st aio <

uo ure’ JO : { S19) [IS Jnq ‘punois a ; ,

PF Let foe yearn fot bRcnpS oe Ad wale uspente V BEN er oe ee TUTE ee TERE

I L -ul J pasn oinsveul ayy, |

lee*s|\co*st €8 | 19 | ol 4 36 |8b (oh gPoLl

ical Register.

olog

Meteor

X.—

“WW *d f VOOM y

“W 'v QU Suoousi0.7

"Sest ‘Ayn fo yquopy ay7 sof ‘nj3nIIM_ ‘ag hussp ay2 yn yday ‘wajsrhary yn01b0j0.L0aja fT

beau poe base 8°98;ZIb 6S BrP ‘6z : Me de 7 ane

on yap <l glm “o Lo‘olzo'ol #21 ae Loml wo'le? lo fos: loven. —— Be 98 | 98 | 6L | ¥6 | o°F Pe \8‘LLa°ce|P'es 1 ‘o8 Vos‘ea'eectaa)‘uNaty |

‘uy la *s 08 a a es oe be ter, os Lor loge’ J coug cop | 1|'2 “sf 2g | 08 | of | 26 ES Aa one eT Gee BIg jaro | Te

‘azeu “oO Cie, L\e‘9etssp* j9rgs *1ynuINs Tia “sh Gs Salle i Hate 20) ggs* |95¢ ts

emer TTBS lod | Se] ee az carte: gee foment ale |] bs een veven ts Ra" |

Wamoys -Apa| zlca o's ps‘Olcoot Z8 | ze| PBT FG late IPS Be aftis’ ‘cee f-yeus <u] Z\"M “st 16 | ce | os | og | Lh IT letZila'pe tes 8° ers, 0-9 33

ulel c “M °N £6 aa) 8g 16 ES Us OfLL ‘ ‘ ae ; é Si 8 OOT yZ €6 0.9 ‘0 0°9/ ers pede | ee £6

‘yu yjeurer | Tia +s GO'tlertf 68 | se | 9Z | G6 ‘g [Le fOLL |T18 foda° [eTo* f-urea popizes| | “AA | 16 | Ts | ¢8 | 96 oe l6'e |a‘cllp: eo Bho" 9%

Azamoys *fp| gla + 3 G6 Tp Of fecZd Ba hceps Sie’ f “seoreao | Z"M ‘SI 16 | ze | 08 | 96 G& |6€ |e 92/F 08 Iteg® |tgo* | ¢%

“ues et eo laa a sara alice. prcteaerlueloe Porte lo jpercbretuee fe -s| e6 | on | 28 | Ze lee (ore loslereuletceletse cre tear | fe

‘Atamoys‘hyo| ea “s|€FOjzp°0 16 06 | 28 1 96 los oS : big rg‘ *suluIvI Ii ‘S 1&8 | 06| 88} Z ‘ pe eid 6Le 16S" €%

E ‘ ‘ 9°S \0°S FS'8Z |S‘FR hoor. 62>. “4s AINE d : 6 | 9'S |E'S 10°84\9°S8 gis’ |ggc' 2G

op op za *S BL ‘Onasoy 82 19 | ¢Z | 06 |e ‘ “ ‘ Biles JSPILIAO GM “Si €6 | 06 | #8 } 46 | 9% [E'S IS‘BZI0% ¢ CnOMITe a“ é

*U2p ‘}s"WI9'9 . . GE OF Fé BL 19°88 #868 Ser‘ op raeae Go} 08 y s 2 S82 0 +8 0°€8/T'98 LI¢ 09¢ 1G

Siar ate el osceltoUlamdtted alco Utne ecabey ice leote dente beceamrene DireerlRee Ie legeel cal cece laces tae pec eioaleeag coke aides aoe

rug aqui! era's! | | 8d oe | Fz. | 06 (ere ny eh pena att -sensAy-opltzlasal & | ae | ef | ob |Z (Pp leZileceipesecn cor’ lowe | ot

“kep ye -Aplsyl-o «s T1 lo%e |p pace 8°68 tgce’ [16 J euy swims | T/A * fe eae We oP ie p st

Pile -Apifolo -s TO oro; GY | Ge | a8 | £6 [6's 9°8 Jo'6s [Lira oles ete’ Servo Op Ge Clee ne Tere eecsl ce cigtid tees cane eee Whar, Slee, Siar

weaved ee 260 fe eo ee toas eualire ne Pies Shou! SUS] or ay [ahah ee es egeoen| || lin: late | a

*Apno a) 3 . Il‘O ‘ . A 5 a : | : ) ei GI¢é 1pé* "Jeijs -uind) F 'S 7 =, As ‘ Reine , v cL

op zl +s (18 Olreol OF 8 A 7B ie ae ea aie eer’ GLb. furer Apvais} gla "Sh 96 | 06 | ¢8 ae Pes Ga a fie €8,0'98 ve ae el

“pur asipAya|¥zl-a “gs |S0Ulgy*ut 68 | og | af 1 96 lars Ts pr ‘68 }6PhS POPS Fiquiays'Ay] Z| “S| 68 | og 26 | cg | oF ete Pople cg 89e él

‘yes ‘und a etc n " 4 Ge |b 6 9°08 |S°88ipors 60g‘ ‘Azey °0 ela st ze = , 7 0.08 3°98 ‘ ecg’ §$\h8s 11

op op Sle. letMorol f8'| Seabee Loo (eee le edaece ueee [Gees are Biusrmerool aide tele cy yes Leelee le lieroeal er ieee nege | oe

ar epee yal chou w (o> Oop eel oe Vie 1-06. | Gtesleee stay Geen [ce eee Pt ny ace tole gece oe eee woes Oe ee O'LL'9% «leer | 8

‘y-Appo"yaep] lm *S/62 9 Ze} 23 8 1 96 Jofe (6's (L°8L L'p8 btoss 0S fF *3e498 ‘op | 0} *@ | 16 . & \26 10. 42:9 68 gee. |6SF 8

oat 8 | oL 1 6 I7'e ige fae eveltecs Tee’ V &6 | 06 | 96 | oS |e°T |S‘I8\otts 98° |sTes !

“aug soo Ss 69% HIG OL 1Z | $9 | 98 I2° cy bre ‘ , TFG 186 pnos -op Gl°AA “SH GB | Eg | BZ 26 10'S Ith 106 ah is a é i

-Apnoyo ¢ z = 8 12°B |G°L 69k 106 o7e* \OLeS Wsnqyexys -op} 11° “ r : 6L\6°Z8 19g 198e 9

‘ulel prey ; . | <8 6 16E |G°E 40°82 |e°S8 pers TL : ; ee Ie, A ees’ jgtes ?

eo iro| leo 7 | 06 | 88 | 86 iat ers foros pis foes gene | tumums | a] Ss He Ge Gage ae ae bHe. ae] 8

cz: OL | of | €9 | 98 lee ins t9*82 |9°¢6 yorGs IZe“6zh's:3 ‘p-uimol e| -s 58 | ze | eZ lee | ee ve lmaalees Lyp‘65\g80" |

> = ee ioe} ae a Ia, Pe bee —- |— == [eee 3 po ace es S alia ai €8¢‘66| 1

Cn OT log Pl Pie Dig Wi TS) Ss. > > fo) = ——| — | —— | — |__| ——_

Be |g) © SREB Set ecigeeeivas | F| = | EE] ee [S|] sf eZjzsesied aeons) 7/8) sige] = | w2| F

& 2 SPP SIS LUIS aie SO) s oe yt Ror oie Se RL SOF ISSIE IS (ak Saige o| >|oiss, 7 | Pel 5

3 on! Se ORmeriggt sc ° © pene o| oe jgtico |5 On, PRgt) 2) » m | St os =) ro)

foWy an © Oj. BOlnEs O S| wW a ’ © | ee 8 ee le a wy =o 7) NG} 3 5

° ei “@ oft) 7 BSS 5 Kes © S ae <| Os Bg|ge ae 4 . ae oS

. cd _ © o ; me teas a, pane oO re co

a rd As ee IP 9S VS eg \pum fos sl BPs Ego] F s| 4] & | 82|

*IOYICIM *uOISud} *A14 | -oangea # -oanssorg ; 5 ' : rete 2

snoanby -amoishy f-edway, !o1eydsou “TOYIVO AA POTS e ; g

oO VW aworsh : ainssold =

ported saoonby H ainjviedwoaL, ouaydsouny| &

JOURNAL

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

No. 80.—August, 1838.

I.—A short account of the Moa Morah sect, and of the country at

present occupied by the Bor Senaputtee. By S.O. Hannay, Capt.

A0th Regt. N. I. Asst. to the Commissioner in Assam.

Origin and Religious tenets.—Moa Mureeah or Morah, is the desig-

nation of a particular sect of the Assamese population, who are noted

in the latter days of Assam history. They are scattered over the whole

valley, being found as far west as Goalparah, but the greatest numbers

seem to be located in that tract of country, known in the present day,

as the Muttuck territory.

About the period that the numerous tribes in the valley of Assam

were converted to Hinduism, adivision took place amongst them, num-

bers of the population following the religious tenets of a certain “ Goo-

roo,” or spiritual adviser, who did not admit the supremacy of the Brah-

mins, and professing to worship only the incarnation of the deity, known

to heathens, as “ VisHnu.” 3

The residence of the first priest of this sect, is said to have been on

the Majoillee*, on the banks of a small lake, which is now carried away

by the Burhumpooter. The name of this lake, from the circumstance

of its abounding in a description of small fish, called Moa, was named

in the usual style of Assamese phraseology “ Méa Morah ;” from whence

arose the name of the sect, but which has been turned, by those of the

Brahminical faith through a spirit of contempt, to Moa Mureeah.

After the rise of the sect of Moa Mureeah the seat of the head

priest, called the Moa Mureeah Gossain, was removed to a place called

Kuteeah Putha, a short distance to the west of Jorehat, and the spot on

which he resided was elevated from the plain, several hundred feet, by

* Large island of the Burhumpooter,

672 Account of the Moa Morah sect. [ Ava.

artificial means. The name of the first gossain was Oneez Roop, and

disciples seem to have flocked in to him from all the different tribes,

such as, Cassarees, Ahoms, Dhooms, Kuleetas, Kaysts, Harees, and

others of the lowest classes. And from the upper part of the valley,

may be added Scoteahs, Morans, &c. &c. &c.

Nothing particular is recorded of this sect, until the reign of raja

LuckmgzeE S1nG, when having joined in the rebellion of this raja’s bro-

ther, a general massacre was ordered, which was carried into effect, and

the gossain, with all his family killed. It is related of Luckmer Sino

that his feelings were so vindictive against the gossain, that although

he was positively informed not only of his death but that his body had

been cut in pieces, still he had the river dragged, for the remains of his

enemy, in order to satisfy himself that he had really been killed.

This general massacre fell very severely on the Morans, and other in-

habitants of the Upper Booree Dihing, who formed a large portion of

the army, which for a time overthrew the rule of Lucxmzg Sing - and

to this indiscriminate massacre may be attributed the subsequent civil

wars of Assam, which in the end have brought it to its present degene-

rate and comparatively impoverished state.

LuckMgE Sine seems however to have relented shortly after the

massacre above mentioned, and, on a representation being made to him,

by the priests of the opposite sect, he appointed another Gooroo, or

spiritual head, over the Moa Mureeahs, in the person of a man, named

Prrumser, who was said to have been a nephew of the former gossain.

As might have been expected this priest and his party retained all the

vindictive feeling of their relatives towards the sovereigns of Assam, and

a second rebellion broke out, in the following weak reign of GourEENatTH

Srna, who fled from his seat of Government for seven years, during

which time the Moa Mureeahs set up several rajas of their own.

Their names were as follows, Durrta Bonorzea*, Boora PHoKAN, his

son Ucneg Kumwar, and lastly Barorgna, who got rid of his prede-

cessor by a trick of rather a ludicrous nature. Having had much influ-

ence over Uaner, he persuaded him that the north bank of the Burhum-

pooter was the proper place for his raj, and when he had seen him and

his party safely off, he returned, and quietly set himself up in his stead

at Rungpore. During this confusion the setting up of rajas seems to

have been quite common in Upper Assam, as even the Dhooms of the

Moa Mureeah sect set up a raja for themselves, first at Sudiya, and

afterwards at Douka khana, on the north bank of the Ser

This raj was overthrown by the Khamtis.

* A Duffla slave,

1838. ] Account of the Moa Morah sect. 673

- The Moran portion of the Moa Mureeahs set up for themselves, on the

Debroo, the father of the present Senaputtee, who took possession of

the present Bengmorah, the former name of which was Sung mae

pathar. | 2

During the time that BaroTera had established himself at Rungpore,

GourEENATH SING, received the assistance of the British Government,

and the Moa Mureeahs were dispersed. ‘The chief of Bengmorah was

overthrown by the inhabitants of Sudiya, assisted by the Khamtis, and

the six Singpho Gams, residing on the east bank of the Noa Dirhing,

and a persecution seems to have been kept up against the sect, who were

driven to seek shelter amongst the Singphos, and a great number of the

Moran portion of the sect were cut off by these people at a spot near

the confluence of the Noa and Booree Dihing.

Under the firm government of Poor-Na-nunp, Bor Gohain, or chief

minister of the raja, the Moa Mureeahs received severe chastisement,

and those who escaped towards the Upper Dihing, do not seem to have

been able to establish themselves again, as independent of their rightful

sovereign; either during the remainder of raja GournENatn’s reign

or in that of his still weaker successors ComALEswur, and CuuNpDER-

cANTH, but they made several efforts to do so, and Ba RoTEEA, (who was

formerly mentioned, ) whilst living for shelter in the Beesa Gam’s village,

(the grandfather of the present Beesa,) sent a person called Ramnata

Bor Boorooax to treat with the Burman monarch for assistance ; though,

at that time, without effect. Messages were however repeatedly sent

to Burmah, and parties of Burmese were twice brought into Assam ;

once by the Beesa Gam, and once by a Khamti chief called Hocass-

Gowan, and it was with him, that the father of the person known as

the Kaminee Phokan, first came from Burmah. These Burmans how-

ever, were always bribed, or bought over, through the influence and

wealth of the prime minister, who in the end relaxed his severity to-

wards the Moa Mureeahs, and subsequently gave the present chief of

Muttuck, his title of Bor Senaputtee ; who appears to have remained

obedient to his lawful sovereign, paying the revenue required from the

portion of the sect, over whom he was supposed to have authority.

Poor-NA-NUND GOHAIN may be said to have been the protector, and

regenerator of his country for a period of twenty years, before which

time it had been a scene of anarchy and bloodshed. He was not

destined however to remain longer in his prominent situation, for his

sovereign the weak Cuunpercanra, and a few of his nobles, jealous of

the Bor Gohain’s power and influence, but unable to displace him them-

selves, secretly entered into a league with the Burmans for that purpose,

4p 2

‘

674 Account of the Moa Morah sect. f Ava.

and the Bor Phokan, who went to Burmah, vid Calcutta, on the part

of Cuunpercanta returned to Assam with the Khyee Woongye, and

8 or 10 thousand Burmans, and the latter being always ready for con-_

quest, were by no means loath to make their way into a country, which

had been represented to them, as overflowing with riches ; but the

Bor Gohain only lived to hear of their arrival across the frontier.

What followed in this country is already well known, and there are

few, who are not aware, that the oppressive rule of the Burmans brought

Assam into a more degraded state than it had ever been.

The Senaputtee taking advantage of the confusion of those times,

established himself, in his father’s position at Bengmorah, and secured

himself from the immediate control of the Burman government by

keeping at his residence, and in his pay, a vakeel, who was a native

Burman* and remained with the Senaputtee, on the part of the

Burmans.

The Bor Senaputtee having established himself as the head of the

Moa Mureeahs on the line of the Debroo, he soon set himself up, on a

firmer footing, than any of the former chiefs of the sect, and as he

pleaded poverty, besides, the outskirts of his country, being so jungly as

to present a forbidding aspect to the Burmans, they allowed him to

remain comparatively unmolested.

At the time of the arrival of the first Burmese army in Assam, the

Morans occupied, as they now do, their proper localities on the upper

portion of the Debroo ; and lower down that river, and scattered over

different parts of the surrounding country, there was a tolerable popu-

lation of Moa Mureeah’s and other Assamese, but not near so extensive,

as was found, on the British taking possession of this country.

Upper Assam had been long subject to the imroads of the Singphos;

and their slave-taking excursions were carried on with renewed success,

during the Burman rule in Assam. The Bor Senaputtee seems how-

ever to have prevented any successful attack on his portion of the coun-

try. And it is reported that the present Beesa Gam, made, at one time,

an attempt on a large scale, to carry off some of the people, but was

driven back with great loss. The inhabitants of the surrounding coun-

try therefore, feeling that they would be more secure from Singphos,

and Burman oppression, naturally chose to put themselves under the

protection of a man like the Senaputtee. And thus on the arrival of

the British in Assam, he was found with all the semblance of an inde-

pendent prince, and the head of a country containing upwards of 50,000

inhabitants.

* The Kaminee Phokan before mentioned.

i aA SD hee

— "2. eae ~ “Ss

1838. ] Account of the Moa Morah sect. 675

It does not appear that any particular boundary was laid down for-

merly to the Senaputtee, or that any particular parts of the province

were considered as his hereditary lands. But subsequent arrangements

with British authorities in Assam, have given to him a territory, having

the Burhumpooter as its western and northern boundary, the Booree Di-

hing as its southern, and a line drawn south from Sudiya to the Booree

Dthing is the eastern boundary. And the Bor Senaputtee is the ac-

knowledged chief of a tract of country, bearing a fair proportion in ex-

tent, to that which has been made over to PorunpEr Sine.

The Morans are quite a distinct class of the Moa Mureeah sect, and

occupy the same section of the country, as they didin former days. This

tract is situated between the Dangooree, and Debroo rivers ; they also

inhabit a portion of the south bank of the Debroo, but they do not ap-

pear to have extended to the westward of the junction of the Dangoree

and Debroo, at which place a chokey was situated, called panee cho-

key. The following are the names of some of their localities: Bor

Chookree, Hiri Chookree, Casso-Jan, Hoolinga-gooree, Goee-Jhén,

Dhea-miit, Bhothé-JShan, Jégooniguyd, Majotlee goyah, Beesa Khépa,

and others. In the days of the Assam rajas, the Morans paid no re-

venue, but as people living in a jungle, (which it would seem their

name denotes,) they were called upon to supply the raja’s household

with different articles in accordance to the designation of their tribes ;

for instance, the Hathi Soongis supplied him with elephants, the Rom

Jogooyahs, with the coloring vegetable matter known in Assam, as

vom, Dharee booahs, with mats, and the Mo-Jogoozahs with honey,

and so forth.

Further down the Debroo, there are many villages inhabitated by

the Moa Mureeah sect, but they are generally found with a greater pro-

portion of those who profess the Brahminical faith ; but in the wes-

tern portion of the country, many of the first classes of the Ahom po-

pulation reside, who are followers of the Moa Mureeah gohains.

The jungles on the north bank of the Boorvee Dihing have been, for

several years, considered as a place of refuge for the disaffected, and

such has been the emigration (from well known causes), to the coun-

try between the Burhumpooter and the ‘Booree Dihing, that it is said,

there cannot be less than a hundred and twenty thousand inhabitants

there. This statement will be more readily credited, when it is known

that the whole of the extensive khats, or farms, containing the finest

grain pathars in Upper Assam, and situated between the Debroo, and

the Booree Dihing, are occupied within these few years by the runaway

ryots of Porunprr Sine. The whole of the Beheeah population of the

676 Account of the Moa Morah seet. [ Aue.

districts of Seesee, and Dumajee, three fourths of the Cassaree popula-

tion, originally belonging to Sudiya, and three fourths of the Dho-

ania population released from Singpho slavery, amounting to 8, or

9000, are all located within the boundary lately assigned to the Sena-

puttee.

The Bor Senaputtee pays to the British Government an annual sum

of 1800 rupees, and the surplus of the revenue of this country remains

in his own hands. What the amount of that revenue may be, is, I

presume, not known. My information, which I have obtained from vari-

ous sources is as follows. All new comers into the Muttuck country,

are taxed after one and a half years’ residence there. A poll tax is

acknowledged to be in force, and the different classes pay according to

the following scale.

Martins acto. nadtaciess ltr. i 3 rupees per head,

Cassarees, (Sonewahls,) ................. 3 rupees ditto. :

Behees, (Sonewahls,) ...........sssee00006. 24 rupees ditto.

Assamese, (of all classes,) ... ..........6... 2 to 1 rupee ditto.

But with such a mixed population, a portion of which are no doubt,

people of idle and dissolute habits, the probability is that many of the

inhabitants escape taxation. And besides it can hardly be expected,

that any regular system of administration could be carried on, when

the head of the country, and his whole family, are so illiterate and ig-

norant. The Senaputtee has seven sons, and he, himself, is the only one

of the family, who knows any thing even of the common Assamese cha-

racter. Increasing prosperity however, has rendered it necessary for

them to employ native writers, who are placed in the different districts

over which different members of the Senaputtee’s family have control.

He, and his sons, have also taken large farms into their own hands ;

which are worked by the Assamese, who have last gone into Muétuck,

so that although they escape taxation, they are thus made a source

of immediate profit to the chief, and his sons,

- In a letter, published in the Government Gazette, dated June, 1825,

the Bor Senaputtee is said to be the head of the Moa Mureeah tribe.

I however wish to explain, that the Moa Mureeahs are not a distinct

tribe, but a religious sect of the Assamese population, composed of in-

dividuals, from most of the known tribes of Assam, and who have risen

into notice within the memory of men now living. The Bor Senaputtee

has been generally considered as the head of a distinct tribe, tributary

to the Assam rajas ; but this is not the case. He is neither the chief of

the Moa Mureeah sect, nor of the Moran tribe, as these classes are by

no means confined to his territory,

1838.] Account of the Moa Morah sect. 677

The head priest of the Moa Mureeahs, is a son of the man formerly

mentioned, called “ PrrumBer ;’ until lately he resided at Kooteah

Pottah, but he is now living in the Senaputtee’s country : his name is

Bucxranunp. His antipathy to those who profess the Brahminical

faith is well known, and the strong suspicions that exist, regarding his

late conduct at Jorehdt, having been a cloak for mischievous purposes,

has forced him to leave that part of the country.

The Moa Mureeahs seem to have a good deal of republican feeling,

with regard to equality, and free will ; and it is said that there are

great dissentions amongst those in the Senaputtee’s country.

BucxTanunp dislikes the chief, because he will not enter into his

bigoted views, on secular, as well as religous matters. The Morans

also, on the Upper Debroo, have set up for themselves a separate Goo-

roo, or spiritual head, and as they considered themselves on an equality

with the Senaputtee, they are not at all satisfied with the high station he

has lately assumed, and particularly with their having been money tax-

ed, and also with regard to other unusual exactions made on them by

him. I have understood that these disaffections have been carried so

far, as to be made the subject of a formal complaint to the British

authorities in the beginning of 1837.

The Bor Senaputtee is a “ Boorook Sooteah;” his ancestors* were

natives of the district of Sudiya, but he was born on the Upper Debroo.

He must have been a man of some energy of character, and is spoken

of as having been much liked in his younger days; but love of money,

and of power, have lately assumed such an influence over him, as to be

seen in all his actions. He is also said to be completely ruled by his

wife in these matters, against whom the Morans entertain very bitter

feelings.

The Senaputtee is now an old man, and having had one severe pa-

ralytic stroke, he may not live long; none of his sons are equal to him

in intellect, but the second son, called the “ Manso Gouatn,” is said

to be the most intelligent, and he is strongly in the interests of Buck-

TANUND the priest. Taking into consideration therefore the character

of this priest, it is to be feared, that, when released from the control of

the Senaputtee, some disturbances may arise, and urged by bigotry,

some acts of violence may take place, unless prevented by timely in-

terference on the part of the British Government,

Although the Senaputtee’s country is interspersed with jungle, it

abounds in extensive grain pathers, and is a rich depdt of grain. A

great portion of the inhabitants being of those classes who are consider-

* Father and grandfather.

678 Account of the Moa Morah sect. (Ave.

ed the best farmers in Assam, the cultivation is good, and crops of the

same description are raised as in the other parts of Assam ; with ex-

ception of the mustard plant, which is scarce. Sugar-cane, of a supe-

rior quality is cultivated to some extent, and manufactured into goor.

And in the upper section of the country, inhabited by Morans, cot-

ton of an excellent quality is Beomienny and forms a considerable export

to lower Assam.

Rice and cotton are the staple commodities, and with goor, and ele-

phants’ teeth, form the only exports.

The country, however, like the other sections of Upper Assam fur-

nishes mooga; and the southeast portion is the locality of numer-

ous tea tracts, many of which are in an advanced state, and produce

tea of an excellent quality.

The universal resources of the Senaputtee’s country must be supposed

to be of the same nature as those which are known to exist in that por-

tion of Upper Assam, with which it is connected. It may however be

observed, that on the eastern side of the country towards the Naga

hills, there are iron, salt, and coal found, within the limits of the boun-

dary lately alloted to the Muttuck chief ; neither of these minerals are

worked.

The imports into the Senaputtee’s country, which find a ready sale

are salt, tobacco, betel-nut, cossyah mattocks, flints and steel, knives of

Assamese manufacture, brass pots, copper pots, earthen pots.

High ridges of ground run across the country from southwest, to

northeast, particularly towards the eastern boundary. But the gene-

ral level of the country is low, and the lower portion of the Debroo,

and the’ whole line of the Booree Dihing, with a few exceptions’, is

flooded, during the height of the rains. It is intersected by numer-

ous streams, and water-courses, and those on the north bank of the

Debroo, which fall into that river, coming from the Burhumpooter ; a

portion of the country therefore, from Sudiya to the mouth of the

Debroo, may be considered only as a succession of islands, belonging

to the large river.

The principal streams on the northern side, are the Sasa and Tingri,

both of which fall into the Booree Dihing. They are navigable for the

common canoes of the country throughout the greatest part of the

year, and are consequently extremely useful to the inhabitants, as out-

lets for the produce of the country.

The Mutiuck+ country is not considered unhealthy by the natives,

* In many places the remains of a water bund are visible on the Dihing.

+ A name given to the Morans by the Khamtis.

1838. ] Journal of a Tour in-Orissa. 679

but there seems to be a want of good water, and this may be attributed

to the circumstance of most of the running streams having their source

in jheels, passing over low alluvial soil, and through thick jungle. The

inhabitants, however, who live at a distance from the main streams,

use the water from wells, which is considered good.

I know little else worthy of remark regarding the country of Mut-

tuck or its inhabitants, and the latter no doubt resemble those of the

same classes in other parts of dssam. The Morans, however, have some

peculiarities which are not met with in other Assamese. They are rude

and rough in their manners, and much more robust in their persons

than most Assamese, and they are not as yet, addicted to the use of

opium. Their only peculiarities in dress are that they wear black

turbans, and very long amber ear-rings.

In these people, we might perhaps trace a remnant of what the in-

habitants of Uppev Assam were a century ago.

II.—Mr. Krrron’s Journal of his Tour in the Province of Orissa.

Having been deputed by the Coal and Mineral Committee to explore

the supposed coal fields of Orissa, reported by me in 1837, I left

Calcutta by dawk on the 23rd of February 1838, with a determination

to make the most of my time and journey, also of the small pecuniary

allowance made for the purpose, in antiquarian and other research

beyond the mere exploring of the coal localities. .

I reached Mednipur on the morning of the 24th; left again at 9

p. M. and arrived at Jaleswara ( Anglice Jellasore), the following

morning, the 25th; I carefully examined the -bed of the Subanrikd,

but could not discover any trace of coal.

I was shewn an old musjid on the bank of the river close to the

village ; over its centre arch is an Arabic inscription in the Toghra,

character of which I took a facsimile ; it is a quotation from the Koran

and apparently the name of one of the Pathan emperors of Gaur ;

the musjid is very small and built in the rudest style with blocks of

laterite taken from some demolished temple; there has been a small

oblong area to it enclosed by a stone wall, having four small flanking

towers at the corners and a gateway in the centre of the eastern face,

the whole is now nearly demolished.

About four miles hence to the northward on the right (or south)

bank of the river, are the remains of a very extensive fortification the

history of which is buried in oblivion ; I had intended to have visited

this place on my return, but was prevented by sickness.

4 Q

680 ~ Journal of a Tour in Orissa. _ (Aue.

I left Jaleswar at 10 py. m. and reached Paléswar (Anglicc

Balasore), the next morning (the 26th) at sunrise, having stopped

for half an hour at the Burabalang river to search for fragments of

eoal. I was unsuccessful. In the night I left again on a trip to the

_ Netlgirvi hills at Neilgarh, distant about 12 miles, which place I

reached at daybreak. Netlgarh is the capital of the petty state of that _

name and is the residence of the rajas ; it is an insignificant place with

a few pukka buildings belonging to the raja, also some small temples.

I had been told that there were caves in this hill, but upon inquiry

on my arrival I was assured that I had been misinformed, and that the

only curiosities were two huge blocks of stone 2rds of the way up the

hill which are venerated and known by the names of Domurra and

Domurrani. I accordingly climbed up the hill, and being much fatigued

rested on the rock: I had a noble view of the sea and the surrounding

country which in some measure repaid me for my trouble. -My guide

assured me with the gravest. face possible that. these. two shapeless

stones were deities in that disguise awaiting the time when the sea

will rise above the low lands and wash the foot of the hills, when they

(the Thakdirs) will sit and enjoy themselves, fishing with a rod and

line ; there is no accounting for such an absurd tradition.

The rock of this lofty hill is a fine close-grained grey granite with

large veins of quartz. .

' Having taken a cup of tea I retraced my steps to Baléswar where I

arrived at 3 Pp. M. I left the following evening for Jajipur, which place

} reached at noon on the Ist. I had expected to meet a native friend of

mine, Moonsif ABDULAHED, with whom I intended to pass a couple,

of days exploring the antiquities of Jdjipur, but to my regret he had

left two days’ previous for a place twenty miles off. I made every

possible inquiry, but was assured that there were no inscriptions or other

objects worthy of notice beyond what I had seen in November 1836,

already described in my journal, vide page 53 Journal As. Soc.

No. 73 for January 1838 ; I examined the huge idols near the shrine :

it would upon more mature consideration be an useless expense remov-

ing them, as they are much mutilated.

I went to the temple where the eight idols are placed, which are said

to have been dug out of the bed of the river and drew five of them.

There are very faithful representations of the whole (nine idols) in the

MAcKEnzIE collection of plates ; also of the three colossal figures above

mentioned. Towards the evening I was informed that there was a stone

with writing and sculpture upon it situated in the centre of an extensive

plain about six miles to the south-westward. I procured bearers and

eee ee a » .

Fear. 1s. oe ts VolNUW.PL XXXVI

ee rr) We 1, a )

ay Q ’ Dy : g

HPS: OO ae

: | Sy L j EAT oy a) bs ~? : } nat as

{ ‘ —,> — —- ‘ MKS l gv >, NG a>

\! o> / if “py Sy VO Vee oh,

i SS \f { ‘ * = Re ONS b

| ate F =

BaMN

Pte ie ey

Shay

pin hI

a U4 4 .

MG, oe ”

LN ong Hen WG

o— is OL ih Zh af

: RRA at lovee.

| tte

pee ste,

o ie ¢

SSN

z 6S

Zoe ss

RAY eS

WAS ;

igs

\ ‘ Ws ane

—

TWEE DL Ae eae 1D Se:

TaN a psa 4 - he

i i

PEL |

fi vba

74 ,

UZTe

“My

4, 42

p : (belce, £f10G

iY Z :

4A),

/ es CC RS ZZ

C (

d =

, eres Fal i ya (Ea righ a aaa 5 f

: lea gis

Nt N

Seo a

—— > SS

ORE

So e< f sal

Zao?

> {

ean a

‘SS SGG0O at GSE

CIG

YE =e ar

NEC

OOCCEE

SSOGo &oOG

SSS

SO OG

Che

tH AW

rsd

{

gent

cy et hy"

amen

}

ope

PI-Kitlee Delt, & Lith*

1888.) Journal of a Tour in Orissa. - 681

started at sunset, having made previous arrangements for proceeding on

to Cuttack after examining the stone ; I reached the spot after an in-

finite deal of trouble and annoyance, for I could not get a single villager

to tell me where it was; all denied there being any at all, such is the

provoking insolence and knavery of most Ooreyahs. At 8 P. mM. my

bearers having got hold (by good luck) of the head-man of the village,

he led me to the spot which was such as described ; the stone is about

three feet above the ground and of semicircular shape, having one face

flat about one foot wide on which are the remains of a short inscription

and a piece of rude sculpture (vide plate XXXVIII. fig. 1). I was

assured that the stone was sunk very deep in the ground, in fact that

it reached “ patal” (the regions below). Having sketched the stone I

proceeded on my journey to Cuttack, where I arrived at noon the

following day.

I remained two days at Cuttack and then proceeded to Kandrak to

see the famous temple known by the name of “the-black pagoda.”

Owing tothe bad bearers I had had for the two last stages, I did not

reach Kandrak till one oe’clock the following day, instead of at sunrise

as I had expected, added to which I had such a bad headache when I

arrived, from exposure to the sun and want of food, that I was quite

unable to do any thing further than examine the noble ruin.

The temple has been originally very similar in general design to

that of Jagannath at Pooreec ; the great tower fell to the ground many

centuries ago; but one corner is still standing to the height of 80°

or 100 feet and has (at a distance) the appearance of a crooked

column. Such is the extent and minuteness of the sculpture on the

pyramidal building (the anti-chamber) now remaining, that it would

require a sheet of paper almost of the size of the original to give all

the minutize of sculpture. The largest figures (which are mostly

highly obscene) are about four feet high: there is one row of them

however round the dome (if it may be so termed) which are neatly

executed and well worth removing to the museum: they represent

musicians in dancing attitudes, playing on drums, trumpets, &c. &c. &c.

The whole edifice is of a reddish stone found in the neighbourhood,

which appears to be a kind of mottled breccia with a great proportion

of quartz and lithomarge. The only black stones in the building, are

those with which the three doorways to the north, east and south

are lined: they are huge slabs of chlorite richly carved.

_ The Kérda raja has demolished all three entrances and is removing

the stones to Pooree ; the masons pick out the figures and throw them

down to take their chance of being broken to pieces, (which most of

4Q2

;

682 > Journal of a Tour in Orissa. (Aue.

them are ;) such they leave on the spot, those that escape uninjured are

taken away.

The elegant doorway called the Nawagriha, a drawing of which is

to bé found in the 15th Vol. of the Asiatic Researches, has been

completely destroyed.

I remarked three or four niches in the different doorways in which

slabs of chlorite with inscriptiong had existed ; they were removed about

1815 or later by some European officer, but what has become of them

I cannot ascertain: it is probable they were sent to Europe. It would

be worth while to institute some inquiry after these valuable records

of antiquity which might throw some light on the origin of this wonder-

ful specimen of human ingenuity and labor, and would also add to the

knowledge already obtained from such records regarding the early his-

tory of Kalinga.

Before the northern doorway, are two colossal elephants nearly

buried in the sand and ruins, with drivers seated on them and foot

soldiers beside them; the elephants are supposed to be covered with

jewels and armour; before the southern entrance are two horses and

attendants to each, equally elegantly caparisoned ; before the eastern

doorway, are two huge lions rampant with an elephant crouching

beneath each; one of these is still erect, of which I took a drawing,

see fig. 2, Pl. XXXVIII. The doorways are severally called after the

animals which guard them ; viz. the Sinha, Aswa, and Hasti darwaza.

Having procured sixteen bearers I proceeded on to Pooree after dark -

and reached the bungalows on the beach at3 a.m. I had my palkee

placed by the sea side and enjoyed the breeze and the roaring of the

surf.

I remained during the day (the 6th March), and walked: for a mile

or more on the beach at low water, picked up many shells but very

few perfect. I could only obtain two coins at the shroffs, although I

had anticipated better success, having been promised many.

I made every possible inquiry about antiquities and inscriptions, but »

could learn of none except those in the great temple of Jaganndth and

in the Gondichagarh: it would be desirable to get facsimiles of these

taken by some intelligent Hindu.

At four p. m. left for Kdrda, at which place I anniveal at sunrise :

there are no ruins of any interest such as might have been expected,

when it is considered that it was for many years the capital of Orissa ;

the rude walls of the old noor or palace are still aaa also some of

the city gateways.

The laterite and breccia are the materials in common use for build-

ings of all kinds.

Jour: As. Soc.

Shee

- x >

at 1 . ‘ ‘ :

= ey

—y

ALLA J we I

FT TT Eas Gk N=, (>. = AG paniee

tl Wit NEA NA) 4 ig Gi Zea ae

" 2 ae ; ii w XN} W, rs SG AG oe %

‘

{ HOS LEM Hi !

@'}) : oe

‘ ea] treet pit, » * Lo ie x

Soma =! i ts, (agente x hy” Sa }

| RS a tf ST Fate aS alt

3 ae —— — = te —<— -_ Hie nyse Be Sie te 1g]

= ————

= ~ (i vel wi [day

LS > V7, nto 4

AT SS

* sRY dig

Bie

4 he

Bae dale |

r W ae!

fF iB y

See ——s ee aX St

{uf - : a 7 Re,’

Vi Warrier Mee 1 me te 4

J ° tie, 46

- lrg 4

CT : :

i ania AIT A is

4 -

ty | i

, HH |

i | '

i ’

I ; |

—_——

PQ te

UDAYA Gt RI.

SS NO Nee Se Ue

—————

= _ ‘3

Sos ~~ YNAA, “S paren SSS \)

o ~~. ~~ NW DR sean aitses SS Sat =u a } = Se = NN \)

——— ee, — “~ ‘

— ~—ee \ 3 ON ~ eS Wah 9

rey Sos. ~ \ ts Meat.

ic. aaa

er» et |

Vol. VIL. PL. XLL,

_——

—— Ss

wt we Qt SSS See

~ _

<I S NS \

SON

SQA

aes

SSE avs

NNR ey

v: \

ul \ Nig SAARC v-

<: SSN

‘3

2 =~

> — =—=

ie eee

z a

or \

c= ee wm —

Soe Reig |:

< \ ets

las

As* Soc®

Jour

CAVE

CANESH CURBHA

FES

SIRS a, ©

=. AA

i“

mS \\

—

WAT

vt wm

74 ~S

BS: \\r

“

SS = SS

se SNS

~ ae Sx

—

aS LL —_

—

. SSE

te, EE

= —s VASEDUNIU WE

es a

wa SS

SS a y

ie a

t ————— =

eee nee

SSS SSS

(eae

itu

{lig

Mi)

aC ne co a

aa.

JODEV GURBHA, UDAYAGIRI.

ee DS

CAVE

ae =

ya Mittoe, dest & Lith®

i E gorupagy fg ee

A aay yn 49 Peay 2245

EPS nad

mie’

“yg, tee NG GQ2i3idia

Dian on JAVD 3M 39 BVAIMA BHL NO FUNLdINIS

"DOO sy Noe

1838. ] Journal of a Tour in Orissa. 683 ©

There is a fine spring of water issuing from the northern face

of the great hill; near the summit, there is a small temple with an image

of Srva from the navel of which the water is made to run; a short way

beyond this spot, over the top of the hill, and on the southern face, is a

large cleft in the rock forming a kind of cavern, it is called “ Pandeb—

Garha” or “ Pancha Pandava,” it has for centuries been the abode of

ascetics who have at different ages scratched their names and short

sentences on the “ sthans” or hewn seats within the cavern. I did not.

deem them worthy of being copied : they were mostly in. Kutila charac-

ter, Telingana, Canara, &c. &c.

At two p. m. I proceeded (dawk) to Atteiri, distant eight eniles

to visit the hot spring, the temperature of which was 115° only, owing

to the body of cold water surrounding it being penned in to form

a tank for the purpose of irrigation ; the spot where the spring rises is

indicated by a number of small models of royal umbrellas made both

of black and of white thread wove over twigs, placed there as offerings

in honor (the white) of S1va and the black of Visunu.

Close to the village of Atteiré is a small tank hewn out of the

laterite rock in which I founda kind-of fresh water sponge adhering

to the stones, it was perfectly white and had a very delicate and

beautiful appearance. I brought away a piece but in the course of a few

hours, the insect dying, it became putrid and decomposed, so that I

was obliged to throw it away.

I returned immediately to Kiurda, (as it was past sunset) and reached

that place at eight p. m. I left again at five a.m. for Khandgirt and

owing to the insolence and perverseness of the bearers, who wanted to

take me in spite of every remonstrance to Bhuvaneswar, I did not get

there till one p.m. I had only ten miles to travel, yet as late as eleven

A.M. (six hours), they only took me eight miles, when they set me down

and went away to cook their meals. I was then obliged to lock up my

palkee, and taking my drawing materials and pittarahs on coolies, I

walked the rest of the way in the heat of the sun: the bearers brought

the palkee up a few hours afterwards. In the meantime having got some

milk and a few plantains to refresh me, I set to work to draw all that

was most worthy of notice ; I commenced work at one Pp. m. and

continued till long after dark, using a torch: I regret that I lost so much

time owing to the conduct of the bearers, and that I could not remain

another day. Plates XXXIX. XL. XLI. and XLII.

At ten p.m. I started again for Bhuvaneswar, and reached that

place at two a. mM. I arose at daybreak and set to work to copy an

inscription in the temple of Kedareswar and tried to take off impres-

684 +» Journal of a Tour in Orissa, _ Ave.

sions several times, but not succeeding, I copied it accurately in pencil*,

I found that in spite of all my measures and efforts that the brahmans

would not allow me to enter the great temple to copy the numerous

inscriptions there ; therefore I set to work to draw the sculpture of some

of the elegant temples around me, but it coming on to rain hard I was

obliged to give it up, not however, till, with the shelter of a chatta

and a sheet, I completed a sketch of Ling Raj temple with the Bindsd-

gur tank and buildings. 3

The rain still continuing, I left at four Pp. m. for Cuttack where I

arrived at ten a. M. the following morning, after passing a very stormy

and wet night and being thrown down in my palkee frequently ; on my

arrival I received a letter from my friend, the Secretary, informing

me of his discovery of the name of Anriocaus in the Girnar and

Dhauli inscriptions, and requesting me to recompare my transcript

and correct any errors. I instantly laid my dawk and left at six p. m.

for Dhault which curious place I reached before daybreak and had to

wait till it was light; for the two bear cubs which escaped me there

Jast year, when I killed the old bear, were now full grown and

disputed the ground. At day break I climbed to the Aswastwma and

cutting two large forked boughs of a tree near the spot, placed them

against the rock: on these I stood to effect my object. I had taken the

precaution to make a bearer hold the wood steady, but being intent on

my interesting task I forgot my ticklish footing; the bearer had also

fallen asleep and let go his hold, so that having overbalanced myself the

wood slipped and I was pitched head foremost down the rock, but fortu-

nately fell on my hands and received no injury beyond a few bruises

and a severe shock: I took a little rest and completed the work. |

I then climbed to the cavern and attempted to penetrate it, but the

stench of the bats and the dung of those animals and cockroaches pre-

vented my going more than 20 or 30 yards. I procured a few specimens

of the curious kind of bats occurring here, then returned towards Cut-

tack, and arrived at six p. m. much satisfied at having been able to effect

so desirable an object.

I took one day’s rest and the second day at five rp. m. left again on

my march to Vélchir in search of coal. I had sent on my tent and

servants to Kakhar the first march; I passed the night there and

marched to Gevindpur in Dhenkunnal before daybreak the next morn-

* We have unfortunately mislaid this inscription, or rather have placed it

carefully by, where we cannot put our hands on it. When found, an account of

it shall be given in our series of inscriptions, which daily multiplies, and en+

grosses more and more of our time and attention.—Eb.

1838.] Journal of a Tour in Orissa. 685

ing in company with my friend Mr. R. Besrson of Cuttack: there

was dense jangal the whole way ; the soil is stiff red marl with much la-

terite ; there are numerous small hills on either side of the path; the

rock is a coarse sandstone, a continuation of that formation alluded to

in my report on the volcanic rock of Neurae in No. 74 for February

1838, of the Asiatic Journal. Shingle occurs occasionally: I am of

opinion that coal could be found at some depth below the surface.

There is a great deal of cultivation about Govindpur : there is a nulla

the water of which is penned in after the rains for the purposes of irri-

gation. A short distance north of the village are the remains of a dam

of masonry close to the extensive ruins of some former city called Ton-

légarh,

The natives have a tradition that this is one of the forts of a race

of people called Dehdllié, who formerly had possession of these hill

provinces.

On the 15th I marched to Deogaon, a large village with several tem-

ples, tanks, and wells at the foot of the famous hill of Kapildss ; in

the evening we climbed this lofty hill by a narrow but even path wind-

ing round the southern face: the ascent is very steep and in many pla-

ces steps are hewn out of the rock. I should think it must be about one

and half miles to the glen near the summit where there is a beautiful

spring of fresh water issuing from a part of the rock which, different

from the other parts of the hill, is stratified. There are several small but

ancient temples dedicated to Manapeva under the name of Kapiliss

Mahadeo ; they were built by the Gajapati raja PRATAP Rupra Deva.

The brahmans relate that the raja having incurred the guilt of killing

a bull, had a curse pronounced on him; he went to Pooree and asked

of Jaganndth what he should do to obtain forgiveness ; the deity replied

“Go to Mount Kapilass and there remain doing penance until your

black raiments turn white.” Having after a time obtained the favor of

Siva he built the temples and endowed them out of gratitude for his

absolution, since which time the spot has become a place of constant

worship, a large fair is held annually. when pilgrims flock to it from all

parts of Orissa.

It was quite dark before we reached the foot of the hill, we were met

by several paiks who had been sent to light us home to our tent, they

had torches made of slips of Sissoo wood, tied into long narrow bun-

dles which once lighted burn to the last morsel, emitting a very

strong light with a powerful and delicious aromatic smell, they are in

common use throughout the Girijut (hill states).

686 -. Péli Buddhistical. Annals. (Aue.

III.—An examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals, No. 3. By

the Hon'ble GrorcE Turnovur, Esq. Ceylon Civil Service.

[Continued from Vol. VI. p. 737.]

In the two preceding articles, an attempt has been made to give a

connected account of three great Buddhistical convocations held in

India; as well as to establish the authenticity, and to define the age

in which those Pali Annals were compiled from which that account

was taken. In due course, in an inquiry chiefly entered into for the

illustration of the historical data contained in these records, the next

subject for examination would have been the genealogy of the kings

of India, had the chronology of the Buddhists anterior to the age of

Saxya, exhibited the same degree of authenticity, that the portion

subsequent to that era has been found to possess.

In this respect, however, the Buddhistical writings are unfortunately

as defective as the Brahminical. Both the chronology and the

historical narrative prior to the advent of GotomMo’ BupDHo, are

involved in intentional perversion and mystification ; a perversion

evidently had recourse to for the purpose of working out the scheme

on which he based that wonderful dispensation, which was promulgated

over Central India, during his pretended divine mission on earth of

forty-five years, between 588 and 543 before the birth of Christ ; and

was subsequently recognized, almost throughout the whole of Asia,

within two and half centuries from that period.

Your invaluable discovery of the alphabet in which the inscriptions,

undeciphered for ages, which are scattered over India, are written,

having proved that those inscriptions are, for the most part, Buddhis-

tical, and composed in the P&li laneuage, will in themselves have

afforded a powerful incentive to the oriental scholar to devote his best

attention to the examination of the ancient annals of that creed

still extant in that language. And when, on the one hand, by an

extraordinary and fortunate coincidence, the events recorded in those

inscriptions are found to be commemorative, chiefly, of the edicts of

the identical ruler of India, of whom the most detailed information is ~

given in the only P4li historical work yet brought to the notice of the

European literary world; and on the other, by the preposterous

pretensions of the Buddhists, their mystified legends of antiquity are

solemnly put forth as an equally authentic and continuous history

from the commencement of the creation, unless timely precaution be

taken to avert the delusion, an exaggerated amount of expectation

may be created, which must unavoidably end ina proportionate measure

1838.] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 687

of ultimate disappointment, involving, perhaps in that reaction the

authentic portion also of these annals, for a time, under one general

and sweeping disparagement.

It is very desirable, therefore, that, if possible, the nature, the

extent, as well as the motive, for this mystification should be explained,

before I advert to those portions of the Pali Annals which treat of events

of greater antiquity than twenty-four centuries. I profess not to be

able to show, either the age in which the first systematic perversion of

the Buddhistical records took place, or how often that mvystification was

repeated ; but self-condemnatory evidence more convincing than that

which the Pitakattaya” and the Atthakathaé themselves contain, that

such a mystification was adopted at the advent of SAxya cannot, I

conceive, be reasonably expected to exist. In those authorities, (both

which are still held by the Buddhists to be inspired writings, ) you are,

as one of their cardinal points of faith, required to believe, moreover,

that a revolution of human affairs, in all respects similar to the one’

that took place at the advent of SAxya, occurred at the manifestation

of every preceding Buppuo. The question, therefore, as to whether

SAxya was or was not the first disturber of Buddhistical chronology, is

dependent on the establishment of the still more important historical

fact of whether the preceding BuppuA had any existence but in his

pretended revelation. For impartial evidence on this interesting

question, we must not, of course, search Buddhistical writings; and it

is not my design to enter into any speculative discussion at present.

It is, however, not unworthy of general remark that, as far as

the surviving records of antiquity will admit of a judgment being

formed, the learned consider it to be established that the Egyptians

and the Hindus, the two nations who earliest attained an advanced

condition of civilization, both preserved their chronology underanged,

till about the age in which Buddhism acquired its greatest spread over

the civilized regions of Asia} and that it was only then that the

propounders of religious mysteries in Egypt and in those regions

attempted to remodel their historical data, attributing to their respective

nations a greater antiquity than that previously claimed by them.

Heroporus is considered to have visited Egypt about the middle of

the fifth century before Christ. A comparison of the information

collected by that historian, with that obtained by Droporus four

hundred years later, shows that the Egyptian priests had in that

interval altered their traditions considerably, so as to throw the com-

mencement of their history much further back. It appears to be

equally proved, by the evidence still extant of the information collected

688 Pili Buddhistical Annals. [Ava

by MzcasruenEs, during his embassy to India, in the fourth century

before Christ, that the chronology of the Hindus, had not been

mystified (to the extent, at least, it is now found to be) up to that

period; for that MzGasTuenas is represented to bear testimony that

the Hindus had not carried back their antiquities much beyond six

thousand years, and that the Hindus and the Jews were the only

people who had a true idea of the creation of the world. Although

SAxya closed his career in B. C. 543, his creed had not spread over

Asia till after the conversion of Aso’xo, and the dispersion of the

missionaries to propagate Buddhism in the year after the third convo-

cation, which was held in B. C. 309; and the general adoption of the

Buddhistical derangement of historical data beyond Central India,

could only have gained ground with the extension of the creed by

which it was promulgated. Thus much then may safely be inferred

from these authorities, that the chronology of. the Egyptians, the Hin-

dus and the Buddhists (the last two perhaps ought not to be separated

till after Go’romo’ Buppuo’s assumption of Buddhohood) remained,

underanged, till about the age of his advent; and that the alteration

of the chronology of the Egyptian and Buddhists had been completely

effected between that epoch, and the date at which Buddhism attained

its most extended ascendancy. In regard to the Hindu chronology,

within my limited means of information, I am only able to learn, that

MrcasTuEnes found it of the degree of authenticity already mentioned,

in the fourth century before Christ, and that, as far as we can gather

from the Rija Taringini, the only continuous Hindu history yet

discovered, its mystifications extend to so recent a date as the seventh

century of our era. The absence, however, of more precise evidence

as to the exact date at which the original derangement of the Hindu

chronology actually took place, by no means justifies the conclusion

that it was not first disturbed at the same time as that of the Egyptians

and Buddhists. :

The temptation to prosecute these analogies further is almost

irresistible, under the fresh interest given to the inquiry by your

discovery, in the ancient Buddhistical inscriptions, of the names of

rulers of Bactriana and of Egypt in the edicts of Aso-ko, the identical

monarch in India, in whose reign the alteration of the Buddhisticalt

chronology must have been generally recognized. ‘The data, however

connected with this question are not yet fully prepared for examination ;

and even if they were, I should not presume to use them till the public

had the benefit of your learned digest of these materials, the fruits of

your own successful researches. My attempt to give a translation of

1838. ] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 689

the Zdé inscriptions, before the result of your own labors reached me,

was made exclusively at your request.

The task I have assigned for myself on the present occasion is free

from every embarrassment but the embarras de richesse, arising out of

the necessity of selecting from, and condensing, my superabundant

materials, to adapt them for your Journal. In accordance with the

plan hitherto pursued by me, I limit myself to furnishing literal

translations, unaccompanied by any further observations from myself

than are indispensably necessary for the due comprehension of the

passages quoted either from the Piakattayan or the Atthakathd.

Buddhists, as I have already stated, maintain that all they possess of

historical data to the date of the third convocation are either the con-

temporaneous history of SaKya and his disciples, or the revelations of

anterior events disclosed by the power of inspiration with which they

were endowed. My first extracts, therefore, will be explanatory of this

power, which is designated the Pubbcniwdsandnan.

As it is also a tenet of their faith, not only that the world is destroy-

ed and reproduced after the lapse of certain, to us, undefinable periods,

but that even during the existence of each creation, or kappo, the con-

dition of man undergoes such changes as to reduce the term of human

life, from the incalculable asankheyyan to ten years, accompanied like-

wise by a proportionate deterioration of the mental faculties; and as

such a deterioration invariably intervenes between the advents of any

two BuppHA, though manifested in the same kappo, expressly in order

that revelation, and revelation alone, may connect the histories of the

preceding with each subsequent BuppHo—my second series of ex-

tracts will consist of those passages of these revelations which are de-

scriptive of the destruction and reproduction of the universe and of man-

kind, both generally, and, in somewhat greater detail, as regards the

last creation of the world.

Thirdly and lastly, the extracts will contain an abridged notice of

the three Buppu of this kappo who preceded Skxya, and a fuller

account of Sakya himself to the period of his delivering the discourses

contained in the section called the Buddhawanso, the commentary

on which chiefly furnishes my extracts.

When these points have been placed before those who take an inter-

est in this inquiry, in the light in which they are regarded by Buddhists

themselves, the scope and design of the parties who compiled the annals

from which all our data are derived, are less likely to be misunderstood.

Wherever an isolated passage of the Prtakattayan is found to contain

the information sought in an integral form, the preference has always:

4R2

690 Pali Buddhistical Annals. [Ave.

been given to it over the Atthakathé. On subjects necessarily involv-

ing continuous narrative, the information could in general only have

been obtained by reference to several parts of the Pitakattayan (as the

narrative portion of that compilation consists principally of unconnected

parables) ; and by forming a connected statement from those references.

In those cases, I have preferred at once availing myself of the continu-

ous statement frequently furnished by Buppuacuoso in his Atthakatha

or commentaries on the text of the Pitakattayan. My object being to

select for consideration, in every instance, those points which are con-

sidered of the greatest importance, not by the European inquirer but

by the Buddhist commentator ; and to present them also, as far as pos-

sible, in the language used by Buppuo, his disciples, and the last great

commentator on his doctrines, BuDDHAGHOSO.

Concerning the Pubbéniwdsandnan, Extract from the Patisamblidan, the twelfth

book in the Khudakanikdgé in the Suttapitako.

‘¢He (who has attained the arahat, sanctification) is endowed with the power,

called Pubbéniwdsandnan, of revealing his various former existences. Thus I am

acquainted with one existence, two existences, three existences, four existences,

five existences, ten existences, twenty existences, thirty existences, forty existences,

fifty existences, a hundred existences, a thousand existences, and a hundred

thousand existences; innumerable Sanwatta-kappé; innumerable Wiwatta-kappé ;

innumerable Sanwattawiwatia-kappe.

‘* | know that I was born in such a place, bearing such a name, descended of such

a race, endowed with such a complexion: that I subsisted on such an aliment,

and was subjected to such and such joys and griefs, and was gifted with such a

term of existence: who after death (in each of those existences) was reproduced

in such a place, bearing such a name, descended of such a family, endowed with

such a complexion, nourished by such aliment, subjected to such and such pains

and pleasures, gifted with such a term of existence : and who, after death in that

existence, was regenerated here. Thus it is that he who is endowed with the

Pubbéniwdsandnan is acquainted both with his origin and external appearance

(in his form existence).”

The Atthakatha called the Saddhammappakdsint, on the Patisambhi-

dan affords the following explanation of this passage.

‘‘ This power of Pubbéniwdsananan six descriptions of beings exercise; viz. the

Titthiya (the ministers of other religions), the Pakatisawakd (disciples ordinary of

Buppuo), the Asitimahésdwaka (his eighty principal disciples), the Dwé-aggasdwake

(the two chief disciples), the Pachchéka Buddha (inferior Buddhos), and the Buddhé

(supreme Buddhos).

‘* Among these, the Titthiya have the power of revelation over forty kappé, and

not beyond, on account of their limited intelligence; and their intelligence is limit-

ed as they recognize a limitation to corporeal and individual regeneration.

‘* The ordinary disciples (of BUDDHO) have the power of revelation over a hun-

dred and a thousand kappe being endowed with greater intelligence.

‘*The eighty principal disciples have the power of revelation over a hundred thou-

sand kappé. The two chief disciples over one asankheyyan and a hundred thousand

kappé. The inferior Buddhd over two asankheyydné and a hundred thousand kappé

1838. ] ? Pili Buddhistical Annals. 691

Their destiny being fulfilled at the termination of these respective periods (being

the term that has elapsed from the epoch of their respectively forming their vow to

realize sanctification, to their accomplishment of the same). To the intelligence of

the supreme Buddhd alone there is no limitation.’’

Concerning the creation of the world. Extracts from the same Atihakatha.

‘¢ ¢ Bhikkhus! there are toeach mahd-kappo, four asankheyydné (the duration of

which) do not admit of computation. ‘These are those four. In due course of time,

Bhikkhus the kappo perishes ; but the duration of the term (during which it is in pro-

cess of destruction) does not admit of computation. There is also, Bhikkhus! aterm

during which the kappo remains perished, which likewise does not admit of compu-

tation. In due course, again, Bhikkhus! the kappo is regenerated ; and fora certain

period the kappo maintains its regenerated state. The duration of each of which

terms is, in like manner, incalculable.’

‘¢ The four asankheyydné thus explained by BuppuHo in the Chatussankhakappasut-

tan (in the fourth chapter of Anguttoranikdyo), have been made the subject of this

Atthakathd,

‘There are three modes of destruction; destruction by fire ; destruction by water ;

destruction by the wind; and there are these limitations to the spread of those de-

structions, prescribed by the position of either the Abhassaro, the Subhakinno, or the

Wehapphalo Brahmaloka worlds.

“* Whenever the kappois destroyed by fire,itis only consumed from Abhassaro down-

ward. Whenever the kappo is destroyed by water, it perishes by the water below

the Subhakinno ; and whenever it perishes by the wind, it is destroyed by the wind

prevalent below the Wehapphalo.

** On each occasion on which a kappo is destroyed one Buddhakkhettan always pe-

rishes : of which there are three descriptions, viz. the Jatikkhettan, Andkkhettan and

Wisayyakkhettan. The ten thousand Chakkawaldni (or the regions to which birth-

right extends), which are bounded by the Jdtikkhettan belong to the Jdtikkhettan ;

which is subject to do homage in this world to TATHAGATO (BUDBHO), on all oc-

casions from the day of his being conceived in the womb of his mother. The hun-

dred thousand kotiyo of Chakkawaldni bounded by the Avakkhettan (or regions to

which his authority extends) appertain to the Anakkhettun. The sanctifications or

influences of the Ratanaparittan, the Dhajaggaparittan, the Atdndtaparittan and

the Méraparittan extend thereto. All the other endless and innumerable Chakka-

waldni compose the Wisayyakkhettan. In regard to it also, whatever TATHAGATO

may vouchsafe, that he can accomplish. From amongst these three Buddhakk het-

tdni, whenever the Andkkhettdn is destroyed, in that identical destruction, the

destruction of the Jdtikkhettdn is also comprehended ; in as much as in that

destruction they are simultaneously involved; and at their reproduction they are

simultaneously reproduced. Be it understood, that such is the progression of its

(the kappo’s) destruction and reproduction.

“ Atany time when a kappo is to be destroyed by fire, in the first place, the mighty

cloud, the precursor of the destruction of the kappo, rising aloft, discharges

itself simultaneously over the hundred thousand kétiyo of Chakkawaldni. Their

inhabitants, rejoicing thereat, and providing themselves with every description of

seed, sow them. When the crops attain an age at which cattle delight to feed

thereon, although thunders growl like the braying of anass, not a drop of rain falls.

The rain lost on that occasion is lost (to that world) for ever. All living creatures

dependent on rain for their existence (perishing) are reproduced inthe Brahmaléko

world. So do also the creatures which subsist on flowers and fruits, as well as

the Déwatd,

** When such a visitation has endured a certain period, water in every part of the

world is driedup, Thereafter, in due course, fishes and turtles also, perishing, are

692 Péli Buddhistical Annals. [ Ava.

regenerated in the Brahmaléko. Even creatures expiating their sins (in this world)

while yet in health, expire, as soon as the seven suns (which ultimately manifest

themselves) shine on the creation. Asthey are not endowed with Jhdnan they

are not (at once) reproduced in the Brahmaléko. How then are these to be

reproduced (ultimately there) having died of the misery they were enduring, without

yet being able to attain Jhdnan? Bythe gift of Jhdnan to be acquired by their

(intermediate) reproduction in the Déwaléko (which is inferior to the Brahmaléko).”

Here follows a specification of the means by which those, who do

not possess the jhdnan requisite for immediate regeneration in the

Brahmaloko, acquire it intermediately in the Déwaldko, to which they

are admissible without that sanctification. The Atthakathd proceeds.

‘* At a certain period after rain has ceased (to fall) a second sun appears. After

the appearance of the second sun, there is no longer any limitation to, or

distinction of, night and day. When one sun sets the other sua rises, keeping up a

constant sun shine. Nor is that sun like the ordinary one, in ordinary times. There

is neither cloud nor mist, to intercept its rays, but it is as clear as a looking glass.

The five great rivers (of the world) together with all the small streams are then

dried up. fj

‘* From the second to the fifth sun, the lakes and inland seas and the great ocean

dry up progressively. At the appearance of the sixth sun, the whole Chakkawalani are

involved in one mass of smoke. After the lapse of a considerable period, the

seventh sun appears. By its manifestation the whole of the Chakkawalani,

together with the hundred thousand kdtiyo of worlds, become involved in one

column of fire.’’

Here follows an account of the extension of the flames to the six

Déwalékd, and from thence to the lower Brahmalokd, till they reach

the Apassaré Brahmaléko. The fire then subsides, without leaving

even the ashes unconsumed of the worlds that had been destroyed,

leaving the universe, above and below the consumed regions, involved

in total darkness.

“¢ After the lapse of a long period, a mighty cloud rising, sprinkles a slight shower

in drift, which by degrees increasing to streams of the size of the lotus stalk, a

beam, the pestle of a rice pounder, and the trunk of a palmira tree, pours down on

all the Chakkuwaldni, and submerges the whole of them that had been destroyed by

fire. The power ofthe wind below and around, prevents the escape of the waters,

which are concentrated resembling a drop of water on the leaf of a lotus flower.

‘* By what means is it that so great a body of water (ultimately) acquires the

properties of solidity? By making apertures in various places, access to that

body (of water) is afforded (to the wind), Thus by the effect of the wind, it (the

water) becomes further concentrated, and acquires further consistency. It then

begins to evaporate, and gradually subsides.

‘“ When the flood has subsided to the point where Brahmalcéko had stood, six

Déwalékd are reproduced. On its subsiding to the point where this world had

stood, furious storms prevail, and confine it (the subsiding flood) as the water in

a basin covered with a lid is confined.

‘* On this fresh water gradually drying up, on the surface (of the human world) a

delicious coating of earth is formed, like unto the curds on the surface of rice

boiled exclusively in milk, without any water, excellent in color, in fragrance and

taste.

1838.] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 693

‘+ At the same time, the living creatures who were the first reproduced in the Abhas-

saro-Urahmaldéko, having completed the allotted term of their existence, and dying there,

are from thence regenerated here, in the manner described in the Aggannasuttan.’’

For the elucidation of this interesting subject, I shall here introduce

a translation of the Agganna-suttan, which is one of the discourses

in the Pdtiwaggo section of the Dighanikdyo, of the Suttapitako,

as delivered by Buppuo himself ; instead of restricting myself to the

abridged account of the regeneration of the world, which is given in the

above Atthakatha.

This Suétan was addressed by Saxya, to WAseTTHO and BuAdrap-

pwAso, the descendants of an illustrious brahman named WAsSETTHO,

who had become converts to Buddhism, and entered into the first or

Sdmanéro order of Buddhistical priesthood. It was delivered at the

city of Sdadwatthipura, at the Pubbdradmo wiharo, in the edifice called

the Migdérdmatu pasado, which the Atthakatha explains was built by

a female of that name.

The discourse ope.s with Saxya’s eas from these two converted

brahmans whether they had incurred the displeasure or reproach of

the elder and the other influential brahmans by their apostacy ; and

they explain the nature of the reproach cast on, and of the disgrace

imputed to, them. The principal degradation alleged to the converts is,

«That the brahmans are the sons of BrAuma sprung from his mouth,

pure and fair; while the other castes and sects are sprung from his-

feet, and are black and impure.”

I must however, to save space, confine myself to the passages of

the Suttén which describe the regeneration of the world, and of the

human race. SAxya thus explains himself* :

‘* My friends, descendants of Wa’sETTHO ! the progress of time is thus regulated.

After the lapse of a long period of time, this world is destroyed. On the

destruction of this world, living creatures for the most part will be regenerated in

the Abhéssdro-brahmaléko.

““ They will appear there by an apparitional birth, subsisting on the aliment of

felicity, illumined by their own effulgence, moving through the air, delightfully

located, and will exist there uninterruptedly for ages.

** My friends, descendants of Wa’seTrHo! in due course, the lapse of time will

produce this result. At the expiration of a long period of time, this world will be

reproduced again. On the reproduction of the world, for the most part, those

living creatures, dying in the Abhassara-brahmaloko, return to this world. They

appear here also by an apparitional birth, subsisting on the aliment of felicity,

illumined by their own effulgence, moving through the air, delightfully located,

and exist here also uninterruptedly for ages, in unity and concord, similar to (the

eohesiveness of) a drop of water.

** Descendants of Wa/seTrHo ! at that period there is neither obscurity nor utter

darkness. The sun and moon are unknown: night and day are undiscernible.

* In M. Csoma’s account of the origin of the Sdkya race, vol. II. p. 387, the

exposition of this history is put into the mouth of MONGALYANA, a favourite disci-

ple.—Ebp.

694 Pali Buddhistical Annals. [Aue.

Neither month nor the moiety of the month is computed + neither seasons nor the

year is perceptible ; nor female and male distinguishable, all creatures being classed

under one head (without distinction of sex).

“* Descendants of Wa’sETTHO! thereafter, ultimately, at the termination of a long

period of time, a savory substance is developed for living creatures, on land and

in water. In the same manner that a curd is formed on the surface of boiled milk,

in that manner is it developed. It (that savory substance) is fully endowed with

the properties of color, fragrance and flavor, in the way in which butter colors

cream, such is its coloring property, in the manner in which the honeycomb

formed by the small bee is free from impurity, such is its purity of flavor.

‘Thereafter, descendants of Wa’sETTHO, a certain greedy man, making this

observation, ‘ My friends! What is this that has been brought about,’ licks

this savory substance from the surface of the earth, scraping it up with his finger,

By his having licked the earth, using his finger, the flavor with which it was imbu-

ed, takes entire possession of him; and the influence of the passions alight on him.

‘‘ O descendants of WA’sETTHO ! the rest of mankind, also each adopting the same

proceeding from his example, lick from his finger the flavor of the earth, and the

influence of the said flavor, from having been imbibed by licking the finger, takes

possession of them likewise ; and the passions alight on them also.

‘‘ Thereafter, descendants of Wa’sETTHO! these men gathering up the savory

substance on the earth with their hands, begin to devour it by the handful; and

in consequence, descendants of Wa’sETTHO ! of these men devouring this flavour of

the earth, taking it up by the handful, the aforesaid effulgence of these men

vanishes.

“On the extinction of that personal halo, the sun and the moon, the planetary

system, and night and day become distinguishable. On night and day being

distinguished, the half month and the month are descernible. On the half month

and the month becoming descernible, the seasons and the year become regulated.

‘* Descendants of Wa’sETTHO ! thus much only was this world (then) degenerated.

Thereafter, descendants of WA’SETTHO! these men having tasted of the flavor of

the earth, subsisting thereon, and having no other aliment, lived for ages, to an

advanced period of life. According as these men, who had tasted the flavor of the

earth, feasting and subsisting thereon, survived for ages, to an advanced stage of

life, in that exact proportion, a coarse skin developed itself on their body; and the

possession of a good and bad complexion began to be distinguished. Some of these

beings had a good, and other a bad one. In consequence thereof, those gifted with

a fine complexion, reproached those who had a bad one; saying, ‘ We have a better

color than they have.’ ‘They have a worse complexion than we have.’ On

account of this pride of complexion, to those in whom the pride of color had been

engendered, (the gift of tasting) the flavor of the earth vanished.

‘*On the extinction of (the gift of tasting) the flavor of the earth, they

assembled ; and having assembled, they cried one to another, ‘Ah! taste. Ah!

taste, (it is lost’). That (ejaculation) even the people of the present day are in

the habit of using, on finding any thing of a delicious flavor, ‘ Ah! taste. Ah!

taste.’ This expression used by the first tribe of mankind they continue to repeat;

but of the origin of this expression they are entirely ignorant.

‘“‘Descendants of WA’sETTHO! on (the gift of tasting) the flavor of the earth

being lost to mankind, a substance manifested itself on the surface of the earth,

like unto mushroom. If thus came to pass. It was endowed with color, fragrance

and flavor. Its color was like that of cream rich with butter. Its purity was like

that of the honey deposited by the small bee.

‘‘ Thereafter, descendants of Wa’sETTHO ! these persons commenced to devour

this excrescence on the earth, They who had partaken thereof, feasting and

1838, ] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 695

subsisting thereon, lived for ages, to an advanced period of life. Descendants of

Wa’sErtHo!, in the proportion in which they partook of this excrescence, feasting

and subsisting thereon, in that proportion unto those persons did a coarse skin

appear on their body; and beauty and unsightliness of complexion became

discernible. Some people were of a good complexion, and some were of a bad

complexion.’’

_ Then followed the same reproaches as in the former case; and this

substance also on the surface of the earth, vanished.

On the disappearance of this crust, the creeper (bearing a delicious

fruit) called the Baddulatdé appears “like unto the stock of the lotus ;”

which also is lost under similar circumstances, and leads to similar

lamentations. The Sutéan proceeds :

** On the disappearance of the Baddalaté, the sdlz (hill rice) manifested itself on

aloose soil. It was free from pellicle and husk, of great fragrance, and possessing

the properties of rice; which rice they were in the habit of bringing away every

evening, for their evening meal: and in the morning, being again renewed in full

bearing, they brought it away for their early meal ; but by the evening it was

again renewed, in full bearing indicating no diminution.”’

Then follow the same excesses, the same reproaches and the same

consequences, as in the three preceding instances. After noticing that

they again became sensible of the difference of complexion, Buppuo

proceeds in his revelation as follows :

‘* To the portion of mankind who had been females (before the destruction of the

world) the attribute of the female sex was manifested, and to the male the

male attribute. For a while the female gazed longingly at the male, and the male

at the female. Unto them, from thus gazing at each other, for a while, sexual

desire was produced; and in their body the flame of passion arose. Under the

impulse of that burning passion, they indulged in sexual intercourse.

‘*‘ Descendants of WaA/sSETTHO! these persons, certain individuals (still free

from vice) noticed ; and calling out ‘ Oh the impurity of impure persons!’ ‘ What

is this ?’? ‘Can one person act so towards another?’ some of them pelted them

with earth, and others with ashes and cattle dung.

‘* Descendants of Wa’seTTHo! that which was considered an improper proceeding

(adhammasammatan) is now reognized to be a proper proceeding (dhammasammatan).

At that period persons who indulged in sexual intercourse were not permitted for

one or two months thereafter, to intermix in a small or great community.

‘Descendants of Wa’seTTHO! when those who had been addicted to that

improper proceeding, had indulged for a while thereon ; thereafter they began to

build houses, in order that they might conceal that improper proceeding.

“‘ Thereafter, descendants of WA’sETTHO! unto a certain indolent person this

thought occurred. ‘ Why should I give myself the pains of bringing the sdli rice,

in the evening for the evening meal, and in the morning for the morning meal :

most assuredly when I bring it once it would do for the morning also.’ Thereupon,

descendants of Wa'srErruo! this individual brought away the sali at once, for

both the morning and the evening.

*‘ Another individual then going to him said, ‘ My good fellow, come, let us

fetch our sali.’ ‘ Begone (said the other), I have brought sali enough for both the

morning and the evening.’ From his having seen the proceeding of this individual,

bringing his sdli at once for the morning and the evening, relinquishing the

practice of bringing each meal, he said, ‘ Friend! that ia most excellent,’ ’’

696 Pali Buddhistical Annals. (Ava.

In nearly the same words, other individuals “ influenced by each

preceding example, proceeded to collect sali for four days and eight

days.”

Ae n this manner, descendants of Wa/‘srrtHo! men laying up stores of sdli,

began to meet together, for the purpose of feasting thereon. Thereupon the inner

pellicle formed on the grain of rice, and the outer husk also formed on the grain of

rice: and it (the rice stalk) no longer grew at the point at which it was cut down,

The loss sustained became obvious ; and the sdli were only found in clumps (at the

places where they had not been cut down yet).

‘‘ Descendants of Wa’sretrHo! these individuals then assembled, and said one to

another, ‘ Friend! wickedness has descended among men: we were origina!ly pro-

duced by an act of our own volition (manénayd¢, an apparitional birth) and lived for

a long time, feeding on the aliment of felicity, illumined by the light of our

effulgence, and moving through the air, &c.’”’

The lamentation then proceeds to specify how these blessings were

lost ; at the termination of which, the revelation is thus continued.

‘¢“¢ Should we now divide off these sdli clumps, and set boundaries, it will be most

proper:’ and thereupon, descendants of Wa‘srertuo! these individuals divided

off, and set boundaries to the sali accordingly.

‘¢ Then, O descendants of Wa’serruo! a certain individual, impelled by covetous-

ness, reserving his own share, fed on a share not assigned to him, robbing the

same. They seized that person, and having seized him, thus admonished him,

‘Friend! most assuredly thou hast been guilty of a crime: doth any one, any

where, hoarding up his own share, appropriate, unbestowed, the portion of another

person? Friend! man, commit not again such an act.’ Descendants of

Wa/’srtrHo! this individual answered those persons saying ; ‘ so be it, friends!’ ”?

In precisely the same terms, BuppHo proceeds to narrate that

the same individual committed the same offence again, and was

admonished in the same manner. After the third offence, the revelation

proceeds :

‘“* Descendants of Wa’srrruo!, some beat him with their hands, some pelted

him with (hard) substances, others struck him with clubs. From that period,

descendants of Wa’srrrno! the appropriation of things wnbestowed (thefts),

degradation, fraud and the (consequent) punishments ensued.

‘Thereupon, descendants of Wa/’/se1THo! these men assembled, and having

assembled thus deliberated. ‘ Friends! most assuredly wicked actions have become

prevalent among mankind: every where, theft, degradation, fraud and punishment

will prevail. It will be most proper that we should elect some one individual, who

would be able to eradicate most fully that which should be eradicated, to degrade

that whichs hould be degraded, to expel those who should be expelled; and we will

assign to him ‘the person elected) a share of our séli*,’

‘‘ Thereupon, descendants of Wa’serrno! these persons having selected an indivi-

dual, in person more beautiful, in personal appearance more pleasing, and -(in all.

respects) more calculated to conciliate than any one of themselves was; ape

proaching that individual, they thus invoked him. ‘ Man! come hither: that

which should be destroyed, annihilate most fully; that which should be degraded,

degrade most fully; that which should be rejected, reject: we wiil assign to thee

a portion of our sali.’

* The Atihakathd explains that each individual was to pay one emmunam.

1838.) _ Pali Buddhistical Annals. 697

“« Descendants of Wa/serruo ! the said individual having replied to those persons,

‘Friends! be it so!’ he most fully annihilated that which should be annihilated ;

degraded most fully that which should be degraded ; and rejected that which should

be expelled; and they conferred on him a portion of their sdli.

‘Thus the great body of mankind having (sammato) resolved or elected; and

the party elected being thence called ‘ Mahd-sammato,’ the first name conferred was

* Mahd-sammato*,’ (the great elect;) and being also the lord of (‘ Khettani’ )

‘cultivated lands ;’ he secondly acquired the appellation of ‘ Khattivo’+ and as by

his righteous administration it is considered that he (‘ rangéii’) ‘ rendered (mankind)

happy,’ thence, descendants of WA’sETTHO! the appellation of ‘ raja’ was thirdly

acquired.

‘‘ Thus it was, descendants of Wa’sETTHO! that on this race of ‘ Khattiyo,’ that

illustrious appellation was bestowed, as its ancient original designation. They are

- descendants of the same, not of a different (stock) of mankind; and of a perfect

(original) equality, not of inequality; (exalted) by a righteous, not an unrighteous,

act. Descendants of Wa’sETTHO, whether among people in this world, or the other

world, righteousness (dhanmo) is supreme.

** Descendants of WaA’sETTHO ! to a portion of the same people, this thought

occurred. ‘ Friends! among mankind wickedness has descended; theft, degrada-

tion, fraud, punishment and expulsion have appeared. It will be most proper that

we should (‘ bhahéyina’) ‘ suppress’ wicked and impious acts ; and they accordingly

did (‘ bhahentz?) ‘ suppress’ wicked and impious acts.

‘¢ Descendants of Wa’seTrHo! those ‘ brdhmand’ (‘ suppressors or eradicators’)

hence derived their first name ‘ brdhmand.’ ””

The revelation proceeds to explain how the brdhmand acquired

secondly the appellation ‘ Jhayaka’ from their (‘ Jhdyenti’) ‘ exulting’

in the wild life they were leading, in leaf huts built in the wilderness ;

and thirdly, the appellation ‘ d4jjhayakd’ from their ‘ ceasing to exult’

in that life ; and to explain also that, as in the Khdattiyo caste they are

no other than a division of the same tribe, who were in all respects on

a footing of original equality.

‘* Descendants of WA’SeTTHO! the portion of mankind who had formed domestic

eonnections, (and built houses for themselves) became (* Wissutakammante’) ‘ distin-

guished as skilful workmen or artificers,’ and in consequence of their becoming

distinguished from their domestic ties and skilfulness, the appellation of ‘ Wéssa’

was obtained.”’

Buppuo then, in the same manner, explains that the Wéssé also

are a portion of the original stock, and repeats the circumstances

under which they successively lost the advantages originally enjoyed

by mankind.

** Descendants of WaA’/SETTHO! among those very individuals there were some

persons who were addicted to hunting (Juddd). Descendants of Wa’sETTHO! from

being called ‘ luddd’ ‘ luddd’ the appellation ‘ suddd4’ was formed. It was thus that

to this class or caste of suddd that name was originally given.”

* This individual was Sa’kya in one of his former incarnations.

+ ‘‘ Ksettriya’’ according to the Hindus is the military, or warrior caste which

with them is the second class, the ‘ Brahman’ being the first.

4s2

698 Pili Buddhisticat Annals. : (Aue.

The revelation again repeats that the suddd caste also was originally

no inferior class, but a part of the original stock, and proceeds to

explain that from each of these castes certain individuals, despising

and reviling their own castes respectively, each abandoned his habita-

tion, and led.am habitationless life (agartyan pubbajitd) saying, ‘I will

become (sumano) an ascetic or priest. Hence BuppHo exemplifies

that the ascetie or sacerdotal order was formed, from each of the four

castes, and does not appertai to any particular caste; and with

reference to the persecution that the converted brahmans, whom he was

addressing, were undergoing from those, from whose faith they were

apostates, he says to them:

‘‘ Descendants of WA’sETTHO! even a Khatliyo, who has sinned, in deed, word

or thought, and become a heretic ; on account of that heresy, on the dismember-

ment of his frame after his death, he is born in the tormenting, everlasting and

unindurable hell. Such is also the fate of the Brdhmo, the Wesso aud the Suddo,

as wellas of the Swmano or ascetic. But if a Khattiyo lead a righteous life, in deed,

word and thought; and be of the true or supreme faith, by the merit of that faith,

on the dismemberment of his body after death, he is reproduced in the felicitous

suggaléka heavens.

‘‘ Again, descendants of Wa’sETFHO! a Khattiyo, who indeed, word and thought,

has lived a life, partaking of both characters, and professed a mixed faith of botk

reeds, on account of the profession of the mixed faith, on the dismemberment of

his body after death, he partakes both of happiness and misery. Sueh is also the

case in respect of the Brahmo, Wesso, Suddo and Swumano castes.

‘‘ Again, descendants of Wa’sETTHO! if the Khattiyo, subduing the influence

of the sinful passions, in deed, word and thought, acquire the seven Bédhipakkhi-

yaddhammd, he attains the parinibbdnan which is the result of the acquisition of the

arahat sanctification. Such is also the case with the Brdhmo, Wesso, Suddo and

Sumano classes.

‘‘ Descendants of Wa’seTrHo! if there be any Bhikkhu among (any one of) these

four castes, who has subdued the dominion of sin, performed that which ought to

have been performed, laid aside (the load of sin), fulfilled his destiny, overcome

‘the desire of regeneration (by transmigration), and extinguished covetous desires,

he will become an arehat, and will be esteemed the most worthy among them, by

righteousness, not by unrighteousness.

‘¢ Descendants of Wa’srTTrHo ! among mankind, whether in this world or in the

next world (dhammo) righteousness is supreme.

‘* Descendants of WA’sETTHO ! the following has been sung even by the brd4hman

SANANKUMA/RO. i

Khattiyo settho jané tasmin yo gottapatisdrino.

*Wijjacharana-sampanno, so seitho déwamdnusé+.

* T am not satisfied that I have caught the meaning of this quotation correctly.

The Wijjdcharand are only attainable by a supreme BuppHo. They consist of

fifteen attributes, all appertaining to pilgrimage; and as pilgrimage is performed on

foot, hence the ‘‘ being sprung from the foot of Brdhmd’’ is considered to be no

degradation. —

t+ There is some ambiguity in the above extract, the nominatives singular having ~

no apparent connection with patisdrino a genitive :—in Sanskrit this may be re-

medied by putting the whole first line in the plural, according to my pandit :—

—_— * s,s

1838.] Pdli Buddhistical Annals. 699

‘‘Among mankind, whoever would be an illustrious Khattiyo he must be

scrupulous in regard to the purity of his lineage; and he who is endowed with

the attributes requisite for the pilgrimage of holiness, is supreme among déwé

and men.’’ :

“Descendants of Wa’seTTHO! by the brahman SANANKUMA/RO, this very

gatha has been most unquestionably sang, it has been advisedly rehearsed, fully:

intending what it expressed, not undesignedly. This is known to myself.

‘‘ Descendants of WA’sETTHO! I also assert the same thing.

‘“‘Thus spoke BHAGAWA’. The delighted Wa’sETTHO and BHARADDWA/’Jo were

exceedingly gratified at the discourse of BHAGaw4A’.

‘¢ The conclusion of the Aggannasuttan being the fourth (of the Patikawaygo.)"”’

I now revert to the Dhammappakdsani Atthakathé, on the

Patisambhidan.

‘‘From the gathering of the mighty cloud which precedes the destruction of the

kappo to the extinction of the flame, forms one Asankhéyyan, called the Sanwatto

(destruction. )

‘From the extinction of the fire that destroyed the kappo to the deluge that

submerged the hundred thousand kétiyo of Chakkawaldni, isthe second Asankhéyyan,

called the Sanwattatthdhi (continuance of destruction).

‘‘ From the great deluge to the appearance of the sun and moon is the third

Asankheyyan, called the Wiwatto (creation).

‘* From the appearance of the sun and moon until the gathering of the mighty

cloud that is to destroy the kappo again is the fourth Asankheyyan, called the

Wiwat atihdhi, (the continuance of the creation.)

‘‘ These Asankheyyani constitute one mahd-kappo, and be it understood that such

is the destruction by fire, and reproduction.

‘* At any period when the kappo perishes by water, it is said, as explained in the

former instance in detail, ‘that a mighty destroying cloud having gathered, &c.’

this much however is different.

‘*In lieu of the two suns (that appear) in that (destruction) a mighty torrent

descends, producing a merciless deluge, destructive of the kappo. Commencing

with a slight drift, by degrees the deluge descends in large streams, submerging a

hundred thousand kédtiyo of Chakkawaldni. The earth, together with its mountains

&c, melt away, wherever it is rained upon by this fierce deluge. .

“That body of water is pent up on all sides, by the power of the wind (and

prevented spreading to the other Chakkawaldni). From the earth to the regions of

the second jhdnan the flood extends. Thereby three Brahmaldkd being destroyed,

it ceases torise, on reaching the Subhakinno-brahmaléko. As long as the most tri-

fling perishable thing is left, so long is there no intermission to the rise of the flood.

But when every perishable thing destined to be overwhelmed in water has been

destroyed, instantly (the flood) subsides, and is entirely dissipated. The vacuum

below meeting the vacuum above (by the intermediate Chakkawaldéni, having been

dissipated by the flood) one universal darkness is produced. All the rest has been

described (in the destruction by fire). In this place, therefore, it need only be, in

general terms, mentioned, that the world is recreated, commencing with the

Abhassaro-brahmaldéko ; and that after death in the Subhakinno-brahmaléko, living

creatures are born again in the Abhassaro-brahmaloko, and other regions.

aaa aa afaa § arasfeafcu: frqrace daa: a FS Sa arqa |!

‘‘Among such people, those are superior kshatris, who follow (the conduct of)

their ancestry: but he, who is perfected in wisdom’s path, is most excellent among

gods and men.— Eb,

700 Pdéli Buddhistical Annals. [Ave,

‘‘ From the gathering of the destroying cloud to the termination of the fierce

deluge that destroved the kappo constitutes one Asankheyyan.

‘* From the termination of the deluge to the rains that reproduced the world, is

the second Asankheyyan.

‘‘ From the great rains that reproduced the earth to the appearance of the

sun and moon is the third Asankheyyan.

‘« From the reappearance of the sun and moon to the gathering again of the cloud

of destruction is the fourth Asankheyyan.

‘“These four Asankheyyani constitute a mahdé-kappo, and be it understood, such

is the destruction by water, and the reproduction.

‘* Whenever the kuppo is destroyed by the wind, be it known, that, as already

explained in the other cases in detail, the mighty destroying cloud gathers. The

difference in this instance also occurs at the stage in which the two suns appear, as

in those instances, thus here the storm destined to destroy the kappo then rises.

‘*In the first place, it raises a dust; then it drives before it by degrees a still

heavier dust ;-then light sand, heavy sand, pebbles, and so on, till it hurls on rocks

as large as houses. In the same manner it tears up great trees. All these once

raised from the earth never descend again, being converted into impalpable atoms,

they are completely absorbed.

‘‘ Then, in due course, the wind under the earth rising and spinning the world

topsy turvy, hurls it into the air. Portions of the world being one hundred ydjand,

two, three, four and five hundred ydjund in extent, are rent asunder, and tossed

about by the power of the wind, till reduced tothe minutest particles, they also

become absorbed. The tempest then raising also aloft the Chakkawulan and

Mahdméru mountain, tosses them likewise into the air. They, hurled against each

other, and battered to minute atoms, also vanish. By this means destroying, as

well the habitations of the earth and the habitations (of the déwos) of the skies, as

the six Kannawdchara-déwalékaé; the tempest annihilates the hundred thousand

kétiyo of Chakkawaldni also. One Chakkawdlan being dashed against another

Chakkawdlan, one Himawanto (snowy region) against another, and one Méru

mountain against another; and being involved in a general chaos, and reduced to

minute atoms, all perish.

‘¢ The storm extends from the earth to the regions of the third jhdnan and three

Bréhmalcko having been involved in that destruction, the tempest is arrested on

reaching the Wéhapphalo-brdhmalokd.

‘‘ Thus every perishable thing having perished (the tempest) itself perishes also,

As described (in the other accounts of the destructious of the world) every circum-

stance takes place in this also, commencing with, by the vacuum below (the world

being destroyed) meeting the vacuum above ; and one universal darkness prevails.

‘‘ Subsequently the world is reproduced, commencing with the Subhakinno-

bréhmaléko, and living creatures dying (in due course) in Wehapphalo-brahmaléko,

are reproduced in the Subhakinno and other regions.

‘¢In this instance, the period from the gathering of the cloud of destruction,

to the rising of the tempest that destroys the kappo, is one Asankheyyan.

‘‘ From the period of the tempest, to the mighty deluge of reproduction, is the

second Asankheyydn, and so forth, in the same subdivisions, the other two Asan-

kheyydni. These four Asankheyydni constitute a mahd-kappo. Be it understood, that

such is the nature of the destruction by storm.

‘‘ Why is it that the world is destroyed? On account of the original impiety

committed, The world is destroyed on account of the commission of the following

sins, viz: on the ascendancy of the passions, it (the world) is destroyed by water:

some authorities, however, declare that on the prevalence of crimes, the destruction

is by fire, and on the ascendancy of the passions by water. And when ignorance

prevails, it perishes by the wind.

#838.] Report on the Tenassevim Coal. 701

‘¢ It is elsewhere explained that after the world has been destroyed by fire seven

times, it is once destroyed by water, and after eight destructions by water (seven

conflagrations having intervened between each of the deluges making sixty-four

destructions) it is once destroyed by wind. From this explanation, when sixty-

three kappa have been destroyed, the rotation should arrive for one destruction

by water, but the storm-destruction superceding it (the water-destruction), in

the age of the sixty-fourth kappo, destroys the worlds including the Subhakinno-

brahmaléko.”’ [To be continued. ]

—

IV.—Report on the Coal discovered in the Tenasserim provinces, by

Dr, HELFER, dated Mergui, 23rd May, 1838.

1. Five localities of coal have hitherto been discovered in the

Tenasserim provinces all situated in the province of Mergut.

A. On the large Tenasserim river, nine days up from the village

of Tenasserim near the creek Nan-their-Khiaung, one and a quarter

mile inland; species friable, brown coal intermixed with iron pyrites.

Three veins in different localities, tertiary sandstone below, compact

sandstone conglomerate interpersed with large silicious fragments

above..— Discovered 17th March, 1838.

B. On the large Tenasserim eight days distant from the village

of Tenasserim along the banks of the river. Species lignite, light slaty

brown coal in veins 3 to 4 inches thick in general, sometimes not more

than 2 or 3 lines ; formation tertiary sandstone above and below ; belong-

ing to the same system as No. 1.—Discovered 19th March, 1838.

C. On the Tenasserim above the Tarouk Khiaung, on the right

or eastern side of the river five days distant from the village of

Tenasserim. Species bituminous shale in large masses protruding

above the surface, apparently a distinct system from A or B.—Disco-

vered 24th March, 18388.

D. On the coal river a branch of the little Tenasserim, five days

above the village of Tenasserim in a south-east direction ; slaty coal sp.

gr. 1.26. <A vein 6 feet thick, 240 long with an angle of 20 degrees

upwards, A section on the banks of the river. Formation above

grey, below black clay slate; the lowest stratum to judge from the

geological features of the country, apparently resting upon blue limestone.

KE. One hour distant from No. 4 or (D) and a continuation of

it; an immense coal field of either slaty or conchoidal pitch coal,

highly bituminous without a concomitant of iron pyrites. A succession

of fourteen localities where the coal lies bare on clay on both sides of

the river, which has evidently forced its way through it; running at an

angle of 25 degrees upwards ; in all places 6 feet or more thick, resting

upon a stratum of slate—D and E discovered 24th April, 1838.

2. This last locality being by far the most preferable respecting

702 Report on the discovery ‘Aue.

quantity, quality and locality, I refrain from entering into details of

A, B and C, which probably will never be worked, and are only

interesting in a scientific point of view.

3. This extensive coal field distant from A, B, C more than 300

miles belongs to quite a different system. It is situated on a high level

table-land, only diversified by an isolated range of mountains, from which

the river issues which passes through the coal fields, and which ridge

may be considered as the eastern boundary of the British possessions

towards Siam. The gulf of Siam in a direct line seems only to be

45 miles distant. The Lazchin islands lie almost opposite.

4. The river originating in the neighbouring mountains is at the

coal field only 15-25 yards broad, part of the year nearly dry, but

during five months from June to November (both inclusive) according

to native reports it is uninterruptedly navigable for rafts. I ascended

it in the month of April on rafts, before the commencement of the

monsoon, as far as within three hours distance from the coal fields.

5. The river after having passed through the last table-land enters

a hilly country, winding through the mountains chiefly in a northwest

direction until it reaches another river coming from the south. Here

the influence of the tides begins to be perceptible ; it runs in the same

direction about 40 miles having attained a breadth of from 50 to 80

‘yards at low water and enters at the village of Tenasserim. The large

Tenasserim river is accessible there to vessels of 100 tons burthen, from

whence the final distance to Mergui is about 50 miles*.

6. The coal itself is of superior quality being that species known in

England under the name of pitch coal, much higher in price than

common coal, and, on account of the greater quantity of bitumen which

it contains, used for the generation of gas.

7. The quantity seems to be unlimited, taking into consideration

only the upper stratum of six feet thickness as far as I was able to

trace it on the surface. Allowing annually to be required 30,000 tons,

this upper stratum alone would supply that large quantity for the

period of 120 years with good coal.

8. But it is certain that other strata lie below, and that probably

the quantity still improves in the ratio as the depth increases, according

to analogy+.

* N. B. The natives from Mergui and different parts of Siam, go annually into

the mountains above the coal fields to cut an aromatic wood called callame which

is an article of commerce for the markets of Rangoon and Bankok.

+ N. B. The specimens which accompany this memorandum must, though very

good coal, not be considered the best in quality ; they are taken from the surface and

had been exposed for a lapse of ages to the constant action of water and incessant

influence of the atmosphere,

we) ees

De See ee ee

> Be

1838.] of Coal in the Tenasserim Province. 703

8. The discovery of this coal field seems to be very important at

the present moment when steam communication begins to spread over

the whole of the eastern seas, and when the demand for coal annually

increases.

9. It is not certain if the locality can compete with the coal market in

Calcutta, but Mergui seems to be destined in future to supply this

coast, the Straits, the Chinese seas, Madras, Ceylon, and perhaps Bom-

bay and the Red Sea, with coal.

10. If Ceylon become the central point in the comprehensive sys-

tem of steam communication, the locality of Mergui seems particularly

adapted to supply the depdts at Point de Galle, the distance being

in the favorable season only eight or ten days’ sail.

11. A great advantage in the locality is the total absence of land

transport. The coal fields are divided quasi on purpose by nature by

the river, and the pits can be opened twenty yards from the banks of

the river.

12. The distance by the river is #bout 120 miles from Mergwi ;

sixty miles of this are accessible to vessels of 100 tons burthen

throughout the year, and 40 miles more are under the influence of the

tides. The difficulty of the navigation concentrates in the last 20

miles. The passage is obstructed by hundreds of uprooted trees lying

across, impeding the navigation and giving constant occasion to the

formation of sand banks.

The clearing of this part of the river from these impediments will be

expensive, but a great deal can be done without any particular expense,

if Government convicts are employed.

13. The last thirty miles are navigable only during five months of

the year: it is therefore necessary to have a depdt of coal near the river

banks, ready to be shipped, when the water begins to rise.

14, Bamboo rafts, each holding one ton of coal, are the best means

of transport in the first instance; tall bamboos fit for the purpose are on

the spot in the greatest abundance.

- 15. Bamboos fetch always the price of one rupee eight annas, to

two rupees per hundred at Mergui. The rafts can therefore be sold

with advantage. Should vessels arrive from distant parts, then the

bamboos would rise in price, the superior quality of those growing

in these provinces being appreciated on the other side of India, the

vessels will be glad to find another article to take along with the

coal.

16. If however annually, a very large quantity say, 10 to 20,000

tons are required, bamboos will not be sufficient, and it will be necessary

4°

704 Report on the discovery [Aua.

to establish saw-mills in the place, to construct wooden boxes of planks,

to float the fuel down in them.

17. If wood of a superior quality is selected (and there is no want

of excellent timber throughout the province), the expense of the saw-

mills driven by water will be covered by selling the planks at a

moderate price in Merguz, even with profit.

18 A depdt should be established at Mergut, in a commodious

place ; so that vessels can easily approach the shore.

19. Iflarge quantities of coal are exported from Merge ; particular

coal transports ought to be constructed, able to contain 5 to 800

tons each.

20. Thestratum above the coal is no where more than 25 feet thick,

and consists of a, bad slaty coal, 6 inches ; b, grey slate, Sinches ; c, debris

of slate with coarse gravel, 2 feet; d, gravel, and the rest alluvium.

21. Consequently no complicated. mining operation is required.

The upper strata being removed, the coal may be extracted without any

farther difficulty. a

22. Being an open day work no casualties are to be feared from

the generation of the fatal bihydroguret of carbon (firedamp).

23. The great expenses accompanying the removal of the accumu-

lated waters in deep coal mines are avoided.

24. Nothing is required but a shed above and a rampart round

the coal pits to prevent the intrusion of the rain during the monsoon.

25. In the subsequent calculation it will be seen, that the greatest

expense is incurred by the floating down of the rafts; being of the

opinion that only Burmese are able to manage the rafts upon the river,

the convicts being incumbered with irons and inexperienced on the water.

It is the enormous price of labour, ten rupees at least per month, which

renders the transport so expensive ; suppose the price of labour to be

five rupees instead of ten, then according to the calculation which follows

—the price would immediately fall from four and a quarter annas per

maund to two and a half annas per maund.

26. Labourers from India could be adyantageously employed in

working this coal field.

27. Being occupied only during the monsoon with the floating -

down of the coal, they could be employed during the rest of the time,

part of them constructing new rafts for the next season, part of them

with the cultivation of the paddy, for themselves and for the consump-

tion of the convicts in the coal.

29. The benefits in working the coal mines of these provinces are

too obvious to merit a particular panegyric ; they are in short as follows :

1838. ] of Coal in the Tenasserim Province. 705

1. The discovery of a superior quality of coal in an unlimited

quantity, in an accessible locality will remove every obstacle to steam

communication along the whole of the eastern coast of Bengal.

2. It will render the inexhaustible supply of superior iron ore a

treasure to the provinces, and will lead to the supply of iron for the

whole of India from this coast.

8. It will be an inducement to work the tin mines.

4. It will give employment to several hundred convicts in a profita-

ble way to government.

5. The circulation of a capital of 60,000 rupees ad minimum per

annum which remains in the country will render the inhabitants the

more rich, the provinces the more prosperous.

6. In consequence of this, foreign capital will be drawn into the

country ;—the increase of capital will increase the population ;—the

increase of population will increase the cultivation ;—the increase of

population and cultivation will augment the public revenue.

Report on the Mergui Coil.

The first supply of coal from Dr. Heurer, upon which I reported

unfavorably I now perceive to have consisted merely of A, B, and

C, of the forgoing report, the precursors only of the Doctor's real

discovery, and as he himself expresses it, only valuable in a scientific

point of view.

The four baskets now received are indeed of a far different quality

and fully justify the enthusiastic anticipations their discovery has raised.

Not being distinguished by any. mark I presume they are all from the

localities D and EK, which may be regarded as connected together,

though differing somewhat in quality. j

This deposit seems to consist entirely of that species of coal called

pitch coal, or cannel coal. It resembles in many respects the most

resinous of the coals of the Assam field, but the ligneous structure is

generally less evident, and the fracture more conchoidal. In many

fragments however the laminary texture is observable, and the usual

variations in the quality of the layers of carbonized matter mark the

mode of deposit, some layers having more earthy matter, some more

carbonaceous, and some more bituminous ; and occasionally a thin film

of ferruginous or earthy matter intervening.

The Mergui coal is however in general very homogeneous, as the

annexed analysis of four specimens taken from different bags will

show. It should be remarked that these specimens are each averages,

part being taken from the best and part from the worst looking of

each parcel.

472

706 Report on the discovery of Coal. f Aue.

The very large proportion of volatile matter, near 50 per cent. shews

this coal to be a superior blazing material, which is the main point in

getting up steam, so much so that I understand one of the Company’s

steamers is unable to get up steam with the Burdwan coal without a

Jarge admixture of English cannel coal. It also makes it an admirable

coal for generating gas.

To try this latter experimentally I distilled over the gas from 18

tolas of the Merguz coal, and in a few minutes obtained two gasometers

full, or by weight nearly three and a quarter tolas of gas, besides 4. 3

tolas* of thick brown naphtha and water, a third part of which would

have been converted into gas had it passed through a heated tube.

When used in the forge the clear copious blaze is rather objection-

able ; it wastes the heat, and more coal is consequently expended ; but

a very good weld was effected with it im presence of Captain Forzss.

In the same manner the great loss of volatile matter makes it

unprofitable for coking (yielding only one half instead of three fourths

its weight), but the coke itself is very close and good, being as free from

earthy impurity as much of the English coal.

All other particulars may be learnt by comparing the analysis with

that of other coals in my printed table: (see p. 197 of the present vol.

(Signed) J. PRINSEP,

22nd June, 1838. ~ Assay Master.

Analysis of the three first specimens of Lignite sent by Dr. Hetrer,

from Mergu..

No.1. A. No, 2. B. No. 3.C.

Burned with small Burned with fewer Burned witha few

flame and copious scintillations and scintillations and .

scintillations. poor flame. poor flame.

Specific gravity, ...... Neterene 3.256 1.376 1.391

Watergy. 2noMete eeidine deletes 96 10.0 9.3 7.3

Volatile matter, ......6004. , 66.7] 0 53.9] 38.6 | ©

Carbon, a: top nieieh ca ostien 36.0 ->S 37.31 2 43.8) 2

Ferruginous, & earthy matter, 7.355 8.8} 7 17.6] 7

Second despatch D, and E.—Pitch coal from Mergut.

All four burned with copious rich fiame ; coke close-grained and of highly metallie

lustre.

No. ]. No. 3; No. 3. No. 4.

AN GLEN > ai) ds: tice ateeees 9.7 8.2 Ufa 7.6

SPECINC CTAVILY gis20.5 20m 1.273 1,280 1.245 1.251

Volatile matter,........ 45.0 48.9 48.3) 48,2

RORTUOU, cess ate oer ns oe, eee ee 46.7 S 45.1 2 48.7 ><

Earthy matter, slightly ° ° sd g

ferruginous, as ap ete } ods iis wae ie

J. PRINSEP.

Calcutta, the 22nd June, 1838.

* It consisted of one tola of Naphtha 3.3 of aqueous liquid containing sulphate and

earbonate of ammonia, and pyrolignous acid.

1838.) Comparison of Asiatic Languages. 707

V.— Comparison of Asiatic Languages.

We are indebted to the Editors of the Calcutta Christian Observer

for the following columns of Chinese and Japanese words corresponding

to those contained in the tabular view of the comparison of Eastern

languages in our No. for December last, and present it with satisfaction

to our readers.

There were two other columns in Mr. W.’s communication, contain-

ing the sixty words in the several characters; viz. the K4takana and

Hirakana, which the want of type for their exhibition has obliged us to

exclude. We are however through Mr. Csoma’s kindness enabled to

insert the column of Tibetan equivalents.

To the Editors of the Calcutta Christian Observer.

Dear Sirs,

Having been favoured with the perusal of the number of the J. A. S. for

December 1837, I have looked over the article on a comparison of various

Asiatic Languages with much interest. The plan if carried out, will be

likely to afford data from which important and interesting inferences can

be legitimately drawn.

In the column for Japanese, however, I think you will be a little misled

by your authority not attending very strictly to the rules of pronuncia-

tion and spelling which you have laid down, and I have ventured to send a

column of the words, in order that a comparison may be made from the

true sounds of the Japanese, accompanied by two modes of writing most in

use. The vowel sounds to the letters of their alphabet are quite uniform ;

but by elision for the sake of euphony, the number of vowel sounds is

greatly increased. I should think that few Asiatic languages could be

more perfectly reduced to the Romanizing system than the Japanese, and

that there were few people in Asia who would be less inclined to adopt

that system than that people.

When Mr. G. says, “ that the Chinese character is universally read

among the natives with a different sound and accent, more full and

euphonical,” he perhaps wishes to express that the Chinese character is

used among the Japanese to a considerable extent, but that the people do

so universally there are not sufficient grounds for believing. ‘There are

in the alphabet, 73 distinct sounds, 25 of which are made by diacritical

marks upon some of the 48 letters. Inthe Hirakaéné, there are several

ways of writing the same character or letter, making consequently, their

number much greater, perhaps above a hundred. In the I’mattokané (not

Imatskana) the contractions are carried to a greater extent, making it

one of the most difficult writings in existence to read freely.

708 Comparison of Asiatic Languages. [Aua.

It may be true that the Japanese language is spoken by about 20 mil-

lions of people with very little variation, but while the country is so her.

metically sealed, such an opinion can only he treated as a clever sur-

mise.

I have changed a few words in the list, giving the word which appears »

to be more indigenous. Sakana is a preparation of fish ; kuchinawa and

hebi are nearly synonimous, but hebi is the most common ; inoshishi is

wild boar, bata the common word for swine.

These few remarks are given only to explain the list, which is sent for

the single purpose of making your list more perfect, and thus aiding in

your comparisons.

Concerning the Chinese sounds, they must be considered as hardly

settled yet, and no great stress can therefore be laid upon the sounds as I

have written them.

Yours with respect,

5S. W. Wittrams.

Macao, April 1, 1838.

English. Tibetan. Japanese. Chinese Characters.

Air, r,lung ma, Aaa woki;°< “ks Kt . 1

Ant, grog ma, = aay ari, i, ae 2

Arrow, m,dah, aizQ ya, tsien, a 3

Bird, bya, 9 tori, niu, =e 4

Blood, khrag, aa chi, hiuh, 2 5

Boat, gru, a temma, ting, ai “6

Bone, ruspa, ANY honi, Kuh, ih 7

Buffalo, mahé, a's saigiu, shui ) whee 8

Cat, byila, 5g neko, oe Aer 9

Cow, ba, q shi, giu, re 10

Crow, kha ta, aa) kéraésu, 4, bes 11

Day, nyin mo, 9a: oY hi, yih, H *12

Dog, khyi, int, k6u, fi] 13

Ear, sa, x mimi, ’rh, Ef. 14

chi, ti, Hit *15

es ee ee ee a eo

1838. ]

English.

Egg,

Elephant,

Eye,

Father,

Fire,

Fish,

Flower,

Foot,

Goat,

Hair,

Hand,

Head,

Hog,

Horn,

Horse,

House,

Iron,

Leaf,

Light,

Man,

Monkey,

Moon,

Mother,

Comparison of Asiatic Languages.

Tibetan.

s,gonga,

g,lang chhen,

mig,

pha, apha,

mé,

nya,

métog,

r,kang pa,

rama,

s,kra ; s,pu,

lagpa,

mgo,

phag,

ra,

r,ta,

khyim khang,

I ,chags,

loma,

hod,

mi,

s,préhu,

z,lava (da),

ma, ama,

Mountain, ri,

Mouth,

Musquito, srinbu ;

Name,

kha,

hurings,

ming,

HS py wma, Ho

1a)

Boy

g 4

m,ch.

Ho ae

709

Japanese. Chinese Characters.

tamago,

zou,

kémige,

shto,

AAS Lay ké,

na,

lwan, SN

siang, Ee

aye

eo.

kiah,

: shén HY

shau, =p

tau, eI

‘cha, | Tz

koh, gi:

ma, =

dha)

bet

DER as > oH Fal

a 5

ISS

c\3)

Xs)

i=)

* 32

3ST

710 Comparison of Asiatic Languages. [ Aue.

English. Tibetan. Japanese. Chinese Characters.

Night, m,tshan mo, asap yora, yey, * 43

Oil, h,bru mar, Qy aL abura, yiu, vA 44

Plantain, kéla, Hind, AQ bashiyo, tsiau, Ate * Be

River, g,tsang ai Haay kéwa, kiang, YT. 4G

Road, lam, Qa michi, la, We AT

Salt, tsha, Zz shiwo, yen, te 48

Skin, pags pa, Nay kawa, pi, ia 49

Sky, | nam m,khah, aH xfAQ sora, st BF 50

Snake, s,brul, HQ hebi, she, pe 51

Star, skar ma, z L'a hoshi, sing, ie 52

Stone, _r,do, ze jshi, sheh, Ay al

Sun, nyi ma, Rr af nichirin, —yih, iz 54

Tiger, s,tag, yO tora, fu, Be 55

Tooth, so, v4 ha, ya, * 56

Tree, Jjon shing, 5 5G, ao Ki, shu, a 57

Village, Al isk yg’ ry mura, hiang, si 58

Water, chhu, R midza, shui, 59

Yam, dova, aq 7

tskineimo, té sha, I Ek

The sounds of the Chinese are written in accordance with the system

published in the Chinese Repository, for February, 1838, and the Japanese

after the list of sounds on pages 83, and 101 of the select papers on Ro-

manizing published at Serampore. The last i is short in the Japanese

words, like y in beauty. ‘The difference between the two kinds of writing

is shewn by the two columns of Kétékéna and Hirékané; the Ymattokaéna

is much like the Hirékané. The Japanese employ Chinese characters to

express the same ideas as the Chinese, but often call them by a different

name. Those marked * were probably derived from a common source, and

perhaps there are more. The Chinese sound is often known among the

Japanese, but does not seem to be the one most commonly used. .

;

eo ee Poe}

1838. ] Grammar of the Panjabi Language. 711

VI.—Epitome of the Grammars of the Brahuiky, the Balochky and the

Panjabi languages, with Vocabularies of the Baraky, the Pashi, the

Laghmani, the Cashgari, the Teerhai, and the Deer Dialects. By

Lieut. R, Leacu, Bombay Engineers, Assistant on a Mission to Kabul.

GRAMMAR OF THE PAaNnJABI LANGUAGE.

This language, as spoken in large towns, is a dialect of the Urdu or

Hindustani, and differs from it chiefly in having those vowels short that

the latter has long, and in having the Sanskrit (:) visarg in the middle

of words otherwise Hindustani; for example the number eighteen they

call attahran and not athara. In the villages the zemindars (farmers)

speak a language called Jathky, the original language of the country.

On the Sikh frontiers Panjabi slightly mixes with the neighbouring

dialects, in Shawalpoor it partakes of Sindhy. There are two charac-

ters in which the language is written ; Garmukhi the character of the

Granth, (gospels of 10 holy men,) and Lande used by the merchants in

their accounts. The character used in the mountains of Jammu and

Nadoun differs from the Lande of the capital, and the merchants even

of different cities and districts, as Sedlkot and Guzerat for instance

differ slightly in their manner of writing this character.

The Sikhs under their preceptor Guri GoviNp S1neu carried their

hatred of the Muhammadans to such an extent as to substitute a voca-

bulary for their native Punjabi, because the latter was spoken by the

Musalmans, The vocabulary is composed of ridiculous and disrespect-

ful epithets of every thing relating to Islamism: it is not however used

by Maharajah Ronszet Sineu the ruler of the Sikh nation.

Declension of a Noun Masculine.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. Ghoda a horse Ghode horses

Gen. Ghodeda of a horse Ghodyanda _ of horses

Acc. & Dat. Ghodenu a horse Ghody anu horses

Abl. Ghodeton from ahorse Ghodyanton from horses

Deciension of a Noun Feminine.

: Singular. Plural,

_ Nom. Ghodi a mare Ghodiyan mares

Gen. Ghodida of a mare Ghoniyanda — of mares

Ace. & Dat. Ghodinu a mare Ghodiyanu —_ to mares

Abi. Ghoditon from amare Ghodiydanton from mares

Declension of a Compound Noun.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. MHacha ghoda a good horse Hache ghode good horses

Gen. Hache ghodeda of a good horse Hachyan of good horses

ghodyanda

4 vu

712 ' Grammar of the Panjdbi Language. [ Aue,

Ace. & Dat. Hache ghodenu a good horse Hachyan good horses

ghodyanu

Abi. Hache ghodeton from a good Hachyan gho- from good

horse dyanton horses

This termination is changed into di to agree with a feminine noun.

Deciension of the 1st Personal Pronoun.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. Main or man I Asi. we (Jathki.)

Gen. Meda or menda my Asada sada — our

Ace. & Dat. Menu or mainki me Asanu sanu sus

Abl. Medekulon ( maithon Asathon = sathon fy

Medethon or< maithin from me _ sathi ee siamese

Mede pason mendekulon

Declension of the 2nd Personal Pronoun.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. Tun thou Tusiortusan you

Gen. Teda, tenda thy Tuhada or your

or tonda tusada

Acc. & Dat. 'Tenu or tunnt thee Tuhannu or you

tusannu

Abl. Tethon or from thee Tuhathon or from you

tuthon ' tusathon

Declension of the 3rd Personal Pronoun, (proximate. )

Singular. Plural.

Nom. E this E these

Gen. Isda of this Inhanda of these

Acc. & Dat. Isnt this Inhanu these

Abl. ~ Iskulon, isthon from this Inha kulon

Inha pason \ from these

Declension of the 3rd Personal Pronoun, (remote. )

Dom. O that O those

Gen. Usda of that Onhanda of those

Acc. & Dat. Usnu that Onhanu or those

onhanu

Onakulon

Abl. Usthon from that Onhathon from those

Onha pason

Declension of the Reflective Pronoun.

Nom. A’pe self

Gen. A’pna of self

Acc. & Dat. A’pnu to self

Abl. A’pthon from self

Declension of the Interrogative Pronoun, (animate. )

Nom. Kouna who

Gen. Kisda ; whose

Ace. & Dat. Kisnu or kanu from whom

Abl. Kisthon

Declension of the Interrogative Pronoun, (inanimate. )

Nom. Kya or ki what

Gen. Kisda or kada of what

7138

1838. ] Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

Ace. & Dat. Kisnu or kanu what

Abl. Kisthon or kaithon from what

Cardinal Numbers.

One hik Fifty-three tirwanja

Two do Fifty-four chauranja

Three tin Fifty-five pachwanja

Four char Fifty-six chawanja

Five panj Fifty-seven satwanja

Six chhih Fifty-eight atwanja

Seven sat. Fifty-nine unhat

Eight ath Sixty sat

Nine noun Sixty-one ekhat

Ten das Sixty-two bahat

Eleven nyanran Sixty-three tehat

Twelve bahran Sixty-four chaut

Thirteen tehran Sixty-five pepant

Fourteen chaudan Sixty-six chahat

Fifteen pundhran Sixty-seven satat

Sixteen sohlan Sixty-eight attat

Seventeen sattahran Sixty-nine unhattar

Eighteen attahran Seventy satar

Nineteen unin Seventy-one ekhatar

Twenty wih Seventy-two bahatar

Twenty-one ikki Seventy-three tehatar

Twenty-two bai » Seventy-four chauhattar

Twenty-three te, Seventy-five panjhattar

Twenty-four chayi Seventy-six ' chahattar

Twenty-five panji Seventy-seven sathattar

Twenty-six chhabi Seventy-eight athattar

Twenty-seven satai Seventy-nine unasi

‘Twenty-eight attai Eighty asi

Twenty-nine unnatti Eighty-one ekasi

Thirty tih or trih Eighty-two beasi

Thirty-one ekati Eighty-three treas}

_ Thirty-two batti Eighty-four chaurasi

Thirty-three teti Eighty-five pachasi

Thirty-four chauti Eighty-six cha,asi

Thirty-five painti Eighty-seven satasi

‘Thirty-six chatti Eighty-eight attasi

Thirty-seven sainti Eighty-nine unanawe

Thirty-eight attainti Ninety nave

Thirty-nine untali Ninety-one ekanave

Forty chahli Ninety-two banave

Forty-one ektalt Ninety-three teanave

Forty-two baital} Ninety-four chauranave

Forty-three tirtali Ninety-five pachanave

Forty-four chautali Ninety-six chaanave

Forty-five paintalt Ninety-seven satanave

Forty-six chatali Ninety-eight atanave

Forty-seven sentali Ninety-nine nadinave

Forty-eight att,tali Hundred sou senkda

Forty-nine unwanja Thousand hazar

Fifty panjah Hundred thou. lakh

Fifty-one ekwanja sand

Fifty-two bawanja Million karod

4u2

714 Grammar of the Panjalht Language. [Auc.

Ordinal Numbers.

First pahla Sixth chauwan

Second dujja, dusra Seventh satwan

Third tisra, trija Eighth - atwan

Fourth chautha Ninth nawan

Fifth _panjwan Tenth ' das wan

ConsJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB.

Indicative Mood. Present Tense.

Main han or an I am Asi han or an We are

‘Tun hen or en Thou art Tusi ho or o You are

O hen or en He is O hain or ain ‘They are

Perfect Past Tense.

Main haisan or —_I was Asi haisan or ahe We were ’

Fan ‘

Tun haisen or Thou wert ‘ Tusi haisao or ahe You were

saen

O haisi sior aha He was O haisin or sin’ They were

Imperfect Past Tense. |

Main hunda san I was being Asi hunde san We were being

Tun hunda saen Thou wert being ‘Tusi hunde sa,jo You were being

O hunda si He was being O hunde san They were being

. Pluperfect Past Tense.

Main hoya san J had been Asi hoye san We had been

‘Tun hoya saen ‘Thou hadst been Tusi hoye sa,o You had been

O hoya si He had been O hoye san They had been

Future Tense.

Main howanga I shall be Asi howange We shall be

‘Tun howenga Thou shalt be Tusi hovoge You shall be ,

O hevega : He shall be O ho ange They shall be

Imperative Mood.

Tun ho or o Be thou Tusi hovo or vo Be you

The negative imperative is formed by prefixing na.

Subjunctive Mood.

The relative conjunction (harf i shart of the Arabians) is expressed by

je (if) and the correlative conjunction (harf i jaza) by tan then.

Present Tense.

Main howan I may be Asi hoviye We may be

Tun hoven Thou mayst be ‘Tusi hovo You may be

O hove He may be O howan ‘They may be

Perfect Past Tense.

Main hundan I had been Asi hunde - We had been

Tun hundon or Thou hadst been ‘Tusi hunde You had been

hunda

O hunda He had been O hunde They had been

Past Participle. (Ism i mahftl) hoya been

Verbal Noun. (Ism i fail) honewala be,er

Infinitive Mood. (Masdar) hona to be

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB A’khnd, To speak.

(Masculine. )

Present Tense.

Main akhna I speak Asi akhnyan We speak

Tun akhnain Thou speakest Tusa akhde,o You speak

O akhdai He speaks O akhden They speak

1833. ]

Main akhya

Yun akhyai

Us akhya

Main akhda san

Tun akhda saen

O akhda si

Main akhya si

Tun akhya si

Us akhya si

Maiy akhanga

Tun akhenga

O akhega

Tun akh or akh

Main akhan

Tun akhen

O akhe ©

Main akhda or

akhda

Tun akhdo

O akhda

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

Perfect Pust Tense.

I spoke Asan akhya

Thou spokest Tusan akhya

He spoke Ina akhya

Imperfect Past Tense.

I was speaking Asi akhde san

Thou wast speak.

ing

He was speaking O akhde sin

Tusi akhde sa,o

Pluperfect Past Tense.

I had spoken Asan akhya si

Thou hadst Tusan akhya si

spoken

He had spoken _—_ Ina akhya si

Future Tense. ;

I will speak Asi akhange

Thou wilt Tusi akhoge

speak

He will speak O akhange

imperative Mood.

Speak thou ‘Lusi akho

Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense.

I may speak Asi akhiye

Thou mayst speak Tusi &kho

He may speak O akhan

Perfect Past Tense.

I might speak Asi akhde

Thou mightest Tusi akhde

speak

He might speak O akhde

715

We spoke

You spoke

They spoke

We were speak-

ing’

You were speak-

ing

They were speak-

ing

We had spoken

You had spoken

They had spoken

We will speak

You will speak

They will speak

Speak you

We may speak

You may speak

They may speak

We might speak

You might speak

They might

speak

CoNJUGATION OF THE VERB Kehna, To TELL.

Main kehui an

Tun kehni en

O kehndi e

Main ke,ai

‘lun keai

Usne keai

Main kehndi san

Tun kehndi saen

O kehndi si

(Feminine.)

Present Tense.

I am telling Asi kehni an or

kehndiyan

Tusi kehndiyano

O kehndiya en or

kehndiyan

Perfect Past Tense.

Thou art telling

She is telling

I told Asan keai

Thou toldst Tusan ke,ai

She told Una keai

Imperfect Past Tense.

I was telling Asi kehndiyan san

Thouwast telling ‘Tusi kehndiyan

$a,0

She was telling O kehndiyan sin

We are telling

You are telling

They are telling

We told

You told

They told

We were telling

You were telling

They were tell-

ing

716

Main keha si

Tun keha si

Us keha si

Main kahangi

Tun kahengi

O kahegi

Tun koh

Main kahan

Tun kahen

O kahe

Main kehandi

Tun kehandj

O kehndi

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

Pluperfect Past Tense.

I had told Asan keha si

Thou hadst told Tusan keha si

She had told Una keha si

Future Tense.

Asi kahanginyan

Thou wilt tell Tusi kahogiyo

She will tell O kahanginyan

Imperative Mood.

Tell thou Tusi koho

Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense.

I may tell Asi kahyye

Thou mayest tell Tusi kaho

She may tell O kehan

Perfect Past Tense.

IT might tell Asi kehndiyan

Thou mightest ‘Tusi kehndiyo

tell

She might tell

I will tell

O kehndiyan

[ Ave:

We had told

You hadtold |

They had told -

We will tell

You will tell

They will tell

Tell you

We may tell

You may tell

They may tell

We might tell

You might tell

They might tell

Vocabulary of Adverbs, Past and Prepositions, Conjunctions, &c. &e., called

Uppurr

Uthe

Heth

Wich

* Bahar

Tdhir

‘Udhur

Is wal

Us passe

Agge

Fichhe

Sajje

Khabbe

Jhabde

Hauli

Therhrki

Dadhi

Halka

Bhara

Mada

Dadha

Lissa

Motha

Takda ©

Wall

Nawal

Wadda

Chota

Lamma

Chauda

Kal

Parsun

in Sanskrit (Avyoy ).

Attarsun

\ wees Chauth

below Panjauth

in Uchha

out Ninwan

here Todi

there Lag

on this side Tain

on that side Talak

before Par

after Har wele hames-

to the right han

to the left Kadon

quickly Jad

slowly Jadon

slowly Tad

fast ‘Tadon

light Dihade dihade

heavy Pher

bad Agle wele

good Huna

thin Than

fat Par

strong Orar

well Uchhan

ill Niwan

large Uttad

small Niwan

long Azpas

broad Samhe

to-day Bas

yesterday Bhi

“to-morrow Aho, han

day after to-mor- Nah

row Je

3 days hence

4 days hence

5 days hence

above, high

below, low

a to, ’till

~ but

always, at all

times

when

\ when

then

daily

again

formerly

now

instead of

across

on this side

on the top

at the bottom

a little high

a little below

round

in front

enough

also

yes, bhala

1838 ]

Jiwenke

Aiwenke

Jadh

Tadh

Barabbar

La,i

Wadhik, bohun,

bahut

Wadh, bota

Thora

Ghat

Ainwen

Kulon

Chokra

Nikka

Kaka -

Ningar

Lauhda

Kudj

Mundi

Chokri

Kaki

Nikki

Nikdi

Lauhdj

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

(chunanchy) Jeda

(chunin ) Eda

whenever O,e

then E miyan

Vike “:

like in size Ve

why U,i

for Hai, hai

%; Haloe

Pahrya

much O, e, 0, e

Nal

little Kol

less Te

gratis Bina

than Bhaven

Vocabulary of Nouns.

day Kotha

night Jhuga

hand Darakht

> Rukh

Buta

| Buti

boy Ghoda

Tairr

| Ghodi

J Madi

> Haran

Miryon

| Mirg

irl Gaddon

ré Gaddan

Gadha

J Kotha

Khachhar

\ ies Behan

} daughter May

| Sunank

} father i

h Kukud

\ mot a Kukudi

\ brother eter

sister Baghla

water Baghla

fire Titur

Badhitar

bread Bateda

Tiliyarr

city, royal seat Gidad

village Lumbud

8 Bagyhad

a few huts Sher

atown [pital Babbar

alargecity orca- Chita

house Shagosh

717

as large as

so large

holla

the same in re.

spect

oh! fora woman

j to call

oh! (pain)

alas

1 calling for help

oh foraslight pain

} in company with

and

without

house or cottage

hut

\ tree

shrub

- plant

horse

a tattoo mare

\ mare

} aes

ass

mule

a colt

foal !

a barren female

a fruitful female

a pony

a cock

a hen

a pigeon

a ring dove

stork sx

partridge

a kind of ditto

quail

a bird

jackal

fox

wolf

tiger

royal tiger

leopard

panther

718

Tarkh

Bijju

Kutta

Billi*

Chuha

Sap

Neval

Mor

Saggo

Sana

Kachu

Kumma

Sensar

Bhulan

Ludhur

Uth,

Unth

Rich

Bandar

Langur

Bakra, bakri

Chhela chheli

Bheda bhed

hyena

an animal that

opens graves

dog

cat

rat

snake

weazel

peacock

lizard

a species of ditto

tortoise

turtle -

alligator

the water hog

otter

camel

bear

monkey

long-tailed ape

he-goat and she-

goat

sheep, ewe

Bhedu ram

Dhagi

Gan. cow

Bald, dand, dhaga bullock

Manj she-buffalo

Sanda he-butfalo

Sand bull

Battak duck

Kanak wheat

Chanwal rice

Chola pulse

Cabuli chola white ditto

Masar lentil

Mung phaseolus mungo

Maunha phaseolus maxi-

mus

.Rawanh a particular bean

Juar the common grain

holcus soryum

Makai Indian corn

Janv barley

Matar se a pea

Bajra the common grain

holcus spicatus

Kangd millet

Pyaz

~ Ganda onion

Wassal

Thomb leak

Gonglun turnip

Karam cabbage

Methri thyme

Palak spinnage

Grammar of the Panjibi Language.

Muli .

Gajar

Kulfa

Chaulai

Lal sag

Bohud

Ambh

Anar

Sanda phal

Sangtara

Kimb

Chakotra

Kela

Qulab

Lun

Tel

Shakar

Rab

Khand

Gud

Mishri

Patasa

Mirch

Lakad

Ghe,o, ghi

Makhan

Anda

Andde

Dudh

Dahin

Chakka

Lassi

Kassa

Panhak

Handi

Do,i

Chulla

Kadchi

Kadai

Tava

Ukli

Mola

Hardar

Manji

Pidi

Kadtad

Loha

Kalai

Sikka

Tamba

Pittul

Sona

Chandi

radish

carrot

purslain

beet

red beet root

ficus indicus

mango

pomegranate

a fruit

ditto

pampelnose

plantain

rose

salt

oil

sugar

sirup

sugar, soft

molasses

sugar-candy»

preparation of

sugar

pepper

wood

clarified butter

butter

egs

eggs

milk

\ curds

pane

a cooking pot

So aaediecan

cover

wooden spoon

cooking place

iron spoon

frying pan

do. for bread

mortar

pestle

saffron

bedstead

small cot

cot of leather

thongs

iron

tin, (? tinning)

lead

copper

_ brass

gold

silver, pure

[Auc. |

1838.]

Rupa

Jist

Para

Jiwa

Hurtal

Patharr

Pattar

Anguta

Chichi ungul

Pabb

Adi

Gita

Pini

Goda

Chapni

Sathal

Ojri

Andran

Phiphada

Hath

Jibh

Tali

Vini

Kohni

Doula

Mohda

Pith

Gal

Gala

Sangi

Hoth

Dand

Alasha dahna

Khadj

Khodi

Kala

Galh

Nakh

Kothi

Ghodi

Akh

Pipili

Anna

Chhappar

Bharwata

Matha

Putputi

Talu

Kopad

Ghandi

silver

pewter

quicksilver

yellow orpiment

stone

leaf

nail

little toe

sole

heel

ancle

calf

knee

knee-cap

stomach

tripe

entrails

lungs

hand

tongue

palm

below the elbow

arm |

elbow

arm above elbow

shoulder

back

neck

wind-pipe

lip

tooth

jaw tooth

chin

jawbone

cheek

nose

\ grisel of the nose

eye

eyelash

eyeball

eyelid

eyebrow

forehead

temple

scalp

crown

palate

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

Dhounn

Kan

Papdi

Kanine

Suthan

Nala

Nada

Pag

Mittha

Khatta

Kouda

Kasaila

Sahina

Bakbaka

Phika

Tatta

Thanda

Narm

Kaila

Sakhat

Kharwa

Kila

Dhila

Thinda

Uchha

Ninwa

Mehnga

Sasta

Gilla

Sukka

Sukha

Wal

Pate

Muchha

Dadi

Jida

Mendi

Kachh

Bagal

Kuth’

Palka

Kimari

Randi

Gabru

Gharwala

Khawand

W outi

Gharwali

Dara

Barid

Gha

Daua

Chitta

Bagga

719

nape of the neck

ear

soft part of ear

lobe

trowsers

} breeches string

turban

sweet

sour

bitter

pungent

salt

nauseous

insipid

hot Y

cold

: soft

hard

rough

smooth ~

liquid

greasy

high

locks of hair

mustachoes

beard

top knot of hair

ringlets

armpit

cue of hair

plaited hair by

which virgins

are distinguish-

virgin

widow

bridegroom

husband

bride

wife

gunpowder

ditto

grass

grain

\ white

720 Grammar of the Panjaht Language. [ Ave.

Lal red Jhala mad

Kala blaek Phanwani pleasure

Nila blue Kawad angry

Pila vellow Manda ill

Sawa green Changa well

Machhi fish Pid pain

Mah parshad flesh Kagadh paper

Stra} sun Dawad inkstand

Chan moon Lekhan pen

Pinis palangueen Khth well

Tara star Rah road

Ubbhurda oa Penda journey

Chadda ee Nao name

Sehanda west Wadhyai fame

Parbat north Kathi saddle

Dakhan south Rakab stirrup :

Wah wind Dumchi erupper ;

Hanera darkness Tahri saddle-cloth -

Haneri dust storm Mukhta head stall ;

Chhanay light Farakhi surcingle }

Dakh grapes Hall plough Ff

Duhnga deep Panjali yoke f

Kacha raw Suaga pat drag :

Pakka cooked Kahi pickaxe ;

Singh horn Ramba spade 4

Sumb hoof Datri sickle

Khur divided ditto Pail field

Unn wool Pahad hill -

Rin saigen Tibbi hillock

Rini do. Chhil |

Boli language Sakk banks

Bbukk hunger Jad root

Treh thirst Tehnj branch |

Jhuti shoes . Kotdj room 7

Anna blind Dahlan verandah :

Gunga dumb tha brick :

Dora deaf Veda ° terrace 4

Sujaka having sight Taya father’s elder 3

Lihla lame with both brother

legs Dada father’s father ‘

Kana blind of one eye Nana mother’s father

Bhenga double sighted Par nana nana’s father

Langa lame of one leg Shakarnana ~ father of latter

Sidha straight Potra grandson

Dinga crooked Padotra great grandson

Apatha upset Bharjai sister-in-law

Vocabulary of Verbs. |

Avua ., tO come Pivna to drink

Javna to go Satna to throw

Leavna to bring Devna to give

Le javna to carry away Lena to take

Rakhna to put Nachna to dance

Uthavna to raise Kudana to leap

Uthna to rise Hasna to laugh

Baithna to sit Rona to weep

Khayna to eat Sadna to call

1838.]

Marna

Wicharna

Tolna

Mechna

Pakavna

Ubalna

Bhunna

Kholna

Tapna

Banna

Wadhna

Phadna

Doudna

Drukna

Likhna

Padna

Phirni

Chikna

Kichna

Ponjna

Chhilna

Digna

Dhaina

Digavna

Dig pavna

Janna

Gali kadhni

Karz lena

Hatavna

Turna

Wajavna

Ghulna

Kambna

Akhna

Anwayna

Musla

Kona singh

Sukha

Sunera

Chakhna

Parshad

Mahan parshad

Chita bajavna

Kave phirna

Sucheta karna

Niwaj

Mast jad

Thati

Gadhi

4x2

Grammay of the Panjibi Language.

to beat

to think

to weigh

to measure

to cook

to boil

to roast

to open

to bound

to bind

to cut

to break

to run

to write

to read

to stroil

} to pull

to wipe

to scrape

i to fall

to make fall

to fall

to bring forth

to abuse

to borrow

to remove

to walk

tu play on an in-

strument

to wrestle

to tremble

to speak

to make bring

Khalona

Khadona

Gavavna

Khulavna

Dhakavaa

Khoturna

Bijna

Rahwna

Patna

Manena

Tuthna

Bhajna

Khurukna

Chatna

Dabna

Vithna

Phikna

Khedna

Kikna

Khiskana

Uturna

Khalwavna

Kharchna

Chudavna

Chadna

Dhikna

Sivna

Wadhna

Tilakua

Darrna

Nasna

Bharna

Tukna

Thakorna

A short Sikh Vocabulary.

a Musalmén

bald-headed

s.m. disrespect

to Musalmans

the intoxicating

plant bhang

the vessel in

which bhang is

bruised

to eat or drink

eatable

meat

to make water

to ease one’s self

to make ablution

prayer

a mosque

a hooka

Chingna

Dosa

Ranga

Pahul le,ona

Kacha singh

Anga

Kesa

Dhari

Datan

Granth saheb

Agan

Wachna

Ramjanga

Bati

Kadchi

Waltoi

721

to stand up

to lose

to loosen

to cause to be

pushed

to dig

to sow

to pluck

to ask

} to break

to scratch

to lick

to press

to pour

to blow

to play games

to call

to sneak away

to descend

to make stand —

to spend

to release

to ascend

to push

to sew

to grow

to slip

to fear

to retire

to fill

te chop

to careof,to mind

to smoke

Dost Muhammad

Aurangzeb

to become a con-

vert

breeches

coat

hair weavers, an

epithet of Sikhs

tooth brush

the Sikh scrip-

ture (Granth)

fire

to read

a matchlock

a pot

a spoon

a vessel for cook-

ing pulse

722 Grammar of the Panjabi Language. [Avue. @

Kaj marriage Langri butler ;

Sultana Sultan Muham- = Langar cookroom 4

mad Khan Dalle pieces of flesh ;

Pirna Pir Muhammad Las soup 5

Khan Karna to cook (not pas

Phatta Wazir Fatteh kavna) ;

Khan Warjna to stop one’sown

Tambira Timaur Shah dinner, i. e. to

Pendhya Penda Khan accept aninvi-

(Tanauli) tation

Gadwai cup-bearer

Maharaj Ranjit Singh has the following peculiar Vocabulary of his own.

Bandbast, opening of the bowels, Dast in Persian.

Thirmili, a

check or curtain, cheekh in Panjabi.

Khismati, a ewer, chilamchi in Persian, because chilams (pipes are not

lawful in the Granth.)

Sugda (clever) a stool, instead of Moda because this word means a fool,

Kanga Sagar, a goglet, Aftaba in Persian.

Sentences.

War ji (properly Wa Guriji) ka

khalsa

Tuhada nan ki,e

Tusi kiddar jande,o

Tin kiddar janna en

Is pindda nan hi,e

Tuhant thand lagi,e

Oh pind kinna dir,e

Tuhadi umur kitni e

Tusi sadde bhirant jande o

Isda mul ki loge

Tuhadiyan trimatan kitniyan

Tusi ghodyania ki dende,o

Tuhade ghodyandi ki khurak e

Tusi kis waste mere utte ghusse 0

Tuhada peo juvnda e

Nah tre vare huen jo pura hogaya e

or (margaya e)

Tusi kadin Turkisthannu ga,e,o

Din vich kitni verj khande,o

Ki, ki, khande,o

Nazar aonda e jo aj min wasega

Ki kar nazar donde

Asade kul hek paredi kikmat,e

Ek man bi wichon kitna hasal hun-

da,e

Aj kal thon (nalon) bahut thand,e

Je tuhant vel nehinta apne gumash-

tent ghal dena

Aj bazar wich hundida ki bha,e

Hundj mathi

Hundi chaddi,e

Koi sathtan nehin lagi

Tusi odaretan nehin

The Sikh salutation.

What is your name?

Where are you going?

Ditto, ditto, ditto, to an inferior.

What is the name of this village ?

You have caught a cold.

How far is that village P

What is your age ?

Do you know my brother ?

What will you take for this ? ‘

How many wives have you?

What do you feed horses on ?

What is your horses’ food ?

Why are you angry with me?

Is. your father alive ?

No, these three years since he died.

Have you ever been to Turkistan ?

How many meals do you make a day?

What do you eat?

It seems as if it would rain to-day.

How do you know?

I have an instrument containing

quicksilver.

What is the produce of a maund of

seed P

To-day is much colder than yester-

day.

If you have not leisure send your

agent.

What is the exchange of a bill to-

day in the bazar ?

The rate has fallen..

The rate has risen.

You are not hurt are you?

You are not uncomfortable are you?

1838.]

Tusi odarna nehin jedi gal mango

sohi hazar,e eh tuhada apna ghar,e

dusra nehin janna

Asi apne kam kaj wich rudde renne-

yan ne tan dam dam wich tuhade

kul ponchiye

Is hauzte tuhada ki kharch aya,e

Hazar ek rupaya laga howega asade

sabkar ni pakki ‘habe,e uskolon

puchke das dewange je tuhanu

bahut lod e tan

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

723

Don’t make yourself uneasy, what-

ever you want shall be forthcom-

ing ; this is your own house and

not a strange one. :

I am busy about my own affairs or

I would be with you every mo-

ment.

What have you spent on this cistern?

It might have cost me a thousand

rupees or so, but my steward

knows the exact sum and will tell

you if you particularly require

and will ask him. is

Dialogues.

Illustrative of the private character of the Ruler of Lahore.

Maharaj ji, Kabul da ikbar ayi e

Hajar karo

Maharaj ji hajar e

Fakir horant bulao

Fakir ji hajar ho,o

Sardar Dost Mamada,e ya kisse hor

da,e

Maharaj ji, Sardar Sahabda,e

Hacha pado ki likhya e

A‘pdi umur daraz hove vih bhar

dalide do ghode ek talwar hazir

mu allade waste hazar en haztr

kabul farmatn

Nikka Mishar hazar hove

Maharaj ji ershad

Mishar ji, tusi Beliram horan kol

jao ek hathi hauda chandi da ek

bandtk Sindhy, Gujrathi talwar

das jode dushalyande rang birangi

hache mahin howan Dost Mamad

waste bhej do fakir ji tusi bi likho

teda sadda rah hek chahi da agge

isthon hoi bandobast pakka ban

jiswich tun saukha rahen, nehin

tan Sarkar Dassera karke chadan

wali, e na kahin jo maint khabr

nehin kiti ne

Jo Haztrne ershad farmaen likhe

gai en

Wakil nal tor deo

Raja saheb horanu bulao

Maharaj ji, hajar an

Raja ji, panj ardali apne bhej deo ate

ja ba ja likh bhejo jo ek saheb

Attock wale rahon awnden sau sau

rupeya majal ba majal, ata wih

News from Cabul has arrived your

highness.

Bring the man in.

He is here your highness.

Call the faqueer.

Will you please to come in faqueer ?

Is the letter from Sardar Dost Mu-

hammad, or from any one else ?

It is from the Sardar your highness.

Well read what is in it.

May your age be great : twenty loads

of fruit, two horses and a sword,

are here for your supreme high-

ness; will your highness deign to

accept them ?

Here, Nikka Mishar.

Your highness, what orders ?

Mishar, do you go to Beliram and

send for Dost Muhammad an ele-

phant with a silver houda, a Sin-

dhian matchlock, «a Guzerati sword,

ten pairs of shawls; let them be

fine and of different colors: and,

faqueer, do you write and say his

and my road is one, and that he

must make some good arrange.

ment, by which he may live com.

fortable; or else the Sarkar ine

tends to march on him after the

Dussera ; and tell him not to say

he was not forewarned.

What your highness ordered, is writ-

ten.

Send it by the Vakil.

Call the Rajah ? (Dhyan Singh).

I am here your highness.

Raja, send five of your own orderlies

and write to every place that a

gentleman is coming by the At-

tock road; give him one hundred

724

man, do man chanwl, man ghi,o

panjab kukud, das ghade dudhde

hor dabin kesan pawant, panj son

andda manjian, lakhriyan, bhande

mittide hor jo lod howe ne sab

khatar karni chauki paihra majal

ba majal da rakhna jimma tuha-

dae

Maharaj ji, sat bachan

Mishar ji, Fatt® Bhayyeni ghal de,o

Jamadar sab horant bula lyawe

Jamadar ji, jis tarah raje sabnu er-

shad hoya,e tusi bi apni muluk

wich likh bhejo jo saheb kisi gale

khafa na howan; manjil bamanjil

di rasid sabandi hajar hove

Miyan Jai Baksh Kumidan ta

Myan Sultan Mahmid, te Mirja

Mandar Aly, nyahran nydahran

kartus jinsi tophande ta ikki ikki

ghodnalande peher din rende jo

saheb dakhal howanje hukm,e

Mishar, Sukhrajni hukm de ghalo

do kampaniyan Jahangir de mak.

bare Jains rehan ate pa rikab

sabande hajar rehan

Jedi Sing, anwali Paltan e tansali

de bar lains rehe jis wele saheb

dakhal howan addall wich ave

Mishar ji, Kutbent hukm deo jo

biviyand bula leave panjah panjah

rupeya toshekhane wichon le de,o

eh hukm de de,o jo ban tan ke

awan ‘

Mishar ji, Khair Aly Khan Gubar-

chyni panch sau rupeya lekhwa

deo aten eh hukm deo jo ghari

ratthon agge agge dip mala saman

wich hajar hove

Satar Baghwan hajar hove

Maharaj ji hukm

Kal Shala bagh wich pehr diuthon

agge agge maifal saban waste

hazar hove

Mishar ji, Mishar Beliramna akho,

hek kantha mot yanda jodi kady-

andi hiriyandi jadav dushala bhara

hek than kinkhabda panch sau

rupeya sabanda, Khismatqaran

waste hek hek khes ucha hor jede

sabande admi onha waste wade

wele kul shala bagh wich hazar

howan

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

[Aue@.

rupees at every stage, flour twen-

ty maunds, two maunds of rice, a

maund of ghee, fifty fowls, ten

pots of milk and curds to wash

his hair, five hundred eggs, cots,

firewood, earthen pots, and what-

ever he may want; let him havea

guard at every stage. This is

your trust.

Truly spoken your highness.

Mishar, send Fatti Bhayya to call -

Jemadar Kushal Singh.

Jemadar, do you also as I have or.

dered the rajah and write to your

district that the gentleman may

not be uncomfortable, and get al-

so his receipts at each stage.

Tell Miyan Ilai Baksh Kumedan,

Myén Sultan Mahmud, and Mir.

za Mandar Aly (to fire) eleven

rounds from the garrison guns,

and twenty-one from the field

pieces a pahar before sunset when

the gentleman arrives.

Mishar, send to Sukhraj and tell him

to keep two companies in readi-

ness at Jehangirs tomb as the

gentleman’s escort.

Let the Singh regiment be in readi.

ness outside the Tanksali gate to

accompany the gentleman as an

escort.

Mishar, tell Kutba to call the ladies

(dancers), give them fifty rupees

each out of the treasury, and order

them to come dressed out.

Mishar, let Khair Aly Khan Gubar-

chy receive five hundred rupees,

and tell him to have lamps ready

in the Saman bastion a ghari be-

fore night.

Let Satar gardener be called.

What order your highness ?

To-morrow before nine o'clock, let

an entertainment be prepared for

the gentleman in the Shala gar-

den

Mishar, tell Mishar Beliram to have

to-morrow morning ready at the

Shala garden, a pearl necklace, a

pair of gold bracelets set with

diamonds, an expensive pair of

shawls, a piece of khinkab, five

hundred rupees for the gentle-

man’s servants, and a_ valuable

khes each for his other men.

1838.]

Nika Diwan ji, Munshi Sarabdhyal

hajar karo

Parwana lekho Raje Suchet Singh

haranu, hazar swar do hazar pya-

da Peshawaron kich karke Banni-

da bandbast karan, hek Panwana

Futteh Singh Man horani lekho

Raja Sabdi Kaman manni tasan

hor inhande hukm wichon adil

nehin karna

Ershad likho Diwan Dannint, Gu-

zerat da muluk Sarkar dendi,e

Kabul kar lai rupeyé panj hazar

nazarana sarkarda leave jis wele

lyave us wele khilat pehan, ja,e

Maharaj ji, Diwan hori kabil nehin

karde

Aiwen bhadi,a e nazarana waste

kabul nehin karda do hazar chad

deo ape man lega

Maharaj ji, Diwan horane man liya e

Dittha Jamadar ji, bhadweda tama-

sha do hazar rupeya chadya tan

kinkar man liyas

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

725

Nika Diwan, call Munshi Sarab-

dhyal.

Write an order to Raja Suchet

Singh with one thousand cavalry

and two thousand infantry to

march from Peshawar and settle

Bannu, and write an order also to

Futteh Singh Man to put himself

under the Rdja’s orders and not

to disobey any of his commands.

Write an order to Diwan Dannt

that the Sarkar has given him the

country of Guzerat, order him t0

accept it, and to give five thou-

sand rupees nazarana for it; at

the time of presenting which he

will receive a khilat.

Your highness, the Diwan refuses to

accept it.

Just like the rascal, he does not

accept it on account of the naza.

rana ; take off two thousand and

he will obey.

Your highness, the Diwan has agreed.

Do you see Jamadar, the play of the

rascal P two thousand rupees have

been remitted, why has he accept-

ed it now?

The Maharaja ill with a pain in his knee.

(A Farash). Maharaj ji, hek wada

Sayad e medi tang dukhdi si hath

lavnde in khair ho gai,i

( The Maharaj). Mishar ji, oh Say-

adnu lea Ruldi Farash thon jaga

puchh leni hathi kaswa le,o wich

chadakar leavna adab nal

Your highness, there is a great Sayad

who cured a bad leg of mine by

the touch of his hand.

Mishar, bring that Sayad; ask

Ruldi Farash where he lives, get

ready an elephant and bring him

on it with respect.

The Sayad arrives.

(Sayad). Bha,i teni sukh hove

_ padshai peya kar gajda raho

(Maharga). Mishar ji, panch pot-

lyan sau sau diyan ledo

(To the Sayad). Maharaj ji, kal bi

darshan devna

(Another Farash). Maharaj ji, hek

sadh aya Guri Nanak sabdi juthi

hai on hakul

(The Maharaja). Uswaktdi rakhi

huis hajar karo onha Sadhana

Mishar ji, asada khasa be jao udde.

wich ona sabani chadakar le ao

Brother, may you be well and carry

on your government; may you

continue to bluster in the world.

Mishar,’bring five bags of a hundred

rupees each.

Your highness will, I hope, give me

a sight of yourself to-morrow.

Your highness, there is a holy man

who has one of Guru Nanak’s

shoes.

What, has he preserved it since that

time; bring here that Sadh and

take my own khasa, Mishar, for

him to come in.

The Sadh arrives, unfolds the shoe from a hundred wrappers. The

Maharaja salutes it and applies it to his eyes, head and breast.

(The Maharaja). Mishar ji, hazir Mishar ji, order a perpetual grant

rupey2 da pind dharmarth Wazir-

abad de talake wichon likhwa de,o

to be written of a thousand-rupee

village in the province of Wazr-

726

aten juthi sabani toshakhane wich

rakhwa de,o

(Another Servant). Maharaj ji, hek

wada pandit Kashi on aya wada

padya hua ounapds hek ling e

Madewjida o farmaunden paven

jeha dukh dard Sarkarni hove

lavnde nale sukh hojave. Tad

jano jo ling sacha,e

(The Maharaja). Mishar ji, hathi

haswa lo chandide haudewala pan-

dit onard wich bahake sitabe hajar

karo

(The Servant). Maharaj ji, pandit

hori wada sakht mizaj hain awan

ki mehin awan

(The Muaharaja.) Jis tara jano

unhanu leao hek panch sau rupeya

bi le jao toshekhane wichon

(Servant). Maharaj ji, sat bachan

Grammar of the Panjabi Language.

Aue.

abad and put the reverend shoe

in the treasury.

Your highness, thereisa great pandit

arrived from Benares deeply read,

and has a lingum of Mahadeo with

him ; he says whatever pain the

Sarkar may have will be cured by

applying it. It must therefore

be a real one.

Mishar, saddle an elephant with a

silver houda and bring the pandit

in it quickly.

Your highness, the pandit is a man

of a queer temper; he will not

thus be brought.

Bring him by all means, and take

with you five hundred rupees from

the treasury. :

Very well, your highness.

The pandit arrives, takes out the stone, the Maharaja rises and rubs it

over his body.

( Maharaj). Mishar ji, hek hazar

rupeya hor Jeakar matha teko

pandit horand das rupeya roz

Jawa deo

(Pandit). Wamani kuch nehin

bakar Mahadevji ka hukm hai jab

ek Raja hachha hovega to yahan

se uthana isse hukm muafik ham

kashé se ture hain

Mishar, bring 1,000 rupees more and

put it at his feet, and give the

pandit an allowance of 10 rupees

a day.

I don’t want any of it; I have Maha-

dev’s orders to return when you

are well, and I have brought this

order with me from Benares.

Tusi tin char roz darbar maukif Don’t hold your court for two or

karo

three days.

After some days, the Maharaj hears that the holy pandit has fallen in

love with a dancing girl, and is accordingly an imposter ; his only remark is,

Sadh log en unko eh bat ban avti e

These are holy men, they can do

these things if they like..

Specimen of Punjabi verse.

Simin badan yarafshan chehra lab

surkhi misl andre phul hazire je

in galzare

Aten mirg akbinti mirg hairani

vekh khini main tumhare maran

hyanv sihare

Mar bimar hazar pae teri zulf kun.

dul wal mare wal wal sade mo,e

wichare

Par bhuj bhuj dejan Kalandar Ashik

maran mare karan kakare baith

kinare

Silver body, bespangled (freckled)

face, red lips like the pomegra-

nate, or poppy, or rather like a

bed of flowers.

And lascivious eyes shaming the

deers ; beholdthose blood-shot orbs,

murderous stealers of the heart.

Thousands have fallen sick and died;

thy locks are ringlets in which

you catch and burn us, and we die

hopeless.

But Kalandar, as he burns with love,

sings, sighing, and bewailing in

retirement.

2nd.

Chale niv akhinti behadd jadh yar

vida kar chale

Tears without measure started from

mine eyes, when my lover started

at our separation.

1838.]

Jhale log nasihat dende koun sang

wicho dedi jhale

Bhale akl jehe chhad jande jithe

ishk marenda bha/e

Palle ak) na rahi Kalandar jan ishk

ave ith palle.

Chasm bandtkh ten surma ranjak

tode zulf pakha,e

Goli khal disse mukh uppar jan oh

shest kara,e

Oh mare dilnd mil na kusse jan oh

kas chalae

Par Kalandar matlab tayyen pie

jahan apna ap koha,e

*Dukhandi main punchi pai mere

pair sughlan nal tarode

Ahin nal parotyan hanjun vekh

ishkede zore

Har singar kita sab gham da jadh

main thon yar wichode kuk Ka-

landar rab dadhe agge mat pawan

hotana mode

Jhalke nakin tab ishkda main kahil

kit} jhalke

Chalke bir hun de munh ai huna

jawan kith wal chalke

Ralke dukhan sulan kuthi sukh gae

asathon ralke

Kalke jamme haran majakhan pai

jan Kalandar kalke

Vocabulary of the Baraky Language.

727

Bearish people reprehend me, but

who can bear the spear of absence P

Standard wits are lost where love

plants his standard.

Kalandar possesses no wisdom when

love possesses him.

Kye for gun, antimony for priming

and ringlets for a match which is

lighted.

That mole appearing on thy check

is a bullet when you present it to

the mark.

She is aiming at my heart but can-

not strike it though she loads

and fires.

But know, Kalandar, you will then

gain your ends when you strike

yourself.

I have arrived at the summit of

pain; my feet have anclets of

thorns.

By sighs my tears have been forced

out, behold the force of love!

I decked myself in mourning weeds

when my love parted from me!

entreat Kalandar before all-pow-

erful God that your ‘hot*” may

return.

The fire of love does not kindle, I

am kindled after long patience.

1 threw myself into the fire, now

how shall I get through.

Thorns and grief have /ef¢ me pros-

trate, and pleasure has quite deft

me.

The child of yesterday is ousting

me. ‘he soul of Kalandar is

roasting.

A VocABULARY OF THE BARAKY LANGUAGE.

Introduction.

The Barakis are included in the general term of Parsiwan, or Tajak+;

they are original inhabitants of Yemen whence they were brought by

Suttan Maumvu’p of Ghazni; they accompanied him in his invasion

of India, and were pre-eminently instrumental in the abstraction of

the gates of the temple of Somnath. There are two divisions of the

tribe. The Barakis of Fajdn in the province of LoucaD, who speak

* Proper name.

+ The popular derivation of the word Tajak is that the ancestors of that tribe

were the keepers of the Taj (crown) of the Arabian prophet, ‘Taj besides meaning a

kingly crown is applied to the distinguishing cap of a Muhammadan fakir (hermit).

4 y

728 Vocabulary of the Baraky Language. f Aue.

Persian, and the Barakis of Barak, a city near the former, who speak

the language called Baraki; Supr4n Maumvu’p, pleased with their

services in India, was determined to recompense them by giving them

in perpetual grant any part of the country they chose; they fixed upon

the district of Kamguram in the country of the Waziris where they

settled. There are 2000 families of the Rajan Barakis under Rasvu’L

Kuan who receives 2000 rupees a year from Dost Munammap

Kudn. The contingents of both these chiefs, amount to 50 horsemen

who are enrolled in the Ghuldm Khéna division of the Cabul army.

There are also 2000 families of Barakis at Kamiguram under SHAn

Matak who are independent. The Barakis of this place and of

Barak alone speak the Baraki language.

We receive a warning from the study of this Vocabulary, not to be

hasty in referring the origin of a people merely from the construction

of their language; for it is well known that the one now instanced was

invented by Mir Yu’zu’F who led the first Barakis from Yemen into

Afghanisthan: his design was to conceal and separate his few follow-

ers from the mass of Afghans (called by them Kash) who would no

doubt at first look upon the Barakis with jealousy as intruders. The

muleteers of Cabiél, being led by their profession to traverse wild

countries and unsafe roads, have also invented a vocabulary of pass-

words,

Vocabulary*.

Rosh, day Kaftar, pigeon March, pepper

Gha, night Kouk, Greek partridge Run, clarified butter

Kalanak, boy Oogh, camel Maska, butter

Dadai, father Khirs, bear W olkh, egg

Zarigag, girl

Maw, mother

Khwar, sister

Marza, brother Madgoi, cow

Wokh, water Ganum, wheat

Aron, fire Rizza, rice

Tikhan, bread

Kshar, city

Gram, village

Ner, house

Pikakh, milk

Ghip, curds

Topi, butter-milk

K hat, bedstead

Lyaf, coverlid

A‘hin, iron

Pyaz, onion Kalai, tin

Tambaku, tobacco Surb, lead

Shalgham, turnip Mis, copper

Karam, cabbage Brinj, brass

Shadi, monkey

Bakri, goat

Nargoi, bull

Darakht, tree

Buta, shrub

Yasp, horse

.Gon, wood

Yasp, mare

A,u, deer

Khar, ass

. Khatir, mule

Kurra, foal

Kirji, fowl

Turab, radish

Kajar, carrot

Anar, pomegranate

Gulab, rose

Nimek, salt

Tel, oil

Shakar, sugar

Khand, refined sugar

Gud, molasses

Nabat, sugar-candy

Tilla, gold

Nukhra, silver

Gap, stone

Balk, leaf

Pusht, back

Sina, breast

Nas, stomach

Lab, lip

Gishy, tooth

Makh, cheek

* sh represents y, in distinction from sh which stands for y.

1838. ] Vocabulary of the Baraky Language. 729

Neni, nose

Tsimi, eye

Sar, head

Goi, ear

Partuk, trousers

Khwash, sweet

Turush, sour

Tegh, bitter

Shor, salt

Tokha, hot

Tsaka, cold

Narm, soft

Kilakha, hard

Pabega, high

Zariya, low

Kemat, dear

Arzan, cheap

J iri, hair

Wadai, wool

Pamba, cotton

Wrosht, bread

Brut, mustachoes

Gaka, meat

Toavi, sun

Marwokh, moon

Stura, star

Mashrik, east

Maghrib, west

Shammal, north

Junub, south

Bad, wind

Parogh, light

Tarith, darkness

Angur, grapes

Pukuk, ripe

Nakpukuk, raw

Shakh, horn

Sumb, hoof

Palla, divided hoof

Kaush, shoes

Kor, blind

Gung, dumb

Karr, deaf

Rast, straight

Baba, grandfather

Nawasai, grandson

Khashna, sister-in-law

Pabega, above

Podzema, below

Wavera, in

Paneght, out

Inda, here

Yuwal, there

Makh, before

Papets, after

Razai, quick

Karar, slow

Subuk, light

Wazmin, heavy

Khrab, bad

Shirra, good

Narrai, thin

Ghota, fat

Sturra, large

Zari, little

Shon, to-day

Mali, husband Kaj, crooked Sir, to-morrow

Nak, wife Stud, tired Parin, yesterday

Daru, gunpowder Dimy, pain Kan, when

Ghwash, grass Kaghaz, paper Peri, now

Speg, barley Mushwani, inkstand Bas, enough

Ispeuq, white Kalam, pen Sher, yes

Sugha, red Chha, well Na, no

Gharasa, black Rah, road Key, why

Nil, blue Nam, name Zut, much

Zed, yellow Zin, saddle Dukh, little

Shin, green Giri, mountain Tar, and

Mahi, fish Khisht, brick

Numbers, Cardinal and Ordinal.

1 she il shandas 30. shist

2 do 12 duas 4.0 tsasht

3 ghe 13 shes 50 panzast

4 tsar 14 tsares 60 ‘hoshty

5 penz 15 panzes 70 hawai

6 ksha 16 shales 80 hashtai

7 wo 17 haves 90 nuvi

8 ansht 18 ashtes 100 sad

9 noh 19 nes 1000 hazar

10 das 20 jist

Nauwam, ninth

Panjam, fifth

Dasum, tenth

_Shasham, sixth

Haftam, seventh

Hashtum, eighth

Verbs.

Razai, come Gon, place

Tso, go D’ra, take up

Rawarra, bring Neh, sit

Aglona, take away Hust, rise

4y2

Auwal, first

Duyam, second

Seyam, third

Charam, fourth

Khuron, eat

Shera, give

Nassa, take

Dzana, beat

730

Vocabulary of the Baraky Language.

[Ave

Sentences.

Az sipai yum

Tu gudaptso

Drekhy oghok

Tostar makh marza ye

Azr tu dagad pitsen

Tar tuna rupe da a

Tar ti muwajib tstina

Nimaz digar shuk

Ta tsun umvron

Tsun kalan daron

Baran rasak

Tar boskshar tsum petsa

Tsun bima daron

Yaspaki tsa shai

Pa tsuna shai ka

Tafor dadai guda

She chan busak ka muluk

Yaspdi to sarrang argho shtakai

Pera tsa kun

Ta shujal Mulki jangine tarmakh

marza zakhmi shuk

Kurra kariner bhush tsara na kun

Rahiner kuman ghal luchh da kum

Ta kash khalk zud khuranakai

Kurra graminer tsun kharwar ga-

num a ida

Tar makhanas bademi

Te Herat rahiner baladon

Maka amarokh ka Kamran zud za-

lim a

Tsar penz sadaiki she yaspashok

Kurra hauzjar tar tos tsun kharch

shuka

Indadi batsen sauda aglon

‘Tarra than kemat ba tstin sa

Tarra than kemat tar makha nazari-

ner padas tuman

Kurra mulkaner khimkab kewun

gran a

Tar tosi Giriner hinj paida sa

Ha shai ba patsa kar raza

Shou Mulla hera she jae tol shka

Zar tos zabananer badala daha ki

nagadaha

Nah kok ka ba badala ghok pa Parsi

baghok

Ta kash i menziner tsen zai sham.

shiri a

I’ Kashiner Popalzai sher shams.

hiri a

I am a soldier.

Where are you going?

He spoke false.

You are my brother.

We will go together.

Have you a rupee with you?

What is your pay?

It is the time of afternoon prayers.

What is your age?

How many children have you?

The rain has come.

How far is your town?

How much ground have you ?

What do you give your horse?

What is his price?

Where is your father?

It is a year since he died.

How did you fall from the horse ?

What shall I do now.

My brother was wounded in the

battle of Shujawal Mulk.

Why don’t you take care (what you

do) in this affair ?

A robber stripped me on the road.

The Afghan is a starving nation.

What quantity of wheat is produced

in that village?

I have a pain in my stomach.

Do you know the road to Herat ?

I hear that Kamran is a great

tyrant.

He gave four or five men for a sin-

gle horse.

What expense have you incurred on

that tank P

What merchandise do you take

from here ?

What may be the price of this piece ?

The price of this piece in my opi-

nion is 10 tumans.

Why is khimkab so dear in this

country P

Is asafoetida produced in your

mountains P

What is the use of this thing?

The Mullas have all assembled in

one place to-day.

Are verses written in your language

or not?

No; any one who rehearses verses,

rehearses them in Persian.

What tribe of Kash (Afghans) are

the best swordsmen ?

Among these Afghans the Popal-

zais are the best swordsmen.

1838. ]

Sher maltagha pa tamam Candahar

ki sher maltaghnagda

Tsun rosh bad kafila raza

Tarmakh utarak ta charsikh kara-

wansarainer shuk me bayad she

war kamakh tamaner razai

Vocabulary of the Pashai Language.

This is a good gun such as is not

procurable in all Candahar.

arrive P

In how many days will the caravan

I have put up in the caravansera of

the charsukh (four bazars) ; you

must come and see me some day.

A VocABULARY OF THE PasHal LANGUAGE.

The language is spoken by the people called Pashais who inhabit the

Introduction.

districts of Mandal, Chitela, Parenad, Kundi, Seva and Kalman.

Dawas, day

Vyal, night

A’st, hand

Balakul, boy

Lavni, girl

Panjai, man

Zaif, woman

lI’

2 do

3 te

4. char

5 panj

Gul, river

So,ata, he-goat

Baratik, ewe

Lawga, pain

Dar, wood

Daru, powder

Phajadik, she-goat

Barata, ram

Gal, abuse

Wagan, wind

Parontik, bullet

Mo, wine

Chau, vinegar

Gom, wheat

Lon, salt

Ga, cow

Ghas, grass

Panj, husband

Waya, daughter

Chummar, iron

Shlekzarra, silver

Anch, eye

Khad, ear

Dan, tooth

Dadi, beard

Chagam, chin

Manda, neck

Makadik, monkey

Vocabulary.

Tati, father

Ai, mother

Laya, brother

Saya, sister

Wark, water

Angar, fire

Au, bread

6 she 11 jae

7 sat 12 dude

8 asht 13 tloe

9 no 14 chadde

10 de 15 panjo

Pa, foot

Nawad, back

Kuch, belly

Gorecha, embrace

Sir, head

Khwagam, near

Shiek, white

Sutnek, red

Kacha, blue

Khat, bedstead

Nuni, butter

Ave, flour

Golang, drove of bul-

locks —

Ada, bull

Zaib, wife

Pultem, son

Selt, knife

Sonezarra, gold

Wad, stone

Nast, nose

Dur, lip

Jib, tongue

Brut, mustachoes

Kalavi, cheek,

Ling, leg

Jeshta, ruler

Ang, arm

Lam, fort

Goshin, house

Kadi, tree

Ghoda, horse

Ghodi, mare

Bai,i, good

Batar, bad

16 shod

17 sattu

18 ashtu

19 nau

20 vist

Sina, breast

Chuchadik, paps

Kachi, armpit

Dur, face

Duda, far

Samek, black

Pela, yellow

Alina, green

Chal, hair

Chonta, small

Bakuta, fat

Chila, cloth

Sutan, trousers

Shunim, dog

U'ndarik, cat

Pe, flesh

Kharti, female ass

Dashna, right

Sur aldash, sunrise

Taj, star

Sang, earth

Wagh, rain

Sidal, ice

Rast, true

Bo, much

Sila, mud

Abali, cloud

Khurra, hoof

732 Note on a species of Arctonix from Arracan. [Ava.

Linta, bow Po, dust Minai, come

Pachh, cotton Bhojil, earthquake Nepa, sit

Yal, wool Kan, arrow A’ya, eat

Sai, thing Khab, scabbard Amlaja, run

Tish, bitter Suchak, needle Virambu, walnut

Sadal, cold Kumar, deep Baho, quince

Gand, large ' Lasarra sweet Amirik, pomegranate

Lagar, thin Garm, hot Akhud, below

Perana, coat Pinja, flower Pachada, after

Kimanik, cloak Dashik, grapes Kham, raw

Shuwatik, bitch Ashadi, apricot Tada, deer

Machh, fish Manai, apple Saro, mule

Kharta, ass Oba, upon Avta, hunger

Lawich, jackal - Ebat, now Koshada, shoes

Chappa, left Pachaleva, cooked Bolla, deaf

Nirgirch, sunset Shing, horn Ithota, lame

Mae, moon Ledhi, female deer (roe) Chaya, well

Tal, heavens Kadaga, language Witai, go

I’m, snow Tena, thirst Ura, stand

Asal, hail Anda, blind Pe, drink

Lad, false Gonga, dumb

Kam, little Beda, mad

Lau lau jhala Go slowly.

Tena nami kusst What is your name ?

Kina pagi Where are you going ?

Tu chide ai Where is your residence ?

Sabak mare Learn your lesson ?

A’t pachale Cook bread.

Wary acha Bring water.

Likhan kega Write.

Ema sardar kyas Who is your ruler?

Note. The above vocabularies seem to have been all thrown out of arrange-

ment in the copying, but we have not time to attempt their rearrangement.—Eb.

VII.—Note on a species of Arctonix from Arracan. By Dr. G.

Evans, Curator As. Soc. Museum.

The singular and rare little animal presented this evening by Captain

Paterson of H.C. brig Krishna, I have reason to believe is the

Bali Souar or sand hog of the Hindus, the type of a new genus of

Mammalia to which M. F. Cuvier has assigned the name of Arctoniz.

The description given of A. Collaris by M. M. Grorrroy, SAINT

Hivaire and F. Cuvier, Livraison 5leme Histoire Naturelle des

Mammiferes will most probably apply to this our living specimen. It

is as follows. “In habit this animal may be compared to a bear

furnished with the snout, eyes and tail of a hog. Of its dentary system

nothing is known, except that it possesses six small incisors of equal

length, and its canine teeth are long, and that these are immediately

succeeded by flat molar teeth which appear to be larger as they are

more advanced in the mouth. Its movement is plantigrade, and its

18388.) Note on a species of Arctonix from Arracan, 733

five toes, united by a narrow membrane throughout their whole extent,

are armed with powerful claws an inch in length.

“The hairs are rough, thickly set, and long upon the body, while

those of the head are short and depressed. The snout which is flesh-

colored, has only a few bristles on its sides; and the belly is almost

naked. ‘The ears are short, covered with short hairs, and bordered

with white. The hair, which is yellowish white with its apex black,

gives to the fur a slightly blackish cast, which varies in an undulated

manner when the animal moves. The throat is yellow and the sides of

the head are marked with two black bands, which unite towards the

snout. The lower band which is very narrow, borders the upper lip;

the other which is much broader covers the eye, embraces the ear,

descends on the sides of the neck, and unites itself at the bottom

of the shoulder with the black that covers entirely the anterior

members : hence the part in front bounded by these black bands al-

though nearly resembling in color the remainder of the body, seems to

form a distinct portion of the fur. The hinder members are black like

the anterior ones, and the hair which covers them is very rough. The

yellowish white predominates towards the posterior part of the back,

and the tail is furnished with large rough scattered bristles.”

This description was founded entirely on the notes of the late M.

DuvaucEL, who sent from India the drawing employed by M. F.

Cuvier. Mention is made that no specimen had then reached France,

but that there was one in the museum of the East India Company, and

that another, apparently a distinct species, is in the collection of the

Linnean Society :—it continues : |

‘ From the number and form of the toes and the disposition of the

teeth the genus Arctonix evidently belongs to the carnivora, to the

extreme of which and in, close connection with the bears, it is referred

by its plantigrade motion, its strong and curved claws, and its little

inclination for flesh. Like the bears moreover, when much irritated it

supports itself on its hind feet, and exhibits in its arms and claws

weapons equally to be dreaded with its teeth ; in its flat and tubercular

molar tooth, its preference for vegetables and fruits, and its snout

apparently destined for digging, it deviates considerably from the bears,

-and may therefore be perhaps regarded as the extreme of the carnivora,

forming the connecting link in the series of affinities between these and

the omnivorous pachydermata; which M. F. Cuvier remarks are

separated from the elephants and horses, by such numerous and im-

portant characters as almost to tempt us to consider them as forming a

distinct order, more closely allied to the carnivora than they are gene-

rally assumed to be by systematic writers.

734 Note on a species of Arctonix from Arracan. [Auca.

Should the above detail of specific characters not exactly accord

with those of the specimen now exhibited, it may be owing to its being

a young animal in which the adult characters have not yet —-

sufficiently developed.

On looking over a file of unpublished papers transferred to the Phy-

sical Committee on its first formation I have found a manuscript

description dated February 1821, of two animals in the menagerie

at Burrackpoor, by the late M. DuvaAuceL, the first of which is *

evidently the animal above described by Dr. Evans. Mr. Kittor

has also discovered a drawing of the same animal in one of our port-

folios, whence I have had the accompanying lithograph executed. It is

called Ursus by DuvauceL.—J. P.

Notice, sur deux animaux du genre Ursus (LIN.) wivans a la

ménagerie de Barrackpoor, 1821.

La ménagerie de Barrackpoor s'est enrichie nouvellement de deux

mammiféres qui me paraissent n’avoir par encore été décrits, et qui sont

d'autant plus intéressans que l’un présente dans la disposition de ses

dents une anomalie caractéristique, et l'autre, un caractére impor-

tant qu’on n’a reconnue jusquici que dans des animaux originaires

d’ Amérique.

Le plus grand des deux porte & chaque machoire deux longues

canines et six incisives. Les incisives supérieures sont une fois aussi

longues que les inférieures et, parmi celles-ci, les deux moyennes

se trouvent notablement plus avancées que les autres.

Les mdlaires, au nombre de cing en haut et six en bas, paraissent

avoir une forme et une disposition semblables celles de l’ Ursus gulo,

(Lin).

Sa hauteur est d’environ 19 pouces: il a le port des ours, avec le

museau, les yeux, et la queue, des cochons. Ses oreilles sont courtes

et toutes velues ; ses pieds indiquent une marche plantigrade et ses cing

doigts, unis dams toute leur longueur, sont armés d’ongles vigoureux,

surtout aux pieds de devant ou ils ont plus d’un pouce de longueur.

Le poil du corps, rude, long et trés fourri augmente considerablement

son volume. Celui de la téte est court et serré. Le museau, couleur

de chair, est seulement garni de quelques soies sur les cotés, et le

ventre est presque ni.

Ce poil, d’un blanc jaunatre, avec le bout noir, donne au pelage entier

un reflet noirdtre qui varie quand l’animal se meut. La gorge est

jaune; et, sur les cotés de la téte, sont deux bandes noires qui

Jer. AS. $06.

Bs yp

1838. } Note on a species of Arctonix from Arracan. 735

sunissent vers le musean.. L’inférieure trés étroite borde la lévre

supérieure ; l’autre beaucoup plus large couvre |’ceil et va se perdre

derriére l’oreille largement bordée de blanc. |

Le poil qui couvre les membres est d’un noir pur et d’une nature

plus rude que celui des autres parties ; le blanc domine vers la partie

postérieure du dos; et la queue, longue d’envivon 9 pouces, est garnie

de longues soies blanches semblables 4 celles des cochons ordinaires.

La conformation extérieure de cet animal ne laisse aucun doute sur

le genre auquel il appartient; mais ses dents auraient besoin d’étre

soumises & un examen plus sévére que le mien pour fixer sa véritable

place dans les subdivisions rigoureuses établies par l’anatomie.

(Storr. Prodromus methodi Mammalium, 1780).

L’espéce avec la quelle il a le plus de ressemblance extérieure est le

glouton du nord, Rossomak des Russes ou ursus gulo de Linnxus ; et,

si je ne mesuis point trompé dans l’inspection de ses machoires, on doit

dautant mieux réunir ces deux animaux, que celui de Barrackpoor

porte aussi sous la queue, comme lI’ ursus gulo, une sorte de poche

formée par un large pli de la peau interfémorale.

Les meeurs de cet ursus paraissent ne différer en rien de celles dela

plupart des autres du méme genre: il passe une partie du jour dans

une somnolence profonde et prefére l’obscurité a la lumiére. Sa dé-

marche est lourde, lente et pénible; mais il se dresse avec facilité

sur ses pieds de derriére, se sert avec adresse de ceux de devant, et

trouve dans ses bras et ses ongles des armes non moius dangeureuses

que ses dents. ;

Ses dents peu tranchantes nécessitent un régime frugivore, et en

effet il préfére les végétaux @ la chair.

Quoique farouche et méchant, l’individu femelle vivant 3 Barrack-

poor fait croire, par son analogie avec l’ours ordinaire, que son espéce

est susceptible d’education et peut-étre serait-elle depuis longtems au

nombre des animaux domestiques, si sa grande ressemblance avec le

cochon, ne la faisait considérer ici comme une espéce immonde ?

La longueur et la mobilite de son museau indiquent l’habitude

de fouir et ses ongles vigoureux lui servent sans doute 4 creuser la

terre. Cette hypothése est d’autant mieux fondée que Vanimal, dans les

contrées ou il vit, est connu des natifs sous le nom de cochon de sable

_ (bali-souar).

736 Translation of a Copper Plate grant [Aue.

VII.— Translation of an Inscription on a Témba Patra found in the

Village of Piplhianagar, in the Shujalpur Pergana, and presented

to the Political Agent, Bhopal, by the Jagirdar. By L. Wit-

KInSsON, Esq. Pol. Agent.

[In a letter to the Editor. ]

I owe you many apologies for the delay which has transpired in for-

warding to you copies and translations of the three remaining Tamba

patras found at Piplianagar in 1836. I have now the pleasure to

forward a copy and translation of the oldest dated in Samvat 1235.

It seems to throw some doubt on the course of succession that

appeared to you to have been rendered plain and clear, for eight gene-

rations, by the inscription dated Samvat 1267 before submitted to you,

That inscription states that Jayavarma was succeeded on the gaddé

of Mandap (or Mandu) by his son VinDHYAVARMA, and he by

his son Amusnyd4yana and he again by Susmassvarma, and this

last raja by his son Arsuna; whilst this states that HariscHaNDRA

succeeded raja JayAvarma, and adds moreover in the last verse that

he was the son of LacsHMIVARMA.

This discrepancy may be reconciled by supposing that raja Haris-

CHANDRA was only a prince of the royal family and as such became

possessed of an appanage and not of the whole kingdom: and the faot

that Milagiri and not Mandap was his capital seems to confirm this —

supposition, supported as it also is by the title of Maha Kumdra or

prince given to him.

I was about to add translations also of the other two inscriptions:

but finding that they both correspond word for word with that formerly

sent to you in all respects but the dates—(which are later—the one

only by three and the other only by five years—than that of the former —

inscription )—and that they both record grants by the same raja AR-

JuNA, translations of them would be but an idle repetition. 1 enclose

however copies of both, which you may place on record, if you can afford

to spare a space for them in your journal.

Sehore, 27th August, 18388,

\ Stra ATA: |

Vata sarqqag | sata qwaamrar a: ware faut

at veal facet Sai qugtaigetata | % 1 |

1838.) found at Pipliénagar in 1836. 737

aay A Wes: Raa fast set | RITA AAa ESTA

atexaatayanr: | 2 |

ULAAZICAA VICI acisqgcayge BMiseqeaqierarayta

ULAASICAA CAILLAT E PACTS TT STAT ATT

HAZ CAA CCST SCITUL HAT AAU THe AMINA Wy AITA

MPCAALITATIAILA ACH AIIeT CAAA SAAT

Ar verareqafrsnifare: qaarwetaaa raga ete

aypiefatisaraeqaucsiesses: afecawsizarey

qofasiacaan daeusaais atatratteentaniatratars

aaaiaqeatiatas ve Prasanarearaars Fa

a: afafed var 2enft: sifaraaratdia (Ray cefrwefaa

siemmadaaernuitaumate waarat draaduata

Se CE ce CIPO COR REG ICE CC CCI Cie

atl faaaadt ufeua fafear aired Gael wUTaTAT WT

aa wattafd are afianfrrarastafafgeutad

Sassy frura afust fucfetadigquairesaaa

ART Cal MW AACA eet afeticanasafaaaayg

wat Grae fad waa) saw | aarafseafae seurty

wa masa ye TET: | Wargames aat

ACU UH! AAT ULAST TLATAATH a ti

xaaaasay | atafstmag qweiiass aaa

war fasscrm ufwafieauauiwacncunmd fafafeq

USHASIAARIUSIART 2

TU wad ufanelynerennadaacraurfaatieaifa

422

738 Translation of a Copper Plate grant [ Aue.

taateat wees fara ufeatqqaufiedataa

TAT AAAIAATAR 2

THYLE WAI eiynrara alsa gH AgAIAAH, TAATATIAR

faaiafaeiaasinaawaftuafanufefaa 3a

fofafeaaastata: agaaragatafafrauateas gage

faysramiquasiaasa: | aaraanfasaaaaearsaTat

yom: | aaa mafsafeorrinafammuransaota

TWA aa Aa AA CU feaAT Aa TIGA He GI AAT:

aqaaat MAAS Tas WaT fafa

— THAME UTE | aay asfasgar -

yet cate arerfehe | se ae wet lee TE ITT

wT RA | |

alsa ofanetie aq afl saefa 1 SAT ot GEAATAt

fart aaaifaat 4 2 |

TENA ST Arg acaread | ufacraw fasta aaa

Aq VLAT 3 | |

wut wefsat yadeafeuarae | aT TAaTAaTR iT

wafarstaa |e | |

exui weet I At eta aut | afeadaverat fas

ai aaa afar yy

eaan Wat yACURATS | WacAATATfa aaeTyA

aya ie

Sjurscfaarnfa wa patacadl || waTaya wat ete

arettaea: | © | |

atitecatft qaateernfa warcamecifa | fate

aifarfaattratts RraraEaTE: TATE |S I

1838. ] | found at Piphdanagar in 1836. 739

Bataart Bifat yeaa AAA Aas TATA | AT

AIT WR SaAsurat as ara wraaNat wale: ve

aemsat woustafaawat at uatfag carat afaation

ai F waa aayaadl g sat wecfeane facar

“aatta ire |

~e ° we ° ~ .

ratauquamaaasy | sta aacutsfrearsifsaaa

fianrasiifad a anafazaered wat ate Tea: qe

ataat FIAT: | % |

afa | SeUIsaeIHaeslaaawMcagaaeHaesiee

QRSITLALHFTRAIRAVAAE || SAT |

| SRIAC CATH ART |!

Translation.

[Glory be unto Sri GANESA.]

1. Happiness, victory and prosperity. Glory be to Siva, who

‘wears on his head the crescent moon as the seed whence this world

has sprouted forth.

2. May the tresses of Ka’mapEva’s enemy (Siva) ever afford to

us happiness and salvation; as they shine forth in splendour like the

lightning at the grand deluge.

3. The mighty king Maharaja Adhiraja Srr Uppyapitya was

succeeded by the mighty Mahara4ja Adhiraja Sri Nara VARMA

Deva, he by Sar Yasovarma Deva, and he again by Sri Jaya-

varma Deva; by the favor of this last mentioned raja, the learned

and accomplished Prince Sri Hariscuanpra Deva, received

dominion. He hereby from his capital of Nilagivi notifies to the

Government. officers, the inhabitants, the Patéls, brahmans and others

of the villages of Mamati, and Sawdard (or Palasawdrd) of the

Madiépadré pergunna, and be it accordingly known to you, that on the

occasion of the eclipse of the gun which has occurred in the new moon

r $3

;

Jas

740 Translation of a Copper Plate grant (Ave.

of Paushavadya of the Samvat year 1235 of Vixramanitya, he

after bathing in the sacred waters of the holy Narmadd, near the

temple of the four-faced MARKANDESVAR, and after duly robing

himself in white garments and making oblations of water to the gods

~and to his progenitors, and after offering due worship to the lord and

ruler of all animate and inanimate objects, and after sacrificing to the

sacred fire with the holy wood, kusha grass, sesamum seed, rice, &c,

as prescribed, walking thrice round the sacred cow, and performing

other purificatory ceremonies, has given away in gift 1000 cows.

Seeing moreover that there is no stability in the affairs of this world,

that they are more inconsistent than the water-drop trembling on the

lotus leaf, and that youth and wealth are of uncertain duration, as it

has been well observed, “ the kingdoms of this world are as inconstant

as the clouds agitated by the changeful winds, and all sensual pleasures

last but for the instant of enjoyment; the life of man is like the rain

drop depending from the point of a tremulous blade of grass; piety

alone will befriend a man in the life to come,”—I, duly reflecting on

these matters, have, with a view of adding to the merits and glory of

my mother and father and of myself, given to the learned brahman

DasarATHA, son of the learned SinpuHu of the Kdtydyana gotra

and of three Pravars, two shares -of the registered rents of the

village of Saward. ‘To the learned brahman Matvinu the son of the

learned Deu of the Pardsara gotra, and of three Pravars. I

moreover gave on the full moon of Vaisakha of the above mentioned

Samvat year 1235, the remaining share of the village, adding

to the shares of both customary dues from the bazar below the

Fort of Gunapura; the village of Suward thus divided into three

shares and calculated at 40 manis of seed grain as measured by the

kura of the Milagirt Mandala, together with all the trees grow-

ing therein and a right to all trove treasure that may be found, with

its clear defined boundary, and with all the Baolees, wells, and tanks

in the same, has by this deed been duly granted with ablutions of water.

Therefore let all the inhabitants of this village, the patel and others as

also the cultivators, submitting themselves'to the orders of ‘these two

pandits, pay unto them the whole produce of every due, rent, revenue

and money payment.

Let this my religious grant be duly observed and maintained by all

my descendants and also by all other future princes who may inherit

the land, reflecting that the merits of the gift will thus be duly shared

in by them whilst following this course.

1, The earth has been enjoyed in succession by many kings, by raja

1838. ] found at Piplidnagar in 1836, 741

Sacara and others. The reward of religious merit attaching to grants

of land is participated by all maintaining those grants inviolate.

2. He, who receives a grant of land and he who gives the same,

are alike meritorious and are certainly inheritors of the kingdom

of heaven. ,

3. O,Inpra! A gift of land is held to be complete in all its parts,

when accompanied by a conch shell, a seat of honor, a chhatra, a good

horse and a good carriage. They are the signs of a perfect gift which

is enjoyed when accompanied by these.

4. The fool, who yielding to the instigations of his evil passions,

resumes a grant of land or causes a grant to be resumed, will be bound

in the chains of Varuna, and in a future birth will be born a bird

or quadruped. |

5. He who resumes land given either by himself or others will -

become a vile worm creeping in ordure for sixty thousand years.

6. He who seizes a single gold coin, or a single cow or even a

finger’s breadth of land, goes assuredly to hell there to abide so long as

this creation shall last.

7. Gifts of cows, of land and of knowledge are called grand gifts ;

these purify to the seventh generation, by the milk, fruit, and informa-

tion they impart.

8. What man of virtue can be found so base as to resume the

grants of former rajas, who acquired thereby as well religious merit,

as their worldly desires and glory. Such resumption is as the return-

ing to a vomit, or the claiming of what has been once offered to a

deity.

9. RaAmacHanpra thus again and again calls upon all future rajas,

‘Bear steadfastly in mind, that the merit of maintaining, is equal to

that of making grants, that it will prove your eternal salvation ;” that

grants should therefore be, from generation to generation and at all

times preserved inviolate.

10. To all princes whether descended from me or from other

kings, who free from all sin, maintain the grants of land made by me,

inviolate, I humbly bow my head, and kiss their lotus feet.

Such are the sacred texts of Rishis rehearsed in order.

Let all men reflecting that prosperity and life are as uncertain as the

trembling waterdrop on the lotus leaf, bear these examples and warn-

ings in mind and forbear to impair the good names of others.

Given under the signature of the Prince Srr HariscHANDRA

Deva (son‘of the great Srt Lacsumtvarma Deva), who befriends

the Paramar (Ponwar) tribe as the sun befriends the lotus.

742 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ AuG.

I1X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, 5th September, 1838.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Sir Graves C. Havenrton, proposed by the Secretary in the Committee

of Papers was, upon their concurrent recommendation, elected an honorary

member of the Society.

Lieut. J. Duncan, Hoshangabad, was proposed as an ordinary member

by the Secretary, seconded by the President.

Mr. Joun Buackpury, assistant Editor of the Englishman, proposed by

Mr. Srocqueter, seconded by Babu Prosonocomar THakuR. |

Dr. Herrrr, M. D. was proposed by Mr. J. W. Grant, seconded by the

Secretary.

The Secretary reported that Mr. DeVinne, Financial Secretary, S. B. S.

had paid over Mr. Murrm’s donation of 1000 Sicca rupees, Co.’s Rs:

1,066 10 8.

A letter from Major Troyer forwarded through the Secretary at the

India house, the gold medal awarded to Mr. Honeson by the French

Asiatic Society.

Resolved to dispatch it with permission under Government frank to

Nepal.

Library.

The following books were presented :

The Muhawanso, in Roman characters, with a translation, and an Introducto-

ry Essay on Pali Buddhistical Literature, Ceylon, 1837, vol. the 1st—by the Honor-

able GEORGE TURNOUR, Esq. Ceylon Civil Service.

Rise and Progress of British Power in India. By PETER AvuBeEr, M.R.A. S.

London, 1837, vol. the 2nd—from the Honorable Court of Directors.

Debate in the House of Commons on the motion for ‘a select Committee to in-

quire into the allegations contained in the petition from Madras and Calcutta on

the subject of Act XI. of 1836.’—by ditto.

Illustrations of the History and Practices of the Thugs. London, 1837—/from ditto,

The George Namah of MuLLA FERUz BIN Kawas, chief priest of the Parsi kad-

mis of Bombay; (in Persian}, Bombay, 1837, 3 vols.—by MULLA Rustam Bin Kat-

KOBAD, nephew of the author and editor of the work.

Rules of the Bombay Geographical Society, instituted April, 1831. Bombay 1836.

The Proceedings of ditto, 1836-7—/from the G. Society,

i KitTor’s Illustrations of Indian Architecture, 1st Number—presented by the

uthor.

Astronomical observations at Madras (second copy) from Government through

Gen, Sir W. CASEMENT, Secretary in the Military Department.

Meteorological Register for July —from the Surveyor General.

Oriental Publications.

A letter from the Secretary to the Government of Bengal, dated 15th

August, intimated that the Honorable the Deputy Governor had sanc-

tioned a subscription for 40 copies of volume I. of Mr. Torrens’ translation

of the Alif Leila, at 8 rupees per copy.

With regard to Mr. Hopeson’s Nipal Zoology, the Deputy Governor

of Bengal was of opinion that as the work was to be published in England,

the application for patronage should be addressed to the Honorable Court

of Directors ; which was accordingly resolved to be done through Sir A.

Jounston, V. P. Roy. Asiatic Society. ae

The Secretary read the report of the special Committee on the expedi-

ency of publishing the Sariva Vidya, or rather the separate minutes of its

members in support of their former report.

Minute by Dewan Ram CoMUL SEN.

There are two questions before the Committee, the first is whether the HoOPER’S

Anatomist’s Vade Mecum should be printed in the Sanskrit or the vernacular lan-

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Socvety. 743

guage? and the second whether pubtications of similar works would be more useful

and would contribute more to the instruction of the people in a vernacular tongue

than in the Sanskrit.

With regard to the first my opinion is that the Vade Mecum should be published

in Sanskrit for the following reasons.

Ist. The work has already been translated into Sanskrit, and prepared for the

press, paid for by the Education Committee, and 32 pages have already been printed.

2ndly. This is one of the works transferred to the Asiatic Society, which has

engaged to complete it.

3rdly. When the Asiatic Society applied for aid from Government to finish the

work, it never had it in contemplation to publish it in the vernacular language.

4thly. The Sankrit is read in several parts of India, where there are many thou-

sand Vaidyas practising in medicine, a considerable portion of whom are versed in

Sanskrit, and who will find the work useful and read it to help themselves in becom-

ing acquainted with the European system of Anatomy.

5thly. Until the natives are put in possession of the means of learning this sys-

tem through the language they are familiar with, it will never be successfally

cultivated among them, and it is believed that this work with plates and illustrations

if rendered into Sanskrit will be a preparatory step towards the accomplishment of

that object.

6thly. The learned and scientific class of the people of India has a prejudice

against the vernacular tongue, through the medium of which they cannot be easily

induced to learn a foreign science, however beneficial and instructive it may be,

7thly. Mr. Muir, has made an offer of one thousand rupees for the work, on con-

dition that it should be published in Sanskrit : from this it appears that he must have

ascertained the feeling and opinion of the people for whom the work is intended.

Sthly. The work will be useful to the cause of education and read with success

by the Sanskrit classes in the public Colleges of Calcutta, Benares, Agraand Delhi,

where there are still several hundred young men, studying Sanskrit. To these students

it will be a valuable acquisition, as it will greatly help them in learning the system

of Anatomy. .

9thly. Mopoosoopon Goopta, who has translated the work appears to be very

anxious that his labor should not be lost tohis countrymen. ‘This is I believe the

first medical work that has ever been translated from English into Sanskrit, and if

the wish of the translator is not realized, it will in future deter others from similar

attempts, and at the same time damp the spirits of enterprizing men desirous of

undertaking works of a similar nature.

10thly. The Missionaries of Serampore published some time ago a complete

system of Anatomy called Vidya H4r.cbuli in the Bengali language, but for the

reasons stated in Para. 6th, it has met with avery indifferent reception. The

work did not sell even to so much as to exonerate the publishers from the printing

charges.

With regard to the 2nd question, I think the fund at the disposal of the Asiatic

Society should not be confined to the publication of works of one particular lan-

guage or subject, but its benefit ought to be held out for the encouragement of

the Jearned natives, and the preservation and cultivation of the languages of Asia of

which Sanskrit and Arabic are the two most learned in Hindustan, and translations

from European science in these languages would be desirable,

Books calculated for school purposes printed in the vernacular tongues, used in

different parts of the country no doubt will prove more useful than Sanskrit or Arabic,

and conduce more to the instruction and improvement of the natives. If they are ina

form and of a nature suitable to their taste, and capacity and state of reading amongst

them and the state of society.

As for the term vernacular language, I do not understand what is meant by it.

If itis meant to be Bengali it is understood by the people inhabiting the coun-

try which comprehends Rajmehal, Orissa, Chittagong, Assam and Mithila. But a

considerable portion of the language is intermixed with Sanskrit, and when a work

written in that language is of a scientific character, it must require a pandit to ex-

plain its meaning. If it is meant to be Hindi a term by which languages spoken

in Behar, Lucknow, and Agra is called; it must come under the head of Urdu,

Hind, or Hindui.

The Hindi which is a degeneration of words derived principally from the ver-

nacular language*, is very poor and incapable of interpreting any difficult and scien-

* By Hindi is meant the vernacular written in Nagari, which differs 30 far from

the Persian-written Urdu that its reading is confined nearly to Hindus ; and abstract

terms borrowed from Sanskrit or rather Prdékrié will in it take the place of the Arabic

DSA

744 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ AuG.

tific subject, without borrowing a considerable portion of words from Urdu, two-

thirds of which consists of Arabic and Persian words.

The state of literature in those parts of the country where these languages are

spoken is not yet such, as to be expected that the people would derive much benefit

from books similar to the medical vade mecum, The great mass of the people can-

not read works like these with proportionate benefit without a previous acquirement

or knowledge in the Sanskrit, Persian or Arabic language. But a vernacular version

from such works may be useful and prove advantageous only in colleges where

medical science is taught; but it will be necessary for the aid of the munshi ora

pandit to learn it.

RAM CoOMUL SEN.

13th August, 1838.

Minute by Dr. N. WALLICH.

T am clearly of opinion that there ought to be correct versions in the two classi-

cal languages of the East, of at least the elementary works in sciences ; were it only

for the purpose of fixing the nomenclature on some sort of sound basis. Speaking

of Sanskrita, I believe Iam right in asserting, that the language is understood

to be fully capable of expressing or rendering every possible term of science, that ©

has any meaning at all. I therefore adhere to the opinion already expressed by our

Committee that MADHUSUDAN’S translation should be published in the manner

we have recommended.

With regard to versions of works of this nature into the vernacular languages, I

cannot help considering the matter as being of such obvious importance as scarcely to

admit of a question or a doubt. But still I would say let us have accurate Sanskrita

translations in the first instance ; it will then be safe—I had almost said possible

to have accurateversions in Bengali,—for I presume that is the vernacular language

to which Mr. PRINSEP alludes.

With every deference to Dewan RAM CoMUL SEN’S opinion, coming as it does

from a first-rate Sanskrita scholar (the only Sanskrit scholar among us) and author

of one of the best English and Bengali Dictionaries extant, I must suppose, that the

reason alleged for the Vidya-hara-buli not being much used is not the only, per-

haps not the chief one.

N. WALLICH.

Minute by Dr. H. H. Spry.

Dewan RAM CoMUL SEN’s reasons are [ think all cogent ; and being at this mo-

ment engaged in a statistical investigation into the state of education in Hindustan

I can show by the aid of figures that there are only two languages known in Hindus-

tan through the instrumentality of which the translation of any work of European

science can hope for success. Learning, as all must know, is in this country, limited

by the peculiar grade in which the individual happens to be born, and there is in

consequence, no mutual connection between the vernacular and learned schools. Boys

in this country do not go first to the preparatory school or academy and afterwards

to the college, but these institutions are two separate schools, each existing fora

perfectly distinct class of Society—the one for the trading and agricultural commu-

nity, and the other for the religious and learned classes. {Indeed so carefully is this

distinction observed by the Hindu population that the children of the latter class are

seldom, if ever, permitted to attend the village vernacular school, but such prepara-

tory instruction as is requisite, before sitting down to Sanskrita, is-given under the

parent’s own roof. Again, the Hindu vernacular schools never profess to afford iu-

struction beyond the mere knowledge of keeping accounts accurately, while the

masters themselves are more than half (221) of the inferior (Kayastha) or writer

caste ; and what is still more to the point there are in Lower Hindustan alone no

fewer than five distinct vernacular dialects—viz. Bengali, Hindi, Uriya, Trihutiya,

and Persian with Urdu. In Behar and Shahabad the second of these tongues is

in general use, but it differs very much from the Hindi of Patna, while the Maro-

wars speak a dialect of the Hindi language not less different from that of Patna

than the dialect of Bhojpur is, and with the Musalmans, Persian instruction is the

only substitute for vernacular instruction except in cases in which Mussalmans

resort to Bengali and Hindi schools ; and although the Hindustani or Urdu is the

current spoken language of the educated Musalmans of Hindustan, it is a remark-

able feature in the constitution of Muhammadan Society in Behar and Bengal that

itis only known colloquially ;—it is never employed in their schools but to give oral

instruction in Arabic. In a total of 1459 vernacular schools in Lower Hindustan,

or Persian terms so abundantly introduced in the other by its Musulman penmen or

by Hindu writers bred up in the atmosphere of a Muhammadan court, or of the courts

of justice hitherto conducted in Persian,—Ep.

1838. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 745

968 are without any written books of instruction of any kind,—the ultimate object

of this species of instruction being to teach accounts. To render a scientific book

such as HoopPEerR’s Vade Mecum into one or all (and if vernacular be adopted all will

claim alike) of these vernacular dialects would therefore be a waste of time and

money.

On the other hand, although it be true that Sanskrita is open to a certain extent

to all classes of native society, yet in reality it is exclusively confined to the brah-

ming, and is essentially the language of Hindu learning ; for it was found, that, in

the whole extent of the country visited by the late survey, as well as that made

known to us by Dr. HAMILTON, that with the exception of five physicians the San-

skrit teaching was a brahminical monopoly; while out of a class of 153 students in

the Moorshedabad District, one only was a Kayastha,—of 393 in Beerbhoom only nine

were of the Vaidya or medical caste ;—three of the Vaishnava or followers of the

Chaitanya and one a Daivagna or outcast Brahmin ; in Burdwar out of 1358 students

45 were Vaidyas, 11 Daivagnas, six Vaishnavas, making a total of 76 while ail the

rest were brahmins. My opinion therefore is that until English Normal Schools of

learning can be sufficiently established whereby the young men of this country can

study the science and literature of England in its original form, all works partaking

of the character of the one now under discussion should be rendered into the two

learned oriental languages, viz. Sanskrita and Perso-Arabic, and that translations

for the use of the vernacular schosls should be confined to books fitted to the wants

of the class of boys who frequent these seminaries,

Henry H. Spry, M.D.

Minute by Professor O’ SHAUGHNESSY.

1 think a small portion of the funds of the Asiatic Society may be advantageously

devoted to the publication of the Sanskrita version by MADHUSUDANA GupPTA of

Hooper's Vade Mecum, improved and amended, as formerly suggested. The trans-

lation is ready and only requires illustrations and a few additions,—it is paid for—

Mr. Muvrre’s munificent donation applies only toa Sanskrita volume—there exists

a large class of individuals learned in that tongue who are represented by the Dewan

Ram CoMvtL SEN as ready to read the proposed work. ‘These facts appear to me

sufficient to warrant our applying the funds of the Society in the proposed manner.

Had not aversion of Hoorek’s work heen already made and paid for I would

much prefer one of Dr. SoutHwoop SmitTH’s ‘ Philosophy of health,’’ the most

interesting, intelligible and instructive popular work on physiology, which has

ever been published. Its illustrations are admirable, its size duodecimo. The

work was published in 1837 in order to communicate to the educated classes in

England, as much knowledge of the Science of medicine as would enable them to see

through the impostures of the Morisons and St. Joun LonGs. I have no doubt

but that it would be studied with avidity by the Sanskrita scholars of India; and

that the powerful though simple reasoning which pervades its pages, would force

true knowledge on many a mind.

_ A work on pure anatomy cannot be so useful, especially to the hereditary physi-

cians of the Sanskrit a School, inasmuch as they will not have recourse to the

practical anatomical studies, which alone can render the volume instructive to any

material degree. The proposed illustrations will lend, however, a little intelligibility

to the work, and for this little I am willing that the proposed expenditure be made.

As a complete work on anatomy already exists in Bengali, the question of

publishing Hoorer’s ‘‘ Vade Mecum”’ in that language instead of Sanskrita is of

course setaside. And Ido not agree with the Dewan RAM COMUL SEN as to the

causes of the Vidya Hara boli having proved unsaleable. I think it was simply

because no medical school taught in the Bengali language, was in existence. When

secondary classes spring up, as please God they soon will, in which our normal

pupils will spread the instruction we are now imparting to them, through the Eng-

lish language, then the Vidya Hara boli will be of inestimable advantage. I would

respectiully suggest to the Society, as a measure worthy of their attention that they

secure the preservation of the remaining copies of this work in anticipation of the

rapidly approaching period when they will be rendered available.

With reference to a version of this or any similar work in Urdu, I do not think

it at present required, because there is no class of students prepared to profit by

it. A class, | trust, will soon be formed, and then the advantages of such a version

will assume a practical shape, intelligible even to my good friends on the sub-com-

mittee, who affect to doubt the existence of the Hindustani language. They ought

on precisely equivalent reasons to deny the entity of the English tongue, and pro-

o.m- a

746 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Aue.

pose that all our schoolboys should receive the rudiments of knowledge from the

unadulterated sources of the Celtic or the Norse.

As to the aid derivable from Sanskrita in the versions of technical terms there is

much more unanimity among all parties than they are themselves aware of. Our

friend Ram Comut, if called on to translate the ‘‘membrane’’ of ‘‘ JACOB” or

the ‘‘ Eustachian’’ ‘‘ tube,’’ would leave the proper names as they stand and adopt

the equivalent term to be found in every language for the thing denoted. If speak-

ing of ‘‘ Oxygen’’ which was baptized before its properties were investigated, and

the meaning of the name of which is now known to give an erroneous notion of its

nature, in such a case instead of multiplying error by translating the name I pre-

sume RAM COMUL SEN would transfer the word as a conventional term. Look at

‘‘ Narcotine’’ so called because its discoverer fancied it was the narcotine principle

of opium. We now find that it possesses no such properties, but is a powerful

febrifuge, like quinine; what will Ram CoMuL SEN propose in such a case ?—of

course not to trunslate the name but to ¢ransfer it as it stands.

The illustrations of whatever work may be decided on may be obtained very cheap-

ly and quickly by application to Professor QUAIN, Mr. PAxTon or Dr. SMITH.

These gentlemen of course preserve the blocks, and I am convinced will gladly permit

the required copies of the plates to be struck therefrom, for publication in the

oriental languages, on being requested to do so by this Society.

W. B. O'SHAUGHNESSY.

30th August, 1838.

Minute by G. Evans, Esq.

The very limited acquaintance with the languages and literature of India which I

possess, renders it a matter of some difficulty for me to offer an opinion upon a

question on which I am far from being qualified to decide, and regarding which there

also appears to be some diversity of seitiment.

The advancement and diffusion of medical and other European knowledge amongst

all grades and conditions of the natives of India, are unquestionably objects of para-

mount importance, such indeed as merit the serious consideration of every enlighten-

edand well disposed mind : it becomes therefore a matter of great moment to deter-

mine on the means best calculated to ensure their most extensive and permanent suc-

cess, not only in medicine, but in every branch of science, and it is to these consi-

derations that our endeavours, unbiassed by favorite pursuits, should be mainly

directed.

Sanskrit is the fundamental, and one of the classic languages of the east, and as

such its study should be scrupulously upheld and warmly advocated by all who take

an interest in the affairs and polity of the vast empire over which we rule and preside.

The question the Committee is called on to express its unqualified sentiments

upon, is whether the medical work, selected for publication in one of the native

languages, should be translated into the Sanskrit, or into the vernacular tongue.

The arguments advanced against the latter by Dewan RAM COMUL SEN, coming as

they de from a learned Sanskrit scholar, demand every consideration; many of his

objections do not admit of denial, but I think they ought at the same time to be

received with certain limitations. The fittest medium for the diffusion of medical

iustruction, in my humble opinion, appears to be the Urdu, a language compound.

ed of Sanskrit, Bengali, Persian, Arabic, Hindi and into which English itself has

now been introduced,—printed in this language, the instruction intended to be con-

veyed, would at ouce become accessible to all classes of natives, which I opine is

the grand object in view, whereas, if alone confined to the Sanskrit, the work would

be useful only to Sanskrit scholars and the knowledge that it must impart, would in

reality be merely a monopoly in the hands of a few pandits to the total exclusion of

the less learned though not less indifferent inquirers after knowledge. With this

impression I would therefore suggest the propriety of selecting in the first instance,

the Urdu, and as time, talent and money have already been spent on a translation

into Sanskrit, and there is a further provision in the liberal gift of Mr. Murr, for

the specific purpose of publication in the Sanskrit, I would further recommend that

ve original design be implicitly acted up to by having a translation also into that

anguage.

August 31st. GEO, EVANS,

(Dr. EGERTON had not recorded his opinion. ]

The PresipENY explained to those of the numerous members, who' had not

attended at the last meeting how the question had come to be referred back to the

Committee. Their present minutes unanimously confirmed their first report recom-

nending the publication, and it appeared only necessary to put it to the Societe

vhether the report should be adopted and carried into effect, or otherwise.

8 ln

#25 c

——- -

1838. ] Proceedings of the ‘siatic Society. 747

Bab Prosonno ComAR TAGORE adverted to the condition on which the books

had been transferred to the Society, and proposed, seconded by Mr. CRACROFT:

‘ That, as it appears that by the letter of Government the Society are

bound to publish all works handed to them for publication, no discretion

is left to us in the matter, and the publication of the work should therefore

be proceeded with.”

The Secretary explained that although the general object of the transfer of the

books was their publication, yet no obligation was implied, inasmuch as some of

them (Dr. TyTLER’s translations for instance) could not now be completed.

Mr. G. A. PrinsEP, proposed an amendment, seconded by Col. McLrop, which

was carried by a large majority :—

“ That this Society approve the report of the Select Committee, dated

31st July, 1838, confirmed by the minutes just read, and proceed to act

thereon.”

The following letter was read from Mr. J. C. C. SurHersanpn, Secretary

to the Committee of Public Instruction, announcing a prize of 100 rupees

offered by Mr. J. Murr, for a Sanskrit metrical essay, ‘ On the divine power,

wisdom and goodness as exhibited in the creation.’

To J. PrinsEpP, Esq., Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Sir,

Mr. Murr has sent to the General Committee one hundred rupees (Co.’s Rs. 100)

as a prize for the best metrical essay ‘‘ On the divine power, wisdom and goodness, |

as exhibited in the creation.’’ It is subject to these conditions.

Ist. Competitors are to be the Professors and pandits of the Calcutta Sanskrit

College, Benares Sanskrit College, Agra College, Delhi College, Bishop’s College

and Asiatic Society.

2nd. The number of slokas is to be about 100.

3rd. The measure is to be one of the following metres, Indravajra and Upajati.

4th. The illustrations are to be derived from European systems of science, many

hints of which are contained in the Padartha Vidyasara of which copy is enclosed.

I am, &e.

Fort William, August 4, 1838. J. C. C. SuTHERLAND,

Secretary to G. C. P. f.

The Secretary reported that he had had the letter translated into Sanskrit and

placed (along with Mr. Yares’ ‘ Paddrtha Vidyasdra’) in the hands of the three

pandits connected with the society who were eager to compete for the prize.

Extract of a letter (received overland) from the Baron Von HaMMeR

Punesraun forwarded a translation of the first chapter of the Mohit, of

which other chapters have been published in the Society’s Journal.

[This communication will appear in the ensuing number. |

Mr. Secretary McNaguren, forwarded from Simla the official copy of

the Girnar inscription communicated by Lieut. Posrans to the Bombay

Government.

A second parcel of Sanskrit and Arabic inscriptions were received from

Capt. T. S. Bur, with a manuscript journal of his overland trip to India.

Capt. Auex. Burnes forwarded from Simla a drawing, by a lady, of the

bronze relievo discovered by Dr. Lorn, at Budakshdn, representing ‘ the

triumph of Baccuvs.’

The original is on its way to Calcutta in charge of Dr. MAcueop, eventually

destined along with Dr. Lorp’s coins to be deposited in the british Museum ;

otherwise we should have hastened to present a lithograph of the beautiful drawing,

which we doubt not isa most faithful representation of the original. BaccHus

and one of his attendants have lost their heads. but all that remains is decidedlv

of Grecian workinanship.

748 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | Aue.

PHYSICAL DEPARTMENT.

Tides.

Mr. P. AnstrutuER, Col. Secretary in. Ceylon, transmitted a further

series of tidal observations at Matura, Belligaun, Devendra, and Gandurak

for April, May, and June, 1838.

Observations from Singapore were also received from Capt. Scorr, who

had incurred an expense of Rs. 65.

Mr. Biunpett had expended at Mergui, Tavoy and Amherst Rs. 258.

The Secretary proposed mentioning this expenditure to Government in sending

up the registers, having no doubt that the sums would be at once paid.

Natural History.

Dr. McCievuanp presented a paper on Indian Cyprinidae, with proofs of

13 (out of 15) plates already lithographed in illustration of his synopsis,

which would be available for the Researches, should the Society think fit

to honor the paper by publication.

Resolved, after thanks to Dr. McCientnanp, that the paper should be

immediately submitted to the Committee of Papers.

Read a letter from M.Srerano Mornicanp, Secretary, Academy's Muse-

um Geneva, proposing exchanges of shells, insects, mammalia, and dried

plants with the Society orwith individual collectors ; his own exchanges may

include all the above objects from Brasil or Bahia, as well as from Europe.

A specimen of the rock from the summit of Peterbot (a voleanic breccia)

and a plant which grows thereon, were presented by Capt. J. A. Crome.

LIN, Engineers, who lately performed the feat of ascending it, in company

with a friend, and a Madagascar apprentice.

An animal of the Arctonix genus obtained from a hill chief in the interior

of the Avracan province, was presented by Capt. Paterson, commanding

the Irishna. A note by the Curator on the same was read.

[Printed in the present number, with M, DuVAUCEL’S original notice on a similar

animal formerly at Barrackpoor. | ;

A note on the New Zealand caterpillar lately presented by Major

GrReEcGorY.

[This will be printed in the ensuing number. ]

The following articles were presented for the museum.

Stuffed and mounted specimen of a variety of the Hylobates Lar or Less.

er Gibbon, presented by Lieut. Murrson Buaxe and differing in some re.

spects from the H. Lar or Black Gibbon in the Society’s museum, with

which it is contrasted.

Stomach of the same animal ; simple in its structure, lengthened in form,

and very muscular at its pylonic extremity.

Coecum of the same ; differing slightly from that of the human subject,

the Simia Satyrus, and Semnopithecus Entellus in having the vermiform

appendix attached to the centre of the round end of the viscus ; whereas

in all the above named it has a lateral sit uation.

Uterus from the same subject ; in an undeveloped state consequent 0

the non-age of the animal. .

Digestive apparatus of several different descriptions and orders of birds

preserved in spirits of wine with a view to determine by their internal

anatomy in conjunction with their external characters, their natural affi-

nities, and relations with each other—the only sure road to a true and

correct systematic arrangement.

‘The name of each bird is labelled on the bottle and the peculiarities

observable in the structure and disposition of the digestive organs are

noted down in the descriptive catalogue of the museum,

1838. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 749

Specimens of two species of land shells, the “ Bulimus” ? No. 5, and

Pupa No. 8, described by Lieut. Hurron in his paper on the land shells

of India. (See 3rd Vol. Society's Journal).

They are found living in company with each other precisely as stated by Lieut.

H. though in very unequal proportions, the Pupa being about 1 to 50 or even 100

of the other ; from which they are easily distinguished by their beautiful scarlet

color, each individual looking like a single bead of long seed coral. It is an

elegant little animal, and with its shell is a fine object for microscopic examination.

They are common in the gardens and moist grounds of Calcutta during the rainy

season, living generally under rotten vegetation where they feed secure from the

sun’s scorching rays. They are evidently ovipareus, as the eggs can be distinctly

seen through the diaphonous shell and are also found scattered upon the surface

of the earth.

The following letter from Capt. Pemperron was read, and the collection

alluded to was spread out on the table for the inspection of members.

To J. Prinser, Esq., Secretary to the Asiati¢ Society.

SIR,

Under instructions from Government I have the honor to present to the Asiatic

Society a selection consisting of 145 prepared specimens of birds from the ornitholo-

gical collections of the Bootan Mission.

IT have, &c.

Calcutta, R. BorLEAU PEMBERTON, Capt.

Sept. 5th, 1838. Envoy to Bootan.

Dr. Hetrer, employed by Government to explore the natural produc.

tions of the Tenasserim provinces, had arranged around the hall and stair.

case a part of the very extensive ornithological collection he had brought

up from Maulmain, concerning the disposal of which he awaited the orders

of Government.

He had prepared a note on the animal productions of the Tenasserim provinces,

but on account of the lateness of the hour the President requested him to postpone

the reading until next meeting.

Statistical Committee.

Dr. Spry, submitted his report, embodying the various tables he had

produced at the last meeting.

The report commenced by quoting the instructions of Government to Dr. Bucua-

NAN, (printed in the Statistics of Dinajpur, Appendix [. to J. A. S.) in illustration

of the Committee’s objects. The results hitherto obtained are summed up in the

closing paragraph.

‘One of the first attempts of your Committee has been to obtain possession of

some of the numerous recorded documents and reports: and your Committee have

now the satisfaction of stating that they have collected and arranged for immediate

publication, partly from these sources, Tables bearing on the vital statistics of Cal-

cutta ; the education of the people of Lower Hindustan ; and the commerce and in-

dustry of the country ; making a total of forty tables. These your Committee con-

sider will be sufficient to supply materials for a first number of a series of proceed -

ings, and they hope thus to bring ‘farward from time to time a series of numbers,

that shall contain a mass of useful and practical knowledge. Your Committee desire

however to be guarded in their professions at the outset of their undertaking, and

not to be understood as attempting more than is feasible, or presuming to grapple

with more than may be considered fairly within their power. In conclusion your

Committee trust that the language of the French Government, when addressing its

diplomatic and consular agents, quoted by M. Hemso in his Theorie de la Statistique,

page 78, may always be borne in mind when application is made to their labors,

namely ‘that a result of two lines will sometimes cost a month of toil, but that

these two lines are a truth, and every truth is an everlasting contribution to hu-

manity,’ ”’

HENRY HARpuwR Spry,

13th August, 1838. Hon, Sec. Statistical Committee.

Resolved, that the report and tables be immediately made over to the

Committee of Papers to decide on the propriety and onthe manner of

their publication.

X.—Meteorological Register.

urer yonu

“Ay und *I19} Zia +s 9959 /69°0

‘op Zia 0 €e‘0

‘yp ‘Arysop| Za *u E30

4s ° 2p! Z\°o *U,

“App ‘urer | 21M ‘S|F6°0

*S*pnas “1S ‘d} [}"o "UGE

‘110 ‘und | J/'a °s!

"Op W3S M19] 1/'9 0. FF,

"qui 2p “Op! ZI"9 “S|

*Aramoys'op| Z\'9 °S'60'0

op za

‘IquUu Op | EAA *S)

Syearyy Apps} 1] °S

“Op €|'9 *S'6¢‘0 090

“ured gM ‘S 6L°0)6

"Um 3S 91-2) *S |90‘0)

“Ap? ‘uler | T] “AA /60‘T

‘ured “py “Op! G}°M “SS

‘Apnop | T]"8 “S| FPO!

‘auy ‘wind; Z| “S \21‘o éL‘0

‘Iqulit ‘op | Zj"a °*SiF0‘o, F0'0

"UL “TIS "APIO Fla = °Slec’s,

SUZZIIp op|Fo|'e *s99‘0

“Aiamoys'op| €]°9 'S

‘Apjo ‘iquitu] 1|°9 *s/Z9°0

‘4s ‘WUNd Op} Gj'9 *S

*ye1}s auy | Z| “Ss

‘o Aep yeeusl ola 'S|tFO,

‘ys'UINI=D'Op! G|"A °S

[lye -mys-ul F/-q "N'E9‘0 ps*o

"eu 398 °o| FAN |

re (el eo ee

ae “jar eesie s

Ce Bae

g, ‘purm | &

“1929 M

—

*Is}aUIOAD

-AW I

ee ———— |

*UOISUd}

snosnby

—— ff}, ——_——_

n~ Lal

SO aD OD DS AD De POD BO ON ONO HD OD 2a HD OID OD OH OD 1

a“

a as

Coens

NOM DO 29 V0 10 19 OD Pe A BH 2 10 | LO OH OD

DNSSHADBDSSANNOAND Ow we

a nN sn

sn wa

a“

Cee

Cmts

“~

CO Wee ee

Cor eee ee

a aa

SO TAD OD LO Pw OD

na A

en ee ee

DMO AOAONAMONSSOAODMRSEANRMSAAArARTAS

CIN mA HOO

"UIT,

quarayid

zH Aq

*7a}aUL

-O1SAH AEH

“A1N4-32 AA

“uOIssaIdacy

-oumoigA HY

‘W ‘d 7 UOOWIaISy

o*c9 teers

L\s‘gsforp‘es Lap‘6e

€°cg feees

1°98

8° Lg:

6°€8

€‘88

+‘68

1°06

g°S3

c'cg

¢°98

‘cg

C°E8

L‘98

‘lg

6°88

609

LCR

0‘98

9°98

F‘E3

\€°S8

9°F8

1°23

6°88

T ‘68

e'hs

—_—_—

sainqed

-3d me J,

ece*

‘SNPS

rTOps

Ger <

GOP.

esr’

orgs

6L¢.

sic’

899.

29V.

16%*

aBr*

aor"

ohe*

ole.

gIre

rere

cog‘

gles

cep‘

FcoP*

esp

cogs

gsr’

605°

(98 forre

1‘L8 fose*

ee STEb 66S

—_——

‘aInssold

day dsoulyy

“puxis plo!

|*WOIV MAN

*IojowWoIeEYg

‘azey = Apo} 2|"A *S

ulei*snquim) ¢|*q ‘oO

‘IquItt 2°Op) €}°9 °N

‘AY ys *uind| z]*a ‘Ss

‘op T|'9 = °s

“urns og} ‘0

“TQuUU e|°M °S

‘ou TyNuIND| y]°m *S

‘Um “4S °0] ef-a °S

‘op BOs

‘AY'uIMd *t1o} e]°Aa °S

‘Apnopa ‘op { g} °S

‘ou ‘snyerys} J]°O 8S

‘I(UITU Op] Zi*a =—°S

“AY ‘ys ulna! Zl‘a *S

‘urexr yonu| F] °S

“AY ‘3S ‘uind} ZI)“ AA ON

op ola °o

‘op *TnwWNd) GM °S

‘aug ‘yeuys} TO °S

‘I pop}yas zp} Z|°9 °$S

‘azey ‘IqUuIIU] [|"d "s

op GA °S

op 6a °S

‘Ay ‘op ‘op T\'a °N

‘Tquiu *Op | 1} °S

‘Op HOP | GA °S

“IQUIIU 2 OP] Ga *s

“AY "4S *uIMd ola *U

‘auy uns | 3) °q

ne o 2.¥

es a on

= 3 o| °s

ct i

& “PUT AN

*IAUIVAM

* JaVaWI0IS

-AyW areyy Aq

| $8

¥8

saosnby

“*yayaut013

-AH

02 | 84 1 6 | ae

¥6

£6

«Arjoun01sA Fy

”~

Cee ery

aA mn ow

”

na A mA ow

HD AD OD LD NOD OD Ha 1 1 ag

SHH HD 19 a © 6 2 Pw SQ

ANASHANODI~wAMN

n”

a”

HOD 20 8 SH tH OD

RONDA

AS HOSMOOMABDANHA CHARAN AE

a”

$909 1919 1 Haid

SiroFanrnncoe

INO Pa a x th CON

uorsseidaq

*ULIST J,

[enussayiq

Inq: 394A

9b |P°ZL\0°8| 1

*€3/S°S8 ZES°6a|SL¢ 63) “WeaT]

0'8Z/6°F8 Trs* ores

8°ZL16°o8 iter’ |Zors

e‘LZL8°S8 13°88 0°98 cLe | 8a’

0.98 iges*® jegs*

02,8 ‘98 Fes |68g°

6916 <L8 1rg® §=|Zie°

8°82 E°L8 lacs §=|009*

0‘92'0'98 :609* 10g‘

€°9/\0°98'F 588 L548 £69" 899°

08/198, | .es9% jo69*

PpOLie rs Tes, '6°og 966° ees

L91/6°F81668 pcg oS lols‘

oszio%s| | Gest |aee®

0°22 :0'98'9°E8 2°98" LLgt F6c*

0°8Z| 1°S8\6°€8 8°98 66ES 0¢9°

BeL\L°o8) | loges es‘

9 LL¢°€8/ T'S8ie #8 GZS | TTS*

0°8212°E8 losps jgos’

bol g<ce F6rS |KegS

Oo 0'F3 regs j14¢°

6'82/6°T80°E8 E568 98FS |sIS*

6'8L' FE8 | ea Lor’

8°8/\T°98|G ‘G8 8°98 Beo° FESS

g°6'r‘oa| | tgn9¢ jr 9"

6°82,9°92/6°E8'G°93 Te9* = |z99*

gill 9'¢8 (pegs |¢zg*

0°82 Beg 6°28 6°68 BLE. {819%

0's cfc c°e8 g'F8 QIes |tess

e'/1 €°98 TE8 1°98 PERS | 96hS

0°22) 1598 6538. ‘98 eB 16¢°66 09S “66

eo)

Sans = = se Et z Wie

i io) we |

pian ee Ne | Be

S = < = °o @ 8

* i

2 oinssaidg

ainjeiedwe L Roe

“WW °V QT ‘UoouUsIO,,

‘ge91 ‘ysnhnp fo yjuopy ay) Lof ‘njjnajv9 ‘ao hvssp ayy yn yday ‘sagsibaxy n0160]0.L00I0 AT

“SOUT 18-6 Oq [ITM 2194) [BJ ONY ayy ‘foo. ay? UO UII Jo JUNOW oY} WOIZ *JUI9 Jed Z Suryej—: sosnvs-uwies 9q} OF [9S soydde yUOUt 4sv] Jo yxeUIEX ouL

‘A[YS9 16°6|66°6] F8 | 92

té

0€

cé

“yuo 24) JO Avg

JOURNAL

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

No. 81.—September, 1838.

I.—Botanico-Agricultural account of the protected Sikh States. By

M. P. Epcewortu, F’sq., C. S. Masuri.

The extensive territory under the Ambala political agency comprises

the hill states of Sirmur, Kahlur, and a portion of the plains princi-

pally possessed by Sikh chiefs, bounded by the above states to the

north-east, the Sutle? to the north and north-west, the Jumna to the

east, and the Delhi territory and Bhatiana to the south.

It is not my intention to treat of the hill Rajpoot principalities, as I

am only very partially acquainted with but one of them (Sirmur) ; but

solely of the “ protected Sikh states” in the plains.

This tract of country may be divided into three great divisions,

besides the narrow strip of Ahddir land adjoining the Jumna and

_ Sutlej according to their most abundant natural products, viz., the dakh

the babul and the phalahi.

I. The first of these, or dakh tract, extends from the high bank

above the Jumna, which in most places adjoins the Shah Nahr to the

Linda river, a small stream not noted in the exceedingly inaccurate

maps* of this part of the country, which runs nearly parallel with the

Markhanda at a distance of two to five miles from it, and ultimately

unites with the Sarasvati alittle below Thanesar. This tract of coun-

try is generally high and called bangar, which term however is more

universally applied to the southern extremity, and not commonly to the

* 1 allude to the large maps published under the style of ‘ Trigonome-

trical survey,’ though this part of the country has never been surveyed trigono-

metrically or otherwise ; to give an instance, Kotaha or Syyed ka garhi, is divided

into three places, viz, Kotaha or Syyed, and ka garhi!!! at a considerable distance

one from the other,

752 Botanico-Agricultural account [ SEPT.

more northern and narrow part except in contra-distinction to the khd-

dir in the immediate neighbourhood, to which my present observations

more particularly apply, as I have never visited the more southern

region. The most abundant natural product is the dakh, ( Butea fron-

dosa,) which springs up wherever the land is not cultivated, and in many

places (especially towards Katthal and Jind) covers vast tracts of coun-

try which might be rendered most productive.

The flora of these jangals presents several features in common with

that of the Dhin, such as species of Vitis, Dioscorea, Gloriosa,

Asparagus, Costus and Zingiber.

This tract is intersected by the rivers Sarasvati, Chitang, and Rak-

shast a branch of the latter ; from these canals in all directions former-

ly existed and in a few instances have been lately re-opened, but they

are generally overgrown with jangal. These three streams as well as a

smaller one which joins the Jumna near Buria, all rise near one

another in the high ridge above the khadir which skirts the Sewaliks,

in the neighbourhood of Chichrault and Bildspur, and are partially

supplied in the upper part of their course from springs, but the water

from that source is quickly expended in irrigation and they are mainly

dependent on rain. ‘They are all characterised by excessive tortuous-

ness of course, and owing to the great perpendicular depth of their

banks, are exceedingly dangerous from sudden floods after heavy rain.

The soil is, generally speaking, tolerably rich; and in favorable sea-

sons produces very fine crops, but, in parts of it, is exceedingly poor

and scarcely worth the trouble of cultivating.

The usual crops in the Kharéf are rice, which is pretty extensively

cultivated in lands liable to be overflowed, and on higher ground cotton,

maize, joar, and a very small quantity of bajra, mandiya*, kodon and

chini. San. Aibiscus cannabinus is generally sown round cotton or —

pulse fields, while the beautiful sanz ( Crotalaria juncea ) is sown in ex-

tensive fields by itself. ‘The oil seeds turza (Sinapis glauca) and til

(sesamum), both the white and purple-flowered varieties are sown, the

former more sparingly and in richer soils is cut late in November or early

in December ; the latter is extensively cultivated both by itself and

mixed with various phaseoh, such as urud, motth, lubia, &c., on higher

* It is as well here to remark a mistake I observed in Lieut. Hurron’s

account of his tour to the Borenda pass in your journal; he mentions the fields —

of kodon in the hills, but erroneously gives it the name of Paspalum scrobicus

latum, which plant though called kodon in the plains is not cultivated in the

hills: what the hill men term hodon is the mandeea of the plains or Eleusine

corocana.

1838. } of the protected Sikh States. 753

and drier soils. All these crops suffer severely from the depredations

of a hairy caterpillar called kamli of the genus Sericaria.

In the rabi, wheat and barley form the principal crops, gram not

extensively and generally mixed with either of the above, and masur

(Ervum lens) very little cultivated; sarson (Stnapis dichotoma) is

sown to a considerable extent, generally mixed with barley. The poppy

is a valuable but very precariouscrop, it is extensively cultivated in

rich irrigable lands, and when not destroyed by hail, which is too often

the case, amply repays the labor expended onit. The land _is plough-

ed three times, being plentifully watered between each ploughing, before

sowing ; and subsequently the plant is kept continually irrigated till the

fruit is formed. The opium is collected in the usual way, by women

and children, an incision being made in the head by a three-pronged

instrument. The heads are kept and sold, the seeds for oil as well as

an agreeable food, remarkably refreshing during fatigue and abstinence ;

with the exception of what is sold in the neighbourhood the opium is

sent to the westward where the poppy is not cultivated for it, for the use

of the Sikhs who are immoderately fond of it and consume immense

quantities. Tobacco is not much cultivated.

II. The Babul country. This tract extends from the Markhanda

(the narrow slip between that river and the Linda being intermediate

in its character), to the high ground between the river called in the

map “Khanpur kt naddi” and the most western branch of the

Ghaghar. It is intersected with numerous streams rising either in the

outer range of hills as the Ghaghar, Markhanda, Begana, Baliala,

Tangrie and Rhone, or in the high ridge which separates the tract from

the Sabcolline Khadir as the Ombla, Charmart and other nameless

streams enjoying the generic name of chhoa when depending ‘on rain, or

ogal when fed by small springs. The soil is generally sandy and salt,

which latter characteristic is shown by the abundance of fras ( Tamarix

Faras) which will flourish only in such a soil. The bdbil or kikar

( Acacia arabica) is the natural product, every where springing up and

‘often forming extensive groves. The general appearance of this tract is

pretty, the level of the plains being frequently diversified by gentle

slopes towards the numerous rivers and their tributary ravines.

The horizon is generally bounded by groves of babii! trees, which are

also abundantly scattered through the fields. But what gives a pecu-

liar feature to a considerable portion of the country, especially between

Ambala and Patiala, are the numerous hedge-rows of fras, which near

the villages often form beautiful shady lanes, reminding one of English

scenery. This very useful tree is planted from cuttings about a foot

2 B2

754 Botanico-Agricultural account (Serr.

long ; they are covered at the top with cowdung to prevent the moisture

from rotting the wood, and are planted in little banks raised along the

edges of the field or road, at the first commencement of the rainy sea-

son; in a week or two they begin to sprout and by the following year

are frequently six or seven feet high, and in seven or eight years form

middling-sized trees. From each cutting there are usually several

stems, and as soon as any of these have attained a sufficient size to

render them available for small rafters, ploughs or other agricultural

implements, they are felled, the smaller ones, if any, being left, if not

the root soon throws out a new crop for a future supply.

They rejoice especially in sandy and somewhat saline soil and it is

remarkable that in dry weather the outside of the leaves is always

covered with a saline efflorescence invisible to the eye but very percep-

tible to the taste, but this is not observable in the leaf itself, which is

tasteless. Probably in consequence of the quantity of salt in the wood,

jt cannot be used as fuel in a room from the intolerable fumes it

gives out.

A great portion of this tract is very low, especially that part between

the numerous branches of the Ghaghar, and is cultivated with rice in

the kharif and gram in the rabi. Joar is even less cultivated than in

the first tract, and bajra scarcely ever seen, both being sown principally

for the sake of the fodder.

The rest of the kKharif crops are the same as those in the first tract,

except that mandua, and til are not so much cultivated, and I have not

observed kodon in it at all. In the vabiz, wheat and barley are the

principal crops, but gram and masur are abundant in the lower lands

of stiffer soil. iSurson is very abundant either alone or mixed with

grain, as is flax like it cultivated for the sake of its oil. The Raphanus

raphanistrum, called térdmira, is also cultivated generally among the

stubble of the cotton fora coarse oil yielded by it: it is exceedingly

hardy and never suffers from the frost which frequently destroys the

surson crop. 3

Mehndi (Lawsonia inermis) is cultivated in a few villages by a

peculiar caste called *maghs in the following manner.

* This is the only caste who cultivate this crop, and they give the following

strange account of their origin: Once upon a time there was a Sarsut brahmin,

king of Mecca (who was maternal grand-father of MuHammaD!) his name was

Raja Muearasour.

From him sprung SAwARIYA who with his son SAL was turned out of Arabia

by Hossan and Hossyn. Thence they migrated to Pundri an island, and

thence to Maiméddsur in the Barara mulk W. of Bhatinda, where they colonized

1838. )} of the protected Sikh States. 755

The seed is soaked in water for three days, then strained and again

soaked till the radicle begins to sprout. The seed beds are about three

feet wide and twelve or fourteen long, from north to south, so that they

may be sheltered by hurdles from the prevailing winds (west or east).

In each bed about half seer pukka, of seed prepared as above, is sown,

and is sufficient to sow from half to two bigas kucha according to

the growth.

After sowing the germinating seed they are daily watered in the even-

ing till they sprout above ground which is generally the third or fourth

day. Sown in Chyt, it is transplanted as soon as there has been a good

fall of rain in Asarh or Srawan into fields, and watered as soon as planted,

and subsequently every ten or twelve days as may be found necessary.

It is ready for cutting the following Jeth, and again in Mangsir, again in

Bysakh and then in A’san, and so on. After the first annual cutting

it is well manured and watered, but after the autumnal one it is left alone

till the Hult when it is again manured to be ready for cutting the follow-

ing month. Thus treated it will continue to be productive for ten or

twelve years.

When cut, the leaves are beaten off the twigs, and about a pukka mun

is produced from a kucha biga, and is sold at the rate of six to fifteen

seers a rupee.

Towards the foot of the hills, Aults ( Dolichos uniflorus), and the

sdwank (Panicum frumentaceum), are moderately cultivated*.

In both these tracts the sugar-cane is cultivated extensively, but in a

very careless way. It is sown in March or the end of February as soon

as the frosts have ceased, in large fields, not in lines or with any

regularity, and is generally surrounded with a hedge of ticar, ( Cajanus

bicolor ), which is sown when the canes are set. The only care taken

‘is to prepare the ground by frequent ploughings and a quantity of

manure depending on the supply from the village sweepings and the

laziness or activity of the cultivators. On the first fall of rain after the

young plants begin to sprout (in the end of March or April) the caked

surface of the ground is broken either by means of a wooden mallet or

asmall hoe. The cane is seldom irrigated, never unless when a small

canal (Khdl) from one of the torrents, or ogals passes near them and

‘consequently the crop is almost entirely dependent on the rains. It is

17 villages. Thence they were driven forth, and after sundry migrations are

now settled in the following places :—

1 Chaurira; 2 Iragarh, near Patiala; 3 Yéra, near Shahdbdd; 4 Indri;

5 Thanesar; 6 Deoréna, near Ambala; 7 Mustafabad; 8 Sadhoura; in the

Sikh states. And Lakhnauti in the Mozaffarnagar district.

* Both of these are extensively cultivated in the hills.

756 Botanico-Agricultural account [Sepr.

seldom fit for cutting before the end of December by which time the -

frost sets in and materially deteriorates the quality of the juice, often

even entirely destroying the cane and rendering it useless for any

thing but indifferent fodder for the cattle and bad seed for the ensuing

year. The cane is even in the best years very poor, and seldom is more

than six or seven feet long and three fingers thick ; but as the very worst

is always kept for seed it is not wonderful that it should have deteri-

orated. The only wonder is, that it should be considered worth the

trouble of cultivating at all in such a way. The cane is cut from the

field by sickles and carried entire to the oli or sugar-mill, which is

generally situated in the gohav or space surrounding the village. I

have here never observed it at a distance from the village (as is usual

in some parts of the country), except when a river intervene ; then it is

chopped into little bits and pressed in the kolu, the mash from which

the juice has been expressed, with the leaves, being used as fuel to heat the

sugar boilers. The village cattle are allowed however to help them-

selves ad libitum from the heap. ‘The tall column of dark smoke from

the kolis with the delicious fragrance of the boiling juice, greet one

from almost every village from the end of December to the middle of

February, by which time the work is generally quite over, though some-

times it is continued till late in March, when the crop is unusually

abundant.

In garden fields near town, species of the cucurbitacee and arums,

with the sweet-potatoe and baigan, capsicum, methi (Zrigonella fe-

num grecum) and radish (both as a vegetable made of the yenns pods

and for oil) are generally cultivated.

The best grasses in this region are, after the dhub grass, which is

abundant, the dhaman (cenchri and penniseti, spp.) the palwan

(Andropogon pertusum, bladhi and scandens) from the jangals, and

from the fields in the rains the annual species called jangli chint and

sawank, Panicum colonum, brizoides, hirsutum, &c. are cut in

quantities for the cattle. The large dirs or preserves for hay kept by

the Sikh chiefs consist chiefly of the spear grass (Andropogon contor-

tum) with the palwan and dohamans, and the coarser kinds Poa cristata,

Andropogon muricatum (dhabri and senth) with the coarser sacchara,

cover considerable tracts in the dhak region and are useful for thatch-

ing. The small Perotis latifolia and Imperata cylindrica form the first

coating to the sandy channels of torrents deserted by the stream which

are not unfrequent, but they are of little value and only used when no

other grass is procurable. The bavi, a species of andropogon, is

considered poisonous.

1838. ] of the protected Sikh States. 737

The population of these two tracts is mostly Hindu, but among the

zemindars and lower castes there is a considerable sprinkling of Mu-

salmans, Rajptits, both Hindu and Musalmén, but principally the latter,

and Jats are the commonest classes among the zemindars ; but Rors, a

caste I believe peculiar to this part of India, are not uncommon among

the cultivators. Musalman mdilis are the best. The Sikh persuasion

is not common among the Jat zemindars, but confined to the invading

chiefs from the other side of the Suwélej, but it is not unusual for

sweepers and chamars to adopt that faith under the name of Rangrethas

and Ramdasias. About one-third of the kahars are Musalm4ns, which

proportion becomes larger as we advance westward towards Lodihana

and the Panjab. A Musalman tribe Gagra replace the sweeper caste

in the charge of leeches.

Ill. The Phalahi tract. This extending westward from my second

division, is bounded on the north by the Suéle/ low land or Bhet ; to the

south by Bhatiana, while towards the west I am not acquainted with its

limits or the nature of the countries that succeed it (if different) towards

Firozpur. It may be divided into two great subdivisions, the Phalahi

proper and the Jhand.

In the first of these water is found tolerably near the surface (30 to

80 feet), so that wells for irrigation are abundant ; in drawing water the

lao or bag pulley and inclined plane is in almost exclusive use, the Per-

sian wheel or harat being very seldom seen, and the depth of the water

from the surface entirely precluding the use of the dhenki which is

not rare in the preceding tracts.

The phalahi, Acacia modesta—Watt., from which I have distin-

guished this tract, is a small tree about the same size as the babul but

very different in appearance, being very scraggy and armed all over with

sharp hooked prickles. It is deciduous and when the leaves first ap-

pear in March remarkably beautiful, the delicate foliage being of the

most brilliant light green and set off by the bunches of long cylindric

spikes of white flowers diffusing a delightful perfume through the air ;

but its beauty is very transitory, the flowers soon fade and the leaves

assume a dreary glaucous hue and fall early in winter, leaving the tree

covered with the compressed yellowish pods. The wood is very hard

and heavy, of a dark brown color, and is much used for a variety of eco-

nomical purposes. It grows abundantly in all waste places. In this

tract the Chamror, Ehretia levis, again appears, being abundant at the

foot of the Sewaliks but very rare in the babtl tract : it also is much

valued for the hardness of its wood.

Sugar-cane is only cultivated in the most northern part of this tract,

758 Botanico-Agricultural account [ SEPT.

but where grown is eminently successful, being cultivated with much

more care than in those parts that I have previously mentioned, and

kept constantly irrigated. The juice is expressed in the kulhari or

roller sugar-mill, of which I formerly sent a description to the Agricul-

tural Society.

Cotton is also extensively grown in two ways, either as a rain crop,

as in the before mentioned tracts, or is sown in April and receives mo-

derate irrigation during the hot weather ; under this treatment it grows

to a much larger size than is common under the former method.

The irrigated wheat and barley are particularly luxuriant, and in

good seasons the grain particularly fine; it is freqnently sown as early

as August or September so as to be in flower by December, but the

fruit then formed is generally destroyed by the hard frosts, and in sea-

sons of drought the white ants commit great devastation, laying waste

whole fields by devouring the roots of the plants ; rats also do great in-

jury to this crop, burrowing in the sandy hillocks so plentifully inter-

spersed among them and denuding the margin of the fields.

Mustard is also cultivated a good deal, and poppy sparingly and only

for its oil not for opium. Masur I have never seen in this tract.

Rice is only grown in that part of this tract bordering on the babil

region, and if ripe sufficiently early, is succeeded by a crop of gram in

the same ground,

The usual kharif crops are bajra and joar and maize, all of which

grow most luxuriantly and to an immense height.

The southern portion of this division which I have designated the

Jhand tract, is termed by the natives Malwa, whence that appellation to

the Sikh chiefs of families from the south of the Sutle7 in contra-dis-

tinction to the Mdnjha and Doab Sikhs or invaders from the other side.

It isalso named Chowhdra as distinguished from the Zihdra, or lower

part of the upper division just described, in consequence of only + of

the gross produce being demandable as the government share, while 4

is claimable in the former and 2 in the remaining portion of this and

the two preceding tracts, therefore termed Pachdie.

What I have just remarked regarding the luxuriance of the gram

and kharif crops holds good also with regard to this division when the

rains are tolerably plentiful. But the wheat is generally poor, owing to

the very sandy nature of the soil. Here irrigation is impracticable

owing to the very great distance of the water from the surface, vary-

ing from 100 to 300 feet. In many villages there is only one, in

some not even a single well, therefore not only the cattle but even the

inhabitants yery much depend on ponds (tovas) for their support. In —

—

1838.] of the protected Sikh States. 759

dry seasons villages are often temporarily abandoned in consequence

of the failure of water. Therefore it is a custom that those who take

water out of a pond pay for it by digging and carrying out a basket full

of earth for every pot they fill with water, so that the cavity is gradu-

ally enlarged and deepened.

The appearance of this part of the country is very peculiar. The

fields are as it were basins surrounded by long low rolling hillocks of

dry sand, either quite bare or clothed with a peculiar vegetation, and

are almost universally surrounded by high thick hedges to protect them

from the deer; these fences are made of dry thorns heaped loosely to-

gether, generally running along the summits of the sandhills, and be-

tween them lie the narrow roads barely wide enough for a hackery to

pass.

The vegetation on these sandhills consists principally of a species

of Artemisia of a most delicious fragrance, and an aromatic species of

Andropogon resembling A. twarancusa. (Is either of these, or which

of them is the Nardus of ARRIAN?)

This Andropogon is much liked by cattle and is said to communicate

its peculiar flavor to the milk. Besides it are species of Cenchrus and

Pennisetum, one of which is amost disagreeable torment to walkers, the

sharp recurved hooks of its involucre fastening to one’s clothes and

even to one’s skin; its seed however sometimes is used as food in times

of great scarcity. The leaves both of this species and of two or three

others which are indifferently termed dhamun are excellent fodder and

are the principal grass for horses instead of the diub which is very

rare*. The madar, Calotropis Hamiltonit, with Cucumis pseudo-colo-

eynthis and a species of Momordica also luxuriant on those barren heaps,

with a species of Clerodendrum the wood of which is used for obtain-

ing fire by friction, aud two species of Zizyphus, Z. jujuba, and another,

peculiar I believe to this traet of country, with smooth glossy leaves and

globular purple fruit.

The most abundant thorn however is the Jhand, Prosopis spicigerat,

which covers barren spots as the Zizyphus does in other parts of India

* This is remarkable for bearing on its roots a curious parasitical species of

Orobanche, with very thick stalks from one to four inches in diameter, full of

almost pure water, which it must have elaborated from the milky juice of the

madar, and derived from sandhills so dry that it is difficult to believe that so

much liquid could have been procured from them; and what is more remarkable

is, that this parasite is only produced where the madar grows in the very driest

sandhills and only in this portion of the country.

t When I first met this as a shrub I was unwilling to consider it as the Pro-

sopis on account of its large ovate stipules, that tree being described as exsti-

760 Botanico- Agricultural account [Sepr.

as a low shrub, but it is also met with as a small tree mixed with the

phalahi and rerul (I believe Acacia leucophle@a), which last as well as

the Jhand are utterly useless except as fuel.

The dhak (Butea frondosa) and the hins (Capparis sepiaria) are

almost unknown, while Capp. and aphylla grows to the size of a small tree,

and in the month of April its scarlet flowers have a showy appearance

mixed with the white blossoms of the phalahi. The rahere ( Bignonia

undulata) is found not uncommonly and is very brilliant when in flower .

this with a small liliacious plant is a curious instance of plants from the

Sewalik hills reappearing in so very dissimilar an habitat.

Of large trees the peepul is the only one of usual occurrence: some-

times the Tamarix Fras or Pharmi, as it is named in this part of the

country, is found of a considerable size. The stssw extends even to the

borders of the desert. Szrvts is seldom to be seen ; mangoe, or jamun

never. The Mm is very rarely to be met with only near some Mu-

salman saint’s tomb.

In the most south-westerly part of this tract bordering the desert, a

considerable quantity of alkali is manufactured from a species of

salsola* and forms a considerable article of commerce under the name

of sajjt.

The population of the third tract differs very much from that of the

former ones. In the more northern parts the zemindars are mostly |

Musalm4n Rajputs, with few Jats among them ; but as we come south-

ward the proportion gradually changes till in the Tihara a Musalmén

is scarcely to be found and the zemindars are almost universally Jats and

of the Sikh persuasion ; in that part of the country also the Kahar or

bearer caste disappears, and among the lower people the sweepers,

assuming the title of Rangrethas, are the most numerous,

Lastly, a few words on the two strips of land bordering the Jumna

and the Su#le7.

The Khadir of the former may be considered as upper and lower,

the upper contained within the branches of the Jumna meeting near

Rajghat, is almost entirely populated by Goojurs. ‘The soil is cold,

pulate, but I have subsequently found stipules on the young branches of the

full-sized tree, though they are smaller in proportion to the leaf than in the

shrub ; besides the prickles are much more numerous on the shrub than on the

tree.

* It is a curious circumstance that I found a species of salsola near Ambala

growing in a single salt-pan, and not another to be found, anywhere in the

neighbourhood for miles, though I searched every salt-pan for it.

1838.] of the protected Sikh States. 761

moist and sandy, as may easily be imagined, possession is most precari-

ous as these upper branches of the river are constantly changing their

course. An old tree is therefore seldom to be seen, or a pukka house,

generally grass sheds form the only habitations, because the sandy soil

will not bind to form mud walls but is washed to pieces by the first

rain, therefore fires are very frequent in the hot weather,

The crops are the same as in my first division, exclusive of those which

I mentioned as peculiar to the higher grounds, and they only succeed

in years when elsewhere there is a failure; with moderate rain the whole

country reticulated as it is with channels of the Jwmna is overflowed,

and it is only in very dry seasons that the crops succeed as in 1837

when they were most luxuriant.

The lower part of the Khadir is only intersected by a few channels

of old streams now used as escapes from the Delhi canal, this portion

is less liable to flooding and consequently in general bears middling

crops. Gram is seldom or never sown in it, and masur replaces it.

The ‘ Bhet’ of the Sutlej differs from the Khadir of the Jumna by,

being yet more barren. (The upper part of this Bhet I have not seen,

and the lower part is nearly entirely covered with thick grass jangal

the haunt of wild beasts, similar to that in the Gangetic Khadir).

The sand of the Swélej is much darker in color and with much

larger flakes of mica than that brought down by the Jumna, and these

larger micaceous particles are observable throughout the whole of the

phalahi tract as well, while the bdbu/ and dhdk regions partake of

the Jumnatic character.

Throughout the whole of this territory I have never seen the matar

of Bengal ( Lathyrus sativus ) cultivated, but it is constantly to be found

as a weed mixed with pulse or corn.

The arhar (Cajanus flavus) is never cultivated by itself, but the

variety C. bicolor or tviar is sown round sugar-cane fields as before

mentioned, and is cultivated in the hills under the name of Aue which

leads me to favor the considering them as two distinct species and not

merely varieties.

I had hoped to have been able to give a more complete account, but

being removed rather suddenly I have been unable to complete some

inquiries I was previously making and therefore send this imperfect

as it is.

5 o.2

762

Means.

Of temperature. Of diurnal ‘variation.

1835 1836 1837 1838 Means. 1835 1836 1837

January, .. 52.35 151.4 53.5 55.07) $3.03... 22.3: 019.6) 22:4 12is

February,.. 59.82 57.7 56.3 62.3 59.08 23. IS6.5 18.4 "2925

March, ..+. 64. 69.77 68.19 71.06 68.25 21.2 20.7 20.84 19.5

April, .... 77.07 76.43 79.85 79.17 78.38 20.7 19.8 23.5 20.85

May,...... 87.9 88.41 84.55 86, 86.66 20. 21.92 23.9 19.76

Jamey 2. Fe: 88.07 90.04 89.37 15. 17.10 21.48

July; -...6.c0 83.4 , (83.31: 96,92 $4.41 B.2) 22. aaa

August, .... 84.73 83.9 86.38 85. 9.8 10.6 12.97

September,. 81. 79.47 62.68 SUULL eae. 14.4 15.46

October,.... 73.36. (71.1 75.43 73.31 21.82 24. 19.48

November,. 62.2 63.7 64.37 63.42 22.87 24.8 23.3

December,. 55.91 54. 56.) 65.03... 19553 22. 22.6

Mean,..... 72.57 972.27 73.7 72.85 18.6 15.45 20.6

Extremes.

Botanico-Agricultural account

Appendix I.

Abstract of Thermometer kept at Ambala.

Of Minimum.

1835

Highest, 53. 54. 50.

Jan. t eeegieis 34. 31.5 37.

Highest, 60. 54.5 61.

Feb. { Biowest, 40. 42. 40.

; Highest, 68. 67. 68.

Mar. { Lowest, 48. 50. 48.

, Highest, 74. 76. 75.

April, | Towest, 59. 60. 60.

Highest, 86. 87. 85.

May, pee 68. 66. 59.

J Highest, 92.5 85. 87.

BBG { Lowest, 74. 69.5 68.

Jul Highest, 83.5 83. 89.5

ys Legere, 72a 7 et Oed

Highest, 85. 81. 87.

Aug. { Lowest, WETS. FB

Highest, 81. 81. 78.

Sept. { Lowest, 66, 59. 71.

Highest, 70. 70. 72.

Oct. { Lowest, 57. 53. 58.

Highest, 57. 56. 60.

Nov. { Lowest, 45. 42. 44.

Highest, 58.552. 51.

Dec. { Powest, 39. 37. 40.

Whole s Highest, 92.587. 89.5

ree Lowest, 34. 31.537,

47.

04,

33.

Of Maximum.

1836 1837 1838 1835 1836 1837

1838

(Serr,

1838 Means.

24.29

20.6

20.56

21.21

21.34

17.89

11.59

31.12

14,92

21.76

23.65

21.37

19.19

Of diurnal variation.

18351836 1837 183s

10. 67.0 "70.°" 74." 29:5 O7.5 (os. 35°

S502 640006832) 668)! olat:. er iego. Ses

Zo- 26.0 72. S81... 28. @tageoe. |) 30:

65.3 “5861 SOG ose ae 5. 2.

82... 85../92. 8%: s80. (86.04 S0i--o97:

Go.) 97Gn 68. es Se Op ewan 3.

9521 iOS. 7 102s 99... QSb Sasa isO.s

70. 40, Pvp tf ap See 9. 0

05. ‘T06. Too. WOT. °26.° O80 Sa, 2729

85.°; 006, SDI 092. «dee eae ee: As)

09. 107. 105.5132. 28.529, 29.5

S10 FOL O58 8... J)a 8a.

93. 93. 105.5 17. 15. 25.5

its Papdits Veale ot 25s, oe

95. 93. (99.5 15. 15. 19.

732) 95, 238s - aapmel 3 8.

91.5 93. 93. 225 236 UB0R

Sl... Jaa, 86. Be Be aes

87. 88. 90. 27. Si. eee

$2. 0178.4 9 495 15. 19. 14.

85. 82.- 82. 32. Syn) eee

66. 68. 69. BLoQyl ys

3s) 69a!) doe 28. 2). 26.

58. 60. 62. Fert 9e, PMs

09, 107. .109.. 112... 323.38 32.) 6%

Bo, 58s (56s Obs 2. ie 5. 0.

Appendix ITI.

Abstract of Herbarium collected in the Sikh States, exclusive of plants found

only in the immediate neighbourhood of or on the Sewalik range.

Polypetala.

Total Cult.

Weamnncmlacese, |e ssc oes beet

PAPAVEY ACER, ,:6.0 0.0 cvieielnelewies

Mymphweacer, -0-: sie oernsinisiew 4 «

WNeTEMDONACER, 6. oe ve csicses

Apiacie (Umbellifere,)

Vitacee, oats

Onagrariacete, cecccccsseccee

COOMBICIACER, 56 ocicae sen vee

Myrtacee, ce ee ee ceorr ee oe ck oo

eevee

eevee ve ee oe ov oe

Qo — Or Oo 1 = DS & SH

oK OK AOS NHN =

Loranthacerw, ......

Cucurbitacer, .s.5.<cscreee

Ficoidacez, ........-

Cruciacez, ....

Capparidacee, ......

Resedacee, .. 2.00.

Wiglicee? .. a \Jciveueae

Samydaces, ...+cesecesereee

Moringacete,....ccccerrecene

Flacourtiacese, ..s.os0% «Ws da wa

Sapindaceee, oovooe

‘?Peeoeene

eceeeove ee

eewseeeeoe Oe Oo

eooeosv oe ee ee

1 0

TZ "8

1 0

1l 6

6 1

1 0

2 0

bed

1 0

1838.]

Palygalaceze, os ciiicie ets ws oe

WatMaceee,- Ki vs vs ow is

Linaceze,

MLErEuliace®, us ccwwceaeves é

Malvacee,......+6.

PPMEEME helo a cle es e's Ve We o'

Viythracee, ......

Meliacee, ..

Cedrelacee,

Aurantiacee, ..

Rhamnacee, ..

Euphorbiacee,.....+-+... eles

Celastracez, ....

Portulacacee, ....

Silenaceez,......

Alsinacez,,.....

Tamaricacee,

Ilecebracez,........ ‘

MUAMEE, Ge os os.0c,00505 :

Zygophyllacee,.. HA

Bealeamiipace, .\s2 3... ee esec

aeeoces

ee®seoeoeoecer oe vo evevecs 06

ie)

CONF NK ONMNWOK WW Re WO SC ON = bd bd

ee ese eee @

eeoese oe PF eevee ee ae

eee poor eeeoen

eoerv ee ese eted

e@eeereevee0

eooe re ev eee00e

eoeeo eevee eo oe

eee ee es eee

RACER ois) ss .es6 sieeve» ois

Rosacee, ee aetie 6 Ste ioe Gin ailsin ls

viz. Pamex, 3

Amygdalinee, 3

Potentilleez, 2

Rosee, 2

Fabacee,(Leguminose,) .....

viz. Genistee, 8 (1.)

Pritelicws * OS: 3.)

(2.)

COrKerKF OOCOCFP Oro oW HK WKH We eS ROH OS

food

Clitoriee, 9

Galegee, 3

Astragalez, 2

Hedysaree, 14

Vicier, Su 2

Phaseolexr, 1 7

Dalbergiee, 3 2.

Mimosee, 9 2

Cassiee, 12 6

Amacardideew, 5. 24's cesenaeyio 2 i 2

Total, Polypetale, 270 88

Incomplete.

RPM Ey | also k's ewtneks.cm, LO

Ceratophyllacee, ..

DTyTICACEE,. 6. . 2's 0:0

seer eo

pemireeeres ee Ese SECS Pee

PPEAMACCE aise -cie bile 02's led oe 2 LD

POAT AMCHACCH,, «0.0.3 >, de:e0,0 6 «0, LA

Rhenopadiaces, foe... es 403-9

BMYROIAECACEE, 2... ccgncece ns L

Rwigeunaces, ioe ele. 4 a

Nyctaginacee, 3

DUCWIDETMACEH,, 6. nearinese 2

eeeese ee ee ee ee

Cor oor OH NK OS WH

Total, 54 17

Monopetale.

Peimatlalee, o5:0 ris. ceils owaei~-2Z oO

CE oe ales nm ettia Lo Ro

MOWACOD:. cc clesteesiideiadsye® obs O

PREREMDACERC ya's 0's Paincie seineeiven kak

of the protected Sikh States.

Convolvulacee,

Hydroleacez, ...+.0s.

Campanulacee,....

Sphenocieacez,..

Cinchonacez, ....

Galiaceve,.....

Cichoracee,

Asteracez,.. ee een

viz. Ver piamiaeeas 4

Asteroidez, 15

Senecionide,

Cynaracere,; + sssscvcesceccens

Plantaginacee, ......

Salvadoracez, ..

Plumbaginacee,

Cordiace®,: -seceteccccececws

PATER ACE, +. er erasereverer'e'e> ob 0 ote

Boraginacee, wens

Lamiacee, (Labiate) ....

Verbenacee, .....-

Bignoniacere, ..++...0%

Acanthacez,........

Lentibulariacee, ......

Orobanchace®,......seee eee

Scrophulariacez, .....

DOMMNACE, \ Sess ness ce's> we

Gentianacer, e062. 0s e008 68

Apocynacer,..

Asclepiadiacee,

Jasminaceee, ...+ ececcvecoecs

eeoeoseseeoeeeoe be

aooe oe

eoeveeoeeeore

@eeeeveve se 06

eeceeere as o8

evereeoe ee eve eee

eoree ee eres

eeoew rv er re ee

eeenwveevenestee

eeeetee eve ce

@ecoeovea2eveve ee e082

OPN ENON ONE DN RAN HH PLO

ia)

—

pond fet

BCONCACCCR OFM WSCSONCCKHW

Total, 198 25

Gymnosperme.

Gnetacex,...... econ0oeeoen ee 6 @

Equisetacee,......+.

Total,

Endogene.

AIDEIDELACEZ, io 5 x idinlersegls

Marantacer,.......

WESC egy eee la, wx trot als

Amaryllidacez, ..

Tridacez,

Hydrocharidacer,.......-

Orchidaceae 40 Be te

Pa NRCC. oe! iis aa ae aa olaiels's

Liliacee, abana cen carci

Viz. Tulipex,

Hemerocallidex,

Scillee,

Authericee,

Asparagee,

Aloine,

Commelinacee, ........

Butoiiaeee: 5 2 o08)s ides se

Pe ISAC CRE yk wy Sia dip ie aay the Seibel

PUWORCER cc sic'cic te CaLeuasere

Dioreoreasaney! iis Wi). delete dicts s

ATACER,, .« eres ie bgae) «a tela bi & thts

RY pea ya's wt se’ s/eieies gol wai's«

PNGIAGNCEZCS (4. aleisisisisie rice siness

eee eevee 0@

ceoeoe @€H ee 8 Oe

mm me em DO DO dO °

—

md = & oe

ROD ON FH YO i=)

Sonooococo

764 Botanico-Agricultural account (Serr,

Eriocaulonacese, .....eccees 1 0 Acrogens,

Cyperacese, .....+-e.eeeeeee 35 O Ophioglossacere, .. .eecereee 1 0

viz. Cyperes, 17 Polypodigcese,. 25. « xx eeueoraemenit O

Scirpexe, 17 Characee, 23000 00.0050 © sjekisis LU lay

Caricee, 1 Marsiliacer, #5 ss seus edb eieoren, O

Graminacee, ee a ie) 112 0

viz. Total, 6 0

Phalarides, 6. s\c.a spleens scene. oa

Panicés,' i. 3. siieelitewiee 2 4

Saccharineds, £2). . . .sWlars's/c ete 19 3

Rotholliday,) 2)... ..iiemaiecaue 3 O i é ‘

GAG TEe, «4 nice Gale wiate iu s'a ina fale OP ga ae = 3

Phlsoidere, sx iciss dip oe « CHR AM isang ci

Agrostides, ...s.eseeeeeeess 7 0 Polypetale, ...... 4... 182 88 270

Stipee, én a Si Siew onabas ho, Gtetbelototas ROPMELE Incomplete, ...... éo be sor POP ee

OryZe®,.. ee eece cece cere cces 21 Monopetale,........ .. 173 25 198

Chloridez,.........0.+e006. 8 1 Gymnosperme,........ 2 0. 2

Perera gsi Ne scvase. 0.0) 5 UO Endogenz, .. ..... .. 163 30 193

ATUROIMACER, 25.5.0 kis bie lodee' oid oO Meromenae, sc avs s cd actos -- ae OS

WWTEIEEEE, | 5c. bio vin atiaeleatcalers eis Ait oe ebeaebbliba sss sae 4

Pestrleetey ic, «ie.cu eid ianicnles kine ane Total, 563 160 743

BSB BWC y i eice as ohn oe a o: Segre RA Ue

Total, Endogene, 193 30

Out of these the following are peculiar to the Phalahi and Jhand tract.

Farsetia Hamiltonii. Plantago, sp.

Reseda oligandra, (mihi.) Euphorbia, sp.

Bergia odorata, (mihi.) Ephedra, sp.

Malva Malvensis, (mihi.) Boraginearum, sp. 1.

Fagonia Mysorensis ? Heliotropiearum, sp. 2.

Zizyphus, sp. Acanthacearum, sp. l.

Crotolaria arida, (Royle) ? Astragali, sp. 2.

Lotearum, sp. Orobanche calatropidis.

And peculiar to the Khadir and Bhet are the following remarkable European

forms. Erythrea, sp.

Viola Patrinii, (?) Ajuga decumbens,

Viciearum ? sp. Butomus umbellatus.

Lotus corniculatus. Alisma, sp.

Rubus distans. Ophioglossum, sp.

I subjoin a description of such species as I believe to be new.

Reseda oligandra, mihi. c.

Herba glauca ramosa foliis liniaribus acutis papillosis, ramilis axillaribus,

stipulis 2 parvulis dentiformibus adnatis ad basin foliorum; spicis longissimis

terminalibus rachi striata floribus sub-distantibus solitariis sessilibus, bracteis

parvis solitariis calyculatis sepalis, conformibus, calyce tetra-sepalo, sepalis

lanceolatis, papilloso-marginatis, petala subzquantibus, ovario brevioribus. Petalis

duobus oblique lanceolatis, margine interiori subrecto exteriori v. obliquo v.

]-lobato, vel duobus in unum trilobum coalitis inter duobus sepalis superioribus

sitis concoloribus (albis) vel ad apicem sub-glandulosis; staminibus szpius 3,

basi coalitis antepetala sitis, vel 5 (v. 4 uno v. altero absenti) quorum 3

coalitis 2 lateralibus liberis sepalis superioribus opponuntur; antheris geminis.

Disco nullo nisi basin staminum sub-dilatatérum intelligis.

Pistillo ad latus inferius floris sito ovario 4-lobo, lobis tumidis vesiculosis

carinis 2 papillosis instructis, stigmatibus 4 ad apicem loborum, inferiore ma-

jore, superiore minimo capsula l-loculari ante anthesin ore aperto marginibus

1838.] of the protected Sikh States. 765.

valvularum intus reflexis; seminibus numerosis reniformibus placentis 4 parie-

talibus suturas subtendentibus affixis.

Bergia odorata, (mihi.)

Ramis decumbentibus ramosis teretibus pubescentibus. Foliis oppositis bistipu-

latis oblongo-ellipticis sessilibus serratis pubescentibus, stipulis subulatis, ra-

mulis axillaribus ; floribus axillaribus 1-3 utraque axilla, pedunculatis pedunculis

1-floris, calyce 5 sepalo, sepalis ovatis pubescentibus, petalis 5 obovatis integris ;

staminibus alternis brevioribus, stylis 5-ovario 5-loculo.

Odor aromaticus Anthemidis.

Habitat in inundatis proper B&lawali.

Malva Malvensis, (mihi.)

Prostrata hirsutissima, ramis teretibus foliis petiolatis quinquefidis, segmentis

2-lobis obtusiusculis; floribus axillaribus subsolitariis in apice ramorum sub-

racemosis foliis floralibus minimis sub-unullis petiolatis. Bracteolis 6 subulatis ;

Calyce ventricoso hirsutissimo. Corolla pallida calyce vix longiore. Carpella 7, 8

plerumque 9, lateribus planis rugosis dorso costato. Odor aromaticus Pelargonii,

Crescit cum precedente.

Astragalus sesameus, D. C. II. p. 288.

Ramis decumbentibus humi adpressis longis simplicibus teretibus hirsutius

culis foliis alternis 5-7-foliolatis foliolis ovalibus hirsutiuseulis, stipulis liberis

cuneatis; racemis axillaribus, pedunculis in anthesi folio breviotibus in fructu

elongatis, floribus sub-capitulatis brevissime pedicellatis, bracteis subulatis

ciliatis ; calyce hirsuto 5 dentato, dentibus acutis supra fisso, vexillo obovato,

emarginato recto, alis oblique ovatis unguiculatis carina obtusa, stam. 1-9-fila-

mentis brevibus antheris hirsutis, stylo brevi curvato stigmate capitato glabro

legumine ovato, dorso sulcato cum stylo persistente apiculato villoso seminibus

oblique reniformibus.

Flores minuti pallide purpureis. Lodihana.

Astragalus incurvus, D. C. II. p. 304.

Perennis hirsutus, caulibus radiatim prostratis, foliis alternis petiolatis alter-

natim pinnatis foliolis oblique ovatis apice acutis hirsutis, stipulis subulatis

petiolo adnatis, floribus capitulatis pedunculis axillaribus brevibus 4-5-floris

bracteis subulatis hirsutis; calycibus 5 partitis segmentis subulatis, corolla

purpurascente, vexillo longo obliquo valde emarginato carina duplo longiore, alis

vexillo brevioribus 1-dentatis leguminibus stellatim dispositis margine inferiore

introflexo falcatis gibbis hirsutis, utroque loculo 4-spermo seminibus rhomboideis.

Malva et Pentepotamia. These two species are remarkable as being identical

with or very strongly resembling the two African species to which I have referred

them.

Heliotropium.

Perenne ramosissimum omnino pilis sub-spinosis asperrimum, foliis sessilibus

lanceolatis valde rugosis asperrimisque, corymbis subterminalibus dichotomis

floribus sessilibus, calycis segmentis obtusis marginatis pilosis corolle tubo

ventricoso viridi calyce dimidio longiore inferius piloso, margine brevi undulat

albo 5-fido segmentis rotundis capsula levi rugosiuscula yix 4-partabili. In

Arenosis Malwe et Lodihane abundantissimum.

Boraginearum species—

Annua erecta ramosa hirsutissima pilis mollibus spinulosisque mixtis, foliis

lanceolatis distanter crenatis, ad crenas costasque spinulosis aliter villosis;

766 Botanico-Agricultural account, &c. [Sepr.

floribus racemosis pedicellatis, racemis foliolosis ; calycibus ventricosis, 10-costa-

tis, 5-partitis, corolla tubulosa limbo 5-partito segmentis rotundis, fauce breviter

5.-fornicata intus pilosa at non clausa, staminum filamentis brevibus antheris

ovatis czrulescentibus, pistillo recto libero stigmate clavato, nucibus basi affixis

oblique ovatis subrugosis apice acutiusculis, basi perforatis fauce perforationis

p licata.

Herba habitu Hyoscyami, calyce Physalin vel Lychnidem vespertinam zemulans,

Corolla alba.—Malwa, Pentepotamia.

Orobanche Calatropidis.

Spica confertiflora, caule (vel rachi) glabra spongiosa succi (aque similis)

plena bracteis ternis 1-floris, und inferiore majore ovata apice acuminata demum

marcescente calycem superante carnosa, purpurascente supra fulvA, duabus

lateralibus ellipticis caniculatis lateribus versus basin pilis carnosis ciliatis, aliter

glabris, calyce brevioribus; calyce 5-fido segmentis obtusis glabris corolla

ringente tubo calyce subduplo longiore curvato, limbo bilabiato labio superiore

2-fido minore suberecto segmentis rotundis emarginatis purpureis, inferiore

patulo 3-fido segmentis rotundis emarginatis ad marginem purpurascente, intus

flavo, fauce valleculis 2 luteis instructa, staminibus 4 didynamis inferioribus

longioribus, glaberrimis, junioribus in antherium lineare autheram superans pro-

ductis quod postea marscescens ad antheram affingitur, antheris 2-lobis cordatis

pilis albis presertim ad basin margiaesque saccarum hirtis, junioribus hisce

pilis arcte coalitis post impregnatione discedentibus, polline ovali. Pistillo

glaberrimo ad basin ovarii disco luteo circumdato ovario conico 1-loculari placentis

4. Stylo staminibus longiore medio angustato, curvato, stigmate in apice clavato

styli glanduloso.

Crescit in reedicibus Calatropidis Hamiltonii in arenosissimis Malve Scapo 1-3

pedali crassissimo, bracteis inferioribus szepius efloratis.

Plantago bauphila, (mihi.)—indice ?

Caulibus decumbentibus ramosis subhirsutis foliis alternis ample canlibus,

lineari-lanceolatis distanter denticulatis, sub-carinatis, pilis raris apice articulatis

hirsutiusculis pedunculis axillaribus foliis longioribus minute hirsutis vel sub-

glabris viridibus vel purpurascentibus, spicis confertifloris ovatis, bracteis uni-

floris costis viridibus marginibus latis scariosis inferioribus carinatis apiculatis

majoribus (at non foliaceis) sepalis 4. rotundato-ovatis, 2 exterioribus inferi-

oribusque bracteiformibus costa viridi, 2, interioribus omnino membranaceis.

Corolle limbo 4-fido, segmentis ovatis acuminatis scariosis, staminibus in

fauce insertis, filamentis filiformibus purpureis segmentis corollze equalibus,

antheris ovatis versatilibus luteis, stylo exserto apice hirsutiusculo ; capsula

membranacea ovata versus fundum circumscissa, rosea, seminibus 2 naviculi—

formibus, albumine concavo ovato embryone centrali immerso radicula inferiore,

cotyledonibus linearibus placenta centrali ovata crassiusculA in medio laterum in

valle lineari excavata propter receptionem embryonis, posteriuis in fructu mem-

branaceé. Malwa et Pentepotamia.

Salsola land, (mihi,) nomine Indorum

Frutescens ramosissima, foliis breviter petiolatis cylindraceis vel ovatis, rectis

vel falcatis, acutiusculis vel obtusis, floribus 3-4 glomerulatis axillaribus sessili-

bus, sepalis 5 concavis rubris, stamina iis opposita tegentibus filam 5: brevibus

antheris viridibus stylis 2-3-4. brevibus rectis exsertis ovario unico.

Fructum maturam non vidii— Malwa et Pentapotamia.

1838.) Translation of the Mohit. 767

U.— Extracts from the Mouit (the Ocean), a Turkish work on Na-

vigation in the Indian Seas. Translated and Communicated by

JosepH Von Hamner, Baron PurGsTAatL., Aulic Counsellor, and

Prof. Orient. Lang. at Vienna, Hon. Memb. As. Soc. $c. §c.

First CHAPTER.

OF THE NAMES OF THE SKIES, AND THE STARS ; OF THE ELE-

MENTS, AND WHAT BELONGS TO THEM.

First Section. Of the skies, stars, and elements.

Be it known that all the skies are perfectly round in convexity and

concavity each between two parallel surfaces ; their centre is that of

the world; they are nine in number, are called the ‘ universal skies,’

and are comprehended one within the other. The four elements are

within the concavity of the lunar sky, and have fixed themselves in the

middle of the terrestrial globe because gravitating like all bodies to-

wards the centre of the world, they found their repose there. According

to the expression of philosophers the earth is surrounded by the water,

but the surrounding is an imperfect one, because, according to the

opinion of old sages, the fourth part of the northern side of the earth

is shining forth; the modern philosophers say more, and in fact, the

Portuguese have found on the west of the Canarian islands a new conti-

nent which they call the New World, and which is drawn up in the

maps of our time ; we will mention it, please God, with more detail, in

the chapter of the Indian islands.

The water and the earth form together one globe ; the cause that

the earth came forth of the water, is only God’s grace, who raised

towering mountains, and sunk flat valleys to make them the abode of

animals and plants. The earth shone forth by the natural inclination

of the water to descend to the deeper grounds, the effect of which was,

that the higher places remained uncovered with water. Some say that

there are six hundred species of animals on the continent, and eight

hundred in the sea. The Sheikh, author of the Shefu has said of the

animals: that all those who have ears propagate by birth ; and those

which have only auricular holes, by eggs. The eggs are of two species

—those the shell of which is hard, have two colors; one, that of the

interior part and the other of the exterior covering ; but those, the

shell of which is tender, are but of one color and have no exterior hide ;

as the eggs of the fishes. After the terrestrial globe comes the aérial,

after it that of fire; then the skies of the moon, mercury, venus, sun,

mars, jupiter, saturnus, that of the fixed stars, and the greatest sky

which is called Atfas, The reason that the universal skies are in the

768 Translation of the Mohit, [Srrr.

number of seven, lies in their different motions. The proof of it is that

the before-said planets cover one the other. The covering sky is the

inferior and the covered one the superior.

The stars are divided in three classes. The first : the seven planets

every one of which is moving in its proper sky. |The second class are

the fixed stars, which are real stars like the planets, and which are all

fixed in the eighth sky. The third class are only imaginary and not

real ones; these are the two points which are called the poles. The

two poles of the greatest sky, make the difference between east and

west. In the same manner there are in the ninth sky two insensible

points ; all the’ stars are fastened in the globe of the skies like the stone

inaring. ‘Their rising and going down is fixed by returning cycles.

The line which passes through the two poles is called the axis ys.

In order to go on inthe operations of this science it is necessary to name

the four great circles which are the meridian, the equator, the *hort-

zon and the circle of height*.

Seconp Section, Of the divisions of the circle of the sky.

The learned in nautical science agree that the circle of the sky, that

is to say, the horizon, is divided into thirty-two parts, called khant ;

because the ship can go in thirty-two directions, which applied to the

horizon make these thirty-two divisions, every one of which is named

after a particular constellation to which seafaring men have given a

particular name. So they call in Turkey the north, Yildiz, which the

masters of the Indian seas call Kutb Jéh yx 5. So the two calves

(g. and y. in wrsa minor’) are true north, the rising point of them is N.

by E., the setting point of them N. by W. The rising point of the bier

(the square of wrsa major) N. N. E.; the setting point of the bier N,

N.W. The rising point of the camel (8. in Cassiopeia :) N. E. by

N. The setting point of the camel, N. W. by N.; the rising point of —

Capella N. E.; the setting point of it N. W.—The rising point of the

falling eagle (a in the lyra:) N. E, by E., the setting point of it N. W.

by W.—The rising point of Spica E. N. E.; the setting point W. N.

W. The rising point of the Pleias E. by N.; their setting point W. by

N. The rising point of the eagle true east, the setting point of it, true

* ‘we | $

es) Syl This we presume is any circle passing through the Zenith

of a place, on which altitudes above the horizon are measured. —Eb.

t o> Perhaps the Persian word “hdneh, place, house, division, or khand

from the Sanskrit q@ug part, division.—-Ep.

1838. ] a Turkish work on Navigation. 769

west. The south is in Asia minor and Roomeli generally called the

Kibla. The master of the Indian seas calls it Kutb-i-Soheil, that is

to say, the pole of Canopus. The rising of Solbar or Solibdr* (which

seems to be al-Phard) S. by E.; the setting point of it S. by W. The

rising point of the two assés (vy and 6 in Cancer:) S., E. by S., the setting

point of itS. W. by S. The rising point of the scorpion S. E.; the setting

point of it S. W. The rising point of the crown S. E. by E.; the setting

point S. W. by W. The rising of Arcitenens E. S. E.; the setting

point of it W. S. W. The rising point of the twins E. by 8.; the setting

point of it W. by S. These are the names of the thirty-two khans

(points of the compass). The middle point of two khans is called the

half of a khan, and the middle point of this is called the quarter of a

khan. The word karta 45,6 is but a corruption of the word 43,\5

quarto which in the language of the Francs signifies the fourth part.

The denominations of the khans after the rising and setting of the

above named stars, belongs to the Indian seas and the denomination

is only approximative and metaphorical, and not real, The division

is taken from the compass, which in Turkey is known by the name

of Pussolat. ‘lhe above mentioned names are not used in the

white and black sea, where Ursa major and minor are continually

in sight, but where Canopus, Salibar and the Aselli are not seen rising

and setting; the names used in the Turkish seas agree with the points

of the horizon, independent of the rising and setting of stars; this way

is by far the more easy, because there are only eight names of winds,

the middle and quarters of them, which makes ten words fifteen rising

points (the setting points not counted:) the northern pole and the

south pole, altogether seventeen names which it is easy to retain. It

is by far more easy to say east by north or west by north, than to

retain in memory the rising and setting points of the pleiades.

The Tuirp SEcTION explains the Isbd, ed > and the middle of

the Khans.

The circumference of the circle (globe) is of 8360 degrees, each degree

.662 miles, the whole circumference 24,000 miles; each degree has 222

* Solbar not Salibar is the true vocalisation. [The navigators call it Sa-

libar.—Eb. |

+ From the Italian or Portuguese Bussola, which the late M. KLaprota does

not allow to be derived either from Bossola, a box, or the old English Bowel, but

rather from the Arabic blavge pronounced Modussala, the point, or pointer.

The present example however in which the word is written with a p rather

proves that both the Arabic terms Pussola and Mowtssala are corruptions of

Bussola,—Ep.

5 po

770 Translation of the Mohit, [Supr,

Jarsangs ; the whole 8000 farsangs. An gia is formed by 1} de-

grees*. Fight ale zams make one isbd, and again 42 zdms

one degree; 1147 miles are one ¢tsbd, 147 miles are one zdm;

one degree contains seven parts of the twelfth of the isbd; so

the whole circumference contains 210 ishbd or 1680 zdms, the mid-

dle of two khans is 6;3 isbd; counting by degrees, 11} degrees ; the

whole circle 210 ishbd at our time, but in ancient times the middle

measure of each khan was 7 wsbd, therefore the circle contained 224

isbd ; the first is the better computation which is proved by the

difference of the greatest and lowest height of US Leechs which is but of

four isbds. Astronomers know that from the rising of Judda, that

is the polar star, to its setting, 6 degrees and 6 isbds are counted,

each isbd being 1} degrees ; but the rising and setting of Judda is

not always the same because its motion follows that of the sky of the

fixed stars, by which, m the course of time, the distance of it from the

meridian becomes greater and sometimes smaller, according to the pole -

of the world; in our time it is so trifling that it makes no difference.

Be it also known that the isbé is of two species; the one, that used

by the masters of the seas; this is the fourth part of the distance be-

tween Capella and wus (thetwo Urse); the masters measuring with

their instruments reckon this distance to be four isbd. If the mea-

surement is taken in 44> ( ¢ 77 Leo) and that the measure is neither

too large nor too narrow. ‘The distance between Capella and the two

Urse is four isbé. The second species of tsbd is not the nautical

but geometrical one, which is the breadth of six moderate grains of

barley ; according to the systems of the moderns, 24 zsbd or inches

make one yard ( eld) and 4000 yards one mile, and three miles one

jarsang.

The FourtuH Section, explains the distance of the stars, which

are used to measure the khan from the meridians and from the pole.

The distance of the polar-star is 865 degrees; the distance of the

two calves (8 Y) 77 degrees, the distance of the first star of the square

of Ursa minor op 380 66 degrees; the distance of AS\3 i 52

degrees ; of Capella 45 degrees; of Lyra 384 degrees; of Arcturus

231 degrees; of the Pletas 114 degrees; of Aguila 7 degrees. All

these distances are northern. The southern ones are the following:

Solbar called also Mohannis, that is to ‘say, the perjurer 61 degrees,

The reason of this denomination is because an Arabic tribe, having

taken its rising for that of Canopus, swore that it was Canopus ; which

* Should be 1° 36’ 25” since 224 assaba = 360 degrees.

1838.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 771

was a perjury. The distance of Canopus is 52 degrees. Ast his is

a most renowned star, the southern pole has taken its name from it;

the distance of eat which is the first of the two Aselli, 49 degrees ;

the heart of the Scorpion, (Antares) 242 degrees ; the Crown 17

degrees ; the Arrow, else called Shaurant Yamani, that is to say,

Sirius, 16 degrees; Djoza, (the girdle of Orion,) 1 degree. This

last one though a northern one has been mentioned with the southern

ones.

The distance between the north-pole and the polar-star (Djah) is

two ishd, some say that the difference is less. The distance between

the pole and the star of the nail rio Sy S * is 81 isbd, the distance

between the polar-star and the star of the nail 64 asbd ; that between

the polar-star and the greater of the two calves 74 twsbd. Those dis-

tances were taken by the former masters, with the instruments made by

themselves by which the elevation of the stars was at variance, which is

not the case with the present instruments. The distance from the stars

to the meridian and the pole of the world is not always the same,

because the stars move with the eighth sky, so that by its motion

some northern stars become southern ones and vice versa, so that the

stars which in the zodiac are now seen in the beginning of Capricornus;

may fall into the beginning of Cancer, the distance of which is nearly

48 degrees. The rest may be guessed by this, but in our times the

operations are sure.

The Firtu Section explains the instruments of measurement.

The first instrument which the ancients used, consists of nine tablets,

or boards, yl the first of which, of the size of man’s little finger is

divided in four folds} ( us) each of which is called one isbd, that

is to say, that the first tablet is reckoned to be four tsbd. Be it known

that each pilot takes the tablet according to his hand, so that if he is a

tall man the divisions happen to be great, and if he be a short man they

are small; therefore a difference must necessarily occur and the opera-

tion is not sure{. The distance between Capella and Dobban ( wd)

which in the lunar stations fall in isl ($71 of leo) is just four

isba§ ; which agrees with the above measurement taken by the hand.

* This may be y cephei of our globes by its relative distance from polaris and

the pole.—Ep.

t+ Shikan may here be translated rather a groove or furrow.—ED,.

t i. e. If the instrument of one man be used by another.—Eb.

§ The star here called Dobban must be understood, not as Dabbe, B aurige which

is 7° 45’ distant from Capella, making the ishd=1° 55’,

772 Translation ofthe Mohit, [Suer.

The second tablet or plate is one isbé more than the first and so on,

until the ninth. Through the middle of this tablet passes a thread so

that it increases from the first to the second table half an isbd, and so

on to the ninth; by this the elevation of the stars is taken*. Be it

known that the measurement of the ninth table is according with the

first plan. Capricornus having the smallest elevationt, it will be found

there to be 12 tsbd. In the 8th table, 11 ésbd, and so farther on

till the first, where its elevation is four isbd. In the same way the

calves, the four stars of the square of Ursa minor and the elevations of

the other stars are calculated. The method of taking the measure is

as follows :—You take the table with the left hand and the thread that

passes through their middle in the right ; you stretch your left hand firm

and take the elevation which gives four tsbd for that of Juddi ( usds).

The moderns use to the same purpose a bar > three or four

spans long, which they divide in five parts; one part forms a tablet co?

the breadth of which is the half of its length, that is to say, the fifth part

of the half; a thread passes through the middle. The bar is divided in

twelve parts and where it cuts off six parts a knot (or division) is made.

The pilots begin their measurement from this knot, Juddi having the

smallest elevation. The distance between the circle of the horizon is twelve

asbd and at this time the stations Lsarfa, (g in the lion,) Awwa, (nye

in the virgin,) and Semak Spica; are near, that is to say, in the

zenith ; at this time Juddi is two isbds below the pole of the world;

the measure of an isbd is 17 degrees (1° 43’); at that place the ele-

vation of the pole of the world is 14 isbd or 24 degrees which is the

greatest milet. The greatest elevation of Juddi, is that in the lunar

stations féra el-mokaddam, («8 in Pegasus, ) and moakhkhar, (¥ in

Pegasus and « in Andromeda : ) and Resha, ( g in Andromeda : ) there

are according to this calculation six isbd: they call this measure, the

original or fundamental measure ; that is to say, two wsbd above the

pole of the world. You divide then this bar in eleyen parts, throw five

of them away and make a knot at the sixth, then remain 11] 7tsbd for

the elevation of Juddi. You divide again the bar in ten parts, throw

away four and make a knot at the sixth which gives the elevation of

yen isbd. Then you divide it in nine parts, throw away three and

make a knot at the sixth so that nine zsbd remain for the elevation.

Again you divide it in eight parts, throw away two, make a knot at the

* See the subjoined note.-—Ep.

+ For ‘ smallest’ I should here desire to read ‘ greatest’—the meaning being, that

according to the estimated elevation is the loh to be selected.—EpD.

t Perhaps the extremity of the scale should be understood by this expression,

1838. ] a Turkish work on Navigation. 773

sixth, so that eight isbé remain for the elevation. You divide it then

in seven parts, throw away one making a knot at the sixth, in which

case the elevation of Juddi remains seven isbd. You divide it again

in seven (six?) parts, but you throw none away and make the knot at

the end of the yard, in which case there remain six isba for the

elevation. Here the operation ceases; but all this is calculated on the

lowest elevation of Juddé which is the original measure. The way of

measuring with the above said thread and table oe , is the following:

first you take the tablet in your left hand, take hold of the first knot

with your teeth, stretch forth your hand, don’t twinkle with the left

eye, and take the elevation so that Juddi is above and the horizon be-

low, no more and no less. At this time the arc of elevation between

the horizon and Juddi is 12 isbd; each time that a knot in added an

isbd is lessened till at last there remain six isbd, and here ends the

operation with the length of the table or bar. If you wish to operate

with its breadth it is as follows: at the knot made for the elevation

of twelve isbd, that is to say, at the half of the yard the elevation of

Judd according to the measure of the breadth of the table, is again six

isbd. Be it known that if you are operating with the breadth and

a knot is added, the elevation loses half an zsbd, so that it comes

at last to three zsbd, in which place the northern pole is five isbd,

From this place the equator is distant 40 z2dém, which makes nearly

570 miles and the original measure (Lsbel polsd) is here at an end,

because Juddi being in the original measure near the horizon its mea-

surement is not just. They call this the original or fundamental mea-

sure because Juddi is beneath the pole of the world in the lowest ele-

vation opposite to the pole. Besides this they take the measure by the

Farkadain, the Naash, and other stars.

The S1xtu SEcTION explains the calculation of the greatest elevation

of the stars. —

The way is this: you add the distance of the star in the northern

quarter to the latitude if it has a northern distance, and you subtract

it if it has a southern distance, and the result of the addition or subtrac-

tion is the elevation of the star; if it exceeds 90 degrees you throw it

away from the half circle and what remains is the greatest elevation ;

in the southern quarter the operation is quite the reverse. If you

wish to change the degrees into isbd, you know by what has been said

that one isbd is 15 degree, so that it is easy to make out the isbd ;

but in order to calculate just the elevation of the stars it is necessary to

know to a certainty the distances. Be it known that as the stars move

774 Note on the Compass stars [Sepr.

with their skies their distances are sometimes different which must be

known for the purpose of operating.

Note on the above chapter. By James Prinssp, Sec., As. Soc. &c.

The first chapter of the Mohit, as I anticipated, explains all the allu-

sions to the stars, the points of the compass, and the methods of mea-

suring the latitude, which were so difficult to understand in the chap-

ters of voyages first translated ; while the examination of the drab and

Maldive quadrants (if they may be so called) to which I was led in

order to understand the nature of the ‘celestial inch’ or wsbd, &c.,

has prepared me to comprehend at once the descriptions in the present

chapter which, as the Baron states, “ are quite incomprehensible without

the knowledge or sight of the instrument itself, which no doubt must be

actually known by Indian or Arabic masters*.”

The first question to be solved is what are the actual stars corre-

sponding with the designations adopted in Srp1’s work, as well as on the

Arabic compass? ‘The fourth section furnishes the data for the solu-

tion of this point, for it contains, not the azimuthal positions of their

rising and setting, but their absolute declination north or south of the

equator. But to compare these declinations with our present tables al-

lowance must be made for the annual variation in declination for the

time elapsed since Sip1’s tables were framed. To find this epoch we may

take the declination of Polaris, ¢so=, which is given in the text as N.

86° 350’, whereas on the Ist January 1839+ it is by the nautical alma-

nac, N. 88° 27’. The difference, 1° 53’ = 6780 seconds, divided by

+19”.8 the annual variation of this star, gives 353 years prior to 1839

as the epoch, or A. D. 1486, Srp1’s book was written in 1554, but

it was compiled from ten works of preceding authors, five of them

ancient, and five modern. The tables he consulted were probably

much anterior, perhaps those of ULucu Bre (A. D. 1437), or of

Nasir uppi’n Tvu’si’, astronomer to the Mongol Halagu Khan at

Tabriz in A. D. 1264. It is impossible to expect much accuracy where

the text does not pretend to come nearer than the half of a degree, but

still as we have sixteen stars we may apply the BenrLEey method of mi-

nimum errors to find the date :

* On board the Futtle Barry, (Fatih-ul bart) I could find none of these in-

struments—nor were the points of the ancient compass known—all is now

English in Arabic navigation.

t+ I make use of this epoch because I happen to have on my table a Green-

wich Ephemeris for 1839, and none for the current year.

775

quoted in the Mohit.

1838.]

c8sl

2831

6£9

FAD |

I6Tl

SlOr

OfFt

6SIT

6ECT.

P8El

9ZEI

099T

SEsI

COFT

COST

9091

c0el

98FI

*UIPIIP JIq

“Bly WIT

4usu190.138

BUED.@

*su0T}

-BLIVA

quaurea13 | e Jo Iwak | oseloay

6°81 —

8 +

€0l +

ve +

le —

L838 +

62 +

6°8I —

Ly +

Ist —

2°61 —

0°8I —

2 4 om

Lg 3—

98 OF

Oi Lise

bE 1+

tee

oc O+

ce 0—

Lot+

6 I+

62 £—

8 O+

6% 0+

€3 §—

15a (re

Ito =

f° -ee-§

9f 69S

by LVS

bo 6925S

1 61S

0€ OLS

G 0S

42 8 N

Il Ot N

I O¢GN

86 8EN

6h SPN

£ OGN

LE oO N

€s¢ PON

61 #1129 ol 1.26 e88 N

"u0T]8

-arpoap

“681

‘uve 4ST

ynuny jo Hq uoyeurpog

elenruoy QO 19S

‘sndoueQ QQ 3c Sg

‘smIg2Q 66S

‘salzjuy Of 2S

‘suoidioog GQ =ZT S

‘sng 0 91S

‘U0 20 — §

‘xinby2 Q ZN

‘uvieqapry <I SIN

‘sninjoIy OF &% Net

‘aikTo ag ge N

‘ejadeg 0) =6Sh NN

‘fem esi kg Z2¢N {

feu zsipy) » 10

‘stmooRIg » 99 N{

‘sl1elog

*pa

-puojut oq 03

pasoddns jeje

PL N ‘sitourmesingg ZZ N

WOE 098 N

‘ulpap o1qely

‘apqr[es

‘TlaT[os

*qO11380 94}

‘aordioos ou}

‘UMOID 9}

‘sniiis

‘queis 943

‘a]3e9 903

*sopeloig ot}

‘19189q

-ivods 9q}

“B3OA

‘4803 943

[ames 9}

mi” +91

pres sat

(SAYT” “HT

[ree ‘eT

(KT zt

crereS ci A

(= OL

aye «6

JO 1848 JSG my (sv\ev

‘uoseip

24} JO 48ST

‘J189 ay}

“ply eq}

omeu dIquiy

had

spre

ie“er

parm

*1848 JO

=) ow ft

aa ges 22s,

atl - ame Seu On =ra-"o= 5

fo) St St ie on ds

sageg5 i 20.5

N _e ap 2 —_ Oo

2. eas aae Seo 8

Nea yeaa ow SB

oO Df , & ret

o Snes Mos Elke -|- oOo eo we

Oey ae & o oO

283285," «

a hn Qz a mM he

te nS (o 0) o> ES>- an

Oe = One sms

ax S53 [58 = Ss

Be a, oer ae Sr Slim

ae ee a eae a3

= OS om Say

mice SS ie m= Ss

nD S83 Oo oa 9

ns + n greasy ~

O.bD-= 2\a wo SS 5

=> & aS. ee oO o

o ont

SBE aa gee

yo. oo Se -B 9

= QS 3

SW Pon O E.R Dm oma’ woe

eo Bera - os...

oop eS -e-

SuSdy Oo « 2 o 2

~ Age ot 9 a fs

SA Pou % & S +3 8

a 0 Sa 8 oH DY

) oi a od

oO. .& or? -~ WO

a 8 o & or) sam &

oS E585 G& 9 O aos

~ 8s 39 5 3 8

SO 5O _4 Sy © =

Aen ww mm 8 a =

ODO om dace =

r Om ee wn & ~~

oc v a =e 4. =| |

ae 5 a > = SS wo

o S&P = Se av f 6

S2est co A

» % 8 so 2 sed 3

oo ats 2 OO 2 oo a

Ebr OSB PR ‘RB O

776 Note on the Compass Stars [Supr.

dein, (8 and y Urs. Min.) only the former would answer. No. 3 is

translated ‘the firststar of the square of Ursa minor,’ but no star of

that constellation has the necessary declination ; as the square of Ursa

major has the same name in Arabic pes), I have inserted « Urs,

Maj. the principal star of the square, to shew that it will answer perfectly,

but if I have read the Arabic name right (for in the manuscript it has

no points to the letters). it should be ‘the leading star of ¢tinin,’ the

dragon, to which I have accordingly given the preference, though it

does not furnish so good an epoch. 431) pao ‘the bright star’ of the

she-camel I can identify with no other than the extreme star of the tail

of the great bear, the last of the three ‘daughters of the bier,’ and itself

named bindt-ndsh on our globe. I formerly thought it was (g4e the

second star, but this is 5 degrees too far north. ‘The Arabic globes

and tables write d:48!] « the leader’ in lieu of &*\S), 6 Cassiopeia

the star suggested by M. Von Hammer is 8 degrees too far northward.

Of Capella, Vega, and Arcturus there can be no doubt: but the next

of the series, translated Pleias by the Baron with a north declination 11°

15’ cannot certainly represent the Pleiades which are in 23° north, I

have, as on the former occasion, prefered Aldebaran (the bright star of

the Hyades) whose name; ey | the bull, does not much differ from

Lt | the pleiades: but for this interpretation it is advisable (though

not necessary) to read 15° 11/ instead of 11° 15,, for the declination.

To Jozeh, if it were to be taken in the usual acceptance of a con-

traction of Rijal uljozeh (our Rigel) we should be constrained to allow

a correction, from 1° to 10° south declination which would bring it to

the compass azimuth of E. by S.: but the text mentions its being out

of position and rather a northern star or one close upon the equator,

so that we may safely assume it to be 3 Orionis as in the above table,

without altering the text. The southern crown on our globes is far

too south for the als) of S1p1, or of the compass, which is evidently

Loyal] Dials), or gp Scorpionis. Antares is not liable to mistake: but

there is some misapprehension in regard to Zulim ettb. The Baron

translates it ‘ the first of the two Aselli’ ( we>) : now the Aselli are two

small stars in Cancer, in 19° and 22° north declination, whereas Zal/ém

is in 49° south. Again Dr. Dorn* states Fomalhaut of the Piscis

Australis to be denominated pal on the Arabic globe, but this again is

still 18 degrees too northerly. My own opinion was before given in

favor of aand & Gruis for the Hamérein, and the declination, now fur-

nished by Sip1, corroborates my selection, which is further confirmed

* Transactions Royal Asiatic Society, vol. IJ, page 392.

1838.] quoted in the Mohit. — 777

by the Arabic appellation zalim, which signifies ‘a male ostrich,’ not

much differing from grus ‘a crane.’

Canopus is too notorious a star to admit of any doubt, except to the

perjured Arab tribe! but its annual variation is too small to yield fair

data for calculating the epoch of the tables.

For the last of the list, Salibdv, I before wavered between « Eridani

and 7 Argus, and I should be able to propound a plausible excuse for the

Arab tribe’s mistake, (were the latter to be found correct,) in the disco-

very lately made by Sir Jonn Herscue tt at the Cape, of the variable

prilliancy of this star ‘which in a fewmonths had come to surpass all the

‘stars of the first magnitude except Sirius, Canopus, and « Centauri*:’

but when tried by the test of the minimum errors it is found wanting.

In 1839 it has S. Declin. 58° 50’, with annual increase of 18.8 seconds,

so that in the 14th century it would be 5 degrees too far north, ; whereas

he) or Achernar precisely corresponded with the Arabic declina-

tion in 1288 A.D. The Baron’s suggestion of Alphard (8 Hydre)

- is quite untenable, that star having only 7° 57’ south declination.

The present section in addition to the above valuable information,

tells us why the south pole has been called Sohedl+. It is a contrac-

tion of gutb 7 sohetl, or pole of Canopus, to distinguish it from kutb i jah,

- the north pole.

There is no latitude in which the several stars, as now determined can

- be made to rise and fall in their assigned positions on the horizon : the

names were purely conventional, yet in the latitude of 15° north a good

many of them find their proper places,—as if the system had been first

framed at Loheia in the Red Sea, Satbun of the ancients, which is the

starting point of all Sip1’s voyages to India, and we have seen many of

the terms quoted as “used by the Indian masters.”

I should here correct a serious mistake made in my former notice, in

supposing that the ancient Arabs like the modern navigators, or the

Hindus, considered the polar star to be immovable. The chapter before

us proves that its polar distance was known and measured, as well as its

secular variation and the precession of the equinoxes. Their accuracy

only was deficient for the want of good instruments: thus in the tables

of MunammMap Tizini published in Sharpe's SyntagmaDissertationum,

T. Hype, we find the polar distance of Judda in A. H, 940 or A. D.

1533 registered as 26’ Surther from the pole than in Srp1’s work, instead

of nearer. In general however Man. T1zin1’s places of the stars lie

between Sipi’s and the modern tables. Thus, 8 Urse minoris is

* See Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, page 463 of this volume.

t+ See note on Maldive compass, vol. V. p. 764.

DE 2

778 Note on the Compass Stars (Serr.

respectively 77°, 76°, and 74° 49’ in the three :—, Lyre, (vega,) is 38°

30’, 38° 37’ and 38° 38’ ;—Aldebaran is 11° 15’ (? 15° 11’), 15° 48, and

16° 11’ ;—and «a Aquile 7° 0’, 7° 24’, and 8° 27 in the Mohit, Mah.

Tizini’s tables, and the Naut. Alm. for 1839, severally.

I now proceed to make a few remarks on the rivtH section which

affords some curious though brief information on the nautical instru-

ments of primitive use. I certainly imagined that nothing could be

more primitive than my Maldive friend’s kamd/—a bit of horn with

a knotted string passing through its centre, depicted in fig. 1, Pl.

XLVIII. of vol. V. when lo! here is something even less advanced in in-

genuity ! Instead of dividing the string and making one board or tablet

(loh, o) answer for all, it seems to have been an anterior plan to

have nine boards differing in diameter one finger (tsbd) each ; the low-

est having four isbds in breadth; the largest, twelve. These were

all strung on one string, as long as the stretch of a man’s arm ; and that

board was selected in applying the instrument to use, which just covered

the space between the star and the horizon. From the passage in the

text it is evident that this series of boards was in fact but a substitute

for the more primitive employment of the fingers in the measurement

of celestial altitude. The fingers had however one advantage,—that

stretched at the length of the arm, as radius, they could be placed in a

curve, so as to represent equal portions of an arc; whereas when fingers’

breadths were transferred to flat wooden boards they became either

sines, tangents or, at the best, chords of the angle measured. It was

to correct this (as I imagine) that the string was shortened by the

thickness of the board (half an itsbd ?) for each successive Joh, ag

they decreased in breadth ; and I have taken the trouble to calculate

the effect on data furnished by my own arm and fingers, whence I set

down—radius = 27 inches; and isbhd = 2inch. The data therefore

for each board or loh will be as follow:

Radius in- No.of Breadth Equalto Angle Difference

creasing by the Joh of the Joh natural deduced. or value of

half an isba or in inches. sine. one isba.

in inches. board.

0 , 0 4

24.04 1 3.00 1247 710 —4 = 147%

24.41 2 3.793 1536 8 50 1 40

24.78 3 4.5 ois Loses ] 37

25.15 4 5.25 2087 °©12.3 1 35

25.52 5 6.0 2350 13 36 1 33

25.89 6 6.75 0Ue Lo 7 1 al

26.26 7 7.50 2656 1636 1 29

26.63 8 8.25 .0098 18. 3 Loy

27:00 9 9.00 iwoou, 19 2s Pee

Average of 12 isb4 1° 37’ 20”

1838.] quoted in the Mohit. 779

It is evident that half an isbd is a great deal too much for the thick-

ness of the plates or shortening of the string—TI have calculated what

it ought to be so as to afford the proper correction for the diminution of

the sines, and find it only a twentieth, instead of half, of an inch; thus,

making the ishd — 1° 36’ 4 we should obtain the following lengths of

the arm or radius; the isbd being assumed as before at $ths of an

inch :—

No.of Angle Sine of Depth of Radius deduced = Thickness.

plate or subtend- ditto, thelohin D — sin. /f alt. of plate.

loh. ed. inches. inches. inch,

1 6°26’ -1120 3.00 26.78 .08

2 8 2 01397 3.75 26.86 07

3 9 37 -1670 4.50 26.93 .06

4 11:13 1945 5.25 26.99 .06

5 12 49 .2218 6.00 27.05 06

6 14 25 .2489 6.75 27.11 .06

7 16 2 2761 7.50 27.17 .06

8 17 38 .3029 8.25 27.23 .06

9 19 15 -3296 9.00 27.29 -06

The next instrument described in the fifth section, does not require

much notice since, it is precisely the belsty, or square rod with a slide,

depicted in Pl. XLVIIL., fig. 2. p. 786, and the mode of laying off the

divisions agrees with the plan detailed by my Maldive informant. There

seems however to be some unaccountable jumble of the divided rod

(gaj) and the knotted string, unless the word translated knot may also

signify (as is probable) a division cut on the wooden bar. The applica-

tion of the breadth of the tablet for measuring lower altitudes with the

same knotted string is of course only an approximation, but quite near

enough for practice. The zero point (6 isbds) is explained to be the

lowest altitude of Polaris —= 10° 30’ + 30 30’ = 14°; once more

nearly conformable with the latitude of Loheia.

It is possible that the greater magnitude of the ancient isbd may

have proceeded from the practice of taking the polar distance of Polaris

as a constant of two tsbd: thus in 1394 it would be 3° 52/— 2-—= 1° 56’:

in 1550, 1°33, &c. Even in the chapter before us hardly any two

estimates of the isbd agree; in one place 210, in another 224, make 360

degrees ; in the division of the gaj and string, the measure will be

1° 52’ : in other places it is reckoned 1$ degree or 1° 43’.

The rirTH sEcTION enlightens us further on the zero point of the isbhd

scale, which on the former occasion I deduced, from the isbd latitudes

of places in the Red Sea*, to be 5° 30’ nearly. It says that in taking

the altitude of Polaris (always, as I guessed, at the inferior passage)

when it comes at last to three tsbd (the pole being then five tsdd)

* Vide vol, V. page 444,

780 Vocabulary of the Laghmani Dialect. [Sepr.

the scale ceases, because the star is too near the horizon to give accurate

results. Now 3 tsbd at 1° 43’ = 5° 9’ to which adding 3° 26 — 8° 35’

latitude; and 570 miles, the distance from the equator corresponding,

gives a latitude also of about 8° 30’. In the table I constructed from

the voyage latitudes I should have added a constant of 3° 26’ to the

absolute latitude of each place as the altitudes of Polaris were supposed

to be taken at its inferior elevation.

The stxtH skcTIoN merely gives directions for calculating the meridi-

onal altitude of stars, in order doubtless to obtain the latitude, at sea.

Here instead of north and south declination, the term distance, quas!

north polar distance is alone employed; the rule being for stars north

of the zenith; Altitude == N P D+ Latitude; and for those south

of the zenith, Alt. = Latitude — N P D (—90) which is unintelligi-

ble; it should be Altitude = 180° — N P D + Lat. ; or latitude =

180 — Alt.+ NP D. Perhaps by southern distance is meant south

polar distance, when the rule becomes S P D — Alt. = latitude.

The tsbd is here again quoted at 1°43’ and the importance of having .

good tables of the stars is insisted on. |

I have got through my comment without consulting any native

navigator, for the season of Arab and Maldive monsooners is hardly

yet arrived.+—But as I have already remarked, the present chapter

exhibits far less difficulties than the others did in the absence of this,

which contains the very particulars we there wanted.

I1I.—Epitome of the Grammars of the Brahuiky, the Balochky and the

Panjabi languages, with Vocabularies of the Baraky, the Pashi, the

Laghmani, the Cashgari, the Teerhai, and the Deer Dialects. By

Lieut. R. Lexcu, Bombay Engineers, Assistant on a Mission to Kabul.

A VocaBuLARy oF THE LacuMaNi Diatecr.

Introduction.

Laghman is a province (mahal) of the principality of Cab, situated

opposite to Jaldldbad ; it is sometimes written Lamghan. It yields a

revenue of 1,13,000 rupees, and is included in the government of

MunaAmmAD AKBAR Kuan, the favorite son of Ami’R Dost Munam-

MAD. ‘The inhabitants of Laghm4n are Tajaks or Farsiwans.

Vocabulary.

Lae, day Lam, fort Laya, brother

Atth, hand Kati, tree Warg, water

Kitalik, girl Bakar, good A,u, bread

Ae, mother ‘Vell, night Gung, horse

Saya, sister Balakul, boy Ghora, horse

Angar, fire Baba or tatiya, father Nakar, bad

1838.] Vocabulary of the Laghméni Dialect. 78)

Nandi, river Chap, left Bar, fruit

Shotik, she-goat Drogh, false Akude, below

Lawega, pain Kam, little Dura, out

Lodi, wood

Nuni, butter

Manda, neck

Baghal, armpit

Pam, broad

Kaman, bow

Ave, flour Pindi, calf Kham, raw

Golang bull Aneh, eye Janawar, beast

Gas, grass Kad, ear Limbe, tail

Adam, man Dan, tooth Pethar, shoes

Panj, husband Dad, beard Tuna, thirst

Shelt, knife

Swran, gold

Pachadak, he-goat

Gal, abuse

Wagan, wind

Guli, bullet

Pa e, leg

Chan, back

Poda, near

Khek, white

Shunek, red

Alina, green

Kana, deaf

Kuta, lame

Patik, gone

Ma e, moon

Wakh, rain

Abli, cloud

Gom, wheat Kat, bedstead Sum, hoof

Lon, salt Chantala, small Pachh, cotton

Ga, cow Chagh, fat Sona, thread

Mashi, woman Muta, short Shimek murch, black

Tik, wife Kala, cloth pepper

Pultem, son Sutan, trousers Arukh, leek

Chummar, iron Khudink, dog Ko, thing

Mukhra, silver

Wad, stone

Machh, fish

Kar, donkey

Shirin, sweet

Shidal, cold

Maftht, nose Dur, face Gul, flower

U’kht, lip Dur, mouth Ude, upon

Jub, tongue Rast, right Kuchai, in

Brit, mustachoes Rast, true Liga, long

Ast, arm Bo, much Tir, arrow

Kuchh, belly

Dur, far

Shamek, black

Thard, yellow

Nil, blue

Chhal, hair

Gand, large

Sanna, thin

Liga, tall

Peranik, coat

Khada, turban

Pishundik, cat

Pe, meat

Karatik, female ass

Shir, head

Norikh, nail

Shana, shoulder

Allakh, side

Ran, thigh

Sang, earth

Shila, mud

Thur, sun

Dum, smoke

Zalzala, earthquake

Gilaph, scabbard

Pasham, wool

Gamba, ‘deep

Pyaz, onion

Paki, razor

Stinchik, needle

Garm, hot

Khargosh, hare

Pachik, cooked

Paranaga, bird

Shakh, horn

Kalacha, speech

Avta, hunger

Anda, blind

Gunga, dumb

Chha, well

Aik, come

Pakam, I go

Paga, he goes

Pakatha, ye go

Pakai, dost thou go

Pakath, we go

Pakan, they go

——E es

1 6 khe 1l yae 16 shanza

2 do 7 that 12 duad,e 17 abda

3 te 8 akht 13 senzda 18 hashda

4 char 9 no 14 chadde 19 nozda

5 panj 10 de 15 panju _— 20 vist

782

Vocabulary of the Tirhat Dialect.

(Sept.

A VocABULARY OF THE CASHGARI (PROPERLY KasHKArt') LAN-

Dak, a boy

Moashi, a man

Lesun, a cow

Astor, a horse

Ashpai, a sheep

Unth, a camel

Chhani, hair

Pusha, cat

Ynch, forehead

Naskar, nose

Barup, eyebrow

Shon, lip

Legin, tongue

Siri, barley

To kini, who are you

Chadur, turban

Phadwal, trousers

Chhan, take off (im-

perative)

Bizwa, thin

Pong, foot

Shurak, thigh

Khwani, belly

Gaul, neck

Trishty, thirst

Asman, heaven

Shid, milk

Chho,i, day

Dashmani, reading

GUAGE.

Vocabulary.

Bugha, be gone

Rupa, get up

Pea, drink

Dassa, take

U’gh, water

Gomb, wheat

Gumod, a girl

Kumedi, a woman

Deshawa, a bull

Ghod dou, an ass

Pai, a goat

Postam, wool

Rain, dog

Gharib, poor

Jil, veil

Obista, dead

Zim, mountain

Ingar, fire

Chohistam, I am hun.

sry

Ishgum, shall I eat

Masam lidath, speak

with me

Kisht, waistband

Perahan, coat

Anjam, put on (impe-

rative)

Chale but, a fat man

Husht, hand

Ange, come Mujasti, calf of leg

ra’ 4 chod 7 sut

2 ju 5 punj 8 ansht

3 tru,i 6 chu,i 9 nenhan

Str, head .

Kad, ear

Ghach, eye

Rikish, beard

Dond, tooth

Ege, come here

Hishik, sit down

Ejube, eat

Math, with, give me

Mashr ba, goglet of

water

Shapika, bread

Karinj, rice

Mah, waist

Paz, breast

Bim, earth

Jind, bedstead

Satare, stars

Paghid, curds

Paniya, night

Dashmanira, read

Metal, a great man

Mawlat, country

Kosh, shoes

Jinwa,i, born

Ult, round

Him, snow

Jin, wood

10 jash

20 jishi

100 do shim

A VocABULARY OF THE Ti’RHAI DIALECT,

Introduction.

The 7%rhai language is at present confined to 3000 families, who

abandoned their own country the district of Tra on a feud breaking

out between the Orakzais and Afridis, and settled in the province of

Ninganhar. They figured in the religious revolution I am now about

to mention.

In the reign of AKBER, when Mirza Hasn was Governor of Cabil,

a holy man by name Hisamopi’Nn an Ansari by caste came from Hin-

dust4n, where his forefathers had been left by Timurtane, to Afghanis-

tan in which country he travelled and preached, and had succeeded in

making many converts to the creed of the Shiahs, to which sect he be-

longed ; when AKuun Darveza whose shrine is now at Peshawar, arose

——_———

1838.] Vocabulary of the Tirhai Dialect. 7838

as his opponent, and as the defender of the orthodox faith of the Sun-

nis: HisAmopi’n had obtained the title of Pi’k RosHan (father light)

among his own sect, and that of Pir Tari’k (father darkness)

among the Sunnis. AkHUN DaRveza petitioned the king who gave

orders to the governor of Cabil to co-operate with him in exterminat-

ing the infidel Shiahs. These two laid many snares to entrap their

opponent, who evaded their pursuit, accompanied by a body of 200

cavalry, by reversing the shoes of their horses. He escaped and his

fate is not known; but his three sons were secured and put to death.

The labors of Pir RosHAn were particularly successful in the district

of Zird, where he had 60,000 disciples; who on the disappearance of

their preceptor, returned to their former belief.

Kuzra, horse

Bhadai, mare

Pali, bread

Wa, water

Sinth, river

Das, day

Rat, night

Bir tkh, he-camel

Strizy Uhh, she-camel

Bira tsinda, he-goat

Strizy tsali, she-goat

Ghwar, good

Nakar, bad

Ghodi, abuse

Bali, wind

Nar, fire

Lada, wood

Brekh, pain

Tarwali, sword

Dal, shield

Golai, bullet

Dudh, milk

Kuchh, butter

Gadh, clarified butter

Ghom, wheat

Dadi, beard

Zav, barley

Lon, salt

Go, bullock

Dhen, cow ©

Ghas, grass

Strizy, wife

Mhala, father

Ma, mother

Putur, son

Kumar, daughter

Spaz, sister

Bhra, brother

Katari, knite

Vocabulary.

Tsimbar, iron

Zyad, brass

Postakai, leather

Parannazar, silver

Luhizar, gold

Bat, stone

Achha, eye

Nasth, nose

Kan, ear

Shunda, lip

Danda, tooth

Zhibba, tongue

Bret, mustachoes

Hast, hand

Pa, leg

Tsat, back

Damma, belly

Boga, near

Dir, far

Paranna, white

Luhi, red

Zyad, yellow

Kangana, black

Sen, bedstead

Bal, hair

Suda, little

Ghana, large

Plan, fat

Sim, thin

Kathan, short

Driga, tall

Tsabar, cloth

Piran, coat

Sathan, trousers

Phagdai, turban

Sana, dog

Bilolec, cat

Mahai, fish

Khar, donkey

Mun, face

Xzi, mouth

Mas, meat

Nukh, nail

Khwai, right

Chap, left

Tsuk, little

Brokh, much

Oga, shoulder

Mare, neck

Allakh, side

Kharg, armpit

Rin, thigh

Pondi, calf of leg

Brich, tree

Bhim, earth

Gad, mud

Dida, dust

Spagmai, moon

Suri, sun

Barsat, rain

Dhing, smoke

U’ryaz, cloud

Zabzala, earthquake

Ghwar kand, thunder

Tandr, thunderbolt

Padakahar, lightning

Nakh, hoof

Kavza, hut

Tekai, scabbard

Maliuch, cotton

Pam, wool

U’zh guni, goat’s hair

Zmarrai, tiger

Gugh, deep

Kangana mirch, black

pepper

Sim, leek

Pyaz, onion

784

Kurkumand, saffron

Spansi, thread

Biyatai, scissors

Katari, razor

Shai, thing

Dhing, needle

Mrikht, sweet

Tre, salt

Trikht, bitter

Tatta, hot

Shhal, cold

Ath, flour

Bar, fruit

Drig, long

Rast, true

Vocabulary of the Highlands of Deer.

Bizo, monkey

Gul, flower

Phalla, grain

Plan, broad

Ghasha, arrow

Ghurr, kaman, bow

Drist, false

[Srev.

Udhast, hunger

Gushthani, house

Tandrai, mouse

Hindwana,water-melon

Righa, plain

Kargha, crow

Morgha, bird

Khka, horn

Phanai, shoes

Piratha, thirst

Osai, deer

Sawe, hare Pakka, cooked Ku,ai, well

Burod, wolf Ama, raw Ghar, mountain

Gidad, jackal Rassai, rope Bhana, plate

Yaya, bear Lakai, tail

1 ik 7 sath 13 tro 19 kunnai

2 di 8 akht 14 tsouda 20 bhya

3 tra 9 nab 15 panzi 30 bhyouda

4 tsor 10 dah 16 khod 40 du bhya

5 pants 11 iko 17 sato

6 kho 12 bo 18 akhto

‘A VocABULARY OF THE LANGUAGE, SPOKEN IN THE HIGHLANDS

oF DEER.

Vocabulary.

Pand pisha, show the road

Pich de, give a kiss

Maga, don’t

Shilcha oth, I am thirsty

Bal, hair

Ghat ag, whence have you come ?

Andefhtag, I came thence

Jib, tongue Shid, milk

Masht, throat

Shalit, will yeu sell?

Maya, curds

Chot, cheese

Bat, rice

Mulland, dead

Pedah, ill

Kichu, take away

Pachha, cook (impera-

tive)

Go il, bread

Mish, man

Kha, eat

An, bring

I’s, woman

Po, drink

God, horse

Gad, clarified butter

Ma,il, buttermilk

Chond, writing

Chanti, alive

Jal, light (imperative)

Pisht, flour

Wahe, water

Chau, begone

Uthi, get up

Chi ain pand, go this road

Buchhakot, 1 am hungry

Dat, full

Paneth, money

Jath, wool

Andeshki chon, I will go there

Gomb, wheat

Mas, meat

No, il, cap

Shah, put on (impera-

tive)

Yar, friend

Jar, fight

Mar, kill

‘Taran, forehead

Daidh, lip

Da,ir, chin

Kvhasha, cheek

Thoho, hand

Jang, calf of leg

Gabit, anus

Shaya, come Gau, bull Jola, speech

Beh, sit Tikod, girl Pi, son

Jola, speak Mekide, give me Ghin, take

Ga, cow Ra,it, might Dis, day

Angyur, finger

Miikanth, buying

Chail, goat

Birbir, tiger

Rouns, musk deer

Shirmukh, hyena

785

1838.] Vocabulary of the Moghal Aimaks.

Yiu, barley Migar, joy Shish, head

Gujur, clothes Achhi, eye Khor, foot

Shirbal, trousers Nistur, nose Erkas, breast

Si, sew Kan, ear Us, strike

Ghalim, enemy Dand, tooth Ting, back

1 Yak 6 sho 11 ika 16 shohud

2 do 7 shat 12 biyaha 17 sataha

3 shta 8 hasht 13 sheltaha 18 hastaha

4 chor 9 nob 14 choha 19 unbist

5 panch 10 dash 15 panchi 20 bis

A VocABULARY OF THE LANGUAGE oF THE MoGHatLn AIMAKS.

Introduction.

The Moghals are one of the four Aimaks; they inhabit the country

of Baghrdan and Mat igan, the former is subject to Candahar the

latter to Herat.

A story is told that one of the kings of Persia sent for a Moghal

Aimak, to inquire the structure of his language, and was so disgusted

with the discordancy of its sounds that he ordered the inan to be killed.

While the executioners were preparing to strike off his head, the

king, to give the culprit a last chance, inquired the Moghali for

“‘ face.” The man answered “nur” which in Persian signifies “light :”

this lucky answer it is said saved the credit of the Moghal language

and the head of its propounder or lecturer,

Odur, day

Soni, night

Naran, warmth

Ghar, hand

Koun, boy

Wokin, girl

Baba, father

Turuksan, brother

Khwar, sister

Ussun, water

Ghar, fire

Ukpang, bread

Shahar, city

Deh, village

Darakht, tree

Morin, horse

Morin, mare

Nakchir, deer

Eljigan, ass

Murgh, fowl

Teman, camel

Wataga, bear

Sunu, milk

Unda, butter-milk

a eS

Vocabulary.

Ahin, iron

Bizi, monkey

China, wolf

Nokai, dog

Buz, goat

Saghal, beard

Saghligh, sheep

Ukarr, a bull

Wina, cow

Sughul, a calf

Bughdai, wheat

Arpa, barley

Ghurul, flour

Chighan, rice

Anar, pomegranate

Angir, grapes

Pyaz onion

Sir, leek

Zardak, carrot

Dapsuny, salt

Tosun, clarified butter

Khagina, egg

‘Tarakh, curds

Kagar, earth

Surab, lead

Brinj, brass

Tilla, gold

Nukara, silver

Kul, food

Gesal, belly

Kabr, nose

Nuddun, eye

Kelan, tongue

Kala, chin

Undun, trousers

Kilghasun, wool

Naka, shoes

Girr, house

Kongan, light

Ulan, red

Koka, green

Shira, yellow

Burghaja, cooked

Ould, blind

Ukuba, dead

Nira, name

Yamal, saddle

Oula, hill

786

Khisht, brick

Oda, above

Dunda, in

Yndar, here

Javla, before

Ghimst, nail

Ekin, head

Chakin, ear

Nir, face

Shuddun, tooth

Kela, speech

Kujunn, neck

Gesu, hair

Vocabulary of the Moghal Aimaks.

Chaghan, white

Kara, black

Mor, road

Kham, raw

Lang, lame

Ebat, pain

Chah, well

Kulba, plough

Ghajar, plain

Khirja, hut

Shewa, below

Ghadana, out

Tindar, there

[ Serr.

Uchkodar, yesterday

Kuri, stone

Keja, when

Enakai, now

Han, yes

Yema, why

Be, I

Te, he

Inodar, to-day

Nuntar, sleep

Modun, wood

Khana, where

Bas, enough

Malghai, cap Koina, after Ogai, no

Khatun, woman Khub, good La, not

Kor, breeches tie Watar, quick Chi, thou

Saman, grass Bad, bad Ekada, many

1 nikka 5 tabun

2 koyar 6 jolan

3 ghorban 7 jurghan,

4 dorban &e. &c.

Verbs.

¥ra, come Ap, take up Hala, kill

¥da, eat Umaz, put on Guilya, run

Buz, rise Orchi, go Tali, put

Barre, catch Son, sit Unnu, mount

Bi niwla, don’t cry Hug, heat

Sentences.

Nam chi yama bi

Kedi turuksan betar

Kaun indai ira

Bazar tu horchi sin hachara bi-

dandu ,

Malghai non yemagaja lon masu-

ninchi

Kanaur chi nantar

Ga buz

Ghar mence ebatunna

Umur tamkedi sal be

Indasa ta Cabil kedtr mor be

Orda mani koyar rupe kocharpa

Katai mani niraini Halim Jan be

Morini tani kimatni kedi be

Jndasa ta farrah morni kiraini kedt

Baba tani amdun be

Amdun ogai be ena ghorban sal beki

okuja

Turuksan mani tani nantar

Chaghan bulja saghal mani

Bidanasai yam gaji kashuda janta

Nazar timi niran ki modr bayish

ikina

Agarchi Ahlas ugai bechi turuksan

raikj

What is your name ?

How many brothers have you ?

Come here, boy.

Go to the bazar and bring me some

mill.

Why don’t you wear a new cap?

Where are you going?

Rise early.

My hand pains me.

How old are you?

How far is Cabil from this?

I have two rupees left.

Halim Jan is the name of my chief.

What is the price of your horse ?

What is the hire of a horse from

this to Tarrah ?

Is your father alive?

He is not alive, he died 3 years ago,

Do you know my brother ?

Your beard has turned grey.

Why are you angry with me ?

It looks as if it would rain to-day.

If you are employed send your bro-

ther.

1838.]

Walka satani gham into barina

Nikka odurton kedi mor orchi nanta

Morni yamal ke ki unusunna

Odur bega burja boz ki warchi ena

Bida ira labda /hismat tortani enaka

rukhsat kitin} ki warchya girtuna

Dundadu mani kudal beyagaga

Undii dundanijj awaza bila ka

Muhammad Shah tkujanna

Eljiganin mani uchkan soni kulaghai

achichanna ; daisunni katkair yat-

rajanne nikka mehman bila teni

Note on the New Zealand Caterpiller.

787

How are you taxed in your country ?

How far can you go a day ? :

Saddle the horse that I may take a

ride.

The day is far spent rise and let

uS go.

I came to wait on you, now give me

leave to go home.

Let there be no deceit between you

and me.

There was a report in the camp

that Muhammad Shah was dead.

Yesternight a thief stole an ass of

mine by cutting his tether; the

thief also stole an ass of a guest

eljiganin kulaghai achichanna of mine.

IV.—WNote on the New Zealand Caterpillar. By G. Evans, Esq.

Curator of the As. Soc. Museum.

After a careful scrutiny of the New Zealand caterpillar entrusted to

my charge at a former meeting and on which I was requested to report

as to the precise, or most. probable nature of the remarkable and appa-

rently anomalous connection existing between the animal and the

vegetable fibril projecting from its head (an extraordinary feature in

the economy of this curious insect that has led to the fanciful belief

that we have here an unequivocal instance before us of animal and

vegetable life linked together in one continuous existence) I am led to

the following conclusions.

That the caterpillar, the subject of our speculatiotis and present in-

quiry, is the larva of a lepidopterous insect, that contrary to the general

law of its own order, it neither fabricates a cocoon, nor constructs any

kind of defence to protect itself from injury for the time it has to con-

tinue in the aurelia or chrysalis state, but as some provision is doubt-

less necessary for its future preservation, to enable it to fulfil its desti-

ny as intended by nature, it resorts to another expedient equally

efficacious and tending to the same wise and benificent ends, and this

is by artfully suspending itself by the head from some part of the tree

or plant on which it feeds, in which pendulous state it continues

stationary and undergoes its natural metamorphosis.

The manner by which it contrives to attach itself to the slender

tendril, (or vegetable fungus as some have considered it,) and which is

truly pure vegetable matter, anda continuous part of the same tree it

derives its support from, appears to be simple and easy of explanation,

788 Vote on the New Zealand Caterpiller. [Sepr.

and, if I am right in my solution of the mystery, it is effected in the

following way.

A twig or tendril of the tree, or more probably a climbing plant, on

which it subsists in the larva state, having been selected for its pur-

pose, the caterpillar smooths off the end with its sharp mandibles and

thus forms a clean and even surface to proceed upon. It then splits the

bark and vegetable fibres for a short distance up the stem, separates

the divided portions and insinuates its head between the intervals so

formed, leaving the divided ends to close over and by their compressing

force to retain the head in a fixed position, when by the aid of a kind

of gluten plentifully supplied from all parts of the body, and apparently

possessing the properties of caoutchouc, the two dissimilar bodies are

firmly glued as it were into one; in this vertical posture I conclude

the transformations from one stage to another pass on, till the imago or

winged form is assumed. Beyond the idea of mechanical support on

the one hand and self-preservation on the other inherent throughout

all animated nature, it is difficult to assign to this curious appendage

any other more suitable office, and what would seem to give some sup-

port for this conclusion is my having detected what has every appear-

ance of being the divided and radiating fibres of the stem, extending

over the head of the caterpillar as before explained, but the specimens

are in such a dried and unfit state for an investigation of this nature,

that I can only offer what I have here stated as a provisional exposition

to be confirmed or invalidated by more competent persons, whose

advantages may afford a fuller scope for their investigations: to sup-

pose that animal and vegetable matter, each possessed as we know they

are of different and distinct properties, (though both composed of the

elements of common matter,) can ever become continuous and co-exis-

tent is irrational and contrary to the common laws of nature, for the

changes and operations that take place within themselves separately

and individually, are too widely diversified ever to admit of such a rela-

tion as the one here erroneously conceived.

Sept. srd, 1838.

Note,.—EDWARDS, in his Gleanings of Natural History, a work published above

70 years ago, mentions an insect that was brought from Dominica and of many

more found at the same place, having a fungus shooting from the head, but he gives

no solution of the extraordinary phenomenon.

1838. | Péh Buddhistical Annals. Fa

V.—An examination of the Paéli Buddhistical Annals, No. 3. By

the Hon ble Gronce Turnour, Esq. Ceylon Civil Service.

[Continued from page 701.]

Concerning the four Buppua of this kappo.

Extracts from the Atthakatha called the Maduratthawilésini on the

Buddhawanso, which is the fourteenth book in the Khudakanikayo

of the Suttapitako.

The Buddhdawanso purports to be the narrative of the history of the

last twenty-four Buddha who have appeared during the last twelve

regenerations of the world; and, as will be shown by the ensuing

quotations, it was delivered by SAxya himself in the first year of his

Buddhohood, for the purpose of convincing his royal kinsmen, that the

mendicant life he was leading ought not to be regarded by them in the

light of a degradation,

In this instance also, for the reasons explained, I give the preference

to the Atthakathd. ‘The following are the names of the twenty-four

Buddha exclusive of SAxya, and the age in which each appeared, of

whom the text and the commentary treat.

In the 12th kappo from the present one, four Buddha appeared, the

last of whom was Di’PANKaARO, the Ist of the twenty-four alluded to

above.

In the 11th ditto; 2nd, KonpAnno.

In the 10th ditto; 3rd, Maneato; 4th, Sumano; 5th Rewaro; °

6th, SopuHITo.

In the 9th ditto ; 7th, ANomapDAss1; 8th, Papumo; 9th, NARADo.

In the 8th ditto ; 10th, PapumuTTARo.

In the 7th ditto; 11th, SumEepo; 12th, Susaro.

In the 6th ditto; 15th, Pryapass1; 14th, Atruapasst; 15th,

-DHaAmMaADASSI. “

In the 5th ditto ; 16th, SipaTTHO.

In the 4th ditto ; 17th, Tisso ; 18th, Pausso.

In the 3rd ditto; 19th, Wipassr.

In the last ditto ; 20th, Sixu1 ; 21st, WessaBnu.

In the present ditto; 22nd, Kaxusanpuo; 23rd, Ko’'NAGAMANO;

24th, KAssaro; GotTamo, METTEyyo, who is yet to appear.

As however, this article is only designed to advert to events connect-

ed with the present creation, I shall commence with the history of the

Kaxkusanpuo, after giving a few of the introductory observations furs

790 Pah Buddhistical Annals. (Serr.

nished by BupDHOGHOSO at the commencement of his commentary on

the Buddhawanso. He thus expresses himself.

‘‘ By whom was this (Buddhawanso) propounded? Where, on whose or what

account, and when was it delivered? Whose discourse is it, and how has it been

perpetuated ?

‘* In the first instance, concisely explaining all these points, I shall then enter

upon a detailed commentary on the Buddhawanso.

‘* By whom was this Buddhawanso propounded ? It was seeinee by the supreme

Buddho, who had acquired an infallible knowledge of all the dhanmd, who was

gifted with the ten powers, who had achieved the four wesarajjdni, was the raja

of dhanmd, the lord of dhanmd, the omniscient TATHA’GATO.

‘¢ Where did he propound it ? He propounded it at the great city Kapilawatthu at the

great Negrédho wihdro, in the act of perambulating on the Ratanachankamo, which

attracted the gaze of dewa and of men by its pre-eminent and exquisite beauty.

‘‘ On whose account ? He propounded it for the benefit of twenty-two thousand

kinsmen, and of innumerable kdtiyo of déwo and men.

‘* On what account? He propounded it that he might rescue them from the four

Ogha (torrents of the passions).

<* Where did he propoundit ? BHAGAWA, during the first twenty years of his Bud-

dhohood led a houseless life (of a pilgrim), sojourning at such places as he found

most convenient to dwell in; viz. out of regard for Bdrdnasi he tarried the first

year at the Isipatanan, an edifice (in that city) near which no living creature could

be deprived of life,—establishing the supremacy of his faith, and administering to

eighteen kétiyo of brahmans the heavenly draught (nibénan). The second year, he

dwelt at the Wéluwano mahdé wihdro in Rdjagahan for the spiritual welfare of that

city. The third and fourth years he continued at the same place. The fifth year,

out of consideration for Weésali he dwelt in the Kutdgdra hail in the Mahdwano

wihadro near that city. The sixth at the Makulo mountain. The seventh at Tawa-

tensa Bhawano (one of the Dewaléka). The eighth year, for the welfare of the San-

sumara*® mountain near Bhuggo, he dwelt iu the wilderness of Bhésakala. The ninth

year, at Késambia. The tenth year, in the Paraleyyako wilderness. The eleventh

year, in the brahman village Na/d. The twelfth at Wéranja. The thirteenth at the

Chak mountain. The fourteenth at the Jétawano Maha wihdro in Sdwatthipura.

The fifteenth at the great city Kapilawatthu. The sixteenth at Alawi subduing Ala-

wako (an evil spirit) ; and administering the heavenly draught to eighty-four thou-

sand living creatures. The seventeenth at Rajagahan. The eighteenth at the Chalt

mountain. The nineteenth at the same place, and he resided the twentieth at Raja-

gahan. From that period he exclusively dwelt either at the Jétawano maha wihdro

for the spiritual welfare of Sdwatihipura, or at Pubbdrdmo for the welfare of Sakeéta-

pura, deriving his subsistence} by alms (from those cities).

* Sunsumdro is synonimous with Kapilo, in Singhalese Kimbulwatpura, the birth

place of Gotomo BuppuHo.

tT In those days, Buddhistical religious institutions possessed no endowments, and

the priesthood entirely subsisted on alms. It is stated to be mentioned elsewhere,

though the passage has not been shown to me yet, that the period of SA’KYA’S sojourn

at Sdwatthipura was nine, and at Sdkétupura sixteen years. By residence however,

at any place is not to be understood an uninterrupted residence of the whole year,

The year is divided into the hémanto (snowy or cold), gemhdno (hot) and wassano

(rainy). During the two former the Buddhist priesthood were required to devote

themselves exclusively to a life of pilgrimage, and in the last, to have a fixed abode

1838. ] Pali Buddhistical Annals, 79)

‘ On SATTHA (the divine teacher SAkYA) becoming Buddho, he held his first wasso

at the Istpatanan an edifice situated at Bérdnasi at a place so secluded that no wild

animal was disturbed; and having completed his wasso there, repaired to Uruwéla

where he tarried three months. Having there converted the three Jatilians who

were brothers, attended by his fraternity of a thonsand bhikkhus, he proceeded to

Rajagahan, on the full moon day of the month of Maga*, (January-February ;) and

there sojourned two months. Five months had then elapsed, since his departure

from Bérdnasi. The hémanto was also over; and it was also seven or eight days

after the arrival of the emissaryf Upa/y1. That individual in the month of Phag-

guno, (February-March,) thus thought ‘ the hémanto is past, and the wasanto (first

half of the hot season) is arrived ; and it is the time TATHAGATo promised to repair

to Kapilawatihu.’ Waving thus reflected, he set forth the gratifications of a visit to

his native city in a poem of sixty verses (to BUDDHO).

“¢ Thereupon SaTTHA’, on his hearing this appeal, disposed to gratify the wishes of

his relatives, attended by ten thousand (bhikkhus) of various tribes, from Anga and

Magadha, and by ten thousand from Kapilawatthu, being altogether twenty thousand

sanctified arahanta, set out from Rdjagahan. By only travelling daily at the rate of

one ydjanat, he reached the city of Kapilawatthu, which is distant from Rdjagahan

sixty yo’jand, in two months: and in order that he might command the reverence of

his relations, he performed a miracle of two opposite results. It was upon this

occasion, that he propounded the Buddhawanso.

“‘ Whose discourse is it? It isthe discourse of the Supreme Buddho, who is not

to be compared with the priesthood, and the Pachchi Buddha.

‘¢ By whom has it been perpetuated? It has been perpetuated by the generation, or

unbroken succession, of the Thé7é (elders of the priesthood). This is that succes-

sion: SARIPUTTO théro, BHADDAJI, TISSOKOSYAPUTTO, SIGGAWO, MOGGALI-

PuTTo§, SUDATTO, DHAMMIKo, DASAKO, SonAKO, REWATO. By these it was

brought to the period when the third convocation was held.

“‘ If it be asked, how has it subsequently (to the third convocation) been perpe-

tuated by their disciples? Be it understood, that in the same manner, it has been

brought down to the present day, by the transmission from preceptor to disciple.

‘¢ By thus much explanation alone, it will be understood, by whom, where, for

whose edification, on whose account, and when it was propounded ; whose discourse

it was, and by whom it has been perpetuated. It now behoves unto the expounder

of this commentary, to enter upon his general explanation (of his work).

This Atthawannand is the (niddnen) repository of the history in part of a remote

antiquity; in part of comparatively moderh, and in part of contemporaneous

charging themselves with certain stationary religious duties. Though the Buddhist

priests have lost in Ceylon much of their mendicant character, from the age in which

their temples became endowed with lands, the observance of wasso is so far pre-

served still, that every priest of any repute is in general invited by some wealthy

individual, or by a community, to take up his residence at some selected place for

the wassdno, where he is provided with an habitation and his subsistence, and is

treated with great respect.

* The text gives Russamaso (December-January), which is considered to be a cle-

rical error,

+ An emissary from Kupilawatthu sent by SUDDHODANO, the father of BuDDHO,

to entreat of him to be respectably maintained by his family, instead of leading the

life of a religious mendicant,

¥ About 16 miles.

§ Not MoGGALipuTTATISSo by whom the third convocation was regulated.

792 Péli Buddhistical Annals. (Serr.

events. The illustration of these three portions of the history, in a manner to be

readily comprehended, would be an important work. Those who attend thereto and

acquire a knowledge thereof from the commencement would Jay up a store of valuable

knowledge. I shall therefore enter upon the exposition of these niddndni, rendering

(their imports) manifest. Therein (in the study of this exposition) due notice

should be taken of the division of the three nidgndni.

‘¢ The nature (of the three niddndni) may be thus briefly explained : the history

extending from the age in which the sacred assurance was vouchsafed to the Maha.

satto* at the feet of Di’‘panKkaro Bvuddhof, until by his death in the charac-

ter of WessANTARO, he was regenerated in the Tawatinsa déwaléko, is called the

Duré-niddndn or the history of remote antiquity. The history extending from the

translation by death from Tawatinsa to the attainment of omniscience at the foot of

the Bodhi, is called the awidi&ré-niddndn or comparatively modern history. The

contemporaneous history contains records such as this, ‘ at such a period BHaGawa'

dwells at Sdwatthi, at the Jétawanno wibaro, an edifice belonging to ANATHO, a

dispenser of charity :’ ‘ he dwells at Rdjagahan at the Weéluwano wiharo (the wiharo

in a bamboo grove) at which the squirrels are regularly fed,’ ‘ he dwells at Wésdli in

the Kitdgdra hall in the great wilderness.’ In this manner whatever intervenes

from the attainment of omniscience at the foot of the Bédhi tree, until hls deathbed

(scene) in obtaining mahdé parinibbdnan, whatever takes place in the interval, be it

understood that wherever he may have tarried, is included under the santiké-nidanan,

resident or contemporaneous history. In these few words an explanation exclu-

sively of three niddndni, viz. duré, awiduré and santiké has been afforded.”’

I now proceed to quote from the Atthakathd on the Dwéwisati-bud-

dhawanso or the genealogy of the twenty-second Buddha.

‘‘ From the kappo in which the Syambhu, WEssABHu, attained parinibbdnan during

twenty-nine kappé, no luminariest like suns, the vanquishers of darkness, appeared,

In this present Bhadda kappo§ four Buddha have already appeared ; viz. KaxKus-

ANDHO, KonA’GAMO, KassaPo and our own Buddho (Go’Tamo), The Bhagawé

Metteyyo will be born hereafter. As this kappo is destined to comprize the manifes-

tation of five Buddhd, it has been designated a Buddha kappo by BHAGawa’.

“‘ Of these, KAKUSANDHO having fulfilled his probationary destinies, and been

regenerated in the Tusitapura (Déwdléké), after death there, he was conceived in the

womb of WISAKHA the principal wife of AGGIDATYo, the Prohité brahman, who was

the instructor in the tenets and doctrines of his faith, of the raja Kux’mo in the

Khémanagara.

‘¢ Whenever raéjas uphold, reverence, make offerings and render homages to, the

brahmans, the Bédhisattal| are born in the brahman tribe; and whenever the brah-

mans uphold, reverence, make offerings and render homage to the rajas, then they

are born in the raja tribe.

‘* At this period the brahmans were receiving the services and homage of the réjas,

and on that account the illustrious personage, who was the true KAKUSANDHO

was manifested in a pure brahman tribe, endowed with prosperity and greatness,

causing the hundred Chakkawaldni, of which the perishable universe is composed,

* The name of Buddho prior to his attaining Buddhohood, literally ‘* the great

mortal,’’

+ Vide Mahawanso, p. xxx11.

} Supreme Buddha.

§ From the root Bhaddi excellence,

|| Iodividuals destined to be supreme Buddha,

1838.] : Péli Buddhistical Annals. 793

to glorify him, and to quake (with joy) ; and, in the manner before described, mira-

cles were performed.

‘¢ At the termination of ten months, he issued from his mother’s womb, like a flame

of fire from a golden furnace, and lived the life of a layman, maintaining domestic

relations for four thousand years. He had three palaces called Ruchi, Suruchi and

Wadhana ; and an establishment of thirty thousand females, of whom the brahman

R6cHINI was his principal consort.

‘¢ Having (already) been visited with the four prescribed warnings, at the birth of

his illustrious son Urraro by the brahman RécHINI, he took his final departure, in

his state car drawn by six high bred horses, and entered into the priesthood :—in

pursuance of whose example forty thousand persons also entered into the priest-

hood.

“« Attended by them, having for eight months undergone the probationary ordeals,

on the full moon day of the month of Wésako, having partaken of the sweet rice

boiled in milk for him by the daughter of the brahman WAJARUDO, in the brahman

village Sucharindo ; and having taken his noon rest in the Khadira wilderness, in

the afternoon, accepting from one SUBHADDHO, a corn-grower, eight handsful of

grass, and approaching the Sirisa (the sirisa acacia) his sacred tree, which was

exhaling a heavenly fragrance similar to that of the pdfali before described, and

spreading out a sward carpet thirty-four cubits in breadth, seating himself on that

throne he achieved supreme Buddhohood.

‘¢ Having chaunted forth the uddnan (hymn of joy) and passed there seven times

seven days, satisfying himself that the forty thousand bhikkhus who had been ordained

with himself were qualified to comprehend the sachapatiwédé (the four sublime truths

of Buddhism), he repaired in a single day to Isipataunan, an edifice neag which no

living creature could be deprived of life, situated in the neighbourhood of Makhilana-

gara (Benares), and in the midst of those disciples he proclaimed the supremacy of

his faith.’’

After detailing some further particulars of the early acts of Kaxu-

SANDHO the commentary proceeds thus :

‘¢ At that period our Bédhisatto (SAKYA) existed in the person of the (reigning)

monarch named KuHEMO; and presented alms, dishes, robes and (other) established

alms-offerings to the priesthood of whom the Buddho (KAKUSANDHO) was the

chief; and provided sandal-wood and medical drugs, bestowing also sacerdotal gifts.

Attending to his doctrinal discourses he became a convert (to Buddhism) and was

ordained a priest in the fraternity of that Bhagawa. The divine teacher (KAKU-

SANDHO) predicted to him that he would hereafter, within this kappo, himself be-

come a Buddho.

‘‘ The native city of this enlightened KAKUSANDHO Bhagawa was Khémana-

garan: his father was the brahman AGGIDATTO and his mother ‘the brahman

WISAKHA. His chief disciples were WiDHURO and SANJINO: his Upatthdyako

(assistant disciple) was BuppDuIyo; his two chief priestesses were SAIna and

CHAMPACBA ; his sacred tree the Mahasirisa : his stature forty cubits, the effulgence

of his glory extended ten ydjand around ; the term of his existence was forty thousand

years ; his consort (while he was a layman) was the brahman Rocuint; his son

UTTARO, and he departed (on severing himself from lay connections), in his car drawn

by horses of the ajanna breed.”’

Then follows a metrical repetition of the foregoing particulars quot-

ed from the Buddhawanso itself, and other details connected with

Kaxusanpuo to the end of that chapter, which it is unnecessary to

adduce in this place.

oe 2

794 Péli Buddhistical Annals. (Serr.

The genealogy of the twenty-third Buddho.

‘¢ Subsequent to KAKUSANDHO Bhagawé4 and to the extinction of his religicn,

when the term of human existence extended to thirty thousand years, the divine sage

KoNnaA’/GAMANO, whose heart was always benevolently inclined to others, was mani-

fested.

*¢ It might appear from this statement that the term of human existence was gra-

dually curtailed; but such was not the case. Be it understood, that it had been

curtailed, and having been augmented was again reduced. For example in this kappo

the Bhagawé KAKUSANDHO was born, whose allotted term of existence was for-

ty thousand years, That term of existence gradually decreasing was reduced to a

term of ten years ; and subsequently increasing again to an Asankheyyan, and from

that point again diminishing, had arrived at the term of thirty thousand years. Be

it understood, that it was at that conjuncture that the Bhagawa Ko’/NA’GAMANO

was born. That personage having fulfilled his probationary courses, and been

regenerated in the Tusitapura Déwaloko, and having demised there, was conceived ia

the womb of UTTARA’, a lovely and youthful brahmani, the consort of the brahman

ANNADATTO of the city Sébhawatte ; and at the termination of ten months issued

forth from the womb of his mother, in the Sébhawatte pleasure garden.

‘6 At the instant of his birth, throughout Jambudipo, a golden shower (kanakawas-

sdn) descended ; and from that circumstance he acquired the appellation of KANna-

KA’/GAMANO, which name of his, by process of change, became KO’NA’/GAMANO.

‘¢ He lived in the domestic relations of a layman for three thousand years, and he

had three palaces, Tusitda, Santasita and Santuttho, and sixteen thousand women, of

whom the brahman RUCHIGANTTHA’ was his principal consort. Having been visit-

ed by the four prescribed warnings, on the birth of his son Sarrawa/Ho by Ru-

CHIGANTTHA’, mounting his superb state elephant, and taking his final departure

(from wordly grandeur) he entered into priesthood ; and his thirty thousand follow-

ers following his example, also entered into the sacerdotal order.

‘¢ Having for four months (singly) undergone the probationary ordeals, and having

on the full moon day of the month of wesako, partaken of the rice sweetened by being

boiled in milk, which was offered to him by the daughter of the brahman AGGisk/No,

and enjoyed his noonday rest on the Khadira forest, in the afternoon, accepting

the eight bundles of grass which were presented to him by TINDUKO, a cultivator,—

approaching (unattended) from the southward his sacred tree, the udumbaro, (Ficus

glomerata)—which was adorned with fruit as described in the instance of the

pundarika tree,—and spreading out & sward carpet twenty cubits in breadth,

seated on that throne, he annihilated the power of death, by attaining the wisdom

of the ten powers (Buddhohood) and he chaunted forth the Udanan,

‘¢ Passing there seven times seven days, and having by his inspiration seen the

proficiency of the thirty thousand bhikkhus who were ordained at the same time as

himself,—rising aloft into the air he descended at the Isipatandn near the city

Sudassano*.

’ “6 Alighting in the midst of them, he proclaimed the supremacy of his faith; and on

that occasion he procured for a thousand kdtiyo of living beings the first stage of

sanctification. Subsequently performing a miracle. productive of two conflicting

results, at the foot of the great sdlo tree, at the gate of Sundaranagaran he admi-

nistered dhammo, the draught of heaven, to twenty thousand? kétiyo of living

beings ; and procured for them the second stage of sanctification ; and on the occa-

sion of this Bhagawa expounding the Abhidhanmopitako to his mother UTTrara’

and the déwata of the bundred thousand Chakkawaléni, who had assembled for that

purpose, ten thousand /dtiyo of living beings attained the third stage of sancti-

fication.’’

* "Nhe name of Benares at that time.

oe Se

So yp he a NS aS tae FS Se ee

1838. ] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 795

Here again the above particulars are repeated, being quotation,

from the text of the Buddhawanso. This quotation is also in verse,

but is less detailed, though substantially the same as the preceding.

The commentary then proceeds, as in the instance of the Buddho Ka-

KUSANDHO, first to give in prose the remaining particulars connected

with the Buddhohood of Ké6nAcamano, and then to quote the passages

from the text of the Buddhawanso as propounded by Séxya. I avail

myself in this instance of a short quotation from the text of the Bud-

dhawanso as the revelation it contains is both concise and comprehen-

sive.

‘¢ T was at that period the monarch PassatTo, powerful by my allies and minis-

ters, as well as by my numerous armies. Having waited upon Buddho, (Ké6NA/GA-

MANO) and attended to his supreme dhammo, and after obtaining the permission of

that vanquisher and his priesthood, having presented them every offering’ wished

for, for refreshment, I presented also the shawls with rough surfaces, China silks,

shawls made of the silk of silk-worms, blankets, and slippers embroidered with gold,

to the divine sage and his disciples. The said Muwnt seated in the midst of his

priesthood thus predicted of me. ‘ Within this Bhaddakappo this individual will

become Buddho.’”?

Here the commentator, BuppHaeudso, notes that he has omitted some

portions of the revelations which were probably not strictly applicable

to the subject under illustration, and resumes SAxya’s discourse as

follows :

‘¢On hearing this prediction of his (Ké6nA’GAMANo’S) I (SA’KyA) exceedingly

rejoiced, instantly resolved to fulfil, thereafter, the ten probationary courses. Seek.

ing, therefore, the gift of omniscience, presenting alms tothe chief of men (K6NA’-

GAMANO) I entered into priesthood in the fraternity of that vanquisher, abdicating

my empire.”

After again omitting an interesting portion of the revelation, not

connected with the subject under consideration, the commentary pro-

ceeds as follows with the quotation from the text of the Buddhawanso.

‘¢ Sobhito was his city—-and S6BH6 the name of the ruling monarch: that Bud-

dho’s father’s family dwelt in that city. The father of that Buddho, the divine sage

K6na’GAMANO was the brahman YONNADATToO, and his mother Urrara’. His

chief disciples were BrHd6so and UTTaro; and his assistant disciple Sorru1jo ; his

chief priestesses SAMUDDA and Urrara’, and the sacred tree of that Bhagawd

was the udumbaro. In his stature, the Buddho was thirty cubits, and he was

invested with a golden glory like the flames issuing from a blacksmith’s forge. The

term of existence of the Buddho was thirty thousand years. During that period, he

rescued great multitudes (from the misery of transmigration). Having established

dhammo, as (firmly as) a chetiyo which is decorated with the embellishments of

dhammo, and with garlands of the flowers of dhammo—he, together with his disciples,

attained nibbdnan. His miraculous essence, as well a3 his disciples, and his pro-

mulgated dhammo, all vanished in as much as all that is transitory is perishable.’’

The genealogy of the twenty-fourth Buddho Kassapo.

«¢ Subsequent to K6NA’GAMANO, the Buddho Kassapo, the chief of bipeds

the raja of dhammo and the author of light—having bestowed largely in alms, and

having conferred charity extensively aud consoled the destitute, relinquishing (the

796 Péli Buddhistical Annals. [Sepr.

worldly riches which were) the rewards of his piety, and (escaping from his domes-

tic ties) like unto a bull rushing from the restraints of his pen, achieved supreme Bud-

dhohood ; and this chief of the universe, KassaPpo, proclaiming his faith, vouchsafed ©

to twenty thousand kétiyo of living creatures, the first stage of sanctification.’’

After a few explanatory remarks on the foregoing passage, the com-

mentator again quotes from the text, setting forth the pilgrimages and

discourses of Kassapro, by means of which he acquired, as his prede-

cessors had done, the three states of sanctification for the living crea-

tures then in existence. The commentary then gives the following

extract from the Buddhawanso.

‘¢T (Sa’KYA) at that period, was one JoTIPA’LO, excelling in the mantra, and

perfect master of the three wédd, which I used to rehearse by note. I had achiev-

ed the knowledge of signs of the itikdso and of divination. I could reveal what was

in the earth below, and the heavens above, and was in the exercise of these powers,

free from all corporeal ailments. KAssapro Bhagawé had then a certain assis-

tant disciple named GHaTIKA’RO who was treated with great honor, possessed a

well regulated mind, and had subdued the dominion of sin, by the virtue of the third

state of sanctification. The said GHATIKA’RO conducted me to the vanquisher KAS-

SAPO, and having listened to his dhammo, I entered into the order of priesthood in

his fraternity. Pursuing (my sacred calling) with zealous devotion, and performing

all my religious obligations without the slightest omission, I fulfilled the ordinances

of the vanquisher ; and having thoroughly acquired a knowledge of the whole scope

of the Buddhistical doctrines composing the nine angdni, as propounded by the van-

quisher, I glorified that dispensation of the vanquisher. That Buddho also having

witnessed my miraculous attainments thus predicted. This individual will become a

Buddho in this Buddhakappo. On hearing this prediction, astonished and delight-

ed, I at once formed the resolution to fulfil thenceforth the four probationary courses ;

and consequently I led the life of a pilgrim, renouncing all domestic affections,

and in exclusive devotion to the attainment of my Buddhohood, I consigned myself

to that arduous task.’’

The commentary then affords the following particulars regarding the

personal history of KAssapo.

“¢ The native city of that Buddho was called Bavanasi, and the reigning monarch

was KIKI’, and KAssAPo’s family was resident there. His father was the brahman

BRAHMADATTO, and his mother DHANAWATI: his chief disciples were T1sso and

BuHA’/RA’DDWAJO; his assistant disciple SuBBHAMITTO ; his chief female disciples

were AmILA’ and Uruwe’taA’, and the sacred tree of that Bhagaw& was the ni-

grédho. In his stature he was twenty cubits, dazzling like the lightning in the

skies, and refulgent as the full moon; and the term of his existence was twenty

thousand years. He who had existed the whole of that period, redeeming multi-

tudes of living creatures (from the misery of eternal transmigration), rendering dham-

mo refreshing as a pool, and sila like unto fragrant ointment, investing (living crea-

tures) with dhammo as it were their vestments ; sprinkling dhammo as it were the

flowers of a garland, and placing dhammo before those individuals, who were about

to attain the beatitude of nibbdnan as it were a mirror, he vouchsafed to say, behold

the perfection (of my dispensation). And converting sila into a cloak and jhdénan

into a breastplate, he covered (mankind) with the armour of dhammo, and provided

them with the most perfect panoply. Bestowing on them sate as a shield, and @ik-

hinndnan as a sceptre, he conferred dhammo on them as the sword that vanquishes

all that is incompatible with sila, investing them with ¢éwijja as an ornament, and

1838. ] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 797

the four phalé as atiara. He also bestowed on them the six abhindn as a decoration

such as flowers to be worn; assigning the supreme dhammo to them as the white

canopy of dominion which subdues the sins (of heresy); and procuring for them

the consolation (of redemption from transmigration) which resembles a full-blown

flower, he and his disciples attained nibbdnan. As well this incomparable Buddho

who had overcome the dominion of sin, as his perfectly propounded dispensation,

worthy of the invitation ‘ come hither and examine it,’ and his priesthood, illustrious

and strictly observant of sacerdotal discipline, the whole perished, Ifit he asked,

why? ‘ Because all transitory things are doomed to perish.’

‘“‘ The Bhagawa Kassapo expired in the Kdsi country in the Sétewydno garden

in Sétawydnagaran. His corporeal relics did not separate (his bones remaining

jointed after the cremation). The whole of the population of Jambudipo assembled

and constructed a thipo one Yéjanan in height, each brick for its outer work was of

gold, worth a kdti and set with jewels ; and they filled in the inner part with bricks

each worth half a kéti ; its cement was composed of red lead, using the oil of the

téla seed, in the place of water.

‘‘ The said Bhagawé Kassapo, fulfilling the object of his mission for the wel-

fare of mankind, was a sojourner (chiefly) in the city Migadayo (a part of Bérénasi)

in the kingdom of Kdsi rejoicing the universe.

The rest of the Gdthdyo are well known inall their bearings. The account of the

genealogy of the Buddho Kassapo is thus closed in the Atthakatha called the Ma-

dhuraatthawildsant, to the Buddhawanso. In this extent of detail ; the history of the

genealogy of the fwenly-four Buddha is comprehensively concluded. Now in due

course the history of the genealogy of our Buddho presents itself (for relation),

This is his history.

‘‘ Our BoputIsatTrTo (Buddho elect) existed through four Asankheyydni and one

hundred thousand kuppé. His advent has been recognized and predicted by the (last)

twenty-four Buddha, commencing with Di/PANKARO of whose fraternity he was

amember, It has been thus announced by the revelation of those twenty-four Bud- ~

dha ‘there will be no other supreme Buddho subsequent to Kassapo, than this

individual.’

** These are the particulars (of his history). It has been thus explained by Buddho

himself : ‘ the (abhinchdra) final sanction (for attaining Buddhohood) is only obtain.

ed while in the collective possession of these eight attributes, viz. being of the hu-

man nature ; possessing perfect manhood and a propitious destiny ; being gifted

with the privilege to approach a Buddho ; being admitted into sacerdotal ordination ;

being endowed with pious impulses ; being full of holy aspirations and zealously

devoted to his destiny.’ By him who had by the accumulated possession of these

eight attributes, obtained the final sanction of Di’/PANKaRo to attain Buddhohood—

it has also been said ‘ while I was acquiring by all manner of means the qualifica-

tions for Buddhohood, having succeeded in my search, I came in sight of the first

ddnapdramé sanctification.’

*‘ He who had been thus blessed with a sight of the first of the (ten) ddnapdéramité

which lead to Buddhohood, continuing to fulfil his prescribed duties, reached at

length his awatar in the person WessanTaRA (his last existence before attaining

Buddhohood). Whatever those duties might be, they have been described in speak-

ing of the rewards of piety earned by the (other) Buddha elect, who had ensured

their election.

** (Buddho has also said) ‘ Thus individuals of perfect manhood who have been

selected to become Buddha perform their pilgrimage through a hundred kétiyo of

kappé, a long period: they are not subject to be born in the Awichi hell, nor in the

lokantéra hells, nor do they become inhabitants of the Nigghématanha hell, suffering

from thirst and hunger—nor, tenants of the Kalakanjanhd hell, Though they may be

708 Pah Buddhistical Annals. [Sepr,

reproduced in Duggati (a minor hell) in which men are reproduced in the form of

animals, they are not born there a diminutive creature (smaller than a Snipe); nor

Ape produced among the human race, are they ever born blind, nor do they lose

their hearing or become dumb. These selected Buddha moreover are neither pro-

duced in the form of women, of ordinary hermaphrodites, or of hermaphrodites who

periodically alternate their sex. Exempt from all misfortunes they are pure in their

mode of subsistence—avoid heretics and are observant of pious conduct : though they

may be born among the Suwaggd, they are never reproduced in the Brahmaloko asa-

nasatto (as the term of existence there would be too long) ; and they do not possess

the qualification (of the arahat sanctification) which would involve their reproduction

in the Suddhdwdsa brahmaléko (from whence they would never return to the human

world). These righteous individuals, forsaking all worldly advantages, and released

from the bonds of eternity, perform their pilgrimage for the welfare of the world,

fulfilling their probationary courses.’

‘‘ He who was thus proceeding in the prescribed course of his destiny, having at-

tained these (eighteen) attributes, and having thus reached his penultimate awatér in

the person of WESSANTARO (the raja of Jetutaranagaran one of the twenty-five great

cities of Jambudipo) thus spoke. ‘ This earth devoid of the power of discrimination

and unconscious of its blessings and its curses, has been made to quake seven times

by the merit of my charities.’

‘* Having thus performed those great acts of charity which caused the earth to quake

at the close of his prescribed term of existence, from hence he was translated, by.

death, into the realms of Tusitapura. While the Buddho elect was sojourning in

Tusiéapura the haldhalan (tumult) that precedes the advent of every Buddhe came

to pass.

** In each creation there are three such tumults—they are these : the Kappa-haldgha-

lan, the Buddha-haldhalan and the Chakkawatti-haldhalan, It is a proclamation, that

at the termination of one hundred thousand years, the kappo perishes. The déw4

called Kdmawachard, with loosened topknot, and dishevelled hair, and with bewail-

ing countenances—wiping their tears with their hands—clad in red vestments, and

assuming the most revolting forms, wandering through the human world, thus pro-

mulgate their warnings: ‘ Blessed! at the termination of one hundred thousand

years from this date, the kappo is*to perish: this world will then be destroyed :

the great ocean will be completely dried up. This great earth and sirénu (suméru), the

monarch of mountains, will be consumed by fire and utterly destroyed; and the world

will be annihilated as far as the brakmaléko: blessed! embue thyselves with benevo-

lence: blessed! impress thyselves with compassion, universal Jove and strict justice ;

comfort thy father and mother, and reverence the elders of your tribes.’ This is

called the kappa-haldhalan.

‘* Again it is proclaimed that at the terminatiou of one thousand years an omniscient

Buddho will be born in the world. The Déwata who protect the world, wander

through it, proclaiming, ‘ blessed! Buddho will be manifested in the world a

thousand years from this period.’ This is called the Buddha-haldhalan,

‘ Lastly it is proclaimed that, at the termination of a hundred years, a Chakdwatti

réja will be born. The Déwatd, who are the tutelars of the world, wander through

it proclaiming ‘ blessed! at the termination of a hundred years a Chakkawatti raja

will be born.’ Thisis called the Chakkawatti-haldhalan.

** Among these, when the proclamation of the Buddha-haldhalan is heard, all the

Déwata of the ten thousand Chakkawalane assemble at one place, and having ascer-

tained who the human being is who will become Buddho—repairing to him they

invoke him, These invokers, however, only address their petition to him on his

manifesting the pubbanimitté (indications of approaching death in the Déwaléké).

Se rec

1838.] Péii Buddhistical Annals, 799

«« At the conjuncture (in question), the aforesaid assemblage, consisting of the four

great kings (of the dewos )SAKKo (INDRA) SuGA’MO, SANTUSITO and WASAWATTI,

together with the great brdhmas in each Chakkawalan, assembled together in one

Chakkawalan (of the ten thousand) ; and repairing to the Buddho elect on whom

the pubbanimitté had been manifested; thus addressed him. ‘ Blessed! by thee,

the ten probationary courses have been fulfilled, not for the purpose of realizing

the beatitude of a sakko, a brahma or other deity: the state of omniscience has

been sought for by thee, for the purpose of redeeming the world, by attaining

Buddhohood.’ They then thus invoked him: ‘ Mahdwiro! thy time is arrived;

be conceived in the womb of thy mother. Rescuing déwdé and mankind (from the

miseries of sin) vouchsafe (to them) the condition of immortality.’

‘¢ Thereupon the great elect, who was thus entreated by the déwd, without giving

any indication of his having acceded to the prayer of the déwd—reflected succes-

sively on these five principal points ; viz. as to the time (of his advent) ; the quarter

of the world; the country and the tribe in which he should appear ; and who his

mother, and what the term of his existence should be.

‘* On examining, in the first place, whether it is or is not the proper time (for the

advent of a Buddho) if it be found, that the term of human existence is then a

hundred thousand years and upwards, it is not a proper period ; because under so

protracted an existence, the human race have no adequate perceptions of birth,

decav or death. The tenets of the dispensation of (all) the Buddha are insepara-

ble from the recognition of those three points, characteristic of the Buddhist faith.

To those (Buddha) who may expiate on those points, viz. perishability, misery (of

transmigration) and anattd—those (who are gifted with this longevity) would reply ;

‘ what is it they are talking about: it should neither be listened to nor believed.’

The state of sanctification (abhisamayo) is, under those circumstances, unattainable.

While that condition (of longevity) prevails, religion itself is divested of its sancti-

fying influence. Consequently that age is nota proper one (for an advent). Nor

is the age in which the term of human existence is less than one hundred years a

proper one ; because from vices being then predomineat among mankind, the admo-

nition that is imparted to them is not allowed time to produce a lasting affect—

vanishing like the streak drawn on the surface of the water. That also is nota

proper age (for the advent). The proper age is that in which the term of human

existence is less than one hundred thousand and more than one hundred. At the

particular period now in question, the term of human existence was one hundred

years ; and therefore it appeared to be the proper age in which the advent of the

elect should take place.

‘* Then he reflected as to the quarter of the world, contemplating the four quarters

together with their satellites groups; and asin three of them the Buddha do not

manifest themselves, he saw that Jambudipo was the quarter in which he should be

born. And on reflecting as to the country in that great Jambudipo, which is in ex-

tent ten thousand ydjana, in which Buddha are born, he saw that the Majjhima-

désa was the proper one, and he also distinctly foresaw, that there, in Majjhimadésa

Kapilawattha was the city which was destined to be the place of his birth.

‘‘ Thereupon, on pondering on the tribe, he found that the Buddha are not born

in the Wessé or Suddd caste, but either in the Khattiva or Brahma caste, whichever

might at the time be predominent in the world; and he said, ‘now the Khattiya

is the superior. I shall be born therein, and the rajé SUDDHODANo will be my

father.’ And then on considering as to who his mother should be, he said ‘ She

who is destined to be the mother of a Buddho is chaste and suber, and has fulfilled

her probationary career through a hundred thovsand kappé, and preserved uninter-

ruptedly, from her birth, the observance of the five sitdni ; such appears to be the

A 3

800 Péli Buddhistical Annals. (Surr.

princess Ma’ya’: she is destined to be my mother.’ And on inquiring how long

she had yet to live, he found that was only ‘ten months and seven days.

‘‘ Having thus meditated on the five principal points, he signified his acquiescence

in the prayer of the déwata in these words. ‘ Blessed! the time has arrived for my

assuming Buddhohood ;’ adding ‘do ye depart,’ he sent away those déwatd ; and

attended by the déwatd of Tusitapura, he entered the Nandana grove in Tusitapura.

‘“‘ Inall the Déwaloka, there is, most certainly, a Nandana grove (in each) wherein

déwat& hover about, thus invoking (sueh of the déwatd as are about to die): ‘ by

meditating on the reward of thy former acts of piety, when translated from hence

by death, may ye attain a happy destiny.’ He (the Buddho elect) in like manner

surrounded by the déwatd who were calling his former acts of piety to his recollec-

tion, while wandering there, expired ; and was conceived in the womb of ‘the great

Ma’yA’, under the asterism of Uttrdsalha. At the instant of this great personage

being conceived in the womb of his mother, the whole of the ten thousand Chakka-

waldni simultaneously quaked, and thirty-two miraculous indications were manifest-

ed. For the protection as well of the Buddho elect, who had been thus conceived,

as of his mother, four déwatds with sword in hand, mounted guard.

‘‘ Unto the mother of the elect carnal passion was extinguished : she became ex-

alted by the gift vouchsafed to her. Enjoying the most perfect health, and free

from fainting fits, (usual in pregnancy) she was endowed with the power of seeing

the elect in her womb, as it were a thread which is past through a ‘transparent

gem.

‘¢ A womb in which a Buddho elect has reposed is as the sanctuary (in which the

relic is enshrined) in a chetiyo. No human being can again occupy it, or use it. On

that account the mother of a Buddho elect, dying on the seventh day after the birth

of the elect, is regenerated in Tusitapura. Other women give birth to their offspring,

some before the completion of ten months, and some after their completion, seated

or lying’ down. With the mother of a Buddho elect, it is not so. She is delivered,

after having cherished the elect in her womb for precisely ten months. Such is the

peculiarity of the mother of a Buddho elect.

‘¢ The great princess Ma’yA’ having cherished the elect ten months in her womb,

in her pregnant state, longing to repair to the city of her own family, thus applied to

the raja SUDDHODANO’ (her husband) ‘ Lord! I long to repair to the city of Déwa-

dahé.’ The raja signifying his consent by saying ‘ sédhu,’ and ordering the road to

be smoothened from Kapilapura to Déwadahanagardn, and to be decorated with

arches of plantain trees and areca flowers, and with foot cloths, &c. ; and placing

the queen in a newly gilt palanquin, with great splendour and prestige, dispatch-

ed her.

‘* Between those two cities there is a hall of recreation situated in the Sxbini wil-

derness, resorted to by the inhabitants of both cities. At this time, the whole of

the forest trees, from the stem to the top of the branches, were covered with blos-

som. On beholding this blooming forest, resembling the Nandana grove of the

déwatd, ringing with the melody of the sweet-toned Kékila, which enchant the

senses, from amidst the branches and clustering fruit of the forest, like unto the

chants of the celestial songstresses, the queen became desirous of besporting in that

wilderness. ‘The officers of state having reported (this wish) to the raja, (by his

command) escorting the queen, they entered the wilderness. She, repairing to the

foot of the sal tree, at which sports are usually held, was seized with the desire to

lay hold of a branch of that tree, which was straight, smooth, round, and garnished

with blossom, fruit and young sprouts. That branch, as if powerless, yet gifted

with compassion, bending down of its own accord, placed itself near the palm of her

haud. She then laid hold of that branch with her beauteous hand, which was -re

1838.] Pat Buddhistical Annals. 801

splendent with her red well rounded nails, on fingers rosy and round like flower pods,

her arms at the same time glittering with newly burnished arm-rings. Thus

holding that branch, and pausing awhile, she shone forth, casting a halo round her

like that emitted by white fleecy clouds passing over the disk of the moon. She re-

sembled the glimmering lightning, she looked the queen of the celestial Nandana.

Immediately her travails came on; and the multitude having drawn a curtain round

her, retired. While still holding the branch, parturition took place.

‘* At that instant the four great Brahmdzo presented themselves bringing with

them a golden net work. Receiving the elect in that net, and presenting him to

the mother, they said to her, ‘ princess! rejoice, unto thee a son is born.’

‘¢ Other mortals on their issuing from their mothers’ womb, come forth involved

in defilement. Not so, a Buddho elect. A Buddho elect, with extended arms and

legs, and erect in posture, comes forth from his mother’s womb, undefiled by the

impurities of the womb, clean and unsoiled, refulgent as a gem deposited in a Kasmir

shawl. Though such be (the purity of his birth) equally for the accommodation of

the Buddho elect, and of his mother, two streams descending from the skies on

the body of each, refreshed them exquisitely. k

‘* Thereupon the four great kings (of the Déwaldka ) receiving him out of the golden

net from the hands of the attendant brahmany, placed him in an ajinappaweni (anti-

lope’s hide) fitted for state purposes, and delightful to the feel; from their hands,

men received him in a dukula.chumba-takdn. Extricating himself from the hands of

the men, and placing himself on the earth, he looked towards the east. The many

thousand Chakkawaldéni appeared to him as but.a court-yard. Then the déwé and

men of those realms, making offering of garlands of fragrant flowers, &c. made this

exclamation: ‘ O! great man: the equal to thee exists not here ; where will a supe-

rior be found.’ Having in the same manner looked at the ten points of the compass,

without finding his equal; facing the north, he advanced seven paces. He, who

thus advanced, trod on the earth—not on air; was unclad—not clad ; was an infant—

not a person of sixteen years of age (an adult) ; and yet to the multitude he appeared

to advance on air—superbly clad and to be full sixteen years of age.

‘‘ Thereupon stopping at the seventh step, and proclaiming this important an-

nouucement, he shouted forth with the voice of a lion: ‘ I am the most exalted in

the world: I am the most excelleut in the world: I am the supreme in the world:

this is my last existence : henceforth there is no regeneration for me,’ ’’

After mentioning certain circumstances connected with the former

birth of Buppuo, and specifying that on the same day with himself,

there alsocame into existence—the princess YasdparA (his wife) ;

CuHHANNo and KAtupayI, his ministers; his charger Kanthuako ; his

sacred tree, the bddhi; and the four mines of wealth ;—the Atthakathd

proceeds : :

‘‘ The inhabitants of both-cities (Déwadaho and Kapilawatihu) taking charge of

this great personage conveyed him to Kapilawattiu.

‘‘ At that period, a certain ¢dpaso, named KALADE’/WALO, who was a confidant of

the maha r4ja SUDDHODANO, and who had acquired the eight samdépatti, having

taken his meal,—for the purpose of enjoying his noon-day rest,—repaired to the

Tawatinsd realms. He there found the host of déwata, in the Tawatinsd realms,

revelling in joy, and in the exuberance of their felicity, waving cloths over their heads

and asked, ‘ Why is it that ye thus rejoice, in the fulness of heart’s delight ? Tell me

the cause thereof ?? The déwatd thus replied, ‘ Blessed! unto the raja a son is born,

who seated at the foot of the bo tree, having become Buddho, will establish the

bon 2

802 Péli Buddhistical Annals. (Serr.

supremacy of dhammo : and we shall be blessed with the sight of the many attributes

of his Buddhohood, and with the hearing of his dhammo. It is from this cause that

we rejoice.’

‘“‘ Thereupon the said déwata, the tdpaso, on hearing this announcement of theirs,

descending from the supreme Dewaloko, enchanting with its golden glitter; and

entering the palace of the monarch SuDDHODANO, seated himself on the pre-eminent

throne erected therein. He then thus addressed the réja who had accorded to him

a gracious reception. ‘ Raja! to thee a son is born: him I will see.’ The raja

caused the infant, richly clad, to be brought, in order that he (the infant) might do

homage to the fapaso, Déwalo. The feet of the great elect, at that instant, perform-

ing an evolution, planted themselves on the jéia (topknot of Déwalo) which glit-

tered, from its hoariness, like unto the fleecy white cloud impregnated with rain.

-There being no one greater to whom reverence is due than to a Buddho elect, who

bad attained the last stage of existence,—instantly rising from the throne on which

he was seated (Déwalo), bowed down with his clasped hands raised over his head, to

the Buddho elect ; and the raja also, on witnessing this miraculous result, likewise

bowed down to his own son.

‘‘ The tdépaso having perceived the perfection of the immortal attributes of the

elect, was meditating whether he would or would not become the supreme Buddho ;

and while thus meditating, he ascertained by his power of perception into tuturity,

he would certainly become so; and smiling said, ‘ This is the wonderful mortal.’

He again thus meditated: ‘am I, or am I not destined to behold his achievement of

Buddhohood ?’ and said, ‘ Nol am not destined: dying in the interval, though a

thousand Buddha be henceforth manifested, it will not be vouchsafed to me to pars

ticipate in such a blessing : I shall be regenerated in realms inhabited by incorporeal

spirits : never shall I behold the wonderful mortal: a mighty calamity is impending

over me.’ Having thus divined, he wept.

‘* The bystanders remarking, ‘ Our ayyo (revered teacher) having this moment

smiled, has now commenced to weep,’ inquired, ‘Is there any misfortune impend- —

ing over the infant of our ruler ?? The ¢@paso replied, ‘ Unto him there is no ims

pending calamity : beyond all doubt he is destined to become Buddho.’ ‘ Why dost

thou then weep?’ ‘I am not destined to see so wonderful a mortal as this, on his

attaining Buddhohood: m@st assuredly unto me this is an awful calamity. I weep

in the bitterness of my own disappointment.’

‘¢ Thereafter on the fifth day after the birth of the elect, having bathed his head

and nursed him, ‘ let us (said the officers of the court) decide on his name.’ Per-

fuming the palace with the four regal incenses, decorating it with the four prescribed

descriptions of flowers, and causing rice to be dressed in pure milk; and then

assembling eight hundred* brahmans who had achieved the knowledge of three

wéda,—seating them—feasting them on the milk-rice, and paying them due honor—

they required of them to examine the indications (about the person of the elect),

saying ‘ what is he to become >? Among them there were eight named Rdma, &c. who

were the interpreters of signs. Of these, seven raising two fingers up, declared,

‘ He who is endowed with these signs, if he lead the life of alayman, is destined to be

a Chakkawatti raja ; and if he enter into the sacerdotal order, a Buddho,’ The young-

est among these, a brahman whose patronimic was KONDANNO, seeing by the su-

Preme attributes which attached to the signs of the Buddho elect, that he was not

destined for a lay life;—raising up one finger only declared: ‘ Most assuredly

exempted as he is from the dominion of sin, he is destined to be Buddho.’ Then

those who were conferrers of a name, as he was destined to be the (sabbaloka-siddhi-

karanattd) ‘ establisher (of the faith) throughout the world,’ gave him the name

of ‘ SIDDHA’TTO’ (the establisher).

* From other passages it would appear that this numeral was 108.

1888.] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 803

‘‘ Thereupon the brahmans, returning to their homes and assembling their séns,

thus addressed them. ‘ We are advanced in years: it is doubtful whether we shall,

or shall not, witness the attainment of the state of Buddhohood of the son of maha

raja SUDDHO'DANO. Do ye, however, when he attains the state of omniscience,

having previously entered the sacerdotal order, also become members of his frater-

nity.’ Thereafter seven of them, in due course of nature, were disposed of accord-

ing to their deserts (by death). The youth KonDANNO alone (survived) free from

all maladies. ;

‘¢On hearing however, the aforesaid prediction, the said raja thus interrogated

them: ‘ By what manifestation is it, that ye will be able to ascertain when my son

will become a minister of religion ?’? ‘ Onhis beholding the four predictive signs,’

(pubbanimittani.) ‘ What! what are they?’ (asked the king impatiently). ‘ The

decaying,’ ‘ the diseased,’ ‘ the dead’ and ‘ the ordained person.’

‘+ Among the eighty thousand allied tribes who assembled on the day (of conferring

the name) each undertook to devote a son (to the prince) saying: ‘ Whether he be-

comes a Buddho or a king, we will each assign him a youth. Should he become a

Buddho, attended by a retinue of royal disciples, he will perform his pilgrimage ;

and should he become a monarch, still surrounded by a suite of princes, he will

fulfil his destiny.’

‘‘ Thereafter the raja assigned to this great personage wet nurses of surpassing

personal beauty, and free from all bodily infirmity; and the great elect grew up in

the midst of sumptuous splendour, attended by a great suite ; (but secluded from all

other worldly intercourse in order that he might not meet the aforesaid predictive

signs )

‘‘ Subsequently, on a certain occasion, the raja had to celebrate the sowing festi-

val. On that day, the raja departed for this sowing festival, clad in splendour and

attended by a magnificent cortege. He took into his own hand the golden plough

of the illustrious festival. The officers of state and others used silver and other de-

scriptions of ploughs. On such a day, a thousand ploughs are prepared. The wet

nurses attendant on the Buddho elect (who formed with their charge a part of this

suite), saying among themselves ‘ let us also witness the magnificence of our sove-

reign’—came out from within the curtain that screened them. The elect then looking

in all directions, and not perceiving any one, quickly rising and seating himself

upright in his canopy, indulged in the dndpdnasati meditation ; and acquired the

patamajjhénan, The wet-nurses delayed a short while and partook of food and

beverage, and the shadows cast by the other trees past off in another direction ;

but the shadow of the tree (under which the elect was) remained stedfast in a cir-

cular form. His wet-nurses, exclaiming: ‘is not our lord’s son quite alone ?’ rushed

in abruptly ; and on raising the curtain, and beholding the miracle of witnessing

him seated in his royal canopy, they reported the circumstance to the raja. The

king, quickly approaching, bowed down to him, saying, ‘ Beloved! this is my second

act of reverence to thee.’

‘‘ Thereafter, in due course, this great personage, acquired the age of sixteen,

and the raja built for him three palaces adapted for the three seasons. The Rammd,

Surammd and Subhd, one of nine, another of seven, and the other of five stories.

The edifices nevertheless were of the same height, but the stories were constructed

on different plans.

‘‘ The raja then thus thought, ‘ my son is come of age ; raising him to the sove-

reignty, let me behold his regal prosperity,’ and dispatched leaves (dispatches) to

the Sdkya princes, announcing ‘my son is of age: I am causing him to be installed

in the sovereignty. Let them all send, from their own homes, their grown-up

daughters to this house.’ Those princes on hearing that message, replied ‘ Although

804 Péli Buddhistical Annals. [Sepr.

the prince is in every respect endowed with personal beauty, heis untaught in a single

martial accomplishment, and is incapable of controling women: we cannot there-

fore give our daughters,’ The raja on having heard the reproach, repairing to the

son, communicated the same to him. The Buddho elect replied, ‘ What accom-

plishment is it requisite for me to exhibit?’ ‘ It is requisite, beloved, that you

string the bow, requiring a thousand persons to bind.’ ‘ Well then have it

brought.’ The raja causing it to be brought, presented it to him. It was a bow which

required a thousand persons to string and unstring it. This great personage, receiv-

ing that bow, while yet seated on his canopy, twisted the bow-string round his great

toe, and drawing it with his toe, strung the bow; and taking the bow in his left

hand and srawing the string with his right, let it (the cord) fly. The whole town

started, and to the inquiry, ‘ what noise is this ?’? the answer was ‘ the clouds are

rolling with thunder ;’ some others observed, ‘ ye know nothing about it, it is not

the rolling of thunder: it is the ringing of the bow which requires the strength of a

thousand persons which the great archer, the prince endowed with halo around his

person, has rung.’ The Sdékya princes on hearing of this, from that circumstance

alone, commencing to rejoice, were highly gratified.

‘‘The great mortal then inquired, ‘what more should be done.’ They replied,

‘It is requisite that an iron target eight inches thick, should be pierced with an

arrow. Having pierced it, he said, ‘what else.’ ‘It is requisite, that a plant of

the asand tree, four inches thick, should be pierced.’ ‘ Having transfixed that

what else should be done ?’ ‘ Then carts filled with sand and with straw.’ The great

elect then transpiercing the straw cart drove the arrow one usabhan deep into the

water, and eight usabdni into the earth. They then said, it will be requisite to

pierce a horse hair, guided by the mark afforded by the suspended fruit of the wa-

tingdno (which is attached to the hair). Replying ‘ hang it up at the distance of one

ydjanan’ he shot his arrow in a direction which was as dark, under the obscurity

of dense clouds, as if it were night ; and pierced the horse hair, which at the distance

of one ydjanan was indicated only by the watingano which was suspended from it,

and it entered the earth, If fully related, these were not all that the great morta]

exhibited on that day to the world, in proof of his accomplishments in martial deeds.

Thereupon the Sdkya tribes sent their daughters superbly decorated. There were

forty thousand dancing and singing girls. The princess (who was afterwards) the

mother of RA’HULO, became the head queen.

‘‘ The great mortal, like unto a celestial prince, surrounded by his heavenly host of

damsels, and attended by his female band of musicians, dwelt in his three palaces

adapted to the three seasons, enjoying his great prosperity. Thereafter, on a cer-

tain day, wishing to inspect his grounds in his pleasure garden, he ordered his cha-

rioteer to prepare his state conveyance. He replying ‘ sddhu,’ and fully decorating

the carriage, and harnessing to it four white horses, swift as the wind and the swal-

low, and of the sindha breed, reported it to the Buddho elect ; who entering the cha-

riot, which was like unto a heavenly mansion, proceeded in the direction of the plea-

sure garden.

‘‘The déwatd, saying to themselves, ‘ the time is at hand for prince SIDDHATTO

to attain omniscience, let us present to him the predictive signs,’ exhibited to him

a certain déwatdé transformed into the character of a decrepid object, wasted in ap-

pearance, with decayed teeth, grey hairs, and bent posture, tremulously leaning on

his staff. Him the Buddho elect and charioteer alone saw. The Buddho elect then

thus inquired: ‘ Charioteer! who is this person? His hair also is not like that

of others,’ and having also made the other inquiries, as recorded in due order in

the Mahdpaddna suttan, and listened to his answers, he observed (to the charioteer),

‘My friend, let this be received as a type of the degradation of this existence, as it

1838. ] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 805

is a proof that wheresoever an individual may be born, he is subject to decay.’

Deeply afflicted in mind, giving up his excursion, he re-ascended his palace. The

raja inquired: ‘why has my son returned?’ ‘ Lord! because he saw a person in a

decrepid state.’ The indulgent monarch then ordered guards to be stationed at the

distance of half a ydjanan,

“‘ Again on a subsequent day, the Buddho elect having visited the pleasure garden

and having beheld a diseased person, represented by the déwatd aforesaid; and haye

ing made inquiries in the manner already explained, afflicted in mind, he then also

gave up his excursion, and reascended the palace. The raja, on hearing this, sent

a band of musicians (to amuse him) saying ‘ they will divert his mind from his de-

sire, to enter into priesthood ;’ and giving up the former guard he established

others all round, at the distance of three gdwutdni, In the same manner having

beheld a corpse, on a subsequent occasion, the raja established guards at the dis-

tance of four gdwutdni.

‘‘And again on a certain day, the Buddho elect, while on an excursion to the

pleasure garden, noticed a well clad, and completely enveloped form, exhibited by

the same déwatd, and said, ‘ My friend, charioteer, what is the name of this person ??

The charioteer, from that period not being a boddhotpddo (an age in which the Bud-

dhistical creed prevails), was incapable of explaining either the nature of the sacere

dotal state, or the merits appertaining to that sacerdotal state, excepting by the mi-

raculous agency of the déwata ; replying therefore by their inspiration, he said,

‘that the person is a priest,’ and explained the merits of the priestly state.

‘The Buddho elect, impelled by his desire to become a priest, repaired on that day

to the pleasure garden. Those Buddha elect, who are manifested in ages when the

term of human existence is protracted, beheld these predictive signs at intervals o¢

one hundred years each, but our Buddho elect, having: been manifested in a short-

lived age, visited the pleasure garden at intervals of four months. The Dighabhdna-

ka fraternity, however, assert that he witnessed all the four predictive signs on the

same day. .

‘* There, having enjoyed the sports of the pleasure garden, during the day, and

having bathed in the reservoir appropriate to occasions of festivity, at the setting of

the sun, he seated himself on the rock of festivity, in order that he might redecorate

himself (after his bath). The déwd WissAKAMMO, ordered by Sakko, the king

of déwd, who knew his inmost wishes, repairing thither in the character of a barber

decorated him with the vestments of the déwd.

‘* While some from among his female bands were playing airs on musical instru-

ments, and the beauties of the Sdkya tribes were yet hymning forth the canticles of

triumph and gratulations, peculiar to the brahminical observances then prevalent, unto

the Buddho elect, who was thus adorned with all his insignia of celestial majesty,

mounting his chariot, he departed. At that instant, (Yaso’paRA’) the mother of

Ra’'HULO had given birth to a son; and the mah4é raja SuDDHODANO, on hearing

this news, desirous of gladdening his son, sent hima message (to announce the

event). The Buddho elect, on receiving this announcement exclaimed, ‘RAHULO

being born creates (another) tie (in domestic affections).’? The raja inquired (of

his messenger,) ‘ what did my son say ;’ and learning what his exclamation was;

said, ‘let my grandson be henceforth called prince RA’HULO.’

‘‘The Buddho elect mounting his superb chariot, re-entered the town, attended

by his retinue in great pomp and magnificence. Atthat moment, a virgin of royal

extraction named Kisa’G6TAMI, who was in the bloom of personal beauty, and

endowed with graceful fascinations, was standing in the upper story of his superb

palace, and beheld the personal magnificence of the Buddho elect, who was in the act

of entering the mansion : and under the impulse of the fervour of her admiration,

she chanted forth this hymn of adulation,

806 Péh Buddhistical Annals. (Sxpr.

‘ Nibbutdné sd matd, nibbutdnt sé pitd

Nibbutant sa ndri yassdyan tdisogati.’

‘* ¢ Whosoever’s destiny has been such as his, most assuredly his mother must be

blessed ; most assuredly his father must be blessed, and most assuredly his consort

also must be blessed.’

‘©The Buddho elect listened to this hymn, and thus thought: ‘the gratulation

she has uttered is worthy of being heard by me. It is requisite that I, who

am performing my pilgrimage in search of nibbdnan, should this very day, abandon-

ing my lay connections, and departing (hence) and entering into the priesthood, pro-

secute my pursuit of nibbdnan ; and adding ‘ let this be a gift to serve as a preceptor

(of piety) to her; he detached from his neck a pearl necklace worth a lakh, and

sent it to KisaGéTAMI. She, in excess of her exultation, exclaimed, ‘ prince S1ip-

DHATTO, Captivated by me, sends me a present.’

“The Buddho elect, with the utmost pomp, ascended the superb and enchanting

palace, and laid himself down on his state bed. Thereupon women in the bloom of

youth, resembling the celestial beauties of the Tdéwatinsa heavens, with visages re-

splendent as the silvery full moon, with lips in color like the bimbothala* fruit, with

beauteous teeth, white, pure, even, smooth and without interstice, with jet black

eyes, and jet clustering locks, graceful in their movements like the voluptuous swan,

with arched dark eyebrows, and breasts fully developed, globular, equal in size and

exquisitely placed, covered only with the mékhalg (the medallion of the zone) which

was set with gems in newly burnished gold and silver, with **** plump, and circular

as a wheel, and with thighs round and smooth as an elephant trunk, excelling in dance

and song, taking with them musical instruments of melodious tones, and crowding

around the great mortal, with the intent of diverting him from his purpose, by their

voluptuous fascination, began to sing and to dance, The Buddho elect, however,

being entirely exempt from the influence of carnal passions, took no delight in the

dance and song ; and in a short interval fell asleep. They seeing this (indifference),

and saying if the individual for whom we have commenced our song and dance is gone

to sleep, why should we fatigue ourselves?’ and dropping each the instrument she

had taken, on the spot on which she was standing, they all laid themselves down:

The lamps of scented oil continued burning.

‘¢ The Buddho elect, on awaking, still seated cross-legged on the bed on which he

had been sleeping, surveyed these sleeping females, who had laid aside their musi-

cal instruments, some with their cheeks wet with the saliva that had flowed from

them ; some gnashing their teeth ; some muttering ; some with round mouths (gap-

ing), some denuded by their covering being displaced ; some in ungraceful postures,

and some with dishevelled hair representing so many objects fit for a sepulchre,

‘‘The great mortal, on beholding this spectacle, became the more strongly con-

firmed in his abhorrence of sinful courses. Unto him, the splendid and charming

palace, which was like unto the mansion of the thousand-eyed deity (INDRA), be-

came (as it were) a disgusting object, filled with loathsome corpses, like unto an

Amakasusdnant (a catacomb) ; and the three realms (of the universe) appeared to him

as if they were a single habitation involved in flames. Then resolving ‘ most assur-

edly the crisis is at hand; my mind is fully made up to enter into priesthood; it

is proper that this very day my final separation should take place ; and rising from

his bed and approaching the door of his chamber he called out ‘who is here?’

CHHANNO (who was born on the same day with BuppHo) was sleeping at the

door, making the threshold his pillow, and replied ‘ prince, itis I, CHHANNo.'

‘ This very day am 1 resolved to effect my great final deliverance. Without uttere

* A creeper, Tryonea grandis.

+ Literally ‘‘raw cemetery’’ in which bodies were left unburnt or uninterred.

1838. Péhi Buddhistical Annals. 807

ing a word, bring me a swift sindhawa steed.’ He, replying ‘ sadhu Lord!’ and

taking the trappings of the horse, repaired to the stable; and seeing there the

superb charger Kanthako, who was capable of overcoming all his foes, standing in

his delightful stall, under a canopy decorated with jessamine flowers, and lighted

up with lamps of fragrant oil, he said ‘ it is proper that he should be capari-

soned as a state charger, to be used to-day for the final deliverance of the prince ;’

and he caparisoned Kanthako. The said charger in the act of being accoutred knew

(what was to happen) ; and exulting in his master’s approaching assumption of

priesthood, neighed loudly, as if he had said ‘ this caparisoning is unusually tight ;

not like the saddling of other occasions, for an excursion to the pleasure garden :

most assuredly, this very day the prince takes his great final departure.’ That

neigh resounded through Kapilawatthu. The déwata however suppressing the sound

prevented its being heard by any one.

‘The Buddho elect, saying ‘ let me see my son once more,’ and proceeding from

his own to the chamber of the mother of Ra’HULo, gently opened the door. At

that moment a silver lamp, lit with fragrant oil, was shedding its light on the in-

terior of the chamber ; and the mother of RA’HULO was slumbering with her hand

resting on the head of her infant who was reposing under a superb canopy, on a

bedding formed of one ammanan of the common and the Arabian jessamine. The

elect, his foot still resting on the threshold, and intently gazing—thus meditated,

‘1f I remove the hand of the princess, to take up my child (and embrace him),

she will be awakened ; and thus an impediment will be produced to my departure.

Let me then, after 1 have attained Buddhohood, return and see my son.’ Descend-

ing from the upper apartment of the palace, and approaching his steed, he thus ad-

dressed him : ‘ Do thou, my cherished Kanthako, in one night translate me; and,

as the consequence of that translation, achieving Buddhohood, I shall translate this

world together with those of the déwa.’ Then springing aloft, he seated himself on

Kanthako. The said Kanthako, was eighteen cubits long from his neck—his height

was in proportion—well formed, swift and in good condition, and in color likea

bleeched shell.

‘“‘ The Buddho elect, who had mounted this charger, having desired CHHANNO to

hang on by the tail, in the middle of the night approached the principal gate of the

town. At that time, the guards, whom the raja had stationed to prevent the escape

of the Buddho elect, were still watching, being in number one thousand to each door-

way in the gate. The elect, however, had the power of one hundred thousand

kotiyo of men, or the strength of a thousand kotiyo of elephants. There he thus

resolved. ‘ Should the gate not be opened, this very day, mounted on Kanthako, to-

gether with CHHANNo clinging to his tail, holding the steed fast between my thighs,

and springing over the rampart eighteen cubits in height, let me quickly escape.’

CHHANNoO and Kanthako concurred in that resolution.

‘¢ The tutelar déwatd, however opened the gate.

‘¢ Instantly Ma’Ro (death), the agent of sin, saying, ‘let me stop the great mortal,

and rising aloft into the air, thus addressed him: ‘ Mahdwéro depart not: on the

seventh day from hence, the heavenly Chakkuratanan will most certainly come to

pass. Then thou shalt exercise sovereignty over the four great quarters (of the

earth), together with their two thousand isles: blessed + wait.’ The great mortal

asked, ‘ Who art thou?’ ‘I am Wassawatto.’ ‘T am aware that both empire

and universal dominion are proffered to me: I am not however destined for royalty :

depart Ma’ro! approach not this. I shall become Buddho, making the ten thou-

sand realms of the universe quake, in acknowledgment of there being no one greater

than myself.’ He thus spoke; and MA/Ro vanished.

** The great mortal in his twenty-ninth year, relinquishing the attractions of his

8¢8 Péli Buddhisti¢al Annals. (Sept.

imperial greatness, with the indifference that he would cast spittle from him, de-

parted from his mansion the seat of that regal splendour ; and in quitting the city,

on the full moon day ofthe month Asalhi, during the ascendancy of Uttdérasalha lunar

mansion, he was seized with a desire to gaze onthe city. At the instant of being

seized with this wish, that portion of the ground on which (the city stood) spun

round, like the potter’s wheel. By this means the Buddho elect (without turning

round) surveyed Kapilawaithu from the spot on which he stood, and having noted

the spot on which Kanthako had stood, as the destined site of a chétiyo, he turned

Kanthako’s head to the direction in which he ought to go.

‘¢ While the elect was proceeding in his journey, with great pomp and pageantry,

sixty lakhs of déwata were preceding him, bearing torches. In the same manner on

the right hand side of the pilgrim there were sixty lakhs of torches; and the same

on the left. Other déwatd doing homage with fragrant flowers and garlands with

sandal-wood dust and chambards and flags and pennons, attended him in procession,

and kept up the symphony of heavenly song and music.

‘‘ The elect who was making his progress in pomp such as this, having in the

course of the night traversed three kingdoms, and performed a march of thirty

yojana, reached the bank of the Anomd river. The elect stopping on the bank of the

river thus inquired of CHHANNO. What is the name of this river? ‘ Lord! its

name is Anomd.’ Replying ‘ nor will there be any *Anomd (inferiority) in my

ordination,’ he pressed his heel to the horse, and gave him the signal to leap. The

animal, springing aloft, alighted on the opposite bank of a river ‘ eight usabha in

breadth.’

** The Buddho elect descending from his steed on a bank of sand, which was like

unto a heap of pearls, thus addressed CHHANNO; ‘CHHANNO, my friend, taking

with thee my regal ornaments and my charger Kanthako, depart. I am going to enter

into priesthood.’ CHHANNO replied, ‘ Lord! I will alse be ordained.’ ‘It will

uot be permitted unto thee to enter the priesthood: depart.’ Having, in this manner,

three times refused his solicitation ; and made over the jewels and Kanthako to him,

the elect thus meditated: ‘These locks of mine are unsuited to the sacerdotal

State ;’ and, taking up his superb sharp-edged sword in his right hand, and seizing

his tresses together with the diadem on them, chopped them off. The hair was then

Only two inches Jong; and it arranged itself (on his head) curling to the right hand ;

and during the rest of his life, his hair remained of the same length. His beard

also was proportionate, nor had he occasion to shave any more.

‘* The elect then taking up his locks with the tiara attached, threw them up into -

the air, saying ‘If I am to become Buddho let them remain poised in the air; and

if not Jet them descend.’ The tiara knot, rising into the air one yéjané in height

remained poised there. Thereupon SAKKO, the king of the dcewd, beholding it with

his supernatural eyes, and receiving it into a receptacle in height one ydjané, trans-

ferred it to the Tdwatinsa realms, and deposited it in a chétiyo (thence called) the

Chilamani.

“The elect then thus meditated : ‘these raiments, the fabric of Kdsi, are costly,

and unsuited to my sacerdotal condition.’ Thereupon GATIKA’RO, the great brahman

who had formerly, in the time of the Buddho KassApo, befriended him, out of the

friendship that had subsisted during the whole Buddhantaro, thus resolved: ‘ My

friend, on this very day, is about to sever himself finally from lay connections: let

me repair to him, taking with me the (indispensiblet portions of the) prescribed

* This remark involves a pun :—a pun however is by no means a matter of levity

in Buddhistical literature.

t+ These articles are indispensible, there are others permissible.

1838. ] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 809

sacerdotal equipments,—respecting which BupDHo himself has (subsequently) said,

‘These are the eight requisites allowable to an orthodox bhikku. Three robes, a

dish, razor, sewing-needle, waist-band and bathing-cloth.’ Bringing these eight

requisite sacerdotal equipments, he (by d¢ikdro) presented them.

‘** The great mortal then assuming the character of the Arahanta, by putting on the

garb of the pre-eminent priesthood, commanded CHHANNo to depart; saying to him:

* CHHANNO, inform my wife and father of my happiness as a message sent by my-

self.’ Thereupon CHHANNO, having bowed down to the great mortal, and walked*

round him, departed. The charger Kanthako, who had been listening to the conver-

sation of the Buddho elect with CHHANNO, thus bewailed: ‘ Henceforth my master

will not be seen again;’ and when he had proceeded a certain distance, and the

(Buddho) was no longer visible, unable to endure his grief, bursting her heart

(Hadayéphalité) Kanthako expired; and was reproduced in the form of a déwé ia

the Tdwatinso heavens, where the Surdrupé (the Asurd) have no dominion. His

regeneration (there) may be learned in the Wimalatthuwildsiné, the At hakathd ou the

Wimdnawatthu.

‘¢ Unto CHHANNO, in the first instance, there was but one engrossing object of

grief (the loss of his master, prince SIDDHATTo). The second cause of his grief was

the death of Kanthako: deeply afflicted, bewailing and weeping, he departed.

‘* In the land in which the Buddho electassumed his sacerdotal character, there was

a mango grove called Anupiyd. There, having passed seven days, in the enjoyment of

sacerdotal happiness, thereafter dazzling in his yellow raiment, like unto the full

disk of the sun glowing under the blazing clouds of a glaring sun-set, and though

alone, imposing in appearance as if attended by multitudes, and administering to

beasts and birds a measure of happiness as if heaven was presented to their sight ;

roaming like the solitary lion, and pacing like the tusked stately elephant; and

treading as if to steady the earth, this lion of the human race, in a single day, per-

forming a journey of thirty ydjand and crossing the Ganga (Ganges), a river with

high breaking waves and unobstructed course, entered the city called Réjagahan,

celebrated for the pre-eminent and superb palace resplendent with the rays of the

gems with whichit was embellished ; and having made his entry, without distinc.

tion (of houses) he begged for alms.

‘* By the appearance of the Buddho elect, the wholecity was thrown into commo-s

tion as if Dhanapdlo (a furious tusk elephant) had entered the town ;—as if the chief

of the Asurd had invaded the city of the déwdé. While the great mortal was in

the act of begging alms, the inhabitants of the capital confounded by the joy pro-

duced by the charm of the appearance of that great being, became incapable of

~resisting the desire of gazing at the great elect. Among themselves, these people

kept saying one to another. ‘ Friend! who is this? canit be the full moon descend-

ed among us out of dread of Ra’uu, concealing the rays with which he is endowed?

Such a one was never seen before.’ Smiling at his suggestion, another said, ‘ This

is the god of love with his florial banner : disguised in person, he has come to revel

among us; having cbserved the great personal beauty of our monarch and of our

fellow-citizens.’ Laughing at him another said, ‘Friend! art thou mad: the god

of love has half of his body destroyed by the fire kindled by the jealousy of Isso’

(IswARA), it is not he: it is the chief of the déw4, the thousand-eyed deity (INpRA)

who has come here, imagining that it is the celestial city.” Another again playfully

ridiculing him, said, ‘ Friend! what nonsense art thou talking, Where are his

thousand eyes? where is his thunderbolt and where is his (elephant) erdwano ?

Assuredly he is Bka’HMA, who, having witnessed the indolence of the brahmans, has

come hither to teach the wéda and their accompaniments,’ Another ridiculing the

* This proceeding is a mark of respect frequently mentioned.

oe 2.2

810 Pali Buddhistical Annals. . (Sepr.

whole of them, said, ‘ He is neither the moon, the god of love, nor the thousand-

eyed deity, nor yet BRAHMA’. He is the wonderful personage, the supreme, and the

teacher of the world.’

‘‘ While the inhabitants of the town were thus discussing the matter, the officers

of state, repairing to the réja Bimprsa’Ro said: ‘ Lord! either a déwa, a gan-

dhabbo, or else a raja ndga, or a yakkho, is wandering about our town, begging

alms.’ The raja on hearing this, still remaining in the upper apartment of the

palace, but having obtained a sight of the great mortal, impressed with feelings of

wonder previously unknown, thus instructed his officers: ‘ My men, retire, and

compose yourselves. Should he be an inhuman being (yakkho), on his departing

from the city, he will render himself invisible. Should he be a déwatd, he wiil

depart through the air. Should he bea ndga raja he will escape diving into the

earth; and should he be a human being, he will partake of whatever alms he may

obtain.’

‘‘ The great mortal, who exercised the most perfect self-possession and control

over his own senses (yet attracted the gaze of the multitude by the splendour of his

personal appearance), did not permit himself to look at any object more distant from

him than the length of a yoke-pole. Having collected as much food as he could eat,

being the mixed scraps (which had been thrown into his alms-dish by many), departed

out of the gate by which he had entered the city; and seating himself facing the

east, under the shadow cast by the Pandawo mountain, although disgusted at the

repast, repressing his disgust, he ate it*.

‘‘ Immediately the persons sent by the raja returning, reported this circumstance’

On hearing this account from his messengers, the ruler of Magadha, the raja Bim-

BISARO, who despised the pursuit of frivolous objects, and aimed at results as sted-

fast as the mountains Méru and Mandaro, impelled by the desire to see the Buddho

elect, which was produced by the account given of his pious bearing—departing from

the town and repairing to the Panddwo mountain, and there descending from his

conveyance and approaching the Buddho elect, with his permission seated himself

(near him) on the ground, which (intercourse) was as refreshing as the affections of

relations. Charmed with the deportment of the Buddho elect he offered to him the

provision of every luxury. ‘ Maha raja (replied the elect), to me there is no longer

need either of the enjoyment of wealth, or the gratification of the passions: severed

from the domestic and lay ties, my aspirations are directed to the attainment of su-

-preme omniscience.’ The raja, after having, in various ways, renewed his entreaties

finding that he would not gain his assent, said, ‘ Most assuredly thou wilt become

Buddho: my dominion should be visited the first by thee in thy Buddhohood,’ and

returned to his capital.

‘¢ Thereafter the Bédhisatto, in due course, pursuing his alms pilgrimages, became

acquainted with ALARAKA'LaMOt and UpDAKKARAMO ; and acquired from them the

Samdpatti. Finding that the said Samapatti was not the road that leads to Buddho-

hood, relinquishing the same, he resolved to devote himself to the padhanan, and

repaired to Uruwél4. Finding that a delightful place, sojourning there he devoted

himself to the Mahdpadanan.

‘‘ Four persons, the sons of the brahmans who had been consulted (on the day that

a name was selected for the Bédhisatto), as well as KONDANNO (the youngest of

* This must have occurred in the forenoon, as no substantial food can be taken by

Buddhist priests after mid-day.

+ This interview is described in greater detail elsewhere, during which B1iMBISA/-

RO ascertained the elect to be the son of SuUDDHODANO, the ally and friend of his

own father BHA’TIYO, the late réja of Magadha.

——

Oe eo

ea a ele ee

tes 4 Se

1838.) Pali Buddhistical Annals. 811

the eight brahmans consulted) these five, having entered into the sacerdotal order,

in the course of their pilgrimage in search of alms, through villages, towos and

kingdoms, came to that place where the Bédhisatto was. For a period of six years

these persons continued his personal attendants, sweeping his cell and performing

other menial offices, unto him who was devoted to the Mahdpaddnan ; and they con-

stantly indulged in this expectation. ‘ Now he will become Buddho ! Now he will

become Buddho!’

‘‘The Bodhisatto resolving, ‘ Let me submit myself to the ultimate extremity of

penance ;’ brought himself to subsist on a single grain of fila (sesamum.) or of rice,

and even passed his day entirely without nourishment. The déwaté however pre-

served him by infusing (by their supernatural means) juices of food (gravy) into those

pores of the skin through which the hairs of the body grow. Thereafter from his

continued starvation, he reduced himself to the state of a perfect skeleton; and his

person which had been of a golden hue turned black, and the thirty-two attributes of

manhood (peculiar to Buddha and Chakkawatti raja) disappeared.

‘¢ The Bédhisatto having been brought to this last extremity by adherence to his

penance, deciding again, ‘ This is not the proper road to Buddhohood ;’ and for the

purpose of procuring full supplies of food, he made alms pilgrimages through towns

and villages, and provided himself with provisions.

‘¢ Thereupon his thirty-two special attributes of manhood were again restored, and

his person regained its golden hue ; and thence his (aforesaid) confraternity, com-

posed of the abovementioned five bhikkhus, saying to themselves: ‘ Although for

a period of six years, he has consigned himself to penance, and has fasted to attain

the state of omniscience, he is now making his pilgrimage through towns and vil-

lages begging alms offerings in his desire to provide himself amply with food. (By

such weakness) what can be effected? He hascertainly made a great effort: from

it, what have we benefitted ?’ and then forsaking the great mortal, they repaired to

the Jsipatanan in Bardnasi.

‘6 At Uruwéli in the town Sendni at the house of the proprietor KutimBIKo of Se-

nani, there was a maid named S1Ga’TA’. On the full moon day of the month We-

sakho, having partaken of a dish of rice prepared in sweet milk by her, who presented

to him with delight—taking up the golden dish (in which it was served) the Bédhi-

satto threw it from the bank of the Néranjard river, up the stream; and thereby

awoke Ka’to the naga raja. The Bédhisatto having taken his noon-day rest in the

delightful deep green forest of sal trees, which is garnished with fragrant flowers, on

the bank of the Néranjara river, in the evening, he repaired to the foot of the Bodhé

tree by the path that had been decorated for him by the déwatd.

‘6 Déwatd, naga, yakkhd and siddhé made offerings to him of celestial fragrant flowers

and odoriferous ointments. At that instant, a certain brahman grass-carrier named

SoTTHIyo, who was carrying some (cusha) grass,—in his way, presented himself

before the great mortal; and recognizing who he was, bestowed eight bundles of

grasson him. The Bodhisatto accepting that grass, and three times walking round

the Assathd-bodhi, the monarch of trees and pride of the forest, which was as verdant

as the Anjanagiri mountain; and, intercepting the rays of the sun, was as refresh-

ing as his own benevolence, and which attracted flocks of melodious birds—and was

embellished with branches which quivered under the gentle breeze as if dancing with

joy—stationed himself in the north-eastern side of the tree ; and sprinkled that grass

on the ground holding it by the ends. Instantly that grass was transformed into a

throne fourteen cubits in height—the blades appearing like ornamental lines drawn

by a painter, and as soon as the Bédhisatto seated himself on the grassy carpet, on

the throne fourteen cubits broad, young leaves from the tree, resembling coral rest-

ing on plates of gold, fell on him.

812 Pah Buddhistical Annals. (Sept.

*¢ On the Bédhisatto seating himself there,M a’Ro (death) in the person of Wasawatti

déwo, saying ‘ Prince SIDDHATTO is endeavouring to overthrow my dominion over

him: let me not yield to that desire ;’ and explaining this resolution to his own

legions with the armies of Ma’Ro in his train, he set out. The said army of Ma/ro

extended twelve yojand in front and the same on the right and on the left, and in the

rear it extended to the confines of the Chakkawdlan ; and nine yojand up into the air.

The sound of its uproar, as if bursting the earth, was heard from the distance of a

thousand yojano.

At the same time SAKKO, the king of the déwd stationed himself near him, sound-

ing his Wijayuttara chank, which chank (shell) is one hundred and twenty cubits

long: Panchasikho, the Gandhabha déwo, bringing with him his Biluwapdndu, lyre,

three gdwutdni in length, stationed himself also there, playing and singing appropri-

ate hymns of joy. The déwa rdja SuvA’Mo, bringing with bim his heavenly chémard,

in length three gawutdni and resembling the brilliancy of the rays of the planet (the

moon) which presides over the night, likewise stationed himself there gently fanning

him. And the Brahmdé Sahanpati, holding over the head of BHAaGAWA’ his white

chhatta (parasol of dominion) three yojand in width, as if it were a second disc of

the sun, also stationed himself there. The king of the Nagd Mahdkdlo, presented

himself attended by his eighty thousand choristers, singing hymns of joy, and bow-

ing down to the great mortal. The déwatd in the ten thousand Chukkawaldni attend-

ed, presented offerings of fragrant garlands, frankincense and pulverized scent.

‘“The déwo, Ma’Ro, then mounted his Girimikhalo tusk elephant, which was one

hundred and fifty yojand high, like unto the Girisikaharo mountain, very superb to

the sight, and capable of overcoming his enemies ; and raising up his many thousand

arms, provided himself with weapons of every description, by not taking up any two

weapons of the same kind. His army also equipped with swords, axes, javelins, bows

bent by great strength, arrows, /dhala, spikes, the broad spikes, the témara, clubs,

(sharp-edged missile in the form of) rings, the kanaya, kappana, hoppana and

(missile) wheels, and assuming the faces of the vuru (a description of deer), of lions,

of the kagha (unicorn), of the sarabha, of bears, of the viyagghd (a description of

tiger), of monkies, serpents, cats, owls, buffaloes, the pusadd, horses, elephants;

and with terrific unnatural forms of men, demons and spirits, continued rushing

towards the spot on which the Bédhisatto was seated at the foot of the Bodhi tree ;

and surrounding him, halted waiting for the order of MA/RO.

‘*On this army of MA’Ro congregating around the terrace of the Bodhi tree, it

was impossible for SaAKKo and the other déwa (before mentioned) to retain their

stations ; and wherever they met (the déwd) gave way and fled. SaxkkoO, the king

of déwd, slinging his wijayutta chank across his shoulders, and departing, stationed

himself on the edge of the orifice of the Chakkawdlan. Mana’ BRAHMA’‘ depositing

his white chhatia on the confines of the Chakkawdlan, fled to Bruhmaloko itself.

Ka’Lo, the king of the Ndga, abandoning his whole train of dancers and singers,

and diving into the earth, and repairing to the Mangirika Naga realms, five hundred

yojand in extent, laid himself down, concealing his face with his hands. Not a single

déwo could retain his position there (at the Bodhi tree).

‘* The great mortal, as if he were MAHA, BRAHMA’ himself, alone retained his

station, in that deserted position. Thereupon, in the first place, apparitions of ill

omen in various forms descended, yelling, ‘now Ma/’ro will come.’ At the

instant of the conflict of the patron of the three worlds, (Bédhisatto) with the patron

of procrastinators (MaA’Ro) athousand appalling meteors descended ; and clouds and

darkness prevailed. Even this unconscious (earth) together with the oceans and

mountains, it contains, quaked, as if it were conscious—like unto a fondly loving girl

who is forcibly separated from her mate—like unto the festooned vine quivering under

= -

Mie ER te 8 oS ye a ae

tie To

FAD a eae

cheep

1838. ] Pdli Buddhistical Annals. 813

the action of a breeze. The ocean rose under the vibration of this earthquake :

rivers flowed back towards their sources: peaks of lofty mountains, against which

countless trees had beat (for ages), crumbling rolled to the earth: a fierce storm

howled all around and the crashing concussion became terrific. The sun enveloped

itself in awful darkness, and a host of Kdwandd@ (headless spirits) filled the air. In

this manner was MA’Ro at the moment of his onset, attended by a host of the

apparitional spirits of ill omens who haunt the earth and the air, in various forms—

a frizhtful and dismaying exhibition.

‘« The host of déwd on perceiving that he (Ma’Ro) was designing to destroy the

déwo of déwd (Ldédhisatto), surrounded by all the celestial beauties, shouted out

in tribulation ha! ha! The illustrious (Bodhisatto) indefatigable and fearless,

retained his position in the midst of the host of Ma’Ro, as if he were a gurulo amidst

birds, and the dauntless lion amidst animals.

‘s Thereafter Ma/Ro saying to himself, ‘ terrifying ae By Pee let me chase him

away, and yet failing in his endeavours to repulse him with the nine descriptions of

rains, viz., with the rain*of storms, the rain of weapons, the rain of stones, and

subsequently with the rain of fire, of burning ashes, of sand, of mud and of darkness

and with the ordinary rains, furious with rage, he thus addressed his host: § Fel-

lows! why are ye standirg still; make this StIppHA’TTO an Asiddhdtto: seize

him, kill him, cut him up, bind him, release him not, drive him hence.’ Having

given this order to this army, Ma’Rro himself, mounting his charger, Girimikhalo,

and hurling his javelin approached the Bédhisatto and said, ‘SIDDHA/TTo, rise

from thy seat.’ The retinue also of Ma’Ro (attempted to) injure the great mortal.

The great mortal however, by the power of the merits of his Pdramita, resulting

from his forbearance, his benevolence, his perseverance, and his wisdom, over-

coming the efforts of Ma’Ro, as well as of his host ; and during the first yéma*,

in due course, attaining the Pubbénewasandnan gift (the gift of knowing the past),

during the middle yéma acquiring the Dibbachakkhin (divination), and at the dawn

of day arriving at the Pachchagakarenanan which are the attributes of all the

Buddha; and realizing the (fourth or) Chatutthajjhanan, by means of the Andpdnan

(meditation or respiration), duly meditating on each part thereof, separately. And

glorifying the Wipassanan sanctification (he had realized) he overcame the power of

every evil passion, by pursuing in due course the Maggo which leads to the fourth

Maggé; aud having thus attained in perfection the virtues (inherent in) all the

Buddha, he chanted forth the hymn, which is the established thanksgiving of all

the Buddha (on the achievement of Buddhohood).

Anékajati sansérai sandhdwissan anibbisan,

Gahakdrakan gawisanto dukkhdjati punappunan.

Gahakdraka ! ditthosi; punagéhan né kdhasi:

Sabba té phasaka bhaggd gahaktitan wisankhitan

Wisankhdra-gatan chittan tanhdnan khayamajjag4.

‘¢¢ Performing my pilgrimage through the (sanséro) eternity of countless existences,

in sorrow have I unremittingly sought in vain, the artificer of the abode (of the

passions), i. e. the human frame. Now, O artificer ! thou art found. Henceforth no

receptacle of sin shalt thou form, thy frames (literally ribs) broken, thy ridge pole

shattered. The soul (or mind) emancipated from liability to regeneration (by

transmigration), has annihilated the dominion of the passions.’

‘¢ Unto the Bhagaw4 who was still seated, after chanting this hymn of joy, this

reflection occurred. ‘It is on account of (the accession to) this throne of glory

* The night is divided into three ydma of ten hours each, each hour being equal

to 24 European minutes, a ydma is equal to four European hours,

814 Pali Buddhistical Annals. (Serr.

that I devoted myself to a pilgrimage of four asankheyydni and a hundred thousand

kappe. Let this be to me the throne of exertion as well as of joy. Unto me who

am seated here, all my aspirations have not yet been accomplished : let me not

therefore yet rise from hence.’ He continued therefore seated there for seven days

‘realizing innumerable lakhs of kotiyo of samdépattiyo.

‘¢ Thereupon certain of the déwatdé began to entertain a doubt (regarding him) ; and

said ‘ even unto this day most assuredly there is still something more to be accom-

plished by SipDHA’TTo: his passion for the throne appears insuperable.’

“ The sattha on perceiving this doubt of the déwatd ; for the purpose of dispellin®

their scepticism, rising aloft into the air manifested a miracle of two opposite results.

Having by this manifestation dispelled the incredulity of the déwatdé, descending a

little to the eastward of the north of the throne, he passed seven days more gazing

on the throne with (animisa) unclosed eyes ;—repeating, ‘it was on this throne that

omniscience was achieved : it was on this spot that the fruits of the pilgrimages per-

formed through four asankheyydni and one lakh of years have been realized.’ That

spot became known by the name of the Animisu-chetiyo. Then between the throne

and the spot where he stood, having caused a chankaman (a walk) to be produced, he

passed seven days more walking (to and fro) on that long Ratana-chankaman and that

spot became known as the Ratana chétiyo. During the fourth week the déwatdé mi.

raculously called into existence a Ratanagharan (golden habitation) on a spot to the

north-west of the Bodhi tree. There seated on a throne he passed seven days, medi-

tating on the Abhidhammopiiako ; and that spot acquired the name of Ratanagharan

chétiyo.

‘‘ In this manner having passed four weeks at the foot of the Bodhi tree in the fifth

week (departing) from the Bodhi tree he repaired to the shepherd’s Nigrodho tree

(Ficus Indica). ‘There also meditating on dhammo, he stationed himself enjoying

heavenly beatitude. Having tarried there for seven days, he repaired to the Macha-

lindo tree (stravadia). There for the purpose of being protected from a thunder-

storm, having been encircled seven times by Muchalindo the raja of serpents, as if

he were reposing in a dormitory remote from ali disturbance, he enjoyed heavenly

beatitude. Having passed a week there, he repaired to the Rajayatana tree (Buchan-

ania latifolia). ‘here also he tarried enjoying heavenly beatitude. Seven weeks

were thus passed. During that period BHAGAWA’ neither washed his face, per-

formed any corporeal function, nor partook of any food : he supported himself entirely

by his miraculous attributes.

“‘ Thereafter, after the termination of the seventh week, on the forty-ninth day,

having washed his face, and cleansed his teeth with the teeth cleansers made of the

ndgalata creeper, and with the water brought from the Anotatto lake (in the Himd-

layan country) by Sakko, the king of déwa—the satthd continued to tarry there at

the foot of the Rajayatand tree.

“‘ During that mterval, two traders, named TAPASSO and BHALLIKO, having been

impelled thereto by a déwaté, to whom they were related, exerted themselves to

make a meal offering to the satthd; and taking with them some parched rice

and honey, and approaching the satihd, said ‘ BHAGAWA’! out of compassion,

vouchsafe to accept this repast ;’ and stood by him. As the refection dish which

had formerly been presented to him by the déwd had vanished on the day in which

he first accepted the milk-rice which had been offered to him (by S1ya’ra’ on the

day he attained Buddhohood) Buacawa’ thus meditated: ‘ The Tathdgatd are not

permitted to receive any thing with their hands; into what vessel can I receive this

offering ?’

‘‘ Thereupon on discovering that wish of the BHAGAWA/’, from the four quarters,

the four kings (of the déwé) brought four refection dishes made of sapphires. Bua-

1838. ] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 815

GawaA/ rejected them. Subsequently they brought four dishes made of a stone of the

color of the muggo seed. BHAGAWA’, out of compassion for the four déwd, accepting

the same, and converting them into one dish, received the repast into that precious

stone-dish; and partaking thereof conferred his blessing on them. Those two

traders who were brothers, accepting Buddho, dhammo and saranan (Buddho, his

doctrines and his salvation) became two updsakd.

““ Thereafter the satthd repairing to the shepherd’s Nigrodho tree tarried there. To

him who had that instant taken his seat there, and who was fully impressed with

the deep importance of the dhammo which he was destined to establish—a misgiving, '

common to all the Buddhé, arose—producing this exclamation ‘ alas! that this

dhammo should devolve on me to be established, &c,’ Influenced by that reluctance

he formed the resolution not to be instrumental in propounding the dhummo to others. '

Thereupon, the great Brahmd Sahanpati, assembling from the ten thousand Chakka-

walgni, the Sakkd, the Suydmd, Santusité, Nimmanaratino, Paranimmitad, Wasawattino

and the great Brahmdno said to them—‘ Beloved! most assuredly the world is about

to perish’—and repairing to the satthd supplicated of him to propound the dhammo—

saying, as given in the text ‘ Lord ! Bhagawa, vouchsafe to propound the dhammo.’

“The sattha acceding to his prayer thus meditated : ‘To whom shall I first pro-

pound the dhammo.’ Being aware, that ALA/RAKALA’MO and UDAKA/RA MO(before

mentioned) were both dead; and, in reference to the aid afforded to him by the five

bhikkhus formerly, saying, ‘the five bhikhhus afforded to me the greatest assistance—

where do they reside now ?’ and finding that they dwelt at Migadayo* in Bardnasi,

he added—‘ repairing thither let me there proclaim the supremacy of dhammo.’

‘¢ Having continued a few days longer in the neighbourhood of the Bodhi tree,

receiving alms as a pilgrim ;—on the full moon day of the month of A’salhi

(April, May, B. C. 588) saying: ‘ Let me repair to Bardnasi ; and taking his dish

and his robes, he performed a journey of eighteen yojund. On the road, meeting

an (ajiwako) individual named Upako, travelling on his own affairs, he imparted

to him his having attained Buddhohood ; and on the evening of the same-day he

reached the Isipatanant Bardnasi.

‘¢ The five bhikkhus recognizing Tathdgato, who was approaching, from a distance,

said, (one to another,) ‘ friend! this is Go’tTomo, the sumano (the priest): having

indulged largely in good things, and recovered his stoutness of person, acuteness of

his senses, aS well as brilliancy of complexion, he is coming (hither) ;’ and they came

to this resolution: ‘ We will not bow down, nor render any other mark of respect

to him—we will only prepare a seat for him.’ BuaGawaA’ divining their design, re-

straining the expansion of that universal benevolence which without distinction would

have been extended over all mankind, manifested his benevolence exclusively (towards

these five bhikkhus). They feeling themselves, under the influence of his benign

spirit, became incapable, on the approach of Tathdgato of carrying their resolve into

effect ; and bowing down rendered him every mark of reverence.

«‘ Thereupon, announcing to them his own attainment of Buddhohood, and taking

his seat on the pre-eminent throne prepared for Buddho, and while the asterism of

Uttrasalhi still predominated, surrounded by the eighteen kotiyo of (celestial) Brah-

mano, BHAGAWA assembled the five thera (above mentioned) ; and expounded to them

the Dhammachakkapawattanant (a discourse on the supremacy of dhummo}. Of these

Kondanno (subsequently designated Anndkondanno Kondanna, the instructed) acquir-

* Migaddyo, a place set aside for deer.

+ Isipatanan, an edifice for the accommodation of the Isi (saints or devotees) situ-

ated near Bardnasi in the midst of the above mentioned deer haunt,

t Discourse in the Sanyuttanikdyo.

lod

0 K

816 Pali Buddhistical Annals. (Serr.

ing a perfect knowledge of the same in the sense set forth in the sermon, attained

together with the eighteen kotiyo of Brahmano the sotapatti* sanctification.

‘‘TIn regard to this circumstance, it has been said (by Buddho himself) :—

‘¢* 1, Go’romo, of the Sakya dynasty, who had attained omniscience, having accom-

plished my destiny, have achieved supreme Buddhohood, and at the prayer of Brahm4-

I have proclaimed the supremacy of dhammo ; and unto eighteen kétiyo (of beings)

the first stage of sanctification has been vouchsafed.’

‘‘Upon a subsequent occasion on his propounding the Buddhawanso at Kapila-

watthu, having discoursed on things passed, in describing the subsequent sanctifica-

tion, BHAGawaA/ has said: ‘ Subsequently, while I was preaching in an assembly

of men and déwd, a number of beings exceeding computation, attained the second

sanctification,’

“Tn this instance instead of speaking in the future tense, as the second sanctifica-

tion had not yet been obtained, he spoke in the passed tense, and was enabled to

substitute the past for the future (by his power of inspiration). In future instances

we also must place the same construction on his discourses.

‘* And again on the occasion of his propounding the Réhulawdda suttan, he adminis-

tered unto human beings whose number exceeded all computation, the sanctification

of the beverage of heaven, which was the third sanctification.

‘In regard to which Buddho himself has said in propounding the Buddhawanso.

‘Tn this very place I will offer admonition to my son whereby innumerable living

creatures may obtain the third sanctification.’

‘“‘ BH AGAwA’ (during his own ministry) had but one general convocation of his disci-

ples ; that convocation consisted of the three Kdssapo, of whom UREWELO was the

chieff, and of (their fraternity of) a thousand Jatild, of the two Aggasawakat (chief

disciples of Buddho), and of their paternity of two hundred and fifty. Thus it was a

congregation of twelve hundred and fifty. Buddho himself has said (inthe Buddha-

wanso, ‘There has been but one convocation of my sanctificed disciples; that con-

gregation consisted of twelve hundred and fifty.’

* BHAGaWA’ taking his place inthe midst of this assembly (held in the Wéluwano

edifice at Rajagahan in the first year of his Buddhohood) and at the hour rendered

appropriate by the four requisite conjunctions, propounded the Patimokkhan. There-

after he explained his own designs in these words. ‘I who have become exalted

and purified from sins inthe midst of this congregation of bhikkhus, bestow upon

thee, the whole of the fruits resulting from the realization of my vows, which is

like unto the jewel§ which realizes every wish. Let me also, out of compassion to

those who both seek the reward (of nibbanan) and eschew the vices inherent in bhawo

(the eternity of transmigratory existence) demonstrate the chatusachchan (four

sublime truths).”

After some verbal commentary the Atthakatha proceeds to make

the following quotations from the Buddhawanso of SXxy4’s own words.

“* Kapilawatthu is my native city. The réja Suppuopano is my father ; and the

mother who bore me is called Ma’ya’. Until my twenty-ninth year, I led the life

of a layman, having three palaces called Rammo, Surammo and Sabho. I had anes-

tablishment of forty thousand accomplished women. BUDDHAKACHANA (Yosovora)

was my consort, and Ra/nuLo was my son. On witnessing the four predictive indi-

cations, I departed on horseback. During the six years, I was undergoing my

* “ Sota” is a rushing torrent, ‘‘ and patti” “ arrival at the first stage of sanctifi-

cation,”’ the attainment of which inevitably leads to nibbdnan.

tT The others were Gaya’ Ka’ssapro and Nabi KA’SSAPO,

t Sa’RIPuTTO and MoGGALA/No.

§ Analogous to the infatuation regarding the philospher’s stone.

nt he EE SP ee aes + ae ce

1838. | Pak Buddhistical Annals. 817

probation, I endured severe trials. I am Goromo’ Buddho the saviour of living

beings. By me the supremacy of dhammo was proclaimed at Isipatanan (in Bdrénasi

the capital) of theking BRAHMADATTO. Ka/’LiTo* and UParissot are my two chief

disciples;and A’NANDO is my ( Upatako) confidential disciple who always lived with

me. KHE/MA and UPPALALAWANNA were my two chief priestesses. CHiTTO and

HATTA’LAWAKO) were my principal attendants among male lay ascetics. NANDAMA’-

TA’and UTTARA’ were my principal attendants among female lay ascetics. I attained

supreme Buddhohood at the foot of the Assattha tree. The glory (around my head) casts

its effulgence sixteen cubits high, and the term of my existence is designed to be one

hundred? years. In the course of that existence I am destined to save multitudes ;

and for the guidance of posterity having established dhédmmo asa beacon, I shall also,

at no distant period, together with my sacerdotal fraternity in this very world, attain

nibbdnan, like fire extinguished by the exhaustion of fuel.’

‘«¢ Having in this manner expounded the whole of the Buddhawanso, explanatory of

the Kappd, of the names (of persons and places), of the genealogies and other parti-

culars, perambulating on the Ratanachankamo, which he had created at Kapilawat-

thu; and having received the reverential obeisance of his relations, descending from

the air (on which the Ratanachankamo was poised), Buacawa’ took his seat on the

pre-eminent Buddho’s throne which had been prepared for him.

“©On Bua’cGa’wa’, the saviour, having thus seated himself, his assembled relations

relieved from their (previous) distress§, with perfect unanimity seated themselves

also around him. Thereupon a Pokkhara shower descended, which was instantly

absorbed through the fissures of the earth. Those who wished to get wet, did get

wet. Those who did not wish to get wet, did not receive a drop of rain. On beholding

this, surprised by the miracle and wonder, they exclaimed ‘ Lo! what miracle, what

wonder!’ On hearing this exclamation, Tarua’cAro observed, ‘ It is not only now,

on the occasion of my relations being assembled that a Pokkhara shower has fallen ;

it has so rained in aforetime also.’ Making that subject his text, he preached the

Wessuntarajdtako|| ; and it produced its effect. Buaca/wa then rising from his

pulpit retired to his Wihédro.

‘‘Be it understood, that the eighteen gdt¢ commencing with the words ‘ apari-

méyyé ito kappé, chaturo dsinsu ndyakd, (at a period incalculably remote from this

kappo, there were four Buddha) are gdthé composed by those who held the convoca-

tion§. All the information contained in the rest of the gdthé (of the Buddhawanso)

needs no commentary.

‘¢ Thus is closed the Madhura atthawildsiniy4 Buddhawansatthakathd being a com-

mentary on the Gotomo Buddhawanso, the history of the twenty-fifth Buddho.”

N. B. The distance from which I communicate with you deprives me of the pri-

vilege of correcting the press. Itis not my intention to trouble you with a list of

errata, but there is one error, produced by my own carelessness in giving to my

clerk an inaccurate genealogical table to extract from, which I must be permitted to

rectify, as it materially affects the question under investigation, page 715, vol. 6,

for “paternal grandson” read ‘“‘son.” In page 51, of the Introduction to the Maha-

wans9, it is explained how this error. was committed.

* Subsequently called MoGGaLANo. f SARIPUTTO.

t All Buddha are released from existence before the period of extreme old age in

their respective terms of existence.

§ Being of a royal and reigning family they had remonstrated as already explained,

with Buppno, on his leading the life of a mendicant pilgrim, instead of being respec-

tably maintained by them.

|| A discourse in the Jdtakan, a section of the Suttapitako narrative of BuppHo’s

incarnation in the character of Wessantaro raja.

q This occurred at the first convocation held after Sa’xya’s death. 5K2

818 Table of Mortality. [Ser

VI.—Table of Mortality for ages from birth to twenty years, framed

from the Registers of the Lower Orphan School, Calcutta. By H.

T. Prinssr, Esq.

In the article published by me in the Journal of the Asiatic Society

for the month of May 18387, I pointed out the facility with which the

principle of computation applied therein to the casualties of the Bengal

Civil Service, might be extended to any fixed and continuous body,

provided only there was a register kept of the age at which each

individual came to belong to it, and of the casualties with the date of

the occurrence of each, or if the life was lost to the registers, through

retirement, discharge, or other similar contingency, of the date of such

removal from the books.

I advised the formation of books, arranged for each age of life, for

registering the casualties amongst considerable numbers of each grade

of the population of India, in order that tables might be framed there-

from for the valuation of native life, so as eventually to extend to

this class the benefits of life assurance in all its branches.

I beg through the pages of the Journal again to point attention to

this object, and as a first fruit of the wide field of statistical inquiry

which lies open in this direction, requiring only a little labour to yield a.

rich crop of useful results, I now present to the public a table of

mortality for children and young persons, from birth to twenty years

of age, framed from the registers of the Lower Orphan School of Cal-

cutta, upon the principle before explained and inculcated.

J am indebted to Dr. Srzwart, late Secretary of the Statistical Com-

mittee of the Asiatic Society, for the materials from which the table has

been prepared, This gentleman, being connected with the Military

Orphan School, found that a series of registers had been kept, and

were forthcoming from 1798, of every boy and girl who had been

admitted to that institution. The books were made up annually, and

the boys or girls’ names being entered alphabetically at the beginning

of the year, twelve columns were ruled down the page, and any casualty

by death was entered with its date in the column of the proper month.

In like manner at the foot of the list of boys and girls in the institution

on the lst January, the fresh entries in the course of the year were

recorded, with notice of the age of each new comer, and the date of his

admission appeared in the column for the month when it took place.

Upon the first view of these registers, I at once perceived that they

afforded the materials for a computation of the mortality amongst the

inmates of the Orphan School, upon the principle applied to the Civil

ee ee

Be ee ae ee PE Ce ee ee eee eee

1838.] Table of Mortality. 819

Service of Bengal, and needed only to be re-cast and added up to yield

equally valuable results for the ages of life they comprehended. ‘The

re-casting of thirty-eight years’ registers containing many thousand

names, has however proved a work of labour that has occupied several

months, The Statistical Committee has furnished a writer, who has

been employed on the work for this period without intermission, and

the product of his labour in the volumes which show the name of

every child, the date of his admission, and the manner of his having

been disposed of, are deposited in the library of the Asiatic Society,

as well for the verification of the table now submitted to the public,

as that the detailed registers may be available for the ascertainment of

other results which also may be gathered from them*.

My present purpose, as above stated, is confined to the exhibition in a

tabular form of the ratio of mortality for each year of existence as

deduced from these registers. .

It will be satisfactory to explain in the first instance the process

followed in the construction of the table; for there are several circum-

stances requiring to be noted, as guides to those who may apply the

same principle of computation to other classes of persons, or may

undertake the recasting of other similar registers.

Firstly. The Orphan School books did not show in every in-

stance the actual date of birth, nor, if they had done so, would it

have been advisable to attempt to follow each child from birth-day to

birth-day, and so frame a general register, true to the exact age of

each individual. For example, a child admitted is simply entered as

aged uot one complete year; in the re-cast of the registers this child

stands as entered of the age 0, and he is considered as remaining of

that age until the Ist January next following, though his birth-day,

that is the date on which he completed one year, may happen to have

been in November, or in February, or in any other of the twelve months

following the date of his admission. All subsequent years of life are

in like manner computed by the calendar year, from ist January to

3lst December, without reference to birth-days, which, as the error

will be equal both ways, and so balance itself, affords a complete result

for our present purpose.

| Secondly. It is the object in the construction of this table, to

deduce correctly in the first instance the annual percentage mortality.

The admissions in the course of a year do not give the risk of those

lives for the whole year. _If for instance all admitted at 0 year of age

™ NoTE.— Amongst other purposes to which these registers may be applied is the

ascertainment of the relative mortality in different periods of years, and in differeut

months and seasons.

820 Lable of Mortahty. [Srpr.

had entered on the Ist December, there would have been the risk of

only one month in their case, and the number of casualties upon the

number admitted would have been one-twelfth only of the annual ratio.

To provide accurately for this I furnished the writer, employed in re-

casting the registers, with a table giving a decimal value for every day

of the year, and thence, according to the date of admission, I made

him enter the risk, as of the fraction for the period of the year remain-

ing to 3lst December. Thus, in the re-cast of the registers, each

admission will be seen indicated by a fraction to three places of deci-

mals : and the number of risks is by addition of the whole brought to

the true annual sum for computation of the ratio of mortality from the

actual casualties,

Thirdly. When a life lapsed, its risk was lost for the remainder of

the year. To provide for this, I made a reversed decimal table show-

ing the fraction of the year to the date of the casualty, and by entering

the lapsed life not as an entire year’s risk, but according to the fraction

to the date of occurrence, effectually removed this source of error.

But those who follow this plan must be careful, when a life lapses in

the very year of admission, to take both fractions from the same table

for computation of the value of the risk : otherwise a child admitted on

the 2nd January and dying on the 30th December, would have the

same fraction to represent both dates, and would stand as 0, though

the risk of his life was an entire year, less only two days. The writer

employed in re-casting the Orphan School registers made this mistake

in the first instance, which is the reason of my noticing the point.

Fourthly. Having thus settled the mode of entering admissions

and casualties, I caused books to be prepared for each year of life.

In that for age 0, I caused to be entered successively, all who were

admitted at an age less than one year, taking their names in succession

from the register of each year from 1798 to the present time. The

number of names thus entered in this book for age 0, is 5930, but

each being reduced to its fraction of the year of admission, and the

death cases being doubly reduced, the number of annual risks, for this

age is diminished to less than half, being 2646, which is what might

have been expected. The names of the whole being thus looked out

in the successive books, and entered in a fresh register for age 0, the

page was ruled for forty years of life from 0, and each name was

marked as a year of life in the columns following 0, as it was found in

the successive registers, until the date of decease, or of removal from

the institution.

Fifthly. The book of those who entered at an age less than one

year being completed, and the individuals followed out, a similar book

1838.] Table of Mortality. 821

was made up for those who entered at an age between one and two,

and so for each year in succession. The pages of all were then sepa-

rately summed up, and the aggregate of the books for 0 age being

placed at the top of the page of a general abstract, the aggregates of »

the books of other ages were arranged in order so that the columns for

age should correspond, and the whole be added up for the general

result. This general abstract is amongst the papers deposited in the

library of the Asiatic Society.

Siaxthly. It will be evident that tables framed on this principle

must be quite perfect, if only the registers on which they are framed

be complete; but I am compelled to acknowledge that this is not

the case with those with which I have had to deal. In the first place

the registers of three years 1802, 1804 and 1805, are altogether

wanting. The deaths of these years are therefore not all counted.

I have traced in the casualty book, thirteen deaths for 1802, nine for

1804, and four for 1805, which have been duly entered, but this cannot

be all. On the other hand if the children’s names were found in the

been entered as giving the risk of their life for the whole consecu-

tive period. The effect therefore is to increase the number of risks

and diminish the ratio of mortality. This error has no influence on

the ratio for year 0, and less of course on that for age one year, than

for the advanced ages, because the risks of column 0, are all fresh ad-

missions, which are likewise lost for these three years, and a large

proportion of the risks of age one are of and the same description.

The number of names lost to the tables, in the years of these missing

registers, that is, which appear in the book of 1801 but not in 1808,

or in 1803 but not again in 1806 is 238, of which a large proportion

will probably have been deaths, and the rest removals from the institu-

tion during the period. I might have provided for the error occasioned

by the want of these registers by excluding all the risks of the three

missing years, but have preferred to leave them; partly because of the

deaths found in the casualty register which have been entered, and

partly because of another source of error, which as it operated the

other way required something to counterbalance it.

In re-casting the registers, which as I have mentioned were framed

originally by the year, I have not found that all the names of each

books, there are no less than 830 names lost, without notice of the

cause of their being omitted in subsequent registers. This certainly is a

large number. A considerable proportion of them may be ascribable to

the children changing their names, and many to their being taken

822 Table of Mortality. [ Sept.

away from the institution without formal order, when the removal not

being settled and recorded at the time, the date and particulars have

slipped from notice. Out of the 820, however, there will assuredly

have been some errors from carelessness, occasioning omissions of at

least fractional risks of life: on the other hand every death being a for-

mal thing, attended with ceremonies and expenses, it is not likely that

such a casualty should have escaped entry. The omissions therefore

will have operated: to reduce the proportion of risks to the deaths, and

so to balance the effect of the want of the three years’ books. I might

have been less inclined to adopt the conclusion that these omissions had

operated to diminish the risks, if I had not found that the rates of

mortality produced by the computation, as made excluding them, were

extremely high for all the ages comprehended in the table, so high in

comparison with the most approved tables of Europe, as to prevent

suspicion that there is error from understating the deaths. I am obliged

however to confess, that in consequence of the want of the means of

tracing these 830 names, my table framed from the results of the Orphan

School of Calcutta, is only an approximation, instead of being based on

perfect data.

Seventhly. When preparing the first general abstract of the results

of these registers, it occurred to me rather as an object of curiosity

than with any hope of finding matter of separate interest, to direct the

boys and girls to be stated separately for every fifth year. But on

obtaining the first rough abstract so drawn out, I found so great a

difference in the ratio of mortality amongst the boys for the years

beyond the sixth, that I determined to sift the matter through the

results of each year. The consequence is, that my present general

abstract is on a roll six feet long, much too large to be printed in the

Journal. It must therefore lie for inspection, with the books in detail

upon the table of the Asiatic Society’s library. The table computed

from it will be exhibited in a much more compendious form.

Eighthly. It is necessary to observe that for the purpose of show-

ing the mortality separately amongst the boys and girls, and the num-

ber of each upon which the casualties occurred, the number living on

the 3lst December of the year for each age is stated in the column,

and the deaths are those that occurred in the year ending on that date,

that is, not in any given 12 months, but amongst the children who

gave the year of life then brought to a close. To compute from these

data the ratio of mortality on the boys and girls respectively, the fol-

lowing calculation has been adopted. For age 0, the boys that reached

the 3lst December, following the date of their admission, were 2713,

and 248 died before that date. As all these were births or admissions,

1838. ] Tuble of Mortality. 8238

none being brought on from the preceding year ; each may be,assumed

therefore, on the average, to have given half a year’s risk of life, when he

lived to the end of the year, and half that period, or a quarter of a year,

when he died before the 31st December. This assumption for the pro-

portion is borne out and confirmed by the general number of admissions

reduced to years, which, as above observed, is somewhat less than half

the total of boys and girls. Strictly perhaps, instead of half, the frac-

tion 2635, ought to be the ratio of reduction applied to the lives, or the

reverse fraction +23? to the casualties by death, to bring the calculation

to the results of a complete year; but for our present purpose it is

quite unnecessary to be so minutely accurate. It will be convenient

therefore to adhere to the broad and simple ratio of the half and

quarter. The percentage ratio per annum of the boys who were admit-

ted at an age less than one, will then be obtained thus :

Year’s risks, Half year Deaths

deaths. per annum.

2834 (2713 + 743) : (243 % 2) 486 :: 100 : 17,148

In the following years the risks being mostly of the entire year the

calculation is more simple.

2430 + 42° = 2679 : 498: : 100: 18,589.

The above explanation will make the following table quite intelli-

gible.

Ratio of mortality deduced from the Registers of the Lower Orphan

School of Calcutta.

os ey a .

B™ fh Soo Mm ° o w)

a ia 3 oS] 3 ls

Cheese a ae DD 2 &p bo & oO c

ae ao = a =o " s = 9 us 8p

Age {2 2] 3s FS HQ a) 8 ee fy tk oe

eg ie ee, 8 =) 2 = ag a a

® SS 3 rs) mn 2 * o 2 & ~~ O°

eee eee 5 at a ae ee ae

Hs ra o ea A o qa Q,

0 2.646 | 451 17.044) 9.713 | 243 1 17.148 2.766 |208 | 14.498

1 5.206 994 19.093} 2.430 | 498 | 18.589 2.436 '496 18.483

2 4.466 356 7.970) 2.169 186 8.222 2.203 |170 7.430

3 4.023 | 193 4.794) 1.968] 113 5.583 2-030 | 80 3.864

4 3.678 142 3.860 1.845 65 3.523 1.790 | 77 4.212

5 3.458 | 108 3.123! 4,725 56 3.394 1.788 | 52 2.869

6 3.235 91 2.813] 1.587 42 2.611 1.677 | 49 2.880

7 2.992 71 2.373) 1.45) 41 2.787 1.572 | 30 1.890

8 2.716 72 2.649) 1.314 36 23727 1.431 | 36 2.491

9 2.470 29 1.174} 1,186 15 1.257 1.322 | 14 1.053

10 2.159 50 2.311 956 33 3.396 1.210 | 17 1.395

31 1.863 38 2.039 750 20 2.630 1.140 | 18 1.566

12 1.588 20 1.259 528 Ss 1.504 1,071 \\"12 1.113

13 1.230 18 1.463 287 3 1,045 951 | 15 1.565

14 930 6 0.645 138 ] 0.724 799 5 0.624

15 696 10 1.451 70 6 8.219 626 | 4 0.636

16 484 9 1.859 38 3 7.692 449 | 6 1.327

17 315 7 2.222 te ae of 295 | 7 2.349

18 209 5 2.392 14 1 . 194 | 4 2.040

19 142 1 0.704 11 : 13] ] 0.763

20 97 2 2.061 8 1 ay 89 1 1,123

(Serr.

Table of Mortality.

824

118°¢g 0099S 6SS‘bS 0St‘o9 Gec'eF 196'S® b35'1b

06% 100°9€ | 009 00°65 | LE Te6‘tS | O€b 0gs‘09 |st9 E91 ‘bt 62S £8t ‘OP eg! L6s'te 0z

Ely PLE'QE | 009 008‘6S | ose €82'SS | OF o1e’t9 |SLg SEL ty LSE 068 ‘oF 00s‘ 169‘ze et

SSP Z0r‘Le | 009 000‘T9 | S@E [a¥6*SS | Of foLT‘'z9 |L6% OLL “Se Sat‘T EF6‘St $66‘ LEL‘b¥ Lt

oSt LSs‘Le | 009 0099 =| 0zE Z92'9S | OZF 065'%9 = |SbF 1239 gc9 86S‘6h osg* L8g‘cp Ot

cor GIE‘SE | 009 00c°29 | LIE SLG°9S | O6E 086°39 = |6zF 0S9‘9% LIE $16‘6r TL9S 8SZ ‘Or ST

ocy LOL*se | 009 008‘s9 | SI€ #68'9S | osE oge's9 |63P 6L0‘LE £0€ 8IZ‘O¢ oes 8SS‘OF $1

cSt Z26‘6E | 009 Oor‘sg | SIE ZIG‘LE | OE 0s9‘e9 624 80S‘Lb 86L 910‘IS 169% 6F3‘LE ff

SSP LL9‘6€ | 009 000‘t9 | ESE ges‘Ls | oze 000't9 = |6ar LE6‘ LP bLS 06S‘TS Z09' TSS ‘Lp al

SSb ZEl‘Or | 009 009't9 | OFE ess‘Ls | ore OLs‘'t9 [6% 998'8F 028 Ole‘Z¢ 966‘ Lbs'sp Tr

Soy Lsc‘o® | OOL Oos‘sg | 68s LtZ‘SS | 06 009't9 + |9tF ZI8'Sb 1bZ Tgr‘g¢ GST‘ £00‘0¢ or

GSP GtO'le | 008 001‘99 | It ss9‘sS | og¢ 086‘t9 |SIg LoE‘6p Sos YIL‘ES €64° S6¢‘0sS 6

9EL see‘sb | O00'T | O00'S9 | SBE Gr6'6S | OSG OF6'S9 $= |t6 898‘0¢ 656 Lto‘9¢ €92‘t | ¢g%'e¢ L

Pitt 2SE ‘ee Ooc‘t | 002‘69 Ct6 488‘09 0Z8 09499 {Zoz‘t 090‘IS S99'T CIL‘L¢ OFS ‘| FLL‘$¢ 9

oSL‘T b0a‘'Sh | OOS'T | OOO'IL | 69R‘T Jgse's9 | otet loZ6‘L9 I6Z¢‘r 6EQ9'Eg FOL‘T 9I‘6S GOL‘T 6Es‘og ¢

£08'S 800°8% | 00¢'% | Ouz‘eZ | 2ee‘% {86S‘t9 | oLO‘z |0S6‘69 |I6O'r O&|e‘os Z19°S 8Z0‘Z9 692° | Sos‘s¢ b

e8e‘s |96S‘LS | costs | oos'6g | 09%‘ |90z'%4 | oSo's lo6L‘LL \60¢'s S1g‘zg SLI‘ 669'69 6rE‘g | SI1‘Z9 ’

S69°1E 000'00‘T | Oost | oo0‘o0‘T| ToE‘zt loo0‘oo'r| o6s‘st '000‘00'T IS z‘¢z 000‘00‘I} 86b‘Ft 000°00'T | FF0‘Zt | ooo‘o0‘t | Oo

eee ieee I

“Ayt[2}10 Ur "21424 SpIID "9/423 [e1ouaN Ke

jO S][Iq uopuoT *SUOIJOVSURIT, >

W01y = UOdl}e[Nd *aTqry "qq wo a

[89 $20g “Id| ne[seig sAay[epy | s[jigq uopuory ‘aqsteQ = || *uojdmeqyicN *JOOWIS ueydiQ vyynoeg So

$9190) uvadoungy fo yuamasoop ay) ynim pasnduoo pun ‘saay 000‘00'T uo pagndmos pooyrg unydug ay? fo Ajayo1.40 py

1838.] Table of Mortality. 825

It will be seen from this table, that the percentage of mortality is

almost universally worse amongst the boys than the general average,

and amongst the girls better. The only ages which are exceptions

are 4 years, 6 years and 13. The last may be susceptible of some

explanation, as it might be expected that the girls at that age should

be more liable to disease than the boys, but not so the other two,

in which the difference indeed is not very wide from equality, and may

therefore be accidental. :

The consecutive increased mortality amongst the boys will, however,

require more careful notice.

In the first three years of life when both sexes receive equal care,

the per centage difference is only as follows :

Boys. Girls.

Lives. Deaths. Per ct. per ann. Lives. Deaths. Per ct. per ann.

La) Ce EI20 3 14.404 | 7842 ...... POST. <5 axe 13.798

equal to a difference between the sexes of one in 24. In the second

three years it increases, being

Boys. Girls.

Lives. Deaths. Per cent. Lives. Deaths. Per cent.

5656 ...... PSA twinsene AN OO satid bOo) oc 3 ZOD) 9 acl. os SeG59

equal to a difference of nearly one in seven. In the next five years

it becomes

Boys. Girls.

Lives. Deaths. Per cent. Lives. Deaths. Per cent.

Ga7G-.7.:.. OP oh sc cet 9 5a8 Arf 284 Ae 146 &.5.3. 2.004

or more than one quarter in excess for the boys ; and from the age

of 11 to 15 itis as high as

Boys. Girls,

Lives. Deaths. Per cent. | Lives. Deaths. Per cent.

Meee ese OB! L304. a a i 4 04 oo... 1.170

or nearly double.

The number of boys becomes so small after the age of fifteen, that

it is needless to pursue the comparison, but the deaths amongst 70

and 38 boys of the ages of 15 and 16 respectively being so high as

8.219, and 7.692 per cent., there is reason to believe that in respect

to the youths of this sex after the age of 14, the institution is merely

a hospital, the healthy boys being all apprenticed out, or otherwise

disposed of, while the sickly remain, because they are unfit to enter

the army as musicians, or to undertake any trade or profession.

But this circumstance, though it accounts for the large mortality

amongst the remnant of boys after 14 and 15 years of age, will not

account for the consecutive increased mortality on the large numbers

5L2

826 Table of Mortality. (Serr.

of the previous ages. I fancy the circumstance must be attributed in

part to the greater exposure the boys suffer, and the harder living they

are inured to, and in a great measure perhaps to the mortality known

to have prevailed amongst the boys, when they were at the other

school-house over the river, which was given up in consequence of

its insalubrity.

For practical purposes, therefore, the ratio of mortality calculated

from the deaths amongst the boys of the Orphan School institution,

must be set aside as too unfavourable for an average. The girls’

deaths for the same reason afford a better average than the general

table, which includes both sexes ; and, being more favourable, the results

on the girls’ lives correspond better with the results of the European

tables, which I have collected for comparison.

I have not been able to lay hand upon any explanation in detail of

the precise manner in which the Northampton and Carlisle tables were

framed. I have great doubt, however, if, for the early ages especially,

the results have been deduced from data, which can lay equal claim to

accuracy, with those used for the table I now present to the public.

The means may readily be forthcoming of ascertaining the number of

deaths, which occur in a town or in any community, and the ages of

the persons dying are of course entered on the burial registers, but

it is by no means so easy to number a fluctuating population, and to

risks at each age, upon which the casualties by death have occurred.

The great difference observable in the rates of decrement in the

different tables of Europe seems to confirm the doubt, as to the cor-

rectness of this material of the calculations upon which they are.

based: and the results of the London bills of mortality, as given in

Dr. Youne’s article in the Philosophical Transactions, compared with

Dr. Price’s Table framed from the same bills, afford a further confir-

mation of the doubts entertained, in respect to the accuracy of any we

yet possess. The only tables known to be constructed from perfect.

data, are those of the Equitable Life Insurance Office, but these are

confined to lives of ages exceeding twenty years*. ‘It will be seen that

the London table of the Philosophical Transactions comes nearest to

those framed upon the Orphan School registers as far as the age of

six years, and after that age Dr. Price’s table framed from the same

* The total number of Equitable lives between 10 and 20 is less than 1500

which is quite insufficient for an average upon those ages.

1838.] Table of Mortality. 827°

materials. The decrement in India is, as might be expected from the

climate, greater from birth than in London, but the favourable years

are the same, viz. from nine to fourteen, and there will be observed, with

due allowance for insalubrity, and for not perhaps the most favourable

rearing in a large school like our Orphan Asylum, that there is a ge-

neral correspondence in the results up to the age of six. After that age

the London decrement, in the first table given, is unaccountably small

compared with ours, as well as when compared with that of Dr. Price,

and is less than in many other European tables. I have seen in a

recent publication the following statement of the mortality of the

children brought up in the Blue Coat, or Christ Church School in

London.

Lives. Deaths per ann.

From 1814 to 1818 ...... 3 AICS | eae ol

1818 to 1828 ...... D193 ....0, 44

$e24 to 1525 %...:. GS 3 y- paeeo 40

S29 to FOIo ~. 0.5 DOR Ure ss .s 36

From this it would seem that the deaths in the early period were

about one per cent. per annum, but are reduced to two-thirds per cent.

in later years. Assuming the lives comprehended in the statement

to be from seven years old to fifteen, we have from the girls’ table of

the Orphan School for the same ages the following result :

Lives. Annual Deaths.

ate pani al ofan suka. treblirt wep eaid «hes os OF

one and a half (1. 49) per cent. which is a Bouble narullity “tie our

Calcutta institution, as compared with that of the London school, at

the most favourable period.

The general bills of mortality for London, as given in the Philosophi-

cal ‘Transactions, show for the same age an average rate of decrement

of 0.70 per cent.*, which would lead to the conclusion, that for those

ages the table is not perfect ; for it is not possible to conceive, that the

general population of a city like London, including the half-starved

ragged children of the pennyless poor, are subject to fewer casualties

by death, than the well-fed and well-clothed inmates of this richly

endowed institution.

Dr. Pricer in his table calculated from the London bills of morta-

lity, gives a ratio of deaths for this period of life uniformly exceeding

one per cent., being in the aggregate, upon 102,190 risks, 1280

deaths, or one anda quarter per cent. per annum, which is borne out

* Lives, 5,22,172— Deaths, 3704.

828 Sketch of the Temple to Durga at Badeswur, &c. (Srpr.

by the results of the Blue Coat school, and corresponds more nearly

with the ratio deduced from our girls’ table. Dr. Prics’s rate how-

ever for the first three years of life, and especially for the first year, is

so much higher than that of any other table, as to make it probable,

that he has adopted a different method of computing the early deaths.

Perhaps also he has included the children still-born amongst the

deaths of the age 0, whereas our table of course excludes these, and

for the most part the additional risks of the first month after birth.

September, 18388.

VIIl.—Skeich of the Temple to Durga at Badéswur, &c. extracted

from Lieut. Kirror’s Journal.

Before reaching the small town of Badéswur situated just beyond

the Mulakat nullah, there is at its debouchure an isolated hill with

a modern temple to MaHADEVA on the top of it, built by a Mahratta

lady ; at the foot of this hill, on the southern face under some large

tamarind trees, is a very curious and ancient temple to Dur@a ; it is in

the same style with that of Kundhurpur, and likewise unfinished ; the

plinth is buried in the sand; it is very small, about 6 feet wide, 9 long,

and 14 high. The accompanying drawing represents the elevation on

the south side, and will serve to illustrate this peculiar style, the large

temples only differing in proportion, and in the increased number of

compartments, but not in ornament; the idols are destroyed. Vide

Pl. XL.

The small town of Badéswur is certainly the neatest and most pic-

turesque place I have seen; there is one long street which is very broad,

having a row of small gardens up the centre of it with trellis work

coverings, over which beans and other creeping esculents and flowering

plants are trained, forming one continued bower ; at intervals there are

fantastic vases made of pottery in which the tulsi plant is cherished :

some of these are very tastefully constructed. There are also several

wells with terraces round them; the houses are all elevated on plinths

with narrow ledges projecting beyond the walls ; the thatches also pro-

ject considerably so as to admit of the rain falling clear of all; these

ledges serve for the people to sit on in the fine weather. There isa

mart here for grain, iron, cotton, cloths, silk dhotis, ironmongery, &e.

which are both manufactured and brought from the neighbouring places ;

the unwrought iron comes from Ungool; there is a ferry here and a

direct road to Nyahgurh and Berhampur in the Madras Presidency.

SI Pas Prd Vol. WE. FLX

FOL 3 .

Boe A >

y = NOK y

L Q At “4 iG

BGORS ‘e cS

r oS

CONE

jam Coe 4s f es ;

;

Wh Wf,

iene ar sae OM ee

ava nee

fe (oh , }

MRED a

ey TI ee

a TANTO i

oon.

aa ed es degre hI

«y ae he lac

Pete a" iret et

ie ee ah?

Oe ig i

Pe ‘A Cee

meee a te

ais

rere

<p.

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 829

The hill of Badéswur is a quarter of a mile beyond the town, at the

foot of it, and on the east side are several small temples of antiquity,

but destroyed by modern innovations : there is also a fine stone well.

I observed several idols executed in a very superior style in chlo-

rite ; amongst them was a figure of Bupa erect, with the different Bud-

dhas in the sitting posture encircling him, similar to that dug up at

Sarnath by Lieutenant CUNNINGHAM ; it was besmeared with sendoor

and ghee, the same as the other idols. I endeavoured to persuade a

brahman, that he was guilty of heresy in thus worshipping Bupu; he

assured me that it was not Bupu, but Maua’prEva. So much for the

knowledge of the people of Orissa, for I have remarked the same

wherever I have been.

We descended at this place into the bed of the river; then after

rounding the hill and passing the mouth of a large nullah called the

Kildgiri, we re-ascended the bank and entered another extensive plain

which continued uninterrupted till half a mile beyond where our camp

was pitched at Puddumbutte : it also extends for several miles south of

the river.

The hill of Badéswur has a volcanic appearance and consists of a

brick-red marl and masses of gravel, breccia, and decomposed granite.

It is about 300 feet high and rises abruptly from the river, on the

opposite side of which (to it) is another rock forming an island having

an equally curious appearance; there is a temple on it also, for all such

singular places are looked upon as the abodes of some “ thakoor’” or

form of the deity, and resorted to accordingly.

VIUI.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening the 10th October, 1838.

H. T. Prinsep, Esq. Vice President, in the chair.

Lieut. J. Duncan, and Dr. Heirer, proposed at the last meeting, were

unanimously elected members of the Society.

James Mippieton, Esq. of the Hindu College, proposed by the Secre-

tary, seconded by the Vice President.

Oriental Publications.

Read a letter from the Secretary of the Bombay Branch of the Royal

Asiatic Society, acknowledging the receipt of the Arabic works published

by the Society.

Read the following correspondence relative to the interchange of works

of Oriental Literature with the Egyptian Government :

830 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Serr.

To J. Prinsup, Esqg., Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.

Sir,

I am directed by the Right Honorable the Governor General to transmit to

you, for submission to the Asiatic Society, the accompanying copies of papers

relating to the interchange of works of Oriental Literature between India and

Egypt, proposed by Gunrant Bry, a Spanish gentleman at the head of the Medi-

cal establishment at the latter place: and to convey the wish of His Lordship,

that the Asiatic Society will be pleased to favor him with their opinion on the

points indicated in my letter of the 18th instant, with a view to acknowledge in

some measure, the handsome overture made by GueTrani Bey. Inthe meantime,

Major Frexrx has been requested to forward to your address the books, per list

No. 1, which have been already received from Egypt, and are in his possession,

excepting the ‘* Biography of celebrated Philosophers by ABpuLLA Bin Hoo-

SEN’? which is herewith sent, advising you of the date and name of the vessel on

which the books may be forwarded to Calcutta.

I have, &c.

Simla, W. H. MAcCNAGHTEN,

20th Aug. 1838. Secy. to the Govt. of India with the Govr. Genl.

To the Secretary to the Govt. of India in the General Department with the

Governor General.

Sir,

I beg leave to state, that while at Lahore on my recent Mission, I received

two letters from Major Fexrx, private Secretary to the Governor of Bombay,

dated June the 8th and July the 5th, the first forwarding a letter to my address

dated Cairo, the 16th of April, from Col. Dz Hrzera, who returned from India

to Europe via Egypt last cold season, and from GueTani Bey, a Spanish gentle-

man at the head of the Medical Establishment in Egypt, dated Alexandria, the

llth of May.

2. I have annexed extracts from Major Frexrx’s letters and from that of Col.

De Hezeta, together with a copy of GureTANr Bey’s communication, and of the

two lists which he has furnished of European works translated into Arabic. No. 1,

is a list of the books. actually sent to India by the Bry, aud No. 2, is a list of

the books translated, which the Bry expresses his willingness to send should a

desire be expressed to have them.

3. The Governor General will observe, that my learned correspondent ex-

presses his conviction that the Governments of Bombay and Calcutta, animated

by the same desire of keing useful, have published similar translations in differ-

ent Oriental languages, and that an interchange of these works between India

and Egypt would prove of the greatest utility, as well to the people who are under

the beneficent rule of Great Britain, as to those who obey ‘‘ the regenerator,

Mawomep ALI.”

4, Iam apprehensive, that, as regards translations on this side of India, we

shall be able to make but a very poor return to Egypt for the valuable collection

transmitted by Gurranr Bry. I would venture to suggest, that the Govern-

ment of Bombay be requested to furnish a list of all works which have there

been translated into the Oriental languages, and that I be authorized to forward

a copy of this correspondence to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society at Calcutta,

with a request, that that learned body be solicited to furnish their opinion, as to

the most appropriate mode of acknowledging the handsome overture of GUETANE

Bey, andas to whether it would be advisable, with reference to our inability to

make a suitable return, to request a further supply of works according to the list

No. 2. It occurs to me as being possible, that the Society may deem it proper

to lay out a portion of the funds, which the Honorable the Court of Directors

have recently placed at their disposal for the encouragement of Oriental Litera-

ture, in the purchase of some of the works published in Egypt, and thereby in

some degree to aid the useful labors which are there being prosecuted.

5. I would further suggest, that I may be authorized to request Major Fex1x

to forward to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society at Calcutta, the works which

have been already received in Bombay from Egypt.

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 831

6. One specimen of these works being the ‘‘ Biography of celebrated Philo-

sophers by Apputia Bin Hoosen,” has been sent to me by Major Fexix. It

is submitted herewith for the inspection of His Lordship. I have looked into

this work here and there, and the style appears to me to be extremely perspicu-

ous and good.

I have, &e.

Simla, (Signed) W. H. MAacnaGurTen.

18th Aug. 1838.

A Monsieur Le Chevalier, W. H. MacnaGutTen,

Secretdire du Gouvernement du département de Calcutta.

MownsIeEur,

Graces aux heureux événemens politiques qui ont decidé depuis quelque lustres

des destinées des nations, la civilization Huropéenne a pénétrée en orient et con-

tinue a y faire tous les jours de rapides et douces conquétes sous l’influence de

la propre convention dictée par l’exemple de nos mceurs, et les principes de

notre impartiale justice.

La connaissance des ouvrages sciéntifiques les plus remarquables, issues des

plumes des savans d’occident est sans nul doute le moyen le plus propre pour

parvenir & un complet résultat.

L’illustre et renommé Me’ur’met Aty Pacwa intimement persuadé de cette

verité en a fait traduire plusieurs en langue Arabe et continue sans relache cette

ceuvre de philantropie.

Je n’ignore pas que les gouvernemens eclairés de Bombay et de Calcutta

animés du méme esprit civilisateur ont fait publier des semblables traductions en

diverses langues orientales.

Mon digne compatriote Mr. le Colonel de Hezeta, dont vous trouverez ci

joint une lettre d’introduction m’aaussi parlé 4 son passage par ce pays dont la

maniere la plus favorable, des efforts du gouvernement Anglais pour déraciner

Vignorance qui depuis tant de siécles a abruti les habitants de 1l’Inde. Nous

avons pensé qu’fin échange de ces ouvrages pourrait étre de la plus grande

utilité pour les peuples qui ont le bonheur dese trouver sous la bienfaisante

domination de la Grande Bretagne, aussi bien que pour ceux qui obeissent a

Menemet Aty le régénérateur. Jai communiqué cette ideé au Viceroi qui ena

aprecié toute la valeur et les biens quien pourront résulter. En consequence

jai Vhonneur d’envoyer un exemplaire de tous les ouvrages scientifiques imprimés

au Caire en langue Arabe par ordre de S. A. al’usage des étabissemens d’instruc-

tion, que je vous prie d’agréer comme témoignage de mon estime et consi-

deration. |

Nous avons envoyé encore d’autres ouvrages traduits dout je joins ici la ndte

S’ils Peayeue vous étre agreables je ma ferai un vrai plaisir de vous les adesser

dés que j’en serai informé.

Agreéz M. le Sécretaire l’ ietiant de ma consideration la plus distinguée

Le premier Medecin Chirurgien de S. A. A. V. Roi d’ Egypte, &c. &e,

Alegandrie, le 11 Mai, 1838. (Signed) GaeETANI Bry.

List of Aradic books.

2 Copies. A Treatise on military discipline.

oe es A work on medical science, by MaHomep Hurrowee.

2 Ditto on mineralogy, by Reruau BupWEE.

2 Treatise on Geometry, by MAnomED BoyumEE.

2 Ditto on anatomy, by Manomep Hurrowes, and Sunix MAanom-

ED RuSHEEDEE.

late Ditto on Surgery, by MaHomED HurRowEE.

i aa Ditto Medicines, ditto.

2 Art of Judging of diseases, by ditto.

2 Treatise on the preparation of Ointments, by Moostrura Husson,

2 Signs by which Domestic animals may be judged of, by diito.

° Alingets Treatise on the cure of horses, by ditto.

832

3 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. (Serr.

2 Copies. Geographia, or work on geography, by Reruan Bupwenr.

ap Elements of Philosophy, by Manomrep Hurnrawes.

Bsieyy Biography of celebrated philosophers, by AppULLA BIN HoosEIn.

By Treatise on the use and advantages of the several members of the

body, by Manomep HurraweEe.

Bivrisgs Explanation of uncommon terms; by Rervan Bupwee.

Ouvrages traduits in Arabe et imprimés.

1. Anatomie générale humaine. 9. Pharmacie, id.

2. Anatomie descriptive, id. 10. Traité de ’extérieur du Cheval.

3. Traité de chirurgie. ll. Traité de Mineralogie.

4. Physiologie. 12. Géographie.

5. Pattrologie interne humaine. 13. Vie des Philosophes.

6. Hygiéne. 14. Géometrie descriptive.

7. Traité de Pharmacie. 15. L’Ecole du soldat et de Pelotor.

8. Anatomie Vétérinaire.

Ouvrages traduits en Arabe et sous presse.

16. Physique. 18. Histoir du moyeu-age.

17. Abrégé de V’histoir Ancienne. 19. Traité de bandages et appareils.

Ouvrages traduits et & imprimer.

20. Traité de Botanique. de la Geographie de Malte Brun (le tra-

21. Chimie d’Orfila. duction de cette ouvrage se continue.)

22. Traité de Chimie. 41. Guide du Juge militaire,

23. Traité des accouchemens. 42. Traité de Mythologie.

24. Manuel de l’accouchemens. 43. Progrés de la Civilization en

25. Physiologie de hagoas. Europe.

26. Pharmacie pratique. 44. Traité d’ Agriculture.

27. Pharmacie végétale. 45, De la culture du murier par

28. Chimie pharmaceutique. Julien.

29. Géographie physique. 46. Manuel des Sapeurs.

30. Géographie elémentaire. 47. Traité de Géometrie Militaire.

31. Traité des Poisons par Orfila. 48. Table des Logarithmes.

32. Géometrie. 49. Vade mecum des medecins Vé-

33. Arithmetique. térinaires.

34. Algébre. 50. Formulaire Vétérinaire.

35. Traité de mécanique. 51. Réglement sur le service médical

36. Histoire Moderne. Vétérinaire.

37. Logique de Dumarsais. 52, Pathologie interne Vétérinaire.

38. Histoire de Charles XII. 53. Pathologie externe Vétérinaire.

39. Elemens et principes du droit 54. Matiére medicale Vétérinaire.

naturel. 55. Anatomie générale Vétérinaire.

40. Les quatres premiers volumes 56. ‘Traité des Articulations.

Ouvrages traduits en turcet imprimés.

57. Réglemens sur les services interi- 64. Traité,

eur d 1’ infanterie. 65. L’Art de la guerre.

58. Ordonnances sur les exercises et 66. Geometrie de Legendre.

manoeuvres d’ Infanterie.

59, id. id. id. de Cavalerie.

60. id. id, id. d’ Artillerie.

67. Campagne de Napoléon en Italié.

68. Histoir de Napoléon ecrite par

lui-méme 4 Sainte Héléne.

Logique de Dumarsais.

Histoire d’ Alexandre le grand

(sons presse.)

61. Réglemens sur la fabrication et 69.

des Armes. 70.

62. Services des officiers.

63. Réglement sur le service en Campagne.

Je prie, Mr. Le Secretaire, d’envoyer

une copie de cette Note a Calcutta.

(Signed) GAETANI Bry.

1838. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 833

Ewiracts of letters from Mojor Fe.ix and Col. J. De Hezera.

From Major QO. Frurx, dated 8th June, 1838.

“I enclose a letter which came under cover to me from a Spanish gentleman

whois now the head of Medical establishment in Egypt. He has also sent a

great many books printed in Cairo, which are translations from European au-

thors into Arabic; but, as I think it probable that you will desire them to be

sent to Calcutta, I shall not forward the box till I hear from you.

‘¢ Of course the Bry explains his motives for opening this correspondence, but

[ am assured by Col, De Hezera that he is a man of talent and consideration.”

From Major. O. Freuix, dated 5th July, 1838.

“¢T enclose two lists which GarTant Bey ‘‘ Le premier medecin chirurgien de

S. A. A. V. Roid’ Egypte,”’ as he styles himself, has requested me to forward

to you.

ONO. 1, is a list of the books he has sent, and No. 2, a list of all that have

been translated into Arabic at Cairo, and any, or all of which he will be happy

to be allowed to present to you.

‘‘T have packed the books named in list No. 1, and shall keep them till I

hear from you.’’

eseeene,

From Col. Di Hezera, dated Cairo, 16th of April, 1838.

‘6 You will readily excuse that J intrude on your valuable time, when you will

see that my letter has for its object the promotion of education in India, by

means of elementary and didactic works well translated in the vernacular lan-

guages. Travelling in this country I had the good fortune to meet my country-

men GAETANI Bey and Crot Bey, the first, the favorite and personal physician

to his Highness the Paswa, and the second the chief inspector of hospitals, and

both the creators of a medical college not only of males, but also of females for

the obstetric art. They have had the merit of overcoming by dint of persever-

ance and energy, and even at the risk of their lives, .all the prejudices of the

Moslem, and to see them dissect, and some have already performed on living

subjects delicate cases of dithotomy. No soonerI heard of the great number

of translations which they have caused to be made into Arabic of medical works

which are already printed, I saw the great advantages which might result to

India and Egypt from a mutual interchange of such works. My wishes have

been met with alacrity on the part of these high-minded -and learned indivi-

duals, and the consequence is the public letter which will accompany this.

I have no doubt that Lord AucKLawp and yourself will sympathize with him

in philanthropy.

‘¢ What would your Education or School Committee have said if they had wit-

nessed as I did four days ago a polytechnical school, which deserves completely

its name and in which every branch of mathematical science is taught without

the help of any European language ?

‘¢ This, I acknowledge, is carrying the thing too far, for we ourselves can-

not be thoroughly learned without the assistance of the classical languages. But

I prefer even this, to making a distantly foreign language the vehicle of all ele-

mentary learning.”’

Mr. SurHeERLAND, Secretary, Committee P. Instruction, informed the

Society that the essays intended to compete for Mr. Muir’s prize must

be delivered in by the 15th March, 1839.

Library.

The following books were presented to the Asiatic Society :

The Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London, for the

years 1825-6-7—from the Royal Society.

The list of the members of the Royal Society for the 30th November, 1837.

oM 2

834 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. (Serr.

Proceedings of the Royal Society, Nos. from 18 to 31, inthe years 1834—1838.

Abstracts of the papers printed in the Philosophical Transactions of the

Royal Society of London, from 1830 to 1837 inclusive, vols. 3. 1830 to 1837.

Address of his Royal Highness the Duke of Sussex, K. G. &e. &c. the

President, read at the anniversary meeting of the Royal Society, on Thursday,

November 30, 1837.

Address to "Her Majesty referred to in the address of H. R. H. the President

of the Royal Society.

Defence of the resolution for omitting Mr. Pannizz1’s Bibliographical notes

from the Catalogue of the Royal Society. -

The Sixth Report of the British Association for the advancement of science,

vol. 5—presented by the Council.

Annual Report of the Regents of the University of the State of New York—

by the Regenis to JAMES PRINSEP, and by him to the Society.

A Catechism in the Tai or Shyan language, by Nathan Brown, Esq. printed

at Sadiya—by Captain JENKINS.

Tarjamah Kitab ul Filasafat, an Arabic work, printed at the Government

Press of MaHomeED Att, at Cairo. [See correspondence above ]

Meteorological Register for August 1838—dy the Surveyor General.

Meteorological Registers from Mauritius in continuation of the series before

sent—by M. JuL1iEN DrsJARDINS.

Larpner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, ‘‘ Statesmen,’’ vol. 5th—/from the Book-

sellers.

Two Arabic books, printed, entitled ‘‘ Destur-ul-Qorét,’’ and ‘‘ Fatawa

Ekhtiyar’”’—presented by Maulavi Zs’HuR Aut.

The Gardens and the Menagerie of the Zoological Society delineated, 2 vols.

purchased at 16 rs. on recommendation of the Museum Committee.

Literary and Antiquities.

A despatch from the Acting Secretary at Bombay forwarded, through

the Government of India, Lieut. Posrans’ journal of his visits to Girnar.

The facsimiles of the inscriptions are stated to be on their way—when we

shall be able to revisethe translations and place the whole upon sure foundations, ©

Extract of a private letter from Pvofessor Lassen, dated Bonn, 12th

February, 1838, (which however only reached Calcutta on the 16th Sep-

tember) was read by the Secretary, announcing his discovery of the

Bactrian language being closely allied to, if not identical with, the Pali,

and propounding a new alphabet, in almost exact accordance with that

adopted in the July No. of the Journal.

We venture to extract the passage alluded to :—

‘* To the very curious fact, that those inscriptions are in Pali (or perhaps

Prakrit), let me present you with the analogous one, that the legends of the

Bactrian coins, at least in my opinion, are also in Prakrit. But here I must ask

your pardon for some alterations I make in your alphabet of that character.

The letter Y or ¥ cannot, I think, be d, because this vowel is not expressed

by any sign in other places, where it ought to be written. I propose to read it

a ory. Then I find, that 1 may every where be read wor hk. The legend on

the coin of AmynTos (Asiatic Journal, v. p. 720) read thus: Maharajé jayavaté

amito, This dialect omits n before ¢ and d, as the names prove ; jayavatd is

therefore the Prakrit qwyq@r, Sanskrit sfayata, the victorious. The word for

avlnros is apalihaté, the Prakrit of the Sanskrit sofaza:, the unrepulsed.

The coin of Ayos (vol. IV. plate XXII. No. 1.) Tread : Maharajé rajadirajé

mahaté Ayé. Youhave yourself observed, that + di, is the correct reading.

Mahaté is again for @¥a, the great. The name of Menanver would in Prakrit

drop the r (in vavépov), and this western dialect besides the 2 before d. I

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 835

therefore suppose, that the penultimate letter is in fact another d, and that the

spelling is minadoé. This d recurs in the title for just; which may be damikéd,

or wyifaat v. Hfaqar in Prakrit.

‘The uncurtailed form of k is, if I may be allowed to go on with my conjec-

tures, “h, and not the figure, you have adopted from the coins of Evcratipes. I

appeal to those of ANTIALKIDES and to the titles, in which “) is immediately be-

fore the final 6. The term for saviour, I am not so certain of ; it may be tataré,

that is the Prakrit @Taitr or perhaps qrerty for the Sanskrit apart, the

rescuer. The native word for brother of the king puzzles me very much, and

I am as yet quite at a loss. The curious coin of AGaTrHocLEIA presents another

difficulty. @eérpomes is really a Greek word found in late writers, as HeLioponvs,

as for instance as epithet to ¢7Aos ‘ a zeal which emulates the gods.’ It is

generis communis and the genitive of the feminine like the masculine: there-

fore I propose reading @EOTPONIOY, if I am not mistaken, the omicron is still

visible. Do not, I pray, take this correction unkindly, we have at Bonn no

Bactrian coins, but plenty of Greek dictionaries. The reverse cannot have

the name of the queen, on account of the termination in p, 6 and I believe

you are quite right, when you suppose the epithets to Be (great) king and

saviour. The name might by my alphabet be read Mikdnidd, in fact Mupwrildns

may be a Greek word, though I cannot prove its real existence as a name.

‘Tt will please you to hear, that your conjecture on teccapiocrov has also been

proposed by a German translator of Strabo, Mr. GrosxurD, who, however, has

not had the happy thought of comparing the name with Suraghtra. Some

manuscripts leave out the veo entirely, and this I should prefer reading r4vre

Sapidsov kadovuevny Kal rhy Sryeptibos Bacthevav. My conjecture Trigerte is

hardly tenable ; it must be some country on the coast. Pronemy’s Syrastrene is

the peninsula of Guzerate, and the kingdom of Sicrrris (tara in Sanskrit ?)

must be placed near Baroda. Proriemy has a town, Siripala on the Nerbudda,

where it is joined by the Mophis or Myhes, at least according to his information.

Here at all events we must seek for Sicrerris.”’

A letter from Professor Scutecren of the same place, acknowledged the

receipt of the 2nd and 3rd vols. of the Mahabharata, and of the Journal.

He hopes shortly to present a return in kind. The following extract

alludes to a discussion which occupies the learned of Europe at present :

‘¢ Jignore si le Journal Parisien, Ja Revue des deux Mondes, vous parvient

& Calcutta. Dans cette supposition les deux autres pieces n’ auraient besoin

d’aucune explication ultérieure. Dans le second cahier du mois d’Aoiit 37 se

trouve un mémoire de M. LETRONNE, inscrit: Sur lL’ or igine Grecque des

Zodiaques prétendus Egyptiens. M. LevRonne occupe le premier rang parmi les

Hellenistes et les antiquaires de la France actuelle ; j ’entretiens avec lui des

relations fort amicales. I} a cru par erreur que j’adhérais 4 son hypothése ; ce qui

m’aforcé d’éntamer cette discussion. Les assertions de M. LETRONNE vont

_ plus loin que le titre de son Mémoire n’indique : il veut que les douze constel-

lations du zodiaque, partout ot elles se trouvent, auraient été empruntés aux

Grecs, J ’abandonne les Egyptiens a leur sort: je pense qu ’ils se tireront

d’affaire. Mais quant aux Indiens, je proteste. Dans les quatre distiques

Sanskrits de ma fagon* vous trouverez une indication légére de mes principaux

argumens, dont j’ai développé une partie seulement dans le journal orientaliste

de M. Ewaup. I’ examinerai ensuite la nomenclature Indienne et vraiment

ancienne dans son rapport avec les zodiaques sculptés. Je n’en connais que

deux qui ayent été gravés: |’ un dans Jes Transactions Philosophiques, de la

Soc. Royale des Sciences pour l’an 1772 (répété par Bailly), lautre dans les

mémoires de Ja Soc. Asiat. de Londres, vol. III. pl.J. M. Lerronne les

rejette comme modernes. Cela n’est peut-étre pas bien sar, au moins a Vegard

de celui du Cap Comorin: mais soit! je le veux bien. C’ést un argument ea

ma faveur.

* We have not space to insert the Sanskrit verses.—ED.

“836 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Serr.

‘« Votre illustre Société accordait autrefois 4 ses associés Européens le droit

de lui adresser des questions, et d’indiquer des sujets de nouvelles recherches.

Permettez-moi d’user de ce privilége. Je desirerais diriger l’ attention de vos

savans compatriotes qui séjournent dans diverses parties de 1’Inde vers les

zodiaques sculptés qui peuvent se trouver dans les ruines des anciens temples,

soit Brahmaniques, Bouddhistes, ou Jaina. Je pense que des dessins exacts ser-

viraient 4 éclaircir l’ histoire de |’ astronomie.

“* Voici une autre question. Les astronomes [ndiens d’aujourd’ hui connaissent

ils encore une constellation de I’ hémisphére austral, au-dela du tropique du

‘Capricorne, appelée Trigancou, et figurée comme un homme précipité d’en

haut? Cela se rapporte a un passage trés remarquable du Ramayana.”’

Captain T. §. Burr, Engineers, announced the discovery of two more

ancient pillars near Ghazipur. One at Zamineah (already well known,

and not having any inscription), the other at Pallédpur, half buried in the

ground, but from which by digging under it, he contrived to take off

the inscription it contains—a single line in the Asoka character of the

Girnar rock. No. 3 of the table in plates 13, 14.

Statistics.

Lieut. H. Srppowns presented a statistical table for the zilla of Chitta-

gong, founded on the revenue survey now conducting under him.

Mr. H.'lT’. Prinser presented a paper on the rate of mortality from

birth to 20 years, calculated from the records of the Lower Orphan School.

The voluminous calculations and tables which had to be prepared before

obtaining the results embodied in the paper itself, were presented for de-

posit in the Society’s Library.

[This paper is printed in the present number. ]

Physical.

Read a letter from Secretary Political Department enclosing one from

Capt. Burnes, dated 17th September, making over to the Society the whole

of the drawings of natural history collected during the mission under his

command.

The drawings of animals are 15 in number including mammalia, birds,

fishes, and snakes; they are beautifully executed and highly coloured.

The following letter from Government on the subject of Dr. HenFer’s

collection was read :

i Yo James Prinsep, Esq. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

IR,

1 am directed by his honor the President in Council, to transmit to you the

enclosed copy of a letter from Dr, Henrer, and to request the opinion of

the Society, whether the completeness of the collection brought by that gen-

tleman from the Tenasserim Provinces, will be affected by acceding to his re-

quest to be permitted to select such duplicates as are not required by Govern-

ment; also, to solicit the advice and assistance of the Society in the separation

of the articles that may be spared.

/ I have, &c.

(Signed) H. T. Prinsep,

Fort William, 12th September 1838, Secretary to Government of India.

i To H. T. Priysep, Esq., Secretary to the Government of India and Bengal.

IR,

I have the honor to inform you, that I have arranged and classified the orni-

thological part of my collections brought from the Tenasserim Provinces, and -

deposited them at the Asiatic Society’s rooms.

1838. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 837

Placing them at the disposal of Government I beg to select those specimens

which are considered desirable, returning me such duplicates which are not want-

ed, agreeable to the permission expressed in the 13th para. of my instructions.

‘* In conclusion, with reference to Dr. HELFER’s request, that he may be per-

mitted to make private collections for himself, I am directed to inform you,

that in his Lordship’s judgment, all the specimens which he may acquire, ought

to be placed in the first instance, and without reserve, at the disposal of Govern-

ment. But there can be no objection to his making duplicate or more collec-

tions, and such articles as it may not be considered indispensable to retain,

will be freely returned to him.”

I have, &c.

(Signed) J. W. Herrer.

The Secretary explained that the Museum Committee had held a meet-

ing to consider what to recommend to the Society on the question sub-

mitted by Government, and their opinion was, as the collection was so ex-

tensive, (containing 6 or 8 of each species) that it should be divided into

three parts, the principal one for the Hon'ble Court’s Museum, the second

for the Society’s, and the remainder for Dr. Hirer himself, who was

satisfied with this division.

The Society confirmed the arrangement which was directed to be com-

municated to Gevernment.

Dr. Hetrer read his notice “On the natural history of the Tenasserim

Frovinces,” as agreed at the last meeting.

The thanks of the Society were expressed by the Vice President for his

interesting communication.

Lieut. Hurron wrote from Simla in continuation of his last report:

that he was ordered on duty which might delay the completion of his

account of the trip to Spiti.

Museum.

The skins of various birds (30 in number) brought forward at a previ-

ous meeting and forming a small part of Capt. PemBerron’s interesting

ornithological collection from Bhootun, since stuffed and mounted in the

museum, are now offered to the notice of the Society. Of these the follow-

ing only have at present been identified.—

G. Evans, Curator.

1. Alcedo Guitatus, (Goutn’s Cent.) Spotted Kingfisher.

2. Cinclosoma Leucolophum, (Gouup’s Cent.) Laughing Crow, Lara,

male and female.

3. Cinclosoma Erythrocephula, (Gouxp’s Cent.) Rufous-headed Thrush,

male and female.

4. Garrulus Bispeculuris, (Goutn’s Cent.) Almorah Jay, (Gray.)

5. Garrulus Striatus, (Gounp’s Cent.) Striped Jay, male and female.

6. Corvus Graculus, (Linn.) Red-legged Crow, male and female.

7. Corvus ? unidentified, male and female.

8. Phenicornis Princeps, (Goutp’s Cent.) Caterpillar Catcher, male.

9. Phenicornis Miniatu, (Swain.) Caterpillar Catcher, male and

female.

10. Phenicornis Peregrina, (Govin’s Cent.) Caterpillar Catcher, male.

11. Nucifragra Hemispila, (Gounn’s Cent.) Nut-cracker, male and

female.

12. Bucco Grandis, (Goutn’s Cent.)

Burhut.

j ae Enicurus Maculatus, (Gouxnp’s Cent.) Spotted Wagtail, male and

emale.

*d ‘f—"qyuow 3} jo SUOT}BAIOsSIO i

Satpoderd ay} WlOIJ paaLep uorzIaI1I109 yueysuo0s we Sursn ‘ao

seul deg I I [ WoO sje1aued Iof2AINS ay} JO Jo3sIFe1 ay} WOIY SUUINTOD Asay) paT|y savy T ‘1o}0UIOULIO ue Siaja

*H} JO SOMOS OY} YBoIq 0} JOU Lap1O ul nq ‘ported yey} 10J suOTearasqo Sutte}siF01 Aur pojueaaid YOU ay} JO pue 943 03 Wee ae co uboMna ge ETB ou aytenesy wane ae

‘joyAmoys( Ww) “wea co‘sleo‘c} Lf | eZ | aL | 6s |6‘9 \9°9 p6°OL | o*Lelege‘es OzoGaf ‘3USy UTeI,-y| “rea P38, GF GL | 26 | 8%¢ 10's 0*LL|9°98!¢e8 1°28 989°6al 1g 2a) “ULesy

616 koELS GOL‘ . ‘ zoe

ie 2) cess oll! eee 88 08" Of

By a col | Ute | a8

£0°0| L0‘0 6°68 5999" 'o0L' ‘ ‘seep

q 6B T1FEI 0°82 [049° GOL’ § Uy “und | g|*M*NE $8 | 18 | ZZ | 6 | fe 9p lo‘ee 98 ao aie rf

Pane Abous fe (N ee te‘0} on | GF poa8 |B aca e ate Ter ee gL | 12 | 121 06 | £9 |2%¢ |p'oZleZ8 1e9* lenis | og

Lema Cte Pee L468 |0-2 169 10°@2 |T°68 fele® 'zeo’ § ‘eug ‘wind : } 1 | TL 4.8 } 0‘9 |8‘¢ l0‘9ZI6° ( 327

eee. Su'gr‘olor‘ol of | 99.| 29} 98 (9'8 63 bods |4con fore’ stot J ‘Buraes em auf 16 | 28 | 8 | Be | de lie sle-pal en Se ae

meee aie: *s 04 | 49 | €9 | 98 |0'6 |9°g fo9s 16°06 FgGe" —gI9* “uno g| ‘a FFs | 22} of | 89 9° \6°9 |e‘9/\°28 Zol® lepss

p tty DP] el +o” lgopigoto1 99 | 29 | €9 4 8 [POT OcOTEOSSZ (8°68 Int9® 099° ‘op “a ai \1Z 1 02 a letacinte ilies Oe algees ch

~~ 2 Pl fol'a ‘ogg oes‘o} ae | 18 | 844 a6 le bp L0G |1'98 for9* 999° foaoqe-uys -o L\9L\ 02 a Ue lees Ted ie 2 £8/8,98 Bel” Yael 08

2 Brees |. g| su” | 1 | o£ | 99 | 98 /9°8 [2° foros o°63 |2t9 po9° | “ynutno Mo Pog | Geocor | oe: ork lec teaealneele "ele Omzer => 26l— br GL

"> Adzey ‘iqunu 2 ie fae KMabemealgeen Piece tees H 0 08 | 08 | G4 | 16 | B'S \a's |0°B2/2°28 GOL‘ ict | gt

So 1 “!qutIU) Tia +s 92) 89'0l sa | 08 | 08 | EG [O'S lo%m focHZ [2°98 feu9% atZé “Op o| -o fae! ty | of | ze | see los levies : :

v ‘Tews “Op | of vq | 04 | $9 | £94 98 168 (56 Frod [ecto tro’ (go9* Jroug ‘mol 7] -s bag | 22! ef | ee oe oH 0°61 oo8 ert Peele at

a eine ea, 5 | zi | 89 | £94 18 |9'8 |e%e fe‘os |2:68 foes’ geo’ | ctmmumo | ela ‘ste | oa | eZ | 6 | 0-9 (6% loZieo vai loce* | et

mS ‘Po “tamil ea +S 280080) o£ | SZ | 99 | 05 [acs |1°9 FoOL \E°28 fzues geo’ Foezey -Appo| e|/'9 “Si e6 | 06 | 98 | 26 | Le lbs [ZZ zl p2elg’agie’es coz’ loci | F

S pep He Sute glon i 36 | 06 | 68 | 63 lez [ere Woe \eraB fazer glet | aap | ife-s-si ce | 13 | 08 $6 | Lm le lprez ees) | teise lecor | fy

-. PAMGUS ARDS ata: LE IL‘ol 63 | 18 | 684 e6 \T's |p foes |PF8 War. Zacs ‘op cl +s [16 | ca | 28 | 9¢ oe Of earleccp ages rhe! aI

So PO tt Fle «“wl620 TeOf BB | GL | 8B | GG ipo |6%m ForLZ |0°€8 FOL. ota’ fAzeyop -op| 3|" MA “Ul 63 | og | €8 | eG | 9p [9'e |9*0RlL‘98 gic< |tees | it

in) uIN9d *119 zim ‘ulSlogtorgs, | eZ | 894 06 11°83 les bo‘@Z 16°06 tear ¢ "e498 *uINd ‘M “U y a ‘ ‘ caring) acs Tor)

—S F - 0 , J WS'8L ech 166% yer} T #8 | 08 | 84 | €6 | 09 \6°F |0°62'0°28 18 9 rive

S BORIS UT? i Bl Ar L | 04 | P9 | LB jg*s |G°L FOL |OST6 [oops goes "op 1]? "S}9L | 62.) 24 | 68 | aL [99 lecZZiL°78 Ligt \ozo' j

= | Acadia eS pL | 12 | G9 | 88 [5B je fores \etu6 Foor’ ‘ete! fF -ouy wma | 1) “A Jos | 22 | b2 | 16 | ¥9 [oto [9°47 8°49 Faq° joo | 8

S Sy ES EE pa | 08 | GL | 36 i2%¢ jot fec22 (o'23 trop cece ‘op =| €| “A Pte | 9% | 94 | 6 | eve (8°o lo*Z//a°98 19° lors |

S PPReP API) “g/-0 “-wloe‘o 630} 8 | 08 | 12 | 26 joe |t%9 Jerod jerZ8 fos’ (Zeq* Paens ums | zie ol oy | of | eZ | 68 | FZ [6S [edd pez9 e09' |eeot | 9

= z PIP” =P op G|M ‘U $8 cL OL 66 9°¢ 19 SLL 6°88 cts’ eae Syvaryy Appa Pp "MN PZ ol 69 88 02 e9 GEL 6°98 9z9° 099° ¢

eI Wee: aed ak €9 | 19 | GY | GB | PET GtOIfO'OL 10°86 Fe6bS cee’ fAzey-op-op! | ‘UA os | ZZ | 94 | 6g | ef9 19'S |o*8Ziz‘Z38 189° \@99' ;

| ah ee era €9 | G9 | 19 | 28 126 [96 FLL |L'06 tose’ ‘ees fF semis ‘op | 3] A [ze | ts | 821 26 | ee [ph |otZZit°¢9 cox lerte |g

. pede Bice 1 it a | : 4 L193 G8 68 v6 L¢ or 0°gL 9°f8 009‘ S396 ‘ouy "wns 16 G8 1? 96 g°P oP 9°82 p6e9 tL eek’ 3

cs cag! US ge US a ea od Cd €6 | £8 | 38 | 26 | o'e OF J0%e2\p*t8 16963 ¢r9°63| 1

> my] a ees am | aie Nee geet (Saha aca | | eee eo

ee |S ee elsif es sie ato 9) Stes ef] ok gl ef ileS eS el aE ats 9/8) Slee e%l oo] &

= 8 a) 58 |OB/SSIST Sauls yictize sc) 2) >P oe] & Zin a1 80 iom= [3 fon amigas] |), 1] 2i8sj 72/8) 4

e {PP Pye | Ber aoe messes] sie PSP | sap “8 [F)- * [Be |e bB gales] 3 S12] 182] Sal 2

2. ae ov) 29S ,/S S/R EF 2] ° mje | woos oF SS | Eee =! 6 le" °2 A aad

° tsa ’ ie} et. =o S ro} a Oo o Oo ayes | aa: Sat ete 2 "6 os o

& ‘pum | 8! 3p"! @ BB YS BB | SE. negra we ee z 4) E18 °| & & | s| 53 | 8a e

: “uoIsua Aq f ‘oImjer f ‘oinssaig 4 : ‘uoisua} f. *ginssal S

a ea snoanby -awmoishyy || -odutay forsaydsouny Bi ob det: snoanby epeura agg, ereraduia ouaydsouny =

‘WW ‘d 7 UOOUIAIIy “W *V QT SuoousI0,7

"SSSI ‘waquiagdag f9 YsUopy ayz wof ‘njzqnojngJ “2oWQ hnssp ay} 10 qday ‘dagsthay 1002601040038"

Pre a ek yp

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

No. 82.—October, 1838.

I.—Report of a visit made to the supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh

(Vijayagadha). By Mr. Georce Oszorne, Sub. Dep. Opium

Agent, Benares division.

The existence of coal fields in the perguna of Bidjeegurh, has from

time to time been reported, by an individual of the namesof HyLanp,

who, from self-interested motives, long refused to disclose the locality,

but at length announced by letter to Capt. Stewart, Fort Adjutant,

at Chunar, his willingness to disclose the site of the mine, to any

person that Government might be pleased to appoint for that purpose.

3. On the occasion of the visit of the Right Honorable the Gover-

nor General to Chunar, in November last, his Lordship was pleased to

honor me with his commands to proceed to the Bidjeegurh pergunas,

to examine and report upon the nature and extent of Mr. HyLtanp’s

discoveries.

4. In obedience to these instructions, I accordingly left Chunar on

Monday morning the 27th of November last, and arrived at Bidjeegurh

on the Ist of December.

5S. In the 3rd para. of the letter to which reference has been al-

ready made, Mr. Hytanp states: “ The place from which my speci-

mens are supplied, is situated about 8 miles southeast of Bidjeegurh

fort, and about half a mile east from an unfrequented pass called Umlah

Ghat: it is there found in a stratum 3 feet thick, &c.”

6. In his depositions before Mr. Woopcock, dated 25rd August,

1837, (vide page 33,) he further states: “I discovered good coal 34

miles southeast of the village of Kodie in the jungle, and I brought away

840 Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. [Ocr.

a handful: the vein of coal was 3 feet thick, 1 foot and 4 from the sur-

face, and running horizontally.”

7. Accordingly, my first attention was directed to this locality, to

which Mr. HyLanp undertook to conduct me. On the 2nd Decem-

ber, therefore, in company with him I descended the Umlah Ghat. On

the 3rd Mr. HyLanp pointed out two spots, where, he then stated to

me “he had been informed, that coal had been excavated, on some

former occasion, but that J himself had never RAS ocular de-

monstration of its presence.”

8. At the first of these two places, unpromising as it aigiiaeta I com-

menced excavations, at a spot laid down from observed bearings. In the

accompanying sketch it is marked F, and lies at the foot of a perpendicu-

lar precipice, over which in the rains a torrent is precipitated, and which

in the course of time, has worn away the rock, so as fully to develop

the stratification. At the base of this fall, is seen a vein of what I con-

sider to be hard flinty shale, which I find to possess a specific gravity

of from 2.35 to 2.547, and of which a brief examination is given below.

9. The width of this fall is about 100 feet, and its height about 80,

of which 60 feet, or perhaps more, from the top, are strata of sand-

stone ; then comes the vein of shale, running in nearly a horizontal di-

rection southeast by south, and varying in thickness from 12 to 14 feet :

the exposed surface appears to be a hard shale or flinty slate. I penetrat-

ed, for 8 or 10 feet below the mass, at right angles to its direction or

strike, and arrived at a hard sandstone. I then sunk a vertical shaft

but was stopped by a similar rock, about 3 feet below the surface. The

opening of a small cave presenting itself on the left extremity, I had it

enlarged, hoping by this means to penetrate to the rear of the vein,

the cave was not more than 18 inches in height, and appeared to run

nearly horizontally. I was in hopes that the north side of the cave

would have afforded encouraging indications, but was disappointed,

meeting only with the same indurated slate-stone.

10. About 1000 or 1200 yards southeast of this spot, appears another

bed of shale, or rather perhaps another portion of the same bed, at the

base of the rock forming the bank of the adjoining nullah at G; a

similar vein is also developed at H.

1}. The nullah at G runs through the formation, which appears

at intervals on the abrupt face of the banks of the nullah on either

side. About G the formation is exposed for about 14 feet in perpen-

dicular height; it is composed of thin alternate undulating strata of a

flinty slate and a species of indurated clay of about half an inch to 2

inches in thickness ; it is harder as it approaches the bottom of the

1838. ] Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. 841

nullah, where it seems to pass into a hard bluish-black sandstone ; it is

there exceedingly hard, requiring several smart blows with the hammer

before a fracture can be effected. The formation about the bed of the

nullah is singular ; it is composed of a quartzoze rock, or a saccharoid

quartz, in distinct granular concretions, emerging at angles varying

from 134° to 35°, but dipping south upon the northern side of the

nullah, and dipping north, frem the other side, at angles varying from

312° to 464°.

12. The bed of the nullah is composed of rolled boulders of flinty

slate, passing into a very hard sandstone. The strata of shale are near-

ly horizontal, gently undulating, and as they disappear from one bank

ef the nullah, they reappear at no great distance upon the opposite

side, thus alternately appearing and disappearing throughout the whole

length of the nullah. The same general formation holds good, wherever

I have here examined. The vein appears as if crushed by the vast

super-imposed weight of sandstone, which here towers up to about 6 or

700 feet. ,

13. The inclined strata of quartzoze rock, as shewn above, in

many cases, run obliquely across the bed of the nullah, presenting a

semi-cylindrical appearance, and almost appear as if constructed for a

centering, on which a tunnel was to be supported: the strata are con-

centric, and from three to six inches in thickness,—the formation is

hard, heavy, bluish-black, mixed with shades of red, and appears to be

the connecting link between sandstone and flinty slate.

14. All the specimens of shale obtained here, were anxiously

assayed by the blow-pipe; they are easily heated to redness, but do not

appear to contain any combustible matter in their composition; with

alkalies, they fuse into a slightly green glass, denoting the presence of

siliceous matter, or oxide of iron.

15. Mr. HyLanp next directed my attention to a spot marked a

in the sketch.

16. On commencing my examination here, I first proceeded to the

point B, an absolute precipice, of about 120 feet in depth by about 150

to 200 feet in breadth : over this in the rainy season, a torrent of some

magnitude is precipitated. The nullahs u F and G are themselves

mountain-torrents; they all however meet at B, and after a heavy and

continued shower, must fall with grand effect into the chasm below.

17. At this season of the year (December) the channel was nearly

dry ; the stratification was consequently fully developed. Below the fall

is a stratum of hard shaly matter, exactly resembling that at F. This

5 Nn 2

842 Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. [Ocr.

vein, also, is nearly horizontal, and to be penetrated only by great labour.

Blasting might be had recourse to, but for the tottering and overhang-

ing masses above. This operation however, would require much more

time than was at my command.

18. The bed of the nullah is composed of enormous masses, pre-

cipitated in the course of ages, from the summits of the eminences on

each side of the nullah. Some of the blocks contain possibly 1000 cubic

feet or more, the interstices are filled with boulders to an unknown

depth. The ridge B, A, C, runs southwest by west, the highest point

being at c; the strata are nearly horizontal, and dip to the northwest,

at an angle varying from 3° to 13°; the point c I estimate at 400

feet above the bed of the nullah, of which 60 or 70 teet from the

top is an absolute precipice ; thence to the nullah the slope is at an

angle of about 5°, and covered with jungle of the most dense descrip-

tion. The width of the ridge from c to bp probably exceeds 800

yards. I followed the course of the nullah to F, where I found lime-

stone dipping southwest at an angle of 14° 20’, and returned to camp

by a difficult pass at p, through the thickest grass and bamboo jungle

I ever beheld. A tiger sprung on one of my attendants near this

spot, but the man was rescued.

19. I next commenced a close examination of the point a, which,

however unlike the description, is the spot to which Mr. Hyranp

alludes in his deposition (page 37, Quest. 15) where, he says, when

asked what obstacles he met with, they were ‘“ Large stones and earth

which appeared to cover the spot. I did not dig and therefore cannot tell

what quantity, as I did not see the size of the stones clearly.” The

first glance, was sufficient to convince me that no human agency

had deposited the massive rocks, in the position I found them; added

to which bamboos, and varieties of forest trees, the growth of years, had

firmly rooted themselves in the soil. A colony of wild bees had also

established themselves immediately above the spot ; their dislodgement

proved troublesome and caused some delay.

20. On the 6th December, I ascended to the precipitous crag,

about 150 feet or more above the bed of the nullah, and commenced

a careful examination of this spot. I here found shale in veins of

about a foot in thickness, alternating with sandstone. I penetrated

some little way into the veins, but trom their hardness and position,

made but small progress; the exposed part of the strata presenting the

same vertical plane, it was necessary to undermine the shale by remov-

ing the stratum immediately below, and this, being a very hard sand-

stone, was a matter of some difficulty.

ee ey ©

1838. ] Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. 843

21. In this vicinity, I observed two or three small exudations of

petroleum. This was so far encouraging, for Professor Jamxson observes,

“it generally flows from rocks of the coal formation, and usually

from the immediate vicinity of beds of coal, &c.” The surfaces of

projecting rocks below the springs are slightly coated with it, where,

from long exposure to the sun, it has become completely hard, but

without losing its characteristic smell.

22. On the 7th December, I continued the excavations on the face

of the rock; dug down deeper and laid bare the original formation.

The whole of the space within the dotted line from a to 6 was now

laid bare, exhibiting only alternate strata of sandstone and shale. Into

one vein marked B, I penetrated as far as the workmen could well

act ; the roof of this vein was formed of a singular conglomerate of from

three to six inches in thickness: c is a vein of slate, which might

answer for roofing slate, as some of the lamina I broke out, were

nearly two feet in length.

23. Small plates of talc were separated from between the lamina

of slate, and some few on being split presented an appearance, as if

they had been covered with a coarse gold leaf.

24, The space from a tod is what Mr. HyLAnp imagines has been

artificially closed, and that it covered the entrance to a coal mine; I

had in consequence, every particle of soil (which in my opinion is the

gradual accumulation of vegetable decomposition, mixed with earthy

particles fallen from the summit), removed to a depth of ten feet or

more, until I was stopped by the original sandstone rock at D.

25. Iconsider it to be a mere waste of time and money, to dig

deeper in that direction, and I am strengthened in this opinion from

examination of the formation about the fall. At B, between three and

400 yards north of the present excavations, and about 150 feet

below there exists nothing but hard flinty slate alternating with sand-

stone.

26. The veins of slate were traced along the surface of the rock

for about 100, or even 150 feet, without the slightest difference in

the general formation: several masses of a tubaceous limestone were

excavated, containing imbedded fragments of slate, and (apparently )

traces of bones. I also found the bones of a human being, about 3

feet below the surface, but judging from their appearance they had lain

there for a century.

27. The above described excavations were made, entirely upon the

statements of Mr. Hytann; he has failed in pointing out a spot, even

answering to the description given at pages 30 and 33 of his deposition.

844 Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. . [Ger

It is not possible to precipitate a mass of rock from the summit, so as

to remain on the spot marked a, at page 11; the ledge there is barely

broad enough for two men to pass abreast—in many places not for one

man to find sure footing.

28. I have now carefully examined the locality pointed out by Mr.

Hyianp: (wide sketch.) The strata from a to B may be called a

longitudinal section, laid bare to the fall at B; it runs, doubtless under-

ground to 1; is exposed on alternate sides of the nullah to G, runs

underground to F, where a transverse section is exposed: an oblique

section is again seen at u. An imaginary horizontal section of these

parts, I estimate at about 600, or perhaps 700 feet below the summit

of the circumjacent crags, L and M, &c.

29. At x, page 4, is seen the mine of Kusts, (crude sulphate of

iron, ) containing about 39 per cent. of the dry salt : (vide analysts, page

41.) The vein follows the curve at the bottom of the precipice, about

200 feet from the summit. I had not sufficient leisure to examine the

extent of the mine, but from general description, I learn the mineral may

be obtained in almost any quantity. It appears in the state of a fine

white efflorescence, commingled with the slaty matter of the matrix.

30. Mr. Hyztanp having thus failed in pointing out a deposit of

coal, or even the existence of the mineral, I did not consider myself

justified in remaining longer, especially, as one out of my three weeks

had thus expired, and so very unprofitably. I therefore left on the

Sth December, ascended the narrow and difficult pass at M, impracti-

cable for beasts of burden, and reached Bidjeegurh in the evening.

Mr. Hyzanp however determined to remain behind at the late scene of

operations, with the view of regaining the entrance of some sup-

posed hidden mine. Mr. H. has distinctly acknowledged to me, that

he does not know whence the specimens of coal he exhibited were

obtained ; he merely supposed them to have been dug out from the spot

lately examined by me: there I have determined, it does not exist: he

has moreover confessed to me, on two several occasions, and in direct

opposition to the 4th para. of his letter at page 31, that he had never

seen coal excavated from the Ghaggir nudee.

31. On Monday the 11th December, I marked out a spot in the

Samdha nullah, below the, now deserted, fortress of Bedjeegurh, erected

a bund, drained the enclosure and proceeded to denude a portion of

the bank, and expose the formation of “ bituminous marle slate,” which

I find abounds in all parts of the valley of the Ghaggir and Samdha,

and of which, my present locality was selected as a fair example of the

whole.

Sour AS. Soc.

Vol. VIT. PL. XLVI

2, 3

Satie

AMI bez,

tN, WG

Ly, WZ

“yg LZ EN GZEZ

ZZZ ES 772

Z 2GZG «Se iz ne

. pee:

g. J GY AQiniynnw ns) ZZ (4,

sd Sane

a \\ My iN My) (t ii Hit

al NHI Hl ect

AY LTTIN

nu EN \ Vox:

elllinty|

a iN" «" “ ‘

AS iS

OOM

Urnlaly Chat Ra

(hei CONT \

mitt

Dyas

(Ae

Poni me WA ny wut

Sore

TT)

, “yf tata Uy

Mh a HUTT eee

Soll

re te

! @mmon poor

oN asin Mrs aiteiete..a cimtas's” efaes) name Sh) te

all ganda Slone, about Yo ft

as* 12 or 1 FE

4 it gate

Si Hie TAM | Mi th

ate fs

ole)

Uy,

arte Sle

e 1

Red quartry soil

5 —

ass 2

=| Lip FW.

dip WW, |*4o'

Trap rack

y ‘, Riz

eek hs + ee ey hs ee

° 3 heey

+ yy

Ae ihe eee Ses PU aoe pth pe thin

tdi ee Fi MBP LEN bigs pe _ i.

Biss ee sd 5 aR lho aay pede) he ve Wes ship

ae als Decne i 1 ya

me ; is ; beak heer ae sie San

Sa ie EEO eae BUR MG BARE ae ah

Heh LE ‘4 Malate Agi: at alt Lhe le

Riis) oP RSE 2 a7. agen Pt dah en fe

ai 4 th A aah chi. r pha eR ia Ss ames a) 596 idee

| F ae rH Sey Pea Wha tie edi | aA ee 8 lit e-bay oi

$B er . wii Pee re 2 | a BR Re? iam, unite eras ea

. pnt. | kes \ been a mh eas: ej? MET a '

piikback: ugg sigdiony at gt rise ‘ished inane ie ahha GEE ave

Heuldere aise hw. eh TheHNCS Te ase 2 niereand

Se beanie opel heen Na ned la

eh . pA RAR, ps AT Tg am sek rt is aie a ae ae renal

; A, ‘Pm ; de ae ee ere ee be bey nice weiss at Fan’ a

fat? }OE wes Te a Meee ls ate ‘eG Ba ii peli

ae ay Bay a UTP le

Pee ee er eo at vam litical

ogre Rel Mig RR wea Rap, GaN ees th PPE EN Bag 2) Se ar rh i

; ; Ml Bi ig oN las NRE

Pea PW te aie a ee Ui RS Lae eet |e a sabe tery?

ee ae) Ta eae MRM Oke cs ae yc pet

(ao ais ‘ eae it, ws pases ‘ ut Te cra } a Vaeinte abet ies A

brig i anak ey ARP Peis ip tats yaaa: iter

y '

fe. Sie) iby

Aspe A Young

Pichon: sc faaicrpnny idee: ih ee ee ee | aseonti

flag a) iat iS Piety iG ‘aol we «Shel sonthap ioe

it Ae eee ee ea

vehi ae a ‘gl BR Se ae eo ae hip

Faget owe Poe i erie si igtialog ll

sia i's sms tee wage nan Huis eae

tad ee ah id ; iwi a Ls ‘ysstevac: This

" i % hw

Cy Cae

* u ‘Te - "

av , ace , y A ‘ v r i oe

45 ree" 4 ed

1838.) Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. 845

32. I here prosecuted my researches until the evening of the 15th.

I penetrated to some depth below the bed of the nullah, and came to

what I am inclined to consider a primitive rock, without meeting with

the slightest indication of coal. The following sketch shews the result

of my labours. The dotted line a, b, is the outline of the face of the

nullah ; the strong line a c B, is the sectional line of the part removed,

exposing the strata as they occur.

33. The rock which I found protruding at B, was so excessively

hard, that fragments were with great difficulty excavated ; the tools

from the Chunar magazine were broken ; the common native imple-

ments were fractured at once; the rock exhibits numerous threads of

iron, a specimen marked, I have the honor to forward. By analysis

I find it contains about 35 per cent. of iron (vide page 44); the want,

however of a platinum crucible, alone, prevented my attempting a more

decisive analysis.

34. The recent fracture of the massive slate had a greenish-black

appearance ; it was slaty, splintering with a glistening lustre ; when the

slate was drier, it was more of an Indigo-black. The upper surface of

the strata at c, was perfectly smooth, the line of separation between

that and the bituminous marle slate beautifully distinct: the strata

run northwest, dipping in that direction at 1° 40’.

30. I had not leisure to ascertain the depth to which this interest-

ing formation descended: the large metalliferous mass before mentioned

was enclosed, or enveloped, in the strata, the form very irregular, and

the cavities formed by its protuberancies were filled up with smaller

slaty fragments, some in a pulverized state, united into a tolerably

compact mass by water—which arose almost faster than it could be

baled out.

36. The bituminous marle slate, super-imposed upon the massive

slate, follows the same order of formation ; the divisions of the strata

are not at right angles with the plane of the horizon, but recline at

an angle of 204°; they are separable with the greatest ease, and with

care might be taken up in layers ; they all dip to the northwest at an

angle of 24°: these seams are crossed by others at an angle of 372°.

37. This bituminous marle slate is to be seen, cropping out from

the banks, in a very great number of places along the Samdha and

Ghaggir nullahs, but not a vestige of coal. My own observations,

therefore, coupled with the corroborative statements of many residents

of this neighbourhood, lead me to the conclusion, that coal has never

yet been found in the bed of the Ghaggir, or of its tributary rivulets.

I, however, began to trace the channel towards its confluence with the

846 Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. [Ocr.

Soane, and the annexed is a general section of the hills of my then

locality ; the heights are merely estimated, not having an opportunity

of measuring them ; the scenery of the back-ground is also sketched in,

shewing the position of the fortress of Bidjeegurh.

388. At a isa section of the Ghaggir; there it is deep, its waters

being stopped by a solid bund of masonry, on which is erected a hand-

some bridge of ten arches, now in good repair. By a Hindee inscrip-

tion it appears to have been constructed in 1829 Sumbut, (1771 A. D.)

by Butwunt Stnen Deo. The Ghaggir, in its course to ), is precipi-

tated over two falls, the last of which is of some magnitude ; the point b

is at the junction of the Samdha and Ghaggir nullahs, where the strata

of sandstone and shale, are confusedly and violently contorted.

39. On Monday the 18th December, I reached the Soane by a

pass, known as the Hk Poway Ghat. On the route I passed over

an extensive formation of what, from its geological position, 1 consider

to be mountain limestone. It is of various colors and the lighter

description, will, as I have already ascertained, answer for the purposes

of lithography*.

40. Other varieties become black on exposure to the atmosphere,

the specimen, marked D, appears capable of receiving a good polish ;

in this case, it will answer all the purposes—in fact, it is a black marble.

I had not leisure to ascertain the extent of this interesting formation ;

from native report however it is by no means limited ; its general dip

is north, and northwest, and it is well developed in the bed and banks of

the nullah near Markoundeh.

41. About a mile south of this village it is covered by soil, or only

occasionally seen ; it is seen again on the banks of the Soane, and there

reposing, upon Greywacke: this formation I traced for 3 miles along

the banks of the river, east of my encampment near the confluence of

the Ghaggir with the Soane.

42. Onthe right bank of this river, I also found limestone in

regular strata protruding from the banks, and whilst examining this

formation, I accidentally picked up a single specimen of a bituminous

coal,

43. Not to enter into a minute detail of my labours, it will, I trust,

suffice, to say, that for four days, I narrowly scrutinized the banks of the

Soane, the bed and banks of the Rehr nullah for about 3 miles, the

Bijul for about 10 miles, and the Mowah nudee, for about 3 miles:

from the last three, I did not obtain a single specimen of coal, whilst

from the bed of the Soane I collected about 30 or 40 specimens of

* See specimen C.

Spar as.ivoe. Vob.Vil Pl XLIX.-

‘

wbhoul 500 ft

ae AE ee Re ee

ce eee oy ehout i Gacte)

Oriental Lia Press .

acon i nc 0

arias Mee) ‘ i“ he's ae? eae! yy

wetnadh= Nipis FER e, Sebel

exe Ay boils BARKER: Tek pees og ihe ay

WAKAO Seely Bert: CG 3

HER, ap ep aaa Cab dani eta Namie ik sagt ap fil

Baily RR tobe) tee EE § ae an,

: 2A on ila "

Pile: RRSP SW RE Re RE ail eee hee

stake y ORG RA NE rae

eee ad. Cee ian ‘eo Pe ele

bie gO a ae etal wt Dn

Sry th arta Aiea es adc ‘adaad ;

We ER Dead rh Th. Sa

ae ira ta Pe ow peeeiat 9

apa Ee Mad hh tk See

ae FPR ‘phe eee yeaa. Re Pie Z

BR een PO YR ky Lath atin BS ibis _

Tiel a ae A i sc ae " Se aE

FVD elle CATE ail aie ethee ae dhs

we. HRV,

Ce aay et

Fea te

a Se

Ok PRT ROPD Say APB ara? 9 Lae ot

(BS any rey MER co ar BR,

Be GAA Siti Wie Paley ites Tae vt

saci big dine Sa Rabie oy pitt am eBay as

$8 Be eee Digi ty oda esas ed: roe i.

uMidth sap ig va el MER ee eo mb $ret :

a Re sik <i

1838.] Supposed Coal Field at Bidjeegurh. 847

various sizes, the aggregate weight of which did not exceed one pound:

this I considered as conclusive evidence of the specimens having been

washed down, only by the waters of the Soane.

44. Nearly a month had now elapsed: I was in consequence, reluc-

tantly compelled to return to Chunar, with the intention of applying to

the Benares opium agent, for extension of leave for another fortnight,

in order to prosecute the clue I had just obtained. Before however

leaving this part of the country, I caused to be notified to all classes

of inhabitaats the object of my search, offering at the same time a re-

ward of Rs. 200 to any individual who would engage to point out a

coal deposit in the perguna, and had the satisfaction of seeing them

readily interest themselves in the search. I then returned to Chunar

on Friday the 29th December, 1837.

45. As already stated in the 7th para. of my letter, I readily ob-

tained an extension of leave for a fortnight, and arrived at the Soane,

as stated in the 8th and 9 paragraphs, on the 29th January, 1838.

46. I commenced a minute search along the bed of the Soane, and

also upon its banks, from the former I collected a number of small

specimens of coal, all however, much to my mortification bearing evi-

dent traces of having been washed from a considerable distance. I

continued to progress westerly, and passed over a second formation of

black mountain limestone, dipping westerly. This I traced for some

distance up the Chuéwar nullah, without meeting any encouraging

indication : on the contrary, I found the primitive clay slate protruding

on the highest parts of the adjacent hills: in other parts I found it

alternating with limestone.

47. The nature of my search had by this time become familiar

with the natives of the country ; the offer of a pecuniary reward had the

effect of inducing them to exert themselves in the search: they all

agreed in the opinion, that the specimens I had obtained were washed

from a deposit, situated near the source of the Soane; this would bring

the locality in about the same parallel of latitude with the coal fields of

Palamow and Sirguja, as described by Captains FRANKLIN and SaGe,

in the “ Gleanings of Science’ for July 1830—consequently, I pre-

sume that, were the fact of a coal deposit established in that locality,

the same causes that have prevented the Palamow mines from being

worked, would also operate here, and on account of its distance

from the Ganges at Chunar and Mirzapore, in a still greater degree,

80 as utterly to preclude all idea of the same being brought to advan-

tageous account.

848 Report on specimens of Coal. — [Ocr.

48. The specimens of coal, which I collected during my last search,

amount in the aggregate to about 16 pounds; they were found lying

on the sands of the Soane, between Silpee and Burdee, a distance of

more than 30 miles ; the fragments vary in weight, from a few grains to

pieces of three or four ounces, and they all present the appearance of

having been washed from a distance: those marked E, were collected

in my last examination. |

49. My time having now once more expired, I was most reluc-

tantly compelled to relinquish all further inquiry ; before, however,

returning to Chunar, I dispatched by a sure conveyance, copies of the

offer of reward to Burdee, and the principal villages in that direction

on the Soane; and if a coal formation does exist in any part of the

country thus lately examined, I feel assured that it will not be long

before its discovery is reported to the authorities at Mirzapore.

50. In conclusion, I beg leave to apologize for all defects which

on perusal may be found in the preceding report: the attempts at geo-

logical inferences, are given with the utmost possible deference. In

this branch of science I have had but little experience—in fact it is

with much hesitation I have ventured at all on the subject. On

second thoughts, however, I deemed it best, even at the risk of error,

to give the facts just as they were impressed on my mind, and in so

doing I trust I may not have materially erred. My important opium

duties have left me but little leisure, even supposing I possessed the

ability—to prepare an elaborate report: the foregoing is consequently

written in great haste, and hence I more readily venture to hope, that

all imperfections may meet with the most indulgent consideration.

II.— Report on ten specimens of Coal from Captain Burnes.

Although on a general inspection of the specimens contained in

‘Captain Burnes’s despatch, some disappointment is felt at not finding

any, which may be at once pronounced to be ordinary working coal,

such as occurs in abundance in England, and is obtained in Burdwan,

Assam, and other parts of India, still there is enough among them to

encourage hopes, of finding coal in profitable beds in the vicinity of

the Indus, when more carefully explored.

Four of the specimens are in fact of the very purest form of mineral

coal,—that in which all vegetable appearance is lost, and a semi-crys-

talline homogeneous structure supervenes, the result apparently of

fusion under heavy pressure and confinement.

ert.

wet] SUIT TETANY

Vol. VIL, PLX LVI

Z Spy)

yn Za BN

Apne Arend

OO MUMGRY

‘eed 7% =

4 aN Gg

Mi NY vai . i Ff

se une Brae —

OMA

(KL

WIGMSY, “aN 8, SWS |

WG GIMG( we ‘lie

1 S¢

Loochunypug Is nga

Boal

AITVULOL, J Lo0drrLy OY) WO

AINVOS UYM3ZAIY

2y) Jo

HILINS

Sow As. Soe.

=38 pagar me” a7 5

Wan) pa

CL Se

“pp Usogso'D +

{

rs aE JUDO’ . te pean 7

‘Peip7o) .wojpspuwve

ayonns fas

SSS See

sap 0% Gr : OPTS hoy) Zz STUN LI

OVOTSOUNIT

LH , 6G

\ SF

ey H(\

we wt a ae % —=

SAE

ors, PPYI Dy,

Me . a OSG vont ,

igs APG SME oma ae ;

hs ’ PM, an ts ‘By aoitaa’y, hes eben

} > Ode: tty Ca cee a}

Ape i bl. 4 3 ai eg spc on

",) abet aa vg 3 { 4 : g é re) 4 iit, eta ’

‘ ete di gt te tuckt Paret Wise toe ee, hei oy he ee

¢ y ‘gene PF th e i ae ern it ire

| beak, ae ema wT tens > eee i aa | 7 ee

Said hh TR eh hs Yo - i a one 2 igh HF ‘ely aed ae

$a I, ne } vy eae eS Seth ety i. thy: a % : at ale: aa | ;

bi hs a aged wipe ites fi, any a tay

iis te cas, eer ih Pie aR eee ey Fg dot a

na ao iii.’ . a # Hie mee iin 4 air ve ‘ beh shld lt sah

x . eral Kt A ; Waar ; j em

\ ee iar ? es yisiM Hs ae yo Rs Bh aj BE Te er briana: “tl

Ps cary { J ‘

; hy ia at hake i He Bete | (. Qo i ues riots wh

facetons ip cilaae? |g sane ae bi: igi WLP amp ye pie i? seit Shs i

WAGES AGG PAI MATA SHAS hth xuidteuiney ‘Titpea tee! ws (strata fists leae h erg

eds «ppm a alone iceman ean RRA We is dadstieth ide shawty

ts tte HAR Siete Pet TAR fhe Stabe oe +f onptiene'&

4 A weet

Bild AGA 8 FA yy ENDS iter SiO Sa aR ee wiidatia

5 rT a =e

ray ’ ‘ae oe eS eh i AER: RP ah De Cae Pe fae, Same M, pa

} pei 7 , , \ ) + Ree ee

. % Cid Wy , yo t bn hb A wkd | LAT ae FRA

re ae] Os a re) ae 2 Ries ait by nae ey

jal " ORY tes RO sS id ee Hoy se? feria: wt cot a ys

i. A 14, EE, GOS P ire RR: Giga tbs ahs aK wheal ap aconas ag 8

‘ligule HR 6 ke als Naps atari ana a ial ta

; ASS re, ; Wee DA ee Pentre es bpeg negpg:

1838.} Report on specimens of Coal. 849

This jet, or pitch coal, were it found in sufficient quantities, would

not only answer well as a fuel, but would be superior to all other

coals for the particular object of getting up steam, on account of the

large proportion of inflammable gas it disengages under combustion.

Of this description are Nos. 1, 2 and 3 from the neighbourhood of

Kalabagh, and No. 10 from the northwest of Dera Ismael Khan.

Captain Burnes says that the former “ was found in abundance”—

and that the latter “should it prove a good coal, will be invaluable,—

being in the neighbourhood of the Jndus, and in a country where the

poverty of the people will make them rejoice to discover any means of

improving their condition.”

Of the excellence of the coal there can be no doubt; there is I

fear less certainty of its abundance. It occurs in very thin seams,

which will not pay for the working if they lie in a hard rock, but if

seams even of a few feet thickness are met with, Captain Burnes’s

anticipations will be amply fulfilled. The pitch coal of Mergut which

closely assimilates in chemical composition with the Jndus jet, is stated

by Dr. He rer to lie in a bed six feet thick, whereas the other is

barely an inch thick, and the veins, and natural cleavages, are every

where filled up with calcareous spar.

No. 5, the bituminous shale of Cohdét, was examined by me in 1833;

it is not at all adapted for burning in steamers, though, from the quan-

tity of gaseous matter expelled, it might be turned to account, in

default of better fuel, on shore. The same remark will apply with

more force to No. 7, a bituminous limestone, in which the slaty struc-

ture is not perceptible.

The existence of large rocky formations, so strongly impregnated

with naphtha and bitumen, is indeed evidence of the proximity of coal

beds, from which, by the action of volcanic heat, we may suppose the

volatile matter to be forced into the porous superincumbent strata. In

Assam, where so many beds of rich lignite and pitch coal, not differing

in composition from the jet of Kalabagh, have been lately found, springs

of naphtha are common, and were known long previous to the dis-

covery of the coal.

To a similar origin may be traced the bituminous exudations fro

rocks in the Punjéb and Cabul, of which we have examples in

No. 6 and No. 8. The former of these may be called a bituminous

brine, for it contains a large proportion of common salt, attributable

doubtless to the rock-salt deposits of the same range of hills.

Another bituminous exudation from near Ghazni, given to me by

502

850 Report on specimens of Coal. ‘[Oér.

Suekn Kera’Mat Att, and called mumia, was found by Mr. Piv-

‘DINGTON to contain nitrous salts, sulphur, and bitumen.

Of a similar nature may be the combustible No. 8, from the north

of Cabul, but I have as yet only examined it as a combustible.

I now proceed to the detailed examination of each specimen, adding,

for convenience, the remarks of Captain Burnes, as to their locality.

I have also placed at the foot of the list the muster lately received

from Captain Wave, Political Agent at Loodiana. I have deposited

a small fragment of each kind, in sealed bottles, in the Asiatic Society’s

museum, for preservation.

J. Prinsep, Assay Master.

Specimen 1.—“ From Shakandara near Kalabagh, about 15 miles

from the Jndus found in abundance half way up a hill two miles north

of the village.”

A fine jet or pitch coal: of a glossy velvet black color; does not

soil ; may be cut and worked ; fracture conchoidal and vitreous :—has a

slight asphaltic smell. The fragments coated with an earthy matter

easily washed off. Specific gravity 1. 166 ; burns with rich flame and

copious scintillations. Composition as a fuel—

Volatile matter; ..2...c..s00 «ce 50.9

Carbon or €OKE,..,...:..s.sc. 47.5

Marthiy VEsIOWe, se... c0ccew cee 1.6

100.0

Specimen 2.—* From another teality of the Siiodeandaste deposit,

at the base of the hill among sandstone.”

This is precisely the same jet as above described, but many of the

small fragments have the sandy matrix adhering, hence on an average

specimen uncleaned the result was: specific gravity 1.454,

Composition—Volatile matter, ............. 84.8

Carbon,sc .hewiaw 2..10.t0]. 00) eb6x7

Earthy matter, jv. . dss...06) 0 047.0

100.0

Specimen 3.—< Coal of Kalabagh, found three miles south of

Shakandara, and nearer Kalabagh, in a fissure of the rock, to be seen

in three different places off the high road.”—B.

This is more of a coal (or rather lignite) than either of the pre-

ceding. It shews the woody fibre, and the alternation of glistening

1838.] Report on specimens of Coal. 851

bituminous, with dull carbonaceous seams. It burns with much scin-

tillation, and poor flame:—specific gravity 1.470 to 1.556 ?

Composition—Volatile matter,.............. 42.8

(of which water 7.6)

Carbon,... GIR POIRY. ROW H ATG

Earthy resided fervent, 9.6

100.0

Specimen 4.—“ Coal of Mukud. The locality of this specimen is

not well authenticated. The three preceding were dug out, but this

was brought in, as was said, from Mukud.”

Highly vitreous jet, of a more resplendent velvet gloss than the

foregoing. Seam of carbonate of lime adhering to one corner: burns

with richer flame, and slight sparkling :—water given off on sandbath

only 2.7 per cent.:—specific gravity 1.122, being the lightest of the

series, and approaching closely to pure asphaltum, but it does not fuse,

when heated, before ignition, nor is it readily, if at all, soluble in

naphtha, even when boiling.

Composition—Volatile matter, ............. 63.6

CARDO, oul votidde sas vedcennabaty eo

Earthy matter, ferruginous, 3.6

100.0

Specimen 5.—“ Kohdt coal, similar to that sent down in 1833;

locality Lachee, Kurpa, Jutta and Ismael Khyl.”—B

Dull earthy bituminous shale, burns with good flame, and leaves

slaty ash. Specific gravity 1.619. The specimen analyzed in 1833

(see Journ. As. Soc. vol. II.) had a somewhat higher weight, 1,670.

I place the two results side by side.

1833 Specimen. 8838 Specimen.

Volatile matter, ...... Se, Fe 3.04

RAMONE trees cece ste ear ieecete tee 14.9

Earthy matter, ...... SOLO the tei oe . 94.7

100.0 100.0

Specimen 6.—*“ Coal of Soorkh-db, 15 miles S.S. E. of the city of

Kabul, near Moosye. it is called ‘ Khur’ by the learned: there are

two kinds as may be seen by the specimens. There are copper mines

near it.”—B.

852 Report on specimens of Coal. [Ocr.

This is a eurious substance—a saline earth resembling wacken in

appearance, strongly impregnated with bitumen, or mineral oil; of a

strong smell, saline taste, and deliquescent from the salt it contains

—whence probably its name of ‘ khur’ (kshara salt). It has a spe-

cific gravity 1.851—and burns with a good flame.

Composition (in the dry way)—

Volatilewmatier,o 2.J20 20k ASW. koe eT a

Carbon, ... ray MbGe Vee wosti hy dae

Earthy nae ne ales and salt, 55.8

100.0

(I have not yet analyzed this as to its saline contents.)

Specumen 7.—* Coal from Nour, 10 miles north of the ancient city

of Ghazni. ‘The specific gravity is higher than that of all the

foregoing.” —B.

This is a bituminous limestone, smelling of naphtha when rubbed or

freshly broken—leaves a mark on paper, and burns with a poor flame,

when well heated. Shere gravity 2.056. Analysed in the ordinaray

manner it gives off—

“Volatile Matter, Visiiecc.cevees eae

Carboni tox dase its boo: Seren gee

Earthy sabieiee chick? cal-

CAvEOUR 1. eA

100.0

As, in driving off the volatile matter, or incinerating the carbona-

ceous, it is evident that some, if not all, of the carbonic acid would be

disengaged from the lime, I repeated the trial, but with results nearly

the same. The earthy residue 54.9 digested in weak nitric acid, left

but 1.5 undissolved : the 53.4—(or in the second experiment 50.5) of

lime, would require 41.0 or 39.0 of carbonic acid for its neutralization,

or more than the carbon and bitumen together! We can only suppose

therefore, that the presence of the bitumen had prevented the absorp-

tion of carbonic acid, or supplied its place—a fact it will be worth

while to ascertain, when I can get another, and a larger specimen.

Specimen 8.—“ From Nujrow to the north of Kabul. This is a

combustible, but not coal, though it may be found to indicate it.” —B.

This substance resembles No. 6 in some respects, but it is softer,

has a more disagreeable smell, and does not appear to contain salt ; it is

adhesive, yields to the nail, of dull earthy brown color, specific

gravity 2031; it burns with a clear flame not very bright.

1838. ] Report on specimens of Coal. 853

Composition— Volatile matter,............... 26.1

Cations LRT ak 10.5

Earthy matter, principally

silicious) “AY. G84

100.0

A further supply of this curious matter for a more rigid examination,

and information as to, manner in which it occurs, would be desirable.

Specimen 9.—“ Coal of Jamoo in the Panjdb: this was brought to

me from Umritsir, and if it proves good, the locality of it, as being close

to the Chendb, will be nearly as valuable, as if found on the Indus.”—B.

The specimen of this coal is so minute, that I can hardly put confi-

dence in the trial made on it in my laboratory. It would appear to

be a real anthracite, having the metallic lustre, and marking paper

something like graphite ; texture fibrous; smooth: burns with a trifling

flame. Specific gravity 1.650.

: Composition—Volatile matter,............0. 8.8

AEN, wes Ste pacccevcres ocaesee 07.2

Ferruginous earth,........... 34.0

100.0

_ This coal would be quite unfit for steam purposes, but if there be beds

of anthracite on the Chenddb, this material may be turned to very good

account in the smelting of iron, now that the application of the hot

blast has been introduced. It seems that one part of the anthracite

coal of Wales produces four times the effect of the best coal

formerly used.

_ Specimen 10.—(Forwarded 8th March.)

“ The locality of this deposit is between Zak and Kaneegorum,

northwest of Dera Ismael Khan in the country of the Masood

Waziris. It is found one and a half coss east of the small village of

Luagarkhyl under the Mulik Buda. The seam has been laid bare

by a water-course, and may be traced up hill, it is said, for 100 guj

(112 yards)—dividing, as it ascends, into two parts, and having stones

impregnated with iron on both sides. The exposed part of the vein

is narrow.’ —B. —

This is the most promising of all the specimens :—in quality it

agrees with Nos. 1, 2 and 3, being a rich jet, or pitch coal. The

division of the fragments, is generally rhomboidal, and a thin coating

of crystalline veins, which pervade the crevices, conceals the splendour

844 Report on specimens of Coal. [Ocr.

of the polish, but it is developed by a little acid, or washing. Some frag-

ments have a flat striated structure like lignite ; these are less bright

in color, and heavier; they burn with copious flame, and some

emission of sparks. The water given out on the sandheat, is 3.5 in

the first and 5.4 in the second sort.

Specific gravity No. 1, of No. 2

1.227 1.481

Composition—Volatile matter, 49.1 ......... 48.6

Canby «peti e oucuaiaies oh ae ames ees wha agh SiG 45.3

Earthy matter, ferruginous,.. 2.4 Ey 6.1

100.0 100.0

Specimen 11.—Stated in the letter accompanying it to have been

<< found in the Mandi hills north of the Sutlej, by Captain Wank, Poli-

tical Agent at Loodiana.”

The tin box, on arrival, was found to contain fragments of coal, and

some large nodules of iron pyrites, the hardness of which had shatter-

ed most of the coal to atoms on its way down. Some pieces, however,

were picked out, which had a very promising appearance, more resem-

bling the Burdwan coal than any of the above. Some pieces, how-

ever, were attached to black silicified, or fossil, wood, which at first

sight might be mistaken for excellent coal. It had a sulphurous smell

from the pyrites, and from the analysis I fear it is much adulterated

with this mineral. From its aqueous contents, 7.8 per cent., it scin-

tillates a good deal in burning, and the flame is peculiarly coloured

from the presence of metals.

The specific gravity is 1.580 and the composition of a selected piece,

Volatile matter; ooo ves s.eess CAO

CUrDOls Sie tetern testes recone fer a here oee

Ferruginous residue from the

PVEMGS Tet eres es tes toaaeels 12.6

100.0

More information will be desirable regarding this Sutle7 coal, which

promises to be a valuable addition to our now extended catalogue of

Indian coal deposits: but its locality at Mandi, is too far from the

limits of navigation, to allow of its being brought practically into use.

J. Prinsep, Assay Master.

1858. ] Animal productions of Tenasserim Provinces. 855

II1.—WNote on the Animal productions of the Tenasserim Provinces ;

read at the meeting of the 10th October, 1838. By J.W. Heirer,

Esq. M. D.

Eighteen months have elapsed, since I last had the honor to ad-

dress personally the Society. Since that time, I have wandered over

many hundreds of miles, never trodden by Europeans, in countries left

to the unbounded operations of nature, in a latitude, which produces all

that is created, and, of the vegetable world, mostly in perfection and

exuberance, and in tracts, where, in the recesses of the interior wilds,

many productions await yet the ardour of naturalists, to bring them

forth to everlasting knowledge.

Having to-day the honor to submit the ornithological part of my

collections to the Society’s inspection, I avail myself of the opportu-

nity, to take a cursory view of the animal productions of the Tenasserim

Provinces ; and as man occupies the highest rank in that series, L

may be allowed to begin with the different races inhabiting these regions

—speaking of man however, only as a naturalist, who describes the

habits and manners of the human species, and considering the varieties

of it in the different nations and tribes, and the striking peculiarities

that are found, with reference to the geographical distribution of each,

The inhabitants may be subdivided into the Burmese, the Siamese,

and the Kareans. All three belong, generally speaking, to the Mongo-

lian race, but are so changed, and specifically distinguished, that they

form separate races.

The Siamese approach nearest to the Chinese, possessing a flat

forehead, a small nose, prominent cheek-bones, black hair, very

thin beards, small oblique eyes, thick lips, and a colour more or less

yellow. The Burmese are half Malays half Chinese ; the Kareans half

Malays half Caucasian, indeed the features of the latter approach so

much the Caucasian form, that many of them have even aquiline noses,

a high forehead, and the European facial angle. Consequently the idea,

latterly followed up by the American Baptist Missionaries with great

zeal, sometimes with ridiculous obstinacy, namely, that they are the

true lost tribes of the Jews, merits, as far as regards their physiogno-

my at least, an excuse.

The Kareans are in civilisation the lowest of the inhabitants, and

exhibit an anomaly, which is perhaps no where else found. ‘They are

an agricultural people without any fixed habitations, but migrating

every second or third year ; and so great is their innate love of the

856 Note on the Animal productions [Ocr.

primitive forests, that they hate their own industry, are disgusted

with cleared land, pity men who are surrounded by smiling and well

dressed cultivation, can seldom be induced to visit towns on the sea coast,

and return invariably from thence, as soon as possible, to their secluded

mountain valleys, leading the life of hermits, content with the almost

spontaneously growing productions of nature, despising the possession

of money, because not desirous to exchange their own productions, and,

in consequence, not desirous to add to what we call comforts.

The Kareans seem to be the aborigines of the country, or the remains

of a once numerous people, which has been again reduced to slavery

by subsequent conquerors. They are scattered over a great extent of

the country, from the 23rd degree of latitude to the 11th, and though

conquered many centuries ago, have preserved their language and

their peculiarities; for they never have mixed with foreigners, but

avoid as much as possible all contact with them, prohibiting even

connexions with distant tribes of their own, but intermarrying in their

own families, so much so, that matrimonial alliances between brother

and sister, or father and daughter, are not uncommon to this day. And

this may be the reason that they are a subdued, timid, effeminate,

diminishing race ; so low in the scale of nations, that they have no

written language, no historical, but only religious and poetical tradi-

tions, not even the presentiment of a future state; but live, without

erecting their head to their Creator, without aspiring to a continuation

of their existence.

The second race is the Siamese.

This nation were the former conquerors of the Tenasserim Provinces,

but were driven out of the country by ALomprRa in the middle of last

century. They are the deadly enemies of the Burmese, formerly

living with them in constant feuds, but, since the British occupation,

the constantly nourished animosities have ceased, and they have

begun to settle in the British territories, and to live peaceably with the

Burmese. ‘They are an enterprising industrious race, and possess a

great deal of the ingenuity and shrewdness, so peculiar to the Chinese

and their descendants. |

Their physical development is not stinted, but they are muscu-

lar, hardy, and persevering, and are therefore the huntsmen, and

the only people who have a knowledge of the vast wilds between Zim-

may and Mergui, going after elephants, rhinoceros, gold-dust and

precious stones. They have much of the enterprising spirit of the

undaunted adventurer, and are the most capable of improvement.

They are darker than the Burmese, and approach more than the

1838.] of the Tenasserim Provinces. 857

latter to that prototype, established by GmE Lin under the denomination

of Homo-fuscus.

The Burmese, the third race, and the lords of the land and soil before

they were deprived of it, are, comparing their faults and good qualities

impartially, an amiable well-behaved race ; naturally indolent, self-con-

ceited, and for centuries stationary, but sufficiently civilised to throw off

the imputation of being barbarians.

I adhere to the opinion, (consistent with the Mosaic tradition,) that

the human species descended from one pair originally ; that, in the

course of ages, certain distant portions of the globe were first peopled,

and that from these, as from many distinct nuclei, mankind dispersed

excentrically. |

So I think, and history seems to confirm the hypothesis, that from

Java, Sumatra, or Borneo, issued the Malayan race; that the Mon-

gols peopling China descended from the high lands of Kobi, and that

the Indians, originally bred in the Caucasus and its continuations,

extended from west to east: and I continue to say, that these three

original races, meeting in their courses from south, north and west,

in that part of the globe, now called Indo-China, gave birth to the

nations now inhabiting these regions—that therefore the Burmese

are a comparatively recent variety of the human species, the result

of Malayan, Chinese and Hindu mixture.

It is here the place to mention that problematical race, which is

reported to live in the recesses of the mountain ranges, which, as a

spur or a continuation of the great Himdlaya Alps, run towards the

peninsula of Malacca. :

I had never the opportunity to ascertain, if this reported race, of the

existence of which all the inhabitants in the interior seem to be

aware, is one of the numerous varieties of the human species, or be-

longs to the Quadrumana.

If we consider, that close by, on the Andamans, there exists a variety

of the human species, which justly may be regarded as the lowest in the

scale of intellectual beings ; and when we are told, that in the south of

the peninsula at Queda, lives a similar race of beings, belonging to the

Ethiopical type, not much superior in intellect to some of the apes, we

might be warranted in concluding, that remains of such a race may

yet be found in those vast mountainous tracts, which never have been

penetrated by Europeans.

However, the collected, and generally pretty well agreeing, descrip-

tions of the natives cover an extent of five degrees: let me indulge

in the conjecture, that these pretended human beings are nothing else

oP 2

858 Note on the Animal productions [Ocr.

than the gigantic orang-outang of Sumatra, or a closely allied species,

which has hitherto successfully escaped European detection, and still

enjoys the daily diminishing privilege in natural history—to be un-

known. In fact since the gigantic animal, whose remains ornament only.

this museum, was by chance discovered, all vestige of its existence disap-

peared for many years, until recently Major Gregory brought two

skulls of the same species from Swmatra, which clearly demonstrate,

that the tales, hitherto believed fabulous, of large human skulls with

tiger-teeth, have not been altogether unfounded, not as the relics of a

rational being, but as the uniting link between man and beast.

Coming now to the Mammalia, we find this part of Asia participat-.

ing in the variety of species, which distinguishes one side of that con-

tinent, and in the magnitude of those on the other side. It exhibits

nevertheless the distinguishing particulars, which separate all Asia

from New Holland, and from the islands of the Pacific Ocean.

In general it may be observed, that the Tenasserim Provinces form.

a combining line between Hindostan, Indo-China, and the Malayan

countries, possessing species peculiar to each of the three divisions,

with this distinction, that the number of species incommon with Bengal

and other parts of Hindostan, is comparatively smaller ; that province

Amherst, and Ye possess many species, peculiar to the countries east

of the Burhampootur, and even several of Bootan and Nepdl, and

that the southern provinces embrace many species, which have been

hitherto exclusively found only in the Malayan Archipelago. )

The Quadrumana being every where found within narrower limits,

do not present a great variety ; some of the species are strictly limit-

ed to certain districts.

The Simia syndactyla has been found in the southern parts, and can

be enumerated as an exception to the general rule ; for this animal

covers a wide range of congenial country, from Java and Sumatra,

to the 15th degree of north latitude.

A Hytobates, though the most common species in the interior, howl-

ing most pitiably in the solitary forests, seems to have hitherto

escaped the observation of naturalists.

The Symenopithecus Maurus is a very wild inhabitant of the

loftiest trees, and considered the best food by the Kareans, by whom it

is shot with poisoned arrows. ;

The Cercopithecus Cynosurus inhabits chiefly the banks of rivers,

and the mangrove forests, being chiefly fond of shellfish.

Another species of Cercopithecus belongs to the rarest of this genus,

and is found chiefly in the northern parts, upon isolated limestone rocks.

1838.] of the Tenasserim Provinces. 859

The Chewroptera present a great variety ; and several, I imagine, not

yet described species are to be met with, chiefly of the genus

Nyctinomus, Phyllostomus and Pteropus. Amongst the rarer species

Vespertilio Temminckit and Pteropus Javanicus must be enumerated.

The Carnivora present a great number of species. _ To maintain the

equilibrium in nature, it is also necessary, that where so many species

are procreated unmolested by man, the number of rapacious animals

must increase.

Of the Plantigrade the Ursus Malayanus seems to occupy all

the mountain parts, as high up as the 13th degree of latitude.

It must be observed that the genus Canis has, so far as I know, no

representative in the countries, trans-Burhampootur ; this genus, which

possesses in Hindostan several interesting and particular species, seems

to become obsolete, even the common jackal does not prosper in Zndo-

China, and not one specimen is to be found in Tenasserim. Yet there

are several species of Viverra, and one Herpestes.

In the same ratio as the number of species of Canis diminishes,

the number of the species of the genus Felis increases.

The royal tiger is to be found in great numbers, and is very strong

and large; however, its nature is very different from what it is in

Bengal; for scarcely an example is known of its attacking men

during the day time, and the carelessness, and even contempt, with

which the natives treat this formidable animal, is truly astonishing.

At Tavoy the black tiger, the Felis Nelao, is not uncommon, and a

specimen was caught last year, but unfortunately on its transport to

Maulmain, it broke through the bamboo cage, and escaped.

I pass quickly over the Marsupialia, and the greatest part of the

Rodentia in this cursory sketch ; the genus Sciurus presents a con-

siderable number of species, and of Pteromys, I found a large, and

probably undescribed species.

Of the Edentata, the little Bradypus has been caught, and so also

the Manis Crassicaudata.

Coming to the Pachydermata, I can not omit to mention the number

of elephants, which wander in herds of 10 to 30, through the un-

inhabited tracts, having the wide extent of primitive forests, from the

bay of Bengal to the Chinese seas, open to their constant peregri-

nations, descending during the monsoon into the plains, and returning

into the mountains during the hot weather.

The hog is very common, and the Sus Barbyrussa not very rare.

The rhinoceros is a common animal throughout the provinces, and

perhaps more numerous than the elephant, though its less gregarious

860 Note on the Animal productions [Ocr.

manners, and its wilder character, do not admit an easy approach to

it.

The Tenasserim Provinces seem to be a congenial place for this

genus, for I dare to pronounce almost positively, that the three known

Asiatic species, occur within their range. The Rhinoceros Indicus

being found in the nothern parts of the provinces, in that high range

bordering on Zimmay called “ the elephant tail mountain ;’ the R.

Sondaicus of Baron Cuvizr, on the contrary, occupies the southern-

most parts; while the R. bicornis Sumatrensis, or the double-

horned species, is to be found throughout the extent of the territories

from the 17° to 10° of latitude.

In character the R. Sondaicus seems to be the mildest, and can be

easily domesticated ; the powerful Indian rhinoceros is the shyest, and

the double-horned the wildest.

I have had the opportunity to ascertain positively the existence of the

Tapirus Malayanus within the British boundaries, in latitude 1 1o 37’

in province Merguz, though I have not been so fortunate as to obtain a

specimen of it. It is well known to the natives who call it the great pig.

Finally coming to the Ruminantia, as may be expected, the number

- of Cervide is considerable.

Rusa Hippelaphus, Elaphus Wallichu, Cuv. C. Aristotels, C. Axis,

and C’. Muntjac, besides two other species have been seen ; but there

is as yet no antelope known.

Of the ox kind, the Bubalus, Arnee and Domesticus are both in

a wild state; and of the Bisons, the great Gaurus rather rare, but

Bison Guodus very common: besides another small kind of cow, called

by the Burmese Fhain, of which I saw only foot prints, but never

the living animal; it remains therefore undecided, to what species it

roust be referred.

Of birds I have made a collection of 250 species, and 600 specimens,

which I herewith place at the disposal of Government, presenting it

to-day to the inspection of the Society, and I only regret that econo-

mical reasons compelled me to have the birds prepared by the rude

hands of common Burmah coolies, previously, a short time instructed by

me; and many, otherwise greatly valuable specimens, are therefore

more or less defective.

The species inhabiting the provinces are highly interesting to obser-

vers of the geographical distribution of the feathered tribe: for they,

more than the Mammalia, of which the species occupy wider geogra-

phical ranges, prove the intimate connexion and resemblance of the

lower portions of the provinces with the Malayan archipelago.

1838.) of the Tenasserim Provinces. 861

More than 60 species found in the southern hemisphere are in-

digenous, and amongst these is a considerable number of those first

described by Rarries and Horsrievp in their accounts of Suma-

tra and Java.

Amongst these are to be enumerated Falco Limetus, H. St. Pagr-

darum, Tem. Strix Castaroptera, H. Muscisapa Banyamas and Hi-

rundinacea, Jéra Scapularis, Edolius, Puella Crypsirena, Temma

Vick, Brachyptorix montan, A. Prinia familiaris, Dacelo pulchella

Eurylaimus, Javanensis, Burylaimus tunatus, GouLp. Cuculus Xan-

thorhynchus, Parra superciliosa, &c.

I shall confine the rest of my ornithological observations to very few

remarks. ;

The Accipitres are numerous, but as they mostly frequent the gloomy

forests, and scarcely accessible cliffs of the mountains, the species are

seldom visible, except when soaring high in the heavens, or gliding

swiftly over the tops of the lofty trees ; many therefore have escaped my

observation The number of Falconida I collected is 10; of Strigide

five.

The Passeres furnish of course that variety, which is to be expected

from the great number of species in this order.

The Airundinacee contain the H. esculenta, &c., the nests of which

exported into China yield a considerable revenue annually to govern-

ment.

The family of Sylviade contains a considerable number of Jaredes ;

seven species of Pastor or Acridotheres, eight Muscicupdie and several

Oriolne.

The family of Fringillide boasts of seven species of Lowia.

The Corvide possess the beautiful Cypsinina Temmia Velis.

It is remarkable that the common crow of Calcutta, the Corw.

Doricus never occurs in the provinces, its place is supplied by the

Corvus Carone, which is equally numerous and impudent.

The Certhia possesses a variety of Cinnyris and Nectarinia yielding

in splendid plumage, and diminutive size, little to the American

Trochilt. The beautiful Dicewm inver forms a connecting link with

the Meropida, which are the glory of the east in richness of plumage,

and four species of Merops rival in colors the species of Java and New

Holland.

Halcyon and Alcedo of the nine species that exist, amongst which the

Halcyon Gurial, an Indian species, takes the lead in size and noise.

The family of Buceros contains four representatives, amongst

which the small Buceros Malubaricus of Lat. is the most common.

862 Animal productions of Tenasserim Provinces. [Ocr.

The Indian Homrai is equally an inhabitant of Tenasserim, besides

two or three beautiful species, which I do not find any where described.

Of the order Scansores, the Picus, or wood-peckers are numerous

and beautiful, and I found nine different species, Picus Bengalensis

showing the affinity with India, and the closely allied Picus Tiga of

HorsFIELpD with Java.

The Cuculide are numerous. Of Phoenicopheus, there are three

species of small Cerulis ; the Centrophus Castaropterus is one of

the commonest inhabitants near human abode.

The genus Bucco contains five species, of which two appear to be new.

The Psittacide have five representatives, amongst which the small

Portrams preporsitis is the great destroyer of durta blossoms.

The next order are the Gallinane.

The family of Columbide possess, as far as I am aware, seven species,

of which four belong to the genus Vinago.

The splendid Geophilus Nicobarensis is an ornament of the Islands

constituting the Mergwz archipelago.

The Tetraonide possess few representatives, the whole country being

an uninterrupted forest, and these animals liking bare rocky grounds,

pasturage fields, and meadows. Only one species of Perdria, and two

species of Cotusrnix have been observed by me.

The Phasianide possess the Ph. Gallus, or the father of our domes-

tic fowl, in great abundance in the jungles ; and the breed, amongst the

natives, is commonly kept up by supplies of eggs from the forests.

Of the Pavonide, the Indian peacock is in great abundance in the

interior near mountain torrents.

The Gralle.—Of the Charadriade, three species of Charadri

amongst which, the Indian Ch. ventralis /! of Genl. HarpwickeE, and

the Gloriola or Entalis of Leacu.

The family of Ardead@, possesses many representatives. The Ciconia

Argala, or the common Calcutta adjutant, is never seen on that coast,

and the existence of a substitute in the C. eapillata of TEMMINCK, or

the adjutant without pouch, reminds us again, that the provinces ap-

proach more to Java than to Hindostan.

The genera Grus and Ardea, possess 11 species of which the Ardea

Malaucersis of GMELIN is the most common.

The family of Fringellide have a due number of species, Numenius,

Scolopax, Totanus, Rhynchus,; Limosa, Tringa and Hemantopus are

found, and have their residence chiefly near the mouths of the numer-

ous rivers, descending from the mountains, as far as they are exposed

to the influence of the tides.

1838.] On a new species of Pheasant from Tibet. 863

Of the Rallide I can only enumerate the Parra Superciliosa, and

two species of Ortesgometra.

Finally ending with the Palmipera@, we have one species of Pelicanus

so widely spread over the east, and four species of Carbo, which have

taken up their residence upon the great rivers.

To render the enumeration complete, I have only to mention four

species of Sterna, and of the Anatine, the Anser Girra of India, the

Mareca Awsuree and another unknown species.

Having thus completed the enumeration of observed animals I have

only to add, as may well be imagined, that the occupation of the pro-

vinces by the British, has opened a wide field to the naturalist and phi-

losopher. What I have done has been only to remove the upper veil,

which densely covers this much promising land; but the result of my

limited researches will, I trust, demonstrate that success and a rich

harvest must await every one who investigates the country with leisure,

con gusto et amore, confining himself to certain definite branches ; and

I will only add that I shall be most happy to submit to the Society

further additions and more information, which, I hope, I shall be able

to gather in future.

IV.—On anew species of Pheasant from Tibet. By B. H. Hove-

son, Esq.

The zoological region comprising Tibet, with the lofty mountains

which bound it towards India and China, is chiefly distinguished in

the bird department, by the number of its pheasants, ( Phasianide, )

hardly any two of which agree in form and external organisation.

This rich variety of structure, whilst it mocks all past attempts at

systematic arrangement, seems to indicate, that we yet possess, in this

family, but the fragmert of the complete circle, (termed Phasianide

by Vicors and Pavonide by Swainson,) though the riches of recent

discovery, may induce us to hope, that the deficient forms are not

extinct, but only unknown.

Be that as it may, there is at least no doubt, that in the present state

of the scientific classification of this family of the Rasores, an insulated

observer cannot well hope to class newly discovered species satisfac-

torily; and I shall therefore at once proceed to the summary descrip-

tion of what I believe to be such, without any present attempt to

decide, whether my bird be an aberrant species, or a new type in the

family.

5 Q

864 On a new species of Pheasant from Tibet. [Ocr.

Phasianide, vel Pavonide.

Genus—new ? Crossoptilon*, nob. Type Phastanus Crossoptilon,

nob. Hab. Tibet.

I possess but one specimen of this large and striking bird. It is a

mature male, and was brought recently to Cathmandu by the Nipalese

envoy to Pekin, who has just returned here. The length, from the

tip of the bill to the tip of the tail, is from 38 to 40 inches, of which

the bill is 13 and the tail 19 to 20 inches.

A closed wing measures 124 inches; the tarsus 42, and the central

toe 28. The bill has the same length, whether taken from the gape or

from the front, and is three-eighths of an inch shorter than the head,

the latter being two inches complete. The bill is very strong, with the

general characters of that of Lophophorus, the tomial edge of the

upper mandible being even more scarped, and furnished with a small

tooth-like festoon. Its base is nude. The head and throat are clad in

feathers and simple. But the entire cheeks, from nostril to occiput,

are void of plumes, being occupied by the typical red and papillated

skin of the pheasant tribe, and in all that extent of development, which

more especially characterises the Indian Kdliches ( Leucomelanus ),

and the painted and Amherstian species of China. Like the true

pheasant (Colchicus), our bird has no crest of any kind, though the

feathers occupying the top of the head are of a peculiar kind, being

short, velvety, thickset, erect, with their slightly discomposed and

square points recurved a little to the front.

The wings have no peculiarity. They are short, stiff, bowed and

rounded, as usual the sixth feather being the longest. The very

ample tail is most remarkable for the breadth of the plumes. Its

length is moderate, nor is there any of the extra elongation and nar-

rowing of the central feathers, which characterise the tropical pheasants.

There are 18 caudal plumes regularly and considerably gradated

throughout, and the general form of the tail is broadly convex, without

any symptom of the Galline compression and curve. The legs and feet

are well adapted for rapid movement on the ground, and have a form

and proportion, very similar to those of Lewcomelanus, and Satyrus.

The tarsi are nude, and biscaled before and behind: but the hinder

scales are smaller than the fore ones. ‘The sides of the tarsi are

papillo-reticulate. The spur is sharp and curved. ‘The lateral toes

are equal; the central long ; and the hind short and raised, as usual.

The nails are long and possess but little curve. It remains only to

notice the plumage of the bird, which constitutes indeed its most

* xpoooos a fringe; mriAov a feather.

Jour. AS. $06.

Vol VII. PL XLVI

Ks) Yh

ff Ve

yy Livy, fy “

Phastanus ? Crossoptilom

Crossoptilon Tibelanus.

bilis Wh 5, ‘ th . Va +

boll ideal eh Rake heehee

a ee Mere ao.

ek i tee ag igh; ea celia tines

a eth

Hi ile vgn DE < tok acta ta hie ae woh

Saag: Sears ee ne Ce a ae

ate * PMR. BIRR, 8 ses, aa ae OH Gh Auk

e * . GROMMMN RIN tan a8 che nae YR, 26 pos oh tiga « el i

shes t - wo a? eat, aah gh se a weary ie peatewotiy

re era ig allah Lata OR IN ag a iageoegeepit

‘Lah suey Saibe Lcrathals a ae Renee gees Pees

4 Ape Ra tik J ea te Reever tc ame et ne

EL PAE eo aot Seen ee yi sahain sg yl:

PE Te ap hp SE es SR a Te

Boy ee Re | SPAS elt. te Sih ay Bs

Bagh apse, NORA aint ore als th

atetnwanior et ee his yeh a

UN RA Co Rh +c ae ae oi

" sheet . " lis , Belt Re ene Ne iesc ish cna re

jane ie CO iyBad fy > .

Me | seer i Sa Aw

"y . f

. My bail : f

1838.] Notes of a journey to Girndr. 865

remarkable feature. The plumage, then, upon the whole body is very

ample, but not at all pointed, unglossed and wholly dishevelled, so as

to remind one of the Struthious family. This peculiarity has suggest-

ed the name I have applied to the bird—-a name which, for the

present, may be considered specific, but liable to promotion to generic

or subgeneric rank, if the form be proved to be typical, and not merely

aberrant.

At present I incline to consider it in the former light, and to assign

the type a place between Phasianus and E’uplocomus, vel Nycthe-

merus—a type which, by the bye, I characterised 11 years ago in the

Oriental Quarterly, under the style of Gaillophasis, assigning the

Kdlich of Kirxpatricx’s Nepal as the icon. ‘The oblique compres-

sion and curve of the tail constitute the principal character of that type,

(Gallophasis, vel Huplocomus,) and as it is a character sure to be

lost in the dry skin, I am not entirely certain, that our present subject

may not possess it in the living state. If so, this bird will bea

Gallophasis, vel Huplocomus—but if not, a neighbouring type allied

to the true pheasant by the absence of crest, and distinguished amongst

all its congeners by its ample fringe-like plumage, the dishevelled

quality of which is communicated even to the central tail feathers, the

very broad and equal webs of which are quite separated, and curve

outwards towards the sides, besides being adorned by a fine gloss.

The general color of our bird is bluish hoary, paler, and tinted

yellow on the lower surface: crown of the head black and velvety :

great alar and caudal plumes dusky or black, more or less glossed with

changeable blue, especially the tail feathers: legs and cheek-piece,

intense sanguine: bill dull ochreous red ; iris brown.

Nepal, September, 1838.

V.—Notes of a journey to Girndr in the Province of Kattywar, for

the purpose of copying the ancient inscriptions upon the rock near

that place.—Undertaken by order of the Bombay Government.

May 10th, 1888 —Landed at the small port of Verawut on the wes-

tern coast, and nearly at the southern extremity of Kattywdr. This

place is only 40 miles from Junagarh, and in the immediate vicinity of

the ancient city of Pattan, and of the celebrated Somnath, Owing to the

lateness of the season, and the imperative necessity which existed for my

proceeding to the scene of my labours with the least possible delay, my

time was not at my own disposal; still I lost none in paying even a

9Q2

866 Notes of a journey to Girndr. [Ocr.

hurried visit to these interesting places. Old Pattan is built upon a

projection of the main land, forming the southern point of the small

port and bay of Verawul. The road from the latter to the ancient city,

lies immediately on the shore of this bay, and for a distance of about a

mile from the walls, on the western side, passes through an extensive

Muhammadan burying ground: amongst the tombs are some rich and

picturesque ruins. The surrounding country, known as the Soruth

division of Kattywar, subject to the nawab of Junagarh, is exceeding-

ly rich, thickly wooded, and in high cultivation. The walls of Pattan,

in the form of an irregular square, enclose a space somewhat less than

two miles in circumference*, with two gates and numerous square

towers. The western front is washed by the sea; a ditch encompasses

the other three sides. These fortifications, which are high and com-

posed of uncemented square stones, are of unusual solidity, and the

old city, with its massive walls and double gates, must formerly have

been a place of considerable strength. The population of Pattan is at

present completely Muhammadan, and the place is under the manage-

ment of an Arab jemadar, a deputy of H. H. the nawab of Junagarh,

To the kindness of Syup ABDOOLLAH, I am indebted for a most hospi-

table reception, and for every assistance which he could render, or I

couldrequire. Itis evident that the Muhammadan conquerors of Pattan,

in rebuilding the place, and substituting a population of their own creed

for that of the Hindus, have at the same time laboured to eradicate

all traces of the religion of the latter from this city, but the visitor

cannot fail to observe the essentially Hindu character of the whole

place. ‘The mosques, which are very numerous, appear to have been

erected from the ruins of the Hindu temples, whilst the houses, in the

ornaments, sculptures, &c., bear about them evidence of their material

having frequently been derived from similar sources. ‘The style of

building in the gates and walls, the latter adorned at every corner with

sculptures of Hindu divinities, proclaim at once to whom Pattan was

originally indebted for the magnificence, still traceable through all the

innovations of its conquerors. This city, as connected with the Som-

ndth temple, and the invasion of saraustra by Maumu’D, is one of con-

siderable interest; and, as the former capital of an extensive country,

deserves some inquiry into its early history, but of it, or its rulers, the

Persian historians} do not, that 1 can learn, give any account.

Quitting these subjects, however, I must proceed to describe the

renowned Sonmdth temple, the monument of Manmu’pd’s intolerance,

and one of the most interesting relics in the Saraustra peninsular,

* One mile 6 furlongs, 36 square and 2 round towers; walls 9 feet thick.

+ MIRAT I AHMADI, MIRATI ISKUNDURI,

44, Mir eo ey

EER BPGBLA onze = ay ER

ae eee

7 SK 4 ap— PP Sing pe

= Beem oe a — 7 Bas SGpaay ms

aed i . ete =o . ~. ale =~ = se my ®

Ue ae Gaeet S ~ w= & = ba ns | Ge em a Gia aoe : set ead, | ii STS See ayes Oe : +7 zag?

" % 2 — * —— a 5 2 x

ae ee hes DE og we Jape al, ST eR eae mH Bin wee

es: 3 < aS r ied r py ae ge Pn Ue a Lb Veal I Ae PY

sc ake eT 0 tal

ose aes

> fee ape cne 3 moa bal

i = * os +e? we aa Oh 7, Paid NG ties?

wet uae Ss eee een 5 ae mui — mest " putas bY gee ae Lh ene Sat

“<< .’

; ms ic ET cs 3

. —v apo wr * fp," * < ee + Sag Oe) ce RS: a ee - Bg rrp venmy hi

SS era _— rae ree & s at Ber =79 :

Lis ig ° ea 8 NSBR La * ée ogee” ead Ki Pa pte = = Pp = m =7

DE TT Ter erty, aul Heo ieee Rony CW La 9 ton tet Fx ee rns cy, a = Perv rut ie Pons

iy < aca ae eS TL een eth ee RT sf. ose ” 2 :

GOR ores: wae oF ait eee ? 723 LAG poe ae mine Sell ere Saat SEO EEC Ya pe thins? Se eae era St i =

ae > ” a UtP sawn de peas StL Sf Se ass onto eee, gute SES eigre? sss a SP gna oF teas LU fell | o he - =

eae y = = : nae ery eer ree j A

pate ‘x Pd id BO ad Pie gee! ok = Fee eee IAT! stay tone ome W Zi

: ** Boe —— en eT Lee ey ol eA ZS wr pte ee cr ae foo 4 oS =e -

ay Be ee EE Re ee SO agg = Oe ee SE es a Ne Oe SUS ee

Sets =a97 . Aeece Lew 25 Sei) Pret ts sake FISTS TAIT oT = =

LOE Leng Sieh eee Weriggns pT = Se a a

= sve etere <9927ia y mie- SP 04es) p= eens pee

ac om — ae ee ea Slept

VI yy sete eee

ares

3 RT Ee axnriraicseng i eee Soe eee

~ROesg ¢ | TT TON |

ay Heat WOR tat = i NS

M El Le (fH — Ae

on} anid | a

ah 7" = Veal Mi { ——

SS pl | ee ea

ae i Ross ee)

> | 2 i fa a

Ras

nes

renee i

fr,

)

_ See

\\a\ aa

tS Se

[sa

[om

2 °S' x se a waol

ee TUN TLS

1838. ] Notes of a journey to Girndr. 867

This celebrated shrine occupies an elevated site in the south-western

corner of the city, overlooking the sea, and close to the walls. In its

present mutilated state, I find it very diilicult to convey any very dis-

tinct or correct idea of the Somndth; for although its original design

and gorgeous style of architecture, may still be traced in the complete

ruin it presents, its general effect is likely to be better understood

from an effect of the pencil, than the pen. (See Plates, Nos. XLVI.

and XLVII.)

This temple consists of one large hall in an oblong form, from one

end of which proceeds a small square chamber or sanctum. The centre

‘of the hall is occupied by a noble dome, over an octagon of eight arches.

The remainder of the roof terraced, and supported by numerous pillars.

There are three entrances; the sides of the building face to the

cardinal points, and the principal entrance is on the eastern side. These

doorways are unusually high and wide, in the Egyptian style, decreas-

ing towards the top; they add much to the effect of the building.

Internally the whole presents a scene of complete destruction, the pave-

ment is every where covered with heaps of stones, and rubbish, the

facings of the walls, capitols of the pillars, in short, every portion pos-

sessing any thing approaching to ornament, having been removed or

defaced by the ‘‘ destroyer*.” On a pillar, beyond the centre arch, and

leading to the sanctum, is an inscription, which, anxious as I was to learn

any thing connected with the temple, much excited my curiosity. On

translation however, it proved to be merely a record of a certain silat,

or mason, who visited the place some 300 years since. I learnt to my

inexpressible regret, that an ancient tablet, whose unoccupied niche

was pointed out to me, had been removed from the Somndth some few

years since, by a European visitor. I need hardly quote Col. Ton’s

remark on this mistaken, and I fear too frequent, practice ; but if what

he says be applicable to the mere architectural ornaments of a building,

how much more so to engraven records, similar to that which is here

wanting.

Externally, the whole of the building is most elaborately carved and

ornamented, with figures single, and in groups of various dimensions ;

many of these appear to have been of some size, but so laboriously was

the work of mutilation carried on here, that of the larger figures scarce-

ly a trunk has been left, whilst few, even of the most minute, remain

uninjured. The front entrance is ornamented with a portico, and sur-

rounded by two slender minarets, ornaments so much in the Muham-

madan style, that I doubt if they belonged to the original building+.

* So MAHMU’D entitled himself. See FERISHTAH.

tT 1 think it not at all improbable, that these minarets, the dome, and arches in

868 Notes of a journey to Girndr. © [Ocr.

The two side entrances, which are at some height from the ground, were

gained by flights of steps: of these latter the remains only are to be

traced. The whole space, for a considerable distance around the temple,

is occupied by portions of pilars, stones, and fragments of the original

building. Such is a brief sketch of the present appearance of the

renowned Somndth, which notwithstanding Maumu’p’s intolerant spoli-

ation, must still prove an object of great interest to the lover of Indian

antiquities*. I must not omit to mention, as a proof of the wonderful

solidity of this structure, that within a few years its roof was used as a

battery for some heavy pieces of ordnance, with which the neighbouring

port of Verawul, was defended from the pirates who formerly infested

this coast.

Without pretending to an accurate knowledge of the peculiar fea-

tures, distinguishing the Buddhistical and Jain from Hindu sanctuaries,

my impression, founded simply upon observation, is, that the Somndth

was originally a Buddhist templet, afterwards appropriated to the

worship of Siva ; and probably thus found by Manmvu’p, at the period

of its capture. In confirmation of the Linga having at some period

received adoration here, I observed two Nandis outside amongst the

ruins: but in its style of architecture and ornament, (particularly the

male and female figures,) it is in vain to look for any Hindu features,

whilst in all points it agrees most accurately with the Buddhistical.

As Dr. Witson has visited the Somndth, his learning and research in

these matters will enable him, if necessary, to judge of the correctness

or otherwise of the above remark, which I make with all deference.

The modern Somndth, erected by the famous AuLya Buas, is in the

immediate vicinity of the ancient one, but I had not time to inspect it,

as my good friend the jemadar had promised to shew me some

curiosities outside the city. On passing through the gate to the east-

ward, my attention was directed to a stone tablet, about two feet square,

in the wall tothe right. It contained a closely written inscription in

the Déva Nagri character, and in the Sanskrit language; leaving

my pandit to copy thist, I proceeded on my way.

the interior of the building, may have been added to it after its capture. In the pre-

sent appearance of the Somndth, it differs widely from FERISHT AH’s description, and

these peculiar features, are completely Muhammadan. As Bin Cassim when he

conquered Sindh, is said to have turned the temples of the idolaters, into places of

prayer for the true believers ; so the conqueror of Pattan may have shewn his detes-

tation of the idolatry of the Somndth, by attempting to obliterate all traces of the

original character of the building.

* Dimensions of the Somndth temple. Extreme Jength inside not including the

small chamber or sanctum, 96 feet ; extreme width, 68 feet : extreme height, 283 feet.

+ The Somndth is known to the Jains under the title of Chandar Prabas.

¢ This has been forwarded to Calcutta for interpretation,

ae bib Aah Se Ay Buymeep MOS HL YNINOS 3° UOILUMALNL nary saree hi nee

nee

Si ha

fae a cee

rt es eae > rrr ~ - ree —— é : : : faa oteens nes : = = . — =s . Bp. [ato ae :

— = 3 Rctg A" ~ ~ : = eo = a a ON a i >] = Op PAR, wee S - : R =

ae ee (i

PWS see ey

MAREE LP GE

———7 :

r = a

? .

mee ak gh | ; 1a hid Hai fmt

: F : : *

st] me ie ‘Sppbdsaas nant 5 Lo EE

$})

Bt £2 1 Ben a,

iy man mei

aN a) - = a BRAG

| Tl 1d 1A: 198A . SE EO SS a }} th

- rte > ei eet e ase Se Reni a De IN OS ee ey a ee eee ;

Cae oes,

Spee a as

& % Wie Ve eh ee

Testa” barns Ne al Tt

hone

‘ *

Bi wpb) © ANC

Tait Reh aa ate eby

¥ RUN SO ie

wate 7

1858.] Notes of a journey to Girndr. 869

The neighbourhood of Pattan is esteemed especially sacred by

Hindus, as the scene of Krisuna’s death and apotheosis. After the

erection of the great temple at Dwarka, it is related that he came to this

part of the Savaustra, where, according to the fable, he lost his life from

the arrow of his brother Vat1. A small river, known to Hindu devo-

tees as the Raunakshi, empties itself into the sea, at the distance of

about a mile to the eastward of Pattan. Ata particular spot on this

river, sacred as that of Krisuna’s death, are a ghat and a few

temples. Pilgrims after a visit to Dwarka, come to this stream,

where they bathe, and shave the hair from the head and face, in

token of mourning. They then proceed to Prachee where are some

temples (about eight miles up this river): a visit to these concludes

a pilgrimage to Dwarkanath. In the neighbourhood of the ghat

above mentioned, and interspersed through a space of three or four

hundred yards in extent, are some excavations, which have all the

appearance of Buddhist wzharas. They consist of a long low and

narrow entrance, from which a short flight of steps descends to a

small apartment; from this proceeds a gallery leading to another

chamber ; a succession of three or four chambers and galleries closes

the excavation. ‘There are several of these caves, differing little from

each other, except that in one or two the galleries continually descend,

instead of being on the same level ; the last chamber is consequently

at a great depth from the entrance. They are allso low and narrow, as

to be traversed only in a stooping posture, and in none could I discover

the slightest trace of either ornament or idol. The attendant Brah-

mans at the ghat appear to attach some sanctity to these excavations,

and have kept many of them in good repair, with a facing of chunam.

Confirmatory of my opinion, that these were originally viharas, belong-

ing to some Buddhist establishment in the vicinity, I was fortunate

enough to discover near one of them a figure of Bu’pw. The face and

arms are destroyed, but the sitting posture, crossed legs, and remains of

pendants from the ears upon the shoulder, at once decide its character.

I subjoin a sketch of this statue*. It is small, the figure, together with

a pedestal on which it is sitting, being only four feet high. The pedes-

tal is ornamented with female figures, and the figure itself is support-

ed by a slender pillar, which is broken off just above the head. The

whole is framed from one block of a hard description of red stone. There

are in the disfigured appearance of this statue, undoubted marks of its

antiquity. I questioned the Brahmans on the spot, concerning it and

* The sketch so exactly corresponds with other statues of Budh, that it has not

been deemed necessary to have it engraved.

870 Notes of a journey to Girndr. [Ocr.

the viharas, but they were quite at a loss to account for either ; my

aversion on principle to remove such relics, alone prevented me from

making a prize of this, which unless I have overrated its value, would

doubtless form an interesting addition to one of our museums. Still,

neglected and unknown where it now is, its presence may prove of great

use to some future, and more capable, inquirer into the antiquities of

this part of India, which has been designated by Colonel Top, as “ the

cradle of Jain and Buddhist worship.” After visiting all the viharas,

and a very pretty though modern Jain temple in their vicinity, I re-

turned to Puttan, where the remainder of the day was occupied in

taking hurried sketches of the Somnath. I made every inquiry of the

few Brahmans to be found in the scanty Hindu population of Pattan,

for traditions, &c. respecting the temple or city, but I learnt that the

only one, whose chopras could furnish me with any information on the

subject, was absent. For coins I sought in vain, my good friend the

jemadar, however, having promised to forward me all that the city can

furnish, as well as to procure me some traditions*, I took leave of him

with many acknowledgments of the attention he had shown me. I

regretted exceedingly, that time did not admit of my making a longer

stay at Pattan, as well as of my proceeding to the ruins of Mundore,

Prachee, and other interesting places in the neighbourhood. I doubt

not they would have well repaid me the trouble of a visit.

May \6th-—Reached Junagarh. The whole country passed through

from Verawal to the capital, is not only the richest, and most produc-

tive in Kaftywar, but may vie in fertility with any part of Guzerat.

A black soil is watered by numerous streams, whence irrigation is easily

carried on, the water being sufficiently near the surface to admit of its

being raised by the Persian wheel. This division of the province, con-

sequently suffers comparatively little from the droughts, which too fre-

quently cause devastation and famine in other parts of Katiywar ; from

the continued and abundant supply of water, from these rivulets, the want

of rain is not so severely felt as elsewhere. The crops are chiefly sugar-

cane, wheat, and jowaree, the mango tree flourishes in great luxuriance,

and the fruit is excellent. Indeeda stranger would form a most erro-

neous opinion of the whole province, were he to judge of it in passing

through the territories of H. H. the nawab of Junagarh: for the arid

and extensive plains, which form the leading features of the Kattywar

country, are strikingly contrasted with this highly favored division,

abounding in hill and dale, wood and water. From the indolence of its

ruler however, this fair possession is sadly mismanaged.

* These I received whilst at Junagarh and forwarded to Mr. PRINSEP, who will

be able to determine their claims to notice.

ee a SS ee ee

1838.] Notes of a journey to Girndr. 871

‘The approach to Junagarh from the southwest is very picturesque,

the road for some miles passing through rich topes of mango, tama-

rind, and other trees : near the city are some gardens in high cultivation.

The range, known as the Junagarh hills, appears from this direction to

run nearly north and west, occupying an extreme extent of about twelve

miles. The hills are all of granite formation, but richly clothed with

jungle, extending to some miles around their base. The highest point

is the summit of the Girndr, situated in the rear of the principal range,

to which it is connected by two shoulders or spurs, running westerly,

and southerly, from about halfway up the summit. A large opening in

nearly the centre of the front range, forms a beautiful valley and road

to the sacred mount, which, with its bold granite bluffs, and tapering

peaks half hidden in mist and clouds, is a noble feature in the

landscape. .

The city of Junagarh is situated at the entrance of the valley just

mentioned, with its low walls nearly hidden by the jungle around; the

only conspicuous object is the old Rajput citadel, or as it is called from

its elevated situation, the Uparkét, a very fine piece of fortification,

situated within, and on the eastern side of the modern city. The

straggling walls of Junagarh, occupy an immense area, not more than

half of which is inhabited; the whole of the eastern portion, is an un-

occupied space. The population may be estimated at about 20,000, the

majority Hindu; the streets are narrow and dirty, houses badly built,

with nothing about the place approaching to that bustle, and air of pros-

perity, which might reasonably be looked for in the capital of a rich terri-

tory. Situated in the centre of one of the bazars, is the naw4b’s palace,

an insignificant building; indeed, with the exception of a few mosques

and tombs, none of the modern buildings deserve notice. A very con-

venient havélee has been appropriated by H. H. the nawab, for the

accommodation of officers visiting Junagarh. I was thus fortunate in

escaping the inconvenience incidental to tents, at a season of the year,

when any unnecessary exposure to the intense heat at this place, would

perhaps have defeated my object. I had also reason to congratulate

myself on meeting Captain Lane at Junagarh. Through his exertions,

the inscriptions at Gzrnar were first copied, and to the kind assistance

which he on all occasions rendered me, whilst occupied in my work, I

feel mainly indebted for any success with which my own exertions have

been attended.

Immediately on my arrival, I accompanied Captain Lane to look ay

the inscriptions. The celebrated rock, on which they are engraved, is

distant about half a mile to the eastward of the city, a few yards to the

872 Notes of a journey to Girnar. [Ocr.

right of the Girndr road. It is one of a group of several large granite

blocks, and appears to have been chosen for its peculiar form, which

approaches to that of a flattened cone. The inscriptions occupy three

sides of the rock, that to the eastward being the most ancient ; whilst

those on the western and northern faces, are in a more modern charac-

ter. The ancient characters, recording the edicts of Asoxa, are deeply

cut, and, except where a portion of the stone has been removed by vio-

lence, are very perfect. The same remark will also apply to that on the

upper western side, but the large inscription on the northern face next to

the road, is greatly defaced. The rock here has been much weather-

worn, and the characters appear to have been originally faintly cut. A

substantial causeway commences immediately opposite the rock, and cros-

sing the ravine at the bottom of the valley, with a neat bridge, terminates

near some Hindu temples, and a small but sacred reservoir, called the

Damodar Kiind*. This improvement on the high road to Girndr’, is

the gift of one of the wealthiest of the Soondajee family, and is a noble

work. ‘The large portion of the rock, removed from the eastern face,

has evidently been the effect of blasting, the materials being in all pro-

bability appropriated to the pavement of the causeway.

The survey of my work concluded, preparations were made without

loss of time for commencing the copies and facsimiles. Without detail-

ing the result of each day’s proceedings whilst occupied in the work, I

subjoin a somewhat more detailed account of the inscriptions them.

selves, with the methods pursued to ensure the necessary correctness

in their transcription. The most interesting character is the ancient

one, recording the edicts of king Asoka, and situated as before men-

tioned, on the eastern face: the letters are each 11 inches, uniform in

size, and very clearly and deeply cut. (No. 4.) This inscription con-

sists of two grand divisions, the edicts being again sub-divided by a

longitudinal line between each edict; one line from the summit of the

rock to about midway down its face, forms the two great divisions,

The space occupied by this inscription is 9 square yards+. Pursuing

Capt. Lane’s as my first plan, the letters were carefully filled up with

a red pigment, (vermilion and oil,) every attention being paid to the

inflections, and other minute though important points. A thin and

perfectly transparent cloth, was then tightly glued over the whole of one

division, and the letters as seen plainly through the cloth, traced upon it

in black : in this way all the edicts were transcribed, and the cloth being

* Distance of this causeway 700 yards.

tT The rock on the eastern side which is the highest, is 12 feet in perpendicular

height, and 74 feet in circumference at the base.

x= ~

oe LE SNAS

ve Yay

“NAY ~ Ng

Wye:

fe eels

Sketched lyL £Po akan 3

OF,

Sor

até,

“<&.

. J

bided WEY 1

skewer. Ww

Soatay

ce ce

sige S

ittaccnt

nee

. L)

ae v

Wala eee = =e

RAN . Sie)

~ Sts aS

ees

2) oe

oss

i RS

GIRNAR

TREN G SSS me

QW BSE. OTE

YW Se ws. LS)

ine . Re ee, i NAGE NS ° ESRS

SAB" OV SSS

ue ee Se

= -\ : ‘ Oi : 1) SANS \

—

: Sen Ny :

yt \ SSN ;

‘ \

~ NS SS 4

OP eT SY

Mh: Toes

tye

PtHittee Litht

H J ; i

niet Posies iv

; i ee

esate a AV mys a “i

aeRO TY

. alist: real ee aed eu

Se a

eee eee ae

HORE eb Soe by 2a ASRtg chi sitters

Oe es sha ie oi reg pay Mi Mi dy i : re

| Mnaieelyeces pedal a Gali as po ni

Sb Rede bes ato sakes: ai

+ he Maal Nn ote crore :

Ds er a ae pig . fT ROS eB “4

La mit Br. Gasca ba ec Leeann aaa eden bes i:

Tye sates ee: nt pe ee ti a rem ges seu en! LO: ib teks rots, rin eps

ace bri Hh ae Maan Ohad ae She ai ae" sabe sf ms

tape hy bi 5 nate . Bia ent feud }

es PAB Freee ce SA | me HP

alias: Aeiy . ‘ me ne. re ; ai 5 They v uta ;

Lidtie ; eae ws oe at oe ‘3 shee nti sth saa 1

1838.] Notes of a journey to Girndar. 873

removed, the copy was carefully revised letter by letter with the origi-

nal. The very smooth and convex surface of the rock on this face,

was highly favorable to this method, but it is tedious, and occupied in

the old character alone, 10 days of incessant labour. In the next place

a correct copy was taken by hand: this proved very useful, as tending to

the discovery of any errors, when compared with the copy on the cloth.

Thirdly and lastly, the plan, so highly recommended by M. Jacaquzsr,

was resorted to, which, when the surface of the rock will admit of it,

and the characters are pretty deeply cut and distinct, is unquestionably

the most rapid and satisfactory of all the methods yet brought to my

notice. The edicts by this method were taken off separately on paper:

and, although my first trial, I have reason to think that the facsimiles

themselves will show that the result was satisfactory. The inscription

on the western side, begins at the summit of the rock, where it is sepa-

rated only by a small space from the first edict in the old character,

and occupies a space of about fifty-six square feet. The shape of the

rock is here very irregular, but the character is carved through all the

undulations, and in one place several lines are continued over a sharp

angle. From the very centre of this inscription, the surface of the rock,

in one or two formidable pieces, has been removed, thereby occasioning

some very serious hiatuses ; but the lines appear to be individually

terminal, and the letters generally clear and well carved. With this

character, I pursued only the plan of filling in, and tracing upon cloth,

afterwards carefully revising the work, so as to enable me to be satisfied

with its correctness. The last inscription on the northern side, is the

* most faulty of the three ; the letters appear originally to have been very

faintly cut, are small, and not uniform in size. The surface of the rock

is very irregular, with large fissures, the whole much weather-worn, and

mutilated. (No. 5.) No pains were spared to transcribe it on the cloth,

and I can only trust, that it will be found as perfect, as under circumstan-

ces it couldbe made. M.JacqQuer’s plan could not have been applied

with any advantage to either of these two inscriptions, in the first owing

to the undulatory form of the rock, and in the second from the faint-

ness of the character; copies by hand would have occupied immense

time in this peculiar character; and the very imperfect state of the

northern inscription, would have differed in nothing from the cloth. Some

few large and curious tablets occupy the front of a small piece of rock,

near the eastern face of the larger one; there are no other ancient

inscriptions at the foot of Girnar, or in the neighbourhood of Junagarh.

I need not observe, that it became an object of primary interest with

Captaim Lane and myself, to find some clue to the discovery of the

9R2

874 Notes of a journey to Girndr.. [Ocr-.

missing portion of the rock on the eastern side, as the highly impor-

tant 18th edict, containing the names of ProLemy, &c., had principally

suffered from the mutilation, All our inquiries tended to the conclu-

sion, that the rock had been blasted to furnish materials for the neigh-

bouring causeway: to remove any sufficiently extensive part of the

pavement of this, would have been attended with an expense, which I

did not feel myself authorized in incurring without authority, but the

whole of the soil at the base of the rock, particularly on the eastern

side, was turned up to a considerable distance, and as deep as could be

gone. In this way numerous small fragments of the original rock were

found, confirming our surmises, as to the purpose to which the other

portions had been applied* : from these fragments only two had the old,

and one a portion of a letter in the modern character upon them.

For any further information respecting this noted rock and monu-

ment of antiquity, I must refer to my plans, and rough sketches which

accompany these notes ; but I cannot help expressing, at the termination

of my work upon it, how much I owe to the politeness of H. H. the

nawdb, whose hospitality and kindness, during my stay at Jeénagarh,

were unbounded; by his direction, an awning was spread over the stone,

and an Arab guard was furnished me; in short that assistance was af-

forded, without which, it is doubtful if I could have proceeded.

Within the walls of Junagarh, the Uparkét and some excavations

at its base, are the only objects of any interest. The old citadel is

built upon an elevation of the limestone, which appears to cap over the

granite at the base of the hills; and on which the city of Junagarh is

situated. ‘This is quarried in all directions in the eastern, or unoc-

cupied part of the city, and is so soft as to be easily cut with a hatchet.

It hardens however on exposure, and is invariably used as a building

material. The Uparkét is a noble specimen of eastern fortification,

its walls being unusually high, with immense bastions. The materials for

these have been taken from a wide and deep ditch, which has been scarp-

ed all round it. There is only one gateway and narrow entrance from

the westward, guarded by a few sebundees of the nawab, who, as a

matter of form, still keeps the keys of this stronghold. With the

exception of a very handsome musjid, which occupies the highest

part of the interior, the whole is a mass of ruins, overgrown with

a thick jungle of the custard-apple tree: the musjid has suffered much

* We are indebted to H. H. the present naw&b of Junagarh, for the preservation

of the inscriptions from total destruction, as he interfered to prevent the further

mutilation of the stone. The popular belief in the spotis, that the unknown charace

ters refer to immense treasures, buried in the neighbourhood of, or under the rock.

" YURLON 2% wear: Su¢9872 clasosur wR WOW ‘

ays © nese ws + + + : ato BOye ts we

= 0 sam, < nnn - 7 = = ——

—— : { oy ; are } . y/ ra te

fad, oe . : é — _ iy KY aay

_ eta. : ee =—— a aaa mT madara tude TE HUMAN

a Sout oy MAT eu AT uy Mats}

Ze =

st OF Apy PH e Se

. . aa ;

a Jt YOR |

——— 9

a Mt

ifr, *t) aig

id : , be tet ad

pore the ; “cy ily —- e MLL 4

aah glilgas : 2 2, s r EE 7, es : ’ : ;

BN : ’

{

wns |

LZ {

;

irs

! me A

fvegt i

5 { my

J a ”

ee ee

“tal

‘ Puen og Ne es

a eae A

be aa Pmt hy

Ven Pie

TO ME Tat

t ie nies Sa ‘

Ie) a Wh hd a W

vine Ve

eet ee

dye? Ga aen

Dei hy Liege 1 ey,

? Ly y ¢

a Ae Aye iN Dae Myr a |

Ah Teas “A

@ wee ay

J a re ‘ : vi

a ee ae hee

ey. ile . a bias

Weave ' s : wt

‘ie

‘

4 4 5

ast et

hey f

ie i hi

' Uk é

’ f

y Bie ioe

hat

‘A

()

1838. ] Notes of a journey to Girnar. 875

from the earthquake of A. D. 1819, but is stilla very magnificent build-

ing ; its roof affords some fine views: the most splendid is that of the

“Mighty Girnar,” as seen through the opening in the hills, with the

causeway and bridge crossing the ravine in the foreground. In the rear

of the musjid is a very curious piece of ordnance, with an Arabic in-

scription ; its material appears to be a composition something like bell-

metal ; its length is 174 feet ; circumference at the breech 5 feet, this

latter quite flat ; bore capable of carrying a 12lb. ball. The following is

a translation of the inscription on this gun: “ SuLTAN SULEEMAN bin

SULEEM KHAN ordered the manufacture of this gun, in the year of the

H. 937, to the intent, that it should be employed in the destruction of

the infidels of Hind. Maker of the gun, Manomep Bin Humzat of

Misar.” In another part of the fort is a piece of the same description

as the above ; but smaller in size. There are also some curious speci-

mens of: iron guns: so rude is their construction, that firing them /

must have been attended with no little danger to the artillery men :

they are evidently first efforts in the art of casting. The greatest

curiosities in the fort however are two wells, or more correctly, to

designate them according to their construction, a bowree, and a well or |

kooa: the dimensions of these places which I subjoin, will shew the

immense scale on which they are constructed*. The well is square,

and lined with masonry for a few feet from the top. An excavation

has been made at the distance of about one third of its depth, where is a

bathing place and entrance to a gallery, which descends by steps to the

bottom, the light being admitted by large square holes or windows open-

ing into the well. The softness of the stone offers every facility for such

a work, and I observed that the strata here dip at an angle of about

30°, with a strike to the north. Owing to the great elevation of the

interior of the Uparkot, water could not be found but at an immense

depth. The bowree is nearly circular, and occupies the whole of a large

bastion to the eastward. Its interior is lined with solid masonry, and

the descent is by a fine flight of steps ; these, with a portion of the walls,

and the whole of the entrance to the west, are all the remains now

traceable of the Rajput possessors of this place, the last of whom, raja

MunpALtk, descended from a line of princes, who it is stated ruled

here for 19 centuries, gave up the fort and his throne to Maumupb

Bicarrana, H. 877, A. D. 1472+. I was fortunate in discovering a

* Depth of well, 180 feet, 37 feet square. Ditto of Bouree, 96 ditto. Circum-

ference ditto, 74 ditto. Length of descent to ditto, 240 ditto.

+ For a detailed account of the capture of this place, conversion of the réja to the

Muhammadan religion, &c., see the Mirati Iskandari; the following extract from

Pou

876 Notes of a journey to Girndr, [Ocr.

tablet in the wall, in the interior of the fort, which contains an edict by

this raja Munpauik, dated S. 1507, A.D. 1451. ‘It reminded me

much of the noted ones by king Asoka, since it contains an order that

every 11th day shall be considered sacred, coupled with injunctions

against the destruction of animal life.

The excavations, of which there are several at the base of the Uparkot,

are made in the face of the same soft stone, and consist in some of

three or four low apartments ; in others there are as many as six, with

a large or principal one in the centre. These apartments are small, flat-

roofed, and supported by square pillars without ornament; the en-

trances to many are through small and low door-ways, but the greater

number are quite open. These places are said by some to have been

the haunts of a tribe of robbers called Kaphrias, and it is a cu-

rious coincidence, that on inquiry respecting some similar excavations

in a sandstone hill, which I observed near Lukput at the western

extremity of Cutch, I was told exactly the same story. In the neigh-

bourhood of Buddhist records, any thing approaching to a vihara,

becomes of great interest; but I fear the very soft nature of the stone

from which these are excavated, will not allow of their being considered

of any great antiquity. I may however be mistaken in this, and per-

haps my sketches of one or two of these caves* may assist in

determining, how far they are worthy of being considered ancient. In

one was the following inscription, “ SuHarku Aut, the servant of the

servant of God; took up his abode in this place, in the year H. 940.”

I procured some few coins at Junagarh ; one belonging to the

Saraushtra dynasties ; the others, the small, and generally illegible, cop-

that work, which I procured at Junagarh, is a description of the Giraar and Uparkot ;

this latter is the ancient Junagarh, the modern city was styled Mustafabad ; but the

whole is now only known by the ancient title.—‘‘The Girnar on three sides is en-

compassed by hills, those on the northern side are the nearest, those to the south

the most distant. The extent of these hills from N.to S. is 12 kos, the whole

covered with thick jungle, in which are many caverns inhabited by birds and beasts,

and a race of infidels called Khants: these castes when pursued by troops flee to the

fastnesses of the jungle. There are numerous extraordinary trees growing here

whose names are unknown, but besides these are many fruit trees, as the jambu,

tamarind, mango, kirnee, and awleh. From the foot of the hill of G@irnds towards

the west, at the distance of three or four bow shots, is a rocky eminence, on which

is built the fort of Junagarh, whose walls are very strong ; there are two wells and

two bouries : the former are known by the names of Sri and Chiri, The king of

this place was raja MUNDALIK, mentioned in Indian histories, whose family ruled

here for 19 centuries. ‘

* The sketches sent by Lt. PosTans appear to establish his theory, that the caves

were heretofore viharas of a Buddhist monastical establishment: but they exhibit

nothing curious or unusual, being similar in every respect to those found at Dhauls

in Katak, and the number of other plates of this article compels us to omit them.

1838. ] Notes of a journey to Girndr. 877

per pice, known in Cutch, where they are very common, as the Gudha

ka pysa ; the fable connected with them is evidently as common in Kat-

tywar, as in the former place, and with many other points of tradi-

tionary similitude, may I think be admitted in proof of the connection

between the Rajput tribes of both provinces.

All my researches tending to the conviction, that, beyond what I have

detailed, Junagarh could boast of no antiquities within its walls, any

further description of it as a modern Muhammadan city, wou'd be

superfluous. I shall therefore proceed to the summit of Girnar,

the distance of which from the city gates, is calculated by the natives

at seven kos (about 10 miles)*. The road from the noted rock to the

~ Damudar Kind, and temples before mentioned, is over the causeway, on

the edge of the nullah, or mountain torrent, which is crossed by a very

neat and substantial bridge. This nullah runs directly west from the

foot of the Girnar, to the eastern gate of Junagarh, where it branches

off, following the walls of the city ina northerly direction. To within

a short distance of the city, its bed is a succession of immense

masses of granite, over which I was told, a torrent, fed by smaller

streams from the hills, rushes with great impetuosity during the rainy

season. There is no other nullah or river at the foot of the Gurnar,

in this direction. :

A few days previous to my quitting Junagarh, I received, amongst

other interesting papers from Mr. PrinseEp, one which referred to the

inscription on the eastern side of the rock, in which mention is made

“of the Paleshint river, with a bridge at the foot of the hill of Girwna-

gar, thrice destroyed by inundations, and repaired with wood and stone,

400 cubits long and 75 wide, &c.”” To have discovered the slightest

remains of this bridge, would have been highly gratifying, and I spared

no exertion to that end. ‘That the water-course, or large nullah

which I have described, is the Paleshini “ river’ alluded to, I feel con-

vinced, from the fact of its being the only channel for the mountain

torrents in this direction. Whilst its “ inundations” which thrice

destroyed the former bridge, agree with the present violence of these tor-

rents. The title of “river” thus given to a large nullah, not more than

50 yards in width at its greatest extent, must be considered as an allow-

able exaggeration, probably to enhance the magnitude of the work of

throwing a bridge across it. Again, the present must always have

been the high road, as it is the only accessible one to Girnar on the

* Two kos from the city gate to the foot of the mountain, and thence five kos

tothe summit; this latter it will be seen from the measurement given, is an

absurd exaggeration.

878 Notes of a journey to Girndr. [Oct.

western side. Of this the position of the rock with its inscriptions, in-

tended as they must have been, to attract attention in the vicinity of

a great thoroughfare, is sufficient proof ; and hence the former necessity,

as now, of a bridge, to enable travellers to Girnar to cross the ravine,

or “ Paleshini river.” In the absence of even the slightest remains,

(so far as I could trace,) of the ancient bridge, the only difficulty

in determining its site, is to be found in the measurement given

(400 cubits long) ; but I think that even this difficulty may be explain-

ed away, without departing far from local evidence. A bridge to have

been of any use on the road to Girnar, could only have been erected

on, or near the site of the present one, as it is the narrowest part of

the valley, and must have stretched the whole breadth of the ravine ;

which must be crossed at this precise spot. The greatest distance between

the two hills is here only 120 feet, whilst the length of the bridge,

according to the measurement in the inscription, calculating the cubit

at 19 inches, would be 633 feet—a difference too great to allow of

the standard of the cubit in those days being altered to adapt itself

to it. But the word “bridge” has, I doubt not, in the inscription,

been applied not only tothe masonry, &c., spanning the ravine, but also

to some portion of the causeway or approach to the same. This I

think more than probable, for although the present causeway, actu-

ally crosses the nullah in a ‘bridge at one spot only, yet for its whole

length, it is necessarily so immediately on the edge of the ravine, and

indeed in some places may be said so much to overhang it that the

word “ bridge” would probably be applied by the natives, to a greater

portion, than that actually connecting the opposite banks of the ravine, at

the single point where such connection could be of any use to travel-

lers to Girnar. Unless the “ Paleshint Nuddee” is to be looked for in

another direction altogether, there is no other way than the above, of

accounting for the dimensions of the bridge ; but as there happens to

be only this approach to Girnar from the westward, and as its position

is immediately at the foot of the hill—coupled with the position of the

rock and inscriptions—there can be no doubt that it is the place referred

to. The only remaining pathway to Girnar through the jungle from

the southward, has no river, torrent, or corresponding feature about it*,

* This is an accessible but unfrequented pathway, considered dangerous by the

natives, from the fear of wild beasts, (lions abound in these hills,) and the Khants ;

this tribe of freebooters still infest the jungles around Junagarh, as described by the

author of the MiratiIskandari. Even the high and well frequented road from the

westward, is not considered safe from these depredators, and all the visitors to

Girnar who can afford it, hire Arab and Mekrani guards to escort them to the

temples. Captain LANG and myself were fired on by a party of these outlaws in

passing through the jungle on the eastern side, and at the foot of the Girnar.

Dredge arc paar! gf Cases tangy

weg tb lee Aree

seo

Fhriliors of Slat

io]

—

mt]

ea}

—

Deariome sec

Eng”

By Lies? Portars Bomb

A Lading Pace

1838. ] Notes of a journey to Girndr. 879

I could trace nothing approaching “ Paleshini’ in the names by which

the ravine is at present known ; these are the Sirsthee, Tribenee, and

Sonarekha,—this latter, having some allusion to gold being found in

its bed, is curious.

Although I failed to discover the slightest trace of the ancient bridge,

the remains of an old causeway are to be seen near the present one,

crossing the bed of the ravine in a diagonal direction. It is only

traceable for a few yards, but appears to have been connected with

some former extensive work of the kind, as it is again to be seen for a

short extent beyond the modern causeway towards Junagarh. From the

Damodar Kund and temples the Girndr road winds through thick

jungle, the ascent commencing at the foot of the western spur or

shoulder*. Here it is necessary to quit the horse, and take to a rude,

but very convenient conveyance for the purpose ; consisting of a small

square seat, suspended from two short poles and carried by four men.

After a winding and rugged ascent of about a mile, the shoulder termi-

nates at the foot of the scarp, where is a small dharamsdla and

halting-place. Up to this point, the Giurndr is connected with the

lower range, and its sides, together with the gorges and the valleys

of the hills beneath, are richly clothed with a most luxuriant jungle,

diversified only with the black rocks, which occasionally appear through

the trees and vegetation. But for the rest of the ascent, the sacred

mount rises an immense, bare, and isolated granite rock, presenting all

the gigantic masses peculiar to that formation. The whole face of the

rock is quite black, with occasional white streaks, probably of felspar.

The sides to the north and south are nearly perpendicular scarps ; on

the extreme point of the northern side is an immense pillar or boulder,

which seems as it were poised on its pinnacle, requiring only a slight

force to dislodge it. This pillar is sometimes the scene of self-

sacrifice, and is hence called the Bewru Jhap or leap of death+. The

noted Jain temples occupy a small ledge or table land surmounting

the scarp, and the wall of a kind of fort, which is erected round them,

is immediately on the edge of the rock. As seen from below, their

apparently very diminutive size has a curious effect. From the dha-

* The whole distance from the commencement of the ascent to the summit of

the Girndr, I found to be 4691 yards, or two miles, five furlongs, and 71 yards.

Its perpendicular height above the level of the sea, is said to be 2500 feet; but

this, I had not the means of determining.

+ The belief appears to be, that the victim will secure to himself the rank of

raja in the next stage of his existence. The immense number of eagles which

sail round this pillar and the scarp, add much to its apparent height. A poor

wretch had sacrificed himself only a few days before our arrival,

880 Notes of a journey to Girnar. fOcr.

ramsdla just mentioned, to the temples, the ascent winds up the face

of the rock, every trifling ledge or irregularity in the surface of which

has been most ingeniously turned to account, in the formation of a

pathway generally about five feet wide, with steps of masonry: these

latter are said to have been the gift of a rich mahajun from Boondee in

Rajputina. This part of the journey is calculated to try the nerves of the

traveller, bordering, as the pathway does, upon a perpendicular descent

of many hundred feet: a false step might be fatal ; and it is quite extra-

ordinary to observe the ease and alacrity, with which the bearers turn

the sharp corners and difficult passages in this narrow and dangerous

ascent. In descending, they carry the dooley at a rapid pace; but

constant practice has made the road so familiar to these poor people,

that their dexterity banishes all idea of danger. To attempt any de-

scription in detail of the lavish richness in the style and architecture of

the Girndr temples, would be beyond my limits. Commanding, as

the sect does by whom they are erected and kept up, much of the

wealth of India, they have evidently spared none, to make these

monuments of their superstition of surpassing magnificence. The

walls of the fort, to which Ihave alluded, occupy the whole ledge sur-

mounting the scarp, and within it are eight temples, a dharamsdla,

and two tanks*. Of the former, the largest and most gorgeous, though

by no means the most ancient, is sacred to NEEMNATH, whilst the

others are erected in honor of the favourite saint PARISNATHJI*,. The

figures of the saints, which are very numerous, are generally small, but

there is one colossal image of RixHaBDEoT. There are many

inscriptions on various parts of the temples, recording the repairs and

additions made to them from time to time by the mahajuns. The

original material in all is granite, but the expense of working it being”

too great, the repairst are now carried on with the stone brought

from below, and quarried in the eastern part of the city of Junagarh.

There are three ancient temples, whose peculiar form, with something ap-

proaching toa Dahgop occupying the whole space in their centre, would

lead to the conclusion that they are of Buddhist origin. The dates

* The largest of these was the gift of king KuMAR PaL, 8th of the Choluk

Wunkshi tribe who ruled at Anhilwarrah Pattan.

tT Height from the gadee, on which this figure is sitting, to the top of the head

13 feet; length of foot 3 feet. Material, granite coated with chunam.

+ Many of these temples have been much mutilated, and one which is now re-

building, was completely thrown down by ALLAH UD DEEN, styled Khoonie (or the

blocdy), who is said to have ravaged Guzerat like MauMv’D of old. The time

of this Muhammadan conqueror is obscure, but at Girndr they say about 200 years

ago, I think the temples at Abd suffered from the same person.

1838. ] Notes of a journey to Girnar. 881

of these, with copies of inscriptions upon them, as well as the traditions

respecting Girndr, and the other noted Jain sanctuaries at Sitrunjih

or Pallitana, have been promised me by a jattee, whom I had the good

fortune to meet at Junagarh*, and will, when procured, form the subject

of a separate paper. The temples at Girndr are under the care of

Charuns, who spare no trouble to shew strangers all the curiosities of

the place. The month Phahgun (February and March) is the period

of the great annual jatirah at Girndr, when crowds of mahajuns from

all parts of western and central India assemble to visit these shrinest+.

From the temples, to the summit of the mount, the ascent is gradual

and easy, the steps being continued the whole way. A thin layer of

soil upon the surface of the rock, affords sufficient nourishment to the

Korumder bush and wild fig ; the former grows with great luxuriancet.

Several small and detached temples occupy sites to the right and left

of the pathway ; but the only spot of any note, before reaching the sum-

mit, is the Ghat Makh, aspring of beautifully clear water, which issues,

as the name implies, from the mouth of the sacred animal: some small

shrines are built near it, and it is believed to possess the property of

* There is a small establishment of these men at Junagarh belonging to the

Girnér temples, and from the chapras much curious and interesting matter is often

to be gained; they are the only annalists in this part of India, and it is evident from

the perfect coincidence in names and dates, that those Muhammadan historians who

have written on Guzerat, were indebted to the Jain priests and their books (gene-

rally in the Basha), for all the information they possess respecting Anhilwarra

Patian and similar places. Their annals extend as far back as Pattiliputta, and

Chandagutto, Bindusaro, and Asoko are familiar names ; but here, their chronology

fails them, and beyond the mere names and order of succession they can give no

information. In connection with AsokaA’s name, I was happy to have it in my

power to make my friend the jattee (HASTI W13JaH) some return for the assistance

he afforded me whilst at Girndr, by enlightening him on the subject of the charac-

ter on the noted rock, which he confessed had long excited his curiosity. I also gave

him one of Mr. PRINSEP’s Sanskrit alphabets ; with the assistance of this, and his

knowledge of the language, he will be enabled to decipher the edicts of aking, whose

name figures in his chapras.

+ Although this is the periodical jattrah, Girndr is always well attended, parti-

cularly by jogies, who take it on their return from Dwarka. The liberal Sudawurts

which are established here, act as no little incentive to these people, and every na-

tural cave or shelter afforded by the rocks in various parts of the summit, is occu-

pied by one or more of the Sunyasi tribe. They come well provided with Sanks

from Sankudar (island of Bate near Dwarka) and at sun-set the whole hill is made

to resound to their shrill sounds.

t The soil and climate of the Girndr and neighbouring hills, appear particularly

congenial to the growth of the mango. On the eastern side of the former, two

extensive ledges in the side of the mount, are entirely occupied by thickets of this

tree, and are known as the Sasha Wun, 1000, and Lacka Wun, 100,000—referring

to the number of trees in each. The former is said to have been the scene of a

tupusya by NEEMNA’TH, who was also attended by 1000 devotees.

as2Z

882 Notes of a journey to Girnar. (Ocr.

purifying from sin. The highest point of the Girndr* is occupied by an

ancient temple to Mata, or, as it is styled, Ambavee Mata; originally

Jain, but at present used by the Hindus, and the only one they possess

upon the Girndr. From this temple towards the south, the road and

steps lead to a slight descent, from which a view is obtained of two

extraordinary-shaped forks, or peaks of bare granite, which rise from

considerable and detached bases to an immense height, gradually re-

ceding to points at their summits ; they are separated from the Girnd1

by adeep ravine, and the farthest and loftiest is surmounted by a small

building, and known as the Girt Dutatri. As seen from this side,

these pinnacles appear perfectly inaccessible; but the Gura Dutatri is

gained by a continuation of the steps, and pilgrims from all parts of

India traverse this dangerous and often fatal pathway, daily+.

Without enumerating the many small shrines and sacred spots

on the summit of the Girnar, it will be sufficient to observe, that the

whole of this extraordinary mount, is invested with peculiar sanctity,

the origin of which would seem to be of high antiquity. That the

present system of worship is a graft of the ancient Buddhist faith

which obtained here, there can be no doubt. The Edicts of Pyapasr

testify abundantly that the hill of “ Germmagar” and its neighbourhood,

was originally a stronghold of the monotheists, whose form of worship

has now degenerated into the modern system of Jainism.

The neighbourhood of Junagarh has also its share of Muhammadan

sanctity. A shrine called the Dutar, sacred to the memory of a noted

saint, (JUMAL SHa‘H,) crowns the summit of a hill to the southward,

and is as highly venerated as any in Guzerat. This spot is also said to

have been the scene of some extraordinary austerities performed by

this peer, who lived about 100 years ago. The stories connected

with JUMAL SHAH are vague and contradictory ; by some he is said to

have been buried at Junagarh ; by others Zattah in Sindh, is said to

claim the honor of his remains. But the veneration paid to his me-

mory is extraordinary. At the foot of the hill various lepers and other

persons afflicted with loathsome diseases, have taken up their residence,

and occupy themselves in calling upon the saint’s name to release

them from their afflictions, and restore them to their families; and I

haveseen the Cutch boatmen make their offerings to this shrine, as they

pass in view of the Junagarh hills along the western coast of Kat-

tywar.

* The greatest breadth of the table land at the summit of the Girndr is only

15 yards.

+ One man lost his life, by falling from the steps leading to this pinnacle,

whilst we were on the Girndr.

$e .

oe eee re

z =, ——

S++ «= — <©

1838.] | Note on Somnath. 883

Note on Somnath.

History has given to the idol and temple of Somndth a celebrity that

none other of the places of Hindu worship can boast. The romantic

account of its destruction given by FerisuTa, is the circumstance by

which to this day Maumup GHAZNAVI'Ss career of victory and blood-

shed is most remembered—so much so that even MI has condescend-

ed to borrow from that historian, the picturesque story of the image

yielding to successive blows of- the warrior king’s battle-axe, till his

zeal was repaid by the bursting of the idol’s belly, and the discovery

of the largest and most valuable jewels concealed within its cavity.

The Rozut oos-sufa, a history of higher antiquity* and better autho-

rity than FerisHTa, gives an account of Maumup’s expedition, which

corresponds in the main particulars with that of FertsuTa, but omits

this breaking of the image ; nevertheless, as FarisHTa says the pieces

were to be seen in his day at Ghaznavi, there can be no doubt the

image was broken, and carried away as a trophy of the conquest.

The account of the idol and temple given by Frrisuta is evidently

borrowed from the Rozut oos-sufa, of which the citation of SHerky

FuRgED OOD DEEN’Ss couplet in explanation of the name Somndth, is un-

deniable evidence. As this work may not be in every body’s hands, it

may be useful to insert an extract rendered into English, for comparison

with the account of the same events which will be found in the

first volume of Colonel Brices’s FertsutTa. The place beseiged by

Maumup GHAZNAVI must have been the city of Patan, the situa-

tion of which on the sea side, as described by Lieut. PosTAns, exactly

corresponds with the description in both histories, though the name of

the town was lost in the greater celebrity of the idol and its temple.

“ Somndth is the name for an idol which, according to the Hindus,

was lord of all idols) But SHe1kH FuREED oop DEEN UTar, the poet,

says, Somndth is the name of a place, and Lat the name of the idol, for

he has the following couplet :

wrlivogay sabi] Dgoas” iil — wo Jd99 eos as ony w! IAS,

“‘ Historians however agree that Somndth was an idol in a temple

situated on the seaside, which idol the Hindus worshipped, especially at

times of eclipse. More than a lakh of people used to come to it on nights

when the moon was under eclipse: and they believed too, that the

souls of the deceased came to Somndth, on first leaving the bodies

they had occupied, and were there assigned to fresh bodies. They

also believed that the sea worshipped Sommndth, and the rise and fall

* The Rozut oos-sufa was compiled by order of AMEER ULEE SHEER, between

the Hijira years 900 and 902, A D. 1444 and 1496.

884 Note on Somndth. [Ocr.

of the tides was considered to be proof of this. From the most distant

parts of India pilgrims used to come to worship at this shrine:

10,000 villages were assigned for its support, and there were so many

. jewels belonging to it, as no king had ever one-tenth part of in his

treasury. Two thousand Brahmins served the idol, and a golden

chain of 200 muns supported a bell-plate, which being struck at

stated times called the people to worship ; 500 shavers, 500 dancing-

girls, and 300 musicians were on the idol’s establishment, and received

support from the endowment and from the gifts of pilgrims. The Ganges

is a river to the east of Dehlee near Kanouj, which the Hindus be-

lieve to flow from heaven, and into which they throw the ashes of the

burned dead, conceiving that by so doing the sins of their lives are

washed away. Brahmins, drowning themselves in this stream, believe

that they secure eternal beatitude. Distant as the river is from

Somndth, still there were pilgrims employed in continually bringing its

water thither, so that the idol might be regularly washed with it.

“In Hejira 416 Manumup Guaznavi invaded India and destroyed

all the idols; whereupon the Hindus said, that the idol Somndth had

in its anger caused their destruction, otherwise the destroyer would

have perished. Maumup hearing of this, resolved to proceed against

Somndth itself, thinking that, when that most sacred image should be

destroyed, the Hindus would more readily turn to Islam.

“On the 10th Shaban 416, (12th Oct. 1025,) the king moved

with 30,000 mounted warriors, lightly equipped, to Multan, where he

arrived in the middle of Ramzan, (Nov. 1025.) There, finding that

between him and Somndth lay a wide desert. without water or forage, he

assigned to each trooper two camels, and besides loaded 20,000 camels

with supplies and water. Having thus passed the desert, he came upon

a country full of strong forts, (Ajmeer,) the holders of which mostly

submitted ; whereupon the king ordered the men to be put to death,

and the women and children to be made captives, and he destroyed

all the idols. Thence advancing, he came to Bhuwara (in FERISHTA

Nihurwala), which was deserted by its chief and garrison, and Mau-

mup establishing a depdét there, continued his march, destroying all the

idols and temples as before, till he came to the neighbourhood of

Somndth, in the month of Zeekdad, (January, 1026.) There he found

a strong fort on the sea side, so situated that the waves washed to the

top of the battlements. The Hindus crowded the ramparts, expecting to

see the Moosulman army destroyed by the idol god for its presumption.

The next day the army approached the walls, and commenced the

assault with such vigour, as the Hindus had never before seen. The

1838. ] Note on Somnath. 885

walls were soon cleared by the archers, and ladders being planted, the

warriors mounted with the cry of ‘ Artan AxBar.’ The Hindus

thereupon turned on the assailants and fought desperately, some fight-

ing, while others went to the idol, and, prostrating themselves, prayed

for victory. After fighting all day, the besiegers retired to their camp ;

but next morning they renewed the assault, and cutting off the heads

of all who opposed them, penetrated to the temple of Somndth. There

the Hindus alternately prostrating themselves and renewing the battle,

maintained themselves till night. Many of them were slain, and many

attempted by embarking in vessels to effect their escape by sea; but

Maumop, embarking part of his army, pursued them, and made great

slaughter amongst the fugitives, thus completing his victory. The

temple of Somndth was supported by fifty-six pillars ornamented with

rubies, emeralds, and other precious stones ; each of these pillars bore

the name of a different king of India as its embellisher. Fifty thousand

infidels, and more, were slain round this temple, which was vast in

dimensions, &c, &c.” The history then proceeds with the arrangements

after the conquest.

Lieutenant PosTAns, in his very interesting account of the present

condition of this temple, seems to be of opinion, that he saw it as it was

left by Manmup GuHaznavi after his conquest in 416 Hejira or

1025-26 A.D. ‘This, however, is not the case. Although the great

image was broken and carried away, and perhaps all the carved images

about the temple were industriously decollated or otherwise mutilated,

still as Maumup left a Hindu prince of sacred character, called in

the Persian histories DaBisHLEEN, probably DEVEE SINGH, as his

vicegerent at Somndth, it is most probable that the temple was promptly,

if not effectually, restored, for the sake of the revenue to be derived

from its pilgrim tax. The poet Sani, who lived 200 years after

Maumub, gives in his Bostan an amusing tale of his own adventures

at Somndth ; it commences,

uoliro wrnslole 53 > EO y° oo wolioyw ys csi! ade ip

“I saw an idol of ivory at Somndth, jewelled like the idol Mundt

in the days of superstition and ignorance,” &c. The story is illustrative

of the state of the temple, and of manners, and may therefore be told

with advantage. Sani, wondering at the folly of live people paying

their adoration to a material without sense or motion, ventures to express

his sentiments to an attendant priest, with whom he has some acquain-

tance. The priest turns upon him in rage, and excites a commotion,

which endangers Sap1’s life; whereupon he throws himself upon the

886 Note on Somndth. [Ocr.

mercy of the chief priest, stating that, although he had ventured to

express a doubt, it was merely because he desired conviction. The

priest tells him he is a man of sense and judgment, and shall be con-

vinced that this idol is superior to all others, and deserving of adoration.

If he will abide in worship all night, he promises him to see the idol

raise its arm in the morning in adoration. Sap1 consents, and gives an

amusing account of the inconvenience he experienced from the pressure

of the unwashed, unsavory crowd. Just before sunrise, the image, at

the sounding of a bell, raises its arm, to the delight of the worshipping

thousands. Savi assures the chief priest of his perfect convicton, flat-

ters him and obtains his intimacy, till, finding an opportunity when the

temple is empty, he gets behind the image, and there discovers a servitor

concealed, with the rope in his hand for raising the idol’s arm. The man

runs, and Savi follows, trips him up and throws him into a well:

then, to make quite sure, he drops heavy stones upon him, feeling

that his own life would assuredly be sacrificed, if his discovery were

known, and quaintly remarking Gude ok hie By 3 aS * Dead

men tell no more tales.” He then hurries away from Somnath, and

returns to Persia through Hindustan, by a route of great danger

and difficulty, the troubles of which he says he shall remember to his

dying day.

Such is the story, and it shows the temple to have been restored, as

a place of Hindu worship, after its destruction by ManMmup, and to

have remajned as such, with something like its former renown, for

200 years after that conquest. It is evident, however, from its present

appearance, that it has since yielded to other spoilers, and has even been

converted at one time into a musjid. The minarets on each side of the

principal entrance, are evidently Muhammadan, and the interior arches

observable in the sketch No. LI. are also no part of the original Hin-

du fabric ; but must have been erected at a much later date, to support

the magnificent roof described by Lieut. PostTans, in lieu of the fifty-

six pillars adorned by fifty-six rajas, which were stripped, if not broken,

by the destroyer of the 11th century.

The pundits say, that there is nothing in the vedas, puranas and

other brahmanical text-books to illustrate the origin and history of the

Somndth temple. Its situation on the shore of the Indian ocean, and the

corresponding temple of the sun in Katak, known as the Black Pagoda,

and situated on a like promontory washed by the waves of the eastern

sea in the Bay of Bengal, will not fail to strike the reader. And Aso-

KA’s selection of rocks on the high road to each, for the promulgation

of his edicts, would seem to indicate, that both enjoyed in his day a cor-

1838.] Note by Mr. Kittoe. 887

responding celebrity ; and that, through the resort of pilgrims, the ap-

proaches to them afforded the surest means of causing his doctrines

and injunctions to be universally known.

In this number, we confine our observations to the Somndth temple.

The more valuable relics of Girndr must be reserved for more careful

examination. Lieut. PosTans’ report and sketches of the rocks, and,

of the valley of Junagarh, will shew precisely the site and outward

appearance of the natural tablets, upon which the edicts of Asoxa

have been so carefully and so durably engraved. With that we must

at present be satisfied. The examination of the facsimiles, and their

comparison with the previous readings and printed version of this extra-

ordinary inscription, will be the work of time: and unfortunately the

drawings and facsimiles of Lieut. Posrans reached Calcutta the very

day after the discoverer of the key for decyphering this ancient charac-

ter had taken his departure, in a state of health that prevented his giving

elose attention to any of his favorite pursuits. He had prepared every

thing before his sickness, for the final comparison which was to be

made on their expected arrival. He had already corrected the version,

printed in preceding Numbers of this Journal so as to have completed,

almost to his perfect satisfaction, the entire restoration and decypher-

ing of this valuable relic of 20 centuries. It remained only to refer

to the facsimiles for a few doubtful letters and passages; this la-

bour, which to him would have been the work, only of a few hours, will

impose upon any other who undertakes it, the task of mastering the

character and language of the inscription, and of remaking the colla-

tions ab initio. |The facsimiles are in the museum of the Asiatic So-

ciety, and the learned and the curious are invited to their examination.

Since the above note was written Mr. Kirroz, who has kindly

lithographed the sketches of Somnath for the Journal, has favored us

with the following note on its architecture.

Nore by Mr. KittTos on the Architecture of the temple of Somnath,

as exhibited in plates XL. and XLI.

Much pains do not appear to have been bestowed by the “ Faithful”

(who converted the temple of Somnath into a musyjid), to obliterate

what still remained of its idolatrous features. The minarets and

domes of the exterior, and the vousoir arches of the interior supporting

them, seem to be the only parts of Moorish origin; the pillars now

occupying the interior of the fabric, and supporting the flat portions of

the roof, most probably originally adorned the porches, or “Subhas” and

colonnades, which, even in the present day, characterise some of the

temples of Orissa and lower down the coast.

888 Population and Mortality in Calcutta. [Ocr.

That part of the fabric, represented in plate L. as covered by domes

and flat roofing, is most probably the multangular base of a once

gigantic conical tower, like those of Kanaruc, Jugunnath, Bhobanes-

wur, and of many others in different parts of the continent of India.

That shape was common to all Brahminical edifices, and is still

adhered to in the present day.

The most curious feature is the perfectly Egyptian doorway, built

within the original sculptured lintels apparent in the plate; this was

probably constructed when the temple was restored, after its destruction

by Manmup GHAZNAVI.

Plate LI. seems to represent the interior of an octagonal apartment

beneath the principal dome, which appears to have been originally sup-

ported on eight pillars and architraves taken from different parts of the

temple; these being subsequently found too weak to support its weight,

arches appear to have been turned and built in beneath : the remainder

of the roof, which seems to be supported by pillars of various shapes with

brackets and plain architraves, the style of which is precisely the same

as of those in the old mosques at Jouwnpiir, likewise constructed with

the fragments of demolished temples. Many of the pillars there are

elaborately sculptured; others again are perfectly plain, as represent-

ed in the plate before us for Somnéth; but the original pillars of

Maumup GuHaznavi's time may have been cased with gilt copper

and jewels, for Colonel MackeEnzieE in his papers, describes several

columns thus adorned in the Carnatic.

The admixture of Moorish and Hindu sculpture and architecture,

resulting from this practice of converting temples into mosques in the

manner above described, gave rise to a style, which might well be termed

* Indo-musjidy,” for the proportions are as three of the former to one

of the latter.

VI.—Population and Mortality in Calcutta.

We are indebted to the same anonymous contributor, who furnished

Capt. HerserT with the statement of protestant deaths, published in the

Gleanings, vol. III. p. 88, for the enlarged table which we now present,

and which, although it must necessarily be uncertain as a foundation for

estimating the mortality of different classes, still, until we have a regu~

lar municipal record of the inhabitants of all conditions, classed by age,

these results may be looked upon as a tolerable approximation to the truth.

We will leave the compiler to make his own remarks on the Mortality

table. The second table, or that of the population, appears to have been

taken through the thanahs; and if the Khdneh shumdri system be re-

peated every five years or so, we should think that the results compared

would afford a good average.

3 SLITt $s Or £S1 Zz €ST $9Z te Ester d

edi

@ c 6 02 0Z rat 02 0% or 0%

188c¢ vE 661 SIE | %B | OLOE | 88zs 043 S90¢

*OfSE Ur IssZ SISt eeaeeeoseoe °° ‘suBUTNsn yA

g99E9 strc ests? ‘soopurEy ¢ €I ST 0 tol Sgr 9% Lat

*GSst ur ZOrs 62SI eevee coees ** ‘SuRUTNSN

3 E489 = "oor et ees “soopulEy ¥ 9T L Tp Sil. | ees st £2

3 "EESI ur LOOEL O06L ee es esos es ‘suemrnsnyt

= COUT’ ** sees" Ssoopulyy ? LT 91 re 661 L&3 ge 182

2 s¢ esi ur £6CZI G8&s ee ee ce 84 oe ‘suvUlpnsn yl

= SErst* csceceees* Ssoopulzy ¢ vl £3 G 406 886 OF BOE

~ 66Z8 *e"rersssss* Ss00puly if 9t Lt T IZT 69% S&B LIZ

3 8 61 LI ¢ ZL | 98% 62 98I

& Z oh | +I I Sel 98% 9% b2S

S *saeak ¢ J0j SyjBOG aATye . ot cl | € | 9Ft | 60% 1% +8

$ Wve PAneN ¢ at cr | 3 |ozt | ose 6I 99z

3 ¥ 91 St “S° PET" 7. S0E It $53

= ‘ LI 61 6 Cel 60€ “OZST | SLZ

~ % OL cL if tST G8z |uesoq punois | L6z

~ 4 if Le > Sst 23g |sutAing Yo}09S} 8Lz

3 . id Or ie 9SI LLZ OLE

s : & 91 "* | or | $62 ES

Ss : € of se “IC ORT f BES 98%

mS : T LI ** Kost “.28¢ Sz

3s : € €G SSI $8Z CLZ

Sy : € 0Z z 6ST [lz ZLZ

g, : € Or ¥ 691 ele 91%

4 soy > Q Q a

fap 5 5 cr N=.

ee | es | g | 3 (Ss8i2 Es

*SOATIENT as a 3g mR 152 515% S| ‘sperng yuuysojo1g

Q 5 D> . ee Che:

ra S B 5 oo .

CO we o n : oe no

n r 5 =o os

8} t 4 (fhe |

‘sumah g hyuo uoynjndog aayuyy ay2 40f ng ‘sunak gg wof 0jynI}n7 Us s

assnyo 770 Guoun hjy2.10 jy

‘a3visay

*sivaxX

890 Population and Mortality in Calcutta. [Ocr.

Statement of the average rate of Mortality per cent. among the different classes

of inhabitants in Calcutta per census and Table of mortality.

No. of Average (Average

Denominations. Inhabi-|Total.| mortality; mortality

tants. p. annum.| per cent.

Waplishge ses. coke Gy ete we’ 3138

Eurasians;. 2. «sa. see ie 4746

——| 7884) 277 3% pr.ct.| 1 in 28

Portuguese, ...ccrcccrvccess 3181

Prench, ..!:. i. mitsain eae nin 'ehel w.0 160

——| 3341} 417 124 lin 8

Western Muhammadans, ....| 13,677

Bengal Muhammadans,...... 45,067

DEO SUIS ytiediwi sei voininse ristesiebors 527

Arabs, <<cis Siclsis eile wists aiemis 351

-|—————~— |59,622) 1607 23 1 in 36

Western Hindus, ........¢04-| 17,333

Bengal Hindus, .....-esese- 120,318

Mugs . ..< sie Se ee ee ee 683

Low Castes, ces. ceserces vs} 19,084

157418] 9558 613 1 in 16

Armenians, -% cil. te spe tor ome oe 636 255 4a, 1 in 25

Native Christians, .......... 49 34 63 lin 14

Chinese,......ccccccovccvses 362

TERNS solsbita srenpjauatahainsn,aieialinie if lee 307

IPAESEESS: oh sic cote terieatelele ei 40

Madrassees, ......6. ae ratevapes 55

The great difference in mortality between the Hindus* and Musul-

mans is striking, while the difference to be observed between the Por-

tuguese, as compared with the English and the Eurasians, is equally so.

Here is much room for speculation, and it cannot be said that as yet

we have as good means of getting correct information upon this subject

as they possess in Europe: nevertheless, we may approach as near as

we can to the point we wish to ascertain, and we may hope to improve

in such statistical records.

The Portuguese, among whom so great a mortality is shewn, area

suffering race very subject to the catalogue of complaints enumerated

in these papers; while the English and Eurasians are far more prosper-

ous in life, and enjoy comforts and happiness in a very high degree,

as compared with the former section of society. The mortality of the

English and Eurasians 34 per cent. per annum, while that of the Portu-

guese being 124 per cent. is very great. In 1830 I ascertained, and

published, in the Gleanings of Science the burials in Calcutta of Protes-

tant Christians from the year 1820. To shew at that time, that

although the European population must have greatly increased, yet, that

the deaths and burials had not encreased, and now that the same

population is acknowledged to have increased very materially indeed,

yet we see upon referring to the first column of one of the tables, giving

the Protestant burials, for the last 20 years, no increase of deaths.

The years 1833-4, the two years following the sea inundations, shew the

greatest mortality of late years; while among the native population

those two years, shew an extraordinary mortality. The two last years

shew in respect of both European and Native population that healthiness

* The difference of Mortality amongst the Muhammadans and Hindus may be ac-

counted for by the circumstance that the Hindus of Calcutta consisting of families

include a much larger proportion of Infant life. The same circumstance will ex-

plain the great difference between the average Mortality amongst the Portuguese

and the Europeans of Calcuttau.—Eb.

1858.] Population and Mortality in Calcutia.,

891

is restored. The mortality among the other columns of society, the

Catholic, Greek, Armenian, Hindu Armenian, and Native Christian,

are for the last 20 years, and I believe them to be nearly correct.

Chinese and the Jews keep no account of their burials ; I of course could

not include them, and they form a minute portion of the population of

Census of the population in the suburbs of Calcutta.

this city.

: = 44 Sr) 2 me

| 0) = 2 i=) QR

‘SyUBITqeYyOT [eIOL ; oe g = ce Q

fin

cep) — 2) é ae)

"UdIPTIYD UBIPUT ysey | Be ss O b=:

inp) a a a6 ()

ds (I Aik Sols Gad (Ge AC Be a pnd iam it

= S = ry >

"uaIp[iyo ueadoing 2 ne m

‘sy[npe uvodoing ne oe = ~ 9

oo 28 30

ae i tet ey ae ee

"slasuassed 10 S1aSpoT BAIGVN > ae ba = ~

e m2) 2) ~ =

= =>) Q 1 (08)

“9dIAAVS UI SUBLUTDSN JO ‘ON < = = ba +

4) = 49) =

Q © 49 veal

"UdIPIyD uRUI[NSN ° ied = oe ae

= é = = 28

iON 1 RE By we

‘s}[npe UBWI[NSN JUSpIsay = ~ a A >

oS eg write tiles, 3

=) = i=) i=) =2)

; S oO o R 2)

*9OIAIOS UL ENPUIFT JO ‘ON z = = = ah

{ * oD

iM =) oO) i>) a

Solnhe LE igh abe

‘UdIP[IyD NPUTFT = * "on ~ A

° ° oO Ww ao

R 4 i

’ on - i~

Bet ecu ten at

‘sy[npe npulT wuepIsey | oo FS S §¢ &

on — ey Q

LUO SREAORES eit: La aeee e a

° ° 19,2) op) Q =

S[eyaT, JO “ON | = oe) = ao oe

"SadUTIIA JO ‘ON | a oe a ~

—

3 : : : : :

<3 Mees ee ty ae

a at : | 3 2

ws on] oO ~ Ae oS

a Oo =) id 53 N

i | a) ro) oO 4

3 ‘= ae N “a

Se DN aS o = =

° a} Gs) °

a s o = = 7,

g g —) ° °o °o

c a ~~ aw) ~~

a S = a om cof

Z o = A = a

The

2,17,193

Grand Total,...

* These columns are not included in that of the total.

899 Weights, Measures and Coins, [Ocr.

VIl.—Report on the Weights, Measures, and Coins of Cabul and

Bukhara. By NowrozJeE FurDoonJEE. Forwarded by Captain

Burnes to Government, and transferred to the Asiatic Society.

Now that, happily for the interests of British and Indian commerce,

a more intimate and extensive intercourse is about to commence with

countries adjoining to India, the following humble attempt to simplify

and accurately describe the weights, measures, and coins of Cabul and

Bukhara will not, it is hoped, be thought without use ; the more so,

since the subject has been hitherto left untouched by European mer-

chants and travellers, though a knowledge of it is indispensable to the

scientific and commercial world.

Or CaBuL WEIGHTS.

General commercial or gross weight.

6 Nukhods == 1 Shahee,

Shahee == 1 Miscal.

20 Miscals 1 Khoord, or Seer i Tabrez.

4 Khoord = 1 Powor Powee.

4 Powee == 1 :Charnde.

4 Charuk* == 1 Seer.

*21 Charuck or 1 Muni Tab

40 Khoord { = uni Tabreez.

8 Seer - == 1 Munkhanee.

10 Munkhanee ==1 Khurwar.

6 Munkhanee ==1 Camel load. ) Not being of a fixed

4 Ditto ditto ==1 Mule or poney load. proportion these are

3 Ditto ditto = 41 Ass load. given on an average.

There are two different muns in use at Cabul, viz. :—

Ist. The Muni Tabreez, which is equal to 24 charuks of this

country, or = 9 lbs. 10 oz. 160 grs. troy.

2nd. Muni Khanee which is equal to eight seers of this country,

or = 126 lbs. 2 oz. 320 grs. troy.

The maund of India is unknown, and the mun of Zabreez is evidently

that introduced from Persia, where it is universal.

The seer is also of three varieties and denominations, viz. Ist.

One seer 7 cabul, which is equal in weight to 504,888 Bombay rupees

or tolas, being found by actual experiment to contain 90,880 grs.,

or = 15 lbs. 9 oz. 160 grs. troy. In like manner I found the miscal

to weigh exactly 71 grains. The latter being the unit of the ponde-

1838.] of Cabul and Bukhara. 893

rary system of Afghanistan and Tartary, I have preferred it for my

standard by which all the other weights are ascertained with the utmost

precision. There are 1280 miscals in a Cabul seer.

2nd. Seer t Tabreez, which is only the 16th part of a charuk or

20 miscals = 2 ounces and 460 grains troy.

srd. Seer i Hindustan, or that introduced from India.

4th. Chooraika are foreign measures, and not much used.

I. The commercial weights of Cabu/ as compared with British and

Indian weights.

Cabul weights &| Value in British Value in Indian weights.

their denomina-| avoirdupois weight. Bombay and Guzerat.

tions.

lbs. oz. grains.jmds, seer tola masha ruttee dhan.

1 Nukhoad, 05440 2.958} 0 0 0 1 2 315

1 Shahee, OO Eso O° 6 OCCCCOL:(C SE SOR

1 Miscal, 2 GO. 0% PidOO 6 650. 0). 4. ube 6S.466

1 Khoord or seer,

Tabreez, ose O23 107.187) 0 0 to LO 5 1.320

1 Pow or Powee, 0 12 428.748) 0 1 3 6 5 1,280

BP G@arulsg,.i:; ines 3 3 402.062) 0 4 14 2 5 1.120

1 Seer, ory 12 15° 295.312} 0-18 Oo 30 ‘5 480

1 Mun Khanee,...| 103 13 175.000} 3 24 7 1 0 3.840

1 Khurwar, _...} 1038s 6 0.000; 36 2 14 I11 1 2.400

Besides giving the equivalent of the native weights in British Avoir-

dupois weight I have, in the above and other succeeding tables, endea-

voured to draw a comparison with the Indian weights, particularly those

of Bombay and Guzerat, which might if required, be easily converted

into Bengal weights by the following relation.

Bombay and Guzerat. Bengal. British.

3 Maunds, ...... — 1 Mun or Stand-

oe ond Malta ts 34 lbs. av. or # cwt.

Bend meers,..s.:.... = 1 Seer of 80 tolas, — 2057 lbs.

The tola = 180 grains is uniform in all the presidencies.

Goldsmith’s or Jeweller’s weight.

4 -P2 1 Nukhoad.

6 Nukhoads 1 Shahee.

4 Shahee = 1 Miscal.

I ll

* This is used chiefly by Hindu grocers in Cabul in purchasing Indian Com-

modities.

894 Weights, Measures and Coins, [Ocr.

II. Jeweller’s weight compared with Indian & English Troy weights.

Cabul weights. Indian weights. English Troy weights.

Mashas. ruttees. dhans. grains,

1 Pa, be 0 0 1.578 0.739

1 Nukhoad, ae 1 2315 2,958

1 Shahee, su 1 1 1.891 17.715

{ Miscal 4 5 3.466 71.000

MEASURES.

Cloth Measure.

4 Khoord == 1 Gheerah.

4 Gheerahs ==1 Charuk.

4 Charuks =~—1 Guz.

4 Pow ==1 Charuk i guz.

III. Cloth measure compared with English and Indian measures.

Cabul measures. Indian guz. English inches.

Guz. Tussoos.

1 Khoord, 0 0.562 0.632

1 Geerah, sb 0 2.250 2.531

1 Pow, a 0 2.250 2.531

1 Charuk i guz, 0 9.000 10.125

1 Guzi Shah, 14 or 36 40.500

This guz is called guz 2 shah because it was introduced by AHMED

SHAH. It is used for measuring all sorts of cloths, goods, &c., and

is also employed by tailors in their use. It is equal to 14 guz of

Bombay and Guzerat, and measures 404 inches English.

Carpenter's or Timber Measure.

4 Mooeebur (hair’s breadth) = 1° Rujja.

4 Ruja =") *Payen,

4 Payen == 1 Teereea.

3 Teereea == 1 Tussoo.

6 Tussoo == 1 Charuk.

4 Charuk == 1 Guz i maimar.

This guz is used by carpenters, bricklayers, and masons, and for

timber measuring.

1838.) of Cabul and Bukhara. 895

IV. Timber measures of Cabul compared.

Cabul Measures. Indian Measure. English Inches.

ise eS ee es

Bhay Guz Tussoos.

ER es

1 Mooeebur, 0.019 0.021

1 Rujja, 0 0.076 0.085

1 Payeen, ao 0 0.305 0.343

1 Teereea, 0 0.407 0.458

1 ‘T'ussoo, ee 0 1.222 1.375

1 Charuk, ae 0 7.333 8.250

1 Guzi Maimar, _... 1 5.333 33.000

There are only two kinds of guz in Cabul, viz. the guz t shah,

and maimaree, the former, as already stated, measuring 404 inches, and

the latter 33 inches English.

Measures of Capacity.

These are the same as the weights, there being no separate kind

of measures for liquids nor for coin.

Land Measure.

This includes both linear and square measure.

3 Kudums =<-1 Biswa.

20 Biswas or 60 paces == 1 Jureeb = also 20 Guz i Shah.

66 Jureebs* =-1 Kroh or Kos.

12 Kos == 1 Royal Munzil or day’s journey.

These measures are uncertain, not being fixed to any permanent

standard: they vary in many parts, cannot be precisely ascertained,

and must not therefore be depended upon. However, the following

comparison may give some idea, and convey a pretty good conjecture

as to their extent :

1 Biswa = 3t or 4 feet.

1 Kudum == I or 14 to ditto.

1 Jureeb == 70 or 80 feet.

1 Kroh or Kos == 2 miles*.

1 Munzil == 24 miles.

Taking 14 or 13 inches for one Kudum, three of which are said to be

* The assumption of two miles for the kos gives 66 jureebs of 80 feet, but this is

too much for the ordinary kos.—Ep.

896 Weights, Measures and Coins, [Ocr.

equal to one guz i shah, the jureeb is about 60 or 70 feet square, or, if

measured by the guz i shah, it comes to 67 feet, and as a last resource :

taking a medium of all thes results, we have one jurceb = 70 feet

square.

CoINs.

8 Kourees == 1 Kusseera.

4 Kusseera == 1 Pysa, (pookhta.) > Copper.

2 Ghuz =-1 Ditto.

3 Pysa == 1) Shahee. Formeclvcmiee

eo : ‘merly silver but

2 Shahee == 1 Sunwar. now imaginary.

2 Sunwar == 1 Abassee.

3 Abassee or 12 shahee —1 Rupee.—Silver.

7 Rupees =-] Tilla.

6 Rupees = 1 Boodkee or ducat. me a

15 to 18 Rupees == 1 Ushurfee or mohur. \ Colgecniis:

20 Rupees = 1 Tooman, (an imaginary money

like the Kory of Bombay.)

The rupees and pice are either Kham or kucha, or pookhta, t. e. puk-

ka, and where the former is not specified, the latter is always to be

understood. Their rates are as under.

6 Pookhta rupees 7i Kham rupees.

6 Pysa khawm 1 Shahee, or

72 Ditto == 4) Rupee

I ll

Fhe Tooman i khawm is worth 182 rupees.

In the time of SHAu SHoosa and ZUMAN SuAu, there were six pice

pookhta current in a shahee, or 72 pice im a rupee, but they have beer

lessened to 60 in a rupee by the present Ameer. The rupees have also

been reduced in weight by the present ruler, for Shah Zumanee rupees

now bring 14 shahees in the bazar. At present there is no silver

coin of lower denomination than a rupee; but in the time of the late

monarchs of Afghanistan, the abassee, shahee and sunwars were of

silver. They are not coined any more.

V. <A general Table of Cubul, Indian and English Monies and

Exchange, showing the produce of the former country’s currency in

Company’s rupees at the present rate of exchange, z. e. 117 Cabul ru-

pees for 100 of the E. I. Company: and in pounds and shillings ster-

ling, at the commercial par of exchange, viz. | shilling 11.51 pence per

1 Bombay rupee, or 195 shillings per 100 Bhay Rs.

1838. of Cabul and Bukhara. 897

| Value in Indian Weight

Cabul Cur- Metal. | Rate per | currency Com-| Value in British in

rency. Rupee. pany’s. Currency. grains,

Bs. 7As... Pies.) & +8, d.

1 Kouree,’ ../Shell, 1920 G 407") .083 0 0 .010

1 Kuseera, ..|Copper, 240; O O. .671 0 0 .083 35

1 Ghaz, .. |Ditto, 120 0 0 1.342 0 0 166 70

1 Pysa, .-|Ditto, 60 0 O 2.685 0 0 .333 142

1 Shahee,_.. |Silver, 12) O 1 1.425] 0 O 1.666 15

1 Sunwar,... . |Ditto, 6 0 2 2.850} 0 0 3.333 30

1 Abbasee, ..|Ditto, 3} 0 4 5.700| 0 O 6.666 60

1 Rupee, ..-|Ditto, ] 0 13 8.102 0 1 8.000 147

1 Tilla, (7 Rs.) |Gold, 14285} 5 15 8.717 | 0 11 9.097 71

1 Boodkee, Ditto, per 0-0 Rs.

(6 Rs.) Bic 16,666 Rs. 5 2 ..G15 0 9 0.045 §25

117 Cabul Rs. |......- cise 2 Bio seiat ale 100 0 One as 0

Reaeeenee ei. OS Lie kee eeaied| COB ig) 6286 |\o:8: «ji 6,8;880

The old Heratee and Shah Zumanee rupees (out of currency now)

coined at Herat and Cabul respectively in the years 1214, 1216, and

1217 A. H. weigh each 24 miscals or 178° grains, being only two

grains less in weight than the present Bombay and Madras rupees of one

tola. They contain five grains of alloy. The present Cabul rupee

weighs 147 grs. and contains the same quantity of alloy though it is

less in weight than the former.

Or BuKHARA WEIGHTS.

4i Miscals == 1 Tola.

20 Tolas == 1) Pow.

2 Pow a Neemcha.

4 Neemcha == 1 Charuk.

4 Charuks == 1 Dooneemsur.

2 Doneemseer ==1 Poot or Pood, (Russian.)

16 Ditto = 1 Mun of Bukhara.

This is the general commercial weight of Toorkistan or Tartary.

The pood is a Russian weight used at Bukhara in purchasing Russian

commodities. The tola obtains currency in Bulkh,-Khulum and

Kunduz, where it is employed in weighing tea, wax, silk, and grocery.

In Bukhara, grains, flour and such other bulky articles are weighed by

the mun—meat, butter, milk, &c. by the charuk ; while sugar, fruit,

ghee, &c., &c., are weighed by the neemcha.

VI. Table of the weights of Bukhara compared with those of Ca-

bul, England and India.

fia English Avoirdu-

Bukhara. Cabul. pois weight. Indian.

Ibs. oz. drs. | Mun seer tola masha ruttee.

1 Mun, -- |213 Seers, 278 12 OL TDD ACRE BAL en 440

1 Doneemseer,| 1§ ditto, 17 6 12 0 31 15 6 5.590

} Neemcha, ..| 5 Khoordor or

100 miscal 1 1 63, 0 bal 37 2 5.349

1 Charuk, 5 Pow, 4 5 11 0 a>) ee YO 5.397

1 Pood, -.| 33 Seers 34 13 8 Es) 33 3 yg. 180

1 Tola, +» | 4% Miscals, 0 0 6905 0 0 L 8 2.424

1 Pow, ..| 24 Khoord, eG PE Pe SU RR Ra Mita 6

5 0.9

898 Weights, Measures and Coins, [Ocr.

MEASURES.

Cloth Measure.

4 Pow = 1 Charuk = _ 7 Ditto.

4 Charuk =1 Alcheen = 28 Inches.

2 Alcheen ==1 Kolach = _ 56 Ditto.

By the kolach, chintz, kurbas, and other cloths are measured. The

Alcheen is a Russian measure.

Land Measure.

At Bukhara, in lieu of the jureeb, another measure called the ¢untad,

70 paces square, is used in measuring lands, and for long distances the

sung or measure of three coss, or six miles, is employed in use.

Corns.

Money Tables.

11 Poole Seeah = 1 Meere.

45 Do.or4 Meeree ==1 Tunga.

21 Tungas ==] Tilla.

17. Tungas == 1 Boodkee or Ducat.

3 Soum (roubles) —— ler eiilla.

VII. Table of the relative value of Bukhara, Cabul, English and

Indian monies at the commercial par of exchange.

Bukhara. Metal. | Weight Cabul. English. Indian currency.

in grains

Rs. Shahees P.| £ ss. d. Rs. As. Pie.

1 Pooli Seeah,|Brass, |........ 0 f(t) 22} 0 O .144 0 O 1.248

1 Meeree, .. [Silver, li] oO 1 0} O O 1.588 Ooo ea reo

1 Tunga, .. jDitto, 48} 0O 4 0} O O 6.355 0 4 9.918

3 Boodka*

ducat, .. Gold, — 525| 6 0 0} 0 9 .048 § 2456'S

1 Tilla*, .. | Ditto, CU 4 0 O; O11 49.097 5 15 8.717

1 Soom*,_.. Silver, 426] 2 4 Oo} O 4 6.848 1 15 9.904

1 Yamoo*, ..|Ditto, {4 Ibs. 4/195 0 0| 16 5 1.920 | 166 10 8,000

drs. and

8 grs.

In Kunduz, Bulk, Khooloom, &c. the currency is exactly as above

stated, with the exception of an additional coin, the rupee ( Mahomed-

shaee), which also obtains currency there. It is larger than the

Cabul rupee and exactly of the size of old Heratee rupee, weighing

on an average 180 grains, or one tola of India, One hundred Koon-

doozee (Mahomedshahee) rupees are equal to 118 or 120 Cabul

* For further particulars regarding these coins consult my paper on the Russian

articles brought to Cabul.

1838.] of Cabul and Bukhara. 899

rupees. They may therefore be stated to be at par with the Com-

pany’s and with Nanukshahee rupees. In the same places a kind of

brass coin of a very inferior value, called poochhuk, is also current ;

four of which are equal to a pool seeah. No rupees are current in

Bukhara.

Or PESHAWUR.

To the weights, measures and coins of Cabul and Bukhara those

of Peshawur may also be added, as that district formed lately part of

the Cabul dominions, from which it is at present dismembered by

the Sikhs. Besides being situated near the Indus, Peshawur is con-

sidered a great mart of commerce.

WEIGHTS.

The weights of Cabu/ current here during the monarchy have now

fallen into disuse, and those of Lahore have been substituted in their

room by the conquerers. The seer which weighs 102 rupees Nanuk-

shahee, of 24 miscals, each is equivalent to 2 lbs. 9 oz. and 6.147

drams avyoirdupois. The other denominations are :—~

Ibs. oz. drs.

1 Munkhanee = 40 Seers = 109 1 13 English.

16 Chitah == 1 Seer = 2 9 6147

96 Tolas == 1 Ditto = Ditto.

6 Tolas = I1]Chitah = O 2 9584

Jeweller’s Weight.

The jewellers here use the same weight as in Cabul, such as the

miscal, nakhod, &c. which are the same in value.

Goldsmith's Weight.

The goldsmiths employ the following in weighing gold, silver,

coins, &c. &c.

8 Ruttees —=1 Masha

12. Mashas =1 Tola.

This is purely Indian weight and recently introduced from Lahore.

The tolas, ruttees, &c. are nearly of the same value as those of India.

Cloth Measures.

The guj ¢ shahz of 40 inches and Peshawuree guz of 32 inches were

current formerly for measuring all sorts of cloths, but they have been

recently supplanted by the guz t akalt of the Sikhs. It is equal to

37 inches English and subdivided into 16 geerahs.

900 Weights, Measures and Coins, §c. [Ocr.

CoINs.

The currency of Peshawur was formerly the same as that of Cabul ;

but since the conquest of it by the Sikhs, the money system has under-

gone a great change and become more intricate on account of the

introduction of foreign coins, such as the Nanukshahee: Nou Nihal-

Sunghee and other rupees. The present’ money system is described

as under.

Money Table

4 Kourees uo

8 Ditto or 2 Gundas cas

2 Adhees ==

2 Dumrees ss

4 Ditto or 2 Adhelas aa

4 Pysa eae

3. Pysa =

16 Anas or 84 Pysas ees

| ee coe ce oe

Gunda.

Adhee.

Dumree.

Adhela.

Pysa.

Shahee of commerce.

Anna ditto. .

Rupee Peshawuree chul-

nee of commerce.

The different kinds of rupees current in Peshawur, with their

weights and relative values, are as follows :-—

Ist. Nanukshahee rupee produces in Peshawur 24 Peshawurree

annas and weighs 170-172 grains.

2nd. Nou Nihal-Singhee rupee, ditto 18 annas, weight 124-1380 ers.

srd. Hurt-Singhee rupee, ditto 15 annas, weight 170 grs.

Ath. Peshawuree chulnee or of commerce, ditto 16 annas.

oth. Cabul rupees, or of commerce, ditto 21 annas, ditto 147 grs.

The Nanukshahee rupees are at par with the kuldar or Company’s

rupees.

113 Cabul rupees are equal in currency at Peshawur to 100 Nanuk-

shahee rupees.

122 Peshawuree rupees, ditto ditto to 100 ditto.

133 Now Mhal-Singhee rupees, ditto ditto to 100 ditto.

160 Huri-Singhee rupees, ditto ditto to 100 ditto.

Lahore, 10th July, 1838.

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. 901

VILI.—Ancient Inscriptions.

I.—The first inscription of which we are about to give an abstract

translation, has been obtained and communicated by Raja Daarma Vun-

KATA Aswa Rao, who has been for some time in Calcutta, to urge on

the supreme government of India his claim to the gadi of the raj of Palun-

cha, or Kummummeét, which through some recent arrangements of the

Nizam’s government has been assigned to a rival claimant. The inscrip-

tion is stated to be engraved on a slab about six or seven feet high, which

is to be found close to the temple of RuprRapEvA at Warangal, the

modern name for the ancient capital of the Telingana rajas, called in

this inscription Arunakunda-pura, or patana. The inscription, that is

its commencement and close, excluding the Sanskrit slokas, is in an

old dialect of mixed Telugu and Oorya. It is valuable as containing

the genealogy of raja RupRADEVA, and as showing that the previous

dynasty established at Warangal, was overcome, and displaced by his

father called Pro raja. The inscription gives an authentic date

also for the reign of RuDRADEVA in Telingana, viz. 1054 Saka, cor-

responding with 1132 A. D., and shows this to be the raja, called in

the temple annals of Jagannath, Cuurane, or CHorGuNGA, who is said to

have overrun Katak, coming from the Carnatic, and to have founded or

established the Gunga-vansa dynasty, in the very year of this inscription,

viz. 1054 Saka. Raja RupRaApesvVA is mentioned as a benefactor of

Jagannath, and Katak is included in the boundaries which are assigned

to his dominions at that period. These are described in the inscription,

as extending as far as the sea to the east ; the Sree Saila ? mountains to

the south; as far in another direction, which must be west, as Bdka-

taka; while to the north, his rule extended as far as the Malyavanta,

now perhaps the Malyagiri, mountain, west of Baleswar.

The inscription commences thus :

«« The raja RupRADEVA, who obtained the five high titles, and was

sovereign of Arunakunda-pura, king of kings, and lord of all things,

virtuous, and fortunate, of the Aékali race, established the three

Devatas, Rudreshwara, (after his own name,) Basudeva, and Suriya-

deva, in Arunakunda-patana, his capital city, for the continuation and

spread of his dominion, in the year of Saka 1054, and in the year

Chitrabhant of the Vrihaspati Chakar or 60 years cycle of Jupiter on

the 13th of Magh, a fortunate Sunday.”

Then follow three slokas, the first in praise of Hart, the second of

Ganesna, the third a prayer to Saraswati. The 4th sloka commences

the genealogy of RuprA NARESHWARA as given by ACHINTENDRA

902 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

varA son of Srr RamesHwara Dixsnita of the BHARADWAJA

race.

The 5th sloka mentions raja TRIBHUVANA, a great warrior, to be the

first ancestor: he was of the Kdkalya race.

The 6th names Mara Deva as chief of the Kdkalya rajas, and a

zealous worshipper of Surva, but does not mention what relationship

he bore TRIBHUBANA, it is presumed he was the son.

The 7th sloka names Pro ti raja as the son of Mata Deva, a

successful and illustrious king. The four following slokas allude to

some of his principal achievements. First that he reduced Govinp

raja, king of Tutlapa? gave back his kingdom to the king of Erha* ;

conquered and branded the founder of Nddha? in Mantra-kutnagar,

and because the Avha raja declined to join in the expedition, expelled

him afterwards from his raj.

(Sloka 12.) ‘“ What shall I say of the victorious Prot raja, through

whom the ruler of Arunakunda ( Varangal) with its many districts

was first awed into imbecility, till, taking this raja into his service, he

was soon after expelled from his wide dominions.”

Sloka 13 describes the chief ranee of Prox raja, by name

Murama Devi the mother of RupRapeva, whose praises follow in

sloka 14.

Sloka 15 mentions Rupra’s victory over Doma, a chief whose

power lay in cavalry, and 16, his checking the raja Merua? and

plundering the Pola ? country.

17 to 21, describe the ascendancy gained by Buia rAja (half brother

of RupRADEVA ), consequently upon the death of the Gokurna raja, the

Chorhddaya raja, and the king of Z’azlapa ; that, inflated with these suc-

cesses, he ventured to defy RupRAvEvaA, who thereupon made pre-

paration to meet him, (sloka 22.)

Slokas 23 and 24 describe the awe inspired by these preparations ; 25,

the burning of the town of Vardhamdnar.

26 The raja Burma flies in terror with his family.

27. Is pursued by RupRADEva and the town of Chorhadaya burnt.

28. A large tank excavated there.

29 and 30. In praise of RUDRADEVA’S prowess.

* The pundits say this is not Orissa which always in the old dialects is written

Oordha Des.

+ This name might lead to the supposition that r4ja RupRAprva had advanced

as far north as Burdwan, but Choradaya is said to be Tanjore, which shows that the

dominions of BHIMA raja lay to the south: the Vindhya mountains are indeed men-

tioned as the northern boundary of this rdja’s dominions.

1838. ] Ancient Inscriptions. 903

31. The réja Burma, whose territories lay between Kanchi ( Con-

jeveram ), and the Vindhya mountains, sues for protection.

32. Praise to RupRa, who adorned and populated Jagannath.

The succeeding ten slokas are continuations of this praise in a very

florid style.

43. Mentions Arunakunda ( Varangal) as r4ja Rupra’s capital,

and for three slokas the praises of that city are given; then follow two

slokas in praise of the king’s horses, and last comes the following de-

scription of his kingdom, in the old mixed Telugu and Oorya dialect.

«His kingdom is bounded on the east by the salt sea, on the south

by the Svee-Saila (mountains). His royal Lakshmi extends as far a8

Bakataka ; and on the north she reaches the mountain Malyawanta.”

“ This king endowed this place named Madichetapa Nildma Khetaka,

that it might long remain undestroyed, for the worship of ManEswaR,

Ravi Souri (Visunv), in evidence of his royal duty to the gods.”

WaqaRawsfa: |

afe sifasagqracas vag) watura UYACIUMAWa

ALTARATRYLAC AL YCHarearcufateaufcataaa fayaa

ST AS AWA ACA RA AAAS ACT Baa aL sya MATA

FSVISAAAIAHALIAAN BARURIZMATS FRAT

fatieaqacisds aaquas THIN TT (ous Baa felaaarTa

FAUT ATWAS CRIS AUC HATY TAVT RAT Ha BATT

Renzarastas dfq Ara) wrayacy ated fara

ana aat USF SAS UARANAZ AWTS | ezatte

HAC Retad Aarwalseseweerey Craaufsaz

qa qere ete 1 Stee fae aefarasicua

RAIA MAT YIAAT IA AARIAIAS: | ealataaAt

waafasa = fave Paemafa Tretaarafaaaaeeante

RAITT | 2 yatad qvavagefucgdta cwicgqizadifa

fafaaiaa stewfiunfcumeas a aaafacanacadt

a ~

aye aeea aaa: fees: Srafiqaas: stoaae

906 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

TaTAarcaenryiemayanasacacar wihrara: fa

AN W Vs Wal sathaagqerie yerfe cist way weatas

yuaisfaat | sagdtaafsafsa ata aedarraady

ged Tey WR) Aalfsdtamaarefaaw lat car

uagq sua fer fasay: | auleacafanafeawanaat

fasta aaaq wat fawor | ad | ad Beata WANA

Cle UTIs aNCaaciaedtai | agifaaracaay

agit aataaifaarasfaatar wars | so | Waa

aad ay quatafaad asimaaciaa weAagd wea

LRT | AWBTIeTAdAfesTaMzfsara aaa

wagacua: fa awa fana:| aaers Qarefamaam Gat

aed was qeufwaftyarawe walla: prey

CHUFICHLFIRLAY FaIHBVI gases aawafanc

ad Aitaws | Wedatamacaae yet aya Sz

Safafata acas: vez: WaT! | Ro | ATSlAUSNfaaTy

fara dtatea: wfwat we Sagara SHC SMTA TE F

epafafaar ayquadiaate adifat yaga daa uRZuta

mimes aq ee wifa adat asnataatsar

wat aa swe aie wate aeray a data | West

qearaa wat ger Prasad Aetat Heavens sear

ASML MAT | BV y UUs Csawalane wr_aars

BMIASTUAAT FUITIAAAT Ga | AATMafsataaT

adel aealtaararsa: aaratarnafa fafa

uifsa: | 82 Varaanaat facwactanry qeaqsys: way

agaist: | ceifisfarerearatay

Pqaraget WAH SIMATUARLT Weed Ang | se 4

BAA GACAFITF AATF FAW ANI IAATA AT STLATL FH LTA: |

1838.] Ancient. Inscriptions. 903

31. The.raja Burma, whose territories lay between Kanchi ( Con-

jeveram ), and the Vindhya mountains, sues for protection.

32. Praise to Rupra, who adorned and populated Jagannath.

The succeeding ten slokas are continuations of this praise in a very

florid style.

43. Mentions Arunakunda ( Varangal) as raja Rupra’s capital,

and for three slokas the praises of that city are given; then follow two

slokas in praise of the king’s horses, and last comes the following de-

scription of his kingdom, in the old mixed Telugu and Oorya dialect.

“ His kingdom is bounded on the east by the salt sea, on the south

by the Sree-Satla (mountains). His royal Lakshmi extends as far a$

Bakataka ; and on the north she reaches the mountain Malyawantd.”

“ This king endowed this place named Madichetapa Nildma Khetaka,

that it might long remain undestroyed, for the worship of ManEeswar;

Ravi Souri (Visunv), in evidence of his royal duty to the gods.”

VATRRIMTS: |

afe Wawrqracas vag) aafarg wqAENRABA

ALTARATRGCAL AL WCHateqrufafeaufeataaa fanaw

BAAS AWA ACA AA TAAL 9 fase aC sgq Mea

fSvISAAAaHATAIAAM WeaRwgIats FeaAIl

fatiqaaiisd TAVTAS WAT TA Yous BAA ela

TAAL ALATS CRISS TWX AATY GAGE SHAE Aa Mage

Raseaqias Sfx Hr) sarayaty atfea eae

SMU ITT WIyESIBITAVAAAZABIrstea | <czaAtfe

adic fetnd atrwafscseraetea Craaufast

aa qere Efe 1 4 eteee fase aefaondicua

RATATAT MATAIAAG IA AAAS: | ealavtawar

~ = basco EN

waafeea = feveueuafa dreaiqarafanarecaiia

ANA Ry ated quaetifacgadla qwicyqinadifa

fafamiaa suewfirfcrmeqas sa aaaacaTdacedt

= ~

AAU alcara aafsa: ofcae: Srafraraws: Blcwaax

906 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

TATAANTHVAIF ILM ARTsACATaT at «= Atfanarae: = fz

AINE 2s Wal satfaagqeria yatfu cist waw wwafag

wastes | waydtaafafsa ato aeearraaey

wud Sey Ri) aealhediwmsarefaw war car

wag zya fea fasay: | awicacafiatefeamanaat

faeta aqaa at fase | Re | aa weata w waa

ele UAASIy andaadietat | agifaaacqey

ag eaasaifaarasfaaias wigea y xo | FAT

a aq ay quatafaad asimaanriaay yaigd aya

WRT bo WHIT Nfaswadicifaargaasatsaa

excacud: fa awa faaa) anars qarafaqaan dal

aia wags Fswuelwafcuaraw wala: y Re k

CHUFAICHIFIULAT saHBI maeata aeravafaac

Qt AAs | YlqataMaMaa eet Ad Sz

aufataid age: gTEHa: Waa? | Re | AIMPlawafsageny

fasat vilatea: feat wea Bacar HEC EM eae Fi

epatalaal ayquatiady adifat varqa daa aaeats

GIATMeUfsat: 7 apy ae wife adat asuataafaat

wat aa aay aaa dafe acres a aataa | West

qaaraa AIAT: Aa Haass Adtat qeacwarla agar

AMAL TAT: | Ry Wats tissaae: wagers

aBieaaTUaal quatrmeansayy | warmafawreta

equ Aaltaass aarqtauata faahewaaa|eg

aifsa: | 28 \ Sarena facwacaary seq: wes}

ugaisaafasamatesatrs: | cafes faaerearata

feargyet TAHA SLAMTUARLT aneqy Fay | se |

HAA CACUFTA FATA HAAG ae FATA MTSTLA TRH: |

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. 907

PANAHLUVSMT ALANA BAA AMIS AAIHT WaT TASTY |

afea smafa avt afa aed crsifaurainia aa atrads

iuafacfasa 4 eagag Gafeatieaae TT MITA | RE I

Ruy wMiaa wesaetsTet stay 4 FATAL | WS

faqicnuad wasn a agily ceawa HUA UT || 29 |

aad eaquumaata firscafufsaaarqe wqerrataty

Tae eate: | aaTEAcauaaty awit wT

aa SarataaaratatcafeypaAts RT | RS | TATA

aeuaty agaaasaty fra saaraati yveaqeefi 7

caulaity aa We qwaagsa Bay WI: TAR wat

aa CAMARA SL FAT AHA | Rey HMA

grates faeftueatraaaed enc SU RMCI Ca

maa fay | area aacasta yqcnerdarcte

A = ° Om 2

ATAATTST ATS aegis aMeRcat Wt i go 4

enraanaadts waRuhasia = owmat Tedwatrafa

eqeamt gmay dufa | saitdifwene serch

ufa quia OTe OC Sydifuuata owe sata

SaReatyd et y wrearefearmeifa eat aarfa

wqa aeaut ufaatia atafesaquyy uFUy | CH Stafa

aseanfaat wuanay ae waa fasafsaq afay

Sifa: Tara: | eQ) TAlRVAAAWwATAATL] sWes-

UA AA AA AACA UL TASHA | HUE

qs at faa weg Fea Ww fam

famafeat carfaaretfsat ves aafaat aacRaacrsy

UY BATITCATMEWANIY: | Bitwg~ecent faa

MAMA AM ACTRAIF MALTA: || 28 | Ta fesaaay

famaatar wer usta weal sete: waar | aatgaya

aaafaacaMwfesaiad WeMATMACTA | BY | TAIT

910 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

grace, by bringing angry women. to love him through the force of his

bowing and sweet words,” &c. &c., “announces to all possessors of estates

in their own right, and to all managers of the royal lands, and to the vil-

lage proprietors—Be it known to all of you,” (a conveyancer of the pre-

sent day would write “ Now know ye,”) that we (the said raja PRasanGa

Raga Datta) in the full moon of Kartik, out of respect for those who

are versed in the four Vedas, and consecrated with (holy) water,

have presented to A.B. (the names are not legible) inhabitants of

Girisha padraka in the district of Angkureswara, and to B. C. the

village named Sirisha padrakanlash, for worship of the five Jagnas,

Bali, Charu, Baiswadeva, and Agnihotra, and for increase of the virtue

and fame of our father, our mother, and ourself ; that the said village with

all the rich produce it affords, may be enjoyed by the said grantees,

their sons, grandsons and posterity, as long as the sun, and moon, and

the ocean, and the earth shall endure.

“ After this, let future rajas of our race, or of any other race, that

may desire to secure to themselves the eternal fame, beautiful as the

moon-beam, which attaches to donors of lands, reflect that life and wealth

are fickle as waves of the sea urged by a strong wind; while fame, earned

by good deeds is durable without limit ; and so let them respect this

grant, and confirm the grantees in possession. He only, whose mind is

blackened by the darkness of ignorance, will resume it, or be pleased at

seeing others molest its possessors—reckless of the guilt of the five

deadly sins, and of other heinous crimes, as described at length in the

Véda Byasa.

‘“‘ He who grants lands, lives 60,000 years in heaven ; but he who

confiscates or resumes, or allows others to do so, is doomed to hell for

a like period.

«‘ The resumers of grants become as black serpents that dwell in holes

in the Vindhya forest. The earth has been enjoyed by many kings, as

the Sagara raja and others, and each in his turn has ruled as a despot

lord of all. But what generous man will take again the grants made by

rajas who have gone before him, and whose gifts are like wreaths of

flowers once used, spreading the fragrance of a good name, and of the

reputation for wealth and virtue*. :

“‘ By the order of the raja’s own mouth this grant has been written

by Rewa, a servant well tried in peace and in war, in the full moon of

Kartika of the Sambat year (of VikRAMADITYA) 380.”

* The correspondence of the terms in which this grant closes, with the latter

part of the grant obtained by Mr. R. Jenxrns in Chattisgarh, as given in

vol. XV. of the Asiatic Researches, will not fail to strike the reader. The cha-

racter of that grant seems to be of higher antiquity than was then assigned to it

by Dr. Wison.

1838. ] Ancient Inscriptions. 907

AINANCAS MT BA ANA IAA AMAT THAT IAT TAAYZY |

° aos ES ~ ~

afea uuata aul ufa ence cintfaaraiaia aa acta

iuafacfasa a vagy Gafaatlerae Ta MIATA | RC I

. e ~ > ~ AN ~ ~ ~

AUT SRA waHaeesael afay TF HAT ALY | Wea

x )

faqienud wasn a anita qeauad aaa UT | 29 |

on; ~ ty 0.

ata equanaate fcyscafufenasiqa wqudaaty

Tamadeay | AsHATATATAT AY aM WW

AN e ene ~ ~ ae

aa aarentaaurafaficafyyaaa: Write | 3s | UTaTRTy

Hedaya agaaarsaty faa asaaraafa seaqectt &

cauata aa Wa qaeagdt HAY Ale: was wat

Sq UAACHLGAAAMTSL FUT ATAU | xe y Sea

“ € afr > NO ~ (a i

ecafen fmuefcwequraqmcy weeny swaycfaar

maaan fy | area aacasnta weutridactd

SIGART ATS wagaacframteneat we oy ee |

eqraanaaats TARA wt Aetiiwacrafa

eqeam smd dufa | | satitfaene = sercha

efea quia state 06Sydifuaaia ose sata

Sleaeatys et | weweafeatimetfa eat autia

ByZa aeaut ufaatia aiafasaquyy UFEE | CH atafa

axeqsfaat zaaney wet wlan fasafsas afay

Ifa: TAIT: | BR | TAMVAAAWATAATe] -BWcts1-

Usa AAl TA IAAL SWSwILA SAU aSarat | AU

gaa at tfaaat eqreaiatiaat areata ow fam

famafeat canfasrarfsrat ies | aahadtt aactaacray

UY BMATAACAITVTEUANIY: | Siragecent faa

RIAA AA ATHRIFAALIATAT HY: || o8 | Ta fest y

faraatat ater vata veal seta: aaa: | aaryaya

aaalaaCaWalea aaa VEMATHARTT | SLY AAW

910 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

grace, by bringing angry women to love him through the force of his

bowing and sweet words,” &c. &., “ announces to all possessors of estates

in their own right, and toall managers of the royal lands, and to the vil-

lage proprietors—Be it known to all of you,” (a conveyancer of the pre-

sent day would write “ Now know ye,”) that we (the said raja Prasanca

Raga Datta) in the full moon of Kartik, out of respect for those who

are versed in the four Vedas, and consecrated with (holy) water,

have presented to A. B. (the names are not legible) inhabitants of

Girisha padraka in the district of Angkureswara, and to B. C. the

village named Sir’sha padrakanlash, for worship of the five Jagnas,

Bali, Charu, Baiswadeva, and Agnihotra, and for increase of the virtue

and fame of our father, our mother, and ourself ; that the said village with

all the rich produce it affords, may be enjoyed by the said grantees,

their sons, grandsons and posterity, as long as the sun, and moon, and

the ocean, and the earth shall endure.

« After this, let future rajas of our race, or of any other race, that

may desire to secure to themselves the eternal fame, beautiful as the

moon-beam, which attaches to donors of lands, reflect that life and wealth

are fickle as waves of the sea urged by a strong wind; while fame, earned

by good deeds is durable without limit; and so let them respect this

grant, and confirm the grantees in possession. He only, whose mind is

blackened by the darkness of ignorance, will resume it, or be pleased at

seeing others molest its possessors—reckless of the guilt of the five

deadly sins, and of other heinous crimes, as described at length in the

Véda Byasa.

“‘ He who grants lands, lives 60,000 years in heaven; but he who

confiscates or resumes, or allows others to do so, is doomed to hell for

a like period.

«“ The resumers of grants become as black serpents that dwell in holes

in the Vindhya forest. The earth has been enjoyed by many kings, as

the Sagara raja and others, and each in his turn has ruled as a despot

lord of all. But what generous man will take again the grants made by

rajas who have gone before liim, and whose gifts are like wreaths of

flowers once used, spreading the fragrance of a good name, and of the

reputation for wealth and virtue*.

“‘ By the order of the raja’s own mouth this grant has been written

by Rewa, a servant well tried in peace and in war, in the full moon of

Kartika of the Sambat year (of VikKRAMADITYA) 380.”

* The correspondence of the terms in which this grant closes, with the latter

part of the grant obtained by Mr. R. Jenkins in Chattisgarh, as given in

vol. XV. of the Asiatic Researches, will not fail to strike the reader. The cha-

racter of that grant seems to be of higher antiquity than was then assigned to it

by Dr. Witson.

1838.) Ancient Inscriptions. 911

lefe af vuafafsufiadnacaauegifaqanafe

WE ufcarataquraeaeta aaaafaaty

2 aaa Batriasawafa aeiaaaatfagcams WHT

satan Atel MAA BMETaT Sat

3 ue arauatafea farsattdtfufafaacafasaats

fafacfaae: aarataaag xaaeuaqaagedata

4 xqufavafeancucaqaayaayatamagicatsay: at-

ance: ufafeaatana data

5 uafancaatcfactsaqaa 3 fafsentcaagaifanfad

AMAT VITA aaa faatat SAT

6 yaaaeeat = aafcfamicawamfe fated atiaafea

afaatfaacamaaas aaa aT S ag ||

7 apRMaqea qa fanaritaactaararaenasi<eifa

Tat WaeTs auatfaca

8 aayaentiwafaayancqay wfecdtwast BETTE

aaaaeafaaqre vaca: HSUifsaTAT

9 Tce wWAAIUTaNcaafafrwafafeqataTTEs

wy tafascafes wordt fracey

10 Haat aaqanaacted fHaefrat cane fauaatT

aaTaaara CMa aA ATATA

ll wfwanaga faa WMrarasacare: Faqgrawnaqar

HAVRE AUPHA HAA | Halarefanaz

12 arfets A HETMAAAT | TIUeaaAiafyaa4Tss

AA AISA A BAMA | WaEeTs

13 aaa faatarcrataaat fearaa a waufcqtcaar | wa

agi: waa faae facwafrnatfaena

14 TCIRRUCMATT OrO| TRVASHATUGA | WHeaarsaat |

912 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

meqacifa ufwataa | aaTftasT |

15 vars: sclatgaeatestfaaertanaata) = aera:

Tanatacnarataara Raaafcatacaa

16 faxfarmase: WaawqIUMaqETaaaaaasAIas

ufaafaa fafasraqeqaeim: ace xa

17 aaafaae: aafrasea 3 vyatuaufauyceqaiaaa

fxq Walaa ARIS feq aA Ts IATA

18 waaaacucifyaua: afew eq ae: WasTHAa

fanaa aarsfatrarat aa

19 @a wa: aatfea acfaaara: Fe xq agra: wha zat

HIATT Sl faTAAAF CYS: TAA

20 faxrncitenaes: = WeRTARTa: Nea ferTATaRAAT

aaara aaa St BtAAcCMATe Ata BY Saray

MW cafsasefea: sfaua vatacufea ca aathyar:

afrraman: @fcataas aitiaefaad aaaraTTsH

22 qatataentfeal ATTA eATATTAITTAS aa AUP IAT

ara aTeat ae weed

23 anifacqaaaatfiaasafafeane: waver WaT

frucgafreeqeranerge: uci 7

24 cufearciizata wed: ae aaafaerfy wee Bra

agua fanaseay Faw Saray

25 mys ara afrara Tawafaafaawas: GaaTAT

fava cafaacacraaiiga Raa Fr

26 aNaEaTaVtAMAT AHA fas

ay Ga gray faa

27 efearigiuama faasfafan vat zafearfe we

GLURAT VUTAAAET }

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. | 913

983 ata aifeafacafufa faafaa aqergifad frcieatat

aiqeaatasaafas aaa

09 fanaraaicaudiaaafataeiaaeagqaaay: = = yUT

ufegtra

30 alfattaar May Ca a AT aT ae T AIM ase

ATNLA

31 aura faasaufacaracreaasaatafatactraa: aa-

fara auaae tS SAT WAFL:

32 qiaatta ct waa dfwafarafaegumaea

aifeatftardl eat as

33 aaa fafcananfatg cat faaaramtafacaaaag

Ola: Gay: SUCH:

34 wacladare: (aatcafafesiantea wfedanitae

AMAAMAUSHSUTAM) AlARAAT

35 fafafafaaaarsin: gars anasigac farang

tucfaaarawtatafeasnafaagra

36 AMAUATATNATAHS ACA UASIAUR TlAfsaa

fame atau Srwaara

37 Taaleta Tas WaT HAAS VA AGA ALAS

raat we fafa

38 caalfa aifrerfa fran ate Ara qarawaarat

RAAT AA qrMarhewan sae Tal We

39 ata Aeles aa ATATaTSaacfanie ae cifaa Weal

AU AMMUL SHAWIACSIATM ARITA

40 anquiftstqueamateacfaaeaaeae | FT

yc cia fe eqrnaawafafamadciasat

5x2

914 Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

41 fafa quaaa frat fimancarqatiarqaarary

Tay sua faastiee yaaa

42 AuMATE Mara ff aUufeTTAT ora faaaaas AAS

CaaS aate a aqUr aaa waaay T

43 wanfaqes | afieracatreatafreemaradaceal

salatfasiaufah: TraTaaUfealefasaae

44 Wo aashlaa CAA ATA MAT ASA aT ATS ATA ALST

BTUTATRIASTAT THAIS AMT Y

45 ft ufmactet anfecafafautcaaagamana:

aaftaayg at aaraatafacucaaaata

46 <femeeaaraa aaaieaarafaarearam: atau

TH CIM! MASHAY UNAa Fearaa

47 Baa atectavatia exfacia ufas: seat ata

Al T Aaa ACK FHq | faanediaararae

48 weniccatfan: amrTeat fe saat ufactd weha ay

qetaagul su cisifa: aces: ae a

49 Baya sa seas | alts caf Ter AVHET

wifareareciia | frraresfaat

50 fafa @t ara ary qaci<atafa | Samewasy whe

faa afaagaugeut fafad affair

51 tuifyaatiaeqaraafa | doy cy afaazaat fer

ALUMS ATAIY BWAlACUUAA Pears Vacs” t

SAAT;

FAVA: SAAMI LATAT Bl sTaa~N:

TATA; TUATHA: ATARI WATST

Note.—The marginal numbers mark the lines of the copper plates. We owe Dr.

Burns an apology for not transferring his copy, which is perfect, to a lithographed

plate. In the following number we propose to give another of these grants in its

original shape, that the character may bear its own testimony to their antiquity ;

but time, and the number of other plates has prevented the doing so with this

specimen,

1838.] Proceedings of the Society. 91

1X.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 14th November, 1838.

The Hon’ble Sir Evwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Before proceeding to the general business of the meeting, the President

rose and stated, that he held in his hand a letter from the Secretary,

Mr. James Prinsep, the substance of which must be a source of deep

regret to every member of the Society, for every one must feel the loss

the Society had suffered in the departure of its Secretary, Mr. Jamus

Prinsep. He assured the meeting, however, and he spoke on the autho-

rity of a conversation he had with Mr, Prinsep, before his departure,

that this gentleman’s absence from India would be but for a short period,

and that on his return he would be ready to take the same interest, and to

display the same zeal and anxiety, which had so honorably distinguished

his discharge of the important duties he had undertaken in connexion with -

the Society. The President said, that the objects of the Society, had un-_

der Mr. Prinser’s able superintendance, been prosecuted with a vigour,

which had added largely to its credit and reputation ; and that the results

produced in every department of science and literature, for which the Socie-

ty was indebted chiefly to its Secretary’s.activity and varied powers, had

sustained its character in a manner, rivalling the periods when it de-

rived renown from the labours of a Jones, a COLEBROOKE, and a Witson.

The President took occasion to add, that, in the time of Mr. James

Prinsep, and on his proposition, the name of the Society had been associ-

ated with a monthly periodical, established by the late Captain Hiersert,

originally under the name of the Gleanings in Science. The work was

afterwards extended and ably conducted by Mr. Prinsxep himself; and at

his suggestion it was resolved in 1831, that so long as this periodical should

be conducted by a Secretary of the Society, it should bear. the title of

“* Journal of the Asiatic Society ;” under that name, it had been since con-

tinued by Mr. Prinsep with very distinguished success to the present day.

The Society had no property in the Journal, and no right to prevent

Mr. Prinsep from separating it again from the Society, and conducting it

on his own account ; but he had no such intention. He (Sir E. Ryan)

had ascertained that Mr. Jas. Prinsep had made arrangements for its

being continued to the end of the present year from materials in hand ;

and after that, he meant that his series should be closed ; but he had no

objection to the Society’s continuing the periodical by the same name

under other management as a concern quite independent.

Now he (the President) believed, that all the members of the Society

would regret exceedingly that a periodical so established, and which had ac-

quired such credit and consideration, should be discontinued. He trusted

that it would be resumed by Mr. J. Prinsep himself, when he returned

to India; but in the mean time he should submit to the meeting the

propriety of taking into consideration the possibility of making some

arrangemen to carry it on during Mr. Prinsup’s absence.

916 Proceedings of the Society. [Ocr.

Having premised thus much, the President stated, that he should read

to the meeting Mr. James Prinsepr’s letter, placing the situation of Secre-

tary at their disposal: but as he had no doubt it would be the unanimous

feeling of the meeting to desire to retain Mr. PrinsEp in official con-

nexion with the Society, he should not consider this letter as an absolute

resignation, but should propose a resolution, and submit arrangements

founded upon it, which would enable Mr. Prinsxrp to resume the office on

his return to India.

The President then read the following letter:

To the Hon’ble Sir EDWARD RYAN, Kt., President of the Asiatic Society.

Hon’BLE SIR,

Being compelled by ill-health to proceed to sea and eventually to Europe, I have

taken my passage on board the Herefordshire, with the intention of being absent

from the country for two, or perhaps three years. I am thus under the necessity of

placing at the disposal of the Society the situation of its Secretary, which I have

filled for five years.

It is with great reluctance and regret that I thus separate myself froma body, with

whom I have been associated in labours of much interest and utility, whose favor

has encouraged my zeal, and through whose credit and reputation in the world, I

have obtained the means of making generally known my own humble efforts in the

cause of science, and my not unsuccessful endeavours to explore the antiquities of the

country, to whose service we are devoted.

But the disability of sickness is an accident, to which we are all liable, and from

which there is no resource, but in temporary departure to a better climate. I am

thus compelled to leave my incomplete labours to be perfected by others ; and to

relinquish the place I have held inthe Society, that provision may be made for its

competent discharge under the failure of my own power of longer rendering useful

service.

I have the honor to be, &c.

ist November, 1838. (Signed) JAMES PRINSEP.

Proposed by the President, seconded by Mr. Curnin, and unanimously

resolved,—That the resignation of Mr. James Prinsep be not accepted ;

but the Society hope that he will return to resume the situation of Secre-

tary, which he had filled so much to the credit of the Society for a period

of five years.

Resolved,— That the President communicate to Mr. James Prinsep the

desire of the Society, that he shall not consider himself as having vacated

the situation of Secretary to the Society ; and express the hope, that on his

return to India he will resume the situation of Secretary.

That, during the absence of the Secretary, a temporary arrangement

be made for conducting the Secretary’s duties, the same to cease upon his

return and resumption of the office.

That, during the temporary absence of Mr. James Prinsep, the Rev.

Mr. Maan, Dr. O’SHavennessy and Babu Ramcomut Sen be requested

to act as joint Secretaries of the Asiatic Society.

That, for the purpose of carrying on the financial affairs of the Society,

a committee be appointed, consisting of the President, the Secretaries, and

Mr. W. P. Grant.

That the Secretaries of the Society be requested to report, whether at

the expiration of the current year they are willing to carry on a new series

of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, and submit to the next meeting a plan

for that purpose.

Mr. James MippieEron, proposed at the last meeting, was balloted for

and duly elected a member of the Society.

1838. | Proceedings of the Society. O17 ¢

Read a letter from Lieut. J. Duncan, acknowledging his election as an

ordinary member of the Society.

Ditto from Monsieur Jausert, President of the Geographical Society

of Paris, acknowledging his election as an honorary member.

Library.

Read a letter from J. Bett, Esq., Secretary to the Agricultural and

Horticultural Society, forwarding, for presentation on behalf of the Society,

three pamphlets, Nos. 1, 2, and 3 on Cochineal.

The following books were presented :

Notes on the Agricultural and Rural Economy of the Valley of Nipal, by Dr.

A. CAMPBELL of Nipal—by the Author, through the Hon’ble Col. W. Morison,

Barometrical and Thermometrical Observations—ditio by ditto.

Hourly observations during the last summer at ditto--by ditto.

Memoires sur Quelques Coquilles Fluviatiles at terrestres D’Amerique per

Stefano Moricard, Ceretrail des Memoires de la Societé de Physique et d Histoiré

Naturelle de Geneve, 1833-34—by the Author.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, October, 1838—by Rev. J. WiLson BENSLEY,

Madras Journal of Science, No. 20—by the Madras Literary Society.

The following from the Booksellers :

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia (Biography), Eminent Foreign Statesmen, vol. 5.

Ditto ditto (History), Greece, vol. 5.

ToRRENS’S Translation of the book entitled The One Thousand Nights and One

Night, vol. I., five copies—subscribed by the Society.

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from Mr. Secretary Prinsep, forwarding copy of a Re.

port on the Weights, Measures, and Coins of Cabul and Bukhéra, compiled

by NowroseEe FurpDoonJeE.

[Note.—This Report is printed in the present number of the Journal.]

Lieut. G. C. Henueries, presenting his translation of certain chapters of

the Akhlagi Jalililee, from the Persian into Hindi and English.

Read a letter from Mr. W. T. Lewis, dated Penang, 12th Sept. 1838,

forwarding a piece of the metal of which the bell at Malacca is composed,

and stated, from what he had learnt from the artists, that the metal in

question was supposed to contain a large portion of gold.

Drawings of the Siamese Emperor were presented by Mr. J. Low.

Three copper coins of Ceylon were presented by Mr. Layarp.

Physical,

Read a letter from Mr. Secretary Prinsep, forwarding a list of the

ornithological specimens collected by Dr. Hutrer during his sojourn in the

Tenasserim Provinces.

A letter from Capt. G. T. Granam, offering to take charge of such

specimens of natural history as the Society may desire to send to his

Highness the Pasha of Egypt.

Resolved,—That the thanks of the Society be presented to Capt. Gransam

for his kind offer, and that he be informed that the Society has nothing

at present worthy of being presented to his Highness the Pasha.

X.—Meteorological Register.

918

‘op fo |'o ‘u,

2) Bs) T fa ou

*Azey '9 ‘a10/¥Q0 |'a ‘ul

*Azey*op | T }'0 on

*Aysiu ‘op |FT | SN

‘aug o"anier [AQ cu

‘op f0 |'m ‘u

‘op-d°o "7/FL fo cu

*May'I IID | T Ja cu

‘Surieaya | Z [tm cu

‘snquiu | 0 0)

‘e‘s*uyje Ss] OL |'M ‘Ss

‘snquiu {In| “4

*Byeaiyy's'd] J a “Ss

‘op Te, | aon

‘aug ‘op | It |e ‘u

‘azey ‘op | T |'0 ‘nN

asiep‘op | T |'a ‘au

‘s*Uwnd "I10] T |'8 ¢N

‘App ‘op | % |'a 's

“Og Ee wep's| f@ [qm 's

"J eaoge itd) ¢ [ta “Ss

ID*‘op | @ |'M °S

“Und ‘Op I *M ‘oO

‘op 6 |'M’°N

*aealo 6 | M’'N

> 7 a)

me || Se IS ele

8 g | Fo (25/5

cr . 3

» le

8 ‘purm | 812

"TOYO MA

‘NW 'd p UOOUlaIZy

19 | 69 | ¢9

—e—— | ——=

woe

“I9JIUIOIF

-AyW Tey Ag

-qrng

Pm Ag

*yurod |

-maq Ag

“a}aul |

-O1SAH UeH

GOT(EOTaG TZ \p°98

L‘t1 S°31ke 69

901 6‘OTic ‘OL

“9 pose

are

ADAAONIDOAWDADOSSOtIRS SODAS

aaa

“ULL

*yuiod-maq |

jeruarayiq |

‘uoissaidaq

“qINg-19 MM

*A13 -ainyel

-sUOIsA PT

92463 €61°62

$89°6S 8EL°6%

JSP

“UPA oGE

*IoJOUIOIL

“pues plo

‘aInssolg

-aduiay, forioydsouyy

ba} "It a § ‘op

‘op

*yuesesd 3 a)

*Azey ‘op

‘auy ‘99

“yueseald *fo] z

"AY und'119/ Fp

‘yueseord op) fg

*Iealo

‘op

*qex4s ‘und

"1 2p ‘401900

‘ulel pity

‘TINp 48-9

“AY *uINd “119

‘op

‘Iva[d ‘op

‘auy ‘op

“TTnuIND

‘Oop

“op

‘Ay wINd *I10

‘op

*1ea[9

“ANS

qoadsy

*IOYICAM

i—)

a 2S OUN 2 2

MOAN ON ASSN AAP SSS SO Sor

”~

AA HD OD 1) SON GN HESS HD 60 19 OD ROD AH OD CO IQ

—)

Aerts ANR ANF ASCAAAHONMH

*2010,q |

" 001}

-d911G

*ULIOY LL

[eMuerayig |

*19]9UI0OIS |

-ApareyAg

*1ajaul013

“AH

“ArowmorsA py

BL | 69 | OL | 98 | 3°B \a‘Z |¥‘az[oregia'18

L*Ol€ 01! 3'Sliz*selO°LL

“W ‘Vv OT ‘uooudato,7

BEST 4290100 fo Yruoyy 243 Mof“nyynojyQ “eofQ hnsspy 941 40 4doy “sajSibou [vo,bo|ONONTOTE

L°G8 116°

BUTT S'e/1p°se leess

T\16 | 0°(2)3°s9|8' 08! 2°28 segs

¢°9 138 806°

6°L |9°69|2°T8 828°

SZ 19021208). 668°

6°L |8°6916 ‘08 0°18 008, 186° $3

9°F 16°6916 508 £108 /0°6L 6r6" £3

8°¢ |9°32|6°99|6 64/208 E16‘ Go

8S 19°SL\C°6Z $38‘ 13

0*F |S*69\¢‘o/ gol‘ 06

OE |E°OLI9°L1 coe’ 61

GS‘ IS‘TLic'GL Ors’ gt

L°9 |0°EL\p°o8) 498° LI

8°2 |9°€1\g°cg/ £8 o'98 F68° 91

S°9 |0'PL| £°cg 698° cl

$°8 |9'0Lie* ta 098° FI

T9 |P£eZL) 1°98 pres eI

BL 9%EL 9°98 Lest at

9°9 | 0°F2)1'99/8°S8) 198i 168° Ii

166 |LtZ\o%59| | 298° ot

BL |c°91'6‘18/E°F8 5°88 cFg' 6

UL 10°6L628 618° 8

TE (O'FLie‘gs 608° L

OG |8°E2ia‘gel 108‘ 9

(6°6 |€*p4!9‘gg 0°€8 6°88, 408'63, €58°62| ¢

iS atte O') oy

va gar PCE we | Fa] 8

ige| Sis | 4 Mae | Fn] m

25) 5 FS e | S8Bi] ¢

eit (Sl sles! s

io}

° *gInssoilg =

ainjzereduia owaydsouny| =

0°68'258°62/6286z

JOURNAL

TEE ASLA TICS OCLE.T.Y.

No. 83.—N Ronen 1838.

].—An examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals, No. 4. By the

Hon'ble Grorcr Turnour, Esq. Ceylon Civil Service.

An ANALYSIS OF THE DIPAWANSO.

The design of my last article was to prove, that the chronological

authenticity of the Buddhistical records was intentionally deranged or

destroyed at the period of SAKya’s advent. In entering now upon the

examination of that portion of the Pali annals, which professes to

contain the genealogy of the royal dynasties of India, from the last

regeneration of the world to the manifestation of GdrTamo I have to

adduce in my own case another instance, to be added to the many already

on record, of the erroneous and exaggerated estimates, into which

orientalists may be betrayed in their researches, when they rely on the

information furnished by Indian pandits, without personally analizing

the authorities, from which that information is alleged to be obtained.

I should, however, be doing the Buddhist priesthood of the present day

in Ceylon very great injustice, if I did not at the same time avow, that

the too favorable expectations in which I have indulged, as to the

continuity, after having fully convinced myself of the chronological

extravagancies, of the Pali genealogical annals anterior to the sixth

century before the birth of Curist, have in no degree been produced by

wilful misrepresentations on their part. It has been already noticed*

by me elsewhere, that the study of the Pali language is confined,

among the natives of Ceylon, almost entirely to the most learned among

the priesthood, and is prosecuted solely for the purpose of acquiring a

higher order of qualification, for their sacerdotal functions, than those

priests possess, who can consult only the vernacular versions of their

* Introduction to the Mahdwanso.

5 Z

920 Pali Buddhistical Annals. [ Nov.

scriptures. Their attention, therefore, is principally devoted to the

examination of the doctrinal and religious questions contained in their

sacred books; and that study is moreover conducted in a spirit of im-

plicit faith and religious reverence, which effectually excludes searching

scrutiny, and is almost equally unfavorable to impartial criticism. The

tone of confidence with which my native coadjutors sought in the

Pitakattayan for the several ‘ resolves’ or ‘ predictions’ of BuppHo

which are alluded to in a former paper*, and the frankness of the

surprise they evinced, when they found that none of those ‘resolves’

were contained in the Pitakattayan, and only some of them in the

Atthakathd, preclude the possibility of my entertaining any suspicion

of wilful deception being practised. Confiding in their account of the

historical merits of BuDDHAGHOSO’s commentaries, which appeared to

me to be corroborated by the frequency of the reference made in

the Zikad of the Mahdwanso to those Atthakcthd, for details not

afforded in the 7ika, I had impressed myself with the persuasion, that

the Atthakathé thus referred to were BuDDHAGH¢s’s Pali commen-

taries. Great, as may be readily imagined, was our mutual disappoint-

ment, when after a diligent search, persevered in by the priests, with a

zeal proportioned to the interest they took in the inquiry, we were

compelled to admit the conviction that BuppiuaGuoso in translating

the Sihala (Singhalese) Atthakathad into Pali, did not preserve the

Indian genealogies in a connected and continuous form. He is found

to have extracted only such detached parts of them, as were useful for

the illustration of those passages of the Pitakattayan, on which, in the

course of his compilation, he might be commenting. He himself says

in his “Atthakathad on the Dighanikdyot, “ for the purpose of illustrat-

ing this commentary, availing myself of the Atthakathd, which was

in the first instance authenticated by the five hundred Arahantdé at

the FIRST CONVOCATION, as well as subsequently at the succeeding

convocaTions, and which were thereafter brought (from Mdgadha)

to Sihala by the sanctified Maninpo, and for the benefit of the inha-

bitants of Sithala were transposed into the Sthala language, from

thence I translated the Schala version into the delightful (classical)

language, according to the rules of that (the Pali) language, which

is free from all imperfections ; ometting only the frequent repetition of

the same explanations, but at the same time, WITHOUT REJECTING

THE TENETS OF THE THEROS RESIDENT AT THE MAHAWIHARO (at

Anuradhapura), who were like unto luminaries to the generation of

* Journal for September, 1837.

t Vide Journal of July, 1837.

1838.} Pali Buddhistical Annals. 921

theros and the most accomplished discriminators (of the true doc-

trines).” All, therefore, of these genealogies, excluded from his Attha-

kathd, which are now found only in the Tika of the Mahdwanso, or

in the Dipawanso, as well as much more perhaps, illustrative of the

ancient history of India, which the compilers of these two Ceylonese

historical works did not consider worth preserving, BuDDHAGHéso

must have rejected from his commentaries, to which he gave almost

exclusively the character of a religious work.

My Buddhist coadjutors are consequently now reluctantly brought

to admit, that the Mahawanso, with its Tika, and Dipawanso are the

only Pali records extant in Ceylon, which profess to contain the Indian

genealogies from the creation to the advent of SAxya; and that even

those records do not furnish the genealogies in a continuous form.

And, now that my mind is divested of the bias which had been created

by their previous representations, and which led me to attach great

importance to the historical portions of BupDpHaGuoso’s Atthakathé

I cannot but take blame to myself for having even for a time allowed

that impression to be made on me. The author of the Mahdwanso*,

in his Tiké, declares more than once that he compiles his work from the

Sthala Mahdwanso and Atthakatha of the Mahdwihdro, and from the

Sihala Atthakathé of the Uttarawihdro fraternities, as well as from

the Mahdwanso of the Uttarawihéro priests. The last mentioned of

these works alone, as far as I am able to form an opinion at present,

was composed in the Pali language, at the time MaudnAmo compiled

his Mahdwanso. I am induced to entertain this opinion from the

circumstance, that MAunANAmo’s quotations from that work alone are in

the metrical form, whereas all the translated quotations made by Pak

authors from Sthala authorities are invariably, as might have been

expected, rendered in prose. One of these quotations consists of the

identical two verses with which the Dipawanso opens, and at the close

of the Zikd a reference is made to the Dipawanso for explanation of

the violation of the Mahawtharo consecration, in the reign of Mana-

sENo. For these reasons, and as that work bears also the title of the

“ Mahdwanso” or “the great genealogy,” my Buddhist coadjutors

concur with me in thinking, that the Dipawanso now extant is the P4li

Mahdwanso of the Uttarawitharo fraternity. In fact the titles of

Dipa and Mahé, are indiscriminately given to both these histories. -

To prevent, however, their being confounded with each other, I shall

continue to reserve the title of Maha for MAuANAmo’s work, and that

’

* Pages xxxi. xxxii, xii, xliii. of the Introduction to the Mahdwanso.

a 2 2

922 Péli Buddhistical Annals. [ Nov.

of Dipa for the prior ce ren the author of which has not = been

ascertained.

It has been shown in the introduction to the Mahdwaiabe. that its

author ManHAnAMo compiled. his history in the reign of his nephew

Duartasino the monarch of Ceylon who reigned between A. D. 459 and

477, from the materials above described, a part of which was the ver-

sion of the Atthakathad brought by Mauinpo from India in 807

before Christ, and translated by him into the Sthala language. This

fact, coupled with many other circumstances inadvertently disclosed in

the histories of the convocaTions, go far to prove that the Pitakat-

tayan and Aitthakathé were actually reduced to writing from the

commencement of the Buddhistical era, and that the concealment of

their record till the reign of the Ceylonese ruler WaTTAGAMINI, be-

tween B. C. 104 and 76, was a part of the esoteric scheme of that

creed, had recourse to in order to keep up the imposture as to the

priesthood being endowed with the gift of inspiration. The cessation

of the concealment of these scriptures at that particular period, though

attributed to the subsidence of the spirit of inspiration, in all probabi-

lity, proceeded from the public disorders* consequent upon the Choélian

invasion, which led to the expulsion of that king and the priesthood

from Anurddhapura by a foreign enemy, and to their fugitive exist-

ence in the wilderness of the island during a period of nearly 15 years.

The Dipawanso from its being quoted by the author of the Mahd-

wanso, 13 unquestionably a prior work ; but as its narrative extends to

the reign of Mandseno in A. D. 302, its priority cannot exceed 150

years. In the Journal of December last, 1 have mentioned the circum-

stances under which I obtained possession of a Péli copy of the Dipa-

wanso, in avery imperfect state, written in the Burmese character.

As this work and the Mahdwanso, with its Tika, are the best P§éli

records I possess of the Indian genealogies, I shall proceed to make

extracts from such parts of the Dipawanso as may throw light on this

subject ; adding a note in those cases, in which the 7%k¢ is either fuller

than, or at variance from, the Dépawanso. I shall not attempt to tabu-

larize these dynasties, as the lists of kings is avowedly and manifestly

incomplete, and as no continuous chronological results could be safely

deduced from any table formed from such mystified data. It will be

observed that the names of even the three rajas, during whose reigns

the three Buddha who preceded Go’ramo were manifested in this kappo,

are omitted in these lists. And yet there are detached notices of those

kings, as well as of other Indian rajas, both in the text and commen-

taries of the Buddhistical scriptures, which are in themselves well

* Vide Mahdwanso, Chap. 33.

1838.] Pélhi Buddhistical Annals. 123

worthy of consideration, and to which 1 shall advert in future contri-

butions.

The author of the Dipawanso has certainly spared no pains in his

endeavours to make the links of the Théraparamparé chain complete,

and consistent with chronology. He, however, only gives the succes-

sion of preceptors, who were the guardians of the Winéyo section of the

Pitakattayan, commencing with Updri, whose death is placed in the

sixth year of the reign of Upayo; while the incongruities I have dwelt

upon in the paper No. 2, have reference to SaBHAKAMI, who though a

cotemporary disciple of Buppuo, has been represented to have presided

at the sECOND CONVOCATION, a century after SAxya’s death; when

he must, from the date of his uwpasampadd ordination, have been at

least 140 years old. But even this succession of the Winéyan line of

preceptors, the chronological particulars of which are pretended to be

given with so much precision in the following extracts, will not stand

the test of scrutiny by a person conversant with the rules that govern

the Buddhistical church. It is an inviolable law of that code, established

by BuppHo himself at an early period of his mission, and adhered to

to this day—to which rule there are only two well known exceptions —~

that no person, whether a noviciate priest called Sdmanéro, or an

ascetic layman, however learned or pious he may be, can be ordained

an upasampadd before he has completed his twentieth year. The two |

exceptions alluded to are the instances of SumaANno and SopdKxo who

were ordained wpasampadaé at seven years of age.

It will be seen that this line of preceptors, extending from the date

of Buppuo’s death to the THIRD CoNVOCATION, a term of 236 years,

is made to consist of five successions. Upari the cotemporary of

Buppuo, is stated to have been 60 years old in the eighth year of the

reign of AJATASATTU, which is the 16th year A.B. He is represent-

ed to have survived Buppuo thirty years, and to have died in the

6th of Upayo’s reign in A. B. 30. It is not however, mentioned how

many years he had been an upasampadd, and all these dates work out

therefore without disclosing any discrepancy.

DXsaxo is represented to be his pupil and immediate successor,

and he is stated to be 45 years old in the 10th of NaGAsoxo’s reign,

which falls to A. B. 58. He was born, therefore, A. B. 13, and his

preceptor Updii died A. B. 30. Supposing his ordination had been

put off to the last year of Upa’ni’s life, le could not have been

more than 17, when made an upasampadd. So far from being quali-

fied to be the custos of the Winéyo, he wanted three years of the age

to make him admissable for ordination. But we are further told, that

924 Pali Buddhistical Annals. [Nov.

he died at the age of 64 in the eighth of Susundco’s reign, which

falls to A. B. 80: having then been an wpasampadd 50 years, he must

necessarily have been ordained at 14 years of age. But there is mani-

festly some trifling error somewhere; for, by the latter dates he must

have been born not A. B. 13, but A. B. 16.

So’nako was Ddsako’s successor: he was 40 in the 10th year of

KALAsoxko’s reign, which was A. B. 100; he was born therefore

in 60, and he is stated to have died at the age of 66 in the sixth of

the reign of the Nannos, which falls to A. B. 124. He was therefore

only 20 years old when his preceptor died: but it is specifically stated

that he had been a learned upasampada 44 years when he died ; and

consequently So’naKo also could only have been 16 years when ordained.

Siccawo and CHANDAWo or CHANDAWAJJI were the co-disciples

and successors of So/NAKO. SIGGAWO was 64 years old in the second

of CHANDAGUTTO’S* reign A. B. 164, and he died aged 76 in the 14th

of that reign A. B. 176. He was born therefore A. B. 100, and yet

we are told, that it was in this very year, the 10th of the reign of

KAL&so’Ko, they were ordained upasampadd, by So’nako. There is

a manifest error, therefore, in the term of five years assigned for S1c-

GAwo’s wpasampaddship. As his ordaining preceptor So’'naKo died

A. B. 124, he must have been at that time only 24 years old, and at his

own death an upasampada of 76 years’ standing,—a term co-equal with

his natural life. In various parts of the Atthakatha, and in the

fifth chapter of the Mahdwanso likewise it is stated that they were

“adult priests” at the time the sECoND CoNVOCATION was held; and

indeed it is specifically stated in page 30, that StcGawo was 18 years

old when he was first presented to So'NAKo. The pretended prophecy,

delivered to him and CHANDAWAJJI at the close of that CONVOCATION,

would consequently be nullified at once, if their birth be not dated

anterior to A. B. 100: manifestly, therefore, these dates also are an

imposition.

Lastly, MoGGALIPpuTTATISso was their disciple ; he was ordained in

the second of CHanpaGutto A. B. 164, and he was 66 in the sixth

of DaamMAso ko A. B. 220; he was born, therefore, in A. B. 154, and

could only have been 14 years old at the death of S1¢Gawo, when he

became the chief of the Winéyo preceptors. He is stated to have died in

the 26th of DuammdAso’ko, A. B. 240, aged 80. This gives A. B. 160

instead of A. B. 154 for his birth, being a discrepancy of six years.

* J assign in these remarks 24 years to the reign of CHANDAGUTTO, which will

bring Asoxo’s accession to A. B. 214, andhis inauguration, four years afterwards,

to A. B. 218.

1838.] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 925

On pointing out to my pandits, that, even in this elaborate adjustment

of the succession of preceptors, the number of lives given is found

to be insufficient to fill up a term of 236 years, without bringing the

several preceptors into office before they had attained the prescribed

age, they at once decided, that the author of the Dipawanso has put

forth an erroneous statement, and that the whole ought to be rejected

as unfounded. How the discrepancies are to be rectified they do not

suggest, beyond hazarding a conjecture, that each preceptor, like

SABHAKAMI, must have lived to a more advanced age; and that each

succeeding preceptor consequently had attained a maturer standing at

the period of his succession.

It is time, however, that I should proceed to extracts from the

Dipawanso.

The Third Bhdnawdro of the Dipawanso.

‘‘ Omitting the r4jas who existed in former“kappd, I will in the fullest manner

narrate (the history of) the rajas of the present creation. _I shall perspicuously set

forth the regions in which they existed, their name and lineage, the term of their

existence, and the manner in which they governed: whatever that narrative may

be, attend ye thereto.

‘‘The first individual who was inaugurated a raja, the protector of the land, was

named MAHA’SAMMATo ; he was superlatively endowed with personal beauty ; that

Khattiyo exercised the functions of sovereignty.

‘¢Ro'yo was his son, WARARO/’Jo, the monarch KALYA’/NO; WARAKALYA/NO,

Uro’sATHO”, MANDA’To* the seventh in succession, a supreme ruler of the four

dipdft, endowed with great wealth; CHaARo, the raja UpacHaro, and CHE’TIYO

abounding in riches; MucHaALo; MAHA’MUCHALO, MUCHALINDO, SA’GARO;3

SA/GARADE’WO, BHA’RATO, BHA’GI’RATHO the Khattiyo ; Rucni’, MAHA/RUCHI,

PaTa’Po, MAHA’PATA’PO, PANADO, MAHA’PANA’DO, the Khattiyo SUDASSANO,

MAHA’SUDASSANO, and in like manner two of the name of NE’RU; and ACHCHIMAt,

(were successively the sons of each preceding ruler.) The term of existence of these

twenty-eight rajas was an Asankhéyydn ; and the capitals in which these monarchs,

whose existence extended to an Asankhéyydn, reigned, were Kusdwdti, Rdjagahan

and Methild.”

(Here follows the rule by which an Asankhéyydn is to be computed.)

‘*The descendants of ACHCHIMA’ were one hundred ; and they ruled supreme in

their capital called Sakulajs. The last of these was the Khattiyo ARINDAMO;

* In the Mahdwanso, I have been misled by the plural Mandatd, and reckoned

two kings of that name. I see by the Tikd the name should be inthe singular

Manddto. The twenty-eight réjas who lived for an Asankheyydn include therefore

MAuHA‘/SAMMATO. ‘

+ Jambudipo, Uttarukuru, Aparagdéydnan and Pubbawidého.

+ This name also has been erroneously omitted by me in the Mahdwanso.

Achchiméd was there read Pachchima. The Tiké, however, shows that the Dipa-

wanso is correct.

§ Inthe Tikd, it is further stated: ‘' The eldest son of AcHCHIMA’ was the

monarch WATTAPA’RA’SA’NI, though his name be not preserved, quitting Mitheld in

the same manner that the Okkdka family quitting Bardnasi founded Kapilawathu in a

926 Pal Buddhistical Annals. { Nov.

his descendants, fifty-six monarchs in number, reigned supreme in their capital

Ayujjhapura.

‘* The Jast of these was DuPPASAHo, a wealthy monarch: his descendants were

sixty rulers, who reigned supreme in their capital Bardnasi.

‘“‘ The last of these was AJITAJANO ; his descendants eighty-four thousand in

number ruled supreme in their capital Kapilanagaran.

‘¢ The last of these was BRAHMADATTO, greatly endowed with riches ; his descen--

dants were thirty-six réjas in number, who reigned supreme in their capital

Hatthipura.

‘¢The last of these was the raja KAMBALAWASABHO; his descendants were

thirty-two monarchs, who reigned supreme in their capital Ekachakkhu.

twenty-eight monarchs, who reigned supreme in their capital Wajirdpura.

‘¢ The last of these was the raja SODHANO ; his descendants were twenty monarchs

and they reigned supreme in their capital Madhurd.

‘+The last of these was the réja DHAMMAGUTTO, powerful in his armies ; his

descendants were eighteen monarchs, who reigned supreme in their capital

Aritthapura.

‘‘The last of these was the r4ja NARINDASITTHI*! ; his descendants were

seventeen kings, who reigned supreme in their capital Indapattapura.

‘‘The last of these was BRAHMEDE’wo? raja; his descendants were sixteen

monarchs, who reigned in their capital Ekachakkhu.

‘¢ The last of these was the monarch BALADATTO®; his descendants were fourteen

rulers, who reigned supreme in their capital Késambinagaran.

‘« The last of these was celebrated under the title of BHADDADE’ Wot ; his descen-

dants were nine kings, who reigned in their capital Kannakochchhanagaran.

‘¢ The last of these was the celebrated NARADEWO; his descendants were seven

monarchs, who reigned supreme in their capital Réjdnanagaran.

‘‘The last of these was the raja MAHINDo ; his descendants were twelve kings,

who reigned supreme in their capital Champdkanagaran.

“¢ The last of these was the monarch NA’GADE’wo ; his descendants were twenty-

five rulers, who reigned supreme in their celebrated capital Mithila.

‘* The last of these was BUDDHaDaTTo’, ardéja powerful by his armies, his descen-

dants were twenty-five monarchs, who reigned supreme in their capital Rdjagahan.

““ The last of these was DiPANKARo ; his descendants were twelve rajas, who

reigned supreme in their capital Takkasild.

‘* The last of these was the réja TALISAKARO, his descendants were twelve rulers,

who reigned supreme in their capital Kusindgra.

‘* The last of these was the raja PURINDO; his descendants were nine kings, who

reigned supreme in Témaliti.

** The last of these was the worthy monarch SA’GARADE’wo, whose son MAKHA’-

DE’Wotf was pre-eminent for his deeds of charity ; his descendants were eighty-four

thousand monarchs, who reigned supreme at Mithild.

subsequent age, established himself at Kasdwati, raised the Chhata there, and there

his dynasty flourished. His lineal successors in that empire were in number ninety-

nine, the last of whom was ARINDAM, and they all ruled there under the designa-

tion of the Achchimé dynasty.’’ I should infer from this passage that the capital

called Sakula in the Dipawanso should be Kusdwati.

* In the Tikd there are the following variations of appellation from the Dipawanso :

1. Brahmasiwo. 2. Brahmadatto. 3. Baladéwo. 4. Hatthidewo. 5. Samud-

dhadatto.

+ The Tika observes in reference to the Mahdwanso, that according to the

1888.] Pili Buddhistical Annals. 927

46 The last of these was NE’M1, a monarch who received offerings from the Déwd and

was a Chakkawatti (powerful sovereign), whose dominions were bounded by the

ocean: the son of NE’MI was KALA’/KAJANAKO*; his son was SAMANKURO: and

his son was ASo’Ko; and his descendants were eighty-four thousand rulers whe

reigned supreme in their capital Bardnuasi.

‘* The last of these was the raja WIJAYo, a wealthy monarch: his son was WiJ1-

TASENO who was endowed with great personal splendor. DHAMMASE’NO, NA/GA-

sz’NO, SAMATHO, Disampati, Ratnu, Kuso; Maua’kxuso, Nawaratuo, Dasaratuo,

Ra/’mo, Bria’Ratuo, Cuitrapasst, AtrHapasst, Susa’ro0, OxKxa’/Kot, OKKA’KAMUKHO’,

Nirevro, Cuanpima’, Cuanpamukno, Srrrra ya, Sansayo, the munarch Wessan-

TARO, Jato, StHawa’uano and Srmassaro. These were enterprising monarchs,

who upheld the pre-eminence of their dynasty ; and his (Sinassaro’s) descendants

were eighty-two thousand, who (all) reigned supreme in their capital Kapilawatthu.

“ The last of these was JAYASE’NO; his son was SE’HAHANU who was endowed

with great personal splendor. Unto the said Se’/HAHANU there were five sons.

Those five brothers were SUDDHO’DANO, DH’OTO’/DANO, SUKKO’DANO, GHATITO-

DANO and AMITODANO., All these réjas were distinguished as ODANot. SrpparT-

THO, the saviour of the world, was the son of SuDDHO’DANO; and after the

birth of his illustrious son RAHULO, finally reliquished (worldly grandeur) for the

purpose of attaining Buddhohood.

‘¢ The whole of these monarchs, who were of great wealth aia power, were in

number one lakh, four nahutani§ and three hundred. Such is the number of

monarchs of the dynasty from which the Bodhisatto (Buddho elect) is sprung.

“« Perishable|| things are most assuredly transitory, it being their predestiny that

after being produced they should perish; they, accordingly, being produced, pass

away. To arrest this (eternity of regeneration and destruction, by the attainment

of nibbdnan) is indeed to be blessed.’’

The conclusion of the Mahdrdjawanso.

‘¢ The raja SUDDHO’DANO, the son of Se’HAHANU was a monarch who reigned

in the city called Kapila ; and the raja BHA’TIYO was then the monarch who

reigned at Rdjagahdn, a city situated in the centre of five] mountains, These two

rulers of men, SUDDHO’/DANO and BHA’riyo, the descendants (of royal dynasties)

from the commencement of the kappo, were intimately attached to each other.

‘¢ (By Bimpisa’Ro the son of BHA’T1¥0) these five wiskes were conceived in the

eighth year of his age. ‘Should my royal parent invest me with sovereignty :

Atthakath{ MAKHA/’DEWo is reckoned among the eighty-five thousand successors of

Sagaradewo, whereas that number should be exclusive of him.

' * Here also the Tiké notices in reference to the Mahdwanso that the eighty-

five thousand are to be reckoned exclusive of SAMANKURO and AS6Ko.

+ Vide Mahdwanso Introduction, p. xxxv. for the establishment of the Sékyan

ay iat of Okkakamukho,

~ This word literally signifies ‘‘ boiled rice :”’ no reason is assigned for adopting

the designation.

§ In this sense a nahutan is 10,000, making therefere 140,300 monarchs. Accord-

ing to the Tika there were 252,539 rajas from MAHA’SAMMATO to OKKAKO, the

Ikswaku of the Hindus.

|| This is a passage of the Pitakattaydn as propounded by Sa/Kya,

G@ The names of these mountains are Isigiii, Wibhdro, in which is situated the

Satiapanni cave in which the first convocation was held; Wéputio; Pandawo

and Gejjhakato, the mountain where BuDDHo dwelt last in the neighbourhood of

Rajagalda.

6 A

928 Pili Buddhistical Annals. [ Nov.

should a supreme of men (Buddho) be bornin my dominions: should a TATHA’GATO

select me for the first person to whom he presented himself: should he administer’

to me the heavenly dhammo; and should I comprehend that supreme dhammo—

these will be blessings vouchsafed to me.’ Such were the five wishes conceived

by BimMBIsA’Ro.

‘* Accordingly, on the demise of his father, he was inaugurated in the fifteenth

year of his age: within his dominions the supreme of the world was born:

TATHA'GATO repaired to him as the first person to whom he presented himself : pro-

pounded the heavenly dkammo: and the monarch comprehended it.

‘¢ MAHA’WE'RO was not less than thirty-five years old, and the monarch BimBi-

SA'RO, was in the thirtieth year of his age. Go’ramo therefore was five years

senior to BimBisA’Ro. That monarch reigned fifty-two years, thirty-seven of

which he passed contemporaneously with Buddho.

‘* AJA’/TASATTU (his son) reigned thirty-two years: in the eighth year of his

inauguration, the supreme Buddho attained nibbdnan. From the time that the omni-

scient Buddho, the most revered of the world and the supreme of men attained

Buddhohood, this monarch reigned twenty-four years.”

The conclusion of the third Bhanawéro.

Notr.—A Bhdnawéro ought to contain 250 gath4. This section is

only equal to 87, and some of the verses are incomplete. I can how-

ever detect no want of continuity in the narrative.

The fourth Bhdnawdéro commences with an account of the first con-

vocation, which is already described in No. 1], of this analysis. This

chapter then proceeds with a chronological narrative of the history of

India, specifying also the contemporaneous dates of the reigns of the

monarchs of Ceylon, and of the death of those inspired Thérd, who are

considered to have constituted the connecting links of the chain called

the Théraparamparé or generation of preceptors.

The following are the most important passages of this section :

‘‘ The sixteenth year after the nibbdnan of the saviour of the world was the

twenty-fourth of AJA/TASATTU, and the sixteenth of Wisayo (the raja of Lankd).

The learned Upa’t1 was then sixty years old. Da’sako entered into the upasam-

pada order in the fraternity of Upa’L1. Whatever may be the extent of the doctrines

of the most revered Buddho which had been promulgated by that vanquisher as the

nine integral portions of his dispensation, the whole thereof Upa’Li taught. The

said Upa’ct thus taught the same, having learnt, in the most perfect manner, the

whole of the nine portions of his doctrine, which have been auricularly perpetuated,

from BuppHo himself. BuppHo has declared of Upa’zi inthe midst of the congre-

gated priesthood, ‘ Upa’11 being the first in the knowledge of winéyo, is the chief

in my religion.’ He who had thus been selected and approved in the midst of the

assembled priesthood, and who had a numerous fraternity, taught the three Pitake

to a fraternity of a thousand bikkhus, of whom Da’sako was the chief desciple : he

taught them (especially) to Da’sako and to five hundred Théré, who had overcome

the dominion of sin, were of immaculate purity and morals, and versed in the wada

(history of the schisms). The thero UPa’t1i who had a great fraternity continued

to teach the wincéyo for full thirty years after the nibbdnan of the supreme BuDDHO.

The said Upa/.i taught the whole of the eighty-four thousand connor parts

of the doctrines of the divine teacher to the learned DA’saxko.

— 1838.] Pali Buddhistical Annals. 929

‘‘Da’sAko having learned the whole of the Pitako in the fraternity of Upa’tt,

and held the office of Upajjhdyo (conferer of the sacerdotal ordination of upasam-

padd) propounded the same. The chief of the great fraternity (UpA’LI) having

deposited ( ftapefwana) the whole wineyo in the charge of the learned DA’sako, died.

The monarch UDAYO reigned sixteen years. It was in the sixth year of his reign

that the thero Upa’u1 demised.

‘* A certain trader named So'NAKo who had come from the Kdsi country, and was

proud of his high descent, entered the sacerdotal order in the religion of the divine

teacher (BuppDHo) at the Wéluwano* wiharo in the mountain-girt city (Réjagahan),

Da’sako, the chief of the confraternity, sojourned in the mountain-girt city, the

eapital of the Magadha nation, thirty-seven years, and initiated SGNAKo into the

sacerdotal order. The learned Da’sako was forty-five years old, in the tenth year

of the reign of the raja Na GADA’so, and twentieth of the reign of the raja PANDU

(of Lankd).

‘‘The thero SO’NAKO became an upasampadd in the fraternity of the thero Da’sako

and the thero DA’sako taught So’NakKo the nine component parts of the faith ; and

having learned the same from the preceptor who ordained him, he also taught the

same. The thero DA’sAxko having invested S6NAKO thero, who was the senior

pupil in his fraternity, with the office of chief over the wineyo, died in the sixty-

fourth year of his age.

‘¢ At the expiration of ten years and half a month of the reign of the réja Ka’La’-

SOKO, the thero named SONAKkoO was forty years old, and he had then been a thero

learned in the doctrines for fourteen years ; and at the period of the expiration of

ten years and six months, the thero S6naKO, who was the chief ofa great fraternity,

conferred the upasampadd ordination on SIGGAWO and CHANDAWO.

At that perioda century had expired from the time that BHaGaw4a/’ had attained

nibbandn, and certain (bikkhus) of Wesdli native of Wajji set forth these ten (new)

tenets of descipline.”

Here follows an account of the schism, and of the seconp ConvocaA-

TION held in consequence, in the tenth year of the reign of KA.tAsoxo,

with which the fourth Bhénawdro concludes, the particulars of which

are given in the paper, No. 2, and inthe Mahdéwanso. The fifth com-

mences with recapitulating the principal particulars of the rirsv and

SECOND CONVOCATIONS and the schisms, and then proceeds :

‘‘ In the second year of the reign of CHUNDAGUTTO, when SIGGAWO was sixty-four

years old, which was the fifty-eighth year of the reign of PANDUKA’BHAY#O, the

réja (of Lankéd) MoGGALIPuTTO was ordained an upasampadd in the fraternity of

SigGAwo; and the said MOGGALIPUTTATISsO, having acquired the knowledge of

the win¢yo in the fraternity of CHANDAWAJJI, was released from the sins insepa-

rable from liability to future regeneration, Both SigGawo and CHANDAWAJSI

taught the whole of the Pitako, which embraces both (the wineyo, discipline, and

dhammo, doctrine), to the pre-eminently endowed MoGGALIPUTTO. S1GGawo of

profound wisdom died at the age of seventy-six, having constituted the pre-eminently

endowed MOGGALIPUTTO the chief of the wineyo. CHANDAGUTTO reigned twenty-

four years. In the fourteenth year of his reign S1gGawo died.

*¢ In the sixth year of the reign of DHAMMA/SOKO, MOGGALIPUTTO was sixty-six

years old. MAHINDO was then ordained an upasampadd in his fraternity, and

acquired a knowledge of the Pifako.

** Ups’. attained his seventy-fourth, DA/sako his sixty-fourth,the thero So’/NAKO

* This word signifies the bamboo grove.

oA a

930 Péli Buddhistical Annals. [ Nov.

his sixty-sixth, Sre¢Gawo his seventy-sixth, and MoccaurrpuTro his eightieth

year. The following are the periods that all of these theros were upasampadd, of

whom at all times the learned UPA’LI was recognized as the first chief, viz. ;

Da’sAKO was an wpasampada fifty, S6naKxo, forty-four, S1g¢Gawo five*, and

MoGGALIPUTTO, sixty-eight years.

‘‘ Upayo reigned sixteen years, and in the sixth year of UpAyo’s reign, UPA’LI

died. y

‘‘ SusAnA/GO, the opulent monarch, reigned ten years, in the eighth year of

SusANnaA’GOo’s reign, Da’sAko died.

‘‘ Att the demise of SusaAnA’GO he had ten brothers, who collectively reigned

twenty-two years, in great celebrity. In the sixth year of their reign SGNaKo died.

‘‘ CHANDAGUTTO reigned twenty-four years, and in the fourteenth year of his

reign SiGGawo died.

‘* The celebrated DHAMMA’SOKO the son of BINDASA’RO reigned thirty-seven

years. In the twenty-sixth year of his reign, MoGGALIPUTTO died, having caused

religion to be glorified, and having completed the full measure of human existence.

four, having appointed his learned disciple Da’sako to the office of chief wineyo.

“‘ Da/sakO, died at the age of sixty-four, having appointed his senior learned

disciple So’nAKo to the office of chief of the wineyo.

‘6 So/NAKO, who was endowed with the six abinnd, died at the age of sixty-six,

having appointed his arahat son (disciple) St@GAwo to the office of chief of wincyo.

‘¢ SyeGAwo who was endowed with the six abinnd, died at the age of seventy-six,

having appointed his son (disciple) MoceALriPutTTo to the office of chief of wineyo.

‘¢ MOGGALIPUTTATISSO died at the age of eighty, having appointed his disciple

MAHINDO to the office of chief of wineyo.

The conclusion of the fifth Bhanawéro.

the death of the supreme BuDDHo. At the installation of PlyADASSANO preterna-

tural manifestations took place.”

(For these manifestations I must refer to the Mahdwanso.) —

“¢ That royal youth, who was the grandson of CHANDAGUTTO and the son of

BrnpvsA/RO was at that time the (karamolino ) ruler of Ujjeni.

‘¢In the course of an official circuit he visited Wessanagurdn ; where lived a damsel,

the daughter of a Sitthi, who became celebrated under the name of Dewi. By his

connection with her, an illustrious son was born. (The said son) MAHINDO and

(his daughter) SANGAMITTA’ formed the resolution to enter the order of priesthood.

Both these individuals having been thus ordained, overcame subjection to regene-

ration. ASsé6Ko was then reigning in the illustrious Pataliputto. In the third year

of his inauguration he became a convert to the religion of the supreme Buppuo,

(If it be asked) what the duration of the term is, from the date of the parinibbdnan

of the supreme BuppDHo to the date of the birth of MAHINDO, who was descended

from the Moriyan dynasty, (the answer is) two hundred and five years. In that

year MAHINDO the son of As6KO was born. In Maninpo’s tenth year, his

father put his own brothers to death; and he past four years in reducing Jambudipo

to order. Having put to death his hundred brothers, and reduced the dynasty to one

* This is evidently a mistake.

+ The reign of Ka’LA’SOKO is omitted, who was the father of the Nandos who are

here designated the brothers of SusANA’cO.

t Having erroneously written this name ‘‘ PryapAsINo’’ in a former paper,

Vo}. VI. p. 1056, you have been led to suppose it was the genitive case of Piyaddsi.

1838.] Pélki Buddhistical Annals. 931

(family), they (the people) inaugurated him in the fourteenth year of MAHINDo’s

age. Asédxo, who was endowed with great personal superiority and good fortune,

and was destined to rule the world, was inaugurated under miraculous manifesta-

tions. They installed PryaADASSANO on his completing his twentieth year*,’’

The account of the interview with Mgrodho, the expulsion of the

brahman sects, and the construction of the wiharos is then given, to

the close of the sixth Bhdnawdro.

The seventh Bhanawaro begins with the account of Mauytnpo and

SanGAmITT< being admitted into the order of the priesthood, (the

former was at once ordained upasampadd, being of the age of

twenty ; but the latter remained a samanéri for two years, being only

_eighteen,) in the sixth year of Aso’Ko’s inauguration. These particu-

lars will be found in the Mahdwanso.

‘‘ ASOKADHAMMO was fifty-four years old at the time of his inauguration, and at

the time of AséxkADHAMMo being inaugurated, MOGGALIFUTTATISSO was sixty-

six. MAHINDO entered into the order of priesthood in the fraternity of MoGoALtr-

PUTTATIsSO, MAHA’DE’woO performed the ceremony of admission, and MojsHanvro,

the ceremony of the upasampadd ordination. These were the three preceptors who

qualified MawiInDo for the priesthood. The said preceptor MoccauipurTatisso

taught MAHINDO, who illuminated (Lanka) dipo, the whole of the Pitako, both as

regards its import and its doctrine. In the tenth year of MauHINnDOo’s (ordination)

having acquired a perfect knowledge of the whole creed, he became the head of

a fraternity, and (pachariyo ) asubpreceptor (under MoGGALi). The said MAHINDo,

having thus acquired a knowledge of the perfectly profound and well arranged

(Pitakattayan), containing the two doctrinal portions (the wineyo and the

athidhammo) and the suttako (the parables) as well as the history of the schisms of

the preceptors, became a perpetuater of the same. MocGcALIPuTTATISso thus per-

fected MauINDO the son of As6xO, in the knowledge of the three wejja and the four

patisambhida, and (thereby) MoccaLIPUTTaTIsso permanently established in his

disciple MaHINDO, the whole of the Pitakattayan which had been thus handed down

to him.

‘‘ NignépHo was admitted into the priesthood in the third year of Aséxo’s reign,

his brother (T1sso) in the fourth, and in the sixth his son MAHINDo. Trsso0 and

SUMITTAKO, the two theros who were descended from the Kunti, and were endowed

with supernatural powers, died in the eighth year of the reign of Aséxo. From

these two princes having entered the order of priesthood, and from (the manner in

which) these two theros died, multitudes of the khattiya and brahman castes pro-

claimed themselves to be devotees in this creed, and great benefits and honors

resulted to the religion of the vanquisher ; and the heretics, who had been influential

schismatics, lost all their ascendancy. The pdndarangd, the jatild, niganthd, chétake

and other sects for seven years continued, however, to perform the updsatha in

separate fraternities. The sanctified, pious, and virtuous ministers (of BuppHo)

would not attend those updésatha meetings. At this conjuncture, it was the two

hundred and thirty-sixth year (of the Buddhistical era),’”’

The Dipawanso then gives the account of the THIRD CoNVOCATION

and of the dispersion of the missionaries for the promulgation of Bud-

* This is evidently a clerical error, his son MAHINDo being then fourteen years

old. It was subsequently mentioned that Asékodhammo was forty-five years old at

his inauguration.

932 Pali Buddhistical Annals. [Nov.

dhism through the adjacent kingdoms of Asia, viz. Gandhéro, Mahiso,

Aparantako, Maharatthan, Yond, Hiwawanto, Suwannabhiimi and

Lankddipo.

The ninth Bhdnawdro commences with the history of Ceylon, and

it is singular that the origin of the Sih4la race is here divested of the

fabulous character given to it in the Mahdwanso to the extent formerly

suggested by me. If the popular legend of the lion (stho) had not

been previously known, the account in the Dipawanso would have

been rendered, by any unprejudiced translator, into English without

naming the fabulous monster, literally thus :

‘¢ This island Lanka acquired the name of Sthala from Siho*, Listen to this narra-

tive of mine, being the account of the origin of this island and this dynasty. The

daughter of a king of Wango, having formed a connection with a certain Siho, who

found his livelihood in a wilderness, gave birth to two children. These two children

named SI'HABA’HU and SE’wALI were of prepossessing appearance. The mother

was named Susima’, and the father was called StHo, and at the termination of

sixteen years, secretly quitting that wilderness, he (S1’/HABA’HU) founded a city,

to which capital he gave the name of Sthapura. In that Lala kingdom, the son

of S1’H0 becoming a powerful monarch, reigned supreme in his capital Sihapura.”

This Bhdnawdro proceeds with the account of Wisayo landing in

Ceylon, and the establishment of his dynasty, omitting however, entirely,

Wisayo’s marriage with Kuwe/nI, and narrates the reigns of the ensu-

ing kings to De’ WANANPIYATISSO, assigning to them reigns of the same

duration, as that given to them in the Mahdwanso. We then find the

synchronisms in the chronologies of India and Ceylon, which are quot-

ed in the introduction to the Mahdwanso from the Atthakathd in the

Wineyo.

I do not notice any matter in the Dipawanso, not found in the

Mahdwanso, till I come to the eighteenth Bhanawdro. ‘The théripa-

rampard, or succession of preceptresses is there given, taken from the

Atthakatha on the Wineyo in the following words :

‘* She who was renowned under the appellation of Pajdpati, and was of the

Gotramo family, endowed with six abinnd and with supernatura) gifts, the younger

sister, born of the same mother, of MAHA’MA‘YA’ (the mother of BuDDHO) : and

who, with the same affection as MA'yYA herself nourished BHAGAWa’ at her breast,

was established in the highest office (among priestesses).

* (+ Pachchantan,” 1 have translated, ‘‘ foreign” in the Mahdwanso, as the word

is compounded of ‘‘ puti” and ‘‘antan.’’ It would be better rendered as “‘ situated

on the confines.”

Wanawdsi is here omitted, probably by an error of transcription.

This passage is important Mdtacha Susimanuma, pitécha Sihasawhayo. Ut ‘ Stho”

was intended for a “‘lion,’? ‘ Sawhayo” which signifies ‘‘named”’ or ‘* called’’

would not be used.

1838.] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 933

‘The following are the priestesses who (in succession) acquired a perfect know-

ledge of the wineyo, viz.: KHE’Ma’ UpPaLawaNNa’, two of each name, and Pata’-

CHA’RI, DHaMMADINNA’, SOBHITA’, Istpa’stKa’, Wisa’/KHa’, As6Ka’, SAPALA’,

SanGHaDa’sI, gifted with wisdom, Nanpa’ and DuamMapa’LA’, celebrated for

her knowledge of Winéyo.

‘* The theri SANGHAMITTA’, UTTAR’, who was gifted with wisdom, Hk/MAPA/SA,

Dassata’, AGGAMITTA’, Dasika’, PHEGGUPABBATA’, MaTTA’, SaLaLa’, DHAMMA-

Da/SiyA—these juvenile priestesses came hither from Jambudipo, and propounded the

Winayapitako in the capital designated Anuradhapura—they propounded not only the

five divisions of the wineyo, but also the seven Pakarandni.,

‘¢ The females who were ordained upasampadd by them in this island were Séma,

devoted to Dhammo, Goripi/P1’, DHAMMADA/’/SIYI, DHAMMAPA/’LA’ versed in the

wineyo, MAHILA conversant in the dhutawadd, So'BHANA, DHAMMATA, PASSANAGA-=

MIssA’, also versed in the wineyo, and Sa’Ta KA‘LI profound in the theri contro-

versy, and Uttara’.

_ 66 Under the instructions of A’BHAYo* celebrated for his illustrious descent, the

aforesaid priestesses as well as SUMANA’f renowned for the doctrinal knowledge

among her sisterhood, a maintainer of the Dhutangd, a vanquisher of the passions,

of great purity of mind, devoted to dhammo and wineyo, and UTTaRa’ endowed with

wisdom, together with their thirty thousand priestesses, were the first priestesses

who propounded at Anurddhapura, the wineyo, the five Nikaye (of the Suttapitako )

and the Suttapakarané of the Abhidhammo.

‘¢ MaHaA’LA equally illustrious for her knowledge of the dhammo and for her

piety, was the daughter of the monarch KA’KAWANNO GIRIKA’LI, profoundly versed

by rote, was the daughter of his Poordhito (the almoner of KA’KAWANNO’) ;

Ka’Lapa’si and SABBAPA’PIKA’ were the daughters of GuTTo. These priestesses,

who always maintained the orthodox texts, and of perfect purity of mind, were

versed in the dhammo and wineyo, and having returned from the Réhana division

maintained by the illustrious ruler of men ABHayYot, propounded the Winéyo,

at Anurddhapura.’’

The remainder of this passage is so confused as not to admit of a

continuous translation.

In the twentieth Bhdnawdro is specified the reducing the scriptures

to record, in precisely the same two verses as in the Mahdwanso ; and

in the twenty-second it is mentioned that Wasasuo the raja of Ceylon

between A. D. 66 and 110, brought water into the town of Anurd-

dhapura through a tunnel “wmmaggo,” and with this Bhanawdro,

the Dipawanso terminates at the close of the reign of Mana’sE’No.

* Apnayo, the brother of Dr’/WANANPIYATISsSO,

+ Vide Index of the Mahdwanso for this name.

+ Vide Index for Gdmini Abhayo, the name of DuTTHAGA’MINI before he

recovered the kingdom.

934 Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. [Nov.

IIl.— Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. By Capt. H. Drums

MOND, ord, B. L. C.

Many of our readers will be aware, that Capt. DrumMmonp of the

3rd Light Cavalry, brought with him to this country when he returned

about two years ago from furlough, a practical miner from Cornwall,

and that, upon his application, the sanction of Government was given

to the employment of this person, under Capt. DRumMMoND’s superin-

tendence, in the examination of the capabilities of the mines of copper

in AKuwmaon, with a view to the introduction eventually of a better

method of working them. ‘These mines were reported upon at length

by Capt. Herserr ten years ago, but as the observations of a prac-

tical workman upon their present condition, and upon the methods of

extracting the ore which are in use, cannot be without interest, the

Government has permitted the following report by Capt. DRummMonpD

of his proceedings to be printed in these pages.

Mines of copper in the eastern districts of Kumaon.

Of the mines of copper situated in the eastern division of this pro-

vince only two are now worked, one at Rye in the pergunnah of Gun-

gowly, the other at Sheera in Barrabeesy, the rest, namely, Belar,

Shore, Goorung’, and Chincacolee, have all fallen in, and been abandoned,

and are consequently inaccessible at the present moment.

The mines of Rye and of Sheera have been worked nearly to the

extent available, that is to say, available so far as native mining (or

rather burrowing) can accomplish; not that the resources of these mines

are by any means exhausted, but only that part, which being near the

surface, can be obtained without the aid of skill and capital.

From the length of time that these mines have been worked, the

appearance of the ground about them could not be expected to be very

different from the condition in which it was found, but their poor state

at present is no argument, why they should not become very profitable

when prosecuted to a greater depth.

In other countries it seldom happens, I believe, that mines of copper

are found to be productive near the surface, and in Cornwall few of

them ever yield a return till a considerable depth underneath is

reached, as much as 30 or 40 fathoms. And the greater part of this

distance consists generally of little else than the mere ferruginous

substance, termed gossan, which covers the ore, whilst scarcely any of

the latter can be discerned. By analogy therefore the same may be

expected here, and this is so far confirmed by the native miners, as

well as by the present and former lessees of the mines, who assert

1838. ] Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. 935

that the quantity of ore increases considerably in the downward direc-

tion. In no instance have I yet learned of a mine having been given

up on account of deficiency of copper ore: all concur in thie belief

that there is no want of ore, but a great want of the means for extract-

ing it.

Rye mine—Pergunah of Gungowlee.

This mine is opened on the eastern side of a hill of moderate eleva-

tion. The rock formation is composed of dolomite and talc. The

dolomite* occurs compact, slaty and crystalline, and might frequently

be mistaken for common primary limestone, but its feeble effervescence

in acids readily distinguishes it as a magnesian carbonate of lime. The

talc occurs in beds, both indurated and slaty (the soapy killas of Corn-

wall) ; and it is in these beds that the ores of copper are found in nume-

rous strings, having every appearance of being leaders, as they are

called, to solid ore, and maintaining a distinet course, which I shall

accordingly denominate lode, agreeably to the term used in mining.

The strike, or direction, of the strata, is nearly W. N. W. and

E. S. E. dipping at an angle of about 45° to the N. N. E.

The present entrance is by an adit or passage, which serves as a

drain. The adit is driven on the course of one of these lodes, which

continues west about 10 fathoms, when it falls in with another lode,

that alters its direction to 15°, and afterwards to 30° north, inclining

nearly 50° to the east of north. At the time I penetrated to the working

part of the mine, it was then about 58 fathoms from the entrance. The

lode had been taken away from underneath, as deep as the miners could

manage to excavate, and its place filled up with rubbish. Above also

they had taken it away as high as it was found to be productive ; and,

when I saw them at work, they were then extending their operations in

the same westerly direction, the lode being about two feet wide, and

containing good yellow copper ore, but with a large proportion of its

talcous matrix, 20 per cent. only being metalliferous.

The passage varies from two to four feet in height, and from two to

two and a half in width ; the superincumbent hard dolomitic rock not

allowing the labourers to make it higher, without having recourse to

blasting, with which they are totally unacquainted. A short distance

above the entrance is an old adit, which has been carried on the course

of the same lode, and is now kept open for the purpose of ventilation.

* Dolomite is not a rock producing copper in England, but it is known in other

countries to contain ores of this metal and of iron, The rich mines of Cuba are said

to bein it.

6 8B

936 Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. [ Nov.

The yellow sulphuret of copper, or copper pyrites, in its perfectly

pure state yields about 30 per cent. of metallic copper ; and though not a

rich ore, is the most important of any from its abundance, and from being

generally more to be depended on for continuance than the richer

varieties*. In England, more copper is obtained from it than from all the

other ores together; and, should this mine be prosecuted to a greater

depth, I have no doubt, that the strings of ore above mentioned, will

be found to lead eventually to solid ore, when data as to the actual

capabilities of the mine may with certainty be obtained.

In the event of an experimental mine being established here, a new

adit, 80 fathoms in length, will require to be brought in lower down

the hill, so as to reach the present mine 10 fathoms below the entrance,

and drain the whole of it, along with a considerable quantity of new

ground, which the natives report to be very rich, but say they cannot

work it on account of the accumulation of water.

About a couple of hundred yards to the north, and in the same hill,

is another deposit of copper. This is laid open to the surface during

the rainy season, and allowed to fall together again, as soon as the

water, employed by the natives to carry off the talcous mud from the ore,

ceases to be plentiful. An awkward attempt had been made by the

present teekadar (lessee of the mine), to mine this with timber, but

without success; and it was at the time I visited the spot abandoned,

and the works lying full of water. To have an effective mine here, it

will be necessary to sink a perpendicular shaft of 12 fathoms, and to

bring in an adit about 50 fathoms in length, so as to come under the

works above described about eight fathoms, and lay open a space of

ground, also believed to contain a considerable quantity of ore.

Sheera mine—Lergunah of Barrabeery.

The mine of Sheera is situated on the northern side of a hill, some-

what higher than the one at Aye, and is entered by an adit, which is

driven south in the course of an evidently non-metallic vein, (no traces

of copper being found in it :) and this the natives must have made use of,

to assist them in penetrating the dolomite rock, which, with beds of talc,

constitutes here likewise the formation where in the ores of copper are

discovered. Nearly 33 fathoms from the entrance, the adit strikes

a copper lode, on which a level passage is driven, that continues west-

ward, its course being about 10° south of west, and dip northerly from

45 to 50°. Scarcely any thing could be seen of this lode, which has

been all taken away, and its place supplied with timber, until I arrived

at the end of the level, (18 fathoms in length, ) where it seems to inter-

* Extensive beds of copper pyrites occur in the mining districts of Sweden.

1838.) Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. 937

sect another lode, running in a northwest and southeasterly direction,

which is poor at this particular locality. The former lode resembles the

ore at Atye, but the ore is harder and more contaminated with iron

pyrites.

The adit is also continued south from the strike of this lode a few feet,

when it enters a confused mass of timbering and stones, having the

appearance as if ore had been excavated in every direction; it then runs

15° west of south, and is about 10 fathoms in length. At the end of

this passage, a pit is sunk (said to be 35 feet deep) on a lode

running 5° north of west. When I penetrated to the spot, it was half

full of water, which six men were constantly employed in lifting up

in small buckets, to prevent the flooding of the working part of the

mine, with which there is a communication, as is evident from the

currents of water and air that come from that quarter.

The teekadar reports the lode at the bottom of the pit to be very

rich, but complains of deficiency of hands to work it. Should the passage

of the mine be enlarged, men of a different caste from the miners might

be employed to draw off the water, and the whole of the miners set to

work at the ores. There is no want of ventilation, as the air is constant-

ly circulating from the works to the pit, and from thence to the strike

of the first lode, not far from which are two holes brought down from

an old adit, formerly the drainage of the mine. ‘The appearance of this

mine warrants the repairing and enlarging of the adit, which is the first

thing to be done: more satisfactory data will then be obtained as to the

character and number of the lodes, than can be hoped for in its present

wretched state: the bringing in of a new adit may then be taken into

consideration.

I shall now offer a few practical observations by my mining assistant,

contrasting the modes of working here with what he has been accustomed

to witness in Cornwall.

1. “The mode of excavation.—This is performed with a very indif-

ferent kind of pick-axe ; the handle being made of a piece of wood with a

knob at one end, into which a piece of hard iron is thrust and sharpened

at the point. This, with a miserable iron hammer, wedge and crowbar,

constitutes all the apparatus that the native miner has to depend upon.

It is plain that with such tools no hard rocks can be penetrated,

nor can the softer ones be worked with much facility ; and to this fact

may be attributed the universal smallness of the passages throughout the

mines ; as the native miner can have his passage no larger, than the

rock which encloses the ore and its matrix will admit of.

“JT would therefore suggest that proper pickaxes and steel gads

6B2

938 Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. [ Nov.

(wedges) be substituted instead of the inefficient tools in use, and when

blasting may be required the necessary materials should be provided.

On the other hand, where timber may be requisite, sawn wood should

be used to render the passages permanent and secure, in place of the

branches of trees now employed for that purpose ; and I judge from

experience, that a man accustomed to work under these improved cir-

cumstances will excavate and extend a large and commodious passage

in a less time by one-third, than that occupied for the same distance

in excavating the miserable holes under the native mode of working.

2. “The conveying the ores and refuse from the mine.—This is

performed by boys, who piek up the stuff with their hands, and put it

into skins, which they drag along the floor to the entrance of the mine.

In place of this method, wheel-barrows and shovels should be used,

when the passages are enlarged ; and a boy might then easily discharge |

four times as much as he can at present.

3. “The pulverizing of the ores——This is performed by women:

a large hard stone being placed on the ground on which they lay the

ores; they then either with a stone, or hammer, more frequently the

former, proceed to pulverize them and to pick out the impurities : in

this manner a woman may manage from one to two maunds per day,

according to the hardness ofthe ores. In Cornwall, a woman will pul-

verize from 10 to 15 hundredweight per day, according, as in the

former case, to the nature of the ores. The method in practice there

is, first to dispense with the picking :—secondly, to have the ores

elevated, so as to enable the individual to stand while working, and

to have a plate of iron about a foot square and two inches thick on

which the ores are broken with a broad flat hammer: the impurities are

then finally separated by a peculiar mode of dressing the ores with a

sieve, by which a boy gets through with from one and a half to two

tons per day. The ores are conveyed to the women, and from them to

the boys by a man who attends for that purpose.

4. “ The washing and cleansing of the poorer ores from slime and

other impurities——This also is performed by women, who carry the

stuff from the entrance of the mine to a stream in baskets, where they

contrive, by dabbling with their hands, to wash off the mud and finer

particles of earth. They then proceed to pick out all the pieces of ore

they can get hold of ; or in the case of what may be submitted to the

water in a comminuted state, they work this against the stream, so as

to gather it clean at the head of a small pit by handfulls ; but, from the

bad_construction of the pits, it is with difficulty that this is performed.

After picking up any larger pieces of ore, which may have gone back

1838. ] Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. 939

with the stream, they scoop out the refuse with their hands, and then

proceed with another charge. In Cornwall, one woman provided with a

_wheel-barrow and shovel for the conveying and washing of the ores,

and a boy with a sieve for dressing them, as formerly mentioned, would

accomplish an equal task to that of ten women on the system described.

5. “The drainage of the mine.—In the first place, this is managed

in a proper manner by an adit. But whenever any attempt is made to

go below it, as is the case in most, if not all the mines, the water is then

raised in wooden buckets handed from one man to another, until they

reach the adit into which they are emptied. In this manner six,

ten or even more men may be employed, whilst only an inferior num-

ber can be spared for excavating the ores. At the Sheera mine, for

instance, six men are constantly engaged in lifting up the water, and

there are only two at the ores: the water raised by these six men, could

be effected with a hand-pump by one man: but, in order to keep the

pump constantly going, two men might be required, and the remaining

four added to the number of those who are excavating.

Lastly.—“ To obtain sawn wood for rendering the passages perma-

nent and secure, the art of sawing, which is entirely unknown to the

people here, ought to be introduced.” —

The foregoing remarks having reference simply to the rude and

inefficient mode of work now actually in practice in this province, the

rectifying of them will form the first stage of improvement. No

allusion has hitherto been made, to the vast results from machinery,

which in England may be witnessed in almost every mine ; nor have

the important processes of reducing the ore to the metallic state, been

yet adverted to, though these are on a parallel with what has been

said on the subject of extraction*. However, from the statements

which have been made, it may be seen, that notwithstanding the

mountaineer receives but a very slight remuneration for his labor,

yet considering the extravagant manner in which that labor is ex-

pended, an exorbitant rate is paid for the really serviceable work

performed. Thus it is not so much the grinding avarice of the

teekadar, that oppresses the miner, as the system upon which he

works, that cannot admit of his being much better paid. To relieve

this class of people, therefore, and raise their condition, it is much to be

desired, that a new management should be adopted ; while, on the other

hand, were the mines equal to the very best in Cornwall, no great pro-

fit could ever accrue from them, worked as they are at present.

* The charcoal smelting furnaces of Sweden appear to me to be the best

suited for these mountains. |

940 Report on the Copper mines of Kumaon. -[ Nov.

The almost inaccessible state of these mines, and the great difficulty of

making any observations at all in such places, as well as the interruption

alluded to heretofore, namely, the illness of my assistant whom I

was obliged to bring back to cantonments in a very precarious state of

health, have prevented me from making this report so full as I should

have wished. It appeared to me desirable to take, in the first instance,

merely a rapid glance at the whole of the copper mines throughout the

province, before the setting in of the rains, (when they become inac-

cessible,) with the view of determining the most eligible locality for

bringing the question of their productiveness to the test of experiment.

The mines of the western purgunahs, which, by all accounts, are the

richest, I have not yet had an opportunity of examining ; but though my

plans have been frustrated in that respect, I can nevertheless recom-

mend a trial of one of those I have already visited; to wit, the Rye

mine. It is unfavorably situated for a new adit; but from the appear-

ance of the ground, and the probability of cutting new lodes underneath

by traverses from the one now worked, the superior quality of the ore,

together with what information I have been able to gather from the

natives, as to the character of the lode at a greater depth, I consider it

in every way the best suited for an experiment, an estimate of the pro-

bable expense of which is herewith annexed*. Should the government —

deem it expedient to authorize the work being commenced, my mining

assistant, Mr. WILKIN, is fully competent to carry on the detail; and

Lieut. GLASFORD, executive engineer of Kumaon, has offered his

services to superintend, as far as his other duties in the province will

permit, and to further the undertaking by every means in his power.

I shall now conclude with a summary of the different points of

inquiry, upon which I should wish to ground my next report of the

mines of copper in this province.

Some account of the rocks, considered in an economical point of

view.

The ores seem to be of the usual varieties, and need merely to be speci-

fied. Assays from selected specimens hardly give a correct estimate of

producert.

The important thing to be noticed is, the quantity that may be ob-

tained. This will depend principally on the width of the lodes, and

* It is estimated by Capt. D., that the cost of the proposed new adit at Rye

will be above 2400 rupees.

+ The working ore I have hitherto seen has been copper pyrites, grey copper

ore, and the green carbonate I have met with, but in too inconsiderable quantity

to deserve notice. f

1838.] New species of Cyprinide. 941

how far that width is occupied by solid ore, or how much it is intermix-

ed with spar, tale and other matters*. Also, on the continuity of

branches of ore to a reasonable extent, or, on the other hand, on their

being short and occurring at considerable intervals.

Again, the character of the lodes will have to be described,—whether

beds conforming with the stratification of the country, or veins travers-

ing the same.—Whether numerous, parallel to each other, or crossing.

—What their direction usually is by the compass.— Whether vertical,

or at what angle they deviate from being vertical. Whether they are

rich at particular places, as where veins intersect each other.—What

is the character of the mineral matter, filling the lode where ore is de-

ficient.—Whether this character is different, when near the surface, or

when observed at greater depths.— What proportion of the lode appears

to be metalliferous, and what barren.

Facilities for working.

Many considerations come under this head—character and habits

of the natives—rate of payment for labor—state of roads and means

of transport—supply of timber and other articles required—means of

drainage, such as levels for obtaining adits—falls of water for machi-

nery—streams whether constant and sufficient. As no mining opera-

tions upon an extended scale can be carried on without a command of

cheap and good iron, I shall next advert to the mines and manufacture

of this metal, and point out the peculiar advantages possessed by these

mountains, over other parts of India, for improvements in that valuable -

branch of the natural resources of the country.

September, 1858.

Il].— Observations on sia new species of Cyprinide, with an outline

of a new classification of the family. By J. McCLevianp, Esgq.,

Bengal Medical Establishment.

It is almost unnecessary to refer to the following passage which

is inserted under the head of European correspondence, page 110,

volume I. of this Journal, but it is so apposite to my subject that I

must be excused for quoting it as it stands. “I spent some time in

Paris this summer and saw a good deal of M. Cuvisr. I used the

freedom of mentioning your name to him and your desire of taking

* In the western pergunahs, Captain Herbert, in his geological report

particularises grey, purple, and vitrious copper ore.

942 New species of Cyprinidae. [ Nov.

advantage of your position to forward the interests of science. I asked

him if there was any particular object in natural history which I might

suggest to you as a desideratum which could be supplied from India.

He immediately replied emphatically ‘ah certainement, les poissons

d’eau douce;’ he added that some gentleman in Calcutta had already

sent him a good many of those of the lower rivers and parts of the

country, but that they had no account of those of the higher parts.”

BucHAnAN states, that while engaged in the provinces remote from

the sea he met with few species he had not before seen, but previous to

his departure for Europe, on returning to the vicinity of the large

estuaries he daily met with unknown species. In the large rivers above

the influence of the tides he therefore supposed that not more than one

species in five escaped his attention, while of those of the estuaries he

had not described above one half. These last have recently engaged

the attention of Dr. Cantor, who during the season of 1836-7 accom-

panied the surveying expedition under Capt. Lioyp as medical officer,

while I have been engaged in the former since my journey to Assam

in 1835.

The results prove the aceuracy of BucHANAN’s remarks, for while

most of those obtained by Dr. Cantor in the Sunderbuns have

proved to be new, not more than one in five of the fresh water species

inhabiting the large rivers in the interior, escaped the observation of

BucuANAN; but when we trace those rivers upwards from the com-

mencement of the rapids into the mountains, the number of unknown

forms augments in proportion to those that have been described, so that

we may reverse the ratio given by BucHanan, and consider not more

than one in five as having hitherto been made known, thus correspond-

ing with CuviEr’s notion ‘ that we have no accounts of those of higher

parts.’ Still, if Cuvier had been acquainted with the extent of Bu-

CHANAN’S labours on the subject, he would have seen that the whole of

that author’s Garre@e are Alpine forms. This peculiar group which I

have incorporated with the genus Gonorhynchus is fully described in the

Gangetic fishes, but the drawings having been retained with the author's

extensive collections of papers in every department of natural history

at the library of the botanic garden, no figures of them were given

to the public by Bucuanan, and unfortunately Cuvier and other

icthyologists only adopted such of his species as were figured in the

work referred to.

CYPRINIDZE.

One dorsal fin, stomach without czcal appendages, branchial mem-

brane with few rays.

VoL.Vi. PL LV

aS. $06.

tLe,

Vol Vil. PL. LVL

Jour. Af. $0¢.

ass Mae c

94009 95 ai cae

I he jez

> a

s nea IS =

JM, del,

‘ _

WS ed

PAS |

r é

7 Sli

we. ven

“ae

“ea eae

1838.] New classification of Cyprinidae. 943

I. Sub-fam. PEE ONOMIA, J. M.

Herbivorous.

Mouth slightly cleft, either horizontal or directed downwards ; the

stomach is a lengthened tube continuous with a long intestinal canal;

colours plain, branchial rays three. ,

l. Gen. Cirrhinus. Lower jaw composed of two short limbs loosely

attached in front where, instead of a prominent apex there is a depres-

sion ; no spinous rays in the dorsal, lips soft, fleshy, and furnished with

cirri.

Sub-gen. Labeo, Cuv. Cirri small or wanting.

2. Gen. Barbus. Lower jaw composed of two lengthened limbs

united in front, so as to form a smooth narrow apex. Dorsal fin pre-

ceded by a strong bony spine, lips hard, four cirri, intermaxillaries

protractile.

Sub-gen. Oreinus, J. M. Mouth vertical, lower jaw shorter than

the upper, snout muscular and projecting, suborbitar plates concealed.

3. Gen. Cyprinus prop. Body elevated, lower jaw short and round-

ed in front, lips hard, thick, and without cirri ; dorsal long.

4. Gen. Gobio. Dorsal placed over the ventrals and like the anal

short, and without spines. Lower jaw shorter than the upper, and either

round or square in front ; lips thin and hard.

5. Gen. Gonorhynchus. Mouth situated under the head which is

long and covered with thick integuments. Body long and sub-cylindri-

cal, snout often perforated by numerous mucous pores. Dorsal and

anal short, opposite, and without spines.

II. Sub-fam. SARCOBORINA, J. M.

Carnivorous.

Mouth directed upwards, widely cleft and horizontal, with a bony pro-

minence more or less distinct on the symphysis of the lower jaw,

serving as a prehensile tooth. Colors bright, disposed in spots and

streaks, or displaying a uniformly bright lustre. The stomach is a

lengthened sack ending in a short abdominal canal. Branchial rays

three. ‘

1. Gen. Systomus, J. M. Intermaxillaries protractile; dorsal and

anal short, the former opposite to the ventrals. Body elevated and

marked by two or more distinct dark spots. Diffuse bright spots either

on the fins or opercula, prominence on the jaw obscure ; scales large.

2. Gen. Abramis? Cuv. Body short and elevated, a short dorsal

is placed opposite to the ventrals, anal long. Intestine of the only

Indian species short as the body.

3. Gen. Perilampus, J. M. Head small, obliquely elevated above

944 New classification of Cyprinide. [ Nov.

the axis of the body. Dorsal opposite the anal which is the longer fin ;

apices of the jaws raised to a line with the dorsum which is straight,

while the body below is much arched. Sides often streaked with bright

colors, particularly blue, abdominal tube small, and little longer than

the body.

4. Gen. Leuciscus. Dorsal small, opposite the ventrals, mouth and

head horizontal and placed in the axis of the body, scales and opercula

covered with a silvery pigment.

5. Gen. Opsarius, J. M. Mouth widely cleft ; body slender and

usually marked with transverse green bars or spots. Dorsal small,

without spines and placed behind the middle; anal long. Intestinal

canal very short and extending straight from the stomach to the vent. |

III. Sub-fam. APALOPTERINA, J. M.

Body elongated ; sub-cylindric, and enveloped in mucous; all the

fin rays soft; intestines short. Branchial rays vary from two to six.

1. Gen. Pacirianm, ScuN.

Sub-gen. Aplocheilus, J. M. Head flat, with the eyes placed on its

edges, and the mouth broad and directed upwards, with a single row of

minute teeth placed along the edges of the jaws; caudal entire.

2. Gen. Platycara, J. M. Head flat, with the eyes placed on its

upper surface, fins thick and opaque. Pectorals large, anal small, caudal

bifid, mouth without teeth and directed downwards. Stomach and in-

testine form a continuous fleshy tube little longer than the body.

3. Gen. Psilorhynchus, J. M. Muzzle elongated and flattened,

eyes placed far back on the edges of the head, mouth small and suctorial,

without cirri, opercula small, caudal bifid, dorsal opposite to the

ventrals.

Cosxiris, LINN.

Head and body elongated and little compressed or elevated, the

snout is long, directed obliquely downwards, and projecting slightly in

front of the mouth, which is surrounded with short muscular filaments,

4. Gen. Cobitis propria, J. M. Caudal entire, large, and orna-

mented with bars or spots; prevailing colour various shades of brown

disposed in more or less dense nebula.

5. Gen. Schistura, J. M. Caudal bilobate, prevailing colors green,

usually disposed in zones and cross-bars.

It would be unnecessary here to offer any remark on the foregoing

outline of the arrangement to which I have resorted in this family, with

the view of introducing our Indian species to such groups as might har.

monise with those of the Regne animal. This task however easy it

may seem was one that could only be attempted after long study in

1838.) New species of Cyprinide. 945

India, since Cuvier himself in referring such of Bucwanan’s species as

are figured in the Gangetic fishes to his groups, generally misplaces

them even according to his own principles, for want of sufficient infor-

mation regarding their forms, to say nothing of habits and structure ;

and there can be no doubt that if Cuvier had been possessed of suffi-

cient knowledge of our Indian species he would have subdivided the

family and characterised its groups nearly as I have done.

In collecting materials I have hitherto been chiefly indebted to

Mr. GrirritH. I have now however to acknowledge my obliga-

tion to Dr. MacLoep, Inspector General of H. M. hospitals, whose

collection consists of six different kinds caught promiscuously in the

streams at Simla, and these form as many species not before known,

thus promising an unprecedented accession of undescribed forms in this

quarter, as well as along the whole line of the Himdlaya, when a

more diligent search has been made for them: and it-is this circum-

stance that induces me to publish these species at once, rather

than keep them back for the more copious details of the family now in

course of publication. To those who are desirous of contributing to this

interesting branch of natural history, which has been hitherto so much

neglected, or I should rather say, suppressed in India, I may remark

that specimens are always more satisfactory than drawings, however

carefully executed; that larger fishes may be skinned and prepared

with arsenical soap as easily if not more so than any other animals

and that the smaller kinds, provided not more than half a dozen be put

in a quart bottle of good bazar spirits, will keep during a journey in the

cold season from the most distant parts of India. Should specimens

exceed the size of the finger, their skins may be thrown into spirits in

which state the chance of their arriving safe will be more secure ; notes

regarding their habits and the parts removed will render such speci-

mens of still higher value. |

Fam. CYPRINID/, Cov.

Sub-fam. P7EONOMINA, J. M. Gen. Barbus.

Species, Barbus Chielynoides*, J. M. Pl. LVI. f. 2. As. Res, XIX.

Pl. LVII. f. 5.

Length of the head to that of the body as one to two and a half,

intermaxillaries protractile, lips round, smooth, and thick with four cirri.

Branchial rays large, and ascend behind as high as the base of the

pectorals ; the suborbitar bones are concealed beneath thick integu-

ments. The body contracts suddenly in depth under the base of the

dorsal and over that of the anal fin, 33 scales in length along the lateral

* From XeAvvoidys, that has thick lips.

6c2

946 New species of Cyprinide. {Nov.

line, each marked with a black spot at the apex, and nine in an oblique

row from the base of the ventrals to the dorsum. The fin rays are D.

10, the three first spinous, united and smooth, P. 16 small, V. 9 larger

than the rays of the pectorals, A. 7, C. 18,

The stomach and intestine form a small continuous canal equal to

about thrice the length of the body. |

Habitat, mountain streams at S¢mlat.

The blunt form of the head and general sculpture of the body, the

size and markings of the scales afford a resemblance to Cyp. chedra,

Bucu. (Leucis-brachialus.)

Sub-gen. OREINUS*, J. M.

The following species of this sub-genus which Dr. MacLorp

obtained at S¢mla, corresponds in its general characters with Barbus

guttatus, J. M. As. Res. XIX. Pl. XXXIX. f. 1. before obtained

by Mr. Grirrits at Panuka iu Butan, but they differ from each other

in specific characters. ‘There can be no question about the propriety

of separating them from the true Barbels, now that a second species has

been found in a similarly elevated position, 1000 miles from the

locality of the first. Their spotted bodies, minute scales, fleshy snout,

by means of which the actions of the mouth are entirely performed,

mark them as different from the ordinary Barbels, while their compa-

ratively short intestinal canal and serrated dorsal spine, remove them

still further from Gonorhynchus.

Species, Oreinus maculatus, J. M. Pl. LVI. f. 3. Length of the

head to that of the body as one to three and a half; body marked with

shapeless spots dispersed irregularly on the back. ‘The three first rays

of the dorsal are spinous, and the third serrated behind. The fin rays

gre, Dill: Pil 8a..V. 10's Avo: Co 18:

Intestinal canal capacious, and forms one continuous tube with the

stomach altogether about four lengths of the body, containing a copious

green matter probably vegetable.

Habitat, mountain streams at Stmlat, where it attains six or eight

inches in length.

The anal fin of the Butan species contains ten rays, while that of

the Simda species contains but five. The spots on the first are round

and distributed over every part of the body and fins, but Mr. Grirrita

observes, that they disappear on large individuals or become faint.

* From Oreinos, pertaining to mountains,

t Found by Dr. MacLogp.

1838.} New species of Cyprinida. 947

II. Sub-fam. SARCOBORINA, J. M.

3. Gen. PERILAMPUS, J. M.

Species, P. elingulatus, J. M. Pl. LVI. f. 1.

Head and fore part of the body deep, humeral plates slightly exposed

behind the opercula, snout round and terminates abruptly in front of

the eyes; about 46 scales along the lateral line, eleven in an oblique

row from the base of the ventrals to the dorsum. The prominence on

the apex of the lower jaw very minute, colors plain, a minute black

dot at the apex of each scale. The fin rays are, D. 9: P. 13: V.9:

AC MOE. 19.

The stomach and intestine together form a tube about the length of

the body.

Habitat, mountain streams at Simla*—length two inches.

The only remarkable thing about this species is, that the tongue which

is usually much developed and rugous in the other Pertlamps appears to

be almost wanting in this species, which may lead us to infer that it

differs in habit from the Pertlamps of the Plains which are all insecti-

vorous.

Ill. Sub-fam. APALOPTERINA, J. M.

2. Gen. Pratycara, J. M. (Balitora, Gray.)

Species, P. nasuta, J. M. Pl. LV. f. 2, a. 6.

Snout abruptly depressed between the eyes with a large pit between

the nostrils, body strong and sub-cylindric, about 34 scales along the

lateral line and eight in an oblique row from the base of the ventrals.

to the dorsum. The fin rays are, D. 10: P. 16: V.9: A.6:C. 15.

Habitat, Kasya mountainst—length six inches.

This species differs essentially from either of those figured in Harp-

WiCKe’s Illustrations, vide As. Res. XIX. Pl. XLIX. fs. 1,2 ; a species

corresponding, I suspect, with Balitora maculata, Gray, was found by

Mr. Grirritu in Butan; from that specimen, which unfortunately was

much injured when it arrived in Calcutta, I have only collected a few

particulars regarding the abdominal viscera in addition to the informa-

tion regarding its habits obtained by Mr. GrirFitu.

V. Gen. Scuistura, J. M.

Species, S. montana, J. M. Pl. LV. f. 1.

Depth of the body to its length as about one to eight, six cirri and a

single suborbitar spine under each eye, a black streak at the base of

the caudal, and about twelve broad streaks crossing the body ; with one

row of black dots crossing the dorsal rays, and a faint row crossing

* Found by Dr. MacLorp. + Found by Mr. GrirFita.

948 Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. (Nov.

those of the caudal. Pectorals and ventrals long and lanceolate. The

fin rays are D.8: P. 10: V.8: A.6: C. 18.

Habitat, mountain streams at Simla*. Length two and half inches.

Species, S. rupecula, J. M. Pl. LV. f. 3, a. 0.

About fourteen broad bars on either side, and three across the caudal

and dorsal ; without suborbitar spines, six cirri, four in front, and one at

each corner of the mouth. The third ray from the upper and lower

margins of the caudal a little longer than the outer ones. Lower sur-

face of the body and head nearly flat, pectorals and ventrals lanceolate,

The fin rays are D. 8: P. 10: V.8: A. 7: C. 16.

Habitat, mountain streams at Simla+. Length two inches.

The air vessels of Schitur@ I have found in a bilobate case, rather

perhaps cartilaginous than bony, placed over the entrauce to the cesopha-

gus: a magnified figure of this case is given, As. Res. XIX. Pl. LV.

f. 4, while the natatory bladder of the true loaches, Cobitis propria, is

contained in an oval bony case of only one lobe or cell (fig. 5, loc. cit.)

also placed over the entrance of the esophagus, where from its promi-

nence as well as the minute spines with which its surface is covered it

may probably perform some function connected with deglutition.

1V.—Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. (Submitted to Govern-

ment by the Committee avpointed to investigate the Coal and Iron

resources of the Bengal Presidency, as a supplement to their first

printed report.)

Capt. VeTcu in a letter to the commissioner of Assam, dated 25th

November, 1837, mentions having found detached specimens of various

kinds of coal in the Jellundee Belseeree, and Booroolee rivers that fall

into the Bramaputra from the Butan mountains between the 92° and

93° degrees of east longitude: at various distances from 14 to 20

miles from their confluence with the main river, and not far from the

foot of the mountains.

The ‘situations in which these specimens were found by Capt. Vetcu

are marked by the letters A, B, C, on the annexed sketch-map of the

coal districts in Assam.

The great number of more advantageous situations in which coal

has been found in Assam renders the question as to the quality and

precise situations of the beds respectively from whence Capt. VeTCH’s

specimens were obtained, a matter of secondary importance, but a proof

so unquestionable of tlie existence of coal at different points for an extent

* Found by Dr. MacLozp. t Found by Dr. MacLozp.

1838.] Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. 949

of at least forty miles along the foot of the Butan mountains, con-

nected with the fact of its having been discovered in a similar way by

the late Mr. Scott on the banks of the Zeesta river at the foot of the

Sikim mountains, three degrees less to the eastward, tends to encourage

the hope of finding coal in the lower ranges of the same chain, in

some situation in which it may be available for useful purposes.

Regarding Captain VetTcn’s specimens, Captain JenKINS observes :

“‘ These discoveries of coal on the north bank of the Bramaputra, and

over a tract of country 50 miles in length, appear to me to add greatly

to the importance of previous discoveries of coal on the south banks of

the river, for I conceive it may be presumed that we have by no means

obtained a knowledge of the full extent of the coal beds in Assam, and

that it is not improbable, that they are co-extensive on both sides of the

valley, and will be found nearly throughout its whole extent.”

To understand the value of the other two more useful discoveries of

coal that have been made in Assam, subsequently to the publication of

the last reports of the committee, it is necessary to examine the value

in a practical point of view, of what has been previously made known

on the subject.

Captain Henperson refers to six places at which coal had been

found, indicating the existence of an extended line of coal districts from

Gowahatti to Bramakund. However probable this may be, we have

as yet done little to develope the fact, so as render it practically useful ;

and in all inquiries of this kind, it is no less important to point out

where information is defective, than it is to bring forward successful

results.

If we suppose an extensive series of coal districts to exist in Assam,

corresponding with the numbers marked on the sketch-map already

adverted to, the more western beds from their vicinity to Bengal are

entitled to our first consideration.

As to No. 6, however, the most western of all, and supposed to be

situated on the Aopili river, within sixty miles of Gowahatti,.we can

find no information ; so that the existence of coal at this very desirable

point rests merely on a specimen having been found in the sands of the

stream by Mr. Hupson.

Of the next coal, No. 5, we have a very clear and distinct account, as

far as it goes, in a letter from Ensign Bropie to Captain Jenkrns,

dated 17th May, 1837, which we can do no better than give at length.

Ensign Bropie observes—“ With reference to your letter of 23rd March,

I have the honor to forward you a sketch from Mr. Hupson, showing

the spots where coal has been fonnd within this division ( Nowgong') ;

950 Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. (Nov.

they are three in number, but the only bed of coal the site of which

is known, is that on the Joomoona, a little above the falls. I went to

this myself during the last cold weather, and raised about 8 or 10

maunds, specimens of which I sent to you at the time. What I got

did not appear to be of a very fine quality, having apparently a good

deal of earthy matter mixed with it, but it is more than probable that

if the vein were worked further, excellent coal would be found. The

thickness of the strata is about 24 feet. I laid the surface bare for some

ten or twelve yards, but how far the vein extends beyond this I am

unable to say. I believe no difficulty would be found in working the coal,

if it ever should become an object of importance to do so. The popula-

tion is certainly scanty, but then it is composed of a class of people,

Mikeers and Kacharees, who can be taught, and will willingly put their

hands to any thing that will afford them a moderate remuneration for

their labour.

“‘ The bed is situated at the foot of a small hill on the east side of a

little nullah, which runs from the north into the Joomoona, about half a

mile or three quarters of a mile above the falls of the latter, the distance

of the coal from the Joomoona itself not being more than 80 or 100

yards. This river is at all times navigable to the falls by canoes, and

two or three of these lashed together can take down a considerable

cargo. The river is deep again above the falls, so that it is only for about -

300 or 400 yards over these, that porters would be required; a boat

from Gowahattt would, on an average, reach the falls in 20 days, and

return in 10; but this would vary with the season.

“ Pieces of coal of good quality have been picked up by myself in

the bed of the Nambua, a small stream running into the Dhunseree

from west, but we have no information as to the position of the

beds.”

The locality of these last fragments is marked No. 4 in the

annexed sketch-map, and beyond the specimens picked up by Ensign

Bropigz, we have no further evidence of the existence of coal at the

place in question. Here then is the sum of all we know regarding coal

in lower Assam: the particular part of the province in which, if found

in sufficient quantity and of good quality, it would most favour-

ably compete with the coals of Bengal in the Calcutta market. It

is desirable therefore that the indications of coal in this quarter should

be thoroughly investigated. Captain Jenxins, impressed with the

importance of this, has made repeated efforts to have the district

examined, and when the scientific mission was in Assam, he directed Dr.

WaLtticn, to detach one of the members of the mission for this pur-

} ; COAL LOCALITIES

in Assam

1837

' ere ?

of Lone U.

“7 “e! fo

me >

ne ep es

Piet est ee!

‘op TL.

Pha) 7 4

“ > e:

an geil gavel

Aire

sabe

ay A | aS es

‘ : 25° wer

ory

“4

’

a he $ ee vane } i Hig ar han,

« awe ekes.4 : i ~~ 1 edad ier (aa my? yan heed

sah fi

. , ‘ ‘ Oe te vi Feat, Mabel Be 3 sith ol ‘

Pes ris 5 Ne ha Pe eee ragga ‘

ROMA Erase. Bt eee Tes movies fa ta oi Ae a

oe ) ay 2. ci ae PMARIE” OIE in. Morea

M hogs fees \ i a pe

« ¢ he bi ~ y

, oe } ~ sf ae a

; j { Pe nooy

+ « ae u a bat ie)

: ' ’ ie any 2 Py * i

wl ’, 7% oa 3 ‘ip

1838. ] Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. 951

pose, which was accordingly done, and eight days were allowed for the

duty; but this period being too short, even to reach Lower Assam

from the place at which the order was given, it is needless to say the

investigation was not undertaken.

The next coal noticed in the sketch map, No. 3, is that which has

been longest known, a large quantity of superior coal having been

raised from this bed by Mr. Bruce in 1828*.

It is situated on the Suffry, an impracticable tributary of the Disung,

but at what distance from the latter does not appear in the account given

of the place by Mr. Bruce, who lost several boats} in his attempt to

reach the site of the coal. There is a small range of hills which offers

some impediment, (but Mr. Bruce states that it might be overcome by

widening the pass,) and by the formation of a road for hackeries. Inferior

coals were observed by Mr. Bruce, crossing the bed of the stream in

different situations, so that, if these last beds should be found to afford

good coal, the difficulties would be considerably less in reaching it there

than in the higher situation ; but in so remote a part of Assam as this,

perhaps no coal would be worth working, unless it occurred under more

favorable circumstances for transmission, than characterise any of the

Suffry beds.

The Namroop coal, No, 2, in the annexed map, first observed by

Lieut. Brace and Mr. GrirFitu, though like the last, of first rate

quality, and the Bruma-kund coal, No. 1, found by Captain Wuitcox,

are probably beyond the reach of being profitably worked and introduced

to the navigable part of the Bramapuira ; so that of the six localities

in which coal had been found in Assam, at the time the preceding

reports of the Committee were written, one situation only (Suffry ) was

known, from whence coal might be obtained, and that with some diffi-

culty, for local consumption in the province, at a cheaper rate than

it could be supplied from Bengal.

Having thus stated what had been done up to the period at which

our last reports were published, we are the better prepared to show the

value of what has since been done in Assam. Coal has been found by

Captain Jenkins himself at Boorhath on the banks of the Disung,

the main river to which the Suffry coal had to be carried over so many

difficulties. By this discovery therefore all these are at once obviated.

Another coal bed has been found by Captain Hannay near Jypoor,

about twelve miles northeast of Boorhath, and within three miles of

* Asample of it was tried at the mint, and found to be equal to Cherra

Punji coal.

+ Probably canoes.

952 Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. [Nov

the Boree Dihing, also an excellent river. Full details regarding each

of these discoveries, having been published in the proceedings of the

Asiatic Society for February last*, it is unnecessary to enter into them

here further than concerns the extent of the beds and the quality of

the coal,

At Boorhath, beds occur in two situations, first close to the channel

of the Disung, at the commencement of a rising ground about a mile

from the village of Boorhath. This bed is described by Captain

JENKINS as visible for about a hundred yards in length, and eight feet

in thickness, above the water and gravel of the stream.

The second bed is about a quarter of a mile distant from the Disung,

at an elevation of about 50 or 60 feet, and exposed to the extent of

200 yards in length in the bank of a little water-course. It was not

visible in continuous masses, being concealed here and there by rubbish

fallen from above, but it cropped out, says Captain JENKINS, at inter-~

-vals, and always seemed to bear a thickness of several feet. The coal

in both these beds appeared to Captain JenKIns to be of first rate

quality, and nothing could well be more favorable than the position for

working, nor for the transport of the coal as far as the waters of the

Disung admit, but this stream is barely navigable for laden canoes of

small size in the dry weather, although in the rains it has a depth

sufficient for large boats, and its stream is no where impetuoust.

The situation of this coal is about 50 miles from the confluence of

the Disung with the Bramaputra, so that laden boats might descend

during the rains with ease from the coal beds to the great river in

three days, and return in six. The point at which the Disung joins

the Bramaputra is about 180 miles above Gowahuttee.

The Jypoor beds are described in a letter from Captain HANNay

to the commissioner of Assam, under date Ist February, 1838}: Cap-.

* Journ. 1838, pp. 169 to 365. t+ Journ. 1838, p. 169.

t Journ. 1838, p. 368. In a subsequent letter to Major WHITE, dated 15th

September last, Captain HANNAy gives the following particulars regarding the

manner in which the coal occurs, and how he raised it:—‘‘ The vein which I

excavated is situated one and a half mile in a southeasterly direction from Jypoor.

It lies close to the right bank of a small nulla, which winds its way into the plains

and has its rise in the small hills which run along the foot of the Naga mountains.

The bank is not steep, and for a distance of from three to four hundred yards it is

tolerably straight, rising gradually from 80 to 100 feet in height from the spot

where the vein is first visible : for a distance of 30 yards the direction is about 205°,

when it turns to 190°, and is visible further than it has been excavated by me. Pro-

ceeding onwards, however, in a direction of about 160°, and at a distance of two

furlongs, you pass over a bed of greyish coloured soft shaly sandstone, strongly

jmpregnated with petroleum, and a little further on there are several springs of this

mineral oil issuing out from the description of sandstone abovementioned, and ia

1838.] Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. 953

tain Hannay states in this letter, that since his arrival at Jypoor he

discovered several beds of workable coal, and having been directed to for-

ward a few hundred maunds upon which to calculate for trial, had already

commenced clearing alarge vein about two miles distant. “ As I wished

the open spaces the surface of the ground is covered with clay-shale and coal, well

trodden down by herds of deer and elephants. A little farther on in the same

direction, you come upon another rivulet, running west, and intersecting a vein of

coal which is probably a continuation of the one worked by me, and it is here

visible in a mass of eleven feet in height and as many in breadth. My observations

on this vein did not extend farther than this, but on proceeding down the nulla,

and also in the southerly direction about six furlongs distant, there are several

veins of coal trending in a direction of 335°, the line of dip being 280,, and at an

angle of 45°, thus dipping directly into the centre of the hillocks. J could not work

on what (in miner’s phrase) is termed the face of the mine, without being at consi-

derable expense in removing such a mass of upper soil, for which I had not a suf-

ficient number of the requisite implements, and I was consequently obliged to work

directly down upon the vein, and from this circumstance, added to the tender nature

of some portion of the coal, there was unavoidably a good deal of waste. The

annexed sketch will perhaps shew more distinctly the situation of the vein and its

accompanying strata. The method I adopted in digging was as follows. Having

cleared away the surface soil, I ascertained the exact stratification of the sandstone,

and having dug in the direction of the partings to the depth of 16 inches or two feet,

TI cut with axes to the same depth across the vein, and the blocks thus turned

out, I raised by means of wedges, levers, &c. the best way Icould. As might have

been expected, I did not find the coal of an equally good quality throughout, at

least with regard to hardness and compactness of texture, that which was uppermost

being much impregnated with ochery earth, whilst under this lay the hardest and

finest specimens, the blocks breaking off large, and the fracture exhibiting that

beautiful iridescence said to be commonin Newcastle slaty coal. Below the last-

mentioned description, and as far as I dug down into the vein, which might have been

about six feet, the coal was of a softer nature, intermixed however with many lines of

hard, thus exhibiting the variety of fracture found in coal, the trapezoidal, and rhom-

boidal mixed in the harder with cubical fragments, and the whole exhibiting what is

called by miners ‘‘ bright heads,’’ having the white shaly concretions and rusty

scale visible in every fracture. The structure of the whole vein is cubical, but

the outer layer of coal to the left is somewhat different from the rest, the texture

of it being the same throughout, and its fracture being exactly similar to that

of a slice of wood cut from the stem of atree, and then broken in a contrary

direction. Itis not so thick as the other layers, and, there is no intervening shale

between it and the tough clay which lies upon it. This layer is also much impreg-

nated with mineral tar, which has an aromatic odour, and in several of the masses of

coal belonging to it I found a rich yellow-coloured fine clay, having the appearance

of orpiment. It will be observed by the accompanying sketch, that I had no hard

or rocky substance to encounter, which is a great advantage, both with regard

to expense and facility in working; I only worked the coal to the extent of 15 yards

in the length of the space, and six feet in depth, and although I found a good ‘deal of

ponderous slaty substance, much impregnated with pyrites, on which pick-axes

struck fire, still I did not come upon rock ; and to all appearance the vein of coal

inay extend many yards farther down. The breadth of the vein, including the part-

ings, is about 9 feet, and the loss in digging must have been about one-third of the

whole quantity excavated, On examining the beds of two small water-courses which

6D 2

954 Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. [ Nov.

to collect the coal at as little expense as possible,” Captain Hannay

observes, “I selected the vein nearest to Jypoor, and before I came

to this determination, I employed myself in exploring the neighbourhood ;

and have been very successful in finding coal and iron in great plenty.”

As the sample, consisting of 224 maunds, has not been found of so good

a quality as the Assam coal that had been previously sent down to

Calcutta from the Suffry beds, we have annexed in the preceding note

the whole of the details given by Captain Hannay of his operations.

It would perhaps have been better, on such an occasion, if samples of

different kinds had been transmitted, rather than a selection of ‘that

which from its hardness seemed to be the best; indeed it may be

doubted if hardness in coal denotes a superiority, and if the circum-

stance, noted by Captain Hannay, of the bed becoming somewhat softer

the deeper the excavation was carried, be not a very favorable sign.

We are not however to expect that a first sample, from. the outcrop we

may say, of a single bed in a new and extensive coal field, should be of

a first rate quality. The only fault of the sample of this coal selected by

Captain Hannay is, that it contains a considerable quantity of sulphur,

which, from trials made at the mint, appears to render it unfit for anneal-

ing silver, and that 40 maunds are only equivalent to 32 maunds, of the

variety of Burdwan coal in use at the mint at the time, for getting up

steam. Captain Forpes is, however, of opinion, that this sample of Assam

coal would be found nearly as good as Burdwan, when burned in the

comparatively small furnaces of the boilers of steam-vessels.

As far as the Assam coals generally have been tried, their qualities

have been found to be so good, that we may regard the small cargo

transmitted to Calcutta by Captain Hannay, as chiefly valuable in

showing the facility with which the article may be raised and transported.

Captain JENKINS, in enclosing the bill of expenses incurred in raising

and transmitting a boatload of Jypoor coal to Calcutta, observes:

“J need not point out to the Committee, that this attempt to work the

coal beds in the neighbourhood of Jypoor has been made under very

unfavorable circumstances ; the greater part of the last dry season had

passed away before Captain Hannay was able to commence operations ;

pass over the vein of coa), and which come from the summit of the hillocks, I found

several beds of sandstone of the description called by the miners whitepost; it is

soft, and easily broken, and was intermixed with large masses of iron ore, and

soft red sandstone, and there were also two small veins of coal, which although

several feet higher than the larger vein evidently appeared to belong to the same bed,

having the same dip and bearing. In the beds of these water-courses, and also

throughout this low hilly tract, there are found large pieces of petrified wood, round

pieces of white quartz and worn fragments of mica slate, having quite the appearance

of a salt mine.”

1838. ] Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. | 955

indeed the rains had commenced prior to any coal being brought

from the mine; but notwithstanding this drawback Captain Hannay

succeeded in raising 1050 maunds of coal, and conveying to the mouth

of the Boree Dihing upwards of 800 maunds, the whole expense on

which amounted to 96 rupees 5 anas 6 pie: so that the coal has been

brought down to the confluence of the Boree Dihing with the Brama-

putra at something less than 2 anas a maund*.”

Boorhath and Jypoor, the places at which the coal beds just noticed

are situated, are laid down in the annexed sketch-map between No. 3

and No. 2; the advantages of the former beds over the latter in regard

to situation may also be seen on this map, the Jypoor river joining

the Bramaputra 18 miles higher in Assam than the river on which

the Boorhath coal would have to be carried. Besides this, the Jypoor

coal is situated from 14 to 3 miles from water-carriage, while boats

may approach at Boorhath to the mines. Nevertheless, these differ-

ences are so slight, that a preference to one or other locality must

depend on its comparative healthiness, on the quality of the coal, and

on the general capabilities of the place.

Of the healthiness of Assam generally people now begin to form

very favourable notions compared with Bengal; and Boorhath and

Jypoor are said to be situated in one of the finest quarters of the

province. In the present state of things, perhaps, the Boorhath and

Jypoor coals are only to be regarded as the elements of local improve-

ment ; the intercourse between Upper Assam and other parts of India

must assume a better footing, before its coals could be supplied to

Calcutta at a cheaper rate than Bengal coals, but whether the former

might not compete with the Bardwan coal in the supply of the depdts

_on the Ganges, unless the present prices of the latter can be consider-

ably reduced, and whether it would not be advisable, considering the

local improvement to which such an arrangement would give rise, to

adopt measures for supplying the Gangetic steamers from this quarter,

even though no direct saving were at first to be expected, may deserve

consideration. Such a question, it is not perhaps the business of the

Committee to examine into; still itis one of so much importance, and so

intimately connected with the practical results of its proceedings, that

we may be pardoned for alluding to it in detail.

* In concluding this letter Captain JenKINs observes,—‘‘It gives me much

pleasure to bring to the notice of Government through the Committee, the

zealous manner in which Captain Hannay, at considerable risk and trouble, has

co-operated with me, not only in this instance, but in every other, where an attempt

has been made to develope the resources of the eastern districts of Assam,”'

956 Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. [Nov.

The rates at which the following stations are supplied under the pre-

sent contracts, which will expire on the 26th of July next, are as follows :

Cutwa,......Rs. 55 Sper 100mds. Colgong, ... 70 0 per 100 mds.

Berhampoor,... 56 0 ditto. Rajmehal, ... 67 0 ditto.

Kulna, ......... 54 0 ditto. Mongeer, ... 74 0 ditto.

Commercolly, 64 0 ditto. ~ Danapoor,... 80 0 ditto.

Surdah,......... 70 0 ditto.

Average, Rs. 67-7-6, or 654 rupees 1] anas per 1000 maunds*. But as

the Bhagirutiy and Sundurbun courses are only used alternately by the

regular steamers, the quantity of coal consumed annually at the four first

depéts, can only be equivalent to the quantity consumed at two of the

others, the true average price of the coal consumed will therefore be

Rs. 67-13-2, per 100, or 678 rupees 13 anas 8 pie per 1000 maunds.

Considering the proximity of the two first depéts, Cutwa and Berham-

poor, to the Adj and Rajmehal coals, and the Kulna and Commercolly

depots to Sylhet, the most economical arrangements, that could be made

for their supply, would certainly be with persons connected with the

mines in each of those districts, who might be requested either to furnish —

tenders, or to make such other arrangements, by way of experiment, as

might seem most sufficient, for securing so small a supply as that re-

quired on the Bhagarutty and Sunderbun linest.

* Norte by Captain JoHNSTON. These charges include the landing, storing and

delivering the coal from the depots to the steamers, and all loss by defalcation

or other causes. The contractors are not paid for the quantity of coal they dispatch,

but only for that which they deliver, free from dust and small coal, on board the

steam-vessels.

+ Mr. Lewin of Cherra Poonji offers to deliver coal into boats at five per cent.

on the cost of doing so, and Mr. GEorGE Locu, collector of Sylhet, who communi-

cated Mr. Lewin’s offer to the committee, proposes himself to find boats for the

transmission of the coal to any depdt at which it may be required, and thinks the

service which this would confer on the district would induce any collector at Sylhet,

should he be removed, to do the same. See on this point the report annexed to this

article.

Regarding the Adji coals Mr. ERSKINE observes in a letter, dated 6th November,

1838, to the coal committee : ‘* It would be impossible to say how much coal might

be got down to Cutwa during an average season, andit would be equally rash to

give a tender for the supply of a stated quantity, or to depend on such a contract,

till the navigation of the Adji had been put to the test of experiment.’’ In another

part of the same letter Mr. ERSKINE remarks that, ‘‘ Government could not depend

on a larger supply than 10,000 maunds in one season, till the navigation of the ddji

had been tried,” and then states that ‘‘ if 40 rupees per 100 maunds could be offered

for the Sheergurh’’ (which is the best Adji) ‘‘ coal, a much larger supply might be

brought to Cufwa than that abovementioned, by employing carts to bring down the

coal to the lower Adji ghats during the dry season, making the carriage from theuce

in boats less precarious.’’ Mr, Erskine adds, that he should be happy himself to

1838. ] Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. 957

This would leave the higher stations to be supplied on a separate

contract from Bardwan, or any other source from which it might be

done cheapest. The average charge for coal at the five depéts from

Surdah to Danapoor is at present 72 rupees 3 anas per 100, or

721 rupees 14 anas per 1000 maunds.

The entire consumption for the past year has been about 91,000

maunds, on the whole line from Calcutta to Allahabad, but should the

number of steamers be increased, the expenditure of coal must also

increase in the same proportion, and the supply would in such case

become, in every sense, an object of more importance.

Boats of any draught would have a favourable current throughout

the year from Disung Mookh on the Bramaputra to Surdah, with the

exception, during the dry season, of about 80 miles from Jafirgunj to

Surdah, they would thus be enabled to reach Surdah, one of the

depéts for coal, in about one month, or say, six weeks from the date of

leaving the Disung river. Returning unladen for fresh cargoes, they

would be about two months, thus making three trips in the year with

the greatest ease, inclusive of the time required for taking in and

discharging cargo.

The following are the rates at which boats are hired by the commis-

sariat for the conveyance of public stores; and, though higher perhaps

than those which merchants pay, may be taken as established charges, at

which any extent of tonnage may be had. The boats required for this

duty should each carry at least 1000 maunds*.

Hire of boat, at three rupees per 100-maunds burden, per

UR haar foe R Shy wag ud ase niaie's id nan eae anc ne @t tee) CMe

Maney, at. DS TUPEES PET, MENZEM,... 0. sawersenncareee ser dncsorsent) O

Pe Destined, al Fivtipees Cael, hi. 0 coi. 2) ee oytlecs cus leradde eve ascieee OO

95.

undertake the delivery of coals at Cutwa for a year, by way of trial, should no one

else offer to do it on more favourable terms. The Rajmehal coal discovered by Mr.

PonTET, will, that gentleman thinks, cost at Berhampoor about six anas per maund ;

but further particulars require to be known regarding it, before any reliance could be

placed on receiving supplies from this bed.

* Note by Captain JoHNsTON.

** I believe this is for the measurement of the boat; a boat of 1000 maunds will

not carry more than 6 or 700 maunds weight.” The weight which boats may carry

depends a good deal on rivers and seasons. In March and October it might be

necessary to load boats lightly, but at other periods coal boats from Assam might be

laden if necessary to within six inches of the water, having such fine rivers to

navigate; but if a 1000-maund boat be too small, a 1400-maund boat might be

employed instead, with the same number of men, which would make a trifling differ-

ence im expense, but would give a great advantage in the results.

958 Report upon the Coal beds of Assam. [ Nov.

or 1,140 rupees per annum, to which must be added insurance, which

to Gowahutta is 84 per cent. and there is nothing in the navigation of

the Bramaputra for 200 miles above Gowahutta to increase the risk be-

yond that of an equal distance on the Ganges ; insurance would therefore

be on three trips 52 rupees eight anas, which added to the annual cost of

the boat and men, gives 1192 rupees eight anas. To this sum must also

be edded the original cost of raising and conveying the coal from the pits

to the Bramaputra, this according to Captain HANNAy’s experiment is

two anas per maund, which for 3000 maunds would be 375 rupees, mak-

ing in all for 3000 maunds of coal delivered on any part of the Ganges,

from which three trips might be annually made to Assam, 1537 rupees

8 anas, or 512 rupees 8 anas per 1000 maunds, being 209 rupees 6

anas less than the rate at which the depots from Surdah to Danupoor

are now supplied*.

* Major HENDERSON remarks, that the calculation here entered into does not

provide for incidental expenses, including clashies’ establishments, wastage, landing

charges, custody, all which would somewhat increase the expense, though not very

considerably : Captain JOHNSTON therefore makes it out as follows :

Boat hire of 3000 maunds of coal, as per above statement,..........-+2-RS. 1140 0

Cost of 3000 maunds of coal, at two anas per Maund,......e.ccesceecceceee 3750

Insurancé, ‘at thee! percents, ss oe) ciedsiuials aie daw ctelaclnle sidladwldtel's oeldabulelimerl ae -O

Loss on coal by two removals and twelve months storing, 300 maunds.

Landing ‘charge on. S000 MaUNdS, po. occa on vives cin ve wales ccs depimihe amerika 22.46

Reloading and delivering 2700 maunds, at one rupee per 100 maunds,...... 27 0

Sirkar and peons’ wages for twelve months, seven and five rupees,.......... 144 0

Ground rent and expense of shed, at six rupees per mensem, .........2.... 720

Total cost of 2700 maunds of coal delivered to steam boat, .. 1825 8

or ten anas nine pie per maund nearly. This calculation, which certainly omits no-

thing that could be necessary, while other things are probably overrated, still leaves

an advantage of one ana three pie per maund, in favor of the rate at which Assam

coal might be supplied to the station, from Surdah to Danapoor, compared with that

now paid by the government for Bardwan coal for those stations.

The loss on coal by moving it from place to place varies according to the nature

of the coal and the number of removals ; the latter cause would be at its minimum

in the Assam coal, as the same boat that would take it up in Assam, could deliver it

at the depdt for which it might be intended, and where it is not necessary it should

remain a year in store. A sirdar and peon moreover would not be necessary for every

2700 maunds of coal, but for all at the depot, which might be 20,000 maunds ; the

boatmen would be responsible for the coal on board their own boat, and, being mea-

sured out and into the boat, there would be no room for cheating. It is also too much

to charge the entire expense of a shed to 2700 maunds, when the same shed would

answer for all the coal required at the depdt. Both statements however show that

the Jypoor and Boorhath coals might be introduced to the higher stations on the

Gunges with considerable advantage ; and if free passage to emigrants were offered in

the return boats, with the prospect of employment, the present paucity of labourers

in Assam would soon be remedied.

1838. ] | Report upon the Coal of Sythet. 959

Perhaps the most important results from opening coal mines in

Assam for the supply of Gangetic steamers, until more convenient

sources should become better known than at present, would consist in

the assurance of an unlimited and steady supply at all seasons, and the

widening of the field for competition, while the attention of natives being

directed to a new and promising branch of trade, the measure would

contribute largely to the local improvement of the province.

To the above account of the coal fields of Assam it may be useful to

add some further information collected by the committee in respect to

the coal of Cherrapoonjee and other parts of the hills north of Sylhet,

and likewise respecting the coal field on the Koela nulla near the Soan

river in Behar. ‘The information in respect to the former mines is in

the shape of replies obtained from Mr. G. Locn, the deputy collector

of Sylhet, to queries addressed to him by the committee for the purpose

of ascertaining the possibility of turning the coal of that district to

account in steam navigation: and similar queries were addressed to the

Engineer of the steam service, Mr. Tyrer, at Danapur, in order to

ascertain the same points in respect to the Soan and Koela coal field.

The queries and the replies are given as they were received.

I. Sylhet coal, G. Locu, Esq. B. C. S. Deputy Collector,

Sylhet.

Ist. ‘ How many situations are there in your neighbourhood at

which good coal is known to be raised, and what is the distance of the

mines from the nearest navigable rivers ?”

Ist. There are three, Cherrapoonjee, Sirareem, and Lour. The

coal of the last mentioned place is inferior to the Bardwan, but the

vein is close to a small river navigable for dingees during the rains.

Cherra is eleven miles from Pandua, to which place boats of 500

maunds can proceed during the rains ; but it is necessary to bring the

coal from Terriah-ghat at the foot of the hills to Pandua in dingees, a

distance of four miles. The Strareem vein has never been worked,

and is farther in the interior of the hills, four or five miles from

Cherra.

2nd. “What are the situations at which depdts might be most

conveniently established ? for what period would these depdts respec-

6 E

960 Report upon the Coal of Sylhet. [ Nov.

tively be accessible for ordinary boats of a certain size? would any

particular boat be desirable and what is the probable expense per

maund of delivering the coal at the nearest depdt accessible to large

boats ?””

2nd. Chattuk, on the river Soorma near the mouth of the small

river which runs past Panduwa, is best situated for a depdt, and is

approachable at all times of the year by the common country boats of

500 maunds, which it will be best to employ for conveying the coal.

The price of coal is likely to vary at Cherra from 20 to 22 rupees per

100 maunds; and as it will be safer to calculate upon the higher price

the following will be the average cost of delivering at Chattwk.

100,000 maunds of coal at 22 rupees per 100 maunds, Co.’s Rs. 22,000

A salary, of three per cent. on the Brees to the contractor or

agent at Cherra, ...... See enrcn rater 600

Expense of building a depdt Fa Hs are Sj os 200

Conveying coal from Soorma-ghat to Chattuk, at sh rupees

per TOC mnaundsy oe kaa Wine! oe alah, eee

24,800

Thus the rate of delivery at Chattuk would be three anas eleven pie or

four anas per maund. I annex a statement showing the expense of

conveying, and the price of delivering the coal, at the several stations

mentioned in your letter.

3rd.“ Are any parties now working the coal mines in your vicinity,

and what is your opinion as to the best mode of proposing for tenders,

or otherwise providing for the future supply of coal for river steamers

from mines in your neighbourhood, and what your opinion generally

as to the best way of bringing such coal into use after July next, when

the present contracts will expire ?”

ord. The Kasyas are the sole workers of the Cherra vein. That

of Lour was worked for a short time by Mr. G. InGLis of Chattuk ;

but the coal being inferior could not compete with the Bardwan in the

market, and he gave up the attempt. No contracts can be made with

the Kasyas for a continued supply of coal, for without some one to look

after them, and to see their engagements fulfilled, they would never have

the coal at the foot of the hills, in sufficient time. Each supply ought to

be bargained for on the spot, and I would recommend, as mentioned in

my letter to you of August last, that an officer be appointed to contract

with the Kasyas for the necessary supplies, and that he should receive

1838. ] Report upon the Coal of Sylhet. 961

as a salary, either three per cent. on the price of the coal, or what will

be better fiftv rupees per mensem. His business would be to see that

the coal was brought to the foot of the hills, and to report when the

required quantity was ready for despatch. The detail of the business

can easily be settled by us, should this arrangement meet your commit-

tee’s approbation, and the sanction of government. That some such

arrangement is necessary is obvious, for it would be impossible for me

to leave my station and present duties, to go to Cherra to make con-

tracts, whenever a new supply of coal was required, which could not

even then be procured without constant supervision. I was assisted by

the kindness of a friend at Cherra when I made the last successful

experiment, and I wrote to a gentleman settled at Cherra on my return

from Calcutta, begging to know whether he would agree to the following

terms. To purchase the required supplies of coal, and to receive a

percentage on the price or fifty rupees a month. To find the purchase

money himself, and not to require repayment till the whole supply had

been delivered at the foot of the hills, leaving the coal to be forwarded

to its various destinations by the collector of Sylhet, or any other officer

who might be authorized, for his own health would not permit him to

come down to the plains. He stated in reply his inability to find the

purchase money, but he is willing to take upon himself the task of for-

warding the coal, and as he has been resident some time in the hills, he

is likely to get it as cheap as any one else. The great object is to have

some one to look after the Kasyas ; the money might be supplied from

the Sylhet treasury, and as long as I remain im the district, I shall be

happy to use my best endeavours in forwarding the coal to any place,

and assisting the views of the committee.

It will now be a difficult thing, and attended with greater expense to

have the coal ready at the different stations, particularly at those above

Mongir and Danapur, by next July. Allahabad is about two and a

half or three months’ journey from this, and it will take some time in

getting the coal to the foot of the hills ;—there is now but little water

in the small river that runs by Terrtah-ghat, and the coal would have

to be carried in canoes to Pandua and thence to Chattuk. These

canoes are cut out of a single tree, and not capable of carrying more than

twenty or thirty maunds ; without money I can do nothing, and unless

I have orders to draw on the collector of Sydheé for the necessary sum

immediately, another month may be lost. I will, however, make the

attempt, and accompanying is a statement showing what would be the

probable expense.

6B2

962 Report upon the Coal of Sylhet. [ Nov.

The stations lower down the river than Colgong and Rajmehal can

be supplied in time, when the rains commence in April next, if the coal

is now brought down.

Ath, ‘¢ Your opinion is also solicited as to the most convenient locality

for establishing a general depot for the supply of the following stations

from coal mines in your vicinity, with a view to facility and economy

in procuring boats. Cutwa, Berhampur, Kulna, Commercolly, Sar-

dah, Colgong, Rajmehal, Mongir, Danapur, Ghazipur, Mirzapur,

Allahabad.”

Ath. If a depdt is to be established on the Ganges, the committee

will be the best judges of its locality. It would be convenient to have

one at some central station, or where boats might be easily procured, to

which coals from Chattuk might be sent according to the annual demand.

The cost of carrying coal from Sylhet will then be fixed, and the

price of delivery will not vary very much, depending of course on the

rate at which it can be procured at Cherva, which at present varies from

twenty to twenty-two rupees per 100 maunds: But it will be necessary _

to consider whether the cost of carriage from the central depot to the

various stations will not increase the price of the coal more than if sent

direct from Sylhet; of this I am no judge, not knowing what is the

expense of water-carriage on the Ganges. From the accompanying state-

ments the committee will be able to decide, which is the cheapest me-

thod of forwarding the coal, and if I have not allowed sufficient time for

a journey to and from the various stations, calculating from Calcutta,

the error can easily be remedied by allowing another month’s boat-

hire.

963

Report upon the Coal of Sylhet.

"107999109 *hdaqr

1838. ]

(4 e

HOOT ‘'S

“UOT}e}S YOVa je po 9 |Sl{0 |] {€ 1246 | 0 Jo I9ZLLI0 fo Joost} o lo {9462 ¥ 89L | FZ | CONST] oO Fea) vo "ore peqeaeliv

-amba. [vod jo Ayyaenb T \6 {9 |6 {21/99 | O 10 |t#SF10 [0 |09S2)0 |0 |*86I % éIt | Ot | 0008! o v te d10dBZA1 AT

oy} Surpaeser suo | 7 |6 jo |6 |2T/9s | 0 lo [FtSt10 |o {098210 |0 |t86: ¥ Zt | 9 | N008 | oO b ae Ot zaI)

~ONI4SUI 94} BATS 98.109 6 |£ |0 |6 I2T/8h | O 10 |F06E!0 JO |0Z61, 0 10 [F861 t éIT | 9T | 0008} Oo € "oe e1ddvurd.

JO [IM 999310 6 {4 {0 |6 |2t|8F | O \O |#06E/0 |0 |0G6T}0 IO {F861 t GIT | 9t | 0008 | Oo € ae eh A300 fT

our ‘jf surpsemsoy | 6 |L 10 16 |Zt/8% | 0 Jo |t06E!0 lo loz6r] 0 Jo |F86r t Zit | 9t | 0008] oO g cree quysuifey

a Surseyoimd jo asuad |g |9 jo |6 |z1/0b | 0 Jo l¢9ze!0 Io |ogzt\0 lo |rS6r r ZI | 9f | 000S | 9o z reretees Baospog

-Xo 94} jO Bapl swos 9 |9 |0 j6 {ZT)OF | O [0 {F9ZE}0 JO |O8ZI]O JO |FS6T v ait | Of | OCOS 0 é > qVpars

BAIS 0} Japio ut ‘suo | 9 |9 |0 {6 |2t/0% | o jo legzelo lo losat}o lo |F6r r cIt | 9t | O0OS | @ ra mes ot s[fooxouret0)

-1sodoid asau4 ur su0y OT\S |0 16 |ot/9E | O 10 |F*#6Z/0 JO 1096 | 0 JO |F86I b Gtr | Of | 000S cl if "2 Se Se PUREE

“B4S SNOTIVA 94304]v09 | ors {0 16 |3r/9e | oO 1o |+#6z/0 lo |o96 |0 Io IF861 t tt | 9L | 0008] ¢g I sores orodueyiag,

24} = peyNiaysip savy JT} O1/S 10 [6 |2t/9E | O 10 |#¥6Z)0 |O |096 | 0 [0 |#86I t tt | 9t | OOS | GT I Fak ae ee

‘dV Vd vied “seue ‘Sp | -skep |*syjuour

by i 4 re>] me pet ee | eee, ©

S 2s = I ue.

ote Em] & te aes | os aay ava | 2UTkSozpue |-ep eq 0} st [woo

= 5 ee mS, pie S: Sos S &o8 |'spuroo9| =o WOIZ BdULISIG) YOIYM 03 UOTIVIg

£8 & Suse = po SS Bae, 0 420 a

E, Bies| Et Fore 78, & 8's 2.

or 6 8 L 9 S ¥ € G T

008‘tZ

002 “jodap v Sutprmg jo osuadxay

OF , 5 ‘enpuvg 033eY5-Yriiday wor

— ‘sjodaq 000° [B00 9} Surhaauod jo osuedxg

eeresese season £ e ] Pp Ms . see eereersoee einroggom 319d

St ee ae eee, ee te ee juasaffip ay, 90 yn09 yayjhigy fo 008s Salen ae indie je00, 03 Arujeg

SI eeeweeseee eee ‘spunew OOL Jod a | € 3B 7809 aqngewd oy) fo #UIUMAIDIS 000'cz ; on eeeeaeene *‘sponew Oot qod

YzUOW | 10 JVOG PUNLUI-009 aU Jo DDIIg "SY TZ 3B “Spul OOOOO! Jo o0IIg

"SY

"Sy

964 Report upon the Coal of Behar. CNov.

II. Soan and Koela coal field. W. B. TyTLer, Superintending

Steam Engineer at Danapur.

Ist. ‘ How many situations are there in your vicinity, at which good

coal might be raised, and what the distance of the mines from the

nearest navigable rivers ?”

Ist. The coal with which I am acquainted is situated on the Soan

river, between Rahtas Gurh and Palamow, and might be advantageously

raised near Surdra on the Amanath river ; another good situation will

also be found at Hatar, where the coal is of a very fine bituminous qua-

lity, equal to any I have examined in this country.

2nd. ‘“ What are the situations at which depdts might be most con-

veniently established? for what period will these deopts be respectively

accessible for ordinary boats of a certain size ? whether is any peculiar

form of boat desirable or necessary, and what is the probable expense

per maund of delivering the coal at the nearest depot accessible to large

boats ?”

2nd. I would propose Seebpur as a general depdt, situated at the

junction of the Soan with the Ganges, near Danapur ; it will be found

a central and convenient spot, accessible to large boats at all seasons of

the year. 1 would also propose to establish another depét at Ghane-

ghat, where large boats would be obstructed from passing up the Soan

during the months of October, November, December, January, February;

March, April, May, and June.

From Ghane-ghat downwards to Seebpur, boats of about 500

maunds might ply throughout the year, but above that point smaller

size boats would be desirable, owing to the shallowness of the river. In

my opinion square punts or lighters, similar to those employed on the

Thames for conveying coal, would be of great use, as the quantity of

coals they would convey would be greater than that of any other craft

known in this country. The expense I estimate the coal at after it has

been laid down at Seebpur, would be six to eight anas per maund.

3rd. “ Whether any parties are now engaged in working coal mines

in your neighbourhood ? and what is your opinion as to the best mode of

proposing for tenders, or otherwise rendering the coal in your vicinity

available for river steamers ?”

3rd. I am not aware of any of the mines having been as yet opened

by any other person than Captain Saas, the executive officer of Dana-

pur, who some years ago brought from 12 to 1600 maunds to this station

for brick burning, &c. &c., and he speaks very highly of the quality.

I am of opinion that any mode of inviting public competition for a

1838. ] Report upon the Coal of Behar. 965

supply of coals from mines not yet in operation, would not be found to

answer so well, as by the government giving in the first instance a

grant of land wherever the mines are situated, and by afterwards making

advances on a private contract, to the parties holding the grant, for a

permanent supply of the coal to the depéts, where it would be desirable

to lay it down for the use of the river steamers.

4th. “ The committee would feel much obliged by your answering

these questions at your early convenience, and favouring them with

your opinions generally as to the best and most economical way of

introducing any coal with which you may be acquainted in the neigh-

bourhood of Danapur.”

4th. In the first instance we have to take into consideration all the

obstacles to the undertaking in view; in the second, the best means

of overcoming such obstacles, should they exist. As to the practicability

of procuring coal from the beds in the Palamow district, I have never

entertained any doubt ; but whether we may be able to produce the

article of the quality and in the quantity required, we are not certain :

although the whole mass of information, to which I have access, would

‘tend to confirm the opinion, that the mines will not only be productive,

but will require but little excavating of soil, and clearing, in raising the

coal to the surface.

Until operations have commenced, and have been continued for some

time, it would be rash to dwell too much on such a doubtful subject as

mining is well known to be, but as to the natural advantages, and facility

of communication either by land or water, we can speak with more cer-

tainty: a few most important points must be kept in view to ensure

success. First, the quality of the coal on the surface cannot always be

allowed to point out the best spot to open; and second, an elevated

point of the beds must be sought for the obvious advantage of running

off waste water; third, a spot as near the deepest navigable river as

possible, will be an important consideration ; and, lastly, a spot com-

bining as many of these advantages, together with a thick stratum of

coal to work on, where a mine is opened, will also require to be

attended to.

As to the navigation of the Soan river, I do not apprehend any

great difficulty, except in very dry seasons ; and to obviate this a great

quantity of coals ought always to be kept in store at the general depot.

We should require to use boats of a size proportionate to the depth of

the water found in the rivers, and to be regulated in all the arrange-

ments, as economy may dictate from time to time.

966 Ancient Inscriptions. [ Nov.

V.—Ancient Inscriptions.

Dr. A. Burns’ Kaira Tamba-patra, No. 1.

When we gave, in the past month, a translation of No. 4, of the

Tamba-patras, of which transcripts and facsimiles were obtained

from Dr. A. Burws of Kaira, we were not aware that one of the

same precise description had previously been communicated by Mr.

Secretary WATHEN, and was printed with an exact copy of the plate in

the number of this Journal for September, 1855. We were led to

refer to that article by finding in the oldest of Dr. Burns’ grants,

that marked No. 1, by him, the name of SitaprryA, and other princes

of the Valabhi race from SenapATI BHATARKA downwards.

Our present grant confirms the order of the reigns given by Mr.

WatTueEn from his Tamba-patras, and affords additional dates and cir-

cumstances, of high interest to those who occupy themselves with such

studies. Mr. WaTHEn’s order of the Valabhi or Balhara dynasty is

as follows :

Z ee

e Fe B ze

a 4 os

a ae ee tele

1 1 BuatarKka SENAPATI, 8 4 Srvapirya, I.

2 Duara SENA. 9 Cuara Grina, or Isn-

WaRA GuHA.

3 Drona SINHA. 10 6 Sripwara Sena, II.

4 Duaruva Sena, I. 11 7 Duaruva Sena, II.

5 Duara PatraH. 12 8 Sripwara Sena, II.

6 2 Guua or Graiua SENA. 9 Dauarvva Sena, III.

7 #3 Sripuara Sena, I. 13 Sriuapitya, II.

Of these rajas, the four following BaatTarKa are omitted in the

present grant, it being simply stated that from BHaTarka, the founder

of the family, was sprung Gua Sena or Grind SeEnA, the former is

our reading. From this prince however we have the genealogy com-

plete, and with the simple introduction of DHAruva Sena, III, our

ninth in order, and the author of this grant, the series corresponds with

that of Mr. WATHEN in every particular. The genealogical tree which

our present grant enables us to frame from Gua or Grina SENA

will stand as follows :

;

1838.) Ancient Inscriptions. 967

1 BuatarKa.-

pepusosep

Woy A WOLT

2 Guua or Grina SENA

whose other name was

GANDHARBA RAJA.

3 Sripwara SENA.

Se ee

—

4 SILaDITYA or 5 Jsawara Guua,

*IRAMADITYA. called by Mr. WatrHen

CHARA GRIHA.

(eee oe

9 Duarvuva Sena III.

or Duarmapitya. 6 Sripuara Sena II. 7 Duarvuva Sena II.

8 Sripsara Sena III.

Now the first thing to be observed is, that the grant translated by

Mr. WaTHEN purports to be by SkipHaRa SENA ; that we now present

is by DHaRuva Sena, the sixth im succession after him; of course

therefore Mr. WaTHEN’s is the most ancient; but though there were

six successions to the gadi, these must have been of less than the

ordinary duration, for the minister who prepared the grant in SRIDHARA

Smna’s reign was Skanna Buartra; whereas the minister who pre-

pared the present grant is named as MApANA HiIta, son of Skanna

Buatra ; thirty or forty years will therefore be the probable interval

occupied by the reigns of all the princes, named as having intervened

between Sripwara SENA the first, and Duarvuva Sena the third.

Another important fact-results from the date of our present grant,

which is clearly 365 Sumbut, and which must be the Sumbut of Vixra-

MADITYA ; corresponding with A. D. 309; but Mr. Warnen assigns to

SripHara Sena, Duaruva SeEna’s grandfather, the date A. D.328 or

384 Sumbut. He has been led to this conclusion by supposing the words

NJo. which he reads *“* Sumbut” with the figure “ 9,” to have reference

to the Valabhi era, ascertained by Col. Topp to have commenced in

® Perhaps ViIKRAMA‘DITYA but the V1 is wanting in the transcripts.

6 F

968 Ancient Inscriptions. [Nov.

A. D. 819. But there is no word whatsoever in the grant to warrant a

reference of this Sumbut to that era, and it seems much more natural to

suppose the Sumbut, or year, to be either the Sumbut of VixraMAbITYA

with the figures effaced, or merely to have reference to the year of Sri-

DHARA SENA’s accession. Ifthe figure which follows the word Sumbut

be indeed a 9, (it is not very plain) there is nothing to prevent the year

of the reign of that sovereign being indicated thereby, as has been

usual with many rajas, and as was practised even by raja KisHEN CuuND

of Nudea within the last sixty years. Assuming therefore thirty years

for the interval of the son’s succeeding Sxanna Buartra as minister,

the proper date of Mr. Waruen’s Tamba-patra, will be 279 A. D. and

that of SrrpHara Szna’s accession 270 A. D. The date upon Dr. A.

Burns’ grant, examined from the facsimiles taken off in printing ink,

is clear, so as to admit of no doubt of the figures, or of its being the

Sumbut of Vixrama’pirya that is referred to*.

The translation of this Tamba-patra is given entire, and nearly

literal, from a transcript made by Mr. James Prinsep, the pandit

KaMALAx4nta, aided by the Sanskrit College student SArop4 ProsAp,

having rendered it for us into English.

The character of the original exactly corresponds with that of Mr.

Watuen’s grant, of which a facsimile has been already published, so

that we are saved the necessity of having a separate plate prepared

to exhibit it.

Sf afe feafauwsfioara Teaavaasaatfrara fa

aIMTaAguarsansqacaHnaaagyatycaagaarg Waa

AMAATATHAAT ky PATRIA TAT ASwTaTaTH

creafaa: wewaTeaqcuearcifeaagial ciaaaicafa AAT

fresquTearefasfeartanse: 13 weaatefa

* Since the above was sent to press, a letter has reached Calcutta from Mr.

WaTHEN at the Cape of Good Hope, dated 16th October last, which, after

expressing great interest in the discoveries made from the Asoka inscriptions,

concludes as follows: ‘‘ My impression was, before | left India, that I mistook

the Sumbut in the Gujrat Inscriptions, and that it is that of VikRAMA’DITYA.”

This singularly confirms the conclusion we had come to, from comparison of

the date in this No. 1. grant of Dr. Burns; and would seem to show that the

year of the grant of SripHara Suna, translated by Mr. Waruen, was in his

opinion erased, and that the imperfect figures in the plate are not to be read as

the figure 9.

t The numbers indicate the lines of the copper plate.

1888. ] Ancient Inscriptions. 969

fedia: qaaaNcaNTaTaceqavatadaaTaTaT

wupatcifaewtawanauieaaaaeta: BAT 8 i fafa

DMA A ag WyfCulsaay aly CRAVING CIAL yas Is

aaaguia = wenwugifuncsefaacaranat 1 ow

AAA WLUITAaI AV ATLAal SUaeywfagayaieiywyy

mfaayqareatengeaystees: weraierfeanaien |

€y Wav: LAAT EAT: MAA: TE Tawaulenaayqe

ama eametaataratamyaaE: yafawaweet |

ey Wilzradennicafsa: acaaafarfansta:

aquufatuatatatrafaafeqease: weAacufsaatta

faztaaaorafsat oy Sy BIRT ATATANT Ae VSIA

atfiurauraat cefaat waltatacicarfeare: aearetta

TaIaufenceatamal | ¢ y famaatotefaaanfsas:

ULAATSAC: MUCHA TACaAUTSTAM a: TRATUTIAT

MARITMAATIMMHIT: | toy BakeyVT aAcra

fasamiaaaniaeriagiare ca faaaa aa aC Ua RAIS

aafaquauctatat «tq | fiafaaaafacfa aaa:

aufaqaaatt qaemuedaufcam: waasradaatia

ecaty qufcaifanqgarat 12 | WaARMITGaraws:

Hanayraufaralarryae aa fa: PATTI TS SST TATA AT

yauancveaiase: 22 1 | fal|aafeatedtaarar Btw

KaagaaTAatawla TIquHTAUA [RUTATECAAT

SAMAAMA Wlsy CAT: Gara vAaMWyZ

WIAAAMSaH VLA al eMIUz Farctagqaaifaaaaaear fa:

WaTaareniaas 1 (yy Ufamafatrcagatuacarediarfa

quaaitaaacamistyaaatgte: vafatat = ufcase

TeTauKairaracy | wy cfafscneafeaafafaarn-

6 F 2

970 Ancient Inscriptions. [ Nov.

anatase fare starantaafeqanaafatat

facata: asrafatrts | ¢ ou fHUweecasIEHAETT:

PMLA VaR TA a wasafatataratafaufaaa ara

SURAT NYS | Aegea: saadenfana: WaAareyqe

saqLIEeMVAtTaMareaaia aafsgifuaafataatats

afaesraae: 1 Uc y ufaifamaesaciaiaigeaa wT

fraTEUAaAresfaAAT Lag AITATTT | reo |

fartanrantaaafcanaficararta quaHaratac

ataansafaaaninifayga: qacMaHy RQ UfwaAt

qwIaaeaNefaafaaafeasfaumeuies: Baa TATA

ufyarantafiarran | R24 weufeawatfirahea

RIAA ULAATS AC: PALS AMAA ATAUTSTAT aA: AACA

fanfaaanaraa 1 (ay cufsfierararttafy aafaat

faaarat afianfaa qeanre: gfegqergaarqcufadcfan

gtafiaafes y Rey wage vafafirefeacaataaty

alfaafaafreqensgguease: $9 vaeafraferncrs

TR | afargqrciea: aaafer ataat vata wras

aianafastasiraaraaantea fara ye |

afufanrvamafasafarm: miata eqaienad wag: fra

WHAT AYACAAMATAGAMAAT | Ro | WTAE

fufaaura: vaafanatia ae eeT: Baa fasted

fa yafafacdrectife frcfaaferatiat y ay Bea

aaraquatrasraaeiaafetateaataatua: ufraatet

feufediaatat qaAtTsat: Blyaea: Re | TE Bawa

QIeHAA IMAC agus frafaaIsgqasicuyUTAnst WHE

wlaeasaufafeaaifanasiaca | go | ATaAzafate

yeaafisafiataneacaaara cq RRC EUICAR

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. 971

Kataefafesararcre RQ) RHATUTRL THAAnfaay

RAIITAATTTINT AAMAS TAZ YAS a aqarawaa

ULa | BR | ATSACULANTFICAABCIAYCIAILA CAT

ait atucdaaqfiaaeae Watlistwwga: daryata

VIWAAT 33 | Atfaasy cfatraanara cfrwssrafafea

Uetfay wHayafaaq AacHREdds TATE IeTay

Waiwelauiway | 38 | vaTaataa ana sada afd

aq: aacafafvafeancwaiaRifequaway yale

wiafiacangersatayaay WR ae fafara ae

waFatataandcqefaay afratratsayat qaag<

arafaa cweafsa sie feaarre: aa | ed | alaufaed

St lacartfaayaewlcqaws away faaraaaqara: | wees

UH: GAMES FaIaralararleraryaragy: TIypeeeT HAUS

encaeue: afacfafraqnnmim sarfanaaargifaasam,

(yaqteaaa] catsgarmgastsufeat: wecawaics

acanafaca: afafearcrrataafaaeaaafasaaqaaage

faaafances [yafamrscaaraqatasracaamys

ufcamaizaaye] | 29 | MyacgsT: waasifa:

\ RN ULAR TAT: Blycsawwaias: wAagifsageasat

fada saat quafagguceatguiyaiecfaafacacafcaa

fcaufeatsaanate || ¢|| ufacfavagrquacacraaal

AAIMAGHHA A TARTS A WAGaalaTyTAMRAT_AT: GT

alateteeiewefaaferene | st | vau: seamadtfwar

agian vatafatafacwaaia: dfeaneifangeraaT

ufceatufsatadigaasifacatam | 82 | avatfuarfest

AAPAAMCUAGASUACILE: BASay LF wargaurtaa

eR aaratae secauyfa: qaTeRawAlT 4 Be |)

972 Ancient Inscriptions. [Nov.

faqa: atfa canmeaia agqafaacaaatifa frercaa

anaaaatafeaufeatca fanaa ateateafaauar eae

a | ey fanfaaquattatydne seared ofa aare

AAALATAITATA SAA CeABAA ATS TAT ATAU TAL

Ufarcacieacates | e¢ | WRATH: BaTag Taraans

AMLAAT BALM SUVA HT AAMT SB A aaa Raa

ufeada WU jee | waTeRaeqeay efeaaatas

yafumarafaanaauaacesise: aaa: Statats

ay aqarasuaaifwarfateraasaransranas: TA

Qafasica cisnaiawsawasifassgam freniaa

xq ufvaggaia: suwnfasHias Wiclna xa Wa

THEME eaatanityateages: fraqqMAraciits woe

VIAIATAT AAAI BAIA aaIIatHAaaatafa fF

adit uHalSat: BRaiza: quUMaalag GaraTaaTA

a atfated aaraararattest genaaata fatcfanefataaa

wenn whens gfSaTAT yaaa a aAA aes TM TT

YAMATUNYSA BEAUTE aNcaTaT cafaara efaa

weeifa seafaforaqeagiea ates |faaat caafaen

uagacantaa Wefuersrer veh wecsfud qa waa

euUIagaa: oargtea: itfeatasiaraaet war

efaua: eranaivuea atrarfaaniagias: wena

aa wareqiimamifsags aufedtuew we gaa: afte

aiftanngraietaa: Wet yusy alaatat ws <fawa:

LifemlysiawaAal Bets: awaufanqwadial sacac-

faatwas vafacaran [caters atefianfaa aes 3

TUGCUERSAAAalTHIAS A AAATACH 1H Taefes siieaewea

wifraarer vazufcat feufareranufeact anit wert

1838. ] Ancient Inscriptions. 973

Yad WeMUITMaMa <a Fee wy aT

efeqavasad wuta: aeuafaavaeas vy weweta

fad nitfaicrainfiad das. we <feanedifa

etre: yas ca UEIEZUIeatafaa ay Usa front

aa fauna: wats Bote Waas Sua: caarfaaranrd?

fedtaee <fauuceaifa fentac cas wafermgurer

qdufia wey gaa: sifcacieade <faua: arercuteat

Gast BCs aaMimawHtial wat As

Buta: Cifaafantasawaias AAI afed Tas

za aigy aufeat wars wissaaauafecaicg ae

auey Wargarager qacraaaMaeTTAIMy yas

pUaawaUcaaraqutan tached ala fExgaaraaat eR

acfatrafcarsaaaarta yaurstasaataquata at fa

umicaifas wfsadiwaa wacafaat Hae wea

aera: Tieaearat(a] Rarer | 2 | Ga afta satis

waufsfieaduscaa afaaaafecaray arat

aq ufacrms sangigcsamerat | ¢8 | aTAAAe

ufeursfaaasuayg) wsftgu wat cst awer

fefa:| wa ve ae ufa we ae at ae! arate

eatia qermescratts | ew wATdamMcta | fle

aufaatrats At aa Bly: Gacredta | afearae

arf qt fasta ufse: | seurettaa wT aT ATH

qHaq| TAT AU CrayayIs: 1 d¢ 4 fafeafas af

tfaneitaasafaanfamte@cugusafaaufa sitacafeaita

GURY SMT Thy SRA AA

974 Ancient Inscriptions. [ Nov.

Abstract translation of No. 1. of Dr. A. Burns’ Tamba-patras.

Glory. From Buararka, the best of rulers, magnanimous as the sun,

victorious, of good disposition, who obtained his power by the excellence

of his intelligence, by gratifying and elevating his friends in spirit, and by

obtaining all men’s good opinion through donations and courtesy, who

by his power maintained men in respect, and through the fidelity of his

servants preserved his dominions in prosperity, and laid his enemies

prostrate, sprung GuHA Sena, who obtained absolution from sin by

bowing submissively to his father’s feet, and who was called GANDHARBA

R4ja, because of his consideration for other men, as shown by his regula-

tion of prices, by his anxiety to protect his people and friends, and

by his sacrificing high state interests to secure the safety of those who

took refuge with him, who obtained popularity by giving to the poor

more than they asked. None excelled him in the science of Gan-

dharba. Enriched by the jewels his enemies presented in tribute, of a

voice pleasant as that of Cupid and the moon, lenient in the exaction of

state dues, a teacher of morals, in all observances never failing, great

and powerful, as manifested by the motions of his elephants, his wisdom

and sound judgment are appreciated by men of social feelings. The son.

of GuHa SENA, SRIDHARA SENA, likewise absolved himself from sin

by submission to his father, as if he had washed in the Ganges water.

The warriors of the universe were astonished at his strength and skill,

and by his power he secured the prosperity of his kingdom. Like his an-

cestors, he was a protector of learned and eminent persons, and a subduer

of the evil-doers and corruptors of virtue. In him only did Lukusm1

and SARASWATI (wealth and knowledge) unite. For he was alike a

subduer of lakhs of enemies, and abounding with wealth, and the

possessor of all acquired endowments, which sought refuge with him,

like the thousands who prostrated themselves before him for their live-

lihood.

The son of SripHaRA Sena, Sri Siapitya, worshipped likewise

his father’s feet, and prospered. _ The four quarters of the world were

adorned with his fame, won by merits, all delighting, all astonishing. He

gave courage and confidence to his army, by acquiring for it the lustre of

a reputation founded on many victories. Though possessing an intellect

capable of understanding and arranging the good and bad sciences, and

famed in the world for his intelligence, yet was he not fastidious ; and

though attentive to the wants of others, still always cheerful and con-

tented. He was an example of the Satya yoga rajas in his conduct,

and enjoyed happiness without any sacrifice of virtue. His second

name was KramApitya, (perhaps VixramApitya.)

1838. ] Ancient Inscriptions. 975

Sri SimnApITYA was succeeded as raja by his younger brother

*IsHWARA Gua, who was dutiful and obedient, and therefore loved by

his elder brother, who was honourable like Upendra. It was the study

and the delight of IsawaraGuua to obey his elder brother’s commands,

and to make his own power and wealth conducive to his happiness. His

footstool was bright with the jewels taken from the crowns of hostile

rajas brouglit to subjection. Yet was he never reproachful of others.

Those who opposed him in their pride were reduced to helplessness.

The vices of the Kali yoga were forgotten through his virtues and

talents. His magnanimity made him tender of the faults of others, and

his heroism was apparent to all, so that the Lukhshmz of the sovereigns

he subdued and destroyed with the weapons of his wrath, took him by

the hand. Great was his wealth, and unity characterised none of his

qualities or attributes.

The son of IsHwara GuHA was SRIDHARA SENA who overcame

and silenced all the learned men of his age. He had the conviction

of his foes’ mortification and envy, because of his own power, wealth

generosity and magnanimity. With the gravity of deep learning, acquir-

ed by mastery of the sixty-four Vidyas, and by acquaintance with the

manners of many nations, he united cheerfulness and mildness, and by

nature he was gifted with humility. By the power of his bow he subdued

the pride of his enemies—his bow victorious in many battles. The |

rajas, overcome by his skill in weapons, delighted in their subjection to

him. Dxaruva Sena, the younger brother of SRIDHARA SENA, was

obedient to him, and prospered in wealth and honor, and rivalled the

kings of antiquity in his conduct: many affairs of great difficulty were

completed by him, and the friends he trusted and employed on great

occasions, were enriched by him. He was as a sanctified hero, devoting

himself to human actions ; such was his attention to the minutest studies.

Like SwayamBuu (MENv) he was endowed with all attributes—pati-

ent in learning every branch of the sixty-four Vidyas. The resource of

all for counsel—beautiful as the spotless moon, and resplendent in power

as the ever-rising sun, darkness was dispelled from around him. He was

versed in the arts of peace and war—a deviser of schemes adapted to all

purposes and occasions, having been taught by the learned the two great

aims—to do good to the world, and to promote the exaltation of his king-

dom. Though powerful, he was compassionate and learned, and avoided

sin, and was firm in friendship with those who submitted, but prompt

to repress his enemies before their prosperity gained head, thereby

establishing over all people the ascendancy of a superior mind.

* This is the raja called Coara Grina by Mr. Warturn.

6 G

976 Ancient Inscriptions. [Nov

The second son of Daaruva Sena was SRIDHARA SENa, very learned,

a king of kings, excelling in wealth ; whose forehead, worn and reddened

by the frequency of his obeisance to his father’s lily feet, looked as if

adorned with the crescent of the young moon. His ears were orna-

mented with pearls like moons, and his body was cleansed with ablution

from the waters of munificence, according to the precepts of the Vedas

which he never forgot. He gave delight to all, as a water-lily spreads

its fragrance, by abstaining from the resumption of grants. His bow

was drawn for the good of the universe, and he excelled in archery.

The leaders of his enemies’ armies, immediately on his mounting his

war elephants, yielded submission to his orders.

The beautiful kingdom of VatasHapra came next to Doaruva SENA,

son of Sruapitya, who was brother of Srrpuara’s grandfather, as a

prize-wreath conferred by public opinion, and was to him an ensign

of fame. He was the master of many armies, beautiful in person,

sincere and young, and with his hair resplendent with gems, casting

radiance over his courtiers, like the flower manddra. His fame, bright

as the full moon, delighted the hearts of all, and his lily feet were

placed on white marble. He promoted the fortunes of his friends, was

sincere in heart, and good to all. His face was like the autumn moon,

and his hair like the streaks in an emerald. His enemies were

humbled, and the kings opposed to him found their territory invaded, -

and were indebted to his bounty for the moderation of the tribute he de-

manded ; by the fragrance of his breath the air which others breathe was

perfumed ; from his ears precious stones of various colours were pen-

dent, like jewelled ornaments upon the volumes of sacred learning. On

his breast he wore a jewel, like the sprouting shoot of his youth wa-

tered by the sanctity of his munificent donations. His elder brother

was Isuwara Guua, whose person was embraced by Luxsum: for

the promotion of his good fortune, who excelled all rajas in conduct:

and in fame, who with the wand of his power destroyed the serpent of

his enemies’ pride, and gained over the Luxsumr of other kings who

admired him, who restrained crime, and adorned the earth with the

lofty ensigns of his power, and settled the customs of the four great.

castes. His lily feet are adorned with the crown jewels of prostrate

chiefs, subdued by love rather than by force. A refuge to all in battle,

brave, and in all things virtuous, performing all the duties of royalty,

and amongst them the liberal distribution of gifts to brahmans, and to-

the temples of the gods, from the wealth in his possession, which is to:

them a source of great delight. The earth was enlightened with the.

fame he gained by his munificence to gods and brahmans of the Ka-

1838. ] Ancient Inscriptions. 977

linga families, who were deprived of their Dharmadwayjja (flag of virtue)

which was white as pure pearls, and the people of the three regions shed

tears of joy. The other name of Dyaruva Sena was DuarmapitYa,

a name given to him only for his virtue.

The said prince* (Duaruva Suna) inheritor of his father’s fortunes,

whose dalliance is with fame as with a wife, and whose crown jewel is like

the crest of a peacock, who adorns the royal LuKssmr1 as a lion adorns

the forests on the mountain side, and scatters his enemies as the rainy

season dissolves clay ; whose friends’ countenances expand for joy like

water-lilies, while the flags of his enemies are dispersed like clouds;

powerful, diligent, of spirit like the rising sun, the destroyer of his

enemies, son of Sinapirya, the elder brother of Isawara Guua, who

enlightens the earth with his fame like a moonbeam, and who, smearing

his body with sandal-wood dust, is beautiful like the Vindhya cloud-capped

mountain, proclaims to all : Be it known te all of you, that for his father’s °

and mother’s virtue’s sake, he, the said son of Sitapirya, has presented

to the brahman Lapuuuta, son of the brahman SAwnpa, a religious

student, venerable, acquainted with the four Vedas, who lives in the

villages situated near the hill fountains, the fertile field called Varunam

Bilika Vakkara Kaddraka, situated near another field, and on the

road, southwest of the village named Dya Pall, having had the same

measured by Hipipaka with a measuring rope. The field is divided

into six portions.

(Here follows a minute description of the boundaries, which need not

be given.)

The above land, with its tanks and hillocks,being of the measure of half

a kshetra, is to be enjoyed in full property as a perpetual inheritance by

the said LApHULLA, his sons and posterity for ever, so long as the sun,

the moon, the earth, the rivers, and the mountains shall endure. It is

productive land and capable of rearing valuable grain.

Let not the hands of the king’s servants touch it, nor let any one

claim it on the part of the gods and brahmans by whom it was hereto-

fore possessed.

“To give land,” &c. &c., (here follows the usual quotation in favor

of donors and in execration of resumers of grants. )

This grant is executed by order of Daaruva Sena, son of the

king SILADITYA, by his faithful servant for peace or war, keeper of his

* The word for prince in the original is Sailaditya, which I am assured is a

legitimate patronymic from Sirapirya. It is evident that Duaruva, the son

of SILADITYA, is meant from the closing sentence of the grant.

6 «2

978 Information regarding Illanoon Pirates. [ Nov.

treasury, Mapana Hira, son of Skanna BuatTra, in the year Sum-

but 365 (A. D. 309) on the first day of the light half of the month

of Bysakh.

On the seal, Sri’ BHATARKA under a bull, as in Mr. WaTHEN’s

grant, for which see vol. IV. page 475.

Vi.—Information regarding Illanoon Pirates. By Captain Buaks,

H. M.S. Larne.

In the course of the past year, Capt. Srantey, H. M. S. Wolf, with

the Diana steamer in company, fell in with a fleet of pirates in the act

of attacking some Chinese trading vessels, and having rescued these,

the steamer followed, and by its rapid pursuit and well-directed fire

captured and destroyed several of the pirates. The prisoners taken

on this occasion were carried to Singapore for trial, and the Malays

were convicted and executed, the facts being such as to prove that the

fleet attacked had committed more than one act of piracy, before

the British vessels fell in with it. But amongst the prisoners were

some J/lanoons, and it appearing that many of these pirate vessels were

of that nation, the Recorder who tried the case would not pass sentence of

death upon them, owing to some doubts which arose, as to whether they

might not be acting under commission from the Sooltan of Sooloo,

or from some other recognised prince of that part of the Archipelago.

Very little information was procurable as to the political character and

circumstances of these i/anoons. But they were not wholly unknown,

for in the year 1822 it was this same class of pirates who attacked the

Seaflower, and Mr. FuLLerton, then governor of P. W. Island, was

disposed to have sent an expedition for their chastisement, but was

restrained by the government of Bengal. There is also an imperfect

mention of this race in Mr. Moor's recent compilation of notices re-

garding the Indian Archipelago, which contains the intelligence col-

lected by Mr. Hunt regarding the Sooloo Islands in 1814: but the

information procurable was altogether so defective, that it was deter-

mined to take the occasion of any one of H. M. vessels of war pro-

ceeding to the vicinity, to ascertain further particulars regarding

them. Captain Blake, of H. M. S. Larne, found the opportunity

of making the desired inquiries, and the following report from

that officer is the result. It has been communicated by His

Excellency the Naval Commander-in-Chief to the Governor General,

and by His Lordship’s orders is made available for publication in

this journal.

;

1838. ] Information regarding Illanoon Pirates. 979

To Sir Freperick L. Maitranp, K. C. B.

Rear Admiral and Commander-in- Chief:

SIR,

In compliance with your memorandum of this day’s date, to “ report

to you any information I may have been able to obtain during my stay

at Manilla, respecting the state of piracy in the Sooloo Sea,” I beg

to inform you, that on the arrival at Manilla, about two days before my

departure, of some Singapore papers, containing the particulars that

transpired at the trial of the “ Illanoon” pirates at Singapore, lately

captured by Her Majesty's sloop Wolfand the Honorable Company’s

steamer Diana off Tringana, | sought an interview with Don JosE

ARCONI a post captain in the Spanish royal navy, and Don ViiLa-

SICENZIS his assistant, two officers who have been employed for some

years in watching and suppressing piracy amongst the southern group

of the Philippine Islands and Soolso Sea, and I may observe that the

former officer, while I was at Manilla, received his promotion from

Spain for his exertions on this service.

It appeared from their statements, that the “ Tlanos,” as they call them,

are a distinct race of people, inhabiting the line of coast comprised within

the bight of the bay of that name in the island of Mindanao, the shore of

which is there one continued line of mangroves and swamp, and which soon

communicates with an immensely extensive mland lake. This lake they

consider as their stronghold and their home, and these people are

termed by the Spaniards “ Los Illanos de la Laguna.” Here they

build and repair their prahus, which they convey to and from the sea by

means of ways or platforms constructed of bamboo and ratan and placed

on the unsolid surface of the mangrove roots and branches, over which

their prahus are hauled to and fro. On this lake too they have their

wives or females in the prahus, in which they live, and in short, here

they carry on all intercourse with each other as an insulated and dis-

tinct community. Born and bred in a life of piracy, they look on it merely

as a means of living, and not as a criminal occupation. For this reason

they meet with nothing that escapes their attack in the shape of native

vessels of those seas ; but I was especially assured, and all accounts seem

to confirm it, that they are quick and intelligent in the extreme, in dis-

criminating and instantly avoiding a canvas sail, or any vessel of Euro-

pean appearance; and so dexterous are they, that they in a moment

lower mast and sail, and are hauled in among the mangrove shores with

which the innumerable islands thereabouts abound; and though the

Manilla government maintains a constant establishment at different points

of Mindanao, especially at Samboongan, it is but rarely that their

780 Information regarding Illanoon Pirates. [ Nov.

falucas, or (gun-boat launches) succeed in capturing any of the “ Illa-

nos.” ‘Two of them however were surprised and secured in the early

part of this year, and their crews amounting together to about sixty

were in prison at Manilla. As they were not captured in any act of

piracy they are merely kept as prisoners, but what their ultimate des-

tination may be I know not.

The distance to which the “ Illanos” extend their cruizes is shewn from

the late capture off Tringana: but I was much surprised, when pointing

this out on the chart to the Spanish officers abovementioned, at their

assuring me, that they had no doubt the pirates made their round south

of Borneo to the coast of Stam ; that there is a pirate tribe on the north

end of Borneo, daring and atrocious as themselves, between whom and

the ‘“ Illanos” exists, and always has existed, a most deadly and unex-

tinguishable enmity, and that the latter will never pass by the northern

route. If these two tribes of depredators do meet, a most sanguinary

conflict ensues, and I was assured, that either of them will even quit

their plunder to attack the other, and thus prefer the gratification of

feelings of hatred and hostility. The object from which the “ Illanos”

derive their principal booty in their cruizes, is the captives they make

and sell on all parts of the eastern and southern coasts of Borneo, and

inthe Macassar straits. To this they principally direct their attention,

after they have supplied themselves with a sufficient number to pull at

the oar and do the other work of their prahus.

They seldom cumber themselves with any thing from the cargo of a

capture, save gold dust or other valuable goods.

Though other descriptions of pirates infest those seas, the ‘“ Illanos”

are always known from the peculiar construction and dexterous manage-

ment of their prahus. A drawing of one of them was shewn to me,

which minutely corresponded with the description given of the one cap-

tured off Tringana.

It has been supposed that these “ Illanos” are subject to and act

under the directions of the raja of Sooloo, but I was most positively

assured by the Spanish officers mentioned above, as also by His Excel-

lency Don AnprEs GArcra Camper, governor of Manilla, that such

is not the case. Captain Don Josz Arcon! has had some communica-

tion with the raja of Sooloo, and is acquainted with his situation, his

means and his habits. He assured me that the raja had neither means,

power, nor influence over these “ Illanos ;” that they are a race purely

piratical, of a distinct community of wild ranging predatory habits,

dependent on no oue, and acknowledging no external authority. It is

true they frequent the island of Soolvo as they please, quite unmolested,

1838. ] Information regarding Iilanoon Pirates. 981

and without hindrance, as well as the other innumerable islands and

mangrove banks (called by us the Sooloo islands), supposed to be sub-

ject to the raja’s sovereignty. One of these, called “ Bang een ghee,”

eastward of Sooloo, is a principal resort for them, as it affords conveni-

ence and facility for their piratical pursuits. It is principally mangrove

growing upon coral banks, and is well calculated for protection and

secure concealment.

I was informed by Don Jose Arcont, that he had witnessed at one

time nearly two hundred “ Illano’” prahus, great and small, off this is-

land, and on attempting to chase them with his “ Falucas,” they out-

stripped all pursuit, and disappeared in the most extraordinary manner,

dousing masts and sails, and taking refuge among the mangroves.

He compared these haunts to extensive nests, or banks of rats, where

they can fly from one refuge to another, and which no means, we Euro-

peans here possess, could ever succeed in annihilating.

The island of Baselan, I was also informed, isa common resort of

the “ Illanos,”” and some of its inhabitants are pirates from their birth,

and it is not unusual for them to identify themselves with the “ Ilanos.”

Although the whole Sooloo group is subject to visits from them from

time to time during their cruizes, they are in the habit of resorting to

no other fixed points except “ Baselan” and ‘“* Bang een ghee,” the

first of which is an island of very considerable size. They generally

obtain their supplies of ammunition, &c. by trafficking with places of

their acquaintance, which are in communication with the various small

Dutch settlements on the coast of Borneo and the islands.

The boldness and audacity of the “Illanos” cannot well be exagge-

rated. They have been known to enter the bay of Manilla, passing the

signal station on the island of Corregidor, where two gun-boats are

generally stationed, and to capture boats or small vessels within the bay.

This I believe was proved on the late trial by two boys, who were

captured by them in a boat off Cavite, about eight miles from the city

of Manilla. From the “ Laguna” which they inhabit in Mindanao,

they have been known not unfrequently to push a passage in their pra-

hus out to the northward by a small river which runs from the lake into

the sea at “ Cay-gain,” where there is a Spanish settlement, a fort,

and always a company of soldiers, whose random fire from musketry,

after they have got clear, they have ridiculed by loud shouts and

wild yells of defiance. If they have reason to suspect that a par-

ticular look-out is kept for them when on their passage to seaward

by the Spanish falucas stationed at Samboangan and its neighbourhood,

their quickness and penetration are incredible. They will move their

982 Information regarding Illanoon Pirates. [ Nov.

prahus with caution along the edge of the mangrove banks by

night, even for ever so short a distance, and haul them into an

impenetrable concealment ere the dawn of day, and at last gain their

object by persevering in their progress night after night, while look-

outs are kept constantly on the edge of the mangrove banks unseen

during the day.

The Spanish officers confessed to me, that their attempts to capture

them were almost uniformly foiled by their quickness, cunning and

sagacity ; and strange as it may seem, these extraordinary marauders,

acknowledged foes to all they meet, through the advantage of locality,

their own adroitness, the peculiar construction of their prahus, and

other natural circumstances so favorable to their lawless pursuits,

maintain in spite of every thing a constant intercourse with their home

the Laguna, almost without interruption.

It may not be irrelevant here to mention, that a treaty (so called)

was concluded between the raja of Sooloo and the late acting governor

of Manilla, SALazaR, about two or three years since; this treaty

is however proverbially ridiculed at Manilla, as having been made with

an individual ignorant of the faith or meaning of a treaty, a mere

cypher, nominally a raja, but possessing no control over his subjects

who regard not his authority and yield him no allegiance. This may

tend to confirm the assurances made me, that the raja of Sooloo pos-

sesses not a shadow of power or influence over the community of the

‘¢ Tllano” pirates.

The foregoing details are recited from memory, but are the true

substance of information I gathered, during a long verbal communi-

cation, over charts, with the two very intelligent Spanish naval officers

before mentioned: and though they may not throw much additional

light on the information already abroad on the subject of piracy in the

Sooloo sea, they certainly tend to confirm, or explain some remarkable

points of the evidence, that transpired during the late trial of the

“ Illano” pirates at Singapore.

I have, &c.

(Signed) J. J. BLAKE,

Her Majesty's Sloop Larne, Commander.

Toong-koo Bay, 13th Aug. aa

1838.] . Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 983

VIL.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 5th December, 1838.

Present.

The Right Rev. Lorp Bisuor of Calcutta, V. P. in the Chair.

Messrs. H. ‘T., Prinserp, Ewart, Hare, Col. D. McLeop, Captain Pen.

BERTON, Major Greaory, Lieut. Monrriov, Dr. Evans, Dr. McCurn-

Lanp, Dr. Spry, visitor, and Dr. W. B. O'Saaveunessy, Officiating

Secretary.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed. The

Secretary rose to return thanks to the Society for the honor conferred on

him by his nomination as one of their Secretaries during the absence of

Mr. James Prinsep. He also informed the meeting, that pursuant to the

arrangement made with Mr. Mauan for conducting the duties in the

Oriental Department, they would carry on a new series of the Journal of

the Asiatic Society, after the current year.

Dr. Goopeve and Mr. R. O’Saavue@unessy were proposed by the Secre-

tary, seconded by Capt. PemsBerron.

Read a letter from Professor Orroman Frank of Munick, acknowledg-

ing his election as an honorary member.

Read the following extract of a letter from Major Troyer to the ad-

dress of Mr. James Prinsep.

‘¢ Paris 31 Rue de la Madeleine, 15 July, 1838.

‘* My dear PRINSEP,

‘** T had the pleasure of writing to you a month ago in answer to the most valuable

account which you gave me of what has been done by you with respect to the copying

of the Vedas for the French, and communicated to Mr. SALVANDY, the minister of

Public Instruction. In answer to it, he ordered that an annual sum of 1500 francs

be sent to you, (JAMES PRINSEP,) until the completion of the whole work, that

is until the whole mass of Vedas be copied. You will undoubtedly receive an

epistle from him on the subject. This will be the continuation of a great trouble

to you, but I have the pleasure of assuring you that the service which you render by

it to all those who take an interest in Sanskrit literature and in Indian antiquities

will be duly appreciated. Be pleased to correspond upon the matter as hitherto

with me, and I will not fail to be your faithful reporter to the French minister of

Public Instruction. I am forwarding to you with this a letter from BUKNoUF,

who will, among many other things, tell you, that the decoration of the legion of

honor is to be offered to Mr. Hopcson of Nepaul, as an acknowledgment of the

trouble which he took in procuring and sending to Paris important Sanskrit manu-

scripts belonging to Buddhism, which religion appears to grow every day in extent

and antiquity. You will be very sorry to hear of JAcquet’s death, at the age of

twenty-eight years. You will be able to judge yourself what hopes have been buried

with that learned and uncommonly active young man.

‘* BuRNovrF is beginning to print the Bhagavat purana with a French translation,

You will, before the arrival of this letter, have received a large chest of books sent

you by Mr. Cassin, Agent to the Asiatic Society of Paris. I can but recommend

you once more to send your Journal, and every oriental work to be sold, directly to

Paris, addressed to Mr. Cassin, Agent dela Societé Asiatique de Paris, Rue de

Casanni, No. 12. The sale will be effected better than it can be in any other way,

for it is not easy to a great number of persons on the continent who may wish to

buy oriental works, to procure them from London, whilst they may easily get them

from, or in, Paris.”

(Signed) A. TROXER.

984 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nov

Read extracts of a letter from M. Garcin pr Tassy, dated Marseilles,

11th September, 1838, acknowledging receipt of catalogue of Arabic,

Persian and Oordoo works belonging to the Asiatic Society. M. vr

Tassy’s letter gave cover to a prospectus of his work on Hindustani lite-

rature. The prospectus witha list of subscribers is printed in the number

of the Journal of the Society for November.

Read extracts of letters from M. E. Burnour, Secretary, Asiatic Society

of Paris, in acknowledgment of several numbers of the Journal of the

Asiatic Society.

Read an application from Herampanatu Tuaxkoor, applying for an

increase of his salary.

Resolved, that the application be referred to the Committee of Finance

to settle the amount.

On the suggestion of the President, seconded by the Secretary, Mr. W.

Grant was proposed a member of the Statistical Committee.

In pursuance of a letter addressed to the Society by Mr. Secretary

Macnacuten, read on the 10th October last, regarding the interchange

of publications with his Highness the Pasha of Egypt, the Secretary ap.

prized the meeting that he had forwarded a set of all the Arabic publica.

tions printed by the Society to his Highness the Pasha of Egypt, and like.

wise certain Arabic books selected by Mr. Prinsep and purchased by

Government for the use of the institutions established by his Highness.

| Library.

The following books were presented.

On the primary forces of electricity, by RicHARD LAMING, M. R. S.—by the

Author.

Proceedings of the Geological Society, Vol. II. No. 56—by the Society.

Notice sur des Vetements avee des Inscriptions Arabes, Parsanes et Hindustani,

par M. Garcin DE Tassy—by the Authors ,

Meteorological Registers for September and October, 1838—by the Surveyor

General.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—History of England, Vol. 8—from the booksellers,

The officiating Secretary laid before the meeting a printed list of the

Members of the Society, prepared by Mr. James PrinsEp.

Resolved, that the copies be distributed among the Members.

Read a letter from the Right Rev. Jonn Lewis, Bishop of Isauropolis

and Vicar Apostolic of Bengal, forwarding a copy of his publication of the

Cochin-Chinese and Latin and Anamitan Dictionary, and requesting the

Society to apply to Government for 100 copies of the Anamitan part of

the work, besides the 100 copies already offered by the Author. |

Resolved, that an application be made to Government for the purchase

of the additional copies, as requested by the Bishop of Isauropolis. |

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from Captain F. Dasuwoop, Assistant Secretary to the

Military Board, intimating that the principal commissary of ordnance has

been requested to send the Buddhist stone pillar, on its arrival from Delhi,

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 985

_ to the Society, being a present announced at the meeting held on the 7th

February last, from the Maha Rajah Hinpu Raw.

Read a letter from H. T. Prinsep, Esq., Secretary to the Government

of India, forwarding copies of the Inscription and a tin roll of the remaining

facsimiles of Girnar.

Read extracts of letters from M. Everne Burnovr, Secretary to the

Royal Asiatic Society of Paris, to Mr. James Prinsep, dated Paris 15th

May, 1838. M. Burnovr notifies the despatch of copies of his commentaries

on the Gaina, and of the first and second parts of his Memoirs sur les in-

scriptions cunecformes. The price of the Gaina is.65 frs ; of the inscrip-

tions 20 frs. M. Burnovur then writes—

‘*T have just seen in your Journal the proposal to publish lithographs of the caves

of Western India; I beg to be added to the list of subscribers for a work of such

high interest, and one which ought to be imitated in all parts of India. It is scarce-

ly comprehensible that the ancient monuments of a country so entirely subject to

your government should have been so much neglected. DANIELL’S views are im-

measureably too dear, and are not sufficiently comprehensive.

‘* T have seen your (charmant travail) on the famous Pali inscription. The fact

is of the highest importance, and you have acquitted yourself so as to deserve the

utmost honour. Doubtless some difficulties still remain, of which I think the most

Serious is the name of the king of Ceylon, But other inscriptions will probably

annihilate this difficulty ; you are now in the high road of discovery and we have

every thing to hope from your persevering and prosperous efforts. We are far

from making such swift and brilliant progress. We want monuments and have

philology alone to study. Still even in this there is room for discovery in all that

concerns religion, philosophy and literature—although even such must yield in

striking interest to historical disclosures. The task of commentary and interpreta-

tion of the ancient texts is tedious and dry, but it must be persevered in. We must

_ be supported by the hope, that these ancient words and forgotten forms may be

found again on monuments and coins, and thus lead to the understanding of these

valuable remnants of a venerable antiquity.

‘* The Mahabharat still prospers. I induce ‘ tout le monde’ to purchase copies, by

affirming positively (which I believe to be true) that in 10 years this fine monument

of antiquity will not be procurable. The truly remarkable sale of this work is a

certain unequivocal indication to your Society of the duties it has to discharge, and

which are expected from it by the learned of Europe—doubtless you will not find

purchasers for every Vade mecum and every work in Sanskrit, Arabic, Hindi, and

Bengali which your translators may convert from the English; but I assure you that

you will dispose of the Mahabharat, however voluminous it may prove, and that you

_ would ere this have exhausted the Vedas and Puranas, if you, or rather the former

Committee, had undertaken them instead of the Mitakchara and similar short trea-

tises on law, which will very soon find no readers ia Europe. But in the great pro-

ductions of ancient thought—in the vast monuments of Indian genius, in such there

is immense interest. Despite of the progress of industrialism, (I mean no offence

to Mr. TREVELYAN,) Europe will read the Mahabharat, the Vedas and Puranas,

unless your scheme of lithographing these works should fail to be carried into effect.

Lithograph the Veda and you will gain immortal glory. _If this enterprise, like the

former, requires you to make some advances of funds, you may be convinced they

will very soon be covered and more than that. Look to the Mahabharat! Instead

of 100 copies, lithograph twice that number. If you cannot do so for the Vedas,

which I would bitterly regret, let us at all events have the Ramayana, the 18 pura-

nas, the codes of Narada Vrihasputi, Vishnu, Saukhas Lekola, Shalashada, Yadma

Valkya, with good commentaries on the great metaphysical treatises of Vrimansa,.

Sankya, Vedanta Nyayoan, the rituals and the Upanichada, &c. &c.’’

Extract of a letter from M. Burnovur, dated 12th July, 1838.

‘¢M. Jacquet died the day before yesterday of a disease of the chest. He was

but 28 years of age. This is a real loss: he was a highly informed, most sagacious

man, well skilled in Sanskrita and Chinese. His illness scarcely abated his Zeal.

He was writing in fact half an hour before his death.

6H 2

986 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. {Nov.

I see with great pain, occasions you some pecuniary loss. We are taking every

possible step to sell the work ; in general there is a considerable demand for Sanskrit

publications, provided they are ancient and complete. Still this demand is not

equal to that for the Romances of Lord Byron, and I fear no one will make a fortune

by Sanskrit impressions. But it would be painful to think that the little success of

the Mahabharat should prevent your publishing other works, such as the Puranas,

&c. &c. Senda prospectus with terms. We will obtain some subscribers, and

when the work is completed, additional copies will doubtless be disposed of.’’

(Signed) EvGENE BURNOUF.

Museum.

Read a letter from Mr. T. Cuunrca, stating that the bows and arrows

presented in his name by Mr. J. P. Grant at a meeting of the Society

held on the Ist August, were not from Penang, but from natives of the

great Andaman.

Read a letter from Lieut. M. Kirror, requesting to know the salary

of the person employed by the Society to go with him in his survey of

the Raepur road in the forests of Orissa, for the purpose of preparing

specimens of Natural History for the Museum, and also applying for an

advance of his salary for one month, which was paid by order of the Pre.

sident. The advance was sanctioned by the meeting.

Dr. O’SHaucunessy stated that the specimen Malacca bell, presented by

Mr. Lewis at the last meeting, contained neither gold nor silver and was

composed of tin and copper in the ordinary proportions of bell-metal.

Extract of a letter from C. B. Greentaw, Esq. to the same, with

remarks on the subject by Mr. McCueunanp.

‘* Referring to the article at page 65 of the Asiatic Journal for January last, I

some time since noticed to Mr. JAs. PRINSEP the existence within the volcanic belt

in the map of what is called the swatch of no ground, which, by the late survey

of the sea face of the Soonderbuns, which includes the northern part of the swatch,

would appear to be in the form of a deep crater; and it would be interesting if its

margin could be traced throughout its course, which I will ask Capt. Lioyn to do if

he can. The purport, however, of my now writing is to send you a piece of rock just

taken from the bottom of the H. C. barque Amherst, which, on her late passage from

Khouk Phyoo, struck on the Terribles, and brought away this piece. These rocks, the

Terribles, are also within the belt marked in the map, and to my inexperienced judg-

ment the rock seems to be of a peculiar character.

** With regard to the swatch, it would seem from a subsequent note to the one

alluded to by Mr. GREENLAW (PRINSEP’S Journal, 1838, p. 369), that Capt. LLoyp

has reason to suppose it is open to seaward. It is needless to say that any addition-

al information that can be obtained regarding so peculiar a phenomenon in the geology

of the coast, must possess the very highest degree of interest in a scientific point of

view, and perhaps the best method of proceeding as occasions offer, would be to take

soundings in different lines, so as to show the form of the basin and the inclinations

of its sides.

‘* The specimen of rock from the Terribles is a sea green and rather soft sandstone,

corresponding in appearance with a very common formation that skirts the base of

some of the great mountain ranges in India; its surface is harder than its internal

parts and of a brown color, deeply perforated by boring molluscs, and corroded by the

action of the sea. One part of the mass has somewhat of a nodular or concretionary

character, as if it had once been broken and reunited, but this may, probably be the

effect of corrosion. Viewed under a magnifier, it is seen to be chiefly composed of

angular granules of quartz, connected with greenish and black rounded particles,

the whole being a little coarser than the deposits now forming at the head of the

bay much nearer land. It is unquestionable therefore, that the Terribles are sedi-

mentary deposits, that must have taken place at greater depths than the reef now

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 987

occupies. It is also certain, that unless there be some counteracting forces engaged,

the action of the waves together with that ofthe boring shell-fishes ( Lithodomi and

a kind of Teredo) the danger of these rocks must be gradually diminishing. Hence

the importance in a scientific point of view of the accurate surveys of this coast now

in progress ; for had such been made 100 years ago for instance, we should now be

able to learn the relative changes that may have since taken place between the levels

of the land and sea. No one knows any thing of the molluscs of the Bay of Bengal :

we cannot therefore tell what animal it is that has perforated the fragment of rock

thus accidentally brought away from the Terribles inthe manner described, and

which must aid the operations of the waves materially in breaking down this

dangerous reef. I may take this opportunity of pointing out the identity of the

perforations in the submerged reef with those that have been formed under similar

circumstances in the sandstone of Cherra Ponji, and which may be seen in several

specimens of the latter rock nowin the museum. To illustrate this subject still

farther, I may submit to the Society a sample of the work of a Teredo which rapidly

devours trunks of trees and all woods that are cast on the shores of the Bay.

‘‘ This last specimen I received from Dr. Cantor, the only naturalist who has

paidthe slightest attention, that I am aware of, to the molluscs of the Bay; the

perforations in the wood are identical with those of the lithophagus teredo on the

rock, though neither animal has yet been described, but we may perhaps consider

the former to be the Teredo navalis or the T. Clava. Several similar animals are

however known to inhabit the seas within the tropics ; but the jistulana that perforate

rocks, though in a geological point of view the most important of all, are not, I

believe, known but by their perforations.”

Extract of a letter, dated 7th November, 1838, from Captain G. C,

Armstrone to Mr. McCuentanp, accompanying a box of minerals which

are presented to the Society.

‘* This station is in 22° 36’ N., and 86° 40’ E., nearly surrounded by hills, at

distances varying from 5 to 25 miles off. The soil in the cantonment, and to some

distance is clay (from the decomposition of felspar), mixed with small fragments of

quartz containing both iron and red oxide of manganese in large quantities ; the

surface is covered with a little vegetable mould.

‘The hills west 5 miles off are formed of large boulders of greenstone and

quartz; to the south granite, greenstone, clinkstone, and small portions of white

marble; to the north mica slate in very large quantities, imbedded with schorl

in aggregate crystals. Inthe Roro river and its vicinity, slate, limestone, jasper,

quartz rock, and rock crystal are found.’’ Capt. ARMSTRONG thinks there are also

indications of coal in this part of Singboom. Coal, I may remark, has recently been

observed by Dr. DUNBAR of the same corps on the way from Ramgur to Hazaree-

baugh, but it is probably that which was before observed by Mr. DRUMMOND of the

latter place.’’ ;

Read the subjoined Report by the Curator on several objects of natural

history recently added to the Society’s collection.

Skeleton of the long-lipped bear, Ursus labiatus, (BLAINVILLE.) Bradypus

ursinus, (SHAW, ) presented by the Curator, under whose supervision it has been pre-

pared and artificially articulated for the museum.

Of the now several admitted subdivisions of the genus wrsus, the present

individual ranks as one, and forms a perfectly distinct species from any of the

present known varieties; its geographical range being confined exclusively to

continental India—at least we are warranted in so limiting its distribution, no

accounts having as yet verified the existence of this animal in any of the tropical

forests of the Indian archipelago, or in fact in any other parts of the globe—until

future discoveries prove the contrary, it may therefore with propriety be regarded as

one of the natural zoological productions peculiar to India proper; and were not the

specific name ‘ labiatus’ so well applied as a systematic denomination in illustrat-

ing one of its most prominent distinguishing features, the employment of the topical

name ‘ Indicus’ would, in my humble opinion, be much more appropriate than on

the many ordinary occasions where it is given.

Although our animal may probably differ from those of cold climates in some

minor points, it nevertheless possesses all the generic characters of the typical

et and is the nondescript animal, and again the ursine sloth of early zoological

writers.

988 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nov.

This being the only skeleton ofany kind of bear at present in the Society’s col-

lection, I am unable to make any comparative remarks, or trace out the specific

peculiarities, if any exist, with regard to its ossipic structure. The bones on the

whole are strong and powerful; and though not yet arrived at maturity, as shewn

by the still unconnected state of the epiphisses, they indicate by the full display

of the large eminences and depressions for the origin and insertion of massive

muscular levers, that the fabric belongs to an ungainly and thickset animal. Inde-

pendent however of its clumsy appearance, the general contour exhibits a fine

adjustment of its several parts to the well known peculiarities and habits of the

living animal, while the structure and organization of the foot marks it as a type

of the plantigrade order—in this respect differing—and offering a fine contrast.to

the more agile feline carnivora—which are agaia the types or representatives of the

more perfect digitigrades, the toes only touching in the latter, while in the bears

the whole heel rests perpetually upon the surface of the ground.

The dentary system is perfect in all its parts ; the jaws containing six incisors

above and below, the absence of which in the generality of crania which are trans-

mitted to Europe, and which generally fall out at an early period of life, must have

led to the error of associating the animal with the Edentates or Sloths. The series

of well-defined tubercular molars, together with the anatomical structure of the

stomach and alimentary canal, would seem better fitted for vegetable than animal

matter, though I have no doubt this animal occasionally eats the latter ; it is well

known however, that bulbous roots, sugar-cane, and white ants, are the natural and

principal food of this our Indian variety of bear.

It is to be regretted that the animal was received in a too advanced state of de-

composition to admit of a very critical examination of its internal organization,

much less of allowing the digestive apparatus to be preserved as specimens of com-

parative anatomy.

ARUEIOPes. Faves Cleo abe) we sk leh ems ..+. Gazelle.

Presented by the late Mr. BELL, with the following short note, descriptive of its

habits while in his possession.

‘* This (I suppose the real Gazelle) was as tame as a dog, jumping upon every

One at table. We have had it as a domestic pet about a month, but could never

hit upon its proper food. Grain it was indifferent about, and would hardly toueh

any thing but dates, dressed vegetables and roses, all which had a tendency to give

it a bowel complaint : nevertheless it was recovering fast, when it unfortunately got

into an enclosure where some large antelopes were kept, and was found bleeding

about the abdomen. I fear it must have received some severe hurt from their horns.

I now send it dead.’’—October 29th.

At present I have not been able to identify this delicate and graceful little

animal with any of the recognized species of the group to which it evidently

belongs.

The specimen is a young female, characterized by rudimentary horns, want of the

usual development of the suborbitar sinuses peculiar to the deer tribe, having

tufts of hair below the knees and on the pasterns, possessing inguinal pores, two

mamme, besides the other distinguishing marks on the face, ears and flanks,

peculiar to the gazelline group; but on comparing these most prominent features

with those assigned to the several species included under the gazelles in GRIFFITH’S

translation of the Régne animal, it does not strictly accord in all of its specific or

even in some of its subordinate characters with any one there described. I have

consequently left it for future scrutiny rather than hazard an incorrect name.

As it is not known from what exact locality it was obtained, and the generic

characters being less prominently set forth in the females of most animals than in

the other sex, it must be reserved till we are fortunate enough to procure the male

animal ere its place in systematic arrangement can be accurately determined. Its

death appears to have been occasioned by swallowing a long piece of woollen yarn, as

a large coil of this material was found in the cavity of the stomach, and which must

have offered a mechanical resistance to any food passing on through the natural

passages.

Stomach and cecum of the above animal—the former showing the usual com-

plicated digestive apparatus peculiar to the Ruminantia.

Aquila Chrysetos. The ring-tailed Eagle (variety) ; presented by the curator and

mounted in the museum,

This magnificent bird was shot by a native shikaree at Tarduh, a village in the

vicinity of the salt-water lake. It is a large and powerful raptorial bird, possessing

all the distinguishing and characteristic traits ascribed to the true eagles; and

though evidently an old bird, it becomes a highly interesting object for comparisoa

with a young living bird, apparently of the same species, in the Society’s compound,

1838.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 989

and which with another bird, since escaped, was presented by Mr. HOMFRAY, of

Calcutta, who reared them from nestlings.

Noctua Cuculoides. The cuckoo-owl, figured and described in GouLD’s elaborate

century of the Himalayan birds.

Phenicura leucocephala. The white-headed Phcenicura, male and female.

Charadruis pluvialis. The Golden Plover, male and female.

Chloropsis Malabaricus. Malabar Chloropsis, (J ARDINE and SELBY’S I]lustrations)

—differing in some slight particulars (probably merely sexual) from the Cyanopterus

of Nipal, a specimen of which was sent by Mr. HopaGson to the Society’s musuem,

and again from a living variety now in the possession of the Curator, the habitat of

which is Monghir.

Cinnyris Gouldie. GouLp’s Sun-bird. .

This beautiful little bird, which unfortunately is not a very good specimen, is

named after the accomplished artist Mrs. GOULD, by whom the century is delineated,

and is the only one of the kind in the Society’s cabinet. It formed a part of Cap<

tain PEMBERTON’s collection of birds from Bootan.

Fuligula Rufina. The Crested black pochard, male and female.

Replacing an inferior specimen of the male bird, already in the Society’s museum.

Mareca Pecilorhynchus. The Spotted-billed Wigeon male.

Mareca ...... ?......Wigeon. Unidentified for want of the male.

_ FPuligula Caryophyllacea. The Pink-necked duck. Replacing a bad specimen in

the cabinet.

Fulica Atra. Common Coot, male and female.

DIACHOFAMPRUS cc wave eet > 00 veveenee0 dong: beaks

Although only one species (the M. Grisens) of this genus appears to be known,

neither the plumage of our present specimen or the one already occupying a place

in the Society’s museum and ticketed Grisens, and which are both alike, agree with

its description. I therefore withhold the trivial name, until I am fully satisfied

of its identity with Grisens, er find it to be what I suspect it is—a totally unde-

scribed bird.

Charadrius Arenaria. Sanderling, male and female. Corresponding with speci-

mens from China.

| ‘Tringa.........5..+. ? Sand-piper, male and female.

Recurvirostra Avocetta. Common Avocet.

A young bird of the first year procured from the Calcutta bazar, where they are

occasionally brought with wild fowl.

Columba Gouldie. China-tippeted Pigeon.

BMIIGCOO. En ccces Sevavesseres ? ‘MinghsSher,

Apparently an undescribed bird, brought by Dr. HELFER from the Tenasserim

provinces, and found in woods in the interior perched upon high trees. The ground

color of the bird is deep ferruginous, marked with broad transverse black bands.

Bill and feet scarlet.

Bucia Nipalensis. Nipal Bucia, male.

Falco Carulescens. Corulescent Hawk, from the Tenasserim provinces; only

one met with near Tavoy. It is very bold and pursues small birds. The natives

assured Dr. HELFER that it is equally distributed throughout the country.

Dicrurus Malabaricus. Malabar Shrike.

Cymberhynchus...».++.e.? Broad Bill,

from the Tenasserim provinces, and gregative in the forests near Tavoy.

— Sciurus Macrourus, Large-tailed Squirrel.

Paradoxurus—Indicus.

Cranium of the Ovis Aries—or Patna variety presented by the Curator.

_ The officiating Secretary presented the Report and documents of the

Statistical Committee, and stated that the President of the Society was of

Opinion that it would be inexpedient to publish these papers in the

separate form recommended by the Committee.

After some discussion, in which Dr. Spry and Mr. Ewart advocated

publication in a separate form, the question was referred to the Committee

of Papers.

VUI.—Meteorological Register.

990

eee Pe. ee

*aqqeasueyo| 47 (34517 GS | OF | 09} SZ j TTL ty 89 [e°18 [2286s bh8 ‘Gop e1qeedueYo |4T/I4SVT) €9 | 09 | OL | 28 | 1°6 |L°8 |a‘sola‘ZZIL'BL\0'°SL 9c6°6SIbFG'6s) UeaN

‘aug oO; VEL [Oo *N 1g | oF GL 6° T1631 L°gh ions’ (0s6. F°auyso ‘ds | Zi°m ul Ee | zo 08 | 6°6 |9°6 L°SL6°9L\1°FZ SkO* {esos 0

swno"mnd | T [a cu 9¢ | 6F 82 |9OLIGSTT T'SL 1696" |916° J ‘Azey-op | {]"m ‘ul cg | se €8 | 8°8 168 L‘bLiL°91'9°E1 090' j€90‘ 8

‘op T |“ ‘u 8p | OF EL FBLC el 1‘8L 4096‘ (916° ‘op Tj" “Ul OL | 9 98 | 9°Z |P‘Z UELic*ZL\ 1°92 950° |8¢0% 143

eS OR bd cp | 0g IZ |8°PT/ LO PZ tOI6® (966° *1v9]9 0} °° | 9 | Zo 68 | 6°8 |2°8 T#L|8°LL a be 00° as

fe | 12 G9 |€*S1/T‘9 3°62 F6ER9* j9G8* | ‘oD Maze op] T{M‘U'A] T9 | og 18 | 1°6 |3°6 SPLIGTLLITQL IHG. |8t6s $3

SaReT2 ote |e «6 cb | Le 12 18°F 16°F 1 G'6L|P9L! PRLS | Op Ar94 “P/Fg |My T9 | HB 18 | $6 |$°6 SELIG LL'6°GL E48" lepBt | es

wind -an'op| g fa ‘a £9 | 3¢ 68 |§‘OT\Z‘O1 0°08 {209° {829° § °9-uINd *I10/ g{°a “Ul GZ | $9 68 | OZ |otL E°SL/S°BL\E°LL OGL’ joel‘ a

gut zp Ape fe ‘u 99 | 09 #8 |b°8 |6°8 c‘gl}erl’ \6eLls ‘Azey =| zi" “Ul OL | 29 98 | L‘L \8°L 6°SL/9°8L| LLL 218" logs‘ 13

‘op Azey | t fa cu 99 | LP 8L [ETT TS 708 19085 [gegs fF °Ay “AIS op] g]°O “UE OZ | 29 98 | L°L |L‘L €°9L'L°8L/0°8L B16. |9E6° 03

‘od10 MOz*TD] T fem co ¥S | 8P LL LOTUS e°18 [978° \628° “WINd "119 | [(°9 “UR EO | 2g G8 | 96 |e‘6 Ul ce6° |#g6° A

‘op T |°0 ‘wu ag | cp 9L 10°O1/9%aI 8°08 1628" |016* ‘op o|°O “NE 6S | 09 08 | 9°0T\9°8 8°9L 286° {200° Ll

et) od 6 [Oo °N 6b | Lb bL OST FSI 2°08 [228° = |406° *1e9]9 €|"O *N} §9 | 19 8 | 0°9 |8°8 e'9l 800° |9z0° a

sel ; cas

°0 "21020 “OPES (0 “Ni 99 | 09 #8 |0°OT|h°6 o‘es fe6s° |ZT6‘ "op 1)'2 "W042 | go 98 | 9°8 |8°L 6°82 sl6* |866° | el

S3e@*p pes} ¢ ja cu 92 | 02 | &L | 68 |b‘9 |L°9 FI'69 [6°62 fo98* jose’ frezy “Apefo |foj‘o ul GZ | 29 | 99 | 29 | org [a2 [o*LZolrosiZeZiz‘osiere’ | 196° a

"1e9]9 tT fo ‘u 6b | 6h | 6G] PL le‘et!9°ZIIS‘Z9 |9°e8 [418° Ore‘ ‘rea, | 0} 0 =F99 | +9 | 82 | $8 | of6 [0°S le‘69lg’gzie"9Z\6'6L <68° vI6s ot

‘uno ‘19 | 1 [oO 'N ao | og | 29 | OZ |B‘etle‘siho's9 lo‘es foaZ‘ |poLS foug JFL “NJ €9 | 09 | 86 | a8 | efOr|T'6 |0°29)}3°GZ\0'L2)5°6Z|IP8. jgces | 6

oh) COM dO eo | OS | og | OL B°SUIBGg [SES TZOLS jogLs *eaqd | EL/"O “NE Zo | Sg | £9 | 6Z | Of11/2°0T]9°99\9"62\2°8Z|0°08 Tes, |as8* 8

‘Azey op | T |'0 “ou Gr | OF | Sp} FZ [etarlacolpo'69 [aves fypL’ ILL’ rumors sop! T\"m “ub 1@ | go | 99 | Tg | Zorle’6 |8‘99\T ‘6z| ‘Bs |8°08\c98" 2 a

‘op T |“ 'N 19 | Of | 6G | SZ |s‘eT|ESZTHI‘Z9 |S°e8 |89Z° Foe" *ouy foj'a ul Zo | Zo | 89 | 62 | 1'11/2°6 |8°89\9°0g|0°6Z| 1°18 988° | TI6® 9

“op T [°° ‘N OF | Sb | PS | SL IL‘HT\b“PTEL‘c9 |L°8 [a08* jesss froro-maze[o] Tl‘ “ul ig | 6c | 99 | 1g | OOrIS'6 ls‘s9lo'Talg*BZit'T8|cl6* |9E6 g

‘op T pa gb | OF | 09 | TZ le‘ct|a‘sifz‘69 j0's8 F9T8* EB" 3 ay *¥

“op*may | L [cu Lg | S¢ | 09 | GZ le‘ot|E‘TIhs‘69 | 1°98 bSBS FIT "4s ‘9) TM “Ul Tg | 09 | 99 | 18 | 2°6 196 |9‘0L/6*zQl- LOG* 836° £

"op 1 |“ '°N 99 | So | 09 | 8Z |8‘OT| O‘TTIs‘69 | 1°98 feta’ ieee‘ "aeap> | £0)"0 “NI gg |S | 99 | 8 | *T1/F 01/969) 1°zel6°GZ|1°18|806 63|SE6'6s|

‘aug oat] T | °N 1g | 0G | $9 | SZ l0°@t| L°SI]S*89 |6°F8 1 28Z°6o 9286S T

> 7 “9 = DB), Sit) y; 9 prt fe) > cele] a soles} CO] O -) Oo; 3&8

$2 || 55 (SEERCE</S“|22neioo1 2 | Slee | Ps] 22 (81 83 SegeUs| s |S) S (82) e2|Fe| &

TR PPP Te Steger sree sega) Fl azl sol “8 [FPS a eee Sl|a| Ize) ge 3

~ lls rp ei? sifct = 2 8 Om? S25) 5 = a est &

g, “pul AR Be 9! BiB] = “2 | 8B ey “pur M Ma] BIS o| a) ae 4

‘ *UOISUd} *A19 ‘ainjzer f ‘ainssolg : *uOISUd} — |, . *ainssolg 5

TOUIEOM snoanby -awmoisAy, J -aduiay formoydsowyjy TOUIEOM. snoonby AnjowoishH ainjeroduiaL daydsouny

“Wd F uoOUta}Jy “W °V OT ‘UoOUsIOT

“SES ‘saquaaoyy fo yjuopy ay3 of <njyn2JnQ ‘20g hussp ay} yo yday ‘uajsibay [votbojouoajayy

JOURNAL

tt oA, OOO LE TY.

No. 84.—December, 1838.

L—dAn Examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals, No.5. By the

Hon. Georce Turnour, Lsq. Ceylon Civil Service.

Having in the papers No. 3, and No. 4, given the lineage, as well

as the account of the birth, of GoramMo Buppuo, as contained in these

Buddhistical records, I now send you an analysis of the Parinibbdna-

suttan, which is the history of his final extinction, or death. It is

the third Suttan of the Mahdwaggo in the Dighanikayo of the Sutta-

pttako. It consists of six Bhdnawidrd ; and commences with the

words “the following was heard by myself,” being the introductory

expression used by A’nanno at the FrrrsT ConvocaTIoN, in propound-

ing each of the Suttdni of the Suttapitako in that assembly.

This Suttan is. perhaps the most interesting section in the Pitakat-

tayan. ‘The fame of SAxya had, at the period of his death, been to a

-eertain extent established; and the creed of that wonderful impostor

‘had been then recognized in the central regions, at Teast, of India. It

is justifiable therefore to infer, that a considerable portion of the inci-

dents recorded, as far as they could be produced by human imposture,

“practised among a superstitious and credulous Asiatic population,

actually took place. Whereas at the period of his birth, and even up

to the time of his secession from a secular and domestic existence, the

-eircle must have been restricted almost to his own family, within

which alone the delusion of his predicted Buddhohood could have been

‘fostered, and its pretended realization been recognized. No external

co-operation, therefore, of a deluded populace could have been enlisted

onan extended scale, till a more advanced stage of his pilgrimage.

Lhe account of the birth of BuppxHo given in the paper No. 3, must

‘eonsequently, as regards its narrative of the superstitious enthusiasm

6 1

992 Pali Buddhistical Annals. (Dec.

then prevalent, partake more largely of a fictitious character, than this

narrative of his death does. I have given a literal translation of the

most interesting passages, and a continuous precis of the rest of the

Suttan, adding a note from BuppHAGuoéso’s Atthakathd, wherever it

afforded the means of throwing additional light on the narrative of

the text.

This is, I fear, my last contribution to your Journal. In a few days

I leave Kandy for Colombo. ‘The duties of my new office, and my

separation from the Buddhist pandits, and their libraries at this place,

will prevent, for some time at least, the further prosecution of this

examination.

Kandy, October 18, 1838.

The Mahdparinibbéna Suttan. The first Bhanawaro.

The following was heard by inyself. At acertain period, while BHAGAWA’ was

dwelling at the Gijjhakat6 mountain, near Rdjagahan, the Magadha raja, AJA’TA-

SATTU, a descendant of the Wédéhi line, was meditating the subjugation of Wajji

(confederation )*.

Thereupon the said Mdégadha monarch AJA’TASATTU, the descendant of the

Weédéhi princes, sent for the brahman WaAsSaka’RO, who was the prime minister

of Mdgadha, and said: I must utterly annihilate these Wajjtans, who are thus

‘great (by their union among themselves), and powerful (by the efficiency of their

martial institutions): I will destroy these Wajjians: I will utterly exterminate

these Wajjians. Brahman, come hither. Wherever BHAGAWA’ may be, thither

proceed ; and having found him, bow down with lowly reverence at the feet of

BHAGAWA’, on my behalf, andinguire whether, free from ailment and disquietude,

he is in the enjoyment of his energies and health. Moreover thus address him.

Lord! the Mdgadha raja AJaA’/TASATTU, the descendant of the Wédéhi line, has

commanded me saying ; bow down in lowly reverence at the feet of BHAGAWA’,

and inquire whether, free from ailment and disquietude, he is in the enjoyment of

‘his energies and health, Lord! the said Magadha raja AJA*TASATTU, the descen-

dant of the Wédéhi line, in his anxiety to subjugate the Wajjians, has vowed,—I

must annihilate these Wajjians, who are thus great and powerful. I will destroy

these Wajjians: I will utterly extirpate these Wajjians. Whatever BHAGAWA’

may vouchsafe to reply, carefully retaining the same in thy mind, impart it to me:

the Tathagatha never spake an untruth.

The brahman WaASSAKARO, the prime minister of Mdgadha, having attentively

listened to the Mdgadha raja AJA/TasaTTU, the descendant of the Wédéhi line,

replied: Be it so, lord! and preparing superb conveyances, and mounting a magni-

ficent vehicle, surrounded by these superb conveyances, he departed from Kdjaga-

hén.

Wheresoever the Gijjhakéito mountain might be, thither he proceeded. Having

gone in his vehicle as far as he should go in a vehicle, then descending from his

conveyance, he approached the place where BHAGAWA‘ was, Having approached

him ; he made his salutationto BHAGAWA’. The prescribed salutations having

been made ; and having carefully called to his recollection all that he ought to

bave borne in mind, he seated himself on one side of him.

* These rajas or rulers were of the Lichchhawit dynasty ; the capital of whose

dominions called Wajji, was Wésdli (Allahabad). The union of the Wadian states

is stated to have consisted of a confederation of chiefs, or princes.

1838.] Pal Buddhistical Annals. 993

The brahman WAssAKARO, the prime minister of Mdgadha, who had thus seated

himself aside, addressed BHaGAwa' as follows: Lord, Goramo, the Mdgadha

raja AJA’TASATTU of Weédéhi descent, bows down reverentially at the feet of the

Lord GoraAMo, and inquires whether, free from ailment and disquietude, he is in

the enjoyment of his energies and health. The Madgadha raja, AJA’TASATTU of

Wédéhian descent, in his desire to subjugate the Wajji rulers, has thus vowed: I will

annihilate these great and powerful Wajjians : I will destroy these Wajjians. On this

occasion, the venerable A’NANDO was standing behind BHAcawa’, fanning him.

Then BHAGAWA’ thus inquired of the revered ANANDO’. Hast thou heard,

A’/NANDO, that the Wajjitans are frequently holding meetings, and that they are

assembling in great numbers? Yes, Lord, I have heard that the Wajjians are

frequently holding meetings, and that they are constantly assembling in great

numbers. A’NANDO, as long as these frequent risings, and constant assemblings

are kept up among the Wajjians, their schemes will be advanced. They will not

be checked.

Hast thou heard A’NANDO, that the Wujjians are meeting in concert, and rising

in concert, and that they are in concert making the requisite preparation ? Lord]

I have heard, &c.* A’NANDO as long as the Wajjians are rising in concert, are hold-

ing meetings in concert, and are making their requisite preparations in concert,

so long will the objects they have in view be advanced. They will not be checked.

A’/NANDO hast thou heard that the Wajjians are refraining from adopting that

which had no (previous) existence ; thatthey are abstaining from abolishing that

which had been (formerly) established ; and that they are adhering to the Wujjian

institutions which were anciently constituted, upholding them ? Lord! I have heard,

&c. A’/NANDO as long as the Wajjians shall abstain from adopting that which did

not previously exist ; from abolishing that which had been established, and shall

adhere to whatever Wajjian institutions may have been anciently constituted,

upholding them, the schemes of the Wajjians, A’NANDO, must advance, and cannot

retrograde.

Hast thou heard A’NANpDO that whatever number there may be among the

Wajjianst of Wajjian elders, these Wajjians support, respect, reverence and obey

them, conforming to what they hear from them? Lord! I have heard, &c. A’/NANDO,

as long as these WaJjians shall support, respect, reverence, obey and conform to

what they hear from the elders among the Wujjians, the projects of the Wa.ijians

must advance, and camnot be disappointed.

* Every answer is an affirmative repetition of the question.

+ On this point, the Atthakathd contains this note.

In aforetime, the Wajjian rulers, on a person being brought and presented to

them, thus charged ‘‘ this is a malefactor’’ without at once deciding ‘‘he is a

malefactor, dispose of him accordingly.’’ They surrender him to the Winichchhiya-

mahdmatté (chief judicial officers). Having examined him, if they conceive

‘¢ this man is not aculprit,’’ they release him. If they decide, ‘‘ this is a male-

factor’’ without awarding any penalty, they transfer him to the Wordrikd (learned

in the customs or laws). They also having investigated the matter, discharge him,

if he be innocent; but if he be guilty, there are certain officers called Suttadh ari*

(maintainers of the suttan) to whom they transfer him. They also inquire into the

matter and discharge him, if he be innocent; but if guilty, they transfer him to the

Atthakilakét. They also having observed the same procedure, transfer him to the-

* Vide Journal of 1837, for a definition of the word Suttan.

+ Literally «‘ the eight castes or tribes.” I can obtain no satisfactory explanation of the nature

of the office held by these functionaries. It is inferred to be, a judicial institution composed of

judges from all the eight castes. ;

612

994 Péli Buddhistical Annals, [Dec..

Hast thou heard, A’NANDo, that the Wajjians do not submit to have their wives

and damsels of respectable families forcibly taken (by their rulers)? Lord! I have

heard, &c. A’NANDO! as long as the Wajjians shall not submit to have their wives

and damsels of respectable families forcibly taken (by their rulers), the designs of

the Wajjians must prosper, and canoot miscarry.

A‘NANDO! hast thou heard that the Wajjians, whatever the number may be of

the Wajjian chétiyani* belonging to the Wajjian (rulers), whether situated within

or without (the city), they maintain, respect, reverence and make offerings to them,

and that they keep up without diminution the ancient offerings, the ancient obser-

vances, and the ancient sacrifices righteously made? Lord! I have heard, &c.

A/NANDO, as long as the Wajjians, &c.

A’/NANDO hast thou heard that to the Arahanta of the Wajjians, protection,

security, and safety are most righteously provided, in order that the Arahantaé who

have absented themselves from their country might return; and in order that those

who have returned to their country, may conveniently dwell there. Lord! Ihave

heard, &c. A/NANDO as long as the Wajjians, &c.

Thereupoo BHAGAWA’ thus addressed the brahman WASSAKARO, the prime minis-

ter of Maghada: Brabman, at the time when I was dwelling at the S¢randado Chétiyo,

in Wesdli, I propounded these seven imperishable precepts unto the Wajjians resi-

dent there. Brahman, as long as these seven imperishable precepts shall be main-

tained, and the Wajjians shall be observant of these seven imperishable precepts,

the projects of the Wajjians must prosper, and cannot miscarry.

On being thus addressed, WASSAKARO, the brahman prime minister, replied : Lord

G6ram6, if the projects of the Wujjians must prosper, and cannot miscarry by their

observance of any one of these imperishable precepts, who can define the measure

of their success, when they are observant of all the seven imperishable prece pts,

Lord G6Tam6, consequently it only remains for the Mégadha monarch, AJa/TASAT-

Tu, the descendant of the Weédcéhidn line, either to propitiate by tributes, or to

dissolve the compact which unites (these Wagji rulers), without engaging in war.

Lord GéramM6, as we have important and indispensible duties to perform, we must

therefore depart. Brahman, consult thy own convenience in that respect.

Thereupon WASSAKARO, the brahman prime minister of Mégadha, greatly de-

lighted at the discourse of BHAGAWA’, and receiving his blessing, rising from his

seat, departedt.

Séndpati (chief minister), he again to the Upardja (sub-king) ; the Upardjé to the

raja. ‘Ihe raja, inquiring into the matter, if he be innocent, releases him, but if

he be guilty, he causes the Pawénipatthakdn (book of precedents or usages) to be

propounded. There itis written, to him by whom such a crime is committed,

such a punishment is awarded. The raja having measured the culprit’s offence by

that standard, pronounces a suitable sentence.

* The Atihakathd explains that chétiyani are not Buddhistical shrines but Yak-

khatthdndni (edifices belonging to the Yakkha or demon worship) ; and yet the reli-

gion of BuppHo had been established in Wajji at this period.

+ The Atthakathad gives the following particulars of the proceedings adopted by:

AJA’TASATTU, on the return of WASSAKA/RO to Rajdgahan, which is omitted in

the Suttdn.

WASSAKA/RO returned to the raja ; andthe monarch inquired—Ach4riyo, what says

BHAGAWA ? He, repeating the declaration of the ascetic GOTAMO, said: By no

other means will the Wedians be overcome but by propitiating with tribute, or dis-

solving the subsisting union. The raja replied: by propitiating with tributes our

elephants and horses will be diminished; we must get the better of them by breaking.

i i

=. ee ee ee

1838. ] Pah Buddhistical Annals. 7 995

Immediately afterthe departure of WassAKARO the brahman prime minister of M4-

gadha, BHAGAW4’, thusaddressed the revered A'NANDO :—A’NANDO, depart ; what-

ever the number of bhikkhus may be who are maintained for the welfare of Rdjaga-

up their union: what shall we do? Maharaja, in that case, raise some discussion

in reference to the Wudians in the midst of your counsellors. Thereupon I shall

observe to you: Mahardja, what do you want with them? Let them occupy them-

selves with the agricultural and commercial affairs of their own (realm). Having

offered this remonstrance I shall quit (the council). Thereupon you should say:

what does this brahman mean by interdicting our discussion regarding the Wawians.

In the forenoon of that day I shall send off some tribute to the Wajjians. Contriv-

ing to intercept that, and bringing a charge against me, without either binding or

flogging me, completely cut off all my hair. As Tam the person by whom the ram-

parts and ditches of thy capital were formed, and as 1 know the strong and weak,

the high and low parts (of thy fortifications), I will tell (the Waijians) that lam

able to remove any obstacle you can raise. On your hearing that this scheme (has

been adopted by them): say, let them come. All this the raja acted up to.

The Wajjians hearing of his (WASsAKA‘RO’S) departure (for Wésdli) some decided

thus: if the brahman come, he should not be permitted to cross the river. Others

again observed: he (AJA’/TASATTU) has so treated him, because he advocated our

cause. That being the case, they said (to the guards who went to stop him) : fel-

lows let him come. He proceeded on, and being asked by the Wajjians for what

misconduct he had been so treated, he explained what had been preconcerted. After

observing it was most unjust that he should be so severely punished for so slight an

offence they inquired: what office hadst thou there? He replied: I was there

judicial minister. They rejoined: let the same office be filled by thee here. He

most ably administered justice: and the youths of the ( Wadi) rulers attended him,

to acquire their accomplishments.

" He who had thus acquired the reputation of a virtuous character, on a certain day

taking aside one of the Lichchhawi rulers (mysteriously) asked: do people plough a

field? Yes, they do. By coupling a pair of bullocks together? Yes, by coupling a

pair of bullocks together. Another (of the Lichchhawi rulers) having inquired :

what is it the Achdriyo has mysteriously been saying? and on its being explained to

him, incredulous, he remarked: he will not confide the truth to me ; and quarrelled

with that person. The brahman, upon another occasion taking another Lichchhawt

aside significantly asked : with what curry did youeat (your rice) ? and said no more.

Another having been told what was said; also incredulous, similarly quarrelled with

that person. The brahman upon a subsequent occasion, taking another Lichchhaut

aside, asked him in a whisper—art thoua mere beggar? He inquired: who has

said so? and the brahman replied: that Lichchhawi. Again npon another occasion,

taking another aside he inquired: Ayt thou a coward? and on being asked who

said so? he mentioned the name of some other Lichchhawi. Thus by telling to

one person that which no other person had ever said, in the course of three years,

he so completely disunited these rulers, one from another, that no two of them

would walk the same road together.

- When matters had been brought into this state, he caused the tocsin to be sound-

edas usual. The Lichchhawi rulers disregarded the call saying: let the rich aad

the valiant assemble: (we are the beggars and cowards.) The brahman sent a

mission to his raja, saying: thisis the proper time, let him come quickly. The raja,

on hearing this announcement, assembled his forces by the heat of drums, and set

out. The Wésdlians on receiving intimation thereof, beat the tocsin, proclaiming:

let us not allow the raja to cross the river. On hearing this call also, they refused

996 Pak Buddhistical Annals. (Dre.

han assemble them all at the Upatthdna* hall. The revered A’NANDO having

replied: Be it so, lord ; and received this command of BHAGAWaA’, whatever the

number of bhikkhus might be who were maintained for the spiritual welfare of Réja-

gohan, having assembled them all in the Upatthanan hail, wherever BHAGAWA’

might be, thither he returned.

Having approached and bowed down to BHAGAWA’ he stationed himself on one

side of him. The revered A’YNANDO, who had thus placed himself on one side, thus

explained himself to BHaGAwa’: Lord! the priesthood are assembled: Lord BHa-

GAwA’, thou knowest whether this be the fitting time. Thereupon, BHAGAWA’,

arising from his seat, wheresoever the Upatihdna hall might be, thither he re-

paired. Having arrived there, he seated himself on the throne prepared for him.

The enthroned Buacawa’ thus addressed the bhikkhus ; Bhikkhus, I will pro-

pound unto you the seven imperishable precepts: listen and unreservedly incline

your minds thereto: I will now address you. The said bhikkhus replied, saying:

Beit so Lord. BHAGAwA’ then thus spoke.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests meet frequently (for religious observances); and

assemble in great numbers, the designs of the priests must prosper, and cannot be

defeated.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests shall hold these meetings, simultaneously, rise

from them, simultaneously and unanimously discharge their sacerdotal duties,

the designs of the priests must prosper, and cannot fail.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests shall abstain from establishing that which has

not been prescribed ; from abrogating that which has been established; and shall,

accepting the precepts (of Buddhism) as they are laid down, inculcate and maintain

these, the designs of the priests must prosper, and cannot be defeated.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests shall support, reverence, respect and obey those

bhikkhus who are the elders of the priesthood, of great experience, venerable by

their ordination, fathers of their fraternity, and chiefs of the sacerdotal body ; and

shall learn from them that which ought to be acquired, the designs of the priests

must prosper, and cannot miscarry.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests overcome the desires which engender the wish

for regeneration in another existence, the designs of the priests must prosper,

and cannot miscarry.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests delight to dwel! in wildernesses (removed from

the distractions of laical connection) the desigus of the priesthood must prosper,

* and cannot miscarry.

Bhikkhus, as long as the priests shall keep their minds embued with pious as-

pirations, saying to themselves: may pious conforming teachers who have not

already presented themselves yet appear; and may those pious conforming teachers

who have already come dwell in peace among us, the designs of the priests must

prosper and cannot fail.

Bhikkhus, as long as these seven imperishable precepts shall be maintained

among the priesthood; and as long as the observance of these seven imperishable

precepts shall continue manifested, the designs of the priesthood must prosper, and

cannot fail.

to assemble, saying: let the valianf rulers go. Again the tocsin sounded, and pro-

clamation was made: let us not allow them to enter the city : let us defend ourselves

with closed gates. Not one answered the call. (AJA’TASATTU) entering by the

wide open gates, and having subjected them all to great calamities, returned.

* Upatthénan is the hall or apartment in which BupDHO has been accommodated

in any wikéro. The hall here spoken of is an edifice at the GiWhaktéito mountains

where BuppHO was then dwelling. Gijjhakuto is one of the hills that environ

Rdjagahan ; the other four are Isigili, Webhéro, Wepullo, and Pandawo,

1838.] Pali Buddhistical Annais. 997

In the same form of words BuaGawa’ proceeds to propound a second

series of seven imperishable precepts, which are in substance—

1. As long as the priests, neither unduly longing for, nor addicted

to, gratifications (in themselves allowable), shall abstain from excessive

indulgence in them.

2. As long as the priests neither longing for, nor addicted to,

idle talk, shall abstain from unprofitable gossip.

3. As long as the priests neither wishing for, or addicted to, an

indolent (sleepy) existence, shall avoid an unprofitable life.

4. As long as the priests neither wishing, nor striving to avoid,

meeting together in congregations, shall not evade meeting together

in congregations.

5. As long as the priests neither wishing nor seeking to associate

with evil-doers, shall shun the society of sinners.

6. As long as the priests neither desirous of, nor addicted to,

forming the intimacy of sinners, shall abstain from becoming the

friends of sinners.

7. As long as the priests do not relinquish the pursuit of the

sanctification, (of arahathood, ) discouraged from their having met some

trifling impediment, the designs of the bhikkhus, &c. —

The third series of the seven imperishable precepts are: As long

as the priests shall be endowed with faith; shall be influenced by a

sense of shame; shall have no abhorrence of sin; shall be profoundly

versed (in the tenets of their religion) ; shall be of unwearied per-

severance; shall be of retentive memories; and shall be endowed

with wisdom, the designs of the priests, &c.

The fourth series comprehend the seven Pojjyhanga, or acquirements

of doctrinal knowledge.

The fifth series consist of the seven Sanna, or recognitions.

The sixth and seventh series of precepts are of a mixed character,

and could not be intelligibly defined without entering into an exten-

sive detail inadmissible in this analysis.

The SutrTan then proceeds :

‘¢ BHAGAWA’, continuing to dwell there, at the Gijjhakuio mountain at Rd-

jagahan propounded largely to the priesthood, in a similar manner, his discourses

on dhammo— explaining such is sila4n—such is samddhi-—such is panna—by acquiring

silan, the gift of samddhi is realized, the fruit whereof is great: by acquiring sz-

mddhi, the gift of panna is realized, the fruit whereof is great: by acquiring panna

the mind is completely rescued from the influence of sinful passions—which be

these—the passions of sinful desires; the passion for life (by transmigration) ; the

passion for heresy (arising out of instabiliby of faith), and the passions engendered

by ignorance,

998 Pali Buddhistical Annals. (Dec.

‘“« Thereafter BHAGAWA/’ having dwelt at Radjagahan as long as it was agreeable to

him, he said to the beloved A’YNANDO: A’NANDO, let us depart; wherever A’mbat-

thikad*, may be, thither let us proceed. The venerable A’/NANDO replied unto BHA-

GAWA’, saying: Lord, be itso. Thereupon BHAGAWA’ accompanied by a great

concourse of bhikkhus proceeded to A’mbatthika.’?

Buppuo there discourses on the same topics, and then repairs simi-

larly attended to Nalanda}, where he sojourns in the Pawdriko garden.

There SAaripuTTo, one of his two chief disciples, (MoGGALLANO

being the other chief disciple, ) observes to Buppno, that there had not

existed, did not then exist, and would not ever appear hereafter, any

one equal to, or greater than, BuaGAwa’, To which observation,

Sa’Kya replies at great length, attributing SARIPUTTO'’s ignorance

on this subject to his powers of inspiration being more limited than

his own; and tells him that supreme Buddha had existed before

him, and would be manifested also in after ages. There also BuaGawa’

propounds, as at other places, the doctrines of his faith.

From NMd/andi Buppno repairs to Patiligdmo with the same retinue,

and dwells at the Awdsathégdrdnt which is duly fitted up for him by

the Gahdpati (the principal inhabitants of the place), to whom he

explains the principles of si/én and the fruits derived by its obser-

vance. At that period two great ministers of the king of Mdyadha,

SunipHo and Wassakaro were building a (Nagaran) citadel in

the village Pdtali, for the purpose of checking the Wajjians. Bun-

DHO there predicts that the village Pdtali is destined to become

a great city; announcing also that it is destined to suffer under the

calamity of fire, of water and of treachery§. On hearing this prediction

the two Magadha ministers wait on Buppuo to invite him to a

repast at their residence. He accepts the invitation, The gate (of

the city in progress of construction), and the ferry of the Ganges

* The Atthakaihd explains that this isa royal garden situated near Rdjagahan,

so called from an excellent (amba) mango-tree which stood at its gate.

t+ Is stated to be distant from Rdjagahan, one ydjano, (about 16 miles. )

~ It would appear by the Atthakatha that Pdiali was an inferior town,-or as

the term implies, a mere village at this time; and itis stated that the inhabitants

of this village suffered great hardships and extortions, by being turned out of their

houses, fora fortnight and a month at a time, to accommodate the officers and

messengers who were continually passing and repassing between Wesdli and Rdja-

gahan. To avoid these oppressions the inhabitants built this A’wasathdgdrdn or —

rest-house in the middle of the town, for the accommodation of travellers.

§ The Atthakathd explains that a part of the town is to be destroyed by fire;

that a part is to be swept away by the river ; anda part by treachery and perfidy. A

very comprehensive prophecy, the realization of some part of which was scarcely

avoidable. Buddhists, however, point with exultation to the partial destruction of

ancient Palebothra by the river.

1838.] Pdi Buddhistical Annals. 999

he passes, obtain the name of the Gétamo gate and. Gotamo ferry.

The Ganges is overflowed at the time ; and he and his disciples pass

by miraculous means. |

The Second Bhénawire.

From Patiigdmo Buacawa’ attended by A’NANDo, and the same

retinue of priests then repairs to (étigamo*, where he explains the

nature of the A’riyasachchdni or the four sublime truths, as well as

the nature of silan, samadhi and panna. Buppuo from thence repairs

to Nadikégdmot, where, on being interrogated by A’nanbo as to the

fate of certain sanctified and pious persons who had died in Nddikdgd-

mo, he reveals what their condition will be subsequent to their death,

and propounds his sermon entitled the Dhammadaso or the Dhammo

reflector, which is illustrative of his miraculous vision, on which all

passing events are inevitably and invariably reflected, as on a looking-

glass.

From Nadikégamo, BuaGaAwa’ proceeds to Wésali ; and takes up

his residence in the Ambapdlit garden. He there preaches on the

four Satipatthdnd, of which the bhikkhus are to be observant. The

Suttan then gives the following account of the interview that took

place between Buppuo and the courtesan to whom this garden

belonged.

’ “The courtesan AMBAPA’LI having heard that BHaGawa’ had arrived in Wésdli,

and was sojourning in her garden Ambapdliwano, equipping a superb vehicle for

herself, and magnificent conveyances (for her suite), setting out from Wésdli, pro-

ceeded to the garden, using these conveyances as far as they could be used; and the

rest of the way, descending from the vehicle, she proceeded on foot, and waited on

BHAGAWA’—Having approached and bowed down to him, she took her seat on one

side of him. BHaGAWaA’ addressed the courtesan AMBAPA’LI, who was thus seated

by his side, a discourse on dhammo. He confirmed her faith, comforted her, and

made her steadfastly confide (therein). She who had been thus confirmed in her

faith, comforted, and made steadfastly to confide (therein) addressed BHAGAWA’

saying; Lord BHAGAwa’, vouchsafe to accept the repast I shall prepare for thee,

as well as thy disciples, to-morrow. BuHacAwa’, by his silence, consented to

accept the same. The courtesan AMBAPA‘LI thereby understanding that the invitz-

tion was accepted by BuDDHo—rising from her seat, bowing down to him, and per-

forming the padakkhindn (walking respectfully round him) thrice, departed.”’

* Its position isnot described. Koti signifies end. As the end ofthe raja MAHA-~

PANA/DO’S palace was situated in that village, thence it is stated to have derived

the appellation of Kétigdma.

+ So called from a marsh near which the village was situated.

_t This pleasure garden belonged to a female of high rank named AMBAPA‘LI, one

of the accomplished courtesans of Wés¢li—a class of persons of great influence at that

period from their wealth and mental accomplishments. There appears also to have

been an office conferred by the rulers of Wajji on a female, designated the nagarasé-

bhini-thanantardn, which literally signifies ‘‘ the chiefship of the beauties of the

town.” Vide Mahdwanso, p. XXXVI.

1000 Péli Buddhistical Annals. (Dec.

On her retin to the town she meets the rulers of Wéséli, repairing

to Ambapéliwano, gorgeously apparelled, and in superb equipages.

Her suite compel them to make way for her, and she declines acced-

ing to their entreaty to resign to them the honor of entertaining

Buppuo the next day; and BuaGawa’ himself, though solicited by

these chiefs, adheres to his promise made to the courtesan. He

attends accordingly, and he and his disciples are served with her own

hands by the courtesan. After the repast, she takes her seat again

on one side of lim; and implores of him to accept the Ambapah

garden as an offering made to him and his disciples. The offering is

accepted ; and he preaches another sermon at her house.

From Ambapdliwano BuacaAwaA’ repairs to Bélugaémako*, and

there calling his disciples together he tells them that as the season of:

Wasso} was at hand, they should disperse around Wéséli, according to

the invitations they may have received from the resident priests, who

were friendly to them; and that he himself would keep his Wasso at

Bélugimako. The Suttan proceeds—

“¢ Unto BHAcAWwA’,; who was holding his Wasso there, asevere illness was engenders

ed, producing agonies indicative of approaching death. He however, retained his

mental faculties and his self-possession, without giving way to the disease.

BuaGawa’ then thus thought: It is unworthy of me that such as I should pass

into Parinibbandn without having assembled those who have assisted me, and with-,

out addressing myself to the priesthood: it is indispensible that I should submit

to this trial with fortitude, maintaining my professions in regard to the transitory

matters of this life.” ‘

From this sickness Buppuo partially recovers, and is able to sit up

in his pulpit. The rest of this Bhénawdro is occupied by a dialogue

between Buacawa’ and A’NANDo, expressive on the part of the

priesthood, of their expectation that they may receive further instruc-

tion, and on the part of Sa’kya, of the assurance that he would not,

like earthly teachers, withhold any thing ; announcing at the same

time, that at his advanced age of seventy, with the infirmities he was

labouring undey, his career was drawing to a close.

The third Bhanawéro.

Subsequently, on a certain morning, BHAGAwA makes a pilgrimage

in search of alms through Weésah, and after his morning repast

attended by A’NANDo, repairs for his noon-day rest to the Chepdldt

* A village situated near Weésdli, so called from a tree of that name.

+ The rainy season from July to November, during which the Buddhist priests

are enjoined to abstain from pilgrimage, and devote themselves to stationary religi-

ous observances. The Wasso here deseribed is the one of 544 before Curist. BuD-

DHO died the following year B. C. 543 in the month of Wésukho, (April-May.)

{ It is not explained whether all these chéliyani are situated in the Weésdli, or at

different places. ;

1888.) Péli Buddhistical Anaals. 1001

chétiyo. Buppuo there expatiates on the perfections of that chétiyo,

as well as the Weésdli, the Udént, the Gétumdé, the Sattambako, the

Bahupatto and the Sérandado chétiydni; and explains that it is

in the power of any Buppuo, by his four (¢dhi) miraculous attri-

butes, to prolong his existence even for a kappé, if, while sojourning

at any of these places he is duly entreated thereto. M<ro (Death)

imperceptibly exerts his influence, and prevents A’nanpo from com-

prehending this exposition made by BuaGaw4, though repeated twice.

A/NaAnpvo then retires to the foot of a tree, disconcerted, and seats

himself there.

Before A’nanpo had proceeded to any great distance, the impious

MArzo approaches Buacawa’, and having approached him and station-

ed himself on one side of him, thus addressed him: Lord Buacawa’,

vouchsafe to realize thy Parinibbandn now. SucarTo, this is the

appointed time for thy Parinibbandn. It has been declared so by

thee, Lord BHAGAWA’, on a former occasion*, &c.

BuAGawa' replies that his death is at hand; and that his Parinibd-

badndn will take place int three months, He then announces his

resignation of all connection with this transitory state of existence, to

prepare for his death, by chaunting this hymn. “ Having voluntarily

overcome his desire for this life, the Muni has vouchsafed to relin-

quish all that is transitory, connected either with his human or divine

essence, casting his existence from him, like unto a victorious combatant

who divests himself of his armour.”

On his uttering this announcement, the earth quakes, miracles are

manifested, and the music of the heavens ring; whereby A’NANDO,

who was still at the foot of the tree, being roused, hastens to BHAGA-

wa’. He inquires from him the cause and the import of an earth-

quake ; Buppuo and explains that “ The great earth rests on water, the

water is sustained by the wind, and the wind is supported by the air

(or atmosphere) ; and when a storm prevails a natural earthquake is

produced—this is the first cause ; and the effect a great quaking of the

whole earth. The second series of causes proceeds from the miraculous

powers possessed by inspired persons ; the third cause is the death of a

Buddho elect in the Taéwatinsa heavens, to be regenerated in the

* The former declaration was made by Bupvuo at the close of the probational

qaeditation of seven weeks when he attained Buddhohood at the Bo tree; on which

occasion also Death urged him to close his career there. He then said he would not

resign his mission till his disciples had been fully qualified for their duties; aad

his dhammo had been perfectly established.

t+ About the middle of January, B. C, 543, two months after the termination

of Wasso.

6 x 2

1002 Péli Buddhistieal Annals. ‘[Dee.

life in which Buddhohood is attained ; the fourth cause is the birth of

a Buddho; the fifth cause is the attainment of Buddhohood ; the sixth

cause is the proclamation of the supremacy of his faith; the seventh

cause is a Tathdgato’s renunciation of his connection with this transi-

tory existence; and the eighth cause is his final Mebbdnan + in the

instance of each cause, the effect is the same, viz.: a quaking of the

great earth.”

Buppuo then explains that there are eight classes of beings ; the

Kottiyo, Bréhmano, Gahdpati, Sumano, Chatumahdrajika, those of

Téwatinsa, those of Ma’ro (death) and of Branmo; and he relates

how a Buppuo is generated and fulfils his destiny in each.

He next explains the nature of the eight Abhibhayatandni, and of the

eight Wimokkha ; and informs A’nanpo of the interview he had

had formerly with M&ro, as well as on that day. The Suttan proceeds

in these words.

‘‘ On this explanation being afforded, the venerable A’NANDO thus addressed

BuaGcawa’: Lord BHAGAWA,’ vouchsafe to live a kappo: for the welfare of mul-

titudes, for the happiness of multitudes, out of compassion for the world, and for

the welfare and ae of the déwé as well as men: O SuGarTo, live for a

kappo.

«¢ Enough A’NANDO, importune not TATHA’GAToO. A/NANDO, the time is now past

for making this entreaty of TATHA’GATo. A’NANDO, however made the same

entreaty a second and athird time ; (and BuppHo said) A’NANDO, dost thou believe

in the Buddhohood of TATHA’GATO.

‘6 Yes, lord.

‘6 Then, A’NANDO, why dost thou now even to a third time afflict TaTHA GAxO

with unavailing importunity ?

‘‘ Lord, from thyself have I heard, and by thyself have I been taught, saying :

A’/NANDO, to whomsoever is fully vouchsafed the sanctification of the four Idhipida

should he desire it, he maylive a kappo, or any part of a kappo; and unto TATHA’~

GATO also is vouchsafed those four Idhipada.

‘6 Dost thou, A’NANDO, believe therein ?

‘¢ Yes, lord.

‘¢ Then, A’NANDO, in that case, the neglect and the fault is thine—for it occurred

not to thee, when that revelation was made by TAatTHa’GATO, in the most solemn

and public manner (at the Chepdla chétiyo), to comprehend the same, and to implore

of TATHA’GATO, saying : BHAGAWA’, vouchsafe to live for a kappo, for the welfare

of multitudes, for the happiness of the déwd as well as men: O, SAGATO, live for a

kappo. What dost thou now, A’NANDO, still importune TATHA’GATO? TATHA’-

GATO has rejected thy prayer twice: could he grant it on the third application ?

In this matter, A’NANDO, most assuredly, both the neglect and the fault is thine.”

Buppxo then reminds A’nanpo of the various places, all which he

names, where he had made this revelation to him before, and finclly

tells him that having announced that he is to die in three months that

destiny cannot be altered. They next repair to the Kutdgara edifice,

and Buppso delivers a solemn charge to the priesthood, which he con-

cludes with these words :

1838.) _ Pali Buddhistical Annals. 1003

‘‘ Bhikkhus, I am now addressing you (for the last time): transitory things are

perishable, without procrastination, qualify yourselves (for nibbdnan). At no distant

period unto TaTHA’GATo parinibbanan will be vouchsafed. Within three months

from this day, by death TaTua’Gato will realize nibbdnan.

- ‘* Thus spoke BHAcAwa’, and having so delivered himself, the divine teacher of

happy advent again spoke saying: My age has attained the fullest maturity: the

remnant of my existence is short : I shall depart, separating (myself) from you, and

having earned the salvation of my own (attd) soul. Bhikkhus, unremittingly em-

buing your minds with faith, lead the life of the righteous; and keeping your

thoughts under entire subjection, carefully watch over the aspirations of your

minds. Whoever steadfastly adheres to the tenets of this dhammo, escaping the

eternity of transmigration, will achieve the extinction of misery.’’

the fourth Bhandwaro.

The next morning Buppuo enters the city of Wésal, robed, and

carrying his begging dish in his hand ; and having made his afternoon

meal, he surveys with an elephant* look Wesdli for the last time, and

departs attended as before to Bhandugdamo. There BuacawA assembles

the priesthood, and explains to them the nature of sélan, samddhi,

panna and wimutti. He then similarly preaches at Ambagdmo, and

Jambug amo.

_ BuacawA next repairs to Bhdganagaran, delivers to the aaathaad

at the AynanNpo chetiyo, his discourses called the Padésa Suttdnt, in

which he inculcates on his audience, that they are neither to be opini-

onated, nor hasty in the adoption of the opinions of other priests: if

any new doctrine is set forth, they are to examine it dispassionately, by

reference to his own winéyo and sutto. If it accord with them, they

are to adopt it; if it differs from them, they are to reject it.

He then visits Pdwd, tarrying in the Ambawano or mango grove,

belonging to a goldsmith called Cuunpo who waits on Buppuo, and in-

vites him, as the Wésa/i courtesan had done, to a repast the next day at

his house in the city of Pdwd. On reaching the goldsmith’s house

Bunppuo thus addressed him : Cuunpo, if any pork is to be dressed by

thee, with it only serve me: serve to the priests from any other food or

provision thou mayest have prepared. CuunDo having replied: Lord,

be it so: BuacawA again calls him, and says, Cuunpo, if any of the

pork prepared by thee should be left, bury it in a hole—for Cnunpo,

I see not any one in this universe, though inhabited by dewos, maros

and brahmos, with their hosts of ascetics, brahmans, d¢wos and men,

excepting Tarudcaro, who would digest it, if he ate the same.

Cuunpo accordingly buries the remnants of the pork.

* Buddha and Chakkawatti rajas are peculiarly formed in the neck, which is

said to consist of a single bone. They are obliged therefore to turn round like an

elephant, to look at any object not immediately before them.

1004 Pdlt Buddhistical Annals. (Dec.

Buacawa then preaches to his host; and having gratified, edified

and comforted him, he departs. He was soon after afflicted with a

severe attack of dysentery, the expected and predestined result of eating

pork,—which under this conviction he interdicted being given to any one

else. He then decides on hastening to Kusinard, the city in which he

is destined to realize his mtbbanan. On his journey, feeling faint, he

desires A'NANDo to prepare a seat for him off the main road, under the

shade of a tree; and seated there he commands his disciple to bring

him some water to quench his thirst. A’NANDo entreats of him to pro-

ceed a little further up the Kukutthana river, as at that spot “ the

stream had been disturbed by the passage of five hundred carts.” Bup-

pHo however three times repeats his commands to A'nAnpo to bring

him that water. He obeys at last, which leads to a miracle being

performed, whereby the muddy water is rendered perfectly clear. The

owner of these carts is one PuxKxuso, a member of the Mallawo, royal

race, and an ascetic of the fraternity of Alarakdlamo, who was then

on his road from Kusindrd to Péwd; and he was following his train.

He hears of Buppuo being in the neighbourhood, and waits on him;

and a discussion ensues between them, of the relative merits of ALARO-

KALAMO and of Buppuo, at the conclusion of which, Puxkuso bestows

two ( Singiwannawatthdéni) cloths of golden hue, one on BuacawA and

the other on A’nanpo. ‘The latter spreads his accepted offering also

on the person of Buacawa, whose body “ shines like a bright flame

free from smoke or ashes.” On the miracle being noticed by A’Nanpo,

Buppuo explains that such is always the case with a TarHaGaro on

the day he attains Buddhohood, and on that on which he realizes nib«

baénan—and he adds: A’Nanpo, in the last division of this night, at

Kusindré in the grove of sdla trees belonging to the Malla princes,

the parinibbanan of Tarudcaro will be realized, (while reposing)

between two of those sala trees. Let us depart, A’nanpo, and repair to

the Kukutthd river. The venerable A’nanpo replied: Lord, be it so.

Thereupon Buacaw4, with a great concourse of bhikkhus repairs

to the Kukutthd river, and descending to the stream and having bathed

and drank there, and then landing on the opposite bank, he proceeds to

a mango grove (on the bank of the river). There he enjoins A’NaANpDo

to relieve Cuunpvo, the goldsmith, from all apprehension of his death

having been occasioned by the repast he had provided for Buopuo,

informing him of the rewards he had realized by that act of charity and

faith.

1838.] Péli Buddhistical Annals. 1005

The fifth Bhanawéro.

Bnuacawa then repairs to the Uppawattana* grove of séla trees, on

the further bank of Hirannawattiyda river, near the city of Kusindré,

accompanied by his disciples; and in his debilitated state he desires:

A’nanpo to prepare his bed for him between the sala trees, placing

his head to the north ; on which he lays himself down on his left side.

The grove was then in flowers to the ends of its stems, though not the

blossoming season. These flowers descended spontaneosuly on his

head, the host of déwos made the air ring with the music of the hea-

vens, and showered down flowers, sandal, and other incense on him.,.

BuAGAwaA, noticing these preternatural recognizances of his Buddho-

hood, impresses on A/’nanvo that the stedfast observance of his:

dhammo is an equally acceptable recognizance of him.

. He then desires his disciple, Upawano, who was standing in front of

him fanning him, to retire. This injunction leads to A’naNnpDo’s asking

why he sends him away ; and he replies that the déwata of the ten thou-

sand worlds are then hovering in the air, and lamenting his approaching

death, and that he ought not to be partially screened from their sight,

A’nANDo then announces, that the bhikkhus are pouring in from all.

quarters to witness his xibbdnan; and BHAGawA remarks, that not only

those who come to witness the birth, the attainment of Buddhohood,

the promulgation of the supremacy of the faith, and the azbbanan of a,

Buppuo, but even those who pray at the shrines that will be raised to.

him, will be born in heaven.

A’nanpbo then inquires how priests should comport themselves in

their sacerdotal intercourse with women ; and how his disciples should.

dispose of his corporeal remains after death. He replies as to the.

former: A’NANnDo, do not look at them. MHaving looked at them,

lord, what should be done then? Do not speak to them, A’NANDO.

Having spoken to them, what should be done then? A’nanpo keep

thyself collected. As to his corporeal remains, he replies, that rajas

and grandees of the land will attend to his funeral obsequies; and that

his disciples need not afflict themselves in that respect. He states also

* BuDDHAGHO’sO in his Afthakathd notices that the road from the bank of the

Hirannawattiya river to the grove of sdla trees resembles that from the bank of

the Kalambo river at Anurddhapura through the gates of the Rajamdtu wiharo to

the Thipérdmo; and that the Uppawattdna grove was to Kusindrdé what the Thipd-

ramo wasto Anurédhapura. We also mentions that so debilitated had BupDDHo be-

come from his attack of illness, brought on by the repast he had partaken from

Cuunpo, that he was obliged to rest twenty-five times, on the journey from Pawd

to Kusinard although the distance was only three gawutdni, (about 12 English

miles.)

1006 Péli Buddhistical Annals. [Drc.

that his cremation will be conducted with the same honors as that of a

Chakkawatti raja, which he thus describes : they wind a new cloth

round the corpse ; having wound it with a new cloth, they enclose it in’

a layer of floss cotton ; having encased it in a layer of floss cotton, they

bind that with another new cloth. Having in this manner enclosed a

Chakkawatti raja’s corpse, in five hundred double layers (of cotton and

cloth) and deposited it in a metal* oil-chaldron, and covered it with an-

other similar vessel, and having formed a funeral pile with every de-

scription of fragrant combustibles, they consume the body of a Chakka-

watli raja; and for a Chakkawatti raja they build the thupo at a spot

where four principal roads meet. It is in this manner, A’Nanpo, they

treat the corpse of a Chakkawatti raja. | Whatever the form observed

in regard to the corpse of a Chakkawatti raja may be, it is proper,

A’nanpo, that the same form should be observed in regard to the

corpse of TarHAcato.

Buacawa_ next dwells on the merits that are acquired by building

thipd over relics of Tathdgata, Paché-Buddha, Sdéwakdé and Chak-

Kawatti yajas. A wawnpo then retires into the wiharo, to weep in pri-

vate at the approaching death of Buppuo, who sends for him, comforts

him by the approbation of his past conduct, and the assurance that he

will shortly attain arahathood. He then assembles the bhikkhus, and

expatiates on the merits of A’Nanpo, especially pointing out his four

miraculous gifts, which are the attributes of a Chakkawattt raja. A’NAN-

po thereupon thus implores of Buppuo; Lord, let not Buacawa’ rea-

lize his parinibbdnan in this inferior town, which is an insignificant

and a branch+ town : there are, lord, other chief cities which be these—

Champa, Rajagahan, Sdwatthi, Sakétan, Kosambi and Béaranasi.

Let Buacawa’ realize his parinibbanan there. There are numer-

ous illustrious tribes of Khattiya, Bradhamana and Gahapati there.

They are greatly devoted to Tarua’catro—they will duly celebrate

his funeral rites. Not so, A’Nvanpo—make no such proposition: and

Buppuo proceeds to reveal that Kustndrd was once celebrated under

the denomination of Kusdwatti, then the capital of Mahasudassano

raja, and to describe its grandeur at that period. He enjoins A’NANDO

to enter Kusinard, and announce to the Malla princes, that in the last

watch of that night Tarua’caro is to realize his nibbdndn ; and to

invite them to attend. A’naNnpo obeys this command, accompanied

by an attendant. He finds the principal inhabitants assembled at the

Santhagara sald (hall of assembly) on some other business ; and the

.* The Aithakatha requires this word to be rendered gold.

+ Literally rendered for ‘‘ Sakhanagarako.”

1838.] Pili Buddhistical Annals. | 1007

announcement of his mission leads to universal lamentation, and the

people run through the town with dishevelled hair, and hands folded

over their heads. The Kusindrians attend in such numbers on

Buppno, that finding they cannot individually pay reverence to him,

A’naNnDo divides them according to their tribes, and each tribe bows

down at once, with their hands raised over their heads ; A’nanpo calling

out at the time of their adoration—Lord, such a tribe with their sons,

daughters and followers are bowing down at the feet of Boagawa’ with

uplifted hands. To these adorations Buppuo makes no reply; and

during the first division of the night A’nanpo completes the presentation

of the Malla tribes of Kusindrd, by thus collectively presenting them in

tribes. One Susuappo is then admitted into the presence of BuppHo,

for the purpose of having a doubt solved. ‘This discussion terminates

in Suswappo being ordained, and ultimately becoming an arahat. He

is the last disciple ordained by Go’ramo.

The sixth Bhanawéro.

BuaGcawa’ then thus addressed the beloved A’NaNDO: A’NANDO, can there be,

er has there been any precept of mine, not imparted unto thee by SarrHa’ (the

divine teacher)? No, SatrHa/ there can have been none. If there be none such,

A'NANDO, be it understood that whatever dhammo or winédyo may have been pro-

pounded or established by me for thee, the same, after my demise, is to stand in

the stead of the divine teacher unto thee. A’NANDO, although the bhikkhus are now

in the habit of addressing each other (indiscriminately) with the appellation dwuso,

after my death this practice must no longer prevail among you. By a senior bhikkhu,

a junior bhikkhu ought to be addressed by the appellation awuso* preceded either

by his family or personal name. By a junior bhikkhu an elder bhikkhu ought to

be addressed bhanté (lord), or dyasma (venerable). Let no well-disposed priesthood

reject any of my precepts, whether they be trivial or important. A’NaANDo, after

my death, let the brahmadando penalty be awarded to the bhikkhu CHHUNNo.

Lord, what is the Brahmadando? A’NANDo whatever any bhikkhu may have

desired, that CHHUNNO has been advocating: it is not proper that he should be

spoken to, exhorted by, or communed with, by the bhikkhus.

BuaGAwaA’ then thus addressed the bhikkhus: Bhikkhus, should there ever unto

any one bhikkhu be any doubt or incomprehensibility as regards either Buddho,

Dhammo, Sangho, Maggot, or Patipadd, inquire (at once): do not reproach your-

selves hereafter saying, although SaTrHa’ was personally present to us, we lost the

opportunity of making our inquiry personally of him. On being thus addressed the

bhikkhus remained silent. BHaGAawaA’ similarly exhorted them a second and a third

time; and the bhikkhus still remained silent.

BHAGAWA’ again exhorted them saying: Bhikkhus, if it be out-of profound

reverence for the SATTHA’ that ye abstain from inquiring directly from him ;—

* This term implies perfect equality, and as in the order of ordination one bhik-

khu must be senior to another, an appellation implying equality applied by a junior

to a senior Upasampada is disrespectful and irreverend.

+ Maggo is the road that leads to nibbdndn, and patipadd is the life of righteous-

ness that ought to be observed on that road.

1008 Péii Buddhistical Annals. [ Dec.

bhikkhus, let one confiding priest make the inquiry through another in whom he

confides. Even on being thus conjured the bhikkhus remained silent.

Thereupon the venerable A’NANDo thus addressed BHaGAWA’: Lord, this is

miraculous: Lord, this is wonderful : I place implicit confidence in this congregation

of bhikkhus: not even unto one bhikkhu is there any doubt or incomprehensibility

in regard either to Buddho, Dhammo, Sangho, Maggo or Patipadd. A’NANDO, it is

thy faith that impels thee to make this declaration: the omniscience of TaTHA’GaTO

is in the same manner conscious, that not even unto one bhikkhu is there any doubt

or incomprehensibility in regard to Buddho, Dhammo, Sangho, Maggo or Patipada.

A’NANDO, among these five hundred bhikkhus, even the last one, has attained the

Sotdpanno,—the grace that rescues him from hell, and the sanctification that realizes

arahathood.

~ BHAGAWA’ then addressed the bhikkhus saying: Bhikkhus, I am exhorting you

(for the last time), transitory things are perishable : without procrastination qualify

yourselves (for nibbandn). These were the last words of TATHA’GAToO.

BHAGAWA‘’ then became absorbed in the first Jhdndn-samdpati ; passing from the

first Jhdndn he became absorbed in the second Jhkdndn ; passing from the second

Jhandn, he became absorbed in the third Jhdnan ; passing from the third JAdndn, he

became absorbed in the fourth Jhdndn ; passing from the fourth Jkdndn, he became

absorbed in the dkdsdndnchdyatdndn ; passing from the dkdsdnanchdyatdnan, he be-

came absorbed in the winndnanchdyatdnan ; passing from the winndnanchdyatdnan, he

became absorbed in the akinchanndyatanan ; passing from the akinchénndyatanan, he

became absorbed in the néwasanndnasanndyatanan, and passing from the néwasanundna-

sanndyatanan, he became absorbed in the sannawédayitanirodhan.

The venerable A’NANDO then thus inquired of the venerable A’nURUDHO: Lord,

has BHAGAWA’ expired? No, dwuso A’NANDO, BHAGAw4~’ has not expired; he is

absorbed in the wédayitanirodhan.

From this wédayitanirodhan, Buppuo step by step descends again to

the first jhanan, and again rises to the fourth yhanan . In the transi-

tion between the fourth and fifth jhanan, Buacawd expired.

On BHacawa’ attaining parinibbdnan, at the instant of his realization thereof,

the great earth quaking, produced a terror that made the hair stand on end ; and the

music of the gods rang in the air. On BHaGAwaA’ attaining parinibbdnan, at the

instant of his realization thereof, BRAHMA’ SAHANPATI Sang this gdthd: All living

creatures shall relinquish their existence in this world, and in like manner, in this

world the divine teacher, the incomparable, the being of felicitous advent and of

power, the supreme BuppHo, also dies.

On BHAGAWA’ attaining parinibbénan, at the instant of his realization thereof,

Sakko the monarch of the déwos sang this gdthé: Things that are subject to repro-

duction and death being transitory are most assuredly perishable—having been pro-

duced they perish: it is a blessing to arrive at their extinction, (by the attainment

of parinibbandn.)

On BHAGAWA’ attaining parinibbdnan, at the instant of his realization thereof,

the venerable ANURUDHo sang these gdtha : He no longer indicates inspiration and

respiration as when living ; the immaculate MuNI, whose aim was nibbdnan, has

expired. He endured the agony of death in the full possession of his mental feeuikions, 3

those mental faculties expired like the extinction of a lamp.

On BHAGAWA’ attaining parinibbdnan, at the instant of his realization thereof,

the venerable A’NaNDo sang this gdihad: When the all-perfect supreme BUDDHO

expired, then there was a great terror—then the hair stood on end.

18387] Péh Buddhistical Annals.. 1009

On BuaGawa~’ attaining parinibbanan, of those bhikkhus who had not yet realized

arahathood, some wept aloud, with uplifted arms—some sank (on the earth) as if

they had been felled—and others reeled about, exclaiming : too soon has BHAGawa’

expired—too soon has SuGatTé expired—too soon has the chakku (eye) closed on

the world. But those bhikkhus who had attained arahathood, collectedly and com-

posedly submitted themselves, saying: transitory things are perishable—how can

we in this world obtain it (permanency). .

The venerable ANURUDHO then addressed the bhikkhus: A’wuso, enough—grieve

not—bewail not—Why, has it not been emphatically declared by BoaGawa’ himself

saying: even amidst every community of happy and contented persons, various

destructive and changeable issues come to pass. A’wuse, how can we in this world

obtain it (permanency). Itis not by merely saying of any thing born or otherwise

produced, which from its perishable nature, is transitory—‘‘ most assuredly it

perishes not,’’—that it will come to pass. A’wuso, the déwatd are reproaching us

(for our lamentations). (The bhikkhus inquired), Lord, does the venerable A Nu-

RUDHO discern the déwata? Yes, A’wuso A’NANDO, the déwatd are looking down

on earth from the skies: with dishevelled hair they are weeping; and with uplifted

arms they are bewailing—they are falling as if felled, and reeling about, they are

exclaiming : too soon has BHaGawa’ expired—too soon has SusaTo expired—too

soon has the Eye closed on this world.

The Suttan repeats in regard to the déwata, what has been said of

the bhikkhus, as to a portion having attained arahathood, and others

not having acquired that sanctification ; and describes the different

manner in which each bore the loss of Buppuo.

The remainder of that night the venerable ANURUDHO and the venerable

A’NANDO passed in discoursing on dhammo. Then (at the dawn of day) the vene-

rable ANURUDHO thus addressed the venerable A‘’NANDO: A’wuso A’NANDO, de-

part: entering Kusindrd, warn the Kusindrian Malla tribes, saying : descendants of

Wasetiho, BuaGawa’ has realized nibbdndn. Know ye that this is the time for the

performance of your (allotted) part. The venerable A*’NANDO, replying: Yes,

lord. Pursuant to that direction, early in the morning, arraying himself, and tak-

ing his robes and begging-dish with him, attended by a‘second person, he entered

Kusindrad. At that moment the Kusinarian Malla tribes were gathered together

in their assembly hall, in consequence of this very circumstance. Wherever that

assembly hall of the Kusinarian Malla tribes might be, thither the venerable A’NAN-

Do proceeded ; and thus addressed the Kusindritan Mallians: Descendants of Wéset-

tho, BHAGAWA/ has achieved parinibbdnén. Kuaow ye that this is the time for the

performance of your (allotted) part.

On hearing this announcement of the venerable A’NANDO, the Mallians, the

Mallian youths, the Mallian damsels, and Mallian wives—afflicted, disconsolate, and

oppressed with grief,—some wept with dishevelled hair, some bewailed with up-

lifted arms—some dropt as if felled, and others reeled to and fro, exclaiming : Too

soon has BHAGawa~/’ died : too soon has SuGATO died: too soon has the Eye closed

on the world.

Thereupon the Kusindrian Mallians issued this command to their men: collect

then in Kusindra garlands of flowers, and procure every description of musical in-

strument. Accordingly the Kusindrian Mallians, taking with them garlands of

flowers, every description of musical instrument, and five hundred pairs of cloths—

wherever the Upawattano sid grove of the Mallians might be, there they approached

the corpse of BHaGawa’. Having approached the corpse of BaaGawa’—with dan-

6L2 é

1010 Péli Buddhistical Annals. (Dec.

cing and vocal and instrumental music, and with odoriferous garlands,—performing

the prescribed offices, and rendering (every mark of) reverence, respect and submis-

sion, they employed themselves that day in suspending cloth-draperies, and erecting

tented pavilions.

This thought then occurred to the Kusindrian Mallians :—The time is altogethe®

insufficient to burn the corpse of BHAGawa’ to-day : we will perform the cremation

of BHAGAWA’ to-morrow. The Kusindrian Mallians, with dancing, and vocal and

instrumental music, and odoriferous flowers performed the prescribed offices to the

corpse of BHAGAW4’, reverently, respectfully and submissively ; suspending cloth

draperies. and erecting tented pavilions, and in this manner they passed the second

day also. They in like manner occupied themselves, the third, the fourth, the fifth

and the sixth day.

Then on the seventh day this thought occurred to the Kusindrian Mallians :—Hav-

ing, unto the corpse of BHAGAWA’,—with dancing and vocal and instrumental music,

and with sweet-scented flowers,—performed the prescribed offices, with reverence,

respect and submission ; taking it out of the southern gate to the southward of the

city,—and by the suburb (keeping to) the outside to the southward of the city, we

will perform the cremation of the body of Buacawa’.

Instantly eight Mallian chieftains, bathing from head (to foot), and clothing

themselves in pew raiment, said, we will bear the corpse of BHAGAWaA’. They, how-

ever, failed in their effort to lift it. The Kusinarian Mallians then thus inquired of

the venerable ANURUDHO: Lord ANURUDHO, whence, and from what cause, is

it that these eight Mallian chieftains, who, purified from head (to foot), and clad in

new raiment, said: we will bear the corpse of BHaGawa’—have found themselves

unequal to the effort of raising it ?— Wasetthians, your intentions and the intentions

of the déwatd are different. What, then, Jord, is the intention of the déwatd ?

Wasetthians, your intention is this: we will carry the corpse of BHaGAaWa’ with

dancing, and vocal and instrumental music, and decorated with sweet-scented gare

lands, performing every requisite office reverently, respectfully, and submissively,

through the southern gate to the southward of the city, and through the outskirts,

keeping to the suburb on the southward of the town, will perform the cremation

of BHaGawa’. But Wasetthians, the intention of the déwatd is this: we, with celes-

tial dance as well as heavenly vocal and instrumental music, decorated with odori-

ferous garlands, carrying the body of BHaGawa’—performing every prescribed office

thereto, reverently, respectfully and submissively—through the northern gate to the

northward of the city, and entering the town by the northern gate, and by the central]

gate, conveying it into the middle of the city, and departing out of the eastern gate

to the eastward of the town, there, in the coronation hall, (Maku{abandhandn) of

the Mullians, we will perform the cremation of the body of BHaGawa’. Lord,

whatever be the intention of the déwatd, be it acceded to,

Instantly, every place in Kusindré which was a receptacle of dirt, filth and rubbish

became covered knee-deep, with the celestial flower manddérd—and the déwata as well

asthe Kusindrian Mallians, carrying the corpse of BHaGawa’, with celestial and

human dance, as well as vocal and instrumental music, and with odoriferous garlands,

performing every requisite office, with reverence, respect and submission ; and con-

veying it through the northern gate tothe northward of the city, and entering

through the middle gate to the centre of the town*, and departing through the

* The Atthakathd notices that while the corpse was in the city, the princess MaL-

LAKA’, the widow of BANDHULO, the late Mallian commander-in-chief, invested the

corpse with her late husband’s official insignia called mahdlatd, which jewels had

remained unused from the time of his death.

ee eae —_—

eee ee ee

——_—_ .

1838.] Pélh Buddhistical Annals. 1011

éastern gate to the eastward of the town, deposited the corpse of BHaGawa’ there

in the coronation hall of the Mallians.

The Kusinarian Mallians then thus inquired of the venerable A’nNanpo: How,

lord A’NaNnDo, should we dispose of the corpse of BHAGAWa/? Wasetthians, it is

proper that it should be treated in the same manner that the corpse of a Chakkawatl2

raja is treated. And in what manner, lord A’NANDO, should the corpse of a

Chakkawatti rfja be treated ?

A’‘nanpbo here repeats the explanation that he himself had received

from Buppuo.

Thereupon the Kusinarian Mallians gave this order to their people : Fellows, collect

for us Mallians some floss cotton; and then the Kusinarian Mallians wound the corpse

of BRAGAWA’ with a new cloth; having wound it with a new cloth, they covered

it with a layer of floss cotton; having covered it with a layer of floss cotton, they

again wound it with a newcloth; and in this manner having wound the body of

BuHaGaAwa’ with the five hundred pairs of cloths (which they had brought), and

deposited it in a metal oil-vessel, covering it with another metal oil-vessel, they

placed the body of BHaGawa/’ on the funeral pile.

At that time the venerable Kassaro was on his road from Pdwd to Kusinard,

attended by a great priestly retinue, consisting of five hundred bhikkhus : and while

the said venerable MAHA/KaSSAPO was seated at the foot of a tree, having digressed

‘from the road, a certain individual, who was on his way from Kusindrd to Pdwd, passed,

having in his possession some manddrd flowers. The venerable MAHA/KASSAPO

observed him as he was journeying on, at a distance; and having recognized him, he

thus accosted him: A’wuso, art thou acquainted with our SattHa’? Yes, A’wuso

I was acquainted with him: the said ascetic Go’Tamo’ died seven days’ ago, and it

is from that spot that these manddrd flowers were obtained by me. Thereupon

among the bhikkhus who were there (with MaHA’KASSAPO), some who had not attain-

ed the sanctification of arahathood, wept with uplifted arms,—some dropt as if felled,

and others reeled about saying : Too soon has BHAGAWA’ died: too soon has Suca-

To died—too soon has the Eye been closed on the world. But the bhikkhus who

had attained arahathood, collectedly and composedly submitted themselves, saying:

Transitory things are perishable: how can we in this world obtain it (permanency).

In that congregation, there was at that time one SuBHADDHO*, who had been

ordained in his old age. The said SuBHaDDHO who had been ordained in his dotage,

thus addressed those bhikkhus : A’wuso, enough ! weep not; bewailnot ; we are

happily rid of that ascetic, (under whom) we were kept in subjection (by being told),

this is permissible unto you—that is not permissible unto you—now, whatever we

may desire, that we can do; and that which we do not desire, that we can leave

undone.

- Thereupon the venerable MABA’KASSAPo thus addressed the bhikkhus: Enough

A’wuso, weep not, bewail not ; why! has it not been emphatically declared by Bua-

Gawa’ himself, saying: even amidst every community of happy and contented per-

sons, various destructive and changeable issues come to pass? A’wuso, how can

we in this world realize it (permanency). It is not merely by saying of any thing

that is born or otherwise produced, which by its perishable nature is transitory,

most assuredly it perishes not,—that it will come to pass.

At this instant (at Kusindrd) four Mallian chieftains, having purified themselves

from head (to foot), and clothed themselves in new raiment, said :—We will apply

* His history is given at some length, in different portions of the Afthakathé—he

had been a barber inthe village A/tumd,

1012 Pali Buddhistical Annals. {Dec.

the torch to the funeral pile* of BHaGAwa’—but were not able to igniteit. There-

upon the Kusindrd Mallians thus inquired of the venerable ANURUDHO: Lord

ANURUDHO, whence, and from what cause, is it, that these four Mallian chieftains

who are purified from head (to foot), and arrayed in new garments, and who have

said: we will set fire to the funeral pile of BHaGAwa’, have not been able to ignite

it ? Because, Wasetthians, the intention of the déwatd is different. Lord, what then

is the wish of the déwald ? Wédselthians, the venerable MAHA‘KASSAPO, attended by

a great sacerdotal retinue, consisting of five hundred bhikkhus, is now on his way

from Pdwa to Kusindrd, and as Jong as MaHA’KASSAPO shall not have bowed down,

with uplifted hands, at the feet of BHAGAWA’, so long will the funeral pile of

BHAGAWA/ resist ignition. Lord, whatever be the design of the déwuid, be it com-

plied with.

Thereafter, wherever the coronation hall of the Mallians might be in Kusinard,

thither the venerable MAHA’KASSAPO repaired tothe funeral pileof BHAGAWwa’. On

arriving there, so adjusting his robes as to leave one shoulder bare, and with clasped

hands having performed the padaxkhinan, perambulation, three times, round the pile,

he opened (the pile) at the feet ; and reverentially bowed down his head at the feet of

BuaGAwa’. The aforesaid five hundred priests, also, adjusting their robes so as

to leave one shoulder bare, and with clasped hands, having performed the padakkhi-

ndn, perambulation, thrice round the pile, likewise, reverentiaily bowed down at the

feet of BHAGAWA’, While the venerable MAHA’KASSAPO and these five hundred

bhikkhus were in the act of bowing down in adoration, the funeral pile of BHaGawa‘

spontaneously ignited.

It thus came to pass in regard to the corpse of the BHAGAWA’ who was consum-

ed by fire: neither his surface skin, nor his under skin, nor his flesh, nor his nerves,

nor his muscles deposited any ashes or soot; none (of those parts) of his corpse

remained (unconsumed). In the same manner that neither butter nor oil, which is

consumed by fire, leaves either ashes or soot—so it came to pass in regard to the

corpse of the BHAGAWA’ who was consumed—neither his surface skin, nor his under

skin, nor his flesh, nor his nerves nor his muscles left any residuary ashes or soot:

none (of those substances) of his corporeal remains was left unconsumed. All the

cloths, composing the five hundred pairs of cloths, were consumed. At the instant

that the internal and external parts of the corpse of BHAGAWA/ were absorbed,

streams of water pouring down from the skies, caused (the flames of) BHAGAWA”’S

funeral pile to be extinguished: the flame was thus extinguished by the down pour

on the top of the funeral pile of BuAcAWA’. The Kusindran Mallians also helped

to extinguish the funeral pile by sprinkling every kind of scented water.

The Kusindran Mallians then forming a trelice work with lances, and fencing the

place round with their bows (transferred) the remains of BHacAWwa’ to the assem-

bly hall (within the town) ; and for seven days, with dancing and vocal and instru-

mental music, and with garlands of fragrant flowers, rendered every mark of respect,

reverence, devotion and submission.

The Mdgadha raja Asa’TasaTTu, the Wédchian descendant, heard that Bua-

GcAwa’ had attained parinibbdndn at Kusindrd; thereupon the said Magadha

monarch AJA’TASATTU, the Wédéhian, sent an embassy unto the Kusinarian Malli-

ans, with this message: BHAGAWA’ was a kattiyo; and I am alsoa kattiyo. I

am likewise worthy of possessing a portion of the corporeal remains of BHAGA-

* This funeral pile was composed of sandal-wood, and was 120 cubits high.

+ The Atthakatha gives a detailed account of the procession which transferred

the bones of BuppHO, still contained in the metal vessel in which he was burnt,

from the coronation hall to the house of assembly.

“Tee

1838. ] | Pali Buddhistical Annals. 1013

war. I will also erect a thupo over the remains of BHAGAWA’, and celebrate

a festival.

The Lichchhawi of Wesdli, as being also of the kattiyo race: the

Sakya dynasty of Kapilawatthupura, as the relations of Buppuo ;

the Balayo of Allakappd, as of the kattiyo tribe ; the kattiya dynasty

of Ramagdmo, as of the kattiyo tribe ; the brahmans of Wcetthadipo,

as being of the brahman tribe ; the Mallians of Pawa, as being of the

kattiyo tribe ;—all lay claim to a portion of the relics of BaaGawa’ in

precisely the same terms as the message sent by AJA/TASATTU.

- On being thus addressed, the Matlians of Kusindrd thus replied to the seaditbly

of emissaries: BHAGAWA’ died within our tetritory: we will not give you any

portion of his corporeal relics. On this answer being delivered*, the brahman

Dono thus spoke to the assembly of emissaries : Beloved, listen to this one obser-

vation 1 am about to address to you: Our BuDDHo was of a most pacific character ;

it is improper to raise a contest at the moment of the corporeal dissolution of so

excellent a being. Beloved, let all of us, willingly, cordially and unanimously,

divide the relics into eight portions: many nations are converted unto the Lye

(BuUDDHo)—let thupd therefore be extensively built in different regions. They an-

swered: Well, brahman, do then thyself carefully divide the relics of BHAGAWA’

into eight equal portions. Replying ; be it so, beloved ;—the brahman Déné accord-

ing to the request of that assembly, carefully dividing the relics of BHhaGAWA‘’ into

eight equal portions, thus addressed that concourse of emissaries: My friends, give

me this kumbhdn, (the vessel with which the relics were measured, ) and I will erect

a thipo to that kumbhdnt : and they gave that kumbhda to the brahman Déndé,

The Mérians of Pipphaliwano heard that BuAacAwa’ had died at Kusindrd ; and

thereupon the Mérians of Pipphaliwano sent an embassy to the Mallians of Kusindré

saying : BHAGAwA’ was a kattiyo ; we are kattiya, and are also worthy of a portion

of the corporeal relics of BHAGAWA’: we willerect a thiipo over the relics of BHa«

GAwa’, and celebrate a festival. They answered : there is no portion of the relics

of BHAGAW4’ left: the relics of BHaGawa’ have been divided: take from hence the

charcoal of the funeral pile ; and they accordingly did take away charcoal. 1

‘The Mégadha monarch AsA’TASATTU, the Wédéhian, built a thipo at Réjagahan

over the relics of BHAGAWA’, and celebrated a festival, The Wésdlian Lichchhawi

built a thupo at Wésalt over the relics of. BHAGAWA’, and celebrated a festival. The

Sakyans resident at Kapilawatthu erected a thiipo at Kapilawatthu over the relics of

BHAGAWA’ and celebrated a festival. The A’llakappa Balayans built a thipo at

Allakappo over the relics of BHAGAWA’, and celebrated a festival. The Rémaga-

mian Késaltyans built a thipo at Rémagdmo over the corporeal relics of BHAGAWA’,

and celebrated a festival. The Wétthadipian brahmans built a ¢hipo at Wétthadipo

over the corporeal relics of BHacawa’, and celebrated a festival. The Pdwéyan

Mallians built a thipo at Pdwd over the relics of BHAGAWA’, and celebrated a festi-

val. The Kusindrian Mallians built a thtipo at Kusindrd over the corporeal relics of

* The uninjured bones were the following; the four canine teeth—the two collar

bones—the frontal bone, with a long hair growing on it, which gave to that relic

the appellation of the renhisa or hair relic. The rest of the bones were partially

injured by the fire. The smallest atoms were reduced to the size of mustard seed ;

the middling atoms were of the size of half a grain of rice ; and the larger atoms were

of the size of half a grain of mugga seed.

+ A measure containing 4 alhakan,

1014 On the spontaneous heating of Brine. [ Dez.

BHAGAwa’, and celebrated a festival. The brahman Déné built a thipo for the

kumbhdn; and the Pipphalawarian Morians built a thipo at Pipphalawano over the

charcoal, and celebrated a festival. Thus there were eight thivpo over the corporeal

relics ; a ninth over the kumbhdn, and a tenth over the charcoal. This is the origin

of this matter, (the erection of thépos. )

The relics of the Eye (BUDDHO) consist of eight déndni ; seven déndni are objects

of worship in Jumbudipo, and one déndn of the relics of the supreme personage, the

Naga rajas worship in Ramagdmo. One tooth is the object of worship among the

déwos: one is worshipped in the capital of Gandhdrd : another in the kingdom of the

Kdlinga* monarchs ; the other the Ndga monarchs worship, It is by his providential

interposition that this all-bountiful earth is regulated by the rulers on earth.

Thus unto the relics of CHAKKHU (the eye), by those by whom protection ought

to be afforded, protection has been fully rendered: and as they (the relics) have

received offerings as well from the déwos, ndgas and kings, as from the great among

mankind—bow down therefore unto them with clasped hands ;—for the BuppHA

do not appear even within the term of a hundred kappd (of each other).

The termination of the Mahdparinibbdna-Suttan.

The Atthakatha explains, that before the close of AJA’TASATTU’S

reign, who survived BuppHo twenty years, by the advice and instru-

mentality of ManAKAssAro, all these relics, excepting the portion

enshrined at Ramagdmo, were brought to Rdjagahan for their better

protection; where they were all enshrined in a great thiipo on the

southeast quarter of that city. In the reign of Piyvapa’os, surnamed

Duammisoxka, these relics were again dispersed all over Jambudipo.

The relics left at Ramagamo were predestined'for Tambopanni, and

they were accordingly transfered to Ceylon in the reign of Dr’wAnan-

PIYATISSO.— Vide the Mahdwanso. |

II1.—On the spontaneous heating of Brine. ByG. A. PrinseEp, Esq.

My experiments on the spontaneous heating of brine, which formed

an article in the Journal of March last (page 207), have been fol-

lowed up with a copious series of observations, of which the results

will be found in the statements annexed. ‘The present series com-

mences for the most part from the time when (or soon after) the brine

was first let into the reservoirs at my salt-works, and embraces, with

two or three exceptions, the entire progress of the heating until its partial

or complete subsidence. It is therefore remarkable, as the places of

trial were also more numerous and the circumstances more various than

before, that the maximum temperature observed is 21° Ft. less than in

the experiments already brought to notice, and 26° less in the same

place, being in the brine at Marainpore 142° at the pump, and 137° by

the probe in November 1837, and only 116° at the pump and 111° by

* This is the tooth subsequently transferred to Ceylon.

-¥

¥838.] On the spontaneous heating of Brine. 1015

the probe in 1838; although the reservoir in question was filled under

very similar circumstances both years, and with brine of nearly full

saturation to the depth of eight feet, the superstratum of eight feet (in

all sixteen feet) being however, when first filled up, much nearer satura-

tion in 1837 than in 1838. But to this difference I attach less im-

portance than to the more rapid extraction of the strong brine from

below in June, July, and August, 1838, than in the corresponding

months of 1837, when a large proportion of the strong brine remained

in the reservoir till the end of the year. It is nevertheless remarkable

that the maximum temperature in this reservoir, which so far exceeded

that of any other in 1837, was in 1838 even less than the maximum at

_ the bottom of a small reservoir (No. 2) at Ballya Ghat, containing

only a small portion of strong brine not exceeding two-thirds saturation.

_ Altogether twelve depesits of brine at the several salt works have

been subjected. to trial, and, contrary to what might have been expected,

the greatest heat (121°) has been found in the smallest mass ; namely,

in a small pool of bittern and salt drainings with superincumbent rain

water in a hole dug for a well at Ballya Ghat: and this high tempera-

ture continued, rather increasing than otherwise, from the beginning of

November to the middle of January, when the water was taken out. In

all these deposits the brine remained the whole time undisturbed,

except in No. 2 of the Ballya Ghat series, (till after the 22nd June,) and

Nos. 4 and 5 of the NMarainpore series, whence it was pumped out to

supply the salt-boilers, the two latter from June to the 23rd September

inclusive, and afterwards No. 5 during all November, and No, 4 from

the beginning of December. In every one of them some heating may be

discovered ; for I now think the temperatures of 91° and 92° in the lower

strata of No. 3 of the Bhaota series may be regarded as at least 2° or

8° higher than would have been found in an equal mass of fresh water

at the same date. But it would seem that the heating scarcely begins

to shew itself till the saltness of the water exceeds that of the ocean

(S. G. 1028). It would also appear that the heating is most rapid

where the greatest differences exist in the saltness of contiguous strata

of water ; and that it is both accelerated and more quickly terminated

by agitation. This will easily be perceived on comparing No. 2 of the

Narainpore series with No. 1 and 2 of Bhaota, and Nos. 1 and 4 of

Ballya Ghat ; the very large diameter and smaller depth of the first

causing the contents of that reservoir to be more affected by the wind

than those of the other places named, Nevertheless, even in that large

reservoir the lower strata, as far as four feet from the bottom, appear

6 M

1016 On the spontaneous heating of Brine. (Dec.

to havé undergone no change at all, with respect to the degree of saltness,

in seven months from June to January, when, (allowing for an error in

the hydrometer which will presently be noticed,) the S. G. was found to

be the same as when the water was let in at the end of May and begin-

ning of June.

The tables I now exhibit shew the specific gravities as well as the

temperatures in all cases in which the hydrometer was used, and may

be thought unnecessarily voluminous on that account. But as the object

is to give opportunity to investigate the cause of the heating, I have

thought it advisable to suppress nothing ; the S. G. columns, though

some of them apparently mere repetitions, being to a certain extent a

test of the manner in which the probe was charged. Nor have I omitted

those trials which turned out unsatisfactory from the probe having been

drawn up too soon, or in which error occurred, taking care however to

insert a note thereof. The disparity in the number of joints of the

probe filled at different trials, in the same depth of water, was owing to

greater or less inclination of the instrument.

The. probe used in these experiments, instead of the machine before

described which was rather inconvenient to handle, was a thick bamboo

with a hole cut across at the top of every joint, large enough to admit

a small thermometer to try the temperature, and a small hole plugged

at the bottom of every joint to draw off the water for trial by the hy-

drometer. By covering the large holes with soft paper and letting the

bamboo remain in the water till the air bubbles (after the bursting of

the paper) had ceased to rise, I have procured water of the different

strata corresponding with the numbers of the joints, without mixture ;

but this method occupied so much time that I did not think it worth

while to be so particular as to the degrees of saltness, which conse-

quently in the lower numbers will be found registered somewhat below

their actual condition, the reduction being in proportion to the depth

and specific gravity of the weaker brine near the surface. Each set of

salt works was furnished with one of these probes. The Ballya

Ghat probe was a bamboo with joints of nearly equal length through-

out, averaging sixteen inches each. The joints of the Bhaota and

Narainpore probes were more unequal, their several lengths being as

follows respectively, measured from the bottom upwards,

ee ee ees

1838. ] ‘On the spontaneous heating of Brine. 1017

Bhaota. Narainpore.

No, 1 No. 11 inches.

2 11

3 3 feet. 114

4 12

6 cy Gs oT R OOS =

—

: 158

1015 19 154

11 11 15

12 12-15

13 b35 13°15

14 14 153

15 15 16

16 +28 16 15

17 17 14

13 } 28 18 135

19 19 125

20 ¢ 28 20°13

204 feet. 23 feet.

But great, exactness in. the specific gravity register during the. whole

period would have been impossible from the discovery of an error

of .009 in the weight of the instrument on the 9th October, whith

quantity it had lost by constant use since the 17th May: the subse-

quent observations were corrected accordingly, and. care was afterwards

taken to compare the hydrometers at short intervals. :

It remains for me to notice, that; none of the masses of brine tested

by the probe in the present series of observations, were under cover ;

that a fetid smell is usually given out by the brine when pumped up

after it has been long in the reservoirs, and that the surface of the wa-

ter in the long reservoir, No. 3, at Ballya Ghat was observed in

February and March last, (being then in perfect repose and the depth

of water being about 2 feet, the remnant of the supply let in before the

rains of 1837,) to assume successively the colors of blue, green, brick-

dust red and crimson, but returned to the ordinary appearance of water

in a month or six weeks. after these changes commenced. The surface

of the brine in Ballya Ghat reservoir No. 1, the depth of which had

been then reduced by Soonies to about five feet, was observed a about

a week ago to be of a bluish lead colour which did not shew itself

before the soonying commenced, and it gives out a strong fetid smell

which also was not perceptible before. |

Calcutta, 28th January, 1829.

6mM2

(Dec.

1018:

On the spontaneous heating of Brine.

“S19qUINU IMO] 9Y3 JO syuiof F 10 E Wo.Z 19}eM Jo aINjxIW oy posmmbor sownamOs aqoid Byoeyy syy, *yurof 4x0u ayy WHOA 193

“BM YAM BINFXIUL B JO F[NSO1 OY} SI “X) *G 04} ‘osodand yey3 10} podojdwe jassaa uy oY} Ut JajauI0ApAY ou} yOH 0} QuatoyNs Suteq

jou yulof 1aMo] ay} WO.J pouTe;go a9}eMm oY} Jey} SejoUep 41 ‘xeyUINosIo Aq 1ay}0904 syutol zg OF UPAIS SI “K) “G ay} USYAK “G ‘*N

Je} poos—ul Moy ue Jey PT “ON “[e4} poos v pur ul soynurw OZ 10] Yor GT “ON “Ur Set OWUOPeL Gl AN | “kop

Bunjynd ul Mos T[ “ON ‘|B poos & ou GT ‘ON ‘uMop poysnd sem yquiof doy oy a10jaq [Iz jyey pasoddns g ‘oN ‘w0I}0q

oy} poyowar 4 FT [TyIGNop nq “ysidn o1ou ploy ¢ “ON — “BuIpueosap UI oangxIe autos F ‘oN “qYSII somnyerodwoy 043 oyeuL

0} apryme ApWLAY play spxemaoyze yng ‘umop qnd Apipeays you oqoad oy} g “oN ur YSnoyy ‘s[B14y rey pouoyoas G pue | “T “SON

€ : .

ee ee -e e- se SZ0L ras} €Sol 16 Ls Zeor £88 ee ee | ee a =e TI

is as R: os |fecor Is | 8zor 28} eeor 16 | Zs 88 "> | ‘surg pue! ocor 68 e sd eT

"2 st01 48 | ZPOL LL | 26 €s |) 1€0l 28 | e90l £01) $6 | H90T 86 | 68%) scot oor) LZsor 6] 690r ¢6 ws -

“s £801 [Ol] S4Or 86 | GOL j1FOL LS | 99OI BOL} Ssor Zt1| cor | LLor Tor 06 | ¥80I TOI! oso ¥e6) ssor $6 MOL

os S60I 90I| L801 Sot] oor 1OU/F68Ol SIL} Ssol Git] Gor | F60t FOL bol | I60T $96 | s60t £6] ort ¥t6 |Zto1t 6s| g

"SUI g pue| LOI 9OI| 0601 FOI) EOI SOI] OGOL OTT} GsO0r 9oT| For | oott sot 101 | 9601 #96 | cott £6! gort 06 | ott gel Z

901T G6L| OOLL €01| E60r gol] ot 80l{ T60T LOL] FOL EOT] Sor | goIt Tot 46 | OOIT $66 | Corl 16] sort ss | eorr ¢€8| 9

LOUL $64} soll ZO} +601 Zor} €0L LOT] €601 FOl} S60I col] cor | 9OII 96 £6 | OOIT $06 | sort 16) sore 28 | torr ¥esl ¢

LOTT 64] COLL OOT} S60 OOL} FOL QOT|FF60l LOT] 6601 tor} 66 tOIL 6 16 |€rOTl $16 [€601t o6| sort 248 | sot #s| ¢

LOT $34] COLE S61} L601 661} Or FLOT| SGOL 66 |F6G0 Zot] 86 | goIT ¥e6 06 | 90Tt 16] Ottr 68] oftr 28 | sort gsi ¢

F90tl FL] — $6 |$2601 L6 | 86 £01; $601 96 | POI 86 | +6 Lot 16 | $8 gort { 09 OIIT $88] Gort 48 | sor es] ¢

LOCL SZb72011 26 | 8601 sé | 86 £01; 9601 $6 | Coll 101} $e6 [Zcort 16 88 06 | (IIT 88] OLIE £8 | SOlt #8] r

"ey 2Ss Bw | oO. Scie. AL Fa O'S‘LIO'S ‘L 28 ot 9 ok 2S it ‘'L I'p°s ot ‘D'S ‘HD's “L|'D°s ‘Ll-on

"ya05 ¢ | °3993 ST ‘nr ae aes 43] 9993 LU | 3993 St ‘sur “35 ['sur-3y | «sur ay "4093 LI oe gy | 2993 OT are i “dp -agc1t Sg

+1 €1 al ul ol 6 8 P 9 ¢ + g z . 7S

aan ptate pun YIG UO Ui ja) ava aLou yaefG pun Yaaf |] 07 9 pany yoym mos pun pum fo wtozs

D FULUNp U2 39) aug UaYym SouNnG 4s, 17 hjdwme hpanau £ ynf usym daap gy pun ‘amma gg hg ‘Fuop 70af QT 20040597 —J

"woyy oho

1019

ne.

of Br

img o

On the spontaneous heat

1888. ]

‘aBpe ay} Ieau paysar 4 (z "ONT [RLY

UI se) s1oy}0 ye ay (41vd ysadeep oy) ‘orppraz OY} SPIVMO} PozUe[S se souUTauIos pue ‘sored ous ayy ye ul nd sXemye

you sem agoid ayy {Ul owt ouLos yor ,, pue _‘JeI1y poos e,, osje ey "ON TPN} poos &,, se pasaysiBer | “oN

| ee ce oe ee 64 °° ce se g

~ ; 1s0l'9’S os 0z0r [8 08 ue $06 L8 | Szot 68 de : We L

6L ee 8Z Ltot Is | [201 6g 18 |'sur6é pur] [6 L8 SOL 68 | SZ0L £8 ' ” 9

64} SE0r a4 64 SIOt 8 OZ0L 88 $8 920 G6 L6 €6 SE0C %6 | 820t 06 | #201 36] Stor {6 IF

0s |} SEOt ZL 03 960L 68] Z6E0t 6 +6 6600 6 £Ol 86 9GOL 86 | SOL 16 | 0SoL sort sSor 96 }€

0s | S€OI SL +8 9FOL OOT) ¥PtOr tot 9 col got] Sor fOr 9SOL OOT) LSOL 0] 9S0f gor} o9or 6B Iz

Chor 6 | S€ot 8 v SrOr Ol] Stor zort| #26 Zegol sor LOL tor 6SOT OOT] O90 E€0r| 6Sot ¥csor| t90t 46 {I

DS 'LTO"S “L "L DoS) Lie ors: OL L D'S CL L 1 O'S CLS Lk) ee Eee fz,

"og "99q «| "LT «‘90q | "8 ‘29q "IT “AON “TE 990 | °0B6 PO]: -9°40Q | °6'3das} ‘ZL -Sny! “Gz Ajur | “cr Aug *p Aine | “gt oune

€l at 8 L 9 S t £ (a IT

Tt or 6

"syquow hue oY? U2 aLow 200f v pun 7aaf Q 07

aun 479 dn pant pun ‘hoy ur ynf p.wryj-au0 #nogu—‘doap jaaf 1 02 ¢ pun aprm zaaf gg hq Fuvp paaf aah dé doa 3

/ “AOATASEI SIyy UL soeyd owes oy) ul uMop ynd seme you sem eqoud ay} *g ° N—'W103}0q 943

sutyoevar wo aqoid ay} poyueaoid a1aY UOON.A4sqo ewOs OT ‘ON ‘out ey} JO SSOUYVIM 9Y} JO yUNODOe UO ynO 4nd atEM

soy oy} Aep ors ul ZOTL OD °S OLL L 3? puge ey} uo pue ‘gsT] ‘O'S OLT WL 38 YIZ{ ey} uo pue FOTT “D°g ZOT valle

72 W0}}0q ay} WoIy 103eM Su] sem dund ayy Lep SUT, [ely poos & you.,, se pasreystBar qurol puosas ayy T ‘ON

ee ee 610 ¢g ! 28 ee IZ0r 16 ee ee ee ee ee 9.

Sie. ake 26101 €8 €8 26 4£20I €6 | ‘sut 9 pue 9Z0I 88 L2or Lg ae *}OOJ B puv | ¢

m7 ae 6I0t €3 €8 £6 820l 66 Ls 9Z0I 88 “cor 28 ‘jooy B pus — £6 >

TvOr £8 Ge 610t €8 €8 £6 OfOl £6 L8 9201 88 | Lzor Lg | Zogor 16 — 6 /e

£t0l $8 | Ssor 69 | #zzor 8 #8 L6 €90€ sor 68 OFOL $6 | 6EOI 6 S20Or $6 6L0lI 46 | ¢

SZOC 26} chor og £60f OOr 10l LIT OFIE 6ITI SOr S60I SOI] S6or 90t 6sOl Sol OOTL OOT t

‘D'S LIDS “LI ‘D'S “L PE “L sD ae lard i ‘L wD Sa | oS el oe | ee ee

“SUL OL 93 €]. “yoaz "SUL “IZ 9} “SULQ 439] “Aa07 9 "3223 9 "4903 9 *3995 9 *yaoy £G “7903 $9 “daap "33 ¥¢

ul Or 6 g 9 ¢ ? € z 1.

‘aunr yig payy—adoap joof g 07 % pun apn jaaf Oz hq 8u0} 729f OST 00nLasagg—G

_[Dae.

ne.

mg of Br

On the spontaneous heat

1020

deep qyaoy @ Aes ‘erry poos—ssynurur peraaes “ur ,,

OL ON — ,, Ut out} autos ,, aqoid § ‘oN “Ut saqturUt [eedes 5, Q°ON [eLI} sey ,, eB 7 "ON = “UI0I}0q OY} paydeas aavy

oj you posoddns g ‘oN "Tel poos e ,, GON, [el1) Jaurt0y ul ueyy Suryuezs asow ,, FON ,*tedaap oof & yuns ,; se

peyieut pure 10j30q A[papiwap Z ‘oN ,,“pal]y se uoos st yno uaye} eqoid—juounstadxe arez Ayjaad v,, se peyreur [ ‘oN

18 oe ee oe of zs (F201-16) | Igor 16 ve IL

aid £8 aa ve ve 08 ¢g "SUI 929 96 €€0l £6 OZOI 88 or

rip 26 #3 coor TL of 18 Ls 46 FE0L +6 0zor 8s 6

<— e. LO1 16 QZOL ZL 0s 18 £6 L6 — 96 OZor 68 8

*p SI 90t SSOl 26 1g 16 —_ 101 LLOL ZOr GZOl 26 L

‘2 OZf Lit €801l OT Ss OL Sol 80 S601 Zor 9FO- $6 9

si 6IT Izt ZOIT SIT: Ool SII sol Zl SZII SOI SLOL 66 S

ap OIL Sil iC Gay Gare | OI 61 Sit SIL OFIT EOI S60I OOl |] ¥#

S60I Lf ZI SIT ZSIE II Sit STI ZI O1T 6SII 66 ZZIL 66 €

LSIL 66 OI Olt Sort “tat | OIt Lor | Orr 90 GLIL 96 €9It L6 Fe

6SIIT oo! 60I LOL LOTL LOT UT. €Ol Olt £OL 6LIT 96 S9Il 96 T

‘OS OD ok Fi: ‘D)°S “L 2L XL “at, “L D’°S 'L 22 EA ht Be

"he “ner 9 "ue “LZ "20q aT 20 ae) EY @ | “II “AON “Ie "190 °9 hy @) 6 ‘ydag “or “sny

Ol 6 :) t Oo 4 S - e z 1 ot

3 een ee ee ee ee DO Sie Se AON

| sau ay, wos surg fo sFuuoup amos pun Qnogn

yiuna auyos fo sdvay ay) worl #108 2}11Y 0 1 0702 Gurhuwws wos fo ssamoys hg dn py hjquanbesqns pun’ ‘sxapog

ay, mou hoan umowy, usajng yon padpy us pany fyoy—doaop yaaf 1 10 OT 119% 0 “of snp ajoy » wi jood yous p—z%

1021.

ac [R1} poos 4, 2 ‘ON

On the spontaneous heating of Brine.

"3995 8

*pruee] "$% ‘90q

‘JULIS B]QeIOpIsUOD Y}IM SoUlTjeuIOS pue [jem oy} rvon skemze ‘soovtd yoosagIp ye uMop ynd eqoid “q ‘nN ‘Avp Auuns

,, SONUIUL BUOS ‘UI ,, ET “ONT

,cUl SOJUIUE BUIOS—]eII} poos ,, ZL ON =, [BE poos Ayjoud e pue ‘ur seynuru Maz ev yJo[—sueISs ap}, 410A ,, OT “ON

osor

‘D'S

"4995

€t

0s LL

6a spor} 7)

0s SL

0s osor {8

208 68

Z8 16

£18 gor } 16

£6 £66

6 001

oor Zot

tol £0!

101 LOL

ei Fc 3 Yaak 1 8

£5 | *4093 OF

"LT °99g

; 101

£6

oor

ZOl

£0

ZOL

a ('

"3993 20

6 (09q

veoe al

499) $f

‘T 000,

£8 98 ne

768 98 98

Seg 8zor } 98 #8

S78 Eszor 98 #8

28 98 $8

ZB cor { 98 cg

£8 1S0L 98] 6204 88

88 — 06 _taUt "86

+6 : g6\ZeSot 66

46 ror { L6| Sot 66

c6 46 lol

L6 Egor { L6 Zror

96 216 Z101

£16 86 £01

66 9S01 4 86 ZF0T

Tol 66 S01

Ziol 66 SOI

101 19014 L6 FOI

oor 86 —

vile Sk DS ab

"ya03 For] “3903 For | “4905 Lt

"'OL'AON] "G*AON | °£3 "300

6 3 L

2¢6

£6

€6

246

cot

Sor

90T

90t

FOr

Z0I

101

ToT

“L

«¢ [Uy poos & ,, G ‘ON

oot

Tot

10.

TOL

col

TOL

Oot

COT

OOT

“L

® Joye curd fF 4e polsj—._ eI} poos ev pur ‘ul anoy ue spey—oop Avs ‘Suyuels L10a ,, PT ‘ON

( OINUIUL B FLY OF GT “ON 0} doy oy} YUIs pue stoquinu Jamo] ayy aster 0} se OS poT[y Suloq soe

pel] useq Suraey oqord ay} ‘fet4y poos A10A & Jou ,, F “ON

“L60T *D ‘*S Pure 68 “LL JO “osresey

“iL

"4903 FO1]) 903 FOr) “yeas ST

"L°90O [TL ydag|6s Ajne

6€0r 16 ‘=

OFOT 16 a

1POr - 46). °*

6FOI 16 /S90T £6

€90( 7FI6 £6

£901 ¥16 £26

$2901 =: 16 €6

Sool =s«tT6 ¥¢6

L901 218 £6

E16 £6

coors L901 £6

06 z6

6901 { 061049 1 16

06 06

08014 O6/080I 4 06

06 16

i hea flee) (eI aba ae

"4993 SI | "3003 STI

°L ane me oune

¢ z

OY} JO W0}}0q oY} Ye pUNOIS oy} eAoge 4Jooj v ynoqe Wor afyj0q @ Aq dn yYSno1q sem AJOyEM ][eII} Sit} sump % ON

coor 06

S90 06

S9OL 06

S90T 06

4901 } og

OLOr &

L80T 4 68

Sls

“3995 6

‘e aune

am tM OmDD

"yaaf L[ jogo Smagq surps ay) we yjdap wnurxnu ay) ‘aune y29 pun YIC ay] 10 yaaf GT] 07 pun “ypp uo 0797p fo jaaf ZT 07

1838; ]

"mRODYT

—‘aune pug uo cgol ‘O'S fo rund jsou ay; sof jaaf'g 07 pun ‘hogy yg uo CET,“ *§ fo sayour Q 200f [ 07 pun

—hoyy Yig{ uo goof | fo ysdap 42 03 uonninjzos fivy fo aur..g ynm poyddns

suf pun sazaump yaaf Qc] “0auasayy—' |

(Dxc.

‘On the spontaneous heating of Brine.

1022

« Te} poos ,, FON

o he #201 98

i: i. oe

a2 ‘eas a $8

yy Lgo3 88

ss 18 06

sg 98 06

&¢8 2G8 16

$8 % 06

Ss 8 06

98 98 E014 16

$98 98 26

$98 $98 16

*L “L Bee beer

"G “AON | *IG 390 "11 °4dag

€ Fd I

ANA F MOON ADHDS A

~ a

"UNL YIQ PUD YIG a.L0UL Jaaf F

pun ‘hoy yiQ{ we jap ayn fo j00f lay2 m ysdap mnunaxnu ay? “‘QFOT 92 OROT JO “970m yp ‘auny ue. hyuna j09f 6

‘daap jaaf 9 02 2g pun apn jaaf

03 49 #uop yaa Qo] .uoaxasaay—'g|pun ‘ze9] ‘Anpy anus Ajpdwma sanau ‘apun 70af 1% fq Guo) yaa FG moasasa—Z

‘L

"bS ‘09

“L

°6 °090q

*1 °09q

,, Ul SOMUIU SUIOS ‘[eII} Pood ,, G “ON

sues a10W pues ‘So|NUIUI OUIOS ‘UI ,, 2 ‘ON

UY ya] pue “ue]s e341] 5, G “ON

“OT “AON

.c [ely poos ,, p ON

400} [ pue

.Jensn ueyy Sur

.c [ely poos Ayaad e—saynurur woz ¥

«TF poos 5G “ON

ie]

lon!

aM AM HAMOMmDNH

"yaaf QT surag suv

07 pany ng ‘geet ‘hoy U2 OSOL 92 OFOL ‘D'S’ fo 420m fo yaa Gg 02 7 Fuavy

On the spontaneous heating of Brine. 1023

1888.]

"1940100 ISTS 94} UO suloq yJdep uMUTIxeUt aTII—G pue g UsaMyoq Jeay Z pure ‘Q pue / VoaMjeqg J10UL

3007 [—Z pure g W9aMJoq a1oul ooy T—g pue g sleLIy UOdMJOq Yo ya[ OOF AUD “G ‘N ," [RMI ATE, G “ON _,,-JHO uayey

UOOS 5, SB Pata}sIaI1 g ‘ON “UL SoFNUIUL MOF B UIVULEL 0} patayns uaeq pey aqo1d ayy jt patvodde aary pynom fauy uryy

TOMO] (BdRTAMS OY} Avo ydo0xe) seinjeredurey ay} SMOYS d1Ofetoyy pue ALINY B UL patty usaq dAvl] 03 sivedde ¢ ‘on

San Rr emer eee

e201 e, ms ar % 3 == = =

ee st

ba 1ZOl = Se SOL St “A at 5 are es - Lt

i“ 1201 oh 6201 Lb 9I0L 28 F6L i SsyouL g pure = = ot

e: Teor = GL, erot AL 910r 28 $64 * 8Z0l =: 06 3% “A ct

recor, =. 69 | scot sh | Fysor £8 | Glor 23 6L Sz0r 06 =) 06 se ES vl

PEOr GL FEOL —-BB Ivor 6 a6 | L8 964 9cor 16 | O€0r I6 8 “4 et

SEOL 08 9EOI 68 ISO 96 | seor G6 68 O€0r 16 StOl L6 OFOT 88 De &t

TOOT 6-86 tS IeOT 1 26 FigsGS0l po LB i. arate (96 $6 Soot «66 «| «(OSor)=otor | SFO fL8 nt Lt

o90t = 66 9S0I Te6 690t 6 esol 296 L6 0SOL 86 Loot =—s BOL | «6GtOr = fu6 60It 68 Or

GLOT lof | 990T %g6 QLOl L6 £900 L6 86 090I Cot | OZor LOL 9G90T 26 60Et 63 6

6L01 Oot | Zot G6 Oso S6 ZLOL =$l6 86 s90r 10f | Osor oor | ssor $6 i 06 8

GsOt 86 FLOL = S66 Fool 86-86 OSsOor 96 26 ELLOL cor — L6 S990 £6 Ott 06 L

gsor L6 6L0I +6 ssot £6 S801 S6 S6 Ssot Tol 96 GLOL $6 Itjt 68 9

seo $6 | es0r 46 | keor 6 | g { +6 26 ssor oor | “89 { GG «tin 9U0T esneS6ad Wi hbas ue S

eso #6 | aor 666 | ge, o6 | “8801 1 cg | g¢ esol $46 | zsor +6 | O6or £6 | stir 88 | #

880T +6 FSO 6 6 1801 26 16 830I 96 Sgol £6 O6or 6 Titel 83 ¢

me _ 26 06 96 €6 36 _ 68 j

as 5 oy | gant} 8 sae 7 COUn, | er] Seon ye |: Sar oe) ea

9°S “L "O's L y°S ‘LSS "ib “L “o's “L ‘D'S “dL ‘p's <E ‘3° Ss “L

"SE ‘00q ‘Tr °090q 9T “AON "Gg “AON "IZ “po "L°~po “tt “4dag ro Aine "Lt oune

6 8 ) shi. 9 Ss e € j T

"sume ay} Furinp a.1ow oof auo pun ‘eune yice ay2 hg yaaf cy 07 ‘aunr yICT pun YITT 9Yy7 UseMI2q J9af G 0}

pay * apis daap ayz punow payyum—dasp yaaf’ 9 07 fjny pun joaf g{ 02 paznavoxa sivy ‘dajaummp yaaf QG] 0acasay—' J

“PLOAUO.LDAT

of Brine.

ing’ o

“On the spontaneous heat

1024

eroyye] 9T]} UO Woy)

Jayem jo yjdep wuuirxem

ayy ye ‘sured ayy SuLimp

qooy ev jo yydep oy} 04

aaao Ajaaazsassed $9001.19}

Sutuiolpe ayy JO 1ayeM oy}

yey} OS ‘pale SI ALOALas

-a1 SIy} JO pls suo

6Z0T 68 Ol

osor. ¥68 6

_ $63 8

O£OT 06 Z

Teo &6 9

SrOr 66 S

Loot Zot ¥

9901 #£0I ¢

Sol j

CLOl 101 :

‘D's ~AL

"> Jsndny

"UNUAL OU

ay), 99 990299 ISTS

ay, hg ume hg asou

j00fp pun ‘aun? YIDE

PUd YIQT 947 vaemjaq

doap yaaf 9 07 pany

‘apun yoaf gy fq uoj

jaaf QCZ uonsasay—"e

AUIES BY} J SVM DIVJING OY} WOIF USC} 107? \A

‘Fecol ‘D'S G4 ‘1 CW 'v oT) omy

*smmoy omy Ajreou url yor eqoid ay} $ye11y poos

ki9A @ Q*ON “*poSreyo Suteq soe uoos A19A yo uayey Ajjesoued sem JI ‘UIOAJOSOL SIY} ye ‘S[eIT}

J9yjO ay} UL =,,“ANOY Ue Fey [[Nf Ul yjo] ,, UWeeq Suraey oqoid ayy “[e1413 seq ayy Z ‘ON

* a = rn ‘

as os es aS rEOI & pe 6E0I $8 el

os “A 9L orolr og (Sssor $28 | scot 6 9for 16 | ¥L¢01 $s ZL.

cSot 9h osor sh LL — og |freor 8 | seor FI6 geot 16 | ¥csOr ge It

Zocor $94 SOL Gd LL — og | 9€0t €8 | OF0L 26 LeEol 16 9901 06 OL

Ficoll Of LSot cL LL 6eor O08 | 1901 06 | LtOI +6 POL £6 6901 16 6

ssor gd 6S0I 08 0s esol 88 | 9S0OT 26 | sso 66 €901 101 | SZot 66 8

0901 08 -90I 18 +8 ssor 68 | s9or €6 | E901 Zoot | +90 Tot} gsor For | &£

690t 28 LLoI 16 68 1Lor #6 | ZO 986 | Leor ¥Sot | S4ot 901 | gsot sot} 9

LLOU 16 640% £6 £6 GLor 96 | SZOI_ 66 cgor { 340! OSOL OIL | gsol sor} ¢

osolr 16 6401 £6 ¥6 9LOt 46 Lor} 86 /or | €80f OIL | ssor sot |] &

TS8Ol 116 180l £6 £6 gLot 16 Pr 9sor Lor — 601 SsOol 66 €

26 16 £6 LLOL L6 L6 ee 601 L6 G

1901 3 ae osor { 1 26 et 8 ELOr Ze | 980T1 for | 289 Loor | $8 1 cg :

‘oO °S CL ‘DD -S:ofL “L ) "ih “Se ik "yes id oS ek i 6 =o ee eer |

°G-OF 8-01 Il "E-Tl *b- 1 "3295 IT "4093 TI "4903 For

‘sr cues "ST ‘99q om 29d "OF “AON "Gg ‘AON *L ‘320 “LI “ydag ES Aine

8 L 9 S ¥ € z [

"09g079Q) 1861S Aq (wunumvnu ay2) jaaf F171 07

puv ‘hing yape fq 72af Soy 07 ‘aun yIQT pur yIG usemjaq paef 6 9 pay ? PLO “D'S fo

Avi YIG uo we Furmmuasr aurwg s.uoah ysv) fo paaf p Yj ‘sajawmip 72af NOG uoalasay—-z

1025

of Brine.

ng o

On the spontaneous heat

1838.)

<CUI SOMO OWLS 449] 5, CT “ON "UT SoynutL AueuL yng Gy Sida AsoA ,, FL ‘ONT

<M stidn A19A Inq “[eII} pOOS 5, ST “ON *IOQUIDAON, 48] BOUTS OdeFINS OY} WOIF YO 49] JOO} @ noqe—_Jerny eZ ,, ST ‘ON TEU

ayy Aqqgoid ,, @ se patoysidor st [[ “ON *sarytaetd oytoads ayy Surd1y ut yurol auo Jo paiinov0 UOISSIMIO Ie[IUIS B oLey Z ‘ON “119

10 YZ oY} Aoqye aroymouwtos A[quqo.d ‘soimyesodursy ay} Jo [eI1} SITY} UI pormnod0 aqord ay} Jo syutof omy Jo UOIssIMO Ue g “ON

ee ee ee ee 9IOL €3 08 See 06 ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee cI

re = = "* — [910L €8 | 08 |SZOL 06 |820I O05 | — 88 }eeor = = “ -s a WE

1. [Reon { 24 [108 08 | — (F8 lors { £28) T64 [S201 06 [SCOT (06 |TEOt 88 [2801 = ee “ = fae

se 9£L \F6I01 408 | — #8 68} 08 |L201 06 |82OI #06 |ssOl 88 |LEOL $8 £ e e Se AC

5 E2OI 9L | GIO 708 | — &€8 |6I0L €8 | 08 [S20 16 |8ZOL I6 |PEOL O06 |\LZeoI 98) °° = = r= ve tay

PSO GL | MOT $8 | GEOL G6 \ZPOL OOL/OPOL 96 | 26 {SPOT EOT|Z9OL BOTjSLO1 GOT|L80L OT} 46 |FZ6IL OOT/S6IL ge} °° ees

cgor LL} 6SOL L6 | SSO EOT/SSOL SOL/O90L oI] OOL |8OI SOI|SLZ0L 8OL/SB8OI OLLIIOIL FOL] TOL | FEIT 66 |S6IL gel °° sees |

SPOT 18 | SLOT SOT} TLOL LOL\L90L 801/9901 zor] FOL zor { 891 9801 6O0T\SOIT ott ort ZOI| OOL |€S6IT 86 |S6IL gelezIt s6} °° 9

GLOL $6 | [801 GOT; 6LOL GOT/8LOT OLTISLOL GOI) 901 GOT\S60L SBOT\SIIT LOLOIIT Ol) 66 | L6LT 86 J96IT g6lOLII £6 *

Q60E OO] T6OL OIT| GLOT GOL|Z8OI OTT FOL Itt] LOL | 69, {OTIfeoIt BOLjoztt FLOLSIIL 101] 66 | Z6IL 86 J96II FZ6\ZZI1 96 \SPIt O0l)®

L60L FOI] 9601 TIT agor { 601 r601 { LLT/c60r ttt} LOT GOI|SOIT LOT|OSTL LOTSFIT 86] 86 | S6IL 86 |96II g6lO8II EOT/9SIT FOL'E

COIL LOT vere { U1 801 Oot O11] GOL |gao £90 or, { Ulzory f SOllg, ry { 001 786 | — 86 IZ6IL gé6lestl POI] — LOG

— 901 O1l} — ~201| — — 801 601] cl COI FO" FOL 66 | #86 | FEIL 66 JO0CL g6/E8IL OLTIOLIT OLTE

‘O'S =O SS i712 6088 24b (O48 “LFS AL - abe [O"St “EPH eser LOSS i Des: ESOS TRS) 3S “hors 1

"9993 FOL | ‘3983 FIL | °399F SE | °3993 HL | 399} ST | °399F OT |'990% Fey | *3907 GT |-yo0g Zoz | 100% FoT | 3993 G] 3007 G | "3003 Eg] “3007 Q

ct al eI ral Il Ol 6 8 L 9 c v ¢ z t

| °9Q079Q) ISS UO hos ‘wnuncoU ay7 3

700f QT pun ‘aunr 419% %O (OFOT a9ufuns) joaf Gy ‘aunr YIOT LO (GOTT “D'S 20nfins) joaf F\] ‘hop is1E UO 1GI1 “DY ‘Ss

fo paf Fg ‘fngy pugs vo doz yo gay] pun mojaq egit “OD ‘§ fo 10af 9 ‘hoy Y29 YO GOTT ‘DO ‘8S fo 120f % ‘hoy IST 4O OSIT

"S30 Mm auntq fo 302f | 40 | —wW0}20q 70 pnw ey, uO Fumsof Usy? yos ynm ‘younyy ur hap ‘uajzeunrp jaef QZ uoasasay—

(Dec.

On the spontaneous heating of Brine.

1026

ce [ELY WCf 5, GL "ON

side A19A,, ZY ‘ON, S}utol ysxgy oy UMOp Suryjnd ur Mops ,, T] ‘ON ,,"S[CL} Tey ,, se pazoysiSa. OL pues G ‘SON

= ¥ 2 + 7 +e 7 = = = * a

ee eo eo eo SI0I €8 08 ee ocor{ ° "18 "1b, eo eo ee ee ct

ae 6Z | SB SIOL £¢8 | #62 {2201 06 68 |1g€0t ze} °° “4 ns ee

28 a 62 | ¥8 store £8 | 08 {4201 06 jogo 06 |9E0T 426] °° ‘? ‘ +2 16g

=e VL gz | $8 8} 08 {Z20t 06 |ogOl 16 |$POL 66] °° 4 “ eT Ck

$eeor U2 GZ 18 | #8 8Iot S8 | 28 {8Z20t 26 |esol €6 Icrot Fol °° 3 = oe AT

Eeo1 ¥Z LL £28 | G8 120 88} 16 {0€0l 6 [ZFOE 26 {2901 F01\33 Bx] — 06 “e oo log

— & I8 201 ¢8 | #6 9F0L O01) OOT {SFO EoOTi/SSOL OTltZot sot] 06 | Ssit 96 | 98tt 68} °: 16

Ergot 92 v8 [9FOT 96 | GOL jFSOL 901] POL [6S0T SOI}Z90E Z0T\060L F01, 46 [86IT TOT/¥eozt 26) °° Ig

9201 8Z 96 jFSOL O01) FOL j8sOL 401) 90T |), fort] — FL0T|cotl F101} LOL | Tost OOT] 9ozt 86] °° IZ

Lb0L PS 96 |8Sol cot} 901 |990t $201] Zot |®49l} qItlogot sorl90tt oot; oot | Sozt 66} otzt Sélestt ¢6'9

£901 86 101/890 FOI] 8dt zor { 801 $01 oor Out 060L 901\EZIT ep 86 |¥602T 86 | 90ZE S86\I8IL 96%

£901 96 Z01 zor Fo! ZOt Zot! Sot sor 9OTIS9IT 86 | SOZT 86 | SOZT S86iFSIL Zéls

— paigzor 4 20% Ot} 90T ggor{ 20! Z0L oztt 4 20! GOTT 4 SOI sori { 2 86 | 9021 26 | SOZI S6iZSIl 9612

G80 86 z0ll — ool] — Z0t| 10 COT rol $96| $26 — 6 | S0%t sé6lestt 96/1

OS ‘LOS ‘HD 'S “Ll “L |['9'S ‘Lb ‘L {O'S ‘LVDS “LOS “Ll ‘“L (D'S “ID's “La 's ‘a

"9993 OL) “9993 ELT | “399F ST | °399F FL | “999% GT | “IF ECT | g0a0% Gy | *3003 GE | “y90% eT |*9995 Zz] "9007 6 "3293 8 "4993 9

"ST *00d| "LT 99, | 1 “AON [ET “AON] “GS “AON [1B 990} °2°99Q | TT ‘3dag | ‘gt Aqng |-Zeung| ‘yp oung | “Teg Ae |-9z fey

St ZI Il Or 6 8 Z 9 ¢ v ¢ Z I

uinunanus ay} 70 jaaf Sgt puv (GE0l °O

“SUDA 9Y2 Ut

°"§ aanfins) aunge yI9g uo 700f 21 (‘R601 “DO ‘“S a0nfuns) ‘aune

UOT 29ef ELL eung yrs wo p04 TL ‘oune yay raf FQ ‘Kop ste uo L611 “OD ‘Ss fo 204f Fg pun ‘WIE HO OFIT ‘D'S

fo 00f | ‘hoy 381 U9 OST “O'S 20 me wagom fo z00f | ‘yauopy ur Aup ‘apm yaaf gp fq #u0, jaaf QZ «20adasag—'G

‘ * any Ah 7 / ’

ie re Np nee: ers | SUA aces ite:

4 *) Aphe i ‘ on tN vi

RG co

ps.

)

aura AL Soe.

oe We 7

ool

pll On gd iS =

ae olin bo “ a

THF

Q py por

* phreme

” LPO

DT PYM eM POT <

pl PMOL,

plop OS By

pl phon yep ng e

rye, i = at

lo) Outer a) TG 0 rodoeaurea

iy eye

Or oheplog

EPPS .

1838. } The Mergui Coast-line and Islands. 1027

Pump RecisTer.

| Bailys Ghat. Brine Reservoir, No. 2

16 June, T. 107 S.G. 1164

D2 xis, . yo, 210 a 1170 } from the bottom.

Boigae Ganie Sil or p97

Narainpore. Brine Reservoir, No. 4

10 May, N. W. pump T. 111 S. G. 1171 from 6 inches below the surface.

a i Bs | aig Ries eh ae, from 1 foot ditto.

Total depth of water about 3 feet—surface T. 98 S. G. 1133.

15 4, N. W. pump T. 102 S. G. 1104

9 «699 «6 Se We. ogg «gg 116 Sg, = 170 $ fixed as before.

20 yoy i yee, | BU

SR ip 45 » 9108 ,, 1180 ditto; depth of water 6 feet; sur-

4 June, N. E. » » 102. ,,. 1196 [face T. 92 S. G. 1153.

N. W. US sy ao

a ak) INGE: » », 103 ,, 1193

BORE HO s x y, 104 ,, 1199

16 July, ,, mn ae

Parole, hag » 3,105 ,, 1198 from 12 feet below surface.

4 Aug. ,, » » 108 ,, 1148 sunk a foot lower.

11 Sept. S. E. wag klong. Lode

9Dec. S.W. ,, 5,114 ,, 1161 |

Tee ee. Ss em ne

Syom ee Oe eG . from near the bottom.

15 Jan. ,, yy LIS 55 Ln28 4

ae res Cm t Ce,

Narainpore. Brine Reservoir, No. 5.

4 June, S. E. pump T. 101 S. G. 1201%

” i) 9 99 105 99 1200

26 ” ” 9 O99 101 Le) 1158

4 July, “ fi seis WAS aay wb ES

24 . W. oh tee, LUO 1128 ‘

4 Ang, , # i 104 i rere from near the bottom.

sunk a foot lower, so as almost to

aD IBEM- » bb Bf ine TOE 1187 { touch the bottom.

5 Nov. N. W. 99% 99 20D. > yg) LEQ

EME 8.55 » 9, 108 ,, 1107 $ about 6 inches from bottom.

mes, -Cabha i at py Ly i

IIl.—A short notice of the Coast-line, Rivers and Islands adjacent,

forming a portion of the Mergut Province, from a late survey.

By Captain R. Luoyp.

The outer islands lying off this coast, with part of the main land,

were laid down by Captain D. Ross of the Indian Navy, from observa-

tions made between the years 1827 and 1830, and the result of the

present survey has been to fill up the inner portion of it, to delineate

the coast-line (with the exception of a very small and unimportant part)

between the latitudes of 9° 50’ N. and 12° 40’ N., and to make a

sketch of the Tenasserim river, or “ Tenanthari myit” from its en-

trance up to the old town of that name.

Within these limits, the general features of the country are much the

same as in the province of Arracan, being mountainous in the interior,

1028 The Mergui Coast-lne and Islands. (Dec.

of irregular outline, and consisting of several ranges, clothed to their

summits with large forest trees ; the greatest elevation reached may be

taken at about 3500 feet.

Between the southern limit and 11° 40’ N. the high land approaches

in some parts very near to the sea, but from that latitude to the nor-

thern limit, it is fronted by a low delta of mangrove country, varying

in breadth from 5 to 15 miles. Through this several small rivers

have their course, and communicate with each other by creeks forming

an inland navigation for boats ; the outer portion of this country from

being so low, and tide-washed, is unfit for purposes of cultivation, in

its present state, and it is only in the inner part, where there begins

to be a susceptible rise in the level towards the high land, that there

are a few cultivated spots.

Within this delta or Sunderbund there are several small elevated

ridges and isolated hammocks, covered with large trees growing upon

a soil covering a rocky basis, and which at some remote period, appear

to have been separate islands forming a portion of the archipelago, but

are now united to each other by the accumulation of deposit brought

down by the different streams from the higher grounds, and which seems

to be gradually encroaching seaward. In this manner an island called

“¢ Sellore” has evidently become connected with the main by a narrow

neck of land covered with mangroves and having two or three creeks

intersecting it, and another one “ Kesserain” appears to be approach-

ing that state. These islands being large, and sheltering the imer

waters, the tides set round both ends and meet in the middle, facilitat-

ing the deposit of sediment, and assisting this operation of nature.

Of the small streams above alluded to, the Tenasserim or “ Tenan-

thari river” is the only one of any consequence, one branch of which

discharges its waters at Merguz, and forms the harbour of that place,

while the other disembogues about seven miles further to the southward:

these two branches unite nine miles above Mergui, opposite a small

village called Tedawon ; here the features of the country begin to

change from a low mangrove land to one of moderate elevation, and

the river opens out into a lake of small extent, apparently the original

mouth of it, in which are situated two or three small islands, and on

either side are several hill pagodas and small villages which have a

very pretty effect. At one of these “ Mounglaw,” on the left bank, there

are extensive plains for rice cultivation, and beyond this, the country

becomes mountainous to the very edge of the river, with a considerable

narrowing of its bed: here and there however, there are spots of level

ground which are occupied by small villages, whose occupants cultivate

grain and other produce, little exceeding what is required for their own

a a

1838.] The Mergui Coast-line and Islands. 1029

consumption. Four miles above Mounglaw on the right bank, a small

branch or creek runs off to the northward, which after receiving the

waters of several other streams, gradually enlarges itself until it falls

into the sea three miles to the northward of Mergui, and forms the

land on which that town is situated into an island. About nine miles

further up on the left bank is a similar but rather larger offshoot the —

Phuhwa, which falls into the sea in 12° 10’ N. Beyond this at the

distance of about 14 miles is the old town of Tenasserim. It is situated

where the river divides into two branches, the great and little Tenasserim,

opposite to the point of confluence, and on the left bank of the latter.

The river is 115 yards wide abreast of the town, and the depth of it in

the latter end of May was three fathoms at low water in the centre of

the stream: the rise and fall of tide at the springs was six feet, and it

was high water at about three hours, the velocity of the stream was very

weak, not exceeding one mile per hour. The natives describe the

water as being fresh all the year round, and the surface of the river as

being bodily raised about nine feet during the period of the freshes, (or

from July to September.) The bed of the river is very variable and

irregular both in tenacity and depth, and there are several shallows,

and rocky patches ; the high land too coming down in many places

close upon its banks, renders it difficult to navigate ; but small vessels,

such as the river sloops of Calcutta, by waiting for the tide to drop up

with, and to cross the different shallows, may be taken to Zenasserim,

should Dr. HELFER’s coal discovery render it necessary at any future

period.

The position of Tenasserim has been very inaccurately placed in all

our old maps, and its distance by the course of the river from Mergui

is very much exaggerated ; this may have been caused partly from the

position assigned to the latter being that of two islands of the same

name in latitude 12° 12’ N. instead of the correct position of the town

itself. During my visit to Tenassertm, the sun was too vertical to

obtain a meridian altitude by artificial horizon, and the night was so

cloudy and unfavorable that I failed in obtaining the latitude by a star.

Captain Macrtrop however, whom I have reason to consider a good

observer, made it in 12° 6 N. and using that latitude I made the lon-

gitude by chronometer 35 miles east of Merguz, or in 99° 3’ east,

and by a sketch of the river it is 40 nautic or 46 statute miles from

the entrance.

Whatever may have been its former extent and importance, it is

now a very insignificant place, and I should think does not contain

more than 100 houses and 4 or 500 inhabitants: nor does it bear much

602

1030 The Mergui Coast-line and Islands. (Dee.

appearance of former consequence, there being only two or three small

pagodas, and the remains of an old brick outwork running along the

brow of a hill on the south side of the town. It produces but little for

export, but the Shans bring a quantity of elephants’ tusks and rhino-

ceros’ horns for sale, and occasionally rubies and other precious stones

may be procured but of inferior value; there is also said to be a con-

cealed trade in gold dust, which with other traffic is in the hands of the

Burmese and Chinese. During my visit here, the head-man of the

town was absent, and I could gain but little information.

The other rivers within this delta, and communicating with each

other, are small, and unfit for the general purposes of navigation, and

not being of any importance as leading to villages, it will be sufficient

merely to enumerate them. They are the “ Wayaung taung myit,” the

<< Thuhwa,” the “ Nayaza mytt,” “ Megyaung yethonk mytt,” “ Ka-

po mytt,” Kyauk phyu myit and the Kopha nein myit, (“ myit” means

river.)—The opening to the last named is spacious, and receives the

waters of Linya river or creek, which leads to a village of the same

name, situated by native accounts about 30 miles up. There is

here said to be an extensive country capable of being brought under

cultivation, sufficient for the support of a much larger population, than

the few Shans who inhabit it. I regretted much that I could not visit this

place, as a correct delineation of its position might show it to be very

near the coal fields of Dr. HELFER which are in lat. 11° 53’ N. and

long. 99° 30’ E.: and this leads me to doubt whether the locality in

question, is in the British or Siam territory : for Cin point of the charts

on the gulf of Scam side, is in lat. 12° 10’ N. and long. 100° 10’ E., or

only about 35 miles in a direct line from the coal site, whilst from the

town of Cin situated in a more southerly direction, where the gulf of

Siam is represented as having a deep course to the westward, it is only

23 miles. |

The entrance to Linya river is in lat. 11° 40’ N. and long. 98° 50’

E., and off the opening leading to it and to the “ Ko-pha nein myit,”

there is a spacious place for anchorage, to which vessels could have no

difficulty in proceeding, and which I have called Whale Bay, from

the circumstance of its being resorted to by numerous whales, and

it is the only part of the coast where I have seen them.

_ To the southward of Whale Bay, the features of the coast begin to

assume a different character ; the shore is high and rocky close to the

sea, with only occasional patches of mangrove in the vicinity of, or at

the entrances of small rivers; here also the inland navigation ceases;

for none of these streams so far as I could learn, have aby communi-

*""s “a '

1838.) The Mergui Coast-line and Islands. 1031

cation with each other, and the boats proceeding to the southward

go outside. ‘

In lat. 11° 28’ N. there is rather a large opening in appearance called

“ Ye-ngan Wa,” which is said to reach a long way into the interior ; it

however suddenly contracts its breadth, and does not lead to any village.

‘On a headland in lat. 11° 23’ N. stands “ Chadon,” or “ Sading,”

the only village which is situated on the sea coast; it is of recent

origin, having been established by the exertions of Mr. Commissioner

Marney, five or six years ago. This gentleman induced a Malay of some

consequence with his followers to settle here, in hopes that it might serve

to increase the population of the country, and bring it more extensively

under cultivation. How far the good intentions of Mr. Marney have

been realized is very questionable, for the Malays are far from being an

industrious or agricultural people, and the head-man of the village,

* Datoo Juan,” from his former mode of living was very unlikely to

be the instrument of much good. The site which the old chief has

selected for his village is ill chosen for agricultural pursuits, there being

but little land in its immediate vicinity that could be brought under

cultivation without much labor and expense, and the only advantage it

seems to possess is a commanding and overlooking position towards the

sea: it is however well adapted for fishing, by which the people princi-

pally subsist. Itis true, there is the appearance of much exertion

having been_made at the first settling of the place, by felling large

trees, and clearing away the ground, but the attempt has been given

up as hopeless or distasteful, and all is growing into jungle again,

except where the village itself is situated, which contains only about

50 houses and 200 inhabitants. ‘“* Daroo Juan” is a carpenter

by trade, and has built two or three boats of about 50 tons each,

which he has finished in a very good style: they are ostensibly for the

purpose of cruising amongst the islands, part of which he farms from

government, for the purpose of collecting edible birds-nests, bich de

mer, &c. and for taking the produce to Penang and other markets :

but that he may have other objects in building these fine boats, is not

unlikely, and that he still continues to have some turn for his old preda-

tory habits, when time and opportunity may offer, I am rather inclined

to suspect, and therefore during my employment in his neighbourhood I

made a point of cultivating a good understanding with him, by making

a few presents, which policy had its advantages, for the old man was

always friendly, and ready in supplying me with such stock as his vil-

lage afforded, and on one occasion in particular I should have been put

to much inconvenience, had it not been for a timely supply I received

from him,

1082 The Mergut Coast-line and Islands. (Dec.

Four miles to the southward of Sading is the entrance to Bokpur

creek leading to a village of the same name about seven or eight miles

up. Here there is an extensive field for cultivation, and the soil is

apparently rich, but the population (chiefly Shans), is extremely scanty,

and is scattered over some extent of country in little villages, which

together with those about Linya, may be estimated to contain about

one thousand inhabitants. The people describe Bokpur* as having been

thickly populated at one time, and the country very extensively culti-

vated, and the appearance in its vicinity rather corroborates. this :

it is much to be regretted that there is not a more industrious and

extensive population located here.

I.attempted to ascend a high hill overlooking Bokpur accompa-

nied by 20 or 30 Shans to cut a path, in order to obtain an extensive

view of the coast and islands, for the purpose of fixing its geographical

position more correctly, but it came on to rain in such torrents that I

was obliged to give it up. The mouth of Bokpur creek is dry at low

water for some distance seaward, and two or three miles from the en<

trance it divides into two branches, that to the southward leads to the

village, off which it dwindles to a stream only 10 yards wide, with

sufficient water for very small boats only. To the southward of Bokpur

creek about 10 miles is a very extensive group of small rocky islands,

most of which I have laid down, but what may be considered the coast

line within them, I was unable for want of time to complete. The survey

however is incomplete for a very small and unimportant space, about four

or five miles only, where the high land approaches so very near the sea,

that the streams, if any, only deserve the name of creeks. Proceeding on

to the southward, and between the parallels of 10° 20’ and 10° 30’ N. are

two small rivers which by information I obtained afterwards, are called

“‘ Chenanghan,” and “ Champoon:” the latter or southern one appeared

the largest, but this part of the coast having but few islands off it, and

being much exposed to the sea during the S. W. monsoon, I was pre-

vented doing more than fixing their entrances pretty correctly by means

of angles as I passed. The latter stream is, I imagine, the Sarannah

river of the old charts, up which I rather think there is a village called

* Champoon,” where tin is produced. If so it may deserve inquiry

whether there is here any communication with the river and place of

the same name on the gulf of Stam side. There is no decided ter-

mination of the principal range of mountains, running along the

Isthmus, into a low land, so as to favor such a conclusion, but when

it is considered how deceptive the appearances of a country are when

viewed from a distance it is impossible to say, until actual examination

* In the map this place is written Boping or Bokpaling.

1838.} The Mergut Coast-line and Islands. 1033

of the locality takes place, that, like the Zenasserim river, wind-

ing their course round the base of hills and through a mountainous

country, some of these streams may not so approximate to each

other, as to make communication with the gulf of Siam side, easier

and shorter in this part than in any other. The last and only

river which I have to notice is situated opposite the island of

St. Matthews, and which I consider to be the Sa-kopah or Pak-

Chan forming the southern limit of our territory. Its entrance is

in lat. 9° 58’ N. and, from the anchorage inside St. Matthews, it is

completely hid from view by a group of small islands in shore. The

extensive flat lying off the coast here, led me however to believe that

there was a large opening in its vicinity, and I proceeded to examine

the locality in the vessel’s boat, when after crossing the flat and round-

ing the group of islands spoken of, I was gratified by coming suddenly

upon the entrance to the river, which is a noble stream having 8 or 10

feet depth of water in it, and being about one anda half miles wide, for

seven or eight miles up, beyond which I had not the means of conti-

nuing my examination. The direction of the river thus far was about

N. N. E. or nearly parallel with the coast, and its course lay between

two ranges of hills of 5 or 600 feet elevation. 1am however rather

disposed to think that the entrance to it will be found to be intricate ;

but further and minute examination may prove the contrary. That

this river must be the one forming our boundary appears to me evident,

as there is no other answering the description: but unfortunately I

had no person on board who was acquainted with the locality, nor had I

any interpreter, having been disappointed in both, by not being able

to bring on a small tender and pilot I had engaged to accompany me,

owing to the violence of the weather. Under these circumstances, even

if it had come particularly within the object of my inquiry, it would

not have been prudent, in a small open boat, to have continued my

examination of the river up to the Siamese frontier town, which is said’

to be a place of some consequence, situated 30 or 40 miles up, nor

could I have done so, in all probability, without incurring great risk of

giving offence to the authorities by my intentions being misunderstood.

I did hope to gain some satisfactory information from boats, but al-

though we saw several, they viewed us with great suspicion, and evaded

every attempt we made to communicate with them. ‘Taking it for

granted that this is the river forming the boundary between the British

and Siamese territory, it is much further to the southward than the’

position generally assigned to it, and will account for the island and

harbour of St. Matthews being considered as. within our dominion.

1034 The Mergut Coast-line and Islands. (Dec.

The innumerable islands fronting this coast, and extending to the

distance of 70 miles from it, exhibit a great variety of picturesque and

wild scenery, the large ones rising in successive ranges of hills thickly

wooded to their tops, with trees of a rich and varied foliage, present a

most imposing and pleasing effect, whilst the small rocky ones, or

birds’ nest islands, with their rugged inaccessible sides, and irregular

fantastic outlines, form a most remarkable yet not disagreeable contrast ;

the beauty of the whole being very much heightened during the rains by

the numerous cascades and waterfalls that are interspersed amongst them.

Of the large islands forming a portion of the archipelago, those of

St. Matthews and King’s Island, situated near the two extremes, and

remarkable for possessing excellent harbours, have been noticed by Cap-

tain Ross, and their locality is described by him: both these islands are

mountainous, and of considerable elevation, being nearly 3000 feet

high, but rising with a quick ascent from the sea, they present but

little surface fit for cultivation.

Of the other large islands, those which have come more particularly

within my observation, and which seem deserving of any notice, are

Sellore, Domel, Kesseraing, and Sullivans Island, the slaty of

the Burmese.

The two first are much the same in general character and feature,

as King’s Island and St. Matthews, but not so elevated, and inside

both of these islands there is good anchorage for vessels, the one

under Sellore would be very convenient for communicating with Merguz

from the southward, or with Tenassertm bythe Thuh-wa. This I have

taken the liberty of calling “ Auckland” bay. Sellore is about fifteen

miles long by two to four in breadth and extends from latitude 11° 52

to 12° 7’ N.

Domel is situated more to the westward, between the parallels of

11° 25’ and 11° 50’ N. and is twenty-five miles long by four broad ; and

on the eastern side of three moderate-sized islands extending from the

north end of it, there is another safe anchorage (Morrison bay) which

might be resorted to if necessary, though not quite so convenient for

communicating with Mergut. “ Kesseraing” and “ Lampee” both merit

minute examination, which I was not enabled to give them. Off the latter,

there is said to be a pearl bank, and the former is spoken of by the Bur-

mese in high teris of praise, for the fertility of its soil : they have a tradi-

tion amongst them, of its having once been thickly populated, and it is

said that there is still to be seen in the interior the ruins of an old town.

I had no opportunity of ascertaining the truth of this, and although the

face of the island does not corroborate the assertion, there appears so

1838.} The Mergui Coast-line and Islands. 1035

far a probability of this island being superior to the others, that the

general features of it although mountainous in parts, are more undulating

and diversified in outline, and evidently present a greater proportion

of moderately elevated and level land than the others. Lampee is

eighteen miles long by seven or eight broad and extends from lat. 11° 21’

to 11° 49’ N., and inside of its south end is “ Whale Bay” before spoken

of ; there is however no ingress or egress by the north end of the island,

except to very small vessels, there being an extensive shallow flat be-

tween it and the main, caused by the meeting of the tides.

“« Lampee” has also a very fine anchorage on its eastern side, so easy

of access that the Lady Wiliam Bentinck surveying vessel suc-

ceeded in entering and cbtaining shelter after dark, and there lay

in perfect security during the continuance of some stormy weather

which she was caught in amongst the outer Islands in the month of

August. This island is ofa curiously curved shape the pearl bank being

situated somewhere on the south or concave side of it; the average

- breadth of the island is about two miles, the length thirty miles, and it is

situated between the parallels of 10° 40’ and 11° 0’ N.: but the chart

itself, will best exhibit the extent and limits of this and the other islands

both in latitude and longitude,

With the exception of one or two settlements near to Mergut, where

a few people have established themselves for the purpose of cultivating

gardens, and rearing mangosteens, dorians and other fruits, and for

fishing, there are no settled inhabitants on any of the islands ; but there

are roving tribes who pass from one island to another, living partly in

their boats, and in temporary sheds, which they erect with a few sticks

and leaves, on the little sandy beaches interspersed amongst the islands.

They appear unacquainted with the art of cultivation, and subsist chiefly

upon shellfish, turtle, and other productions indigenous to the islands,

and the tortoise or rather “turtle shell,” bich de mer, and other

articles which they collect, they dispose of to the best advantage, and

in barter, for a little rice and coarse cloth on their visits to Mergui and

other places. |

They are to be found chiefly amongst the outer islands during the

fine season, and on the setting in of the rains and fine weather, they

return to the inner ones, and for the right to frequent and live upon

the islands, I believe they pay a small tax to government, of one rupee

per head annually. The term chillone is generally applied to them,

but I have understood that there are three or four divisions or families

of them, known under different names, according to the part of the

archipelago, they confine themselves to : they are a harmless race, badly

6 P

1036 The Mergut Coast-line and Islands. (Dre.

clothed, miserable in appearance, and do not, I imagine, amount to

more than a thousand persons altogether: they are found to be ex-

tremely shy of strangers, and avoided us on all occasions.

Having been employed at a season unfavorable for making inquiry, or

gaining much information, and with little leisure left me from the more

immediate duties of the survey, for making any observations as to the

resources of the islands, their formation, natural productions, &c.

I can only point them out as appearing to possess a fine field for inter-

esting inquiry in the different departments of science. To the geolo-

gist in particular there is ample scope for research, and I have reason

to think, from specimens of rock that were collected containing rich

iron ore, that they will be found to be rich in mineral productions.

The same may be said of their botanical productions ; the face of the

larger and moderately-sized islands, having a very rich and variegated

foliage, and being covered with flowering shrubs and trees of large

dimension to the water’s edge, some of them may be found to be new

and valuable.

In the department of natural history are to be found on the large

islands (by native accounts), most of the wild animals common to the

main land; viz. the tiger, elephant, rhinoceros, wild cow, deer, &c.

The tiger is represented to be unusually large and fierce, when com-

pared with those on the continent, and Kesseraing is said to be much

infested by them. The “ Shan’’ huntsmen visit this and the other

large islands for the purpose of shooting elephants, which they are

very expert in tracking; and they have been so successful in their

excursions to Kesseraing, that I was told by a respectable native with

great gravity, that there was now only one solitary elephant of gigan-

tic size existing on the island, and of such consummate cunning that

it had evaded every attempt to capture it.

Of the birds there are several varieties of pigeons peculiar to the

islands ; also gulls, cranes, (“'Tucans” ofa large and beautiful plumage, ).

and various other description of the feathered tribe.

Some of the small rocky islands are much resorted to by a small

white gull. One of these islands I found covered with their eggs laid on

the hollows of the rock, and the birds sitting upon them: they showed

great alarm by their noise and hovering over head, and although I did

not unnecessarily disturb them, I found (on a subsequent visit I had

occasion to make, to correct a set of angles), that they had deserted

the island and their eggs !

The fish are of great variety and very plentiful ee the inner

islands, and on the flats fronting the main, the fishermen have fish weirs

1858. ] The Mergui Coast-line and Islands. 1037

‘and other contrivances which they erect, and these they visit annually

during the fine season, for the purpose of catching fish and oeying

them on the different small islands.

Beautiful varieties of mollusea and polypus also much abound amongst

the outer islands.

Mergui, or properly speaking —“* Myut Myo”—the principal town of

the Mergut province, is too well known to require any notice from me;

one of the objects of my survey, however, having been to ascertain the

approach to it from the southward, I may as well state that it is inac-

cessible to large vessels, owing to an extensive flat, in many parts dry at

low water, which the Chinese junks and other native craft have to cross

over at high water. We found the greatest rise and fall of tide never

to amount to so much as 18 feet, although it has been stated at 21 feet,

and it is high water on full and change days here, and throughout the

limits of the survey, between ten and eleven o'clock.

The climate at Mergut and amongst the islands seems to be very

good, and although much rain fell on this coast during the months of

June, July and August, there was a proportion of fine weather, (not-

withstanding the generally received opinion to the contrary,) equal to

what is experienced in India during the same season. The dorians and

mangosteen fruits, held in so much estimation by the natives, particularly

the former, which during the season are sent in great quantities to Ava

for the use of the Burman king, do not grow to the northward of Tavoy ;

and the mangosteen will scarcely thrive to the northward of Mergut.

Indeed in soil and climate, there appears to be so much affinity between

it and Penang, where these fruits are in great perfection, and where

nutmeg spices and coffee are produced, that it is very probable the

latter might be introduced and cultivated with success at Mergui, and

on many of the islands.

I regret that I have been able to give to this slketah little more

than nautical or geographical interest ; and in conclusion will merely

point out what seems to me an object of interesting inquiry to geogra-

phers, I mean the exact delineation of the coast-line on the gulf of

Siam side, between the parallels of 8° 0 and 12°0N. so as to exhibit

the breadth of the isthmus within these limits, and also to ascertain

how far the different streams on either side approach each other.

With intelligent officers from the Indian navy employed in the small

government vessels on the Zenasserim Provinces, and in the steamer

and other vessels under the Penang government, such a measure would

have the double effect of protecting the trade and performing the usual

‘duties expected of these vessels, and also of occasionally, when oppor-

6p 2

10388 On the genus Hexaprotodon. (Dec,

tunities offered, adding to our stock of geographical knowledge. It would

further possess the advantage of extending and keeping up a most

desirable local knowledge, not without benefit to government, amongst

the officers of a corps capable of rendering important service to the state,

if its sphere of usefulness were extended for general employment in India

instead of being confined to a subordinate presidency, which is like

having the British navy under the Irish government.

IV.—On the genus Hexaprotodon of Dr. FALCONER and Captain

_CautTitry. By J. McCLettanp, Assist. Surgeon, Bengal Service.

Dr. MacLozp, physician general, on return to Calcutta from his

tour of inspection, brought with him a small collection of the fossil

bones of mammalia from the Péujore valley, with the intention of

forwarding them to England; prior to doing this they were oblig-

ingly submitted to my inspection, but for this circumstance and the

desire of Dr. MacLorp that I should point out whatever might appear

most deserving of notice, I should not offer, on this occasion at least,

any remarks on a subject, of which there are already so many successful

and experienced cultivators in India.

Hexaprotodon is the name given by Dr. Fatconer and Captain

CauTLey to an unknown group nearly allied to the genus Hippopota-

mus, and with which we are only acquainted from the observations of those

gentlemen on fragments of skeletons which they discovered in the Siwalik

beds. Dr. MacLorp’s collection contained a very characteristic frag-

ment of one of these animals, which at once attracted my notice, and with-

out being acquainted at that time with the excellent memoir of the gen-

tlemen alluded to, though it is printed but not yet published in the Ist part,

XI1Xth volume of the Asiatic Researches, 1 pursued an inquiry into the

group as far as the materials in Dr. MAcLoen’s collection, as well as

that of Col. CoLvin in the Society’s museum, enabled me to go. After

this I had the gratification of finding the results to which I was led

corresponded nearly, and I may say perfectly in all essential particulars,

with the previous report of Dr. Fatconer and Captain CAUTLEY

already alluded to. On some points however I feel justified in forming

bolder conclusions especially regarding the affinities of the group, and the

number of species that belonged to it. With regard to the first part of

the subject it is necessary to refer to the Hippopotamus, one of those

genera whose remains are extensively dispersed throughout the superfi-

‘cial strata of the earth, though the habitat of the only existing specien

it : this, 5

Wert ae sat

1838.] On the genus Hexaprotodon, 1039

is confined to South Africa, but the remains of others are found in

Italy, France and England; so that its race may be said to have

become almost extinct, and perhaps in the course of a few ages the

existing species may like the Dodo, be numbered amongst those

animals that have disappeared from the earth in modern times,

Even since the time of the Greeks it appears to have become more

restricted in its distribution, as it is referred to in their writings as an

inhabitant of southern Egypt, where it is now unknown. The very

idea of an animal of colossal bulk, capable of concealing itself by day

beneath water which it quits only at night in search of pasture, is so

contrary to the ordinary character of beings of the present world, and so

opposite to the general economy of the living things that surround us,

while it accords with the traces of the times that have passed, that we

might infer from this circumstance alone, that the condition of the earth

is now less suited to such gigantic amphibia than formerly, even if more

direct evidence of this fact were wanting. |

The remains of the Hexaprotodons brought to light by Dr. Fatconer

and Captain CauTLey afford the characters of types still more aquatic,

and which from certain peculiarities of structure would appear to have

been hardly capable of extending further on land than the sandy or

muddy confines of their own element. Sefore entering on the peculi-

arities from which this conclusion is derived, I shall briefly refer to

what naturalists say of the habits of the existing hippopotamus.

The body is described as massive, without fur, the belly nearly

touching he ground, and the head of enormous size, terminated by a

strong thick muzzle, at the corners of which in the lower jaw two power-

ful canine teeth are placed, curved upwards with cutting edges often

formed behind by the detrition of corresponding teeth in the upper

jaw. Between these in front, there are four conical incisors in the lower

jaw, extending obliquely upwards and forward; the two innermost of

these are long and nearly as strong as the canine teeth, but the two

outer incisors are shorter and every way less developed. The lower jaw

is massive and strong, but much deeper under the molars than below

the incisors at the chin, the whole economy of these parts being admi-

rably adapted for cutting and tearing roots, and other fixed objects of a

similar nature, on which it is said to subsist.

This description applies not only to the existing species, but also to the

three fossil species discovered by Cuvier, who gives the characters of

the genus as follows: “ Incisors 7, canines + }:, cheek teeth 7: 27 = 40 ;”

but in the Hexaprotodons of FALconER and CauTLEy the incisors are

six below, and six above, a distinction of itself perfectly sufficient te

1040 On the genus Hexaprotodon. (Dec.

establish the sub-genus as a new group, of which, they describe two

species. In these animals the incisors are not only different in number

from those of Aippopotami, but are also more uniformly develop-

ed, and ‘are prolonged almost straight forward in the long axis

of the head, the general proportions of which, though considerably

less than those of the existing hippopotamus, are proportionably more

massive and ponderous, while the incisors on the contrary are

more slender, so much so as to preclude the supposition that they

could have been used either for digging up roots, or as an armas

ture in committing those violent depredations on dry land ascribed to

the hippopotamus. It is therefore probable, as has been observed, that

their habits were more aquatic. What proportion the head bore to the

body we have as yet no means of knowing, the vertebree and bones of

the extremities not being yet determined, but we may still attain a far-

ther insight into the characters of the Hexaprotodons by comparing such

fragments of their jaws as have been found with the corresponding

parts of the existing hippopotamus, and we find by this means that

although the length of the jaws from the alveolus of the incisors to the

last molar is, 94 inches in the latter, and from 113 to 18 inches in

several specimens of the former, yet that the thickness or depth of the

lower jaw at the symphysis is only four inches in the existing hippo-

potamus, while this measurement amounts to 54 inches in some of the

hexaprotodons. In the first the breadth of the jaw at the narrowest

part behind the canine teeth is five inches, and in one of the latter

species, six; thus indicating a weight and massiveness in the head of the

hexaprotodon which if attended with corresponding proportions in other

parts of the frame must have belonged to an animal almost too unwieldy

for locomotion on dry land, the hippopotamus itself from the shortness

of its limbs being barely capable of such a mode of progression. The

‘ponderous character of the jaws of the Hexaprotodons also implies a

proportionably powerful muscular system; and when we contrast such a

condition with the slender size of the incisors which are extended forward

like a grate of comparatively long delicate bars, we can conceive no other

object of such a structure than that of raking the Fuct and Confervoid

plants either from the surface of water or from sands or soft muddy

banks of rivers or lakes. Whether such will eventually prove to have

been the case or not, will depend on the success that may attend the

researches of zoologists in identifying other parts of the skeletons of

this interesting group, in addition to those fragments that have already

been identified by Dr. FALconer and Captain CauTLEy. At present

we can only be guided by the facts that are laid before us, and perhaps

1838.] On the genus Hexaprotodon. 104}

another argument may be adduced in support of the above view of the

habits of these animals from the cheek teeth being extended at shorter

and more regular intervals along the sides of the jaws to the canines, a

structure which we may suppose to be more essential to the use of a

soft food. As a share of Colonel CoLvin’s extensive collections, com-

prising I believe many specimens of these animals, has been presented

to the museum of the University of Edinburgh, we may expect the

subject to receive the attention which it deserves, but at present we

must I think, regard the type as more aquatic than that of the hippopo-

tamus.

Dr. Fatconer and Captain CAUTLEY conceive that the genus Hip-

popotamus of Linnaus was confined to Africa and Europe, and that its

place has been supplied in India by the Hexaprotodons: in this they are

probably correct, but there is one specimen (fig. 3.) in Col. CoLvin’s

collection which though very imperfect appears to render the ques-

tion at least somewhat doubtful ; the two inner incisors being indicated

by the remains of their fangs, and a single small outer incisor oc-

cupying the centre of the space between the large incisor on the left,

and the canine tooth, with a proper space on the opposite side, in which

however, all trace of a corresponding tooth is obliterated. A careful

examination of all the specimens in the museum, would also lead us to

suppose that there must have existed in India more species of the new

group than the two which Dr. FALconer and Captain CauTLEy have

described, and I should be disposed to think the specimens alluded

to tend to countenance the probability that four species existed,

although our materials are hardly to be considered satisfactory on this

point: from the importance of the subject it is desirable that the

contents of every museum, so far as they are capable of bearing upon

the question, should be known, so that the contents of one collection

might illustrate those in another, I will therefore attempt to describe the

separate specimens which I have examined. To show how far these

fragments differ among themselves as well as from the corresponding

parts of the existing hippopotamus (fig. 1.) and the principal species

of the same fossil found in Tuscany (fig. 2.) the upper view of the

lower jaws of those species are given for comparison.

Fig. 3. is the front portion of an imperfect lower jaw in Colonel

Co.vin’s collection ; it has one large incisor on either side of the mesial

line, with a small one in the intermediate space on the left side as in

the hippopotamus, so that a third could not have existed on that side ;

but all trace of a corresponding incisor between the canine on the

right side, and the inner incisor is obliterated, though the proper space

for one remains. ‘This appears to be the A, dissimtlis, Farc. Caut.

1042 On the genus Hexaprotodon. ({Dec.

Fig. 4 is the corresponding part of a specimen in Mr. Daw’s collec-

tion*. It is the Hexaprotodon Swvalensis, Fatc. Caut., and appears

to be the specimen figured by Duranp, t. 4, f. 2.5, As. Res. vol. xix.

The breadth of the muzzle at the insertion of the incisors is ten

inches, and of the jaw behind those teeth four inches, and the depth of

jaw is five inches, and the length from the front to the last molar eleven

inches. ‘The four first cheek teeth are conical, single and prominent ;

the last molar is also composed of four prominent points but little

worn, indicative of the youth of the individual, but still the other cha-

racters of the specimen are so well marked as to leave little doubt of

its characterising a distinct species remarkable for the narrowness of

the jaw behind the muzzle.

The incisors remain projecting nearly horizontally in front to the

extent of two inches, where they were broken (As. Res. t. 4, f. 2)

and may from this circumstance be presumed to have extended a consi-

derable distance farther in front than represented. They are all of the

same size, nearly cylindric, and about 3? of an inch or rather less in

diameter ; the enamel of the canine teeth is striated as in the hippo-

potamus and the posterior edge worn by detrition.

Fig. Sis the lower jaw of aspecimen in Colonel Cotvin’s collection,

it is more complete than any of the others, but on the left side the cheek

teeth are removed to their sockets, as well as the canine teeth and.

incisors. The height of this jaw is barely five inches and the breadth

of the muzzle ten and a half, the narrowest part of the jaw behind the

canine teeth five and a half, and the length from the front of the jaw to

the last molar is fourteen inches. The first cheek tooth alone seems to

present a single crown, the three next are double, and as the teeth are

perfect on the left side of an upper jaw in the same collection, which

seems to have belonged to an aged individual of the same species, we

can have no doubt as to the number of teeth proper to the group. In

this species there are seven cheek teeth, the second and third placed

in pairs. This appears to be the species indicated by Duranp, As.

Res. xix. p. 57, t. 4, f. 4.

Fig. 6 is the corresponding portion of the lower jaw of a specimen in

Dr. MacLosn’s collection ; it differs from the preceding species in the

breadth of the jaw which measures over the alveolus of the incisors

eleven and a half inches, and at the narrowest part behind the

canine teeth, six inches ; except in breadth behind the incisors (fig. 4)

corresponds nearly with this specimen, but the difference of breadth is

so remarkable that we must, I think, regard the two as having belonged

to separate species.

* The scale on which the figures are represented is one-fifth of natural size.

1838.) On the genus Hexaprotodon. 1043

On the right side the anterior cheek tooth is broken in the socket,

and the second tooth in the row presents two distinct crowns situated

close together, but in the left side in this specimen as well as in a frag-

ment of what is probably a corresponding species in the Asiatic Society,

the second cheek tooth presents a single large compressed crown ; the

three next teeth are placed close together, and are perfectly distinct from

each other, but from the manner in which dentition appears to take place

in these animals two points of the same tooth may be more or less dis=

tant from each other, so that a corresponding tooth in different individuals

may occasionally appear double or single according. to circumstances,

but allowing the utmost latitude to variations of this kind, still we must

regard the specimen in question from its breadth to characterise a dis-

tinct species ; more especially as we find the following fragment in the

Asiatic Society’s museum to corroborate all the essential peculiarities of

this species.

Fig.6b. The fragment of a gigantic individual*, which presents

a depth of six inches at the chin, with a breadth of more than

twelve inches, and corresponds with Dr. MacLorp’s specimen

fig. 6, so forcibly as not to be mistaken in the most minute

particular as having belonged to a larger individual of the same

species ; the second and third cheek teeth in this are still remaining

on the right side as well as the sockets and alveolus of the incisors and

canines. The importance of this specimen (of which I have given two

figures 6 b. and 6 c. the latter being the under side), consists in its

suggesting that a difference in the same species gives rise in these,

as in other animals, to no difference in form, and consequently

that a difference of form in the fragments of several species is to be

regarded as a specific distinction. Before I became acquainted with this

fact, and compared the specimens to which I am indebted for a know-

ledge of it, I was disposed to think the following specimen probably

belonged to a young Hex. Sivalensis.

Fig. 7 is the corresponding portion of the lower jaw of a small

specimen only seven anda half inches across the muzzle, and three and

a half inches in depth. The narrowest part of the jaw behind the

* On a shelf in the north-western corner of the museum, along with the cer-

vical vertebre, teeth, and other fragments of elephants and mastodons and nu-

merous broken tusks of hippopotami without labels, or any indications of the

place in which they were found, or who the donors were, so that we are left to

infer that they came from the Siwalik beds, though in the same side of the

apartment there are collections from Ava also without labels; these have

been destroyed by insects, which seem to have recently taken advantage of the

neglected state of this department of our museum,

6 Q

1044 On the genus Hexaprotodon. (Dec.

canine teeth is four inches in breadth, the whole being comparatively

flat and broad: the reverse of what belongs to the species of which I

supposed it might have been a young individual. The specimen is

however too imperfect to show any peculiarities of dentition, the sockets

of some of the teeth only remaining, and the left angle of the jaw being

broken so as to give the muzzle an unequal appearance.

It is not consistent perhaps with the most approved method of study-

ing nature, to lay very great stress on the peculiarities of any one organ

in different animals; but it is rare that more than a fragment of some

portion of the skeleton of fossil vertebrata is afforded for observation.

The development of horns, and even of some parts of the frontal bone,

as of the superciliary arches of the orbits, is liable to sexual and indi-

vidual peculiarities*, but I am aware of no such objections to the full-

est reliance on the lower jaw as a safe criterion for specific variations ;

for this purpose I have made considerable use of it in the arrangement

of fishes, and there is no reason why it might not be equally useful as a

criterion of species in other classes.

The two species described by Dr. FAnconzr and Captain Cautury

differ essentially in this, that the jaw of H. Sivalensis is broad at the

muzzle, and contracted more than the existing species over the penul-

timate false molar (Asiatic Researches, XIX. 47.) while that of H.

Dissimitis is very narrow at the symphysis, where a greater number

than four incisors does not appear to have existed. Hence fig. 4 in

the annexed plate, and figs. 1, 2, plate 1V. Asiatic Researches, XIX.

represent H. Stvalensis, while the imperfect fragment in Colonel Cot-

vin’s collection fig. 3, in the annexed plate, is a characteristic frag-

ment of H. Dissimilis of FALCONER and CAUTLEY.

But still we have fig. 4, pl. IV. (As. Res. XIX.) of Durawn, which

corresponds with a very perfect lower jaw in Colonel Cotvin’s col-

lection, from which my fig. 5, on the annexed plate was taken, and

regarding which Mr. Duranp justly observes (Op. Cit. pp. 57): “ It

presents a marked difference in the shape of the incisors which are

more elliptical than in the preceding varieties. ‘The exterior incisors

have a section not observable in any other specimen ; and are rela-

tively to the four centre incisors set lower than analogous incisors of

other varieties—may not this” he continues “ be considered a distinct

species ?” I am led to the conclusion after an examination of Colonel

CoLvin’s specimens and all others in our museum that it is, and pro-

* In one of Major Hay’s heads of the hippopotamus the arches of the orbits

ascend’ two inches above the most prominent part of the intervening nasal pro-

cess, and in the other only one inch.

1838.] On the genus Hexvaprotodon. 1045

pose to name it Hew. anisiperus, from anisos unequal and peras a line,

refering to the irregular form of the incisors in this, compared with

the other hexaprotodons.

I am also led to the conclusion as already stated, that Dr. Mac-

Lorp’s specimen fig. 6 affords a third species agreeing with H. Siva-

_lensis ia having a broad muzzle and the incisors in a straight line, but

differing from that species in the molar teeth being nearly parallel on

either side of the jaw, or less contracted behind the canine teeth, and the

general form of the jaw thicker and broader than any other member of

the group, and hence it may be named Hewxap. megagnathus, from

megas large and gnathos the jaw.

In addition to these the small specimen fig. 7 must, I think, be

regarded as afourth species, distinguished by its broad shallow muz-

zle, and though much contracted behind the incisors like H. Sivalensis,

still differing from that species in the flattened form of the jaw, on

which account it may be named Hewxap. platyrhynchus, from platus

flat, and rhynchus the snout.

In the only upper jaw of hexaprotodon in Colonel Cotvin’s

collection in the Asiatic Society’s museum; the cheek teeth on

the left side are all nearly perfect, and so much worn as to indicate

the advanced age of the individual to which it belonged. The

incisors are removed but their sockets are as distinctly marked on

both sides as could be wished. From the form of the muzzle it would

appear that the upper incisors were directed more abruptly downwards

than in the hippopotamus, they must consequently have been very

short as their growth would necessarily be interrupted by the lower

incisors ; they are also of rather smaller diameter than the latter, but

of equal size among themselves, and appear to have been intended for

‘grasping such substances as were collected on the lower range of teeth,

and with the assistance of the lips and tongue for drawing a soft

aliment into the mouth, rather than for tearing like the hippopo-

tamus. ‘This jaw appears to have belonged to the same species

as fig. 5, but to an individual a little larger. |

It is unnecessary to say that the intermixture of terrestrial and

aquatic forms entombed in the Stwalik hills, renders it impossible to

derive any conclusion as to the habits of an animal towards land or water

from its remains having been found in such a situation. The small col-

lection of Dr. MacLoep comprises, in addition to the fragments of the

jaws of a Hewaprotodon, the upper jaw of a Palgotherium, the frontal

bone and horns of a Bos, various fragments of elephants and the

scales or armour of a gigantic Gartal nearly allied to Lacerta gange-

6 Q 2

—

aa a .

See

OSI ILL LL

CORLL L

FEBRE Lf fj

ANCIENT PATERA found m Budukhshan ly D™ LORD

T. Black, Asiatic Lith Press. Caleutta.

1838.) Coins and relics from Bactria. 1047

comparatively slender scales remaining uninjured, though projecting

from the edges of the mass beyond the enveloping deposit of carbonate

of lime. Exact information of the circumstances under which fossils are

found, though a subject of the highest importance, very rarely receives

from collectors much attention, but as it is evident from these remarks

that beneath the spot on which the scales of the Garial were sealed,

that is, the spot on which they were found, its skeleton might be expect-

ed to lie, the locality may deserve further investigation.

V.—Coins and relics from Bactria.

It has been already announced in the pages of this Journal, that the

extensive collections of coins and other relics made by Mr. Masson,

by Sir ArexanpeR Burnes, and Dr. Lorp, were on their way to

Calcutta, and were likely to fall shortly under the examination of

the Editor. He felt it as a great compliment that was paid to

his efforts to restore the lost portions of Indian and Bactrian history

by means of the coins and inscriptions, still extant in the language

and with the superscriptions and dates of the rajas of those times,

that collectors in all parts of India were in the habit of submitting to

his inspection whatever they lighted upon as unusual, and sought his

reading and interpretation of the legends, emblems and inscriptions

which baffled the learning and ingenuity of the pandits and antiquaries

of the vicinity. As a consequence of the happy discoveries made by

him in this line, coins and transcripts of inscriptions came in from all

quarters, from Assam and Ava to Bokhara and Sindh, and from

Ceylon northward to Nepal. The possession of the rich store of mate-

rials thus accumulated gave facilities of comparison and collation

which were doubtless a main cause of his sucéess: but the study

and exertions required for the satisfaction of these numerous refer-

ences to his individual skill, although entered upon with a zeal partici-

pated only by those who have achieved much, and feel that there is

yet more within their reach which ought to be the result of their own

discoveries, were too severe for the climate of India, and the Editor’s

robust constitution sunk at last under the incessant labour and close

attention given to these favorite studies at the very moment when

the richest collections of inscriptions, coins, and relics, that had ever

been got together in India, were actually on their way to Calcutta as

materials for maturing the results he had achieved. The collections of

Mr. Masson were forwarded from Bombay in the John Adam which

reached Calcutta only in the course of the past December. There are

1048 Coins and relics from Bactria. (Dec.

of these coins from four to six thousand, besides the contents of several

topes, and casts of figures of Budh, with various other remains of the

period antecedent to the Muhammadan invasion of Bactria and

Afghanistan. The whole of this collection was by order of govern-

ment laid upon the table of the Asiatic Society at the meeting of

January 1839, but the members present felt that in the absence of

their late Secretary, and likewise of Captain Cunnincuam, Mr. V.

TreGear, and Colonel Stacey, there were no persons in Calcutta

to whom the examination, arrangement, and report upon the coins

and relics could be committed with confidence. They came therefore

to the unanimous resolution to recommend their being forwarded with-

out delay to England, where the Honorable Court would have the

opportunity of submitting them to the inspection of the late Secretary

of the Asiatic Society, jointly with Dr. Wixson the librarian at the

East India House, and so the ends of science and of antiquarian

research would be most effectually answered.

The care of this magnificent collection, which is large enough to

supply all the museums in Europe, has been kindly undertaken by Mr.

CRACROFT, a very zealous member of the Asiatic Society, and there is

ground for hoping that under his superintendence a catalogue may yet

be made before he takes his final departure for England. The articles

have come round in bags without any separate lists, and in one bag

there are about two thousand copper coins.

But independently of Mr. Masson’s collection, another numbered

by thousands has been brought to Calcutta by Dr. McLeop the In-

spector General of hospitals to H. M.’s forces in India. ‘This consists

partly of coins of.all metals, but there are also several seals and gems

of different stones cut with a great variety of emblems and devices.

All these are the property of Sir A. Burnes, and have arrived for

deposit and custody as well as for inspection; they are therefore still

available for the curious, and will continue so until Sir A. Burwes

shall send instructions as to their disposal. We cannot ourselves under-

take the particular examination of these relics so as to give the detailed

description they deserve. A selection from the coins had however

previously been made at Simla, and those deemed most curious being

forwarded by the dawk arrived fortunately before the departure of our |

Editor. Amongst them is that most curious coin of Dr. Lorp with

the head of EucraTipEs on one side, and of both his parents on the

other, a drawing of which was exhibited in plate No. XXVII. of this

volume. From the other selected coins thus transmitted a plate was

prepared by the Editor, which was intended to be illustrative of an article

1838.] Coins and relics from Bactria, 1049

he designed giving in our last October number. The plate remains,

and we attach it to this article, that the curious who have followed

our Editor to the length of his past researches may see the objects

which he deemed worthy of fresh illustration in the field of Indo-Bac-

trian numismatology. Ifthe Herefordshire, the ship in which he took

passage, had touched at Madras, or had put into Mauritius, or had met

a vessel at sea, we might have hoped for the comments promised on

this, as on other two plates which we also intend to give and shall

separately refer to. But the time approaches when the issue of the

last number of our series will be expected, and we can no longer defer

the publication, under the doubtful expectation of receiving the expected

paper from the Cape of Good Hope. Of the coins and gems there-

fore in Sir ALEXANDER Burwes’s collection we can at present make

no use, but we hold them in deposit for the examination of others and

to wait his further instructions. We must be content at present to give

the plate referred to, which it will be seen is numbered XXXII. together

with such brief reading of the names, as a Tyro of Indian numismatics |

might be expected with the aid of the alphabets to supply. The plate

is of Indo-Bactrian coins of date antecedent to the introduction of Gre-

cian art, with the Grecian alphabet, into the mints of that country.

The legends are in the ancient No. 1. character of the then universal

Pali language, with Bactrian characters in some instances on the

obverse or intermixed. The names and emblems on these coins are

well worth the study of the learned.

Along with Sir A. Burnzs’s coins Dr. McLeop brought to Calcutta

a very singular relic obtained by Dr. Lorp at Badakhshan, and which

is we believe destined for the British museum. The relic in question is

an ancient patera of silver, embossed in the interior in very high relief,

and representing, with all the usual adjuncts of classic mythology, the

procession of Baccuus. The god himself sits in a car drawn by two

harnessed females with a drinking cup in his hand. A fat infant Srve-

Nus stands in front, and there is a female figure kneeling on the after

corner of the car, which from its disproportionate size we imagine to

be the carved elbow of the seat on which the god reclines. There are

also two winged cupids in attendance, one flying with a wand in his

hand to which afellet is attached, the other end of which is held by the

infant SiLeNus ; and the other on the foreground behind the wheel

of the car, as if employed in pushing it on. The car is followed by a

dancing Hercu es distinguishable by the club and lion skin. The heads

of this figure and of the Baccuus are both wanting, owing probably

to their having been of gold or thought so, while the rest of the patera

1050 Coins and relics from Bactria. (Dec.

being only of silver gilt, has escaped similar violation, The gilding

however is mostly worn away from long use, and in’one part the side of

the cup is actually worn through. Independently of the circumstance

of the main figure being represented with a cup in hand, its identity with

the Grecian Baccuus, is proved by the vines circumpendent, and by the

figure of a tiger standing prominently out in the fore ground and drink-

ing-out of a wine jar.

This very singular relic being destined to leave the ‘country, we have

thought it necessary, besides giving in these pages a plate made from

an accurate drawing with a scale, to have a east prepared from it in tin,

so'that in case the original should be lost in transmission to Europe,

the facsimile may remain to give a complete idea of its form and exe<

cution. The ‘castis of course not equally sharp in its lines with the

chased original, but connoisseurs will know how to make exact _——

for that difference.

This patera is the property of Dr. Lorn, who is also the fortunate

owner of the double-headed» coin of Eucratipes, the original appa-

rently from which the plate of a similar coin is given in Dr. VincEntT’s

Periplus; but the double head is there represented as being on both sides

of the coin. With a liberality deserving of particular notice, both these

unique relics have been gratuitously appropriated by the finder, or are

intended to be so, in the manner deemed by him most. conducive to the

ends of science, Dr. Lorp not: desiring to retain them as isolated

trophies of his own good fortune in the field of research and discovery. |

I fear we must not look upon this piece of plate as affording evidence

of the state of the arts in Badakhshdn, where it was found, at any par~

ticular ewra. That it is of high antiquity is quite apparent from the

condition of the metal, as well:as from the design, but in the Periplus

of the Lrythrean Sea published amongst ARIAN’s works, it is distinctly

stated. that apyupéuara, 4. e. articles of silver plate, were a staple import

from the west, for exchange against the productions of India, At

Minnagarh upon the Indus, it is further stated by the author of that

treatise, that he himself presented to the raja gaptrima dpyupéuara, Valuia-

ble pieces of plate, in order to secure his favor, and the grant of certain

privileges of trade. There is- thus reason to beliéve that the -pa-

tera must have been brought from Greece or Asia Minor, and either

presented in like manner, or sold to sdéme sovereign of Bactria, by a

merchant desiring similar privileges of trade in that country. That

it has been in use for centuries is evident from the worn condition.

it now presents ; but for how many it was in use, and for how many it

lay treasured in royal or other repositories, is more than may now

be conjectured.

OO a i Vol. VIL PLXXXW

l/ndo-Bactrian Cotns

} WA y

ral ik ie ai

J) BIN (Ay

re Ore :

CTT ROMO ATHY a)

tia i a yal

Gs i a Mi |

an aN gl Sas iN

he hy, wi | my | NS y

Fn AY NN ‘| ; My,

\\ h ti Na y)| (G

i Ht i Dy }

rs ‘ MY : ly Ni mS "

l} Mig Y

ray y \ ' Lean

eo. nN

it.

: %

q ‘

Theis AA

— r

: : t , <= u

| apt Recline [igh ae’

pct Abe, Pa Ae esa tal adi ay

PRLS Bt ees eh en cba

3 : Hed ae

% apts ne ager,

Widen a: } it

°F

bead me

Rie

1838. | Coins and relics from Bactria. 1051

A drawing of this patera was made at Sim/éa by no common hand

several months ago, and it arrived and was exhibited at the Meeting of

the Asiatic Society, but somehow disappeared, so as to preclude an

earlier description of this relic being laid before the public. We have

now the original before us, and have examined it closely, to see if there

were any inscription, stamp or emblem, which might afford some clue to

the date and locality of the manufacture, but are compelled to be con-

tent with a mere description of its outward appearance, being unable to

hazard a conjecture as to either.

: Indo-Bactrian Coms.

Specification of coins in Plate XXXII. Vol. VII.

No. 1. Obv. Armed figure standing with a club or spear: no inscrip-

tion. Rev. Elephant with rider: Bactrian inscription RAJASA, rest

not decypherable.

No. 2. Obv. Woman and deer, with inscription not legible: [y em-

blem. Rev. Tree and mountain, with +, and = emblems.

No. 3. Obv. Man and bull, same emblem as No. 2, and MAHARAJASA

Manasuatasa in old Pali clearly legible, but the name to the left

baffles us. Rev. Same device and emblems as No. 2, and MaAHARAJASA

clearly legible in Bactrian at the bottom.

No. 4. Obv. Same device as No. 2, and same emblem, Rasna we

sASA MaGuHAaDATASA in old Pali. Rev. Same device and emblems

as No. 2, MAHARAJASA in Bactrian: the rest not legible.

No. 5. A larger coin, the same device on both sides as No. 3; Ob-

verse defaced; Rev. ManaragaSaA in Bactrian characters.

No. 6. Obv. Bull and ¥ emblem, no letters. Rev. Same emblems

as Nos. 2, 3, and 4, with addition of a wheel : very peculiar.

No. 7. Obv. Deer and man, with emblems E and Cy}: Rasna el

NANDASA in old Pali. Rev. Same as Nos. 2, 3, 4, &c.

No. 8. Obv. Deer and woman: Manaragsasa in Pali. Rev. Same

as No. 2, no inscription. :

No. 9. Obv. Deer and man, Kunanpnasya in P4li. Rev. Same as

No. 2.

No. 10, Same precisely, Pali inscription NanpAs& the last letter

being an initial A’ Wj.

Buddhist Satrap Cotns. )

No. 11. Obv. Horse caparisoned. Rev. Ragasa, in Bactrian, with

various marks.

No. 12. Obv. Horse. Rev. Standing figure. with bow: inscription

4n Pali,-SarBa TAPASA PATAMAPASA, Thamasp ? ie

6 R

1052 Ancient Hindu Coins from Jyonpur and Oojein. [DeEc.

No. 18. The same indistinct. |

No. 14. Obverse the same worn. Rev. Inscription in lines, TamA-

PASA legible in Pali.

No. 15. Nothing distinct.

No. 16. Obv. Horse’s tail and hind quarter. Rev. Figure standing

LaGa ‘MAPASA in Pali.

Nos. 17, 18, 19. Obv. Bull. Rev. Standing figure with inscription

RAJNAPADASA : centre one in Bactrian.

No. 20. Obv. Standing figure, Pali inscription, PaGHuoarasa.

Rev. Figure: no inscription.

No. 21. Nothing made out.

No. 22. Obv. Figure in speaking attitude. Rajna RAGHUNA‘M.

Nos. 23, 24, and 25, not decyphered. .

N. B. These latter are classified as of the Satrap group, first be-

cause of the title Raja or Maharaja not being found in any of them;

secondly, because of the names having so evidently an ancient Persian

aspect, and lastly, because of the horse emblem, which probably had its

origin in the circumstances which attended the accession of GusHTAsp,

Darius Hystaspes.

V1.—Ancient Hindu Coins from Jyonpur and Oojein.

Besides the coins of Bactria and Kdbul, which formed the subject of

the preceding article, and which carry back the numismatic records

of that country to times anterior to the Gvecian invasion, when it

formed a province of the dominions of the great king of Persia, and

even before that, when governed by its own, or by an Indian maharaja,

there have been found simultaneously in distant parts of India, other

similar records of the same periods. Mr. Vincent TreGEAR has been

so fortunate as to obtain, in the vicinity of Jyonpur, several coins of the

early period of the Devas and Dattas, with legends, plainly legible, in

the oldest form of Pdli character, and likewise more than one PuRusHaA

Datta, which it requires no great stretch of credulity to identify as

the coin of the great Porus himself, the antagonist of ALEXANDER.

These coins were transmitted to our Editor for more complete il-

lustration, with a brief notice by Mr. TREGEaR, whose readings have

much aided us in framing the annexed: descriptive list. From the

number thus transmitted a selection was made for the annexed plate,

which was not ready when our Editor left Calcutta. We think it due

however to our readers to insert the plate in the last number of this

series of his journal, for the same reason, that we in the preceding

. Jour. As. Soe. Vol. VIL. PULL.

sag sy nia LS. ; |

We rn

Gtials iA ri

7 i o = |

i at

Hi H Yt Pa).

ff Miva ;

dl He ut LN F

Harree Mohun Set

SMe ae

seh eee oe in

1888.] Ancient Hindu Coins from Jyonpur and Oojein. 1053

article gave the plate of Indo-Bactrian coins, and with the same im-

perfect notice of the legends and emblems.

Ancient Hindu Coins, Square. Plate, No. LX.

No. 1. Copper coin, Obv. Bull and mountain with double cross, as

in Indo-Bactrian coins, but with one tier less, thus A instead of &,

at top plainly legible in ancient Pali Doanave’vasa. Rev. Warrior

figure standing in centre : no inscription.

No. 2. Obv. Same bull device and inscription, but instead of the

two-tier mountain an. emblem thus = quasi, garden and tree. Rev.

Same as No. 1. :

No 3. Obv. Sitting elephant, trunk curled inward, inscription ac-

cording to TREGEAR, also DHUNADEVASA, but we read CHATUDEVASA

or CHATRADEVASA. Rev. Indistinct.

No. 4. Copper. Obv. Bull turned leftward ; inscription in ancient Pali

Va'supEvaSa. Rev. Curious circular device, snake at bottom, tree and

No. 5. Copper. Obv. Device, perhaps a fire-altar, but very peculiar.

Inscription in Pali DHaNapDeE’vAsa. Rev. Peculiar, indescribable.

No. 6. Copper. Obv. Elephant passing to left. Inscription Pali, as

in No. 3. Rev. Sitting figure in circle : no inscription traceable.

No. 7. Copper. Obv. Bull passing leftward: no inscription. Rev.

A circle, somewhat similar to No. 5 : nothing clear.

No. 9. Copper, broken. Obyv. Device not distinguishable ; inscrip-

tion, first letter effaced, Danasa the concluding letters clear. Rey.

Tree and garden with tf

No. 10. Inscription of a coin clearly legible Pa’PAPAGHoO,

No. 11. Ditto apparently KANEVA’SA

No. 12. Ditto Raja DHANADE’VASa.

Nos. 13 and 14, End of inscription, NAvasa.

Hindu Round Coins.

No. 8. Bull looking to right. Rev. Large letters at bottom Ne’vasa;

_emblems indistinct.

No. 15. Obv. PORUSHA DATASA in old P4li, round a stand-

ing figure, with double ¢risula or trident to the right.

No. 16. Female figure, with four P&li letters, AAOZ, not quite legi-

ble ; emblems 3 and °.. with o-

No. 17. Flower with old Pali letters not distinguishable.

No. 18. Standing figure with double trisul, or tree, to left, Pali

inscription round, not legible.

6 R 2

1054 Ancient Hindu Coins from Jyonpur and Oojein. — [Dze-

No. 19. Standing figure, segeainy acer cies or emblem distinguish-

able.

No. 20..Oby. Standing figure, tree toright: Rasna Ram Datasa

in Pali. Rey. Tree only distinguishable.

No. 21. Standing figure ; inscription latge in Pali characters,

R&sa Rama Datasa.

No. 22. Standing figure, RAMA Darasa lial legible : star, snake,

and other emblems. ;

No. 23. Standing figure, with bull, trisul, and star, Rasa Rama

Datasa plainly legible.

No. 24. Obv. Standing figure : bull and trisul, RasA Rama Da-

TASA. Rev. Trisul and other emblems. 3

No. 25. Standing figure, Ranu Rasasa.

No. 26. Standing figure, bull and snake : nothing legible.

No. 27. Broken, square, sitting bull: Wasatu Darasa.

No. 28. Obv. Bull passing to left: Suva Darasa. Rev. Not

distinguishable. 3 .

Nos. 29 and 30. Not clearly distinguishable, but. of similar type

to No. 25. Inseription in No. 30, Ranu Ragsasa.

Plate No. LXLI. is of coins which were dug up in Ooyein, and forward-

ed by Mr. Bax to Major Ousety of Sagur, by whom they were sent

toour Editor. Some of the same type and appearance in every respect

were about the same time obtained by Dr. Burns at Kaira, and will

be found represented in the same plate. There is no inscription of any

kind on any of these coins, excepting on No, 2 and No. 22, on which

the word Ujayina is plainly legible in well formed letters of the oldest

Pali character. All of them present the appearance of greater anti-

quity than can be elaimed by any other coins, which have hitherto been

described. The four rings ofe a tree and garden, and mountain seem

to be the distinguishing emblems, but as no description can equal the

representation given in the plate, we deem it quite unnecessary to

explain their appearance separately.

The coins from which the above plates have been prepared are still

in deposit with us, and we wish it to be understood that we hold them

at the disposal of the owners, who have only to indicate the manner in

which they desire to have them returned, and we shall make a point

of following their instructions in this respect.

‘ , 2h,

oh eal cs

ae :

22 ERE

LO4

S=A

EB SIN 20 £

: =

ANDY 35 AS

Kasinath Seudps

beni, Sih

Van! + ogeeks BM non ey oe

= these reveal + ony 9 > raat Pearse pera

eae rr j | |

tt A

ee BAe © rps

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. 1055

VII.—Ancient Inscriptions.

We have very little room in this number for the further prosecution

of the intention declared, of exhibiting in the pages of the Journal

transcripts of all the numerous inscriptions, of which copies and facsi-

miles have been transmitted to us. But that we may not fail altogether

to redeem the pledge thus given, we have selected some short ones.

I. Captain J. S. Burt of Engineers, now stationed at Ghazipur,

has been so fortunate as to discover a fallen pillar at Palladpur on the

banks of the Ganges in the Zaminea perguna, round the centre of

which is a short inscription in the No. 2 character. The shaft lies on

the ground, more than half buried, about six kos south of Ghazipur.

It is described by Captain Burr as a perfect cylinder of three feet

diameter, polished and rounded for a length of twenty-seven feet, and

with a rough base of nine feet, the whole length being thirty-six feet.

Round the centre is an inscription of a single perfect sloka, to read

which completely Captain B. was compelled to cause a trench to be

dug underneath the shaft of the column. The sloka as read and ex-

plained by KamavaxkAnra is as follows :

xe faye fase athe : ase cual ote: waaefaa oe:

ulfa-aaaue: fanfea freuaiat aaeteute: fafeq xq

fears aat SRITa: |

«‘ Great, victorious, of high renown, the promoter of the virtue of

Kshatris, always like the sons of Kunt1 (YupisutTuira, &e.), pro-

tector of many kings, for the honoring of his father’s memory practis-

ing many virtues, in his actions and conduct truly a fifth Léxpar

divinity.”

From the manner in which the sloka ends with “ L6KPAL,” it is sur-

mised that that must be the name of the sovereign in whose honor the

inscription was written, but there is no date or other means of identify-

ing it. The pillar is well worthy of the examination of the curious.

II. In closing this series of the journal, our acknowledgments are

due to the more than common zeal, with which Captain Burt has col-

lected, and the care with which he has made the facsimiles of a great

variety of inscriptions. One valuable one containing the names of several

new rajas was obtained by him from the vicinity of Chatarpur in

Bandelkhand, and we hoped to have been able, with the assistance of the

Rey. Mr. MALAN, to have given its translation in the past month; but

the failure of that gentleman’s eyes has compelled its transfer to other

hands, and it remains to enrich the new series of the journal.

1056 Ancient Inscriptions. (Dec.

III. Another facsimile taken by Captain Burt from a temple at

Oodeypur in February 1838, deserves also particular mention, not for its

substance, which is merely a grant of no great antiquity by a raja named

Punya Pat of Jogobatee, but because the date is given in three eras,

one of which is new. It shows the Sumbut year of VikKRAMADITYA

1116, corresponding with 981 of SartvAHANA, to have fallen in the year

446 of Oopyanirya, therefore the raja Oopyapitya, from whom pro-

bably Oodypur derives its name, lived in the year 670 of VIKRAMA-

piTyA or about 614A. D. This raja’s name is not in the chronolo-

gical tables of the Sesodee, or of any other dynasty. But the name of

Deva Dirya occurs, at about the period assigned for the zra in this

inscription, and they may be identical.

IV. The next inscription of which we shall furnish a translation, is

one often mentioned in the pages of this journal, viz. that of Bageshar

near Almora in the province of Kamaon. This inscription was copied

by Mr. Traiv the late commissioner, but the copies proving defectives

facsimiles were also obtained, from which the following transcript and

translation have been made.

There are still several hiatuses, and especially towards the close, where

the date will most probably have been. Failing this means of fixing

the period when the rajas named in this inscription lived, we have no-

thing but the appearance of the stone, and the character of the writing

to indicate its probable epoch. In the present instance these are uncer-

tain criteria, for the character, though ancient and in some respects

peculiar, does not correspond sufficiently with that of other inscriptions

or coins to afford a safe chronological guide. The inscription so far

as it has been decyphered is as follows :—

Cl Sa | Mala SSR Saarcefeu caqimat fara

UISsaTUg | TeTAncrafyeraygeneta fraanfatatATTS

YMAICTAEM WATaT ade TCAAsIcCHABAITAT

ULAACHMAAATAST AUTAG ALAC a Agleat Brarsaat

ciftal Tals: Laas aT: ULAT US: ULAAZILAABTET-

Sut: WeaMeATT SE GE cat gust sagaafa stare

at walfsaardtwarticafaarat sRaratsars WaT

quaatsiotasenicd aaciaara sfanfean walfira

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. 1057

TURAN wearfauaai fas FF sufefafer

faa wauafeat aeusiifarawifefsfere a Grae

mia: aaa safeataaufaated yveangieaeeiersaity-

CIAL a CHSCs a: TY TH! TMTAMACACT a] AET-

<A MAMUTTH AANA WAACACUTATSILM: ucla

HZICAHA CCS HALA ACM AMACIAST TY TA Tal-

STHMALALTIN AEledl Weleda] aqwlaaa: wHAAPAt

ULAILU: ULHAT CAA SCI HCITULa ATA yTACTA-

Sq: FUT TaNIafaantat aaa visas fesrssweaars

eta wuranfefafeaene warmdiutfeat FF

aa utauticat xfa areta factata: aw yaw Ws eRe:

sea ufauaay caareda arfsafiaqaciacrafed ufaae:

AUaSeaeN AE wefcfateaery w sfanfed averar

fangs: ga: ita qstaanfarg wars ae

aa aq aa | fauteara SISTT Yl TyTaR acy fa:

asnfaaiaai TAM we wae: WATTS

VB ataa wate? sufefateastarg-a tear

SyHLM fafatacisiaata ARTI AARAAT

fefaatnaasagntanrancctafaaaary: = «afafaac

aqefadic fanart femiaaraaageasrstysnStfataat

qawcaaaaaatayaasafacaanciacafcaryfatea

Miyeaaatraaafasraaetysa FATAATYSAS! VaTeTa

faainfiastia: fatiafeqaaararesare cache

smaraiiea te rcixiteraheratcarsiarin aferaan

mgiaamae: waaataaaar fasawat: waracuata

WisaieatacadufaaaaAITAITas daha: Aira

Sai TQ YA TMRTAaAcacralagled Wesel TAI

1058 Ancient Inscriptions. (Dec.

AMA! ULAASALULAILT! ULANZ LAA TLIMYLT Ie

Hae BATTUSs: TY TA: AUMATATACTSY YCIAAT TAT

ANH YLHASACICAALMUCANZTICAATICITaLIAITa

ACH AStITATCLT: AY TH! TT UTAWTACTS Aeleat

MAA] CHAUAA SacI LAA Ie aay ay Se aaMey aA}

aafaqecacaqawlagutaatastwaaagiaa afaaqsawcaat

Baa aaarazarara sada taageatatanteatata

aafafacaglia@AelyIMacuas: RAculyqayHe: Beata

ofaaifca suc a ag eRA SLT HALT AULA TATA ta

Zaza. saaadtufeas: wifeauta: waTsawEat TUT

Hcarat ¢ aattaattaant ufaat cata farat:

aqraasa =| - HMPACSaTa TATE «WCAe |

Translation by SAropA PRASHAD.

Blessing and salutation.—On the southern part of this beautiful

temple, the royal lineage is inscribed by learned persons.

Bow down at the foot of PARADEVA (the great god) placed at the

gate called Néintinanuti at Pavupidadata in the village of Raruyas

which (foot) destroys the nets of animals.

There was a raja named MasantTana Deva who wasa king of kings,

most venerable and wealthy. In his wife, the queen named SaJya-

NARANEVHA, who knew no one but her husband, was conceived a raja

who was alsoa king of kings, the richest, the most respected of his time,

worthy to be trusted and prosperous ; who set apart successively pro-

visions for the worship of PARAMESWARA (or the supreme Lord), and

caused several public roads to be constructed leading to Jayakdlabhikts,

and who provided fragrant substances, flowers, incense, lamps, and oint-

ments for BAGHRESwARA Deva (or the god of tigers), in Ambilapa-

lika (perhaps a forest) and who was the protector in battle: who

moreover gave fragrant substances, flowers, &c., and the village named

Sarneswara Grdma which his father had granted to the Vaishnavas

(or the followers of VisuNv’) for worship of the above mentioned god.

Who erected buildings on the side of the public roads.

As long as the sun and moon endure s0 long shall these his virtuous

deeds exist. :

1838.] Ancient Inscriptions. 1059

His son was KnArpara Deva the king of kings, respectable and

wealthy ; in his wife ——— who was much devoted to him was

born ADHIDHAJA; who was most wealthy, honorable and learned.

Of his queen Lapupya Devi’ who loved her husband dearly, wes

born Tri’BpHU’vVANA_ raja DEvA who was active, rich, honorable and

intelligent. He (Trtbhivana raja) gave two dronas of a fruitful

field named Naya in the village of Joyakulabhiktika to the above

god, and also ordered the fragrant substances, &c. produced in it, to be

employed in the worship of the same god.

It is also worthy to be known, that he was an intimate friend of the

son of KiraTa, (perhaps a hunter,) who gave two and a half dronas

land to the above mentioned god and to the god GAMBIYAPINDA.

Another son of A’pHIDHAJA gave one drona of land to the god

BAHARAKE, and moreover caused a grant ( Sdsanan) of two bigas of

lands to be engraved on a stone in the Samvat year 11. He also gave

one drona of land to the god BaGHRESWARA and fourteen parcels of

land to CHANDALNU’NDA Devi and he established a Prapa, (i. e.

trough or place where water is distributed,) in honor of the former.

All these tracts of land have been consecrated to the god BAGHRE-

swarA for his worship.

There was another raja named NuNVARATA who was possessed of

compassion, sincerity, truth, strength, good dispositions, heroism, mag-

nanimity, intellect, politeness, and good character, of a charming per-

son, adorned with morals and with several eminent qualities, active in

conquering by the force of his bow held in hand, and born for worship-

ping the lily feet of the owner of Nandana and Amardvaii, 1. e. INDRA,

who acquired fame by the force of his arms, through the favour of

Dursapui (or Siva) who wears Jotdjuto (or matted hairs), on his

head, tied with the pearls of his crown resembling a crescent, and illumi-

nated with the purest water of Ganga, which confers ten million beauties,

which Jotdjuto, or head of hair, robs other radiant substances of their

lustre by its many large, clear, and beautiful jewels, and bright kesara

flowers on which play the black snakes. He (the raja) subdued all

his enemies, and his colour was like gold, his fair body was always bent

down with respect for the worship of all gods, daityas, men, and

learned persons, and his fame is sung every where, as derived from the

performance of Yagyas.

His son Istovana Deva, born from the chief of his queens

Dasv’ Devi who loved him dearly, was a king of kings, rich, re-

spectable and learned. His son Latita Su’ra Deva was born of

his wife DHARA Devi, who was much devoted to him, who was also

1069 Mr. Kittoe’s tour in Orissa. (Dre.

a king of kings, wealthy, respected, intelligent, and in all respects a

hero. His son BHupDEVA DEVA was born of his wife LAya Drvi who

loved much her husband. He also was king of kings, a zealous wor-

shipper of BRAHMA, an enemy of BupHa SRAVANA, a lover of truth;

rich, beautiful, learned, continually engaged in religious observances,

and a person near whom Kati (the yuga) could not approach ; whose

eyes were beautiful as blue lilies and quick, the palm of whose hands re-

sembled young twigs, whose ears were frequently troubled by the sound

of the jewels of the crowns of rajas who bowed before him, and whose

great weapon destroyed darkness, whose feet resembled the colour of

gold, who granted pensions to his favorite attendants.

He the remainder defective.

N. B.—This inscription is supposed to be about 1500 years old, but,

as before stated, the date is conjectural. There are faults of grammar

in the Sanskrit, for which the Pandit who drafted the inscription is.

answerable.

VIIEL—Mr. Kirror’s tour in Orissa, continued from page 829 of

September, 1838.

On the following morning (the 16th March), I proceeded to Atturva

a large village on the banks of the Brahminee river, the greater part of

the way was through very dense jungle, with some small patches of

eultivation interspersed ; I met with only one village in which there

were many large herds of buffaloes, and other cattle ; cultivation is also

extensive. I here observed a method of. tilling the land quite novel to

me ; the fields are dug with long and heavy crowbars, each clod as it is

turned up, is bruised with the bar, and thus prepared for the seed

without using a plough ; indeed the stiff nature of the soil, would not.

admit of its being ploughed in the dry seasons. This practice I found to

prevail throughout the valley of the Brahminee, which tract is very

fertile.

The distance travelled this morning must have been nearly fifteen

miles, Nothing new presented itself at Atturva, where the bed of the

river is about half a mile wide, the water at this season occupying but

an eighth of that space: being very shallow it is only-navigable for.

small canoes.

17th March, Camp Nadurra.. This is a large village on the banks

of the river about thirteen miles from the last camp ; it may however be

much less in a direct line: my guides purposely took me by a very

difficult and circuitous. route, inland from the river along the banks of

which I ought to have travelled; such is the wiliness of the Ooreyahs,,

1838.) Mr. Kittoe’s tour in Orissa. 1061

their object being to decoy me from the site of the rich lands which I

should otherwise have seen ; my companion Mr. B. came by the latter

route, while I was completely at the mercy of my guides, having a pal«

kee for my only conveyance. I however walked the greater part of the

‘way, and passed several villages, all of which appeared to possess much

cattle ; the pasture land is very rich. cd

_ The chain of low and isolated hills to my left (south) came here near-

er to the river; the ground undulated considerably, and in many places

I met with extensive beds of shingle containing the debris of rocks, com-

mon in the more elevated mountain chains of Hingool, Talcher and

Rehrakhol, with which is mixed much jasper, Jaterite and iron stone

‘conglomerate.

A great variety of small fish were brought, among which I observed

some species quite new to me, of a couple of which I took drawings.

In the evening I was visited by an intelligent ascetic, from whom I

Jlearned much concerning the coal beds in Zalcher and its vicinity,

particularly one called Hingolai Thakooranee; indeed I am entirely

indebted to this individual for its discovery, no pains being spared to

mislead and deter me from going beyond Zalcher.

On the 18th I continued my march, and was again led by a round:

about path to a small hamlet on the river side called Kumlung, a short

distance beyond the village of Mungulpur : it is on the boundary line

between Talcher and Dekennal. |

The bed of the river here is about a furlong and a half wide, the

water flows under the opposite bank where there are granite rocks; it

is still, and very deep ; I found a great abundance of coal scattered

ever the sand, which removed the doubts I had hitherto entertained of

its existence in this neighbourhood.

I was informed that the navigation of the river from Yalcher to as

far as Kurgparsad is considered dangerous for large boats, which are

consequently not brought higher up than that place, where the first

rocks occur ; therefore should the coal fields ever be worked, it will be

necessary to remove these rocks, which might be done without much la-

bor or expense, there being few that I should consider really dangerous.

19th, Camp Talcher, Patna. Marched this morning at an early hour ;

the distance was about five miles over an undulating country with little

jungle but much high grass. There were few villages and the cultivation

very limited. The soil appears remarkably poor with much gravel mix-

ed with it; the sandstone rock predominates: there are however some

huge masses of granite protruding through the soil, having a very

eurious appearance,

6s 2

1062 Mr. Kittoe’s tour in Orissa. [Dre.

I encamped on the banks of the river, about halfa mile east of the

town and G'urh; the latter is on a sandstone rock washed by the river,

the former is contiguous to it on the south side, extending for half a -

mile or more. The Gurh is a stockade surrounded on three sides by

a deep ditch; within is a long street reaching from the southern wicket

to the chief entrance of the raja’s residence, the principal buildings of

which are of masonry. All the smaller out-houses, had been burned to

the ground, together with the granaries a few days previous to my

arrival.

The raja with his sons paid me a visit in the afternoon. I was very

agreeably surprised to find him a shrewd intelligent old man. He has

travelled over the greatest part of India, having performed pilgrimages

to Ramesseram near Ceylon, andto Budrinath in the Hymalayas. He

promised every assistance towards furthering the discovery of coal

fields. On his taking leave I presented him with a musical box with

which he was much delighted. ‘

In the evening I returned the raja’s visit; he shewed me his Gurh

which is in a very dilapidated state, as an excuse for which he said

that there was no occasion for strongholds, while he lived under Bri-

tish protection. He dwelt much on his poverty. After taking leave of

him, his sons accompanied me to a nullah about half a mile to the

westward, and called Bellavjooree, in the banks of which at about 400

yards from the river, seams of coal are apparent ; they appear to abut

on the sandstone rock, and are a very few feet below the undulating

surface, which is alternately clay and shingle. The seams vary in quality

and thickness, and are curved nearly parallel with the undulations of

the superstrata. I attempted to sink a shaft, but was prevented by

coming upon a hard rock of a bluish color containing mica, coal and

fossil plants. I blasted the rock, which proved twelve and a half feet

thick, beneath it was a stiff grey clay containing coarse sand and

mica.

The following day I again visited the coal beds, and lighted a large

fire, to the amusement of the natives who had never seen stones

ignited. .

The next morning I proceeded to the village of Mungulprasdd

about fifteen miles west of Zalcher, under which is a dry torrent called

the Sungurra, in the banks of which coal beds, averaging from five to

fifteen feet, are exposed to view alternately on either side for one or

two miles distance: there are several descriptions of coal, specimens of

all of which I brought away with me. |

From this spot I retraced my steps towards the plains, leaving Tal-

1838.] Mr. Rittoe’s tour in Orissa. 1063

cher several miles to my left, and passing through a part of the Ungool

territory : the third day, the 24th, I reached the village of Nagunna on

banks of the Brahminee, about two miles east of Vadurrva. There is a

very ancient temple here, dedicated to Nagnath: the name of the vil-

lage is a corruption of this title. There is an inscription round the lin-

gum placed within the temple which is very small. I was not permitted

to see it, and was informed that the greater part of it was obliterated.

From Nagunna I proceeded the following morning to Chundeepal, a

village surrounded with the richest cultivation, and close on the banks

of the river, on the alluvial deposits of which there is extensive

tobacco cultivation ; it supplies the markets of Cuttack, Budruck, and

Balasore.

My next march was to the large town of Kasseepur, likewise on the

banks of the river: the cultivation is equally good. Many merchants

reside here ; their trade is in timber, cotton, tobacco, oil seed, and other

products of the forests. I remained during the heat of the day at

this place, and in the evening proceeded by dawk towards Calcutta.

I arrived on the fourth day after having travelled no less than _— miles

from the 23rd of February to the 380th of March. I however feel am-

ply repaid for the fatigue endured, first, from having been enabled to

reinspect the Dhauli inscriptions; and, secondly, in having been so

fortunate as to discover such extensive fields of coal, above which iron

ore is equally plentiful. It is to be hoped that the day is not far dis-

tant when these valuable minerals may be turned to good account.

IX.— Meteorological Register.

1064

aqquyo"Avoal 41 (34usrT £8 | OF | 87 | 94 jerLorsny ‘es! o's4jsse* eous [erquys.A109/{t/au3rT) 69 | 09 | 19 48 | 9'L [6°L [9°89] 6 EL. OLE EL olo‘oellcy UE ue

("waem) *3[9] | [to “Ny ch | OF UL leer pt v°18 | PFS. ae | “HBP | Bl@ “8 G9 | Tg | 9G | E8 | T'oTle‘OT] ¢"gela‘Qsig‘oz 6°EL 286°63 Z00° te

: S ‘ ‘ ‘ ae ¢ * . . ¢ q 6 ‘E) *91'9°EZ Ta0° P60‘ 66

“0 T |°0 -u 95 | OF | Sh] 82 |6‘OT 8°ITL0'9S |608 here’ lol6 op 1}'0 *a}.82 | o£ | 29 | 06 | 6° |I‘9 Of09/ 8° FL) fs ‘

ofS [oa | FEE ETCH Pe GME AE | oe, (aS) | Bg eal ouees eta be: |

e . ¢ y (val * 6 * e q e : ;

read oO | ‘IMT £9 | £9 | 9b] €8 |2°6 \6°6 8°6L -yo1940°9'9| tlo “nt 29 | oz 66 | 8p IL Up 4/008: 920°08 a

s ° ® € € OT 7 z a€ € : : : ;

oug %0 3 (0) 99 09 lg #8 16 Ms 0°6 9 L‘°8l tL6 166 “Soy yur Ay9 ala ‘st 16 29 0 96 oF as 0‘29 cel ¢ LL see ae 966'62 ie

(‘wIeM) ‘oplet |ta <s £9 | Lo | Lb ¢8 |9‘6 |9°6 f0'9¢ leGz FeZe* | eo6. ; Px ae bob alt cay

‘ops |fr_s« (‘a *s Sb | 68 IZ |g ‘etg‘et ULE 606" 926° J weap | ra sh 94 | 29 | 19 68 | 12 Ge |8ios|zett Ll Ge hieeos an, [one

-1va]2 1 [oN Ov | OF | Ig | BL [el eEtys‘99 |6‘9/ foe6 pros | -y sud *a10]go|+0 iS} ¥8 | 04 | 99 | €6 | E'¢ conipeodieeeeleres abtargs eat 1 er

‘ums “a9 | 7 ‘a ef | bh | ec} 94 | L*trla*atpe’ Ze \e9/ 1668" 96° oR {Foyt TUL FZ | $9 | €9 | 88 | T'9 a 2 99/8°04 on oe; 610’ | gt

‘op aT [ta cu BP | GE | Zp] 69 | IHL O‘STES ‘Gr IT°cZ 1906" {116° ‘op Fo|"a "Uy 19 | PS | €9 | 18 £'8 |8° Lice Bre IOS ae a ie

“1v9]9 I |'@°ura sv | 2b | apy IL lO‘etitFT[06r 1o°GZ fOs6* (96° “twop, | Fol’ “UL T9 | €¢ | €9 | 198 | £°8 106 |Z*9c/z°0L/6°SL) L@ ie: 4

6 . e . € € ‘ ¢ € € ¢ cl

"MOT ‘Oo e “Mm “N €¢ 0¢ LL TI Lu 9G Vz 628° 106° Ba) A) sae 3 u 6¢ Ge lg 08 06 ¥'6 gSSie*oL OrSL!L‘eL €86 886" =

betes = it 2 Ss OF Ip 0¢ ol [raat 6°S1 0*S¢ eol gees 9cgé “wind 119 %0 pi es Lg €¢ €9 6L 16 16 D ocleetsleery mes ttnes hace ue

‘wap sdE MON OF | S€ | Ly | Lo locptiowtystes |e°92 Nees 098 ‘ses [FT)'# “NY 6S | Ge | Bo | 08 | 56 196 0 99 /a°eL foplgee fee as 166621 zl

9 ‘Jorea0 [#7 |*M *N UG | OF | 8h] SL |PSTL/T“otps‘os |o°8Z Hgog® |t6g* | -300A0 «To 14] “0 “N} 6S | Fs | gg OF | Tar ie Bee eee Sada ‘ne'geo‘os| TT

“ys ‘O2prormno| 7 [ta ‘U 89 | 29 | pe | os [5°98 Ips F009 leeZ 168° 906° § ‘Azey -Apjo] z\a ‘ual 68 | GZ | FZ | cgG Ly | My Gig9 LPL : G\E BE GLO" 820" aE

“Meapa. 1 ¥Z\"a“S] 19. | OF | 8e | Te | SOL s‘OL!g aie ae 9L'9 ee 88662 Q

‘ieaqa [fT fta vs GY | Ih | oh} FL lo‘etocergs'ts \o'62 Ires* | Z6g° : yest ‘

fo pines alto an 4 | 0c | 6b | 62 jocite*1tf3‘9¢ lees foze® ‘egy’ | -maz ‘op | qi-m "a 99 | 09 | 2a | +8 | T'8 Me Aaa pas, Sap aE ae 8

fyes'110'0p| g | *o 22 | Of | 9g | BL |port1tp0°6e |B ‘94 gags pee’ | sud “a1 {Fz\-m “ul oz | 29 | $9 | 09 Ed lgeg [2.08 6rS4|E'92 pied e168, 980" 9

‘op ‘App |g | ‘o 63 | Sh | 8b | Of (octtl6*t1p0%ce [0°22 Feeg® lene! ‘op 1°89 "Usd | £9 | OL | 98 EL 16L 13'S9 eehecdh opliess: ja66. | |

‘azey ‘op'ai| z |'a ¢s 6 | oF | Ig} 94 |o*Ti\o°arh0'9s |0‘ZZ fogg® ‘egy! ‘und ‘119°ATO| "ANN} 89 | 09 28 | 882 |L'8 gee orplee see Betton 2

‘may op | T fo «u 8h | gp eZ [L111 el L°8L Ippgs |e98° ‘op 3/*M “UA] 19 | Bg 18 | 001/66 paikenay oat ¢

aug umoa)fr |e +N 67 | oF of jeiteet] 2°82 fega‘ee 6066] -xeaqo | _g|-mnN| 6s | 0¢ 08 | Oty OL le*pdiered oe ee

ee Ses ee = om] tol tly ton | blo Pa wa Oy

2 PE pede Eee Gd Pel coe PEE Be aeSs| F| 8] 2 /e2 eF| eS

8 ® PS \E5/5/S E15 5 Br eslse] 3 E. Ls Oe Pigs? ® it BE |> Pte Baise y 5 4 bad tS Sun 2

B isifs| | S| 3°28) e > | 8s BI 4} Siem B/E5 2 ei ats Lee, eS

S, ‘pura | SiSt fl a) Ff] ¢! Bia | ; ee ae & pum [ti si Fis] BIB |S Be] BEB Bl

—— Se °

*uoOISua "Aq ‘ainjyedt J ‘ainssor : “UOISUa} |, ‘ : “OINssaq 5

“TOYO M paaiibee -awoishy | -aduay, bisaudeeniny TOES AA snoonby | AteworsiH eanymiadaraL suaydsouny}| 5

‘NW ‘d p UOOUIAIZY “H ‘V OT ‘uoouel0y

S68] “laqueaaa(y fo y]Uo ay? sof ‘vj4naJvQ “eQ Avssp ay] yn day ‘wagsipoay 199tboj 0L0a,a pT

INDEX.

AntTiocnus the great, discovery

of name of,

Arion, Species Hy... 66s. cwewe

Asiatic Society, proceedings of, 87,

167, 283, 364, 456, 567, 663, 742,

829, 915, Rdetiake) a)-s/aielieis> ehuselerekevalel/eie

Bactria, coins and relics of, :

Batten, J. H., visit to the. Niti

pass, by,.

Benson, W. H., on land and fresh

water shells,......

on the affinities ‘of

eoeoreeeveeees eo cone

a MN eerie oe Wh 55200 ores arererene

BuakeE, Capt. R. N, +, on the Illa-

noon pirates, oFialase (e's 6 « ies

Botanico-agricultural account _ of

the Sikh States, ....

Brine, heat observed in, .. .....

, Spontaneous heating of, ..

Brown, Capt. W., on temple at

Hissar, ea cae bo BOCs

Buddhism, different systems of,

Bukhara, weights, measures and

coins of, . Bele aidiniecs

BuRNEs, Capt. A., on ‘the Reg-

PONE pia» aa iaguynitas) pia Wi sem oinienin =

———,, on the Siah-

EE, SPs ait juye-w Sin: apeilaje, duareve 10°

—_——- ——,on ten speci-

BOGS OF COB (odo rr stew ad sc cawene

Burt, Capt.T. S. , inscriptions from

the Sanchi tope, .. ian bik

et Delhi iron

eee ee ee

Cabul, weights, measures and coins

of,

Gaoutchouc tree, report (1) eae Oe

Caterpillar from New Zealand,....

CauTLey, Capt. P. T., on fossil

Seireiic, 2.20. wees

Chach, expedition of, eae ahs eergis :

Coal level in the Indian fields, ....

IR RM ich s x, Ui mavailaeka step win ae

——, discovered in the Tenasserim

provinces, ....

—., Bidjeegurh,........

——, ten specimens from Capt.

CES eck cuivg nec:

— beds of Assam, ........

of Sylhet,....

OF ESCHAT Sao, cinders, uincm o

Cochinchina, geography of, ......

Coins of Cabul and Bukhara,.....

and relics of Bactria,......

ancient Hindu, from Jyon-

SE BAD OCI as 5 o1e aos bs swears

Cooch Behar, history of, ........

Copper mines of Kamaon, seccw-es

evoeeere eosee

Page

Csoma, A., on Buddhism, ........

, on works of Thibet, ..

Cyprinidz, six new species of,....

Daud Patras, origin of,

DRUMMOND, Capt. H., on cope

mines of Kamaon, cates a

Durga, sketch of the temple tay ii

EpGEworTH, M. P., botanico-agri-

cultural account ofthe Sikh States,

Evans, Dr. G., on a species of

Asters Betsit ters SARs ee a’

, on the New Zealand cater-

pillainy seihene ee oft. no. aakle

Everest, Rev. R., on the revolu-

tioniof, the, Seasons;.). ... <2 5%...

Galathea, affinities of,

Geography of the Kasia mountains,

of part of the Mergui

province, ..... '

Giraffe, fossil traces ahs ba Suave

Girnar, inscription from, .. ois

Gold washings s.,.0-5'<anmssayertece 621,

GRIFFITH, W., on caoutchouc tree,

GuBBINS, C.,on Salumba salt,....

HAMMER, J. Von, a translation

from the Mohit, by,.. motets

Hannay, Capt. 8. ‘Oh, ay ‘on the

Moa Morah sect, ee ae

HELFER, Dr., on Tenassepion coal,

, on animal productions of

the Tenasserim provinces,

Hexaprotodon genus of Hippopo-

tamus,

Hissar, ancient temple at,

Hopason, B. H., on the pheasant

from Thibet, .-.....

Hurricane of the 8th April, 1838,..

Hutton, Lt. T., on the Himala-

yan Vulture eagle, ..

-, on land and fresh water

SHREW Sine vines y se 0s

Indo-Chinese languages,..........

Inscription from Goruckpore, ....

from Bakerganj,. ....

from. Iskardo,,! 5'x).5:..

———_—— 0n Jain images, ......

on Girnar rock, 219,

on Arracan bell, ......

—_————, Girnar, and Dhauli, ..

from Aswastama,......

on Brahmeswara slab,

from Sanchi tope, ....

on Delhi Iron pillar,

on Tamba Patra,... ..

near the Temple of Ru-

dradeva at Warangal,

on Tamba Patras from

BUTE 0000.05, vcu.conre sans e eGR,

eoeeceeo ee ee

e@e@eeeeeene

Page

142

147

941

1066 Index.

Page Page

Inscription, ancient, 1055 PosTans, Lieut. W., expedition of

Jajipur, ruins and pillar at, 153, 200

JENKINS, Major F., history of

Gooch Behar, (hyj.o... 6 060s 3 ee 1

Kaira, Tamba-patra from, eoccceve 966

Kala Bagh, account of,

KitTor, Lieut. M. , journal of, 53, 200

——— ee section of Hill

in Cuttack,. : 152

; "illustrations of Cut-

tack sculpture, ........ 25.3% 660

, tour in Orissa by, 679

- ; continued, :

;ona temple to Dur-

ga at Badeswar,. ...... 828

rd , on the architecture

of the Temple of Somnath,..... - 887

Languages of Asia, ..........0006. 707

LEECH, Lieut. R., on the Brahui-

ky, the Balochky| and the Punjabi

languages, 538, 608, 711, . ... 780

Liston, D., on the antiquities of

Zillah Goruckpore, ..... 33

Lioyp, Capt. R., on the geography

of the Mergui province, ove eea'es

Lorp, P. B., on the Koh-i- Daman,

the Ghorband mines, and Hindu

Kush, Ji didideal wha aaidieieta §21

Low, Capt. a , journal of a mission

to the raja of Ligaps.wigeriiee 583

Mackenzie manuscripts, 105, 173,

Bl, witless spa etletiste 469

McCLELLAND, J. ., on the level of

Indian coal fields; . eae 65

——_—— —__———-, on the geology of

the Kasya mountains,........-. 69°

———-, on six new spe-

cies of Cyprinide,..........+-- - 941

——-, on the "genus

Hexaprotodon, ....

Mergui province, geography of, ..

Meteorological register of Cath-

PHANG Us: «tes. ree dese a6 a) °8S

» of Darjiling, 84

—_—_—_-——-, of Calcut-

ta, 92, 172, 286, 370, 468, 582,

1038

1027

670, 750, 838, 918, wae odes es A0GG

Moa Morab sect, ....... 671

Monwun La’, ‘account hat ‘Kélé

Bagh, BY, +o sac0c595 0366 s255,05 25

—-~—-, origin of the Daud

Patrass Byes kita Fe cain PEG 2. BPoe 27

Mortality, tables of, Stetes ees sc OLS

—-—— in Calcutta,... ....... . 888

Morton, Rev. W., on the Indo-

Chinese languages, ............ 56

Navigation, translation of a Tur-

kish work on, ...... -- Sadec wie por

Niti pass stdedsetedte teense SLO

OSBORNE, G., on coal fields at Bid-

jeegurh, ......0.-. eseslessecvss Gad

Pali Buddhistical rie 636, 789,

G19, sssasrdel.s ee tert 991

PEARSON, J. T, on hig 4 of

TOnASSEMG ers elii cc ceesee” SH

Pheasant from Thibet, Site teaae ee ee

Pirates of Illanoon,.............. 978

Population in Calcutta, .......... 888

Chach, Dy, ..%n2velse . n+ «Pee ee ae

,on temple at Ba-

drasir and ruins of Badranagri,.. 431

ae , journey to Girnar, 865

PRINSEP, J., on Goruckpore \in-

SCYIPtiON,.. .. ese ceeeesceeecsee 36

-, on coppe from

ee ee

Backergunj, erates i eieieer 40

—___-——,, on Jain ‘image in-'

scription,......- doce seee cers 51

; On discovery of the

name of Antiochus the Great, .. 156

, on Indian coal, .... 197

, on the edicts of Pi-

219

, on Gir nar and Dhauli

inscriptions, eevee ceeceee. 334

, on rupography, tees 414

, on Aswastama in-

SCFIPHOW, i, oP. so sie Pees eee 434

—_—— , on Brahmeswara in-

scription.. see ceeccee OST

—_——_—-, ‘on Sanchi " tope in- :

Scription) co. <6. ete ees tie 562

_ , on discovery of Bac-

trian-alphabet,:.. 2.2.0. Jecebe 636

, on Bates medal- ruling

machine, .......... 655

—_——_——__-——-, on the Compass Star, 774

—_——_—__- ——., H. T., table of mor-

tality, by; ...ccccccccccece cose 818

,G. A.,, ‘on “heat in

masses of brine,..... oot eee w Bes 207

——, spontaneous heating

of brine,. .. Tits tateke 1014

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,

see As. Soc.

Salt, Salumba, manufacture of, .. 363

Seasons, revolution of, .......e402 192

Siah-pohsis, seen bs cseees G20

Sindh, description of, .....-seeee. 297

Somnath, NOte ON,* 2c\ee'eesee'eee se OOS

Tamba- -patra from Kaira, ....-.-. 966

TAYLOR, Rev. W., on Mackenzie

manuscripts, 105, 173, 371,..-.-. 469

Tenasserim, Zoology of,.......++- 357

, animal productions of, 855

Tibet, works on, ...seeeeeeeeree - 147

Translation of Goruckpore inscrip-

TION, 625s Foes oe ee wen ve 2 37

of Iskardo inscription, 39

of copperplate from Ba-

kergun], ..ccseceece sereceees ~ 47

of Jainimage inscriptions, 51

—— of ae inscrip-

tion,.. : rane Stare wa 287

— ee a . Tamba- -patra from

the Shajulpur Pergunna,...... =. Gee

— of the Mohit, ..... see LO

See Inscriptions.

Turnour, G., Pali eT Oe

annals, 686, 789, nee ope sw Maton tens

Vulture eagle, 2 oS Waser «ate etter

WILKINSON, L., on “copper- -plate

Sane Sri e eles oc ete ee sne ws 736

WILLIAMs, S. W., on Asiatic lan-

ZUALEB, cocevvcescevavessecrse 707